Renesas HD6437045F28 Renesas 32-bit single-chip risc microprocessor superh risc engine family/sh7040 series(cpu core sh-2) Datasheet

The revision list can be viewed directly by
clicking the title page.
The revision list summarizes the locations of
revisions and additions. Details should always
be checked by referring to the relevant text.
32
SH7040, SH7041, SH7042,
SH7043, SH7044, SH7055 Group
Hardware Manual
Renesas 32-Bit Single-Chip RISC Microprocessor
SuperH RISC engine Family/SH7040 Series
(CPU Core SH-2)
Rev.6.00
2003.5.26
Renesas 32-Bit Single-Chip RISC
Microprocessor
SuperH RISC engine Family/
SH7040 Series (CPU Core SH-2)
SH7040, SH7041, SH7042,
SH7043, SH7044, SH7055
Group
Hardware Manual
REJ09B0044-0600O
Cautions
Keep safety first in your circuit designs!
1.
Renesas Technology Corporation puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but
there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or
property damage.
Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement
of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap.
Notes regarding these materials
1.
These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corporation
product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any
other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corporation or a third party.
2.
Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any third-party's rights,
originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained in
these materials.
3.
All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and algorithms represents
information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by Renesas Technology
Corporation without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact
Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor for the latest product
information before purchasing a product listed herein.
The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising from these inaccuracies
or errors.
Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corporation by various means, including the
Renesas Technology Corporation Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com).
4.
When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs, and
algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the
information and products. Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss
resulting from the information contained herein.
5.
Renesas Technology Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used
under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an
authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any
specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater
use.
6.
The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these
materials.
7.
If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a license
from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination.
Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the country of destination is
prohibited.
8.
Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation for further details on these materials or the products contained therein.
Preface
The SH7040 Series (SH7040, SH7041, SH7042, SH7043, SH7044, SH7045) single-chip RISC
(Reduced Instruction Set Computer) microprocessors integrate a Renesas Technology-original
RISC CPU core with peripheral functions required for system configuration.
The CPU has a RISC-type instruction set. Most instructions can be executed in one clock cycle,
which greatly improves instruction execution speed. In addition, the 32-bit internal-bus
architecture enhances data processing power. With this CPU, it has become possible to assemble
low cost, high performance/high-functioning systems, even for applications that were previously
impossible with microprocessors, such as real-time control, which demands high speeds. In
particular, the SH7040 series has a 1-kbyte on-chip cache, which allows an improvement in CPU
performance during external memory access.
In addition, the SH7040 series includes on-chip peripheral functions necessary for system
configuration, such as large-capacity ROM and RAM, timers, a serial communication interface
(SCI), an A/D converter, an interrupt controller, and I/O ports. Memory or peripheral LSIs can be
connected efficiently with an external memory access support function. This greatly reduces
system cost.
There are versions of on-chip ROM: mask ROM, PROM, and flash memory. The flash memory
can be programmed with a programmer that supports SH7040 series programming, and can also
be programmed and erased by software.
This hardware manual describes the SH7040 series hardware. Refer to the programming manual
for a detailed description of the instruction set.
Related Manual
SH7040 series instructions
SH-1/SH-2/SH-DSP Programming Manual
Please consult your Renesas Technology sales representative for details for development
environment system.
List of Items Revised or Added for This Version
Section
Page
1.1.1 SH7040 Series 7,
Features
9
Description
Type
A/D
Mask
On-chip External Accuracy
Bus Width (5Vversion) Package
Abbreviation Version ROM
ZTAT
SH7042
Notes on the
SH7040 Series
Specifications
SH7042A
Frequency Voltage Type Name
ROM
Electrical
Characteristics
128 kB
16 bits
±15LSB
QFP2020-112 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(High-Speed)
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6477042F28
HD6477042VF16
See “128 kB
PROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
A mask 128 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
16 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
TQFP1414-120
QFP2020-112Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
3.3 V
HD6477042AF28
HD6477042AVF16
HD6477042AVX16
See “128 kB
PROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
5V
3.3 V
HD6477042ACF28
HD6477042AVCF16
128 kB
32 bits
±15LSB
QFP2020-144 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(High-Speed)
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6477043F28
HD6477043VF16
See “128 kB
PROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
A mask 128 kB
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
QFP2020-144Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6477043AF28
HD6477043AVF16
See “128 kB
PROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
5V
3.3 V
HD6477043ACF28
HD6477043AVCF16
SH7043
SH7043A
Notes on the SH7040 Series Specifications
Operating
Temp
FLASH SH7044F
A mask 256 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
5V
HD64F7044F28
See “256 kB Flash See “Electrical
Memory”
Characteristics”
SH7045F
A mask 256 kB
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
5V
HD64F7045F28
See “256 kB Flash See “Electrical
Memory”
Characteristics”
SH7040A
A mask 64 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
16 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
TQFP1414-120
QFP2020-112Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
3.3 V
HD6437040AF28
HD6437040AVF16
HD6437040AVX16
See “64 kB Mask
ROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
5V
3.3 V
HD6437040ACF28
HD6437040AVCF16
SH7041A
A mask 64 kB
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
QFP2020-144Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6437041AF28
HD6437041AVF16
See “64 kB Mask
ROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
5V
3.3 V
HD6437041ACF28
HD6437041AVCF16
MASK
128 kB
16 bits
±15LSB
QFP2020-112 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(High-Speed)
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6437042F28
HD6437042VF16
See “128 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
A mask 128 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
TQFP1414-120
16 MHz
QFP2020-112Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
3.3 V
HD6437042AF28
HD6437042AVF16
HD6437042AVX16
See “128 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
5V
3.3 V
HD6437042ACF28
HD6437042AVCF16
128 kB
32 bits
±15LSB
QFP2020-144 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(High-Speed)
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6437043F28
HD6437043VF16
See “128 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
A mask 128 kB
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
QFP2020-144Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6437043AF28
HD6437043AVF16
See “128 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
5V
3.3 V
HD6437043ACF28
HD6437043AVCF16
SH7042
SH7042A
SH7043
SH7043A
ROM
less
SH7044
A mask 256 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
5V
HD6437044F28
See “256 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
SH7045
A mask 256 kB
32bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
5V
HD6437045F28
See “256 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
SH7040A
A mask
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112 –20°C to 75°C
(Mid-Speed)
TQFP1414-120
QFP2020-112Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
16 MHz
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
3.3 V
5V
3.3 V
HD6417040AF28
HD6417040AVF16
HD6417040AVX16
HD6417040ACF28
HD6417040AVCF16
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
SH7041A
A mask
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144 –20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
QFP2020-144Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6417041AF28
HD6417041AVF16
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
5V
3.3 V
HD6417041ACF28
HD6417041AVCF16
Note: Package with Copper used as the lead material.
1.4 The F-ZTAT
Version Onboard
Programming
42
Notes: For transferring between user mode and user program mode,
proceed while CPU is not programming or erasing the flash
memory.
* RAM emulation permitted
Figure 1.6 Condition
Transfer for Flash
Memory
2.4 Instruction Set
by Classification
Note amended
70
Table amended
BF/S label
Table 2.16 Branch
Instructions
10001111dddddddd
4.2.3 Notes on
Board Design
—
Deleted
4.5 Usage Notes
83 to
85
Newly added
11.1.4 Register
Configuration
218
Note *5 deleted
Table 11.2 DMAC
Registers
Delayed branch, if T = 0, disp × 2 +
PC → PC; if T = 1, nop
2/1 *
—
Section
Page
Description
11.2.3 DMA
Transfer Count
Registers 0–3
(DMATCR0–
DMATCR3)
220
Description amended
11.2.4 DMA
Channel Control
Registers 0–3
(CHCR0–CHCR3)
221
The data for the upper 8 bits of a DMATCR is 0
Description amended
• Bits 31–21—Reserved bits: Data are 0
value always be 0.
224
226
Description amended
233
337
Figure 12.55
Example of Output
Phase Switching by
External Input (1)
Figure amended
Figure amended
TCLKC
Figure 12.23
Cascade Connection
Operation Example
(Phase Counting
Mode)
12.4.9
Complementary
PWM Mode
when read. The write
Channel 0 is given the lowest
priority.
Figure 11.3 Round
Robin Mode
12.4.5 Cascade
Connection Mode
when read. The write
Description amended
• Bits 7–3—Reserved bits: Data are 0
value always be 0.
11.3.3 Channel
Priority
when read. The write value
• Bits 15–10—Reserved bits: Data are 0
value always be 0.
227
when read. The write
Description amended
• Bit 7—Reserved bits: Data is 0
always be 0.
11.2.5 DMAC
Operation Register
(DMAOR)
when read.
TCLKD
373
Figure amended
When BDC = 1, N = 0, P = 0, FB = 0, output active level = high
Section
Page
Description
12.9.2 Block
Diagram
444
Note added
TIOC3B*
Figure 12.125 POE
Block Diagram
TIOC3D*
TIOC4A*
TIOC4C*
TIOC4B*
TIOC4D*
Note: * Includes multiplexed pins.
12.11.5 Usage
Notes
453
Section added
14.2.8 Bit Rate
Register (BRR)
491
Table amended
Table 14.3 Bit Rates
and BRR Settings in
Asynchronous Mode
(cont)
27.0336
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
110
3
119
0.00
150
3
87
0.00
300
2
175
0.00
600
1
87
0.00
1200
1
175
0.00
2400
1
87
0.00
4800
0
175
0.00
9600
0
87
0.00
14400
0
58
–0.56
19200
0
43
0.00
28800
0
28
1.15
31250
0
26
0.12
38400
0
21
0.00
Table 14.4 Bit Rates 495
and BRR Settings in
Clocked
Synchronous Mode
(cont)
Table amended
14.3.4 Clock
Synchronous
Operation
Figure amended
Figure 14.22
Example of SCI
Receive Operation
529
3.5M
—
—
—
—
0
1
5M
0
0*
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0*
7M
Bit 7
Bit 0
RxI request
Section
Page
Description
15.4.9 A/D
Conversion Time
562
33 MHz deleted
564
Figure amended
Table 15.8
Operating Frequency
and CKS Bit Settings
15.6 Notes on Use
Figure 15.14
Example of a
Protection Circuit for
the Analog Input Pins
AVcc
AVref
This LSI
100Ω
Rin*2
AN0 to AN7
*1
0.1µF
*1
AVss
Notes: Numbers are only to be noted as reference value
*1
10µF
0.01µF
*2 Rin: Input impedance
16.7.2 Handling of
Analog Input Pins
585
Note amended
Notes: Numbers are only to be noted as reference value
Figure 16.8 Example
of Analog Input Pin
Protection Circuit
19.2 Port A
649
Table 19.2 Port A,
FP-144 Version
671
21.2.2 Socket
Adapter Pin
Correspondence and
Memory Map
Table amended
PA16 (I/O)/AH (output)
PA16 (I/O)/AH (output)
PA16 (I/O)
PA15 (I/O)/CK (output)
PA15 (I/O)/CK (output)
PA15 (I/O)/CK (output)
Figure amended
2 nF
Figure 21.2 SH7042
Pin and HN27C101
Pin Correspondence
(112-Pin Version)
100 Ω
0.1 µF
Section
Page
21.2.2 Socket
672
Adapter Pin
Correspondence and
Memory Map
Description
Figure amended
2 nF
Figure 21.3 SH7042
Pin and HN27C101
Pin Correspondence
(120-Pin Version)
100 Ω
0.1 µF
Figure 21.4 SH7043 673
Pin and HN27C101
Pin Correspondence
(144-Pin Version)
Figure amended
2 nF
100 Ω
0.1 µF
22.2.2 Mode
Transition Diagram
Figure 22.2 Flash
Memory Mode
Transitions
683
Note amended
Execute transition between the user mode and user program mode
while the CPU is not programming or erasing the flash memory
Section
Page
Description
22.7.2 ProgramVerify Mode
706
Figure amended
Start
Figure 22.13
Program/Program
Verify Flow
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 10 µs
*5
Store 32-byte program data in
reprogram data area
*4
n=1
m=0
Write 32-byte data in reprogram data area
in RAM to flash memory consecutively
*1
Enable WDT
Set PSU1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 50 µs
*5
Set P1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 200 µs
Start of programming
*5
Clear P1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 10 µs
End of programming
*5
Clear PSU1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 10 µs
*5
Disable WDT
Set PV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 4 µs
*5
n←n+1
Dummy write of H'FF to verify address
Wait 2 µs
*5
Read verify data
*2
*3
Verify
Increment address
Program data = verify data?
NG
m=1
OK
Reprogram data computation
*3
Transfer reprogram data to reprogram
data area
*4
NG
End of 32-byte
data verification?
OK
Clear PV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 4 µs
flag = 0?
*5
NG
OK
*5
n ≥ 1000 *5
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
End of programming
Programming failure
Note *5 added.
*5 Make sure to set the wait times and repetitions as specified.
Programming may not complete correctly if values other than
the specified ones are used.
NG
Section
Page
Description
22.7.4 Erase-Verify
Mode
713
Figure amended
Start
Figure 22.14
Erase/Erase-Verify
Flowchart
*1
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 10 µs
*5
n=1
*3
Set EBR1(2)
Enable WDT
Set ESU1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 200 µs
*5
Start erase
Set E1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 5 ms
*5
Clear E1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Halt erase
Wait 10 µs
*5
Clear ESU1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 10 µs
*5
Disable WDT
n←n+1
Set EV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 20 µs
*5
Set block start address to verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait 2 µs
Read verify data
Increment
address
Verify data = all "1"?
*5
*2
NG
OK
NG
Last address of block?
OK
Clear EV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 5 µs
NG
Notes: *1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*4
Clear EV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
*5
End of
erasing of all erase
blocks?
OK
*5
*5
n ≥ 60?
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
End of erasing
Erase failure
NG
Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all “0”) is not necessary.
Verify data is read in 32-bit (longword) units.
Set only one bit in EBR1(2). More than one bit cannot be set.
Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, each block must be erased in turn.
Make sure to set the wait times and repetitions as specified. Erasing may not complete correctly if values other
than the specified ones are used.
24.4.2 Canceling the 747
Standby Mode
Cancellation by a Manual Reset deleted
25. Electrical
Characteristics (5V,
33.3 MHz Version)
Deleted
—
Wait 5 µs
Section
Page
Description
25.2 DC
Characteristics
751
Note amended
*2 5 mA in the A mask version, except for F-ZTAT products.
Table 25.2 DC
Characteristics
25.3.2 Control
Signal Timing
754
Note: * The RES, MRES, NMI, BREQ, and IRQ7–IRQ0 signals are
asynchronous inputs, but when thesetup times shown here
are provided, the signals are considered to have produced
changes at clock rise (for RES, MRES, BREQ) or clock fall
(for NMI and IRQ7–IRQ0). If the setup times are not
provided, recognition is delayed until the next clock rise or
fall.
Table 25.5 Control
Signal Timing
25.3.3 Bus Timing
Note amended
763
Figure amended
Figure 25.12 DRAM
Cycle (Normal Mode,
1 Wait, TPC=0,
RCD=0)
Tcw1
Tc2
Column address
tCASD1
tCAC
tRDS
tAA
tRAC
Figure 25.13 DRAM 764
Cycle (Normal Mode,
2 Waits, TPC=1,
RCD=1)
Figure amended
Tcw1
Tcw2
Column address
tCASD1
tCAC
tAA
Section
Page
Description
25.3.3 Bus Timing
764
Figure amended
Figure 25.14 DRAM
Cycle (Normal Mode,
3 Waits, TPC=1,
RCD=1)
Tcw1
Tcw2
Column
tCASD1
tCAC
tAA
25.3.5 Multifunction
Timer Pulse Unit
Timing
770
Figure 25.23 MTU
I/O Timing
Figure 25.24 MTU
Clock Input Timing
Figure amended
tTOCD
770
Figure amended
tTCKS
25.3.11 Measuring
Conditions for AC
Characteristics
Figure 25.33 Output
Load Circuit
778
Title amended
Output Load Circuit
Section
Page
Description
25.4 A/D Converter
Characteristics
779
Table amended
Non-linearity error *
Table 25.16 A/D
Converter Timing (A
mask)
Offset error*
Full scale error*
Quantize error *
26.2 DC
Characteristics
782
Table amended
VCC×
0.07
Schmitt
PA2, PA5, PA6– VT+ – VT–
trigger input PA9,
voltage
PE0–PE15
Table 26.2 DC
Characteristics
783
—
—
V
VT + ≥ VCC× 0.9V (min)
VT – ≤ VCC× 0.2V (max)
Table amended
Analog
supply
current
AI CC
—
4
8
AI ref
—
0.5
1*
mA f = 16.7MHz
3
mA QFP144 version only
*3 2 mA in the A mask version of MASK products.
26.3.2 Control
Signal Timing
786
Notes: *1 SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
*2 The RES, MRES, NMI, BREQ, and IRQ7–IRQ0 signals
are asynchronous inputs, but when the setup times
shown here are provided, the signals are considered to
have produced changes at clock rise (for RES, MRES,
BREQ) or clock fall (for NMI and IRQ7–IRQ0). If the
setup times are not provided, recognition is delayed until
the next clock rise or fall.
Table 26.5 Control
Signal Timing
26.3.3 Bus Timing
Note amended
795
Figure amended
Figure 26.12 DRAM
Cycle (Normal Mode,
1 Wait, TPC = 0,
RCD = 0)
Tcw1
Tc2
Column address
tCASD1
tCAC
tAA
tRAC
tRDS
Section
Page
Description
26.3.3 Bus Timing
796
Figure amended
Figure 26.13 DRAM
Cycle (Normal Mode,
2 Waits, TPC = 1,
RCD = 1)
Tcw1
Tcw2
Column address
tCASD1
tCAC
tAA
tRAC
tCASD1
Figure 26.14 DRAM 796
Cycle (Normal Mode,
3 Waits, TPC = 1,
RCD = 1)
Figure amended
Tcw1
Tcw2
Column address
tCASD1
tCAC
tAA
tRAC
tCASD1
26.3.5 Multifunction
Timer Pulse Unit
Timing
802
Figure amended
CK
Figure 26.23 MTU
I/O Timing
tTOCD
Output
compare output
26.3.11
Measurement
Conditions for AC
Characteristics
Figure 26.33 Output
Load Circuit
810
Title amended
Output Load Circuit
Section
Page
Description
Appendix B Block
Diagrams
844
Note added
On-chip flash memory*
Figure B.19
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/
CASH,PB3/IRQ1/
POE1/CASL
Block Diagram
(F-ZTAT Version)
Appendix C Pin
States
A17
Note: * Only when n = 4.
865
Table amended
Pin modes
Table C.1 Pin
Modes During Reset,
Power-Down, and
Bus Right Release
Modes (144 Pin)
Pin Function
Class
Pin Name
Reset
Power-Down Bus Right
Power-OnManual Standby Sleep Release
Standby in Bus
Right Release
Clock
CK
O
O
H*1
O
O
O
System
control
RES
I
I
I
I
I
I
MRES
Z*4
I
Z
I
I
Z
WDTOVF
O* 3
O* 3
O
O
O
O
BREQ
Z*4
I
Z
I
I
I
BACK
Z*4
O
Z
O
L
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
IRQ0–IRQ7
Z*4
I
Z
I
I
Z
IRQOUT (PD30)
Z*4
O
H*1
H
O
H*1
IRQOUT (PE15)
Z*4
O
Z
H
O
Z
O* 2
O
Z
O
Z
Z
Interrupt NMI
Address A0–A21
bus
Z *4
I/O
Z
I/O
Z
Z
WAIT
Z*4
I
Z
I
Z
Z
RD/WR, RAS
Z*4
O
O
O
Z
Z
CASH, CASL,
CASLH, CASLL
Z*4
O
O
O
Z
Z
RD
H
O
Z
O
Z
Z
CS0, CS1
H
O
Z
O
Z
Z
CS2, CS3
Z*4
O
Z
O
Z
Z
WRHH, WRHL,
WRH, WRL
H
O
Z
O
Z
Z
AH
Z*4
O
Z
O
Z
Z
DACK0, DACK1
(PD26, PD27)
Z*4
O
O* 1
O
O
O* 1
DACK0, DACK1
(PE14, PE15)
Z*4
O
Z
O
O
Z
DRAK0, DRAK1
Z *4
O
O* 1
O
O
O* 1
DREQ0, DREQ1
Z* 4
I
Z
I
I
Z
Data bus D0–D31
Bus
control
DMAC
Section
Page
Description
Appendix C Pin
States
866
Table amended
Pin modes
Table C.1 Pin
Modes During Reset,
Power-Down, and
Bus Right Release
Modes (144 Pin)
(cont)
Pin Function
Reset
Power-Down Bus Right
Power-OnManual Standby Sleep Release
Standby in Bus
Right Release
Class
Pin Name
MTU
TIOC0A–TIOC0D, Z*4
TIOC1A–TIOC1D,
TIOC2A–TIOC2D,
TIOC3A, TIOC3C
I/O
K* 1
I/O
I/O
K* 1
TIOC3B,TIOC3D, Z*4
TIOC4A–TIOC4D
Port
control
SCI
I/O
Z
I/O
I/O
Z
TCLKA–TCLKD
Z*
4
I
Z
I
I
Z
POE0–POE3
Z*4
I
Z
I
I
Z
SCK0–SCK1
Z *4
I/O
Z
I/O
I/O
Z
TXD0–TCD1
Z *4
O
O* 1
O
O
O* 1
RXD0–RXD1
Z *4
Z
I
Z
I
I
A/D
ADTRG
converter AN0–AN7
Z*4
I
Z
I
I
Z
Z
I
Z
I
I
Z
I/O Port
Z*4
I/O
K* 1
K
I/O
K* 1
PA0–PA23
PB0–PB9
PC0–PC15
PD0–PD31
PE0–PE8,PE10
PE9,PE11–PE15
Z *4
I/O
Z
K
I/O
Z
PF0–PF17
Z
I
Z
I
I
Z
Notes: 1. There are instances where bus right release and transition to software standby mode
occur simultaneously due to the timing between BREQ and internal operations. In such
cases, standby mode results, but the standby state may be different.
The initial pin states depend on the mode. See section 18, Pin Function Controller
(PFC), for details.
2. I: Input, O: Output, H: High-level output, L: Low-level output, Z: High impedance,
K: Input pin with high impedance, output pin mode maintained.
*1 If the standby control register port high-impedance bits are set to 1, output pins become
high impedance.
*2 A21–A18 will become input ports after power-on reset.
*3 Input in the SH7044/SH7045 F-ZTAT version.
*4 General use I/O ports PAn, PBn, PCn, PDn, and PEn, as well as pins multiplexed with
them, are unstable during the RES setup time (tRESS) immediately after the RES pin
goes to low level.
Section
Page
Description
Appendix C Pin
States
867
Table amended
Pin modes
Table C.2 Pin
Modes During Reset,
Power-Down, and
Bus Right Release
Modes (112 Pin,
120 Pin)
Pin Function
Class
Pin Name
Reset
Power-Down Bus Right
Power-On Manual Standby Sleep Release
Standby in Bus
Right Release
Clock
CK
O
O
H*1
O
O
O
System
control
RES
I
I
I
I
I
I
MRES
Z* 4
I
Z
I
I
Z
WDTOVF
O* 3
O* 3
O
O
O
O
BREQ
Z* 4
I
Z
I
I
I
BACK
Z* 4
O
Z
O
L
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
IRQ0–IRQ7
Z* 4
I
Z
I
I
Z
IRQOUT
Z* 4
O
Z
H
O
Z
O* 2
O
Z
O
Z
Z
Interrupt NMI
Address A0–A21
bus
Z *4
I/O
Z
I/O
Z
Z
WAIT
Z* 4
I
Z
I
Z
Z
RDWR, RAS
Z*4
O
O
O
Z
Z
CASH, CASL
Z* 4
O
O
O
Z
Z
RD
H
O
Z
O
Z
Z
CS0, CS1
H
O
Z
O
Z
Z
CS2, CS3
Z* 4
O
Z
O
Z
Z
WRH, WRL
H
O
Z
O
Z
Z
AH
Z* 4
O
Z
O
Z
Z
DACK0–DACK1
Z* 4
O
Z
O
O
Z
DRAK0–DRAK1
Z* 4
O
Z
O
O
Z
DREQ0–DREQ1
Z*4
I
Z
I
I
Z
TIOC0A–TIOC0D, Z*4
TIOC1A–TIOC1D,
TIOC2A–TIOC2D,
TIOC3A, TIOC3C
I/O
K* 1
I/O
I/O
K* 1
TIOC3B,TIOC3D, Z*4
TIOC4A–TIOC4D
I/O
Z
I/O
I/O
Z
I
Z
I
I
Z
Data bus D0–D31
Bus
control
DMAC
MTU
TCLKA–TCLKD
Z* 4
Section
Page
Description
Appendix C Pin
States
868
Table amended
Pin modes
Table C.2 Pin
Modes During Reset,
Power-Down, and
Bus Right Release
Modes (112 Pin,
120 Pin) (cont)
Pin Function
Reset
Class
Pin Name
Power-Down Bus Right
Power-On Manual Standby Sleep Release
Standby in Bus
Right Release
Port
control
POE0–POE3
Z*4
I
Z
I
Z
SCI
SCK0–SCK1
Z *4
I/O
Z
I/O
I/O
Z
TXD0–TCD1
Z *4
O
O* 1
O
O
O* 1
RXD0–RXD1
Z *4
I
I
Z
I
I
Z
A/D
ADTRG
converter
control
AN0–AN7
Z*4
I
Z
I
I
Z
Z
I
Z
I
I
Z
I/O Port
Z*4
I/O
K* 1
K
I/O
K* 1
PA0–PA15
PB0–PB9
PC0–PC15
PD0–PD15
PE0–PE8–PE10
PE9,PE11–PE15
Z* 4
I/O
Z
K
I/O
Z
PF0–PF7
Z
I
Z
I
I
Z
Notes: 1. There are instances where bus right release and transition to software standby mode
occur simultaneously due to the timing between BREQ and internal operations. In such
cases, standby mode results, but the standby state may be different.
The initial pin states depend on the mode. See section 18, Pin Function Controller
(PFC), for details.
2. I: Input, O: Output, H: High-level output, L: Low-level output, Z: High impedance,
K: Input pin with high impedance, output pin mode maintained.
*1 If the standby control register port high-impedance bits are set to 1, output pins become
high impedance.
*2 A21–A18 will become input ports after power-on reset.
*3 Input in the SH7044/SH7045 F-ZTAT version.
*4 General use I/O ports PAn, PBn, PCn, PDn, and PEn, as well as pins multiplexed with
them, are unstable during the RES setup time (tRESS) immediately after the RES pin
goes to low level.
Section
Page
Description
Appendix E Product 876,
877
Code Lineup
Table amended
Product
Type
Mask
Version
Table E.1 SH7040,
SH7041, SH7042,
SH7043, SH7044,
and SH7045 Product
Lineup
SH7040A Mask ROM
verion
A MASK HD6437040AF28
HD6437040AVF16
HD6437040AVX16
Product Code
HD6437040ACF28
HD6437040AVCF16
ROM less
verion
SH7041A Mask ROM
verion
HD6437040A(***)CF28 QFP2020-112Cu*1 HD6437040A***CF
HD6437040A(***)VCF16 QFP2020-112Cu*1 HD6437040A***CF
QFP2020-112
QFP2020-112
TQFP1414-120
QFP2020-112Cu*1
QFP2020-112Cu*1
HD6417040AF28
HD6417040AVF16
HD6417040AVX16
HD6417040ACF28
HD6417040AVCF16
A MASK HD6437041AF28
HD6437041AVF16
HD6437041A(***)F28
HD6437041A(***)VF16
QFP2020-144
QFP2020-144
HD6437041A***F
HD6437041A***F
A MASK HD6417041AF28
HD6417041AVF16
HD6437041A(***)CF28 QFP2020-144Cu*1 HD6437041A***CF
HD6437041A(***)VCF16 QFP2020-144Cu*1 HD6437041A***CF
HD6417041AF28
HD6417041AVF16
QFP2020-144
QFP2020-144
HD6417041ACF28
HD6417041AVCF16
QFP2020-144Cu*1 HD6417041ACF28
QFP2020-144Cu*1 HD6417041AVCF16
HD6417041AF28
HD6417041AVF16
–
HD6437042F28
HD6437042VF16
HD6437042 (***)F28
HD6437042 (***)VF16
QFP2020-112
QFP2020-112
HD6437042***F
HD6437042***F
Z-TAT
version
–
HD6477042F28
HD6477042VF16
HD6477042F28
HD6477042VF16
QFP2020-112
QFP2020-112
HD6477042F28
HD6477042VF16
HD6437042A(***)F28
HD6437042A(***)VF16
HD6437042A(***)VX16
QFP2020-112
QFP2020-112
TQFP1414-120
HD6437042A***F
HD6437042A***F
HD6437042A***X
A MASK HD6437042AF28
HD6437042AVF16
HD6437042AVX16
HD6437042ACF28
HD6437042AVCF16
Product
Type
Mask
Version
SH7042A Z-TAT
version
A MASK HD6477042AF28
HD6477042AVF16
HD6477042AVX16
SH7043
–
–
HD6477043F28
HD6477043VF16
Mask ROM
version
Z-TAT
version
SH7043A Mask ROM
version
Z-TAT
version
Package
Order Model No.*2
HD6477042AF28
HD6477042AVF16
HD6477042AVX16
QFP2020-112
QFP2020-112
TQFP1414-120
HD6477042AF28
HD6477042AVF16
HD6477042AVX16
HD6477042ACF28
HD6477042AVCF16
HD6477042ACF28
HD6477042AVCF16
QFP2020-112Cu*1 HD6477042ACF28
QFP2020-112Cu*1 HD6477042AVCF16
HD6437043F28
HD6437043VF16
HD6437043(***)F28
HD6437043(***)VF16
QFP2020-144
QFP2020-144
A MASK HD6437043AF28
HD6437043AVF16
A MASK HD6477043AF28
HD6477043AVF16
HD6477043ACF28
HD6477043AVCF16
Mask ROM
version
F-ZTAT
version
Mask ROM
version
F-ZTAT
version
HD6437042A(***)CF28 QFP2020-112Cu*1 HD6437042A***CF
HD6437042A(***)VCF16 QFP2020-112Cu*1 HD6437042A***CF
Mark Code
Product Code
HD6437043ACF28
HD6437043AVCF16
SH7045
HD6437040A***F
HD6437040A***F
HD6437040A***X
Mask ROM
verion
SH7042A Mask ROM
verion
SH7044
Order Model No.*2
QFP2020-112
QFP2020-112
TQFP1414-120
HD6417040AF28
HD6417040AVF16
HD6417040AVX16
HD6417040ACF28
HD6417040AVCF16
HD6417041ACF28
HD6417041AVCF16
SH7042
Package
HD6437040A (***)F28
HD6437040A(***)VF16
HD6437040A(***)VX16
A MASK HD6417040AF28
HD6417040AVF16
HD6417040AVX16
HD6417040ACF28
HD6417040AVCF16
HD6437041ACF28
HD6437041AVCF16
ROM less
verion
Mark Code
A MASK HD6437044F28
HD64F7044F28
A MASK HD6437045F28
HD64F7045F28
HD6437043***F
HD6437043***F
HD6477043F28
HD6477043VF16
QFP2020-144
QFP2020-144
HD6477043F28
HD6477043VF16
HD6437043A(***)F28
HD6437043A(***)VF16
QFP2020-144
QFP2020-144
HD6437043A***F
HD6437043A***F
HD6437043A(***)CF28 QFP2020-144Cu*1 HD6437043A***CF
HD6437043A(***)VCF16 QFP2020-144Cu*1 HD6437043A***CF
HD6477043AF28
HD6477043AVF16
QFP2020-144
QFP2020-144
HD6477043ACF28
HD6477043AVCF16
QFP2020-144Cu*1 HD6477043ACF28
QFP2020-144Cu*1 HD6477043AVCF16
HD6437044(***)F28
QFP2020-112
HD6437044***F
HD64F7044F28
QFP2020-112
HD64F7044F28
HD6437045(***)F28
QFP2020-144
HD6437045***F
HD64F7045F28
QFP2020-144
HD64F7045F28
HD6477043AF28
HD6477043AVF16
(***) is the ROM code.
NoteS: 1. Package with Copper used as the lead material.
2. *** in the Order Model No. is the ROM code, consisting of a letter and a two-digit
number (ex. E00). The letter indicates the voltage and frequency, as shown below.
• E, F, G, H: 5.0 V, 28 MHz
• P, Q, R: 3.3 V, 16 MHz
Contents
Section 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SH7040 Series Overview .............................................................................
SH7040 Series Overview...................................................................................................
1.1.1 SH7040 Series Features........................................................................................
Block Diagram...................................................................................................................
Pin Arrangement and Pin Functions ..................................................................................
1.3.1 Pin Arrangment.....................................................................................................
1.3.2 Pin Arrangement by Mode ...................................................................................
1.3.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................
The F-ZTAT Version Onboard Programming...................................................................
Section 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
CPU .....................................................................................................................
Register Configuration.......................................................................................................
2.1.1 General Registers (Rn) .........................................................................................
2.1.2 Control Registers ..................................................................................................
2.1.3 System Registers...................................................................................................
2.1.4 Initial Values of Registers ....................................................................................
Data Formats......................................................................................................................
2.2.1 Data Format in Registers ......................................................................................
2.2.2 Data Format in Memory .......................................................................................
2.2.3 Immediate Data Format ........................................................................................
Instruction Features ...........................................................................................................
2.3.1 RISC-Type Instruction Set ...................................................................................
2.3.2 Addressing Modes ................................................................................................
2.3.3 Instruction Format ................................................................................................
Instruction Set by Classification ........................................................................................
Processing States ...............................................................................................................
2.5.1 State Transitions ...................................................................................................
2.5.2 Power-Down State ................................................................................................
Section 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
4.2
45
45
45
46
47
47
48
48
48
48
49
49
52
56
59
72
72
74
Operating Modes............................................................................................. 77
Operating Modes, Types, and Selection ............................................................................ 77
Explanation of Operating Modes....................................................................................... 78
Pin Configuration............................................................................................................... 79
Section 4
4.1
1
1
1
11
13
13
16
37
42
Clock Pulse Generator (CPG) .....................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
4.1.1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
Oscillator............................................................................................................................
4.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Oscillator............................................................................
81
81
81
81
81
i
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.2.2 External Clock Input Method ...............................................................................
Prescaler.............................................................................................................................
Oscillator Halt Function.....................................................................................................
Usage Notes .......................................................................................................................
4.5.1 Oscillator Usage Notes .........................................................................................
4.5.2 Notes on Board Design.........................................................................................
4.5.3 Spread Spectrum Clock Generator Usage Notes ..................................................
Section 5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
6.1
6.2
ii
Exception Processing..................................................................................... 87
Overview............................................................................................................................
5.1.1 Types of Exception Processing and Priority.........................................................
5.1.2 Exception Processing Operations .........................................................................
5.1.3 Exception Processing Vector Table......................................................................
Resets.................................................................................................................................
5.2.1 Power-On Reset ....................................................................................................
5.2.2 Manual Reset ........................................................................................................
Address Errors ...................................................................................................................
5.3.1 Address Error Exception Processing ....................................................................
Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
5.4.1 Interrupt Priority Level.........................................................................................
5.4.2 Interrupt Exception Processing.............................................................................
Exceptions Triggered by Instructions ................................................................................
5.5.1 Trap Instructions...................................................................................................
5.5.2 Illegal Slot Instructions.........................................................................................
5.5.3 General Illegal Instructions...................................................................................
When Exception Sources Are Not Accepted.....................................................................
5.6.1 Immediately after a Delayed Branch Instruction..................................................
5.6.2 Immediately after an Interrupt-Disabled Instruction ............................................
Stack Status after Exception Processing Ends...................................................................
Notes on Use ......................................................................................................................
5.8.1 Value of Stack Pointer (SP)..................................................................................
5.8.2 Value of Vector Base Register (VBR) .................................................................
5.8.3 Address Errors Caused by Stacking of Address Error Exception Processing ......
Section 6
82
83
83
83
83
84
85
Interrupt Controller (INTC) .........................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
6.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
6.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
6.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
6.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................
6.2.1 NMI Interrupts ......................................................................................................
6.2.2 User Break Interrupt .............................................................................................
87
87
88
89
90
91
91
92
93
93
94
94
94
95
95
96
96
96
96
97
98
98
98
98
99
99
99
99
101
101
102
102
102
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.2.3 IRQ Interrupts.......................................................................................................
6.2.4 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupts.................................................................
6.2.5 Interrupt Exception Vectors and Priority Rankings .............................................
Description of Registers.....................................................................................................
6.3.1 Interrupt Priority Registers A–H (IPRA–IPRH)...................................................
6.3.2 Interrupt Control Register (ICR) ..........................................................................
6.3.3 IRQ Status Register (ISR) ....................................................................................
Interrupt Operation.............................................................................................................
6.4.1 Interrupt Sequence ................................................................................................
6.4.2 Stack after Interrupt Exception Processing...........................................................
Interrupt Response Time....................................................................................................
Data Transfer with Interrupt Request Signals ...................................................................
6.6.1 Handling DTC Activating and CPU Interrupt Sources,
but Not DMAC Activating Sources .....................................................................
6.6.2 Handling DMAC Activating Sources but Not CPU Interrupt
or DTC Activating Sources ..................................................................................
6.6.3 Handling DTC Activating Sources but Not CPU Interrupt
or DMAC Activating Sources ..............................................................................
6.6.4 Treating CPU Interrupt Sources but Not DTC
or DMAC Activating Sources ..............................................................................
Section 7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
User Break Controller (UBC) .....................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
7.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
7.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
7.1.3 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
7.2.1 User Break Address Register (UBAR).................................................................
7.2.2 User Break Address Mask Register (UBAMR) ...................................................
7.2.3 User Break Bus Cycle Register (UBBR)..............................................................
Operation ...........................................................................................................................
7.3.1 Flow of the User Break Operation .......................................................................
7.3.2 Break on On-Chip Memory Instruction Fetch Cycle ...........................................
7.3.3 Program Counter (PC) Values Saved ...................................................................
Use Examples.....................................................................................................................
7.4.1 Break on CPU Instruction Fetch Cycle ................................................................
7.4.2 Break on CPU Data Access Cycle........................................................................
7.4.3 Break on DMA/DTC Cycle ..................................................................................
Cautions on Use.................................................................................................................
7.5.1 On-Chip Memory Instruction Fetch .....................................................................
7.5.2 Instruction Fetch at Branches ...............................................................................
7.5.3 Contention between User Break and Exception Handling ...................................
7.5.4 Break at Non-Delay Branch Instruction Jump Destination ..................................
102
103
103
108
108
109
110
112
112
114
114
116
117
118
118
118
119
119
119
119
120
121
121
122
123
126
126
128
128
128
128
129
130
130
130
130
131
131
iii
Section 8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
Overview............................................................................................................................
8.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
8.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
8.1.3 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
Register Description ..........................................................................................................
8.2.1 DTC Mode Register (DTMR) ..............................................................................
8.2.2 DTC Source Address Register (DTSAR).............................................................
8.2.3 DTC Destination Address Register (DTDAR).....................................................
8.2.4 DTC Initial Address Register (DTIAR) ...............................................................
8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (DTCRA) .........................................................
8.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (DTCRB) ..........................................................
8.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTER) ............................................................................
8.2.8 DTC Control/Status Register (DTCSR) ...............................................................
8.2.9 DTC Information Base Register (DTBR).............................................................
Operation ...........................................................................................................................
8.3.1 Overview of Operation .........................................................................................
8.3.2 Activating Sources................................................................................................
8.3.3 DTC Vector Table ................................................................................................
8.3.4 Register Information Placement ...........................................................................
8.3.5 Normal Mode........................................................................................................
8.3.6 Repeat Mode.........................................................................................................
8.3.7 Block Transfer Mode............................................................................................
8.3.8 Operation Timing .................................................................................................
8.3.9 DTC Execution State Counts................................................................................
8.3.10 DTC Usage Procedure ..........................................................................................
8.3.11 DTC Use Example................................................................................................
Cautions on Use.................................................................................................................
Section 9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
iv
Data Transfer Controller (DTC) ................................................................. 133
Cache Memory (CAC) ..................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................
9.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
9.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
9.1.3 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
Register Explanation..........................................................................................................
9.2.1 Cache Control Register (CCR).............................................................................
Address Array and Data Array ..........................................................................................
9.3.1 Cache Address Array Read/Write Space..............................................................
9.3.2 Cache Data Array Read/Write Space ...................................................................
Cautions on Use.................................................................................................................
9.4.1 Cache Initialization...............................................................................................
9.4.2 Forced Access to Address Array and Data Array.................................................
9.4.3 Cache Miss Penalty and Cache Fill Timing .........................................................
133
133
134
135
135
135
138
138
139
139
140
140
141
143
143
143
145
145
148
149
149
150
151
151
153
153
154
155
155
155
156
156
157
157
158
159
159
160
160
160
160
9.4.4
Cache Hit after Cache Miss .................................................................................. 162
Section 10 Bus State Controller (BSC) ......................................................................... 163
10.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
10.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
10.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
10.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
10.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
10.1.5 Address Map.........................................................................................................
10.2 Description of Registers.....................................................................................................
10.2.1 Bus Control Register 1 (BCR1)............................................................................
10.2.2 Bus Control Register 2 (BCR2)............................................................................
10.2.3 Wait Control Register 1 (WCR1) .........................................................................
10.2.4 Wait Control Register 2 (WCR2) .........................................................................
10.2.5 DRAM Area Control Register (DCR) ..................................................................
10.2.6 Refresh Timer Control/Status Register (RTCSR) ................................................
10.2.7 Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT) ........................................................................
10.2.8 Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR)..........................................................
10.3 Accessing Ordinary Space.................................................................................................
10.3.1 Basic Timing.........................................................................................................
10.3.2 Wait State Control ................................................................................................
10.3.3 CS Assert Period Extension..................................................................................
10.4 DRAM Access ...................................................................................................................
10.4.1 DRAM Direct Connection....................................................................................
10.4.2 Basic Timing.........................................................................................................
10.4.3 Wait State Control ................................................................................................
10.4.4 Burst Operation.....................................................................................................
10.4.5 Refresh Timing.....................................................................................................
10.5 Address/Data Multiplex I/O Space Access........................................................................
10.5.1 Basic Timing.........................................................................................................
10.5.2 Wait State Control ................................................................................................
10.5.3 CS Assertion Extension ........................................................................................
10.6 Waits between Access Cycles ...........................................................................................
10.6.1 Prevention of Data Bus Conflicts .........................................................................
10.6.2 Simplification of Bus Cycle Start Detection ........................................................
10.7 Bus Arbitration...................................................................................................................
10.8 Memory Connection Examples .........................................................................................
10.9 On-Chip Peripheral I/O Register Access...........................................................................
10.10 CPU Operation when Program is in External Memory.....................................................
163
163
164
165
166
167
169
169
172
175
177
178
181
183
184
185
185
186
188
189
189
190
191
195
197
199
199
200
201
201
201
203
203
205
210
211
Section 11 Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) .......................................... 213
11.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 213
11.1.1 Features................................................................................................................. 213
v
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
11.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
11.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
11.2.1 DMA Source Address Registers 0–3 (SAR0–SAR3)...........................................
11.2.2 DMA Destination Address Registers 0–3 (DAR0–DAR3) ..................................
11.2.3 DMA Transfer Count Registers 0–3 (DMATCR0–DMATCR3).........................
11.2.4 DMA Channel Control Registers 0–3 (CHCR0–CHCR3)...................................
11.2.5 DMAC Operation Register (DMAOR) ................................................................
Operation ...........................................................................................................................
11.3.1 DMA Transfer Flow .............................................................................................
11.3.2 DMA Transfer Requests.......................................................................................
11.3.3 Channel Priority....................................................................................................
11.3.4 DMA Transfer Types ...........................................................................................
11.3.5 Address Modes .....................................................................................................
11.3.6 Dual Address Mode ..............................................................................................
11.3.7 Bus Modes ............................................................................................................
11.3.8 Relationship between Request Modes and Bus Modes by DMA Transfer
Category ...............................................................................................................
11.3.9 Bus Mode and Channel Priority Order.................................................................
11.3.10 Number of Bus Cycle States and DREQ Pin Sample Timing ..............................
11.3.11 Source Address Reload Function .........................................................................
11.3.12 DMA Transfer Ending Conditions .......................................................................
11.3.13 DMAC Access from CPU ....................................................................................
Examples of Use ................................................................................................................
11.4.1 Example of DMA Transfer between On-Chip SCI and External Memory ..........
11.4.2 Example of DMA Transfer between External RAM and External Device
with DACK...........................................................................................................
11.4.3 Example of DMA Transfer between A/D Converter and On-Chip Memory
(Address Reload On) (Excluding A Mask) ..........................................................
11.4.4 Example of DMA Transfer between A/D Converter and Internal Memory
(Address Reload On) (A Mask)............................................................................
11.4.5 Example of DMA Transfer between External Memory and SCI1 Send Side
(Indirect Address On) ...........................................................................................
Cautions on Use.................................................................................................................
215
216
217
218
218
219
220
221
226
228
228
230
232
235
235
237
244
245
246
246
263
264
265
265
265
266
266
268
270
272
Section 12 Multifunction Timer Pulse Unit (MTU) .................................................. 273
12.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
12.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
12.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
12.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
12.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
12.2 MTU Register Descriptions...............................................................................................
vi
273
273
276
278
280
283
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.2.1 Timer Control Register (TCR) .............................................................................
12.2.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR).............................................................................
12.2.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) .....................................................................
12.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)...............................................................
12.2.5 Timer Status Register (TSR) ................................................................................
12.2.6 Timer Counters (TCNT).......................................................................................
12.2.7 Timer General Register (TGR).............................................................................
12.2.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) ................................................................................
12.2.9 Timer Synchro Register (TSYR) ..........................................................................
12.2.10 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER)....................................................
12.2.11 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR)...............................................................
12.2.12 Timer Gate Control Register (TGCR) ..................................................................
12.2.13 Timer Subcounter (TCNTS).................................................................................
12.2.14 Timer Dead Time Data Register (TDDR) ............................................................
12.2.15 Timer Period Data Register (TCDR)....................................................................
12.2.16 Timer Period Buffer Register (TCBR) .................................................................
Bus Master Interface ..........................................................................................................
12.3.1 16-Bit Registers ....................................................................................................
12.3.2 8-Bit Registers ......................................................................................................
Operation ...........................................................................................................................
12.4.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
12.4.2 Basic Functions.....................................................................................................
12.4.3 Synchronous Operation ........................................................................................
12.4.4 Buffer Operation...................................................................................................
12.4.5 Cascade Connection Mode ...................................................................................
12.4.6 PWM Mode ..........................................................................................................
12.4.7 Phase Counting Mode...........................................................................................
12.4.8 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode .........................................................................
12.4.9 Complementary PWM Mode ...............................................................................
Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
12.5.1 Interrupt Sources and Priority Ranking ................................................................
12.5.2 DTC/DMAC Activation .......................................................................................
12.5.3 A/D Converter Activation.....................................................................................
Operation Timing...............................................................................................................
12.6.1 Input/Output Timing.............................................................................................
12.6.2 Interrupt Signal Timing ........................................................................................
Notes and Precautions........................................................................................................
12.7.1 Input Clock Limitations........................................................................................
12.7.2 Note on Cycle Setting...........................................................................................
12.7.3 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear ........................................................
12.7.4 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment.................................................
12.7.5 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match.........................
12.7.6 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture ..............................................
283
288
290
306
309
312
313
313
314
315
317
318
320
321
321
322
322
322
323
324
324
325
330
333
336
337
341
348
352
377
377
379
379
380
380
385
389
389
389
390
391
392
394
vii
12.8
12.9
12.10
12.11
12.7.7 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture .............................................
12.7.8 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture ............................
12.7.9 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match .........................................
12.7.10 TCNT2 Write and Overflow/Underflow Contention in Cascade Connection .....
12.7.11 Counter Value during Complementary PWM Mode Stop ...................................
12.7.12 Buffer Operation Setting in Complementary PWM Mode...................................
12.7.13 Reset Sync PWM Mode Buffer Operation and Compare Match Flag .................
12.7.14 Overflow Flags in Reset Sync PWM Mode .........................................................
12.7.15 Notes on Compare Match Flags in Complementary PWM Mode .......................
12.7.16 Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing ........................
12.7.17 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow...............................
12.7.18 Cautions on Transition from Normal Operation or PWM Mode 1
to Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode ......................................................................
12.7.19 Output Level in Complementary PWM Mode and Reset-Synchronous PWM
Mode.....................................................................................................................
12.7.20 Cautions on Using the Chopping Function in Complementary PWM Mode
or Reset Synchronous PWM Mode (A Mask Excluded)......................................
12.7.21 Cautions on Carrying Out Buffer Operation of Channel 0 in PWM Mode
(A Mask Excluded)...............................................................................................
12.7.22 Cautions on Restarting with Sync Clear of Another Channel
in Complementary PWM Mode (A Mask Excluded)...........................................
MTU Output Pin Initialization...........................................................................................
12.8.1 Operating Modes ..................................................................................................
12.8.2 Reset Start Operation............................................................................................
12.8.3 Operation in Case of Re-Setting Due to Error During Operation, Etc. ................
12.8.4 Overview of Initialization Procedures and Mode Transitions in Case of Error
during Operation, Etc............................................................................................
Port Output Enable (POE) .................................................................................................
12.9.1 Features.................................................................................................................
12.9.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
12.9.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
12.9.4 Register Configuration..........................................................................................
POE Register Descriptions ................................................................................................
12.10.1 Input Level Control/Status Register (ICSR).........................................................
12.10.2 Output Level Control/Status Register (OCSR).....................................................
Operation ...........................................................................................................................
12.11.1 Input Level Detection Operation ..........................................................................
12.11.2 Output-Level Compare Operation ........................................................................
12.11.3 Release from High-Impedance State ....................................................................
12.11.4 POE timing ...........................................................................................................
12.11.5 Usage Notes ..........................................................................................................
395
396
397
397
399
399
400
402
405
407
408
409
409
409
409
410
411
411
411
412
412
443
443
444
445
445
446
446
449
451
451
452
452
453
453
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT) .............................................................................. 455
viii
13.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
13.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
13.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
13.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
13.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
13.2 Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
13.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT).........................................................................................
13.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................
13.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) ............................................................
13.2.4 Register Access.....................................................................................................
13.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................
13.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode.........................................................................................
13.3.2 Interval Timer Mode.............................................................................................
13.3.3 Clearing the Standby Mode ..................................................................................
13.3.4 Timing of Setting the Overflow Flag (OVF)........................................................
13.3.5 Timing of Setting the Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF)........................
13.4 Notes on Use ......................................................................................................................
13.4.1 TCNT Write and Increment Contention...............................................................
13.4.2 Changing CKS2–CKS0 Bit Values ......................................................................
13.4.3 Changing between Watchdog Timer/Interval Timer Modes ................................
13.4.4 System Reset With WDTOVF .............................................................................
13.4.5 Internal Reset with the Watchdog Timer..............................................................
455
455
456
456
457
457
457
458
460
461
462
462
464
464
465
465
466
466
466
466
467
467
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)..................................................... 469
14.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
14.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
14.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
14.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
14.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
14.2 Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
14.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)...............................................................................
14.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)...............................................................................
14.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)..............................................................................
14.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR) ............................................................................
14.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ................................................................................
14.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) ..............................................................................
14.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR).................................................................................
14.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR).......................................................................................
14.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................
14.3.1 Overview...............................................................................................................
14.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode........................................................................
14.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication ...........................................................................
14.3.4 Clock Synchronous Operation..............................................................................
469
469
470
471
471
472
472
472
472
473
473
476
479
483
501
501
503
513
521
ix
14.4 SCI Interrupt Sources and the DMAC/DTC......................................................................
14.5 Notes on Use ......................................................................................................................
14.5.1 TDR Write and TDRE Flags ................................................................................
14.5.2 Simultaneous Multiple Receive Errors.................................................................
14.5.3 Break Detection and Processing...........................................................................
14.5.4 Sending a Break Signal.........................................................................................
14.5.5 Receive Error Flags and Transmitter Operation (Clock Synchronous Mode
Only).....................................................................................................................
14.5.6 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Receive Margin in the Asynchronous
Mode.....................................................................................................................
14.5.7 Constraints on DMAC/DTC Use..........................................................................
14.5.8 Cautions for Clock Synchronous External Clock Mode.......................................
14.5.9 Caution for Clock Synchronous Internal Clock Mode .........................................
532
533
533
533
534
534
534
534
536
536
536
Section 15 High Speed A/D Converter (Excluding A Mask) ................................. 537
15.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
15.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
15.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
15.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
15.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
15.2 Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
15.2.1 A/D Data Registers A–H (ADDRA–ADDRH) ....................................................
15.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ................................................................
15.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR).............................................................................
15.3 Bus Master Interface ..........................................................................................................
15.4 Operation ...........................................................................................................................
15.4.1 Select-Single Mode...............................................................................................
15.4.2 Select-Scan Mode.................................................................................................
15.4.3 Group-Single Mode ..............................................................................................
15.4.4 Group-Scan Mode.................................................................................................
15.4.5 Buffer Operation...................................................................................................
15.4.6 Simultaneous Sampling Operation .......................................................................
15.4.7 Conversion Start Modes .......................................................................................
15.4.8 Conversion Start by External Input ......................................................................
15.4.9 A/D Conversion Time...........................................................................................
15.5 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
15.6 Notes on Use ......................................................................................................................
537
537
538
538
539
540
540
541
544
545
548
548
549
550
551
552
555
557
560
561
562
563
Section 16 Mid-Speed A/D Converter (A Mask) ....................................................... 567
16.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
16.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
16.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
16.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................
x
567
567
568
569
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.1.4 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
16.2.1 A/D Data Register A–D (ADDRA0–ADDRD0, ADDRA1–ADDRD1) ............
16.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR0, ADCSR1).............................................
16.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR0, ADCR1) ............................................................
Interface with CPU ............................................................................................................
Operation ...........................................................................................................................
16.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN=0) .......................................................................................
16.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN=1) .........................................................................................
16.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time ..........................................................
16.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing .............................................................................
Interrupt and DMA, DTC Transfer Requests ....................................................................
A/D Conversion Precision Definitions ..............................................................................
Usage Notes .......................................................................................................................
16.7.1 Analog Voltage Settings.......................................................................................
16.7.2 Handling of Analog Input Pins.............................................................................
570
571
571
572
574
575
576
576
578
580
581
582
583
584
584
584
Section 17 Compare Match Timer (CMT) ................................................................... 587
17.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
17.1.1 Features.................................................................................................................
17.1.2 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
17.1.3 Register Configuration .........................................................................................
17.2 Register Descriptions.........................................................................................................
17.2.1 Compare Match Timer Start Register (CMSTR) .................................................
17.2.2 Compare Match Timer Control/Status Register (CMCSR)..................................
17.2.3 Compare Match Timer Counter (CMCNT)..........................................................
17.2.4 Compare Match Timer Constant Register (CMCOR) ..........................................
17.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................
17.3.1 Period Count Operation ........................................................................................
17.3.2 CMCNT Count Timing.........................................................................................
17.4 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................
17.4.1 Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation.................................................................
17.4.2 Compare Match Flag Set Timing .........................................................................
17.4.3 Compare Match Flag Clear Timing......................................................................
17.5 Notes on Use ......................................................................................................................
17.5.1 Contention between CMCNT Write and Compare Match ...................................
17.5.2 Contention between CMCNT Word Write and Incrementation...........................
17.5.3 Contention between CMCNT Byte Write and Incrementation ............................
587
587
587
589
590
590
591
592
593
593
593
594
594
594
594
595
596
596
597
598
Section 18 Pin Function Controller................................................................................. 599
18.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 599
18.2 Register Configuration....................................................................................................... 607
18.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 608
xi
18.3.1 Port A I/O Register H (PAIORH).........................................................................
18.3.2 Port A I/O Register L (PAIORL) .........................................................................
18.3.3 Port A Control Register H (PACRH) ...................................................................
18.3.4 Port A Control Registers L1, L2 (PACRL1 and PACRL2) .................................
18.3.5 Port B I/O Register (PBIOR)................................................................................
18.3.6 Port B Control Registers (PBCR1 and PBCR2)...................................................
18.3.7 Port C I/O Register (PCIOR)................................................................................
18.3.8 Port C Control Register (PCCR)...........................................................................
18.3.9 Port D I/O Register H (PDIORH).........................................................................
18.3.10 Port D I/O Register L (PDIORL) .........................................................................
18.3.11 Port D Control Registers H1, H2 (PDCRH1 and PDCRH2)................................
18.3.12 Port D Control Register L (PDCRL) ....................................................................
18.3.13 Port E I/O Register (PEIOR) ................................................................................
18.3.14 Port E Control Registers 1, 2 (PECR1 and PECR2).............................................
18.3.15 IRQOUT Function Control Register (IFCR)........................................................
18.4 Cautions on Use.................................................................................................................
608
609
609
612
617
618
622
623
626
627
627
634
638
638
643
645
Section 19 I/O Ports (I/O) .................................................................................................. 647
19.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 647
19.2 Port A................................................................................................................................. 647
19.2.1 Register Configuration ......................................................................................... 650
19.2.2 Port A Data Register H (PADRH)........................................................................ 650
19.2.3 Port A Data Register L (PADRL)......................................................................... 651
19.3 Port B ................................................................................................................................. 652
19.3.1 Register Configuration ......................................................................................... 652
19.3.2 Port B Data Register (PBDR)............................................................................... 653
19.4 Port C ................................................................................................................................. 654
19.4.1 Register Configuration ......................................................................................... 654
19.4.2 Port C Data Register (PCDR)............................................................................... 655
19.5 Port D................................................................................................................................. 656
19.5.1 Register Configuration ......................................................................................... 658
19.5.2 Port D Data Register H (PDDRH)........................................................................ 659
19.5.3 Port D Data Register L (PDDRL)......................................................................... 660
19.6 Port E ................................................................................................................................. 661
19.6.1 Register Configuration ......................................................................................... 661
19.6.2 Port E Data Register (PEDR) ............................................................................... 662
19.7 Port F ................................................................................................................................. 663
19.7.1 Register Configuration ......................................................................................... 663
19.7.2 Port F Data Register (PFDR)................................................................................ 663
Section 20 64/128/256kB Mask ROM........................................................................... 665
20.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 665
xii
Section 21 128kB PROM................................................................................................... 669
21.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 669
21.2 PROM Mode...................................................................................................................... 670
21.2.1 PROM Mode Settings........................................................................................... 670
21.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence and Memory Map ...................................... 670
21.3 PROM Programming ......................................................................................................... 674
21.3.1 Programming Mode Selection .............................................................................. 674
21.3.2 Write/Verify and Electrical Characteristics.......................................................... 675
21.3.3 Cautions on Writing ............................................................................................. 679
21.3.4 Post-Write Reliability........................................................................................... 680
Section 22 256kB Flash Memory (F-ZTAT) ............................................................... 681
22.1 Features ..............................................................................................................................
22.2 Overview............................................................................................................................
22.2.1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................
22.2.2 Mode Transition Diagram.....................................................................................
22.2.3 Onboard Program Mode .......................................................................................
22.2.4 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM.......................................................................
22.2.5 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode..................................
22.2.6 Block Configuration .............................................................................................
22.3 Pin Configuration...............................................................................................................
22.4 Register Configuration.......................................................................................................
22.5 Description of Registers.....................................................................................................
22.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1).....................................................
22.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2).....................................................
22.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ............................................................................
22.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ............................................................................
22.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER) ...................................................................
22.6 On-Board Programming Mode ..........................................................................................
22.6.1 Boot Mode ............................................................................................................
22.6.2 User Program Mode .............................................................................................
22.7 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory................................................................................
22.7.1 Program Mode (n = 1 for Addresses H'0000–H'1FFFF,
n = 2 for Addresses H'20000–H'3FFFF)...............................................................
22.7.2 Program-Verify Mode (n = 1 for Addresses H'0000–H'1FFFF,
n = 2 for Addresses H'20000–H'3FFFF)...............................................................
22.7.3 Erase Mode (n = 1 for Addresses H'0000–H'1FFFF,
n = 2 for Addresses H'20000–H'3FFFF)...............................................................
22.7.4 Erase-Verify Mode (n = 1 for Addresses H'00000–H'1FFFF,
n = 2 for Addresses H'20000–H'3FFFF)...............................................................
22.8 Protection...........................................................................................................................
22.8.1 Hardware Protection.............................................................................................
22.8.2 Software Protection ..............................................................................................
681
682
682
683
684
686
687
688
689
689
690
690
692
695
695
696
698
699
703
704
704
705
711
712
718
718
719
xiii
22.8.3 Error Protection ....................................................................................................
22.9 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ....................................................................................
22.10 Note on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ..................................................................
22.11 Flash Memory Programmer Mode.....................................................................................
22.11.1 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagrams ...................................................
22.11.2 Programmer Mode Operation...............................................................................
22.11.3 Memory Read Mode.............................................................................................
22.11.4 Auto-Program Mode.............................................................................................
22.11.5 Auto-Erase Mode..................................................................................................
22.11.6 Status Read Mode.................................................................................................
22.11.7 Status Polling ........................................................................................................
22.11.8 Programmer Mode Transition Time.....................................................................
22.11.9 Cautions Concerning Memory Programming.......................................................
720
722
724
724
725
728
729
733
735
736
737
738
739
Section 23 RAM ................................................................................................................... 741
23.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 741
23.2 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 741
Section 24 Power-Down State .......................................................................................... 743
24.1 Overview............................................................................................................................
24.1.1 Power-Down States ..............................................................................................
24.1.2 Related Register....................................................................................................
24.2 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ..................................................................................
24.3 Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................
24.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode .....................................................................................
24.3.2 Canceling Sleep Mode..........................................................................................
24.4 Standby Mode ....................................................................................................................
24.4.1 Transition to Standby Mode .................................................................................
24.4.2 Canceling the Standby Mode................................................................................
24.4.3 Standby Mode Application Example....................................................................
743
743
744
744
745
745
745
745
745
747
748
Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (5V, 28.7 MHz Version) ............................. 749
25.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ..............................................................................................
25.2 DC Characteristics .............................................................................................................
25.3 AC Characteristics .............................................................................................................
25.3.1 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................
25.3.2 Control Signal Timing ..........................................................................................
25.3.3 Bus Timing ...........................................................................................................
25.3.4 Direct Memory Access Controller Timing...........................................................
25.3.5 Multifunction Timer Pulse Unit Timing...............................................................
25.3.6 I/O Port Timing.....................................................................................................
25.3.7 Watchdog Timer Timing ......................................................................................
25.3.8 Serial Communication Interface Timing ..............................................................
xiv
749
750
752
752
754
757
768
770
771
772
773
25.3.9 High-speed A/D Converter Timing (excluding A mask) .....................................
25.3.10 Mid-speed Converter Timing (A mask) ...............................................................
25.3.11 Measuring Conditions for AC Characteristics .....................................................
25.4 A/D Converter Characteristics...........................................................................................
774
776
778
779
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics (3.3V, 16.7 MHz Version) .......................... 781
26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ..............................................................................................
26.2 DC Characteristics .............................................................................................................
26.3 AC Characteristics .............................................................................................................
26.3.1 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................
26.3.2 Control Signal Timing ..........................................................................................
26.3.3 Bus Timing ...........................................................................................................
26.3.4 Direct Memory Access Controller Timing...........................................................
26.3.5 Multifunction Timer Pulse Unit Timing...............................................................
26.3.6 I/O Port Timing.....................................................................................................
26.3.7 Watchdog Timer Timing ......................................................................................
26.3.8 Serial Communication Interface Timing ..............................................................
26.3.9 High-speed A/D Converter Timing (excluding A mask) .....................................
26.3.10 Mid-speed Converter Timing (A mask) ...............................................................
26.3.11 Measurement Conditions for AC Characteristic...................................................
26.4 A/D Converter Characteristics...........................................................................................
781
782
784
784
786
789
800
802
803
804
805
806
808
810
811
Appendix A On-Chip Supporting Module Registers ................................................ 813
A.1
Addresses........................................................................................................................... 813
Appendix B Block Diagrams ........................................................................................... 826
Appendix C Pin States ....................................................................................................... 865
Appendix D Notes when Converting the F–ZTAT Application Software
to the Mask-ROM Versions..................................................................... 875
Appendix E
Product Code Lineup ................................................................................. 876
Appendix F
Package Dimensions .................................................................................. 878
xv
xvi
Section 1 SH7040 Series Overview
1.1
SH7040 Series Overview
The SH7040 Series (SH7040/41/42/43/44/45) CMOS single-chip microprocessors integrate a
Renesas-original architecture, high-speed CPU with peripheral functions required for system
configuration.
The CPU has a RISC-type instruction set. Most instructions can be executed in one clock cycle,
which greatly improves instruction execution speed. In addition, the 32-bit internal-bus
architecture enhances data processing power. With this CPU, it has become possible to assemble
low cost, high performance/high-functioning systems, even for applications that were previously
impossible with microprocessors, such as real-time control, which demands high speeds. In
particular, the SH7040 series has a 1-kbyte on-chip cache, which allows an improvement in CPU
performance during external memory access.
In addition, the SH7040 Series includes on-chip peripheral functions necessary for system
configuration, such as large-capacity ROM and RAM, timers, a serial communication interface
(SCI), an A/D converter, an interrupt controller, and I/O ports. Memory or peripheral LSIs can be
connected efficiently with an external memory access support function. This greatly reduces
system cost.
In addition to the masked-ROM versions of the SH7040 series, the SH7042 and SH7043 have a
ZTAT™*1 version with user-programmable on-chip PROM and the SH7044 and SH7045 have an
F-ZTATTM*2 version with on-chip flash memory. These versions enable users to respond quickly
and flexibly to changing application specifications, growing production volumes, and other
conditions.
Notes: *1 ZTAT (Zero Turn-Around Time) is a registered trademark of Renesas Technology
Corp.
*2 F-ZTAT (Flexible ZTAT) is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp.
1.1.1
SH7040 Series Features
CPU:
• Original Renesas architecture
• 32-bit internal data bus
• General-register machine
 Sixteen 32-bit general registers
 Three 32-bit control registers
 Four 32-bit system registers
• RISC-type instruction set
1
•
•
•
•
 Instruction length: 16-bit fixed length for improved code efficiency
 Load-store architecture (basic operations are executed between registers)
 Delayed branch instructions reduce pipeline disruption during branch
 Instruction set based on C language
Instruction execution time: one instruction/cycle (35 ns/instruction at 28.7-MHz operation)
Address space: Architecture supports 4 Gbytes
On-chip multiplier: multiplication operations (32 bits × 32 bits → 64 bits) and
multiplication/accumulation operations (32 bits × 32 bits + 64 bits → 64 bits) executed in two
to four cycles
Five-stage pipeline
Cache Memory:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-kbyte instruction cache
Caching of instruction codes and PC relative read data
4-byte line length (1 longword: 2 instruction lengths)
256 entry cache tags
Direct map method
On-chip ROM/RAM, and on-chip I/O areas not objects of cache
Used in common with on-chip RAM; 2 kbytes of on-chip RAM used as address array/data
array when cache is enabled
Interrupt Controller (INTC):
• Nine external interrupt pins (NMI, IRQ0–IRQ7)
• Forty-three internal interrupt sources (forty-four for A mask)
• Sixteen programmable priority levels
User Break Controller (UBC):
• Generates an interrupt when the CPU or DMAC generates a bus cycle with specified
conditions
• Simplifies configuration of an on-chip debugger
Bus State Controller (BSC):
• Supports external extended memory access
 16-bit (QFP-112, TQFP-120), or 32-bit (QFP-144) external data bus
• Memory address space divided into five areas (four areas of SRAM space, one area of DRAM
space) with the following settable features:
 Bus size (8, 16, or 32 bits)
 Number of wait cycles
2
•
•
•
•
 Outputs chip-select signals for each area
 During DRAM space access:
• Outputs RAS and CAS signals for DRAM
• Can generate a RAS precharge time assurance Tp cycle
DRAM burst access function
 Supports high-speed access mode for DRAM
DRAM refresh function
 Programmable refresh interval
 Supports CAS-before-RAS refresh and self-refresh modes
Wait cycles can be inserted using an external WAIT signal
Address data multiplex I/O devices can be accessed
Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) (4 Channels):
• Supports cycle-steal transfers
• Supports dual address transfer mode
• Can be switched between direct and indirect transfer modes (channel 3 only)
 Direct transfer mode: transfers the data at the transfer source address to the transfer
destination address
 Indirect transfer mode: regards the data at the transfer source address as an address and
transfers the data at that address to the transfer destination address
Data Transfer Controller (DTC):
•
•
•
•
Data transfer independent of the CPU possible through peripheral I/O interrupt requests
Transfer mode can be set for each interrupt factor (transfer mode set in memory)
Multiple data transfers possible for one activating factor
Abundant transfer modes
 Normal mode/repeat mode/block transfer mode selectable
• Transfer unit can be set to byte/word/longword
• Interrupts activating the DTC requested of the CPU
 Interrupts can be generated to the CPU after completion of one data transfer
 Interrupts can be generated to the CPU after completing all designated data transfers
• Transfer can be activated by software
Multifunction Timer/Pulse Unit (MTU):
• Maximum 16 types of waveform output or maximum 16 types of pulse I/O processing possible
based on 16-bit timer, 5 channels
• 16 dual-use output compare/input capture registers
3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
16 independent comparators
8 types of counter input clock
Input capture function
Pulse output mode
 One shot, toggle, PWM, phase-compensated PWM, reset-synchronized PWM
Multiple counter synchronization function
Phase-compensated PWM output mode
 Non-overlapping waveform output for 6-phase inverter control
 Automatic setting for dead time
 PWM duty cycle can be set from 0 to 100%
 Output off function
Reset-synchronized PWM mode
 3-phase output of any duty cycle positive phase/reverse phase PWM waveforms
Phase calculation mode
 2-phase encoder calculation processing
Compare Match Timer (CMT) (Two Channels):
• 16-bit free-running counter
• One compare register
• Generates an interrupt request upon compare match
Watchdog Timer (WDT) (One Channel):
• Watchdog timer or interval timer
• Count overflow can generate an internal reset, external signal, or interrupt
Serial Communication Interface (SCI) (Two Channels):
(Per Channel):
•
•
•
•
Asynchronous or clock-synchronous mode is selectable
Can transmit and receive simultaneously (full duplex)
On-chip dedicated baud rate generator
Multiprocessor communication function
I/O Ports:
• QFP 112 (SH7040, SH7042, SH7044), TQFP-120 (SH7040, SH7042)
 Input/output: 74
 Input: 8
4
 Total: 82
• QFP 144 (SH7041, SH7043, SH7045)
 Input/output: 98
 Input: 8
 Total: 106
A/D Converter:
•
•
•
•
10 bits × 8 channels
Conversion upon external trigger possible
Sample and hold function: two on-chip units (two channels can be sampled simultaneously)
Depending on the product, there is a high speed, mid-accuracy A/D on-chip type and a midspeed, high accuracy A/D on-chip type. For details, see the product lineup.
Large Capacity On-Chip Memory:
• ROM (128 kbytes PROM, 256 kbytes/128 kbytes/64 kbytes mask ROM, 256 kbytes flash
ROM)
 SH7044, SH7045: 256 kbytes (flash ROM, mask ROM)
 SH7042, SH7043: 128 kbytes (ZTAT, mask ROM)
 SH7040, SH7041: 64 kbytes (mask ROM)
• RAM: 4 kbytes (2 kbytes when cache is used)
Operating Modes:
• Operating modes
 Expanded mode with ROM disabled
 Expanded mode with ROM enabled
 Single-chip mode
• Processing states
 Program execution state
 Exception processing state
 Bus-released state
• Power-down modes
 Sleep mode
 Software standby mode
Clock Pulse Generator (CPG):
• On-chip clock pulse generator
 On-chip clock-doubling PLL circuit
5
6
Type
Abbreviation
ZTAT
SH7042
SH7042A
Mask
Version
A mask
SH7043
FLASH
MASK
A/D
On-chip External
Accuracy
ROM
Bus Width (5V Version) Package
Notes on the SH7040 Series Specifications (For details, see each section in this manual)
Operating
Temp
128 kB
16 bits
±15LSB
QFP2020-112
(High-Speed)
128 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112
–20°C to 75°C
(Mid-Speed)
TQFP1414-120
QFP2020-112Cu*
128 kB
32 bits
±15LSB
QFP2020-144
(High-Speed)
Frequency Voltage Type Name
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
16 MHz
INTC
DTC
DMAC
MTU
A/D
Converter
ROM
Electrical
Characteristics
5V
3.3 V
HD6477042F28
HD6477042VF16
See “HighSpeed A/D
Converter”
See “128 kB
PROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
28 MHz
16 MHz
16 MHz
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
3.3 V
5V
3.3 V
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “MidHD6477042AF28
Speed A/D
HD6477042AVF16 vectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
HD6477042AVX16 converter
HD6477042ACF28
HD6477042AVCF16
See “128 kB
PROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6477043F28
HD6477043VF16
See “HighSpeed A/D
Converter”
See “128 kB
PROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
SH7043A
A mask
128 kB
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
QFP2020-144Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
5V
3.3 V
HD6477043AF28
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “MidHD6477043AVF16 vectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
Speed A/D
HD6477043ACF28 converter
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
HD6477043AVCF16
See “128 kB
PROM”
SH7044F
A mask
256 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112
(Mid-Speed)
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
5V
HD64F7044F28
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “Midvectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
Speed A/D
converter
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
See “256 kB Flash See “Electrical
Memory”
Characteristics”
SH7045F
A mask
256 kB
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144
(Mid-Speed)
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
5V
HD64F7045F28
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “Midvectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
Speed A/D
converter
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
See “256 kB Flash See “Electrical
Memory”
Characteristics”
SH7040A
A mask
64 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112
–20°C to 75°C
(Mid-Speed)
TQFP1414-120
QFP2020-112Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
16 MHz
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
3.3 V
5V
3.3 V
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “MidHD6437040AF28
Speed A/D
HD6437040AVF16 vectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
HD6437040AVX16 converter
HD6437040ACF28
HD6437040AVCF16
See “64 kB Mask
ROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
SH7041A
A mask
64 kB
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
QFP2020-144Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
5V
3.3 V
HD6437041AF28
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “MidHD6437041AVF16 vectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
Speed A/D
HD6437041ACF28 converter
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
HD6437041AVCF16
See “64 kB Mask
ROM”
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
128 kB
16 bits
±15LSB
QFP2020-112
(High-Speed)
5V
3.3 V
HD6437042F28
HD6437042VF16
See “HighSpeed A/D
Converter”
See “128 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
128 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112
–20°C to 75°C
(Mid-Speed)
TQFP1414-120
QFP2020-112Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
16 MHz
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
3.3 V
5V
3.3 V
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “MidHD6437042AF28
Speed A/D
HD6437042AVF16 vectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
HD6437042AVX16 converter
HD6437042ACF28
HD6437042AVCF16
See “128 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
128 kB
32 bits
±15LSB
QFP2020-144
(High-Speed)
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
HD6437043F28
HD6437043VF16
See “HighSpeed A/D
Converter”
See “128 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
128 kB
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
*
QFP2020-144Cu
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
5V
3.3 V
HD6437043AF28
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “MidHD6437043AVF16 vectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
Speed A/D
HD6437043ACF28 converter
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
HD6437043AVCF16
See “128 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
SH7042
SH7042A
A mask
SH7043
SH7043A
A mask
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
16 MHz
7
8
Notes on the SH7040 Series Specifications (For details, see each section in this manual)
Type
Abbreviation
Mask
Version
A/D
On-chip External
Accuracy
ROM
Bus Width (5V Version) Package
MASK
SH7044
A mask
256 kB
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112
(Mid-Speed)
–20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
5V
HD6437044F28
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “Midvectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
Speed A/D
converter
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
See “256 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
SH7045
A mask
256kB
32bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144
(Mid-Speed)
-20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
5V
HD6437045F28
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “Midvectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
Speed A/D
converter
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
See “256 kB Mask See “Electrical
ROM”
Characteristics”
SH7040A
A mask
16 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-112
-20°C to 75°C
(Mid-Speed)
TQFP1414-120
QFP2020-112Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
16 MHz
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
3.3 V
5V
3.3 V
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “MidHD6417040AF28
Speed A/D
HD6417040AVF16 vectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
HD6417040AVX16 converter
HD6417040ACF28
HD6417040AVCF16
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
SH7041A
A mask
32 bits
±4LSB
QFP2020-144
-20°C to 75°C 28 MHz
(Mid-Speed)
16 MHz
QFP2020-144Cu*
28 MHz
16 MHz
5V
3.3 V
5V
3.3 V
HD6417041AF28
Change the interrupt Change the DTER Change the setting Change the Usage See “MidHD6417041AVF16 vectors related A/D access methods methods on transfer Notes
Speed A/D
HD6417041ACF28 converter
and DTC vectors requests
Converter”
HD6417041AVCF16
See “Electrical
Characteristics”
ROM
less
Operating
Temp
Frequency Voltage Type Name
INTC
DTC
DMAC
MTU
A/D
Converter
ROM
Electrical
Characteristics
Note: * Package with Copper used as the lead material.
9
10
1.2
Block Diagram
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
VCC /FWP*1
PF7/AN7
PF6/AN6
PF5/AN5
PF4/AN4
PF3/AN3
PF2/AN2
PF1/AN1
PF0/AN0
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
AVCC
AVSS
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Flash ROM/PROM/
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
RAM/cache
mask ROM
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
4 kbytes/1 kbyte
256kbytes/
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
128 kbytes/64 kbytes
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;
;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;
;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;
;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Data
transfer
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;; controller
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
CPU
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
Direct memory
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;access controller
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Interrupt
User
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Bus state controller
controller break
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Serial communi;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Multifunction timer/
cation interface
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
pulse unit
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
(×2 channels)
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Watch;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
A/D
Compare match
dog
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
converter
timer (×2 channels)
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
timer ;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;;
;;;;;;;
;;
;;;
;;
;;;
;;
;;;
;;
;;;
: Peripheral address bus
;;;;
;;;;: Peripheral data bus
: Internal address bus
;;;;;
;;;;;: Internal upper data bus
;;;;;
;;;;;: Internal lower data bus
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
PE12/TIOC4A
PE11/TIOC3D
PE10/TIOC3C
PE9/TIOC3B
PE8/TIOC3A
PE7/TIOC2B
PE6/TIOC2A
PE5/TIOC1B
PE4/TIOC1A
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
PLLVCC
PLL
RES/VPP*2
WDTOVF
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
NMI
EXTAL
XTAL
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
PB1/A17
PB0/A16
PA15/CK
PA14/RD
PA13/WRH
PA12/WRL
PA11/CS1
PA10/CS0
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
PA4/TXD1
PA3/RXD1
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
PA1/TXD0
PA0/RXD0
Figure 1.1 is a block diagram of the SH7040 Series QFP-112 pin and TQFP-120 pin. Figure 1.2 is
a block diagram of the SH7040 Series QFP-144 pin.
PC15/A15
PC14/A14
PC13/A13
PC12/A12
PC11/A11
PC10/A10
PC9/A9
PC8/A8
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5
PC4/A4
PC3/A3
PC2/A2
PC1/A1
PC0/A0
PD15/D15
PD14/D14
PD13/D13
PD12/D12
PD11/D11
PD10/D10
PD9/D9
PD8/D8
PD7/D7
PD6/D6
PD5/D5
PD4/D4
PD3/D3
PD2/D2
PD1/D1
PD0/D0
Notes: *1 VCC in the mask and ZTAT versions; FWP in the F-ZTAT version
(however, FWE in writer mode)
*2 Vpp: ZTAT version only
Figure 1.1 Block Diagram of the SH7040, SH7042, SH7044 (QFP-112 Pin), SH7040, SH7042
(TQFP-120 pin)
11
: Peripheral address bus
;;;;;
;;;;;: Peripheral data bus
: Internal address bus
;;;;;
: Internal upper data bus
;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;: Internal lower data bus
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
PE12/TIOC4A
PE11/TIOC3D
PE10/TIOC3C
PE9/TIOC3B
PE8/TIOC3A
PE7/TIOC2B
PE6/TIOC2A
PE5/TIOC1B
PE4/TIOC1A
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
Flash ROM/PROM/
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
RAM/cache
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
mask ROM
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
4
kbytes/1
kbyte
256
kbytes/
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
128 kbytes/64 kbytes
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;
;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Data
transfer
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;
controller
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;
CPU
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;; Direct memory
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;
;;; access controller
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Interrupt
User
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Bus state controller ;;;;;
controller break
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Serial communi;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Multifunction timer/
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
cation interface
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
pulse unit
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;
(×2
channels)
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;; ;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
WatchA/D
Compare match
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
dog
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
converter
timer (×2 channels)
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;
timer ;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;
;;;; ;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
;;;
PF7/AN7
PF6/AN6
PF5/AN5
PF4/AN4
PF3/AN3
PF2/AN2
PF1/AN1
PF0/AN0
PLL
PA23/WRHH
PA22/WRHL
PA21/CASHH
PA20/CASHL
PA19/BACK/DRAK1
PA18/BREQ/DRAK0
PA17/WAIT
PA16/AH
PA15/CK
PA14/RD
PA13/WRH
PA12/WRL
PA11/CS1
PA10/CS0
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
PA4/TXD1
PA3/RXD1
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
PA1/TXD0
PA0/RXD0
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
PB1/A17
PB0/A16
RES/VPP*2
WDTOVF
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
NMI
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLVCC
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
VCC /FWP*1
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
AVCC
AVSS
AVref
PC15/A15
PC14/A14
PC13/A13
PC12/A12
PC11/A11
PC10/A10
PC9/A9
PC8/A8
PC7/A7
PC6/A6
PC5/A5
PC4/A4
PC3/A3
PC2/A2
PC1/A1
PC0/A0
PD31/D31/ADTRG
PD30/D30/IRQOUT
PD29/D29/CS3
PD28/D28/CS2
PD27/D27/DACK1
PD26/D26/DACK0
PD25/D25/DREQ1
PD24/D24/DREQ0
PD23/D23/IRQ7
PD22/D22/IRQ6
PD21/D21/IRQ5
PD20/D20/IRQ4
PD19/D19/IRQ3
PD18/D18/IRQ2
PD17/D17/IRQ1
PD16/D16/IRQ0
PD15/D15
PD14/D14
PD13/D13
PD12/D12
PD11/D11
PD10/D10
PD9/D9
PD8/D8
PD7/D7
PD6/D6
PD5/D5
PD4/D4
PD3/D3
PD2/D2
PD1/D1
PD0/D0
Notes: *1 VCC in the mask and ZTAT versions; FWP in the F-ZTAT version (however, FWE in writer mode)
*2 Vpp: ZTAT version only
Figure 1.2 Block Diagram of the SH7041, SH7043, SH7045 (QFP-144 Pin)
12
1.3
Pin Arrangement and Pin Functions
1.3.1
Pin Arrangment
QFP-112
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
PD12/D12
VSS
PD13/D13
PD14/D14
PD15/D15
PA0/RXD0
PA1/TXD0
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
PA3/RXD1
PA4/TXD1
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
PA10/CS0
PA11/CS1
VSS
PA12/WRL
VCC
PA13/WRH
WDTOVF
PA14/RD
VSS
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
VSS
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
VSS
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PC8/A8
PC9/A9
PC10/A10
PC11/A11
PC12/A12
PC13/A13
PC14/A14
PC15/A15
PB0/A16
VCC
PB1/A17
VSS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
PE4/TIOC1A
VSS
PF0/AN0
PF1/AN1
PF2/AN2
PF3/AN3
PF4/AN4
PF5/AN5
AVSS
PF6/AN6
PF7/AN7
AVCC
VSS
PE5/TIOC1B
VCC
PE6/TIOC2A
PE7/TIOC2B
PE8/TIOC3A
PE9/TIOC3B
PE10/TIOC3C
VSS
PE11/TIOC3D
PE12/TIOC4A
PB13/TIOC4B/MRES
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
RES/VPP*2
PA15/CK
PLLVSS
PLLCAP
PLLVCC
MD0
MD1
VCC (FWP*1)
NMI
MD2
EXTAL
MD3
XTAL
VSS
PD0/D0
PD1/D1
PD2/D2
PD3/D3
PD4/D4
VCC
PD5/D5
PD6/D6
PD7/D7
VSS
PD8/D8
PD9/D9
PD10/D10
PD11/D11
Figure 1.3 shows the pin arrangement for the QFP-112 (top view).
Notes: *1 VCC in the mask and ZTAT versions; FWP in the F-ZTAT version (however, FWE in writer mode)
*2 Vpp: ZTAT version only
Figure 1.3 SH7040, SH7042, SH7044 Pin Arrangement (QFP-112 Top View)
13
PF5/AN5
PF4/AN4
PF3/AN3
PF2/AN2
PF1/AN1
PF0/AN0
Vss
PE4/TIOC1A
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
NC
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
PE12/TIOC4A
PE11/TIOC3D
Vss
PE10/TIOC3C
PE9/TIOC3B
PE8/TIOC3A
PE7/TIOC2B
PE6/TIOC2A
Vcc
NC
PE5/TIOC1B
Vss
AVcc
PF7/AN7
PF6/AN6
AVss
Figure 1.4 shows the pin arrangement for the TFP-120 (top view).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
TQFP-120
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
PA1/TXD0
PA0/RXD0
PD15/D15
PD14/D14
PD13/D13
Vss
PD12/D12
NC
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
PA4/TXD1
PA3/RXD1
PA12/WRL
Vss
PA11/CS1
PA10/CS0
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
WDTOVF
PA13/WRH
Vcc
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
Vss
PA14/RD
NC
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
NC
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
Vss
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PC8/A8
PC9/A9
PC10/A10
PC11/A11
PC12/A12
PC13/A13
PC14/A14
PC15/A15
PB0/A16
Vcc
PB1/A17
Vss
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
Vss
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
NC
Note: * Vpp: ZTAT version only
Figure 1.4 SH7040, SH7042 Pin Arrangement (TQFP-120 Top View)
14
NC
RES/(Vpp*)
PA15/CK
PLLVss
PLLCAP
PLLVcc
MD0
MD1
Vcc
NMI
MD2
EXTAL
MD3
XTAL
Vss
PD0/D0
PD1/D1
PD2/D2
PD3/D3
PD4/D4
Vcc
PD5/D5
PD6/D6
PD7/D7
Vss
PD8/D8
PD9/D9
PD10/D10
PD11/D11
NC
QFP-144
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
PD16/D16/IRQ0
VSS
PD17/D17/IRQ1
PD18/D18/IRQ2
PD19/D19/IRQ3
PD20/D20/IRQ4
PD21/D21/IRQ5
PD22/D22/IRQ6
PD23/D23/IRQ7
VCC
PD24/D24/DREQ0
VSS
PD25/D25/DREQ1
PD26/D26/DACK0
PD27/D27/DACK1
PD28/D28/CS2
PD29/D29/CS3
VSS
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
PA10/CS0
PA11/CS1
PA12/WRL
PA13/WRH
PD30/D30/IRQOUT
PD31/D31/ADTRG
WDTOVF
PA14/RD
VSS
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
VCC
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
VSS
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
PC4/A4
VCC
PC5/A5
VSS
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PC8/A8
PC9/A9
PC10/A10
PC11/A11
PC12/A12
PC13/A13
PC14/A14
PC15/A15
PB0/A16
VCC
PB1/A17
VSS
PA20/CASHL
PA19/BACK/DRAK1
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
PA18/BREQ/DRAK0
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
VSS
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
PA23/WRHH
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
PA22/WRHL
PA21/CASHH
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
VCC
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
PE4/TIOC1A
PE5/TIOC1B
PE6/TIOC2A
VSS
PF0/AN0
PF1/AN1
PF2/AN2
PF3/AN3
PF4/AN4
PF5/AN5
AVSS
PF6/AN6
PF7/AN7
AVref
AVCC
VSS
PA0/RXD0
PA1/TXD0
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
PA3/RXD1
PA4/TXD1
VCC
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
PE7/TIOC2B
PE8/TIOC3A
PE9/TIOC3B
PE10/TIOC3C
VSS
PE11/TIOC3D
PE12/TIOC4A
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
RES/VPP*2
PA15/CK
PLLVSS
PLLCAP
PLLVCC
MD0
MD1
PA17/WAIT
PA16/AH
VCC (FWP*1)
NMI
MD2
EXTAL
MD3
XTAL
VSS
PD0/D0
PD1/D1
PD2/D2
PD3/D3
PD4/D4
VSS
PD5/D5
VCC
PD6/D6
PD7/D7
PD8/D8
PD9/D9
PD10/D10
VSS
PD11/D11
VCC
PD12/D12
PD13/D13
PD14/D14
PD15/D15
Figure 1.5 shows the pin arrangement for the QFP-144 (top view).
Notes: *1 VCC in the mask and ZTAT versions; FWP in the F-ZTAT version (however, FWE in writer mode)
*2 Vpp: ZTAT version only
Figure 1.5 SH7041, SH7043, SH7045 Pin Arrangement (QFP-144 Top View)
15
1.3.2
Table 1.2
Pin Arrangement by Mode
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7040, SH7042 (QFP-112 Pin)
Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
1
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
VCC
2
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
CE
3
VSS
VSS
4
PC0/A0
A0
5
PC1/A1
A1
6
PC2/A2
A2
7
PC3/A3
A3
8
PC4/A4
A4
9
PC5/A5
A5
10
PC6/A6
A6
11
PC7/A7
A7
12
PC8/A8
A8
13
PC9/A9
NC
14
PC10/A10
A10
15
PC11/A11
A11
16
PC12/A12
A12
17
PC13/A13
A13
18
PC14/A14
A14
19
PC15/A15
A15
20
PB0/A16
A16
21
VCC
VCC
22
PB1/A17
NC
23
VSS
VSS
24
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
NC
25
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
OE
26
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
PGM
27
VSS
VSS
28
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
VCC
16
Table 1.2
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7040, SH7042 (QFP-112 Pin) (cont)
Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
29
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
NC
30
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
NC
31
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
NC
32
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
NC
33
VSS
VSS
34
PA14/RD
NC
35
WDTOVF
NC
36
PA13/WRH
NC
37
VCC
VCC
38
PA12/WRL
NC
39
VSS
VSS
40
PA11/CS1
NC
41
PA10/CS0
NC
42
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
NC
43
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
NC
44
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
NC
45
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
NC
46
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQI
NC
47
PA4/TXD1
NC
48
PA3 /RXD1
NC
49
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
NC
50
PA1/TXD0
NC
51
PA0/RXD0
NC
52
PD15/D15
NC
53
PD14/D14
NC
54
PD13/D13
NC
55
VSS
VSS
56
PD12/D12
NC
57
PD11/D11
NC
58
PD10/D10
NC
17
Table 1.2
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7040, SH7042 (QFP-112 Pin) (cont)
Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
59
PD9/D9
NC
60
PD8/D8
NC
61
VSS
VSS
62
PD7/D7
D7
63
PD6/D6
D6
64
PD5/D5
D5
65
VCC
VCC
66
PD4/D4
D4
67
PD3/D3
D3
68
PD2/D2
D2
69
PD1/D1
D1
70
PD0/D0
D0
71
VSS
VSS
72
XTAL
NC
73
MD3
VCC
74
EXTAL
VSS
75
MD2
VCC
76
NMI
A9
77
VCC
VCC
78
MD1
VCC
79
MD0
VCC
80
PLLVCC
VCC
81
PLLCAP
VSS
82
PLLVSS
VSS
83
PA15/CK
NC
84
RES
VPP
85
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
NC
86
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
NC
87
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
NC
88
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
NC
18
Table 1.2
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7040, SH7042 (QFP-112 Pin) (cont)
Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
89
PE4/TIOC1A
NC
90
VSS
VSS
91
PF0/AN0
VSS
92
PF1/AN1
VSS
93
PF2/AN2
VSS
94
PF3/AN3
VSS
95
PF4/AN4
VSS
96
PF5/AN5
VSS
97
AVSS
VSS
98
PF6/AN6
VSS
99
PF7/AN7
VSS
100
AVCC
VCC
101
VSS
VSS
102
PE5/TIOC1B
NC
103
VCC
VCC
104
PE6/TIOC2A
NC
105
PE7/TIOC2B
NC
106
PE8/TIOC3A
NC
107
PE9/TIOC3B
NC
108
PE10/TIOC3C
NC
109
VSS
VSS
110
PE11/TIOC3D
NC
111
PE12/TIOC4A
NC
112
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
NC
19
Table 1.3
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7040, SH7042 (TQFP-120 Pin)
TQFP120 Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
1
NC
NC
2
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
VCC
3
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
CE
4
VSS
VSS
5
PC0/A0
A0
6
PC1/A1
A1
7
PC2/A2
A2
8
PC3/A3
A3
9
PC4/A4
A4
10
PC5/A5
A5
11
PC6/A6
A6
12
PC7/A7
A7
13
PC8/A8
A8
14
PC9/A9
NC
15
PC10/A10
A10
16
PC11/A11
A11
17
PC12/A12
A12
18
PC13/A13
A13
19
PC14/A14
A14
20
PC15/A15
A15
21
PB0/A16
A16
22
VCC
VCC
23
PB1/A17
NC
24
VSS
VSS
25
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
NC
26
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
OE
27
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
PGM
28
VSS
VSS
29
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
VCC
30
NC
NC
31
NC
NC
20
Table 1.3
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7040, SH7042 (TQFP-120 Pin) (cont)
TQFP120 Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
32
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
NC
33
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
NC
34
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
NC
35
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
NC
36
VSS
VSS
37
PA14/RD
NC
38
WDTOVF
NC
39
PA13/WRH
NC
40
VCC
VCC
41
PA12/WRL
NC
42
VSS
VSS
43
PA11/CS1
NC
44
PA10/CS0
NC
45
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
NC
46
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
NC
47
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
NC
48
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
NC
49
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
NC
50
PA4/TXD1
NC
51
PA3/RXD2
NC
52
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
NC
53
PA1/TXD0
NC
54
PA0/RXD0
NC
55
PD15/D15
NC
56
PD14/D14
NC
57
PD13/D13
NC
58
VSS
VSS
59
PD12/D12
NC
60
NC
NC
61
NC
NC
62
PD11/D11
NC
21
Table 1.3
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7040, SH7042 (TQFP-120 Pin) (cont)
TQFP120 Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
63
PD10/D10
NC
64
PD9/D9
NC
65
PD8/D8
NC
66
VSS
VSS
67
PD7/D7
D7
68
PD6/D6
D6
69
PD5/D5
D5
70
VCC
VCC
71
PD4/D4
D4
72
PD3/D3
D3
73
PD2/D2
D2
74
PD1/D1
D1
75
PD0/D0
D0
76
VSS
VSS
77
XTAL
NC
78
MD3
VCC
79
EXTAL
VSS
80
MD2
VCC
81
NMI
A9
82
VCC
VCC
83
MD1
VCC
84
MD0
VCC
85
PLLVCC
VCC
86
PLLCAP
VSS
87
PLLVSS
VSS
88
PA15/CK
NC
89
RES
VPP
90
NC
NC
91
NC
NC
92
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
NC
93
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
NC
22
Table 1.3
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7040, SH7042 (TQFP-120 Pin) (cont)
TQFP120 Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
94
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
NC
95
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
NC
96
PE4/TIOC1A
NC
97
VSS
VSS
98
PF0/AN0
VSS
99
PF1/AN1
VSS
100
PF2/AN2
VSS
101
PF3/AN3
VSS
102
PF4/AN4
VSS
103
PF5/AN5
VSS
104
AVSS
VSS
105
PF6/AN6
VSS
106
PF7/AN7
VSS
107
AVCC
VCC
108
VSS
VSS
109
PE5/TIOC1B
NC
110
NC
NC
111
VCC
VCC
112
PE6/TIOC2A
NC
113
PE7/TIOC2B
NC
114
PE8/TIOC3A
NC
115
PE9/TIOC3B
NC
116
PE10/TIOC3C
NC
117
VSS
VSS
118
PE11/TIOC3D
NC
119
PE12/TIOC4A
NC
120
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
NC
23
Table 1.4
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7041, SH7043 (QFP-144 Pin)
Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
1
PA23/WRHH
NC
2
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
VCC
3
PA22/WRHL
NC
4
PA21/CASHH
NC
5
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
CE
6
VSS
VSS
7
PC0/A0
A0
8
PC1/A1
A1
9
PC2/A2
A2
10
PC3/A3
A3
11
PC4/A4
A4
12
VCC
VCC
13
PC5/A5
A5
14
VSS
VSS
15
PC6/A6
A6
16
PC7/A7
A7
17
PC8/A8
A8
18
PC9/A9
NC
19
PC10/A10
A10
20
PC11/A11
A11
21
PC12/A12
A12
22
PC13/A13
A13
23
PC14/A14
A14
24
PC15/A15
A15
25
PB0/A16
A16
26
VCC
VCC
27
PB1/A17
NC
28
VSS
VSS
29
PA20/CASHL
NC
30
PA19/BACK/DRAK1
NC
24
Table 1.4
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7041, SH7043 (QFP-144 Pin) (cont)
Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
31
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
NC
32
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
OE
33
PA18/BREQ/DRAK0
NC
34
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
PGM
35
VSS
VSS
36
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
VCC
37
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
NC
38
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
NC
39
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
NC
40
VCC
VCC
41
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
NC
42
VSS
VSS
43
PA14/RD
NC
44
WDTOVF
NC
45
PD31/D31/ADTRG
NC
46
PD30/D30/IRQOUT
NC
47
PA13/WRH
NC
48
PA12/WRL
NC
49
PA11/CS1
NC
50
PA10/CS0
NC
51
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
NC
52
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
NC
53
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
NC
54
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
NC
55
VSS
VSS
56
PD29/D29/CS3
NC
57
PD28/D28/CS2
NC
58
PD27/D27/DACK1
NC
59
PD26/D26/DACK0
NC
60
PD25/D25/DREQ1
NC
25
Table 1.4
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7041, SH7043 (QFP-144 Pin) (cont)
Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
61
VSS
VSS
62
PD24/D24/DREQ0
NC
63
VCC
VCC
64
PD23/D23/IRQ7
NC
65
PD22/D22/IRQ6
NC
66
PD21/D21/IRQ5
NC
67
PD20/D20/IRQ4
NC
68
PD19/D19/IRQ3
NC
69
PD18/D18/IRQ2
NC
70
PD17/D17/IRQ1
NC
71
VSS
VSS
72
PD16/D16/IRQ0
NC
73
PD15/D15
NC
74
PD14/D14
NC
75
PD13/D13
NC
76
PD12/D12
NC
77
VCC
VCC
78
PD11/D11
NC
79
VSS
VSS
80
PD10/D10
NC
81
PD9/D9
NC
82
PD8/D8
NC
83
PD7/D7
D7
84
PD6/D6
D6
85
VCC
VCC
86
PD5 /D5
D5
87
VSS
VSS
88
PD4/D4
D4
89
PD3/D3
D3
90
PD2/D2
D2
26
Table 1.4
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7041, SH7043 (QFP-144 Pin) (cont)
Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
91
PD1/D1
D1
92
PD0/D0
D0
93
VSS
VSS
94
XTAL
NC
95
MD3
VCC
96
EXTAL
VSS
97
MD2
VCC
98
NMI
A9
99
VCC
VCC
100
PA16/AH
NC
101
PA17/WAIT
NC
102
MD1
VCC
103
MD0
VCC
104
PLLVCC
VCC
105
PLLCAP
VSS
106
PLLVSS
VSS
107
PA15/CK
NC
108
RES
VPP
109
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
NC
110
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
NC
111
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
NC
112
VCC
VCC
113
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
NC
114
PE4/TIOC1A
NC
115
PE5/TIOC1B
NC
116
PE6/TIOC2A
NC
117
VSS
VSS
118
PF0/AN0
VSS
119
PF1/AN1
VSS
120
PF2/AN2
VSS
27
Table 1.4
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7041, SH7043 (QFP-144 Pin) (cont)
Pin No.
MCU Mode
PROM Mode
121
PF3/AN3
VSS
122
PF4/AN4
VSS
123
PF5/AN5
VSS
124
AVSS
VSS
125
PF6/AN6
VSS
126
PF7/AN7
VSS
127
AVref
VCC
128
AVCC
VCC
129
VSS
VSS
130
PA0/RXD0
NC
131
PA1/TXD0
NC
132
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0 /IREQ0
NC
133
PA3/RXD1
NC
134
PA4/TXD1
NC
135
VCC
VCC
136
PA5 /SCK1/DREQ1/IREQ1
NC
137
PE7/TIOC2B
NC
138
PE8/TIOC3A
NC
139
PE9/TIOC3B
NC
140
PE10/TIOC3C
NC
141
VSS
VSS
142
PE11/TIOC3D
NC
143
PE12/TIOC4A
NC
144
PE13/TIOC4B /MRES
NC
28
Table 1.5
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7044 (QFP-112 Pin)
PinNo.
MCU
Writer mode
1
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
NC
2
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
NC
3
VSS
VSS
4
PC0/A0
A0
5
PC1/A1
A1
6
PC2/A2
A2
7
PC3/A3
A3
8
PC4/A4
A4
9
PC5/A5
A5
10
PC6/A6
A6
11
PC7/A7
A7
12
PC8/A8
A8
13
PC9/A9
A9
14
PC10/A10
A10
15
PC11/A11
A11
16
PC12/A12
A12
17
PC13/A13
A13
18
PC14/A14
A14
19
PC15/A15
A15
20
PB0/A16
A16
21
VCC
VCC
22
PB1/A17
NC
23
VSS
VSS
24
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
NC
25
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
NC
26
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
A17
27
VSS
VSS
28
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
NC
29
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
NC
30
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
NC
31
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
NC
32
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
NC
29
Table 1.5
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7044 (QFP-112 Pin) (cont)
PinNo.
MCU
Writer mode
33
VSS
VSS
34
PA14/RD
NC
35
WDTOVF
NC
36
PA13/WRH
NC
37
VCC
VCC
38
PA12/WRL
NC
39
VSS
VSS
40
PA11/CS1
NC
41
PA10/CS0
NC
42
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
CE
43
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
OE
44
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
WE
45
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
NC
46
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
VCC
47
PA4/TXD1
NC
48
PA3/RXD1
NC
49
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
VCC
50
PA1/TXD0
VCC
51
PA0/RXD0
NC
52
PD15/D15
NC
53
PD14/D14
NC
54
PD13/D13
NC
55
VSS
VSS
56
PD12/D12
NC
57
PD11/D11
NC
58
PD10/D10
NC
59
PD9/D9
NC
60
PD8/D8
NC
61
VSS
VSS
62
PD7/D7
D7
63
PD6/D6
D6
64
PD5/D5
D5
30
Table 1.5
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7044 (QFP-112 Pin) (cont)
PinNo.
MCU
65
VCC
VCC
66
PD4/D4
D4
67
PD3/D3
D3
68
PD2/D2
D2
69
PD1/D1
D1
70
PD0/D0
D0
71
VSS
VSS
72
XTAL
XTAL
73
MD3
MD3
74
EXTAL
EXTAL
75
MD2
MD2
76
NMI
VCC
77
VCC (FWP)*
FWE
78
MD1
MD1
79
MD0
MD0
80
PLLVCC
PLLVCC
81
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
82
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
83
PA15/CK
NC
84
RES
RES
85
PE0/TIOCA/DREQ0
NC
86
PE1/TIOCB/DRAK0
NC
87
PE2/TIOCC/DREQ1
NC
88
PE3/TIOCD/DRAK1
NC
89
PE4/TIOC1A
NC
90
VSS
VSS
91
PF0/AN0
VSS
92
PF1/AN1
VSS
93
PF2/AN2
VSS
94
PF3/AN3
VSS
95
PF4/AN4
VSS
96
PF5/AN5
VSS
Writer mode
Note: * VCC in the mask version; FWP in the F-ZTAT version (however, FWE in the writer mode)
31
Table 1.5
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7044 (QFP-112 Pin) (cont)
PinNo.
MCU
Writer mode
97
AVSS
VSS
98
PF6/AN6
VSS
99
PF7/AN7
VSS
100
AVCC
VCC
101
VSS
VSS
102
PE5/TIOC1B
NC
103
VCC
VCC
104
PE6/TIOC2A
NC
105
PE7/TIOC2B
NC
106
PE8/TIOC3A
NC
107
PE9/TIOC3B
NC
108
PE10/TIOC3C
NC
109
VSS
VSS
110
PE11/TIOC3D
NC
111
PE12/TIOC4A
NC
112
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
NC
32
Table 1.6
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7045 (QFP-144 Pin)
PinNo.
MCU
Writer mode
1
PA23/WRHH
NC
2
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
NC
3
PA22/WRHL
NC
4
PA21/CASHH
NC
5
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
NC
6
VSS
VSS
7
PC0/A0
A0
8
PC1/A1
A1
9
PC2/A2
A2
10
PC3/A3
A3
11
PC4/A4
A4
12
VCC
VCC
13
PC5/A5
A5
14
VSS
VSS
15
PC6/A6
A6
16
PC7/A7
A7
17
PC8/A8
A8
18
PC9/A9
A9
19
PC10/A10
A10
20
PC11/A11
A11
21
PC12/A12
A12
22
PC13/A13
A13
23
PC14/A14
A14
24
PC15/A15
A15
25
PB0/A16
A16
26
VCC
VCC
27
PB1/A17
NC
28
VSS
VSS
29
PA20/CASHL
NC
30
PA19/BACK/DRAK1
NC
31
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
NC
32
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
NC
33
PA18/BREQ/DRAK0
NC
34
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
A17
35
VSS
VSS
36
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
NC
33
Table 1.6
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7045 (QFP-144 Pin) (cont)
PinNo.
MCU
Writer mode
37
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
NC
38
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
NC
39
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
NC
40
VCC
VCC
41
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
NC
42
VSS
VSS
43
PA14/RD
NC
44
WDTOVF
NC
45
PD31/D31/ADTRG
NC
46
PD30/D30/IRQOUT
NC
47
PA13/WRH
NC
48
PA12/WRL
NC
49
PA11/CS1
NC
50
PA10/CS0
NC
51
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
CE
52
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
OE
53
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
WE
54
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
NC
55
VSS
VSS
56
PD29/D29/CS3
NC
57
PD28/D28/CS2
NC
58
PD27/D27/DACK1
NC
59
PD26/D26/DACK0
NC
60
PD25/D25/DREQ1
NC
61
VSS
VSS
62
PD24/D24/DREQ0
NC
63
VCC
VCC
64
PD23/D23/IRQ7
NC
65
PD22/D22/IRQ6
NC
66
PD21/D21/IRQ5
NC
67
PD20/D20/IRQ4
NC
68
PD19/D19/IRQ3
NC
69
PD18/D18/IRQ2
NC
70
PD17/D17/IRQ1
NC
71
VSS
VSS
72
PD16/D16/IRQ0
NC
34
Table 1.6
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7045 (QFP-144 Pin) (cont)
PinNo.
MCU
Writer mode
73
PD15/D15
NC
74
PD14/D14
NC
75
PD13/D13
NC
76
PD12/D12
NC
77
VCC
VCC
78
PD11/D11
NC
79
VSS
VSS
80
PD10/D10
NC
81
PD9/D9
NC
82
PD8/D8
NC
83
PD7/D7
D7
84
PD6/D6
D6
85
VCC
VCC
86
PD5/D5
D5
87
VSS
VSS
88
PD4/D4
D4
89
PD3/D3
D3
90
PD2/D2
D2
91
PD1/D1
D1
92
PD0/D0
D0
93
VSS
VSS
94
XTAL
XTAL
95
MD3
MD3
96
EXTAL
EXTAL
97
MD2
MD2
98
NMI
VCC
99
VCC (FWP)*
FWE
100
PA16/AH
NC
101
PA17/WAIT
NC
102
MD1
MD1
103
MD0
MD0
104
PLLVCC
PLLVCC
105
PLLCAP
PLLCAP
106
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
107
PA15/CK
NC
Note: * VCC in the mask version; FWP in the F-ZTAT version (however, FWE in the writer mode)
35
Table 1.6
Pin Arrangement by Mode for SH7045 (QFP-144 Pin) (cont)
PinNo.
MCU
Writer mode
108
RES
RES
109
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
NC
110
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
NC
111
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
NC
112
VCC
VCC
113
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
NC
114
PE4/TIOC1A
NC
115
PE5/TIOC1B
NC
116
PE6/TIOC2A
NC
117
VSS
VSS
118
PF0/AN0
VSS
119
PF1/AN1
VSS
120
PF2/AN2
VSS
121
PF3/AN3
VSS
122
PF4/AN4
VSS
123
PF5/AN5
VSS
124
AVSS
VSS
125
PF6/AN6
VSS
126
PF7/AN7
VSS
127
AVref
VCC
128
AVCC
VCC
129
VSS
VSS
130
PA0/RXD0
NC
131
PA1/TXD0
VCC
132
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
VCC
133
PA3/RXD1
NC
134
PA4/TXD1
NC
135
VCC
VCC
136
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
VCC
137
PE7/TIOC2B
NC
138
PE8/TIOC3A
NC
139
PE9/TIOC3B
NC
140
PE10/TIOC3C
NC
141
VSS
VSS
142
PE11/TIOC3D
NC
143
PE12/TIOC4A
NC
144
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
NC
36
1.3.3
Pin Functions
Table 1.7 lists the pin functions.
Table 1.7
Pin Functions
Classification
Symbol
I/O
Name
Function
Power supply
VCC
I
Supply
Connects to power supply.
Connect all V CC pins to the system
supply. No operation will occur if
there are any open pins.
VSS
I
Ground
Connects to ground.
Connect all V SS pins to the system
ground. No operation will occur if
there are any open pins.
VPP
I
Program
supply
Connects to the power supply (VCC)
during normal operation.
When in PROM mode, apply 12.5 V.
Clock
System control
PLLVCC
I
PLL supply
On-chip PLL oscillator supply.
PLLVSS
I
PLL ground
On-chip PLL oscillator ground.
PLLCAP
I
PLL
capacitance
On-chip PLL oscillator external
capacitance connection pin.
EXTAL
I
External clock
Connect a crystal oscillator. Also, an
external clock can be input to the
EXTAL pin.
XTAL
I
Crystal
Connect a crystal oscillator.
CK
O
System clock
Supplies the system clock to
peripheral devices.
RES
I
Power-on reset
Power-on reset when low
MRES
I
Manual reset
Manual reset when low
WDTOVF
O
Watchdog
timer overflow
Overflow output signal from WDT
BREQ
I
Bus request
Goes low when external device
requests bus right release
BACK
O
Bus request
acknowledge
Indicates that bus right has been
released to external device. The
device that output the BREQ signal
receives the BACK signal, notifying
the device that it has obtained the bus
right.
37
Table 1.7
Pin Functions (cont)
Classification
Symbol
I/O
Name
Function
Operating
mode control
MD0–MD3
I
Mode set
Determines the operating mode. Do
not change input value during
operation.
FWP
I
Flash memory
write protect
Protects flash memory from being
written or deleted.
NMI
I
Non-maskable
interrupt
Non-maskable interrupt request pin.
Enables selection of whether to
accept on the rising or falling edge.
IRQ0–
IRQ7
I
Interrupt
requests 0–7
Maskable interrupt request pins.
Allows selection of level input and
edge input.
IRQOUT
O
Interrupt request
output
Indicates that interrupt cause has
occurred. Enables notification of
interrupt generation also during bus
release.
Address bus
A0–A21
O
Address bus
Outputs addresses.
Data bus
D0–D15
(QFP-112)
I/O
Data bus
16-bit (QFP-112 pin and TQFP-120
pin versions) or 32-bit (QFP-144 pin
version) bidirectional data bus.
CS0–CS3
O
Chip selects 0–3
Chip select signals for external
memory or devices.
RD
O
Read
Indicates reading from an external
device.
WRH
O
Upper write
Indicates writing the upper 8 bits
(15–8) of external data.
WRL
O
Lower write
Indicates writing the lower 8 bits
(7–0) of external data.
WAIT
I
Wait
Input causes insertion of wait cycles
into the bus cycle during external
space access.
RAS
O
Row address
strobe
Timing signal for DRAM row
address strobe.
CASH
O
Upper column
address strobe
Timing signal for DRAM column
address strobe.
Interrupts
D0–D31
(QFP-144)
Bus control
Output when the upper 8 bits of
data are accessed.
38
Table 1.7
Pin Functions (cont)
Classification
Symbol
I/O
Name
Function
Bus control
(cont)
CASL
O
Lower column
address strobe
Timing signal for DRAM column
address strobe.
Output when the lower 8 bits of
data are accessed.
Bus control
multifunction
timer/pulse unit
RDWR
O
DRAM
read/write
DRAM write strobe signal.
AH
O
Address hold
Address hold timing signal for
devices using an address/data
multiplex bus.
WRHH
(QFP-144)
O
HH write
Indicates the writing of bits 31 to
24 of external data.
WRHL
(QFP-144)
O
HL write
Indicates the writing of bits 23 to
16 of external data.
CASHH
(QFP-144)
O
HH column
address strobe
Timing signal for DRAM column
address strobe. Output when bits
31 to 24 of data are accessed.
CASHL
(QFP-144)
O
HL column
address strobe
Timing signal for DRAM column
address strobe. Output when bits
23 to 16 of data are accessed.
TCLKA
I
MTU timer
clock input
Input pins for external clocks to
the MTU counter.
I/O
MTU input
capture/ output
compare
(channel 0)
Channel 0 input capture
input/output compare output/PWM
output pins.
I/O
MTU input
capture/output
compare
(channel 1)
Channel 1 input capture
input/output compare output/PWM
output pins.
I/O
MTU input
capture/output
compare
(channel 2)
Channel 2 input capture
input/output compare output/PWM
output pins.
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
TIOC0A
TIOC0B
TIOC0C
TIOC0D
TIOC1A
TIOC1B
TIOC2A
TIOC2B
39
Table 1.7
Pin Functions (cont)
Classification
Symbol
I/O
Name
Function
Bus control
multifunction
timer/pulse unit
(cont)
TIOC3A
I/O
MTU input
capture/output
compare
(channel 3)
Channel 3 input capture input/output
compare output/PWM output pins.
I/O
MTU input
capture/output
compare
(channel 4)
Channel 4 input capture input/output
compare output/PWM output pins.
DREQ0–
DREQ1
I
DMA transfer
request
(channels 0, 1)
Input pin for external requests for
DMA transfer.
DRAK0–
DRAK1
O
DREQ request
acknowledgment
(channels 0, 1)
Output the input sampling
acknowledgment of external DMA
transfer requests.
DACK0–
DACK1
O
DMA transfer
strobe (channels
0, 1)
Output a strobe to the external I/O of
external DMA transfer requests.
TxD0–
TxD1
O
Transmit data
(channels 0, 1)
SCI0, SCI1 transmit data output pins.
(TxD1 is used for data transfer during
boot mode of F-ZTAT)
RxD0–
RxD1
I
Receive data
(channels 0, 1)
SCI0, SCI1 receive data input pins.
(RxD1 is used for data transfer during
boot mode of F-ZTAT)
SCK0–
SCK1
I/O
Serial clock
(channels 0, 1)
SCI0, SCI1 clock input/output pins.
AVCC
I
Analog supply
Analog supply; connected to V CC.
AVSS
I
Analog ground
Analog supply; connected to V SS .
AVref
(QFP-144
only)
I
Analog reference
supply
Analog reference supply input pin.
(Connected to AVCC internally in
QFP-112 and TQFP-120.)
AN0–AN7
I
Analog input
Analog signal input pins.
ADTRG
I
A/D conversion
trigger input
External trigger input for A/D
conversion start.
TIOC3B
TIOC3C
TIOC3D
TIOC4A
TIOC4B
TIOC4C
TIOC4D
Direct memory
access
controller
(DMAC)
Serial
communication
interface (SCI)
A/D Converter
40
Table 1.7
Pin Functions (cont)
Classification
Symbol
I/O
Name
Function
I/O ports
POE0–
POE3
I
Port output
enable
Input pin for port pin drive control
when general use ports are
established as output.
PA0–
PA15
(QFP-112)
I/O
General purpose
port
General purpose input/output port
pins.
Each bit can be designated for
input/output.
PA0–
PA23
(QFP-144)
PB0–PB9
I/O
General purpose
port
General purpose input/output port
pins.
Each bit can be designated for
input/output.
PC0–
PC15
I/O
General purpose
port
General purpose input/output port
pins.
Each bit can be designated for
input/output.
PD0–
PD15
(QFP-112)
I/O
General purpose
port
Each bit can be designated for
input/output.
PD0–
PD31
(QFP-144)
PE0–
PE15
General purpose input/output port
pins.
I/O
General purpose
port
General purpose input/output port
pins.
Each bit can be designated for
input/output.
PF0–PF7
I
General purpose
port
General purpose input port pins.
Usage Notes
1. Unused input pins should be pulled up or pulled down.
2. The WDTOVF pin should not be pulled down in the SH7044/SH7045 F-ZTAT version.
However, if it is necessary to pull this pin down, a resistance of 100 kΩ or higher should be
used.
41
1.4
The F-ZTAT Version Onboard Programming
There are 2 modes on the F-ZTAT version: a mode that writes and overwrites programs using the
special writer and a mode that writes and overwrites programs onboard the application system.
When rebooting after setting each mode pin and FWP pin during the reset condition, the
microcomputer will transfer to one of the modes indicated in figure 1.6. In the user mode, data can
be read from the flash memory but cannot be written or deleted. Use the boot mode and the user
program mode to write to the flash memory or delete data.
In the boot mode, SCI1 (TXD1, RXD1) is used for data transfer. It is possible to automatically
adjust the transfer bit rate to the transfer bit rate of the host.
Table 1.8
Pins during the Onboard Programming Mode
Notation
I/O
Function
FWP
Input
Hardware protected flash memory write/delete
MD1
Input
User programming mode/boot mode setting
MD2
Input
Clock mode (PLL) setting
MD3
Input
Clock mode (PLL) setting
TxD1
Output
Serial sent data output
RxD1
Input
Serial receive data input
S=
0
,F
User
program
mode
RE
=1
FWP=1
M
D1
FWP=0
RES=0
0
=0
RES
MD1=1, FWP=0
Power-on
reset condition
=1
FWP
W
User mode
=1,
MD1
P=
*
*
Boot mode
Notes: For transferring between user mode and user program mode,
proceed while CPU is not programming or erasing the flash
memory.
* RAM emulation permitted
Onboard programming mode
Figure 1.6 Condition Transfer for Flash Memory
42
<Host>
Write control program
Application program
<SH7044/45>
Boot program
<Flash memory>
RXD1
TXD1
SCI 1
<RAM>
Write control
program area
Application program
Boot program area
Figure. 1.7 Data Transfer during Boot Mode
43
44
Section 2 CPU
2.1
Register Configuration
The register set consists of sixteen 32-bit general registers, three 32-bit control registers and four
32-bit system registers.
2.1.1
General Registers (Rn)
The sixteen 32-bit general registers (Rn) are numbered R0–R15. General registers are used for
data processing and address calculation. R0 is also used as an index register. Several instructions
have R0 fixed as their only usable register. R15 is used as the hardware stack pointer (SP). Saving
and recovering the status register (SR) and program counter (PC) in exception processing is
accomplished by referencing the stack using R15. Figure 2.1 shows the general registers.
31
0
R0*1
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15, SP (hardware stack pointer)*2
Notes: *1
*2
R0 functions as an index register in the indirect indexed register addressing
mode and indirect indexed GBR addressing mode. In some instructions, R0
functions as a fixed source register or destination register.
R15 functions as a hardware stack pointer (SP) during exception processing.
Figure 2.1 General Registers
45
2.1.2
Control Registers
The 32-bit control registers consist of the 32-bit status register (SR), global base register (GBR),
and vector base register (VBR). The status register indicates processing states. The global base
register functions as a base address for the indirect GBR addressing mode to transfer data to the
registers of on-chip peripheral modules. The vector base register functions as the base address of
the exception processing vector area (including interrupts). Figure 2.2 shows a control register.
31
SR
9 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0
M QI3 I2 I1 I0
SR: Status register
ST
T bit: The MOVT, CMP/cond, TAS, TST,
BT (BT/S), BF (BF/S), SETT, and CLRT
instructions use the T bit to indicate true
(1) or false (0). The ADDV, ADDC,
SUBV, SUBC, DIV0U, DIV0S, DIV1,
NEGC, SHAR, SHAL, SHLR, SHLL,
ROTR, ROTL, ROTCR, and ROTCL
instructions also use the T bit to indicate
carry/borrow or overflow/underflow.
S bit: Used by the MAC instruction.
Reserved bits. This bit always read 0.
The write value should always be 0.
Bits I0–I3: Interrupt mask bits.
M and Q bits: Used by the DIV0U, DIV0S,
and DIV1 instructions.
Reserved bits. 0 is read. Write only.
31
GBR
31
0 Global base register (GBR):
Indicates the base address of the indirect
GBR addressing mode. The indirect GBR
addressing mode is used in data transfer
for on-chip peripheral modules register
areas and in logic operations.
0
VBR
Vector base register (VBR):
Stores the base address of the exception
processing vector area.
Figure 2.2 Control Registers
46
2.1.3
System Registers
System registers consist of four 32-bit registers: high and low multiply and accumulate registers
(MACH and MACL), the procedure register (PR), and the program counter (PC). The multiply
and accumulate registers store the results of multiply and accumulate operations. The procedure
register stores the return address from the subroutine procedure. The program counter stores
program addresses to control the flow of the processing. Figure 2.3 shows a system register.
31
0
MACH
MACL
31
0
Procedure register (PR): Stores
a return address from a
subroutine procedure.
0
Program counter (PC): Indicates
the fourth byte (second instruction)
after the current instruction.
PR
31
Multiply and accumulate (MAC)
registers high and low (MACH,
MACL): Stores the results of
multiply and accumulate operations.
PC
Figure 2.3 System Registers
2.1.4
Initial Values of Registers
Table 2.1 lists the values of the registers after reset.
Table 2.1
Initial Values of Registers
Classification
Register
Initial Value
General registers
R0–R14
Undefined
R15 (SP)
Value of the stack pointer in the vector address table
SR
Bits I3–I0 are 1111 (H'F), reserved bits are 0, and other
bits are undefined
GBR
Undefined
VBR
H'00000000
MACH, MACL, PR
Undefined
PC
Value of the program counter in the vector address table
Control registers
System registers
47
2.2
Data Formats
2.2.1
Data Format in Registers
Register operands are always longwords (32 bits). When the memory operand is only a byte (8
bits) or a word (16 bits), it is sign-extended into a longword when loaded into a register (figure
2.4).
31
0
Longword
Figure 2.4 Longword Operand
2.2.2
Data Format in Memory
Memory data formats are classified into bytes, words, and longwords. Byte data can be accessed
from any address, but an address error will occur if you try to access word data starting from an
address other than 2n or longword data starting from an address other than 4n. In such cases, the
data accessed cannot be guaranteed. The hardware stack area, referred to by the hardware stack
pointer (SP, R15), uses only longword data starting from address 4n because this area holds the
program counter and status register (figure 2.5).
Address m + 1
Address m
Byte
Address 2n
Address 4n
Address m + 2
23
31
Address m + 3
7
15
Byte
Byte
Word
0
Byte
Word
Longword
Figure 2.5 Byte, Word, and Longword Alignment
2.2.3
Immediate Data Format
Byte (8-bit) immediate data resides in an instruction code. Immediate data accessed by the MOV,
ADD, and CMP/EQ instructions is sign-extended and handled in registers as longword data.
Immediate data accessed by the TST, AND, OR, and XOR instructions is zero-extended and
handled as longword data. Consequently, AND instructions with immediate data always clear the
upper 24-bits of the destination register.
48
Word or longword immediate data is not located in the instruction code, but instead is stored in a
memory table. An immediate data transfer instruction (MOV) accesses the memory table using the
PC relative addressing mode with displacement.
2.3
Instruction Features
2.3.1
RISC-Type Instruction Set
All instructions are RISC type. This section details their functions.
16-Bit Fixed Length: All instructions are 16 bits long, increasing program code efficiency.
One Instruction per Cycle: The microprocessor can execute basic instructions in one cycle using
the pipeline system. Instructions are executed in 35 ns at 28.7 MHz.
Data Length: Longword is the standard data length for all operations. Memory can be accessed in
bytes, words, or longwords. Byte or word data accessed from memory is sign-extended and
handled as longword data. Immediate data is sign-extended for arithmetic operations or zeroextended for logic operations. It also is handled as longword data (table 2.2).
Table 2.2
Sign Extension of Word Data
SH7040 Series CPU
Description
Example of Conventional CPU
MOV.W
@(disp,PC),R1
R1,R0
Data is sign-extended to 32
bits, and R1 becomes
H'00001234. It is next
operated upon by an ADD
instruction.
ADD.W
ADD
.........
.DATA.W
H'1234
#H'1234,R0
Note: @(disp, PC) accesses the immediate data.
Load-Store Architecture: Basic operations are executed between registers. For operations that
involve memory access, data is loaded to the registers and executed (load-store architecture).
Instructions such as AND that manipulate bits, however, are executed directly in memory.
Delayed Branch Instructions: Unconditional branch instructions are delayed. Executing the
instruction that follows the branch instruction and then branching reduces pipeline disruption
during branching (table 2.3). There are two types of conditional branch instructions: delayed
branch instructions and ordinary branch instructions.
49
Table 2.3
Delayed Branch Instructions
SH7040 Series CPU
Description
Example of Conventional CPU
BRA
TRGET
ADD.W
ADD
R1,R0
Executes an ADD before
branching to TRGET
R1,R0
BRA
TRGET
Multiplication/Accumulation Operation: 16-bit × 16-bit → 32-bit multiplication operations are
executed in one to two cycles. 16-bit × 16-bit + 64-bit → 64-bit multiplication/accumulation
operations are executed in two to three cycles. 32-bit × 32-bit → 64-bit and 32-bit × 32-bit + 64bit → 64-bit multiplication/accumulation operations are executed in two to four cycles.
T Bit: The T bit in the status register changes according to the result of the comparison, and in
turn is the condition (true/false) that determines if the program will branch. The number of
instructions that change the T bit is kept to a minimum to improve the processing speed (table
2.4).
Table 2.4
T Bit
SH7040 Series CPU
Description
Example of Conventional CPU
CMP/GE
R1,R0
CMP.W
R1,R0
BT
TRGET0
BGE
TRGET0
BF
TRGET1
T bit is set when R0 ≥ R1. The
program branches to TRGET0
when R0 ≥ R1 and to TRGET1
when R0 < R1.
BLT
TRGET1
ADD
#1,R0
CMP/EQ
#0,R0
BT
TRGET
T bit is not changed by ADD. T bit is SUB.W
set when R0 = 0. The program
BEQ
branches if R0 = 0.
#1,R0
TRGET
Immediate Data: Byte (8-bit) immediate data resides in instruction code. Word or longword
immediate data is not input via instruction codes but is stored in a memory table. An immediate
data transfer instruction (MOV) accesses the memory table using the PC relative addressing mode
with displacement (table 2.5).
50
Table 2.5
Immediate Data Accessing
Classification
SH7040 Series CPU
Example of Conventional CPU
8-bit immediate
MOV
#H'12,R0
MOV.B
#H'12,R0
16-bit immediate
MOV.W
@(disp,PC),R0
MOV.W
#H'1234,R0
.DATA.W
H'1234
MOV.L
@(disp,PC),R0
MOV.L
#H'12345678,R0
.................
32-bit immediate
.................
.DATA.L
H'12345678
Note: @(disp, PC) accesses the immediate data.
Absolute Address: When data is accessed by absolute address, the value already in the absolute
address is placed in the memory table. Loading the immediate data when the instruction is
executed transfers that value to the register and the data is accessed in the indirect register
addressing mode (table 2.6).
Table 2.6
Absolute Address Accessing
Classification
SH7040 Series CPU
Example of Conventional CPU
Absolute address
MOV.L
@(disp,PC),R1
MOV.B
MOV.B
@R1,R0
@H'12345678,R0
..................
.DATA.L
H'12345678
Note: @(disp,PC) accesses the immediate data.
16-Bit/32-Bit Displacement: When data is accessed by 16-bit or 32-bit displacement, the preexisting displacement value is placed in the memory table. Loading the immediate data when the
instruction is executed transfers that value to the register and the data is accessed in the indirect
indexed register addressing mode (table 2.7).
Table 2.7
Displacement Accessing
Classification
SH7040 Series CPU
Example of Conventional CPU
16-bit displacement
MOV.W
@(disp,PC),R0
MOV.W
MOV.W
@(R0,R1),R2
@(H'1234,R1),R2
..................
.DATA.W
H'1234
Note: @(disp,PC) accesses the immediate data.
51
2.3.2
Addressing Modes
Table 2.8 describes addressing modes and effective address calculation.
Table 2.8
Addressing Modes and Effective Addresses
Addressing
Mode
Instruction
Format
Effective Addresses Calculation
Direct register
addressing
Rn
The effective address is register Rn. (The operand
is the contents of register Rn.)
—
Indirect register
addressing
@Rn
The effective address is the content of register Rn.
Rn
Post-increment
indirect register
addressing
@Rn+
Rn
Equation
Rn
The effective address is the content of register Rn.
A constant is added to the content of Rn after the
instruction is executed. 1 is added for a byte
operation, 2 for a word operation, and 4 for a
longword operation.
Rn
Rn
Rn + 1/2/4
@–Rn
Rn
1/2/4
52
Byte: Rn + 1
→ Rn
Longword:
Rn + 4 → Rn
The effective address is the value obtained by
subtracting a constant from Rn. 1 is subtracted for
a byte operation, 2 for a word operation, and 4 for
a longword operation.
Rn – 1/2/4
(After the
instruction
executes)
Word: Rn + 2
→ Rn
+
1/2/4
Pre-decrement
indirect register
addressing
Rn
–
Rn – 1/2/4
Byte: Rn – 1
→ Rn
Word: Rn – 2
→ Rn
Longword:
Rn – 4 → Rn
(Instruction
executed with
Rn after
calculation)
Table 2.8
Addressing Modes and Effective Addresses (cont)
Addressing
Mode
Instruction
Format
Effective Addresses Calculation
Indirect register
addressing with
displacement
@(disp:4,
Rn)
The effective address is Rn plus a 4-bit
displacement (disp). The value of disp is zeroextended, and remains the same for a byte
operation, is doubled for a word operation, and is
quadrupled for a longword operation.
Rn
disp
(zero-extended)
Equation
Byte: Rn +
disp
Word: Rn +
disp × 2
Longword: Rn
+ disp × 4
Rn + disp × 1/2/4
+
×
1/2/4
Indirect indexed @(R0, Rn)
register
addressing
The effective address is the Rn value plus R0.
Rn + R0
Rn
+
Rn + R0
R0
Indirect GBR
addressing with
displacement
@(disp:8,
GBR)
The effective address is the GBR value plus an
8-bit displacement (disp). The value of disp is zeroextended, and remains the same for a byte operation, is doubled for a word operation, and is
quadrupled for a longword operation.
GBR
disp
(zero-extended)
+
GBR
+ disp × 1/2/4
Byte: GBR +
disp
Word: GBR +
disp × 2
Longword:
GBR + disp ×
4
×
1/2/4
53
Table 2.8
Addressing Modes and Effective Addresses (cont)
Addressing
Mode
Instruction
Format
Effective Addresses Calculation
Indirect indexed @(R0, GBR) The effective address is the GBR value plus the R0.
GBR addressing
GBR
+
Equation
GBR + R0
GBR + R0
R0
PC relative
addressing with
displacement
@(disp:8,
PC)
The effective address is the PC value plus an 8-bit
displacement (disp). The value of disp is zeroextended, and is doubled for a word operation, and
quadrupled for a longword operation. For a
longword operation, the lowest two bits of the PC
value are masked.
PC
&
H'FFFFFFFC
+
disp
(zero-extended)
×
2/4
54
(for longword)
PC + disp × 2
or
PC & H'FFFFFFFC
+ disp × 4
Word: PC +
disp × 2
Longword:
PC &
H'FFFFFFFC
+ disp × 4
Table 2.8
Addressing Modes and Effective Addresses (cont)
Addressing
Mode
Instruction
Format
Effective Addresses Calculation
PC relative
addressing
disp:8
The effective address is the PC value sign-extended
with an 8-bit displacement (disp), doubled, and
added to the PC value.
Equation
PC + disp × 2
PC
disp
(sign-extended)
+
PC + disp × 2
×
2
disp:12
The effective address is the PC value sign-extended
with a 12-bit displacement (disp), doubled, and
added to the PC value.
PC + disp × 2
PC
disp
(sign-extended)
+
PC + disp × 2
×
2
Rn
The effective address is the register PC value
plus Rn.
PC + Rn
PC
+
PC + Rn
Rn
Immediate
addressing
#imm:8
The 8-bit immediate data (imm) for the TST, AND,
OR, and XOR instructions are zero-extended.
—
#imm:8
The 8-bit immediate data (imm) for the MOV, ADD,
and CMP/EQ instructions are sign-extended.
—
#imm:8
The 8-bit immediate data (imm) for the TRAPA
instruction is zero-extended and is quadrupled.
—
55
2.3.3
Instruction Format
Table 2.9 lists the instruction formats for the source operand and the destination operand. The
meaning of the operand depends on the instruction code. The symbols are used as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
xxxx: Instruction code
mmmm: Source register
nnnn: Destination register
iiii: Immediate data
dddd: Displacement
Table 2.9
Instruction Formats
Instruction Formats
Source
Operand
Destination
Operand
Example
0 format
—
—
NOP
—
nnnn: Direct
register
MOVT
Rn
Control register
or system
register
nnnn: Direct
register
STS
MACH,Rn
Control register
or system
register
nnnn: Indirect pre- STC.L
decrement register
SR,@-Rn
mmmm: Direct
register
Control register or
system register
LDC
Rm,SR
mmmm: Indirect
post-increment
register
Control register or
system register
LDC.L
@Rm+,SR
mmmm: Direct
register
—
JMP
@Rm
mmmm: PC
relative using Rm
—
BRAF
Rm
15
0
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
n format
15
0
xxxx
nnnn
xxxx
xxxx
m format
15
0
xxxx mmmm xxxx
56
xxxx
Table 2.9
Instruction Formats (cont)
Source Operand Destination
Operand
Instruction Formats
nm format
15
0
xxxx
nnnn mmmm xxxx
md format
15
0
xxxx
xxxx mmmm dddd
nd4 format
15
xxxx xxxx
0
nnnn
nnnn: Direct
register
ADD
Rm,Rn
mmmm: Direct
register
nnnn: Indirect
register
MOV.L
Rm,@Rn
mmmm: Indirect
post-increment
register (multiply/
accumulate)
nnnn* : Indirect
post-increment
register (multiply/
accumulate)
MACH, MACL
MAC.W
@Rm+,@Rn+
mmmm: Indirect
post-increment
register
nnnn: Direct
register
MOV.L
@Rm+,Rn
mmmm: Direct
register
nnnn: Indirect predecrement
register
MOV.L
Rm,@-Rn
mmmm: Direct
register
nnnn: Indirect
indexed register
MOV.L
Rm,@(R0,Rn)
mmmmdddd:
indirect register
with
displacement
R0 (Direct
register)
MOV.B
@(disp,Rm),R0
R0 (Direct
register)
nnnndddd:
Indirect register
with displacement
MOV.B
R0,@(disp,Rn)
mmmm: Direct
register
nnnndddd: Indirect
register with
displacement
MOV.L
Rm,@(disp,Rn)
mmmmdddd:
Indirect register
with
displacement
nnnn: Direct
register
MOV.L
@(disp,Rm),Rn
dddd
nmd format
15
0
xxxx nnnn mmmm dddd
Example
mmmm: Direct
register
Note: * In multiply/accumulate instructions, nnnn is the source register.
57
Table 2.9
Instruction Formats (cont)
Source Operand Destination
Operand
Instruction Formats
d format
15
0
xxxx
xxxx
dddd
dddd
d12 format
15
0
xxxx
dddd
dddd
15
0
xxxx
nnnn
dddd
dddd
i format
15
0
xxxx
xxxx
iiii
15
0
58
nnnn
iiii
R0(Direct
register)
dddddddd: Indirect
GBR with
displacement
dddddddd: PC
relative with
displacement
R0 (Direct register) MOVA
@(disp,PC),R0
dddddddd: PC
relative
—
BF
label
dddddddddddd:
PC relative
—
BRA
label
dddddddd: PC
relative with
displacement
nnnn: Direct
register
MOV.L
@(disp,PC),Rn
iiiiiiii: Immediate
Indirect indexed
GBR
AND.B
#imm,@(R0,GBR)
iiiiiiii: Immediate
R0 (Direct register) AND
#imm,R0
iiiiiiii: Immediate
—
TRAPA
#imm
iiiiiiii: Immediate
nnnn: Direct
register
ADD
#imm,Rn
MOV.L
R0,@(disp,GBR)
(label = disp +
PC)
iiii
ni format
xxxx
R0 (Direct register) MOV.L
@(disp,GBR),R0
dddd
nd8 format
Example
dddddddd:
Indirect GBR
with
displacement
iiii
2.4
Instruction Set by Classification
Table 2.10 Classification of Instructions
Operation
Classification Types Code
Function
Data transfer
Arithmetic
operations
5
21
No. of
Instructions
MOV
39
Data transfer, immediate data transfer,
peripheral module data transfer, structure data
transfer
MOVA
Effective address transfer
MOVT
T bit transfer
SWAP
Swap of upper and lower bytes
XTRCT
Extraction of the middle of registers connected
ADD
Binary addition
ADDC
Binary addition with carry
ADDV
Binary addition with overflow check
33
CMP/cond Comparison
DIV1
Division
DIV0S
Initialization of signed division
DIV0U
Initialization of unsigned division
DMULS
Signed double-length multiplication
DMULU
Unsigned double-length multiplication
DT
Decrement and test
EXTS
Sign extension
EXTU
Zero extension
MAC
Multiply/accumulate, double-length
multiply/accumulate operation
MUL
Double-length multiply operation
MULS
Signed multiplication
MULU
Unsigned multiplication
NEG
Negation
NEGC
Negation with borrow
SUB
Binary subtraction
SUBC
Binary subtraction with borrow
SUBV
Binary subtraction with underflow
59
Table 2.10 Classification of Instructions (cont)
Operation
Classification Types Code
Function
No. of
Instructions
Logic
operations
14
Shift
Branch
60
6
10
9
AND
Logical AND
NOT
Bit inversion
OR
Logical OR
TAS
Memory test and bit set
TST
Logical AND and T bit set
XOR
Exclusive OR
ROTL
One-bit left rotation
ROTR
One-bit right rotation
ROTCL
One-bit left rotation with T bit
ROTCR
One-bit right rotation with T bit
SHAL
One-bit arithmetic left shift
SHAR
One-bit arithmetic right shift
SHLL
One-bit logical left shift
SHLLn
n-bit logical left shift
SHLR
One-bit logical right shift
SHLRn
n-bit logical right shift
BF
Conditional branch, conditional branch with
delay (Branch when T = 0)
BT
Conditional branch, conditional branch with
delay (Branch when T = 1)
BRA
Unconditional branch
BRAF
Unconditional branch
BSR
Branch to subroutine procedure
BSRF
Branch to subroutine procedure
JMP
Unconditional branch
JSR
Branch to subroutine procedure
RTS
Return from subroutine procedure
14
11
Table 2.10 Classification of Instructions (cont)
Operation
Classification Types Code
Function
No. of
Instructions
System
control
31
Total:
11
62
CLRT
T bit clear
CLRMAC
MAC register clear
LDC
Load to control register
LDS
Load to system register
NOP
No operation
RTE
Return from exception processing
SETT
T bit set
SLEEP
Shift into power-down mode
STC
Storing control register data
STS
Storing system register data
TRAPA
Trap exception handling
142
Table 2.11 shows the format used in tables 2.12 to 2.17, which list instruction codes, operation,
and execution states in order by classification.
61
Table 2.11 Instruction Code Format
Item
Format
Explanation
Instruction
OP.Sz SRC,DEST
OP: Operation code
Sz: Size (B: byte, W: word, or L: longword)
SRC: Source
DEST: Destination
Rm: Source register
Rn: Destination register
imm: Immediate data
disp: Displacement* 1
Instruction
code
MSB ↔ LSB
mmmm: Source register
nnnn: Destination register
0000: R0
0001: R1
.
.
.
1111: R15
iiii: Immediate data
dddd: Displacement
Operation
→, ←
Direction of transfer
(xx)
Memory operand
M/Q/T
Flag bits in the SR
&
Logical AND of each bit
|
Logical OR of each bit
^
Exclusive OR of each bit
~
Logical NOT of each bit
<<n
n-bit left shift
>>n
n-bit right shift
Execution
cycles
—
Value when no wait states are inserted * 2
T bit
—
Value of T bit after instruction is executed. An em-dash (—)
in the column means no change.
Notes: *1 Depending on the operand size, displacement is scaled ×1, ×2, or ×4. For details, see
the SH-1/SH-2/SH-DSP Programming Manual.
*2 Instruction execution cycles: The execution cycles shown in the table are minimums.
The actual number of cycles may be increased when (1) contention occurs between
instruction fetches and data access, or (2) when the destination register of the load
instruction (memory → register) and the register used by the next instruction are the
same.
62
Table 2.12 Data Transfer Instructions
Execution
Cycles
T
Bit
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
MOV
#imm,Rn
1110nnnniiiiiiii
#imm → Sign extension →
Rn
1
—
MOV.W @(disp,PC),Rn
1001nnnndddddddd
(disp × 2 + PC) → Sign
extension → Rn
1
—
MOV.L @(disp,PC),Rn
1101nnnndddddddd
(disp × 4 + PC) → Rn
1
—
MOV
0110nnnnmmmm0011
Rm → Rn
1
—
MOV.B Rm,@Rn
0010nnnnmmmm0000
Rm → (Rn)
1
—
MOV.W Rm,@Rn
0010nnnnmmmm0001
Rm → (Rn)
1
—
MOV.L Rm,@Rn
0010nnnnmmmm0010
Rm → (Rn)
1
—
MOV.B @Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm0000
(Rm) → Sign extension →
Rn
1
—
MOV.W @Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm0001
(Rm) → Sign extension →
Rn
1
—
MOV.L @Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm0010
(Rm) → Rn
1
—
MOV.B Rm,@–Rn
0010nnnnmmmm0100
Rn–1 → Rn, Rm → (Rn)
1
—
MOV.W Rm,@–Rn
0010nnnnmmmm0101
Rn–2 → Rn, Rm → (Rn)
1
—
MOV.L Rm,@–Rn
0010nnnnmmmm0110
Rn–4 → Rn, Rm → (Rn)
1
—
MOV.B @Rm+,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm0100
(Rm) → Sign extension →
Rn,Rm + 1 → Rm
1
—
MOV.W @Rm+,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm0101
(Rm) → Sign extension →
Rn,Rm + 2 → Rm
1
—
MOV.L @Rm+,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm0110
(Rm) → Rn,Rm + 4 → Rm
1
—
MOV.B R0,@(disp,Rn)
10000000nnnndddd
R0 → (disp + Rn)
1
—
MOV.W R0,@(disp,Rn)
10000001nnnndddd
R0 → (disp × 2 + Rn)
1
—
MOV.L Rm,@(disp,Rn)
0001nnnnmmmmdddd
Rm → (disp × 4 + Rn)
1
—
MOV.B @(disp,Rm),R0
10000100mmmmdddd
(disp + Rm) → Sign
extension → R0
1
—
MOV.W @(disp,Rm),R0
10000101mmmmdddd
(disp × 2 + Rm) → Sign
extension → R0
1
—
MOV.L @(disp,Rm),Rn
0101nnnnmmmmdddd
(disp × 4 + Rm) → Rn
1
—
MOV.B Rm,@(R0,Rn)
0000nnnnmmmm0100
Rm → (R0 + Rn)
1
—
Rm,Rn
63
Table 2.12 Data Transfer Instructions (cont)
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
Execution
Cycles
MOV.W
Rm,@(R0,Rn)
0000nnnnmmmm0101
Rm → (R0 + Rn)
1
—
MOV.L
Rm,@(R0,Rn)
0000nnnnmmmm0110
Rm → (R0 + Rn)
1
—
MOV.B
@(R0,Rm),Rn
0000nnnnmmmm1100
(R0 + Rm) → Sign
extension → Rn
1
—
MOV.W
@(R0,Rm),Rn
0000nnnnmmmm1101
(R0 + Rm) → Sign
extension → Rn
1
—
MOV.L
@(R0,Rm),Rn
0000nnnnmmmm1110
(R0 + Rm) → Rn
1
—
MOV.B
R0,@(disp,GBR)
11000000dddddddd
R0 → (disp + GBR)
1
—
MOV.W
R0,@(disp,GBR)
11000001dddddddd
R0 → (disp × 2 + GBR)
1
—
MOV.L
R0,@(disp,GBR)
11000010dddddddd
R0 → (disp × 4 + GBR)
1
—
MOV.B
@(disp,GBR),R0
11000100dddddddd
(disp + GBR) → Sign
extension → R0
1
—
MOV.W
@(disp,GBR),R0
11000101dddddddd
(disp × 2 + GBR) → Sign
extension → R0
1
—
MOV.L
@(disp,GBR),R0
11000110dddddddd
(disp × 4 + GBR) → R0
1
—
MOVA
@(disp,PC),R0
11000111dddddddd
disp × 4 + PC → R0
1
—
MOVT
Rn
0000nnnn00101001
T → Rn
1
—
SWAP.B Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm1000
Rm → Swap the bottom two 1
bytes → Rn
—
SWAP.W Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm1001
Rm → Swap two
consecutive words → Rn
1
—
XTRCT
0010nnnnmmmm1101
Rm: Middle 32 bits of
Rn → Rn
1
—
64
Rm,Rn
T
Bit
Table 2.13 Arithmetic Operation Instructions
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
Execution
Cycles
ADD
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm1100
Rn + Rm → Rn
1
—
ADD
#imm,Rn
0111nnnniiiiiiii
Rn + imm → Rn
1
—
ADDC
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm1110
Rn + Rm + T → Rn,
Carry → T
1
Carry
ADDV
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm1111
Rn + Rm → Rn,
Overflow → T
1
Overflow
CMP/EQ
#imm,R0
10001000iiiiiiii
If R0 = imm, 1 → T
1
Comparison
result
CMP/EQ
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm0000
If Rn = Rm, 1 → T
1
Comparison
result
CMP/HS
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm0010
If Rn≥Rm with unsigned 1
data, 1 → T
Comparison
result
CMP/GE
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm0011
If Rn ≥ Rm with signed
data, 1 → T
1
Comparison
result
CMP/HI
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm0110
If Rn > Rm with
unsigned data, 1 → T
1
Comparison
result
CMP/GT
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm0111
If Rn > Rm with signed
data, 1 → T
1
Comparison
result
CMP/PL
Rn
0100nnnn00010101
If Rn > 0, 1 → T
1
Comparison
result
CMP/PZ
Rn
0100nnnn00010001
If Rn ≥ 0, 1 → T
1
Comparison
result
CMP/STR Rm,Rn
0010nnnnmmmm1100
If Rn and Rm have
an equivalent byte,
1→T
1
Comparison
result
DIV1
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm0100
Single-step division
(Rn/Rm)
1
Calculation
result
DIV0S
Rm,Rn
0010nnnnmmmm0111
MSB of Rn → Q, MSB
of Rm → M, M ^ Q → T
1
Calculation
result
0000000000011001
0 → M/Q/T
1
0
DIV0U
T Bit
65
Table 2.13 Arithmetic Operation Instructions (cont)
Execution
Cycles
T Bit
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
DMULS.L Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm1101
Signed operation of Rn
× Rm → MACH, MACL
32 × 32 → 64 bit
2 to 4 *
—
DMULU.L Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm0101
Unsigned operation of
Rn × Rm → MACH,
MACL 32 × 32 → 64 bit
2 to 4 *
—
DT
Rn
0100nnnn00010000
Rn – 1 → Rn, when Rn 1
is 0, 1 → T. When Rn is
nonzero, 0 → T
Comparison
result
EXTS.B
Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm1110
A byte in Rm is signextended → Rn
1
—
EXTS.W
Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm1111
A word in Rm is signextended → Rn
1
—
EXTU.B
Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm1100
A byte in Rm is zeroextended → Rn
1
—
EXTU.W
Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm1101
A word in Rm is zeroextended → Rn
1
—
MAC.L
@Rm+,@Rn+
0000nnnnmmmm1111
Signed operation of
(Rn) × (Rm) + MAC →
MAC 32 × 32 → 64 bit
3/(2 to
4)*
—
MAC.W
@Rm+,@Rn+
0100nnnnmmmm1111
Signed operation of
(Rn) × (Rm) + MAC →
MAC 16 × 16 + 64 →
64 bit
3/(2)*
—
MUL.L
Rm,Rn
0000nnnnmmmm0111
Rn × Rm → MACL, 32
× 32 → 32 bit
2 to 4 *
—
MULS.W
Rm,Rn
0010nnnnmmmm1111
Signed operation of Rn
× Rm → MAC 16 × 16
→ 32 bit
1 to 3 *
—
MULU.W
Rm,Rn
0010nnnnmmmm1110
Unsigned operation of
Rn × Rm → MAC 16 ×
16 → 32 bit
1 to 3 *
—
NEG
Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm1011
0–Rm → Rn
1
—
NEGC
Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm1010
0–Rm–T → Rn, Borrow
→T
1
Borrow
66
Table 2.13 Arithmetic Operation Instructions (cont)
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
Execution
Cycles
SUB
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm1000
Rn–Rm → Rn
1
—
SUBC
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm1010
Rn–Rm–T → Rn,
Borrow → T
1
Borrow
SUBV
Rm,Rn
0011nnnnmmmm1011
Rn–Rm → Rn,
Underflow → T
1
Overflow
T Bit
Note: * The normal minimum number of execution cycles. (The number in parentheses is the
number of cycles when there is contention with following instructions.)
67
Table 2.14 Logic Operation Instructions
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
Execution
Cycles
AND
Rm,Rn
0010nnnnmmmm1001
Rn & Rm → Rn
1
—
AND
#imm,R0
11001001iiiiiiii
R0 & imm → R0
1
—
AND.B #imm,@(R0,GBR)
11001101iiiiiiii
(R0 + GBR) & imm →
(R0 + GBR)
3
—
NOT
Rm,Rn
0110nnnnmmmm0111
~Rm → Rn
1
—
OR
Rm,Rn
0010nnnnmmmm1011
Rn | Rm → Rn
1
—
OR
#imm,R0
11001011iiiiiiii
R0 | imm → R0
1
—
OR.B
#imm,@(R0,GBR)
11001111iiiiiiii
(R0 + GBR) | imm →
(R0 + GBR)
3
—
TAS.B @Rn
0100nnnn00011011
If (Rn) is 0, 1 → T; 1 →
MSB of (Rn)*
4
Test
result
TST
Rm,Rn
0010nnnnmmmm1000
Rn & Rm; if the result is
0, 1 → T
1
Test
result
TST
#imm,R0
11001000iiiiiiii
R0 & imm; if the result is
0, 1 → T
1
Test
result
TST.B #imm,@(R0,GBR)
11001100iiiiiiii
(R0 + GBR) & imm; if
the result is 0, 1 → T
3
Test
result
XOR
Rm,Rn
0010nnnnmmmm1010
Rn ^ Rm → Rn
1
—
XOR
#imm,R0
11001010iiiiiiii
R0 ^ imm → R0
1
—
XOR.B #imm,@(R0,GBR)
11001110iiiiiiii
(R0 + GBR) ^ imm →
(R0 + GBR)
3
—
T Bit
Note: * The on-chip DMAC/DTC bus cycles are not inserted between the read and write cycles of
TAS instruction execution. However, bus release due to BREQ is carried out.
68
Table 2.15 Shift Instructions
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
Execution
Cycles
ROTL
Rn
0100nnnn00000100
T ← Rn ← MSB
1
MSB
ROTR
Rn
0100nnnn00000101
LSB → Rn → T
1
LSB
ROTCL
Rn
0100nnnn00100100
T ← Rn ← T
1
MSB
ROTCR
Rn
0100nnnn00100101
T → Rn → T
1
LSB
SHAL
Rn
0100nnnn00100000
T ← Rn ← 0
1
MSB
SHAR
Rn
0100nnnn00100001
MSB → Rn → T
1
LSB
SHLL
Rn
0100nnnn00000000
T ← Rn ← 0
1
MSB
SHLR
Rn
0100nnnn00000001
0 → Rn → T
1
LSB
SHLL2
Rn
0100nnnn00001000
Rn<<2 → Rn
1
—
SHLR2
Rn
0100nnnn00001001
Rn>>2 → Rn
1
—
SHLL8
Rn
0100nnnn00011000
Rn<<8 → Rn
1
—
SHLR8
Rn
0100nnnn00011001
Rn>>8 → Rn
1
—
SHLL16
Rn
0100nnnn00101000
Rn<<16 → Rn
1
—
SHLR16
Rn
0100nnnn00101001
Rn>>16 → Rn
1
—
T Bit
69
Table 2.16 Branch Instructions
Exec.
Cycles
T
Bit
If T = 0, disp × 2 + PC → PC; if T =
1, nop
3/1 *
—
10001111dddddddd
Delayed branch, if T = 0, disp × 2 +
PC → PC; if T = 1, nop
2/1 *
—
label
10001001dddddddd
If T = 1, disp × 2 + PC → PC; if T =
0, nop
3/1 *
—
BT/S label
10001101dddddddd
Delayed branch, if T = 1, disp × 2 +
PC → PC; if T = 0, nop
2/1 *
—
BRA
1010dddddddddddd
Delayed branch, disp × 2 + PC →
PC
2
—
BRAF Rm
0000mmmm00100011
Delayed branch, Rm + PC → PC
2
—
BSR
1011dddddddddddd
Delayed branch, PC → PR, disp × 2
+ PC → PC
2
—
BSRF Rm
0000mmmm00000011
Delayed branch, PC → PR,
Rm + PC → PC
2
—
JMP
@Rm
0100mmmm00101011
Delayed branch, Rm → PC
2
—
JSR
@Rm
0100mmmm00001011
Delayed branch, PC → PR,
Rm → PC
2
—
0000000000001011
Delayed branch, PR → PC
2
—
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
BF
label
10001011dddddddd
BF/S label
BT
RTS
label
label
Note: * One state when it does not branch.
70
Table 2.17 System Control Instructions
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
Exec.
Cycles
T Bit
CLRT
0000000000001000
0→T
1
0
CLRMAC
0000000000101000
0 → MACH, MACL
1
—
LDC
Rm,SR
0100mmmm00001110
Rm → SR
1
LSB
LDC
Rm,GBR
0100mmmm00011110
Rm → GBR
1
—
LDC
Rm,VBR
0100mmmm00101110
Rm → VBR
1
—
LDC.L @Rm+,SR
0100mmmm00000111
(Rm) → SR, Rm + 4 → Rm
3
LSB
LDC.L @Rm+,GBR
0100mmmm00010111
(Rm) → GBR, Rm + 4 → Rm
3
—
LDC.L @Rm+,VBR
0100mmmm00100111
(Rm) → VBR, Rm + 4 → Rm
3
—
LDS
Rm,MACH
0100mmmm00001010
Rm → MACH
1
—
LDS
Rm,MACL
0100mmmm00011010
Rm → MACL
1
—
LDS
Rm,PR
0100mmmm00101010
Rm → PR
1
—
LDS.L @Rm+,MACH
0100mmmm00000110
(Rm) → MACH, Rm + 4 → Rm 1
—
LDS.L @Rm+,MACL
0100mmmm00010110
(Rm) → MACL, Rm + 4 → Rm
1
—
LDS.L @Rm+,PR
0100mmmm00100110
(Rm) → PR, Rm + 4 → Rm
1
—
NOP
0000000000001001
No operation
1
—
RTE
0000000000101011
Delayed branch, stack area
→ PC/SR
4
—
SETT
0000000000011000
1→T
1
1
SLEEP
0000000000011011
Sleep
3*
—
STC
SR,Rn
0000nnnn00000010
SR → Rn
1
—
STC
GBR,Rn
0000nnnn00010010
GBR → Rn
1
—
STC
VBR,Rn
0000nnnn00100010
VBR → Rn
1
—
STC.L
SR,@–Rn
0100nnnn00000011
Rn–4 → Rn, SR → (Rn)
2
—
STC.L
GBR,@–Rn
0100nnnn00010011
Rn–4 → Rn, GBR → (Rn)
2
—
STC.L
VBR,@–Rn
0100nnnn00100011
Rn–4 → Rn, BR → (Rn)
2
—
STS
MACH,Rn
0000nnnn00001010
MACH → Rn
1
—
STS
MACL,Rn
0000nnnn00011010
MACL → Rn
1
—
STS
PR,Rn
0000nnnn00101010
PR → Rn
1
—
71
Table 2.17 System Control Instructions (cont)
Instruction
Instruction Code
Operation
Exec.
Cycles
T Bit
STS.L
MACH,@–Rn
0100nnnn00000010
Rn–4 → Rn, MACH → (Rn)
1
—
STS.L
MACL,@–Rn
0100nnnn00010010
Rn–4 → Rn, MACL → (Rn)
1
—
STS.L
PR,@–Rn
0100nnnn00100010
Rn–4 → Rn, PR → (Rn)
1
—
TRAPA
#imm
11000011iiiiiiii
PC/SR → stack area,
8
—
(imm × 4 + VBR) → PC
Note: * The number of execution cycles before the chip enters sleep mode: The execution cycles
shown in the table are minimums. The actual number of cycles may be increased when
(1) contention occurs between instruction fetches and data access, or (2) when the
destination register of the load instruction (memory → register) and the register used by
the next instruction are the same.
2.5
Processing States
2.5.1
State Transitions
The CPU has five processing states: reset, exception processing, bus release, program execution
and power-down. Figure 2.6 shows the transitions between the states.
72
From any state
when RES = 0
From any state when
RES = 1 and MRES = 0
Power-on reset state
Manual reset state
RES = 0
RES = 1
When an interrupt source
or DMA address error occurs
RES = 1
MRES = 1
Reset states
Exception processing state
Bus request
cleared
NMI interrupt
source occurs
Bus request
generated
Exception
processing
source occurs
Bus release state
Bus request
generated
Bus request
generated
Bus request
cleared
Bus request
cleared
SBY bit
cleared
for SLEEP
instruction
Sleep mode
Exception
processing
ends
Program execution state
SBY bit set
for SLEEP
instruction
Standby mode
Power-down state
Figure 2.6 Transitions between Processing States
Reset State: The CPU resets in the reset state. When the RES pin level goes low, a power-on reset
results. When the RES pin is high and MRES is low, a manual reset will occur.
Exception Processing State: The exception processing state is a transient state that occurs when
exception processing sources such as resets or interrupts alter the CPU’s processing state flow.
73
For a reset, the initial values of the program counter (PC) (execution start address) and stack
pointer (SP) are fetched from the exception processing vector table and stored; the CPU then
branches to the execution start address and execution of the program begins.
For an interrupt, the stack pointer (SP) is accessed and the program counter (PC) and status
register (SR) are saved to the stack area. The exception service routine start address is fetched
from the exception processing vector table; the CPU then branches to that address and the program
starts executing, thereby entering the program execution state.
Program Execution State: In the program execution state, the CPU sequentially executes the
program.
Power-Down State: In the power-down state, the CPU operation halts and power consumption
declines. The SLEEP instruction places the CPU in the power-down state. This state has two
modes: sleep mode and standby mode.
Bus Release State: In the bus release state, the CPU releases access rights to the bus to the device
that has requested them.
2.5.2
Power-Down State
Besides the ordinary program execution states, the CPU also has a power-down state in which
CPU operation halts, lowering power consumption. There are two power-down state modes: sleep
mode and standby mode.
Sleep Mode: When standby bit SBY (in the standby control register SBYCR) is cleared to 0 and a
SLEEP instruction executed, the CPU moves from program execution state to sleep mode. In the
sleep mode, the CPU halts and the contents of its internal registers and the data in on-chip cache
(or on-chip RAM) is maintained. The on-chip peripheral modules other than the CPU do not halt
in the sleep mode.
To return from sleep mode, use a reset (power-on or manual), any interrupt, or a DMA address
error; the CPU returns to the ordinary program execution state through the exception processing
state.
Standby Mode: To enter the standby mode, set the standby bit SBY (in the standby control
register SBYCR) to 1 and execute a SLEEP instruction. In standby mode, all CPU, on-chip
peripheral module, and oscillator functions are halted. However, when entering standby mode, the
DMA master enable bit of the DMAC should be set to 0. If multiplication-related instructions are
being executed at the time of entry into standby mode, the values of MACH and MACL will
become undefined.
To return from standby mode, use a reset (power-on or manual) or an NMI interrupt. For resets,
the CPU returns to ordinary program execution state through the exception processing state when
placed in a reset state for the duration of the oscillator stabilization time. For NMI interrupts, the
74
CPU returns to ordinary program execution state through the exception processing state after the
oscillator stabilization time has elapsed. In this mode, power consumption drops markedly, since
the oscillator stops (table 2.18).
Table 2.18 Power-Down State
State
On-Chip
Cache or I/O
On-Chip
On-Chip Port
Transition
Peripheral CPU
Pins
Mode Conditions Clock CPU Modules Registers RAM
Run
Sleep Execute
SLEEP
instruction
with SBY bit
cleared to 0
in SBYCR
Halt Run
Halt
Stand- Execute
by
SLEEP
instruction
with SBY bit
set to 1 in
SBYCR
Halt Halt and
initialize*
Held
Held
Held
Held
Canceling
•
Interrupt
•
DMA address
error
•
Power-on reset
•
Manual reset
Held or •
Hi-Z
•
(select•
able)
NMI interrupt
Held
Power-on reset
Manual reset
Note: * Differs depending on the peripheral module and pin.
75
76
Section 3 Operating Modes
3.1
Operating Modes, Types, and Selection
This LSI has five operating modes and three clock modes, determined by the setting of the mode
pins (MD3–MD0). Do not change the mode pin settings during LSI operation (while power is on).
(In the F-ZTAT version, however, MD1 can be changed in the power-on reset state.)
Table 3.1 indicates the setting method for the operating mode.
Table 3.1
Operating Mode Setting
Pin Setting
Mode
Mode
No.
FWP MD3* 1 MD2* 1 MD1 MD0 Name
On-Chip
ROM
112 Pin
144 Pin
0
1
x
x
0
0
MCU mode 0
Not Active
8-bit space
16-bit
space
1
1
x
x
0
1
MCU mode 1
Not Active
16-bit space
32-bit
space
2
1
x
x
1
0
MCU mode 2
Active
8/16-bit
space* 2
8/16/32-bit
space* 2
3
1
x
x
1
1
Single chip
mode
Active
—
—
4
1
1
1
1
1
PROM mode* 3 Active
—
—
Boot mode *
8/16-bit
space* 2
8/16/32-bit
space* 2
—
—
8/16-bit
space* 2
8/16/32-bit
space* 2
—
—
—
—
—
0
x
x
0
0
—
0
x
x
0
1
—
0
x
x
1
0
—
0
x
x
1
1
—
1
1
1
0
1
Notes: *1
*2
*3
*4
4
User
programming
mode * 4
Flash
programmer
mode * 4
Active
Active
Active
CS0 Area
MD2 and MD3 pins select the clock mode in modes 0–3 (table 3.2).
Set by BCR2 of BSC.
Only ZTAT.
Only F-ZTAT.
77
Table 3.2 indicates the setting method for the clock mode.
Table 3.2
Clock Mode Setting
MD3
MD2
Clock Mode
0
0
PLL ON × 1
0
1
PLL ON × 2
1
0
PLL ON × 4
1
1
Reserved (PROM mode only)
3.2
Explanation of Operating Modes
Table 3.3 describes the operating modes.
Table 3.3
Operating Modes
Mode
Description
(MCU) Mode 0
CS0 area becomes an external memory space with 8-bit bus width for
the 112-pin version, and 16-bit for the 144-pin version.
(MCU) Mode 1
CS0 area becomes an external memory space with 16-bit bus width for
the 112-pin version, and 32-bit for the 144-pin version
(MCU) Mode 2
The on-chip ROM becomes effective. The bus width for the on-chip ROM
space is 32 bit.
Mode 3 (single chip
mode)
Any port can be used, but external addresses can not be employed.
Mode 4 (PROM mode)
On-chip ROM can be programmed using a general PROM writer.
Clock mode
The input waveform frequency can be used as is, doubled or quadrupled
as an internal clock in modes 0 to 3.
78
3.3
Pin Configuration
Table 3.4 describes the function of each operating mode related pin.
Table 3.4
Operating Mode Pin Function
Pin
Name
Input/Output
Function
XTAL
Input
Connects to a crystal oscillator
EXTAL
Input
Connects to a crystal oscillator, or used for external clock input pin
PLLCAP
Input
Connects to a capacitor for PLL circuit operation
MD0
Input
Designates operating mode through the level applied to this pin
MD1
Input
Designates operating mode through the level applied to this pin
MD2
Input
Designates clock mode through the level applied to this pin
MD3
Input
Designates clock mode through the level applied to this pin
79
80
Section 4 Clock Pulse Generator (CPG)
4.1
Overview
The SH7040 Series has an on-chip clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock
(φ), as well as the internal clock (φ/2 to φ/8192). The CPG consists of an oscillator, a PLL, and a
prescaler.
4.1.1
Block Diagram
A block diagram of the clock pulse generator is shown in figure 4.1.
PLLCAP
CK
EXTAL
Oscillator
PLL circuit
XTAL
Prescaler
MD2
MD3
Clock mode
control circuitry
φ
φ/2 to
φ/8192
Within the LSI
Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of the Clock Pulse Generator
4.2
Oscillator
Clock pulses can be supplied from a connected crystal resonator or an external clock.
4.2.1
Connecting a Crystal Oscillator
Circuit Configuration: A crystal oscillator can be connected as shown in figure 4.2. Use the
damping resistance (Rd) listed in table 4.1. Use a 4–10 MHz crystal oscillator (consult your dealer
concerning the compatibility of the crystal oscillator and the LSI).
81
CL1
EXTAL
4–10 MHz
CL2
XTAL
Rd
CL1 = CL2 = 18–22 pF (Recommended value)
Figure 4.2 Connection of the Crystal Oscillator (Example)
Table 4.1
Damping Resistance Values (Recommended Values)
Frequency (MHz)
Parameter
4
8
10
Rd (Ω)
500
200
0
Crystal Oscillator: Figure 4.3 shows an equivalent circuit of the crystal oscillator. Use a crystal
oscillator with the characteristics listed in table 4.2.
L
CL
Rs
XTAL
EXTAL
Co
Figure 4.3 Crystal Oscillator Equivalent Circuit
Table 4.2
Crystal Oscillator Parameters
Frequency (MHz)
Parameter
4
8
10
Rs max (Ω)
120
80
60
Co max (pF)
7
7
7
4.2.2
External Clock Input Method
Figure 4.4 shows an example of an external clock input connection. In this case, make the external
clock high level to stop it when in standby mode. During operation, make the external input clock
frequency 4–10 MHz.
82
When leaving the XTAL pin open, make sure the parasitic capacitance is less than 10 pF.
Even when inputting an external clock, be sure to delay until after the oscillation stabilization time
(upon power-on) or after release from standby, in order to ensure the PLL stabilization time.
EXTAL
XTAL
External clock
input 4–10 MHz
Open
Figure 4.4 Example of External Clock Connection
4.3
Prescaler
The prescaler divides the system clock (φ) to generate an internal clock (φ/2 to φ/8192) for supply
to peripheral modules.
4.4
Oscillator Halt Function
This CPG can detect a clock halt and automatically cause the timer pins to become highimpedance when any system abnormality causes the oscillator to halt. That is, when a change of
EXTAL has not been detected, the high-current six pins (PE9/TIOC3B, PE11/TIOC3D,
PE12/TIOC4A, PE13/TIOC4B/MRES, PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH, PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/
IRQOUT) are set to high-impedance regardless of PFC setting.
Even in standby mode, these six pins become high-impedance regardless of PFC setting. These
pins enter the normal state after standby mode is cancelled.When abnormalities that halt the
oscillator occur except in standby mode, other LSI operations become undefined. In this case, LSI
operations, including these six pins, become undefined even when the oscillator operation starts
again.
4.5
Usage Notes
4.5.1
Oscillator Usage Notes
Since the characteristics of the oscillator are closely related to the user-defined board settings, the
user should refer to the connection examples in this section and perform a careful evaluation. The
oscillator circuit ratings will differ depending on factors such as the oscillator used and the stray
capacitance of the mounted circuitry. Therefore, the oscillator manufacturer should be consulted
before a decision is made. Make sure that the voltage applied to the oscillator does not exceed the
maximum rating.
83
4.5.2
Notes on Board Design
When connecting a crystal oscillator, observe the following precautions:
• To prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation, do not route any signal lines
near the oscillator circuitry.
• When designing the board, place the crystal oscillator and its load capacitors as close as
possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins.
Figure 4.5 shows the precautions regarding oscillator block board settings.
Crossing of signal
lines prohibited
CL1
XTAL
CL2
EXTAL
Figure 4.5 Cautions for Oscillator Circuit System Board Design
84
External circuitry such as that shown in figure 4.6 is recommended around the PLL.
R1: 3 kΩ
C1: 470 pF
PLLCAP
Rp: 200 Ω
PLLVCC
CPB: 0.1 µF*
PLLVSS
VCC
CB: 0.1 µF*
VSS
Note: * CB and CPB are laminated ceramic capacitors
(Recommended values)
Figure 4.6 Cautions for Use of PLL Oscillator Circuit
Place oscillation stabilization capacitor C1 and resistor R1 near the PLLCAP pin, and ensure that
these lines do not cross any other signal lines. Supply the C1 ground from PLLVSS .
Also, separate PLLVCC and PLLVSS, and the other VCC and V SS pins, from the board power supply
source, and be sure to insert bypass capacitors CPB and CB close to the pins.
If VCC and PLLVCC are both 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, it is recommended that Rp be set to 0 Ω.
4.5.3
Spread Spectrum Clock Generator Usage Notes
The following points should be borne in mind when using a spread spectrum clock generator as an
external oscillator in order to reduce radiation noise.
• Set the center frequency and the spread amplitude such that the internal clock does not exceed
the maximum frequency during spread spectrum operation.
• Using a spread spectrum clock generator may trigger the oscillator halt function described in
section 4.4. If the system configuration is such that this function will cause problems, a spread
spectrum clock generator should not be used.
85
86
Section 5 Exception Processing
5.1
Overview
5.1.1
Types of Exception Processing and Priority
Exception processing is started by four sources: resets, address errors, interrupts and instructions
and have the priority shown in table 5.1. When several exception processing sources occur at once,
they are processed according to the priority shown.
Table 5.1
Types of Exception Processing and Priority Order
Exception
Source
Priority
Reset
Power-on reset
High
Manual reset
Address
error
CPU address error
Interrupt
NMI
DMAC/DTC address error
User break
IRQ
On-chip peripheral modules:
•
Direct memory access controller (DMAC)
•
Multifunction timer/pulse unit (MTU)
•
•
Serial communications interface (SCI)
A/D converter (A/D)*3
•
Data transfer controller (DTC)
•
Compare match timer (CMT)
•
Watchdog timer (WDT)
•
Bus state controller (BSC)
•
Port output enable control section
Instructions Trap instruction (TRAPA instruction)
General illegal instructions (undefined code)
Illegal slot instructions (undefined code placed directly after a delay branch Low
instruction* 1 or instructions that rewrite the PC * 2)
Notes: *1 Delayed branch instructions: JMP, JSR, BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BF/S, BT/S, BSRF,
BRAF.
*2 Instructions that rewrite the PC: JMP, JSR, BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BT, BF, TRAPA,
BF/S, BT/S, BSRF, BRAF.
*3 A mask products: A/D0, A/D1.
87
5.1.2
Exception Processing Operations
The exception processing sources are detected and begin processing according to the timing
shown in table 5.2.
Table 5.2
Timing of Exception Source Detection and the Start of Exception Processing
Exception
Source
Timing of Source Detection and Start of Processing
Reset
Power-on reset
Starts when the RES pin changes from low to high.
Manual reset
Starts when the RES pin is high and the MRES pin changes
from low to high.
Address error
Detected when instruction is decoded and starts when the
previous executing instruction finishes executing.
Interrupts
Detected when instruction is decoded and starts when the
previous executing instruction finishes executing.
Instructions
Trap instruction
Starts from the execution of a TRAPA instruction.
General illegal
instructions
Starts from the decoding of undefined code anytime except after
a delayed branch instruction (delay slot).
Illegal slot
instructions
Starts from the decoding of undefined code placed in a delayed
branch instruction (delay slot) or of instructions that rewrite the
PC.
When exception processing starts, the CPU operates as follows:
1. Exception processing triggered by reset:
The initial values of the program counter (PC) and stack pointer (SP) are fetched from the
exception processing vector table (PC and SP are respectively the H'00000000 and
H'00000004 addresses for power-on resets and the H'00000008 and H'0000000C addresses for
manual resets). See section 5.1.3, Exception Processing Vector Table, for more information. 0
is then written to the vector base register (VBR) and 1111 is written to the interrupt mask bits
(I3–I0) of the status register (SR). The program begins running from the PC address fetched
from the exception processing vector table.
2. Exception processing triggered by address errors, interrupts and instructions:
SR and PC are saved to the stack indicated by R15. For interrupt exception processing, the
interrupt priority level is written to the SR’s interrupt mask bits (I3–I0). For address error and
instruction exception processing, the I3–I0 bits are not affected. The start address is then
fetched from the exception processing vector table and the program begins running from that
address.
88
5.1.3
Exception Processing Vector Table
Before exception processing begins running, the exception processing vector table must be set in
memory. The exception processing vector table stores the start addresses of exception service
routines. (The reset exception processing table holds the initial values of PC and SP.)
All exception sources are given different vector numbers and vector table address offsets, from
which the vector table addresses are calculated. During exception processing, the start addresses of
the exception service routines are fetched from the exception processing vector table, which
indicated by this vector table address.
Table 5.3 shows the vector numbers and vector table address offsets. Table 5.4 shows how vector
table addresses are calculated.
Table 5.3
Exception Processing Vector Table
Vector
Numbers
Vector Table Address Offset
PC
0
H'00000000–H'00000003
SP
1
H'00000004–H'00000007
PC
2
H'00000008–H'0000000B
SP
3
H'0000000C–H'0000000F
General illegal instruction
4
H'00000010–H'00000013
(Reserved by system)
5
H'00000014–H'00000017
Slot illegal instruction
6
H'00000018–H'0000001B
(Reserved by system)
7
H'0000001C–H'0000001F
(Reserved by system)
8
H'00000020–H'00000023
CPU address error
9
H'00000024–H'00000027
DMAC/DTC address
error
10
H'00000028–H'0000002B
NMI
11
H'0000002C–H'0000002F
User break
12
H'00000030–H'00000033
13
H'00000034–H'00000037
Exception Sources
Power-on reset
Manual reset
Interrupts
(Reserved by system)
:
Trap instruction (user vector)
:
31
H'0000007C–H'0000007F
32
H'00000080–H'00000083
:
63
:
H'000000FC–H'000000FF
89
Table 5.3
Exception Processing Vector Table (cont)
Vector
Numbers
Vector Table Address Offset
IRQ0
64
H'00000100–H'00000103
IRQ1
65
H'00000104–H'00000107
IRQ2
66
H'00000108–H'0000010B
IRQ3
67
H'0000010C–H'0000010F
IRQ4
68
H'00000110–H'00000113
IRQ5
69
H'00000114–H'00000117
IRQ6
70
H'00000118–H'0000011B
IRQ7
71
H'0000011C–H'0000011F
72
H'00000120–H'00000124
Exception Sources
Interrupts
On-chip peripheral
module *
:
255
:
H'000003FC–H'000003FF
Note: * The vector numbers and vector table address offsets for each on-chip peripheral module
interrupt are given in section 6, Interrupt Controller (INTC), and table 6.3, Interrupt
Exception Processing Vectors and Priorities.
Table 5.4
Calculating Exception Processing Vector Table Addresses
Exception Source
Vector Table Address Calculation
Resets
Vector table address = (vector table address offset)
= (vector number) × 4
Address errors, interrupts,
instructions
Vector table address = VBR + (vector table address offset)
= VBR + (vector number) × 4
Notes: 1. VBR: Vector base register
2. Vector table address offset: See table 5.3.
3. Vector number: See table 5.3.
5.2
Resets
Resets have the highest priority of any exception source. There are two types of resets: manual
resets and power-on resets. As table 5.5 shows, both types of resets initialize the internal status of
the CPU. In power-on resets, all registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized; in
manual resets, they are not.
90
Table 5.5
Types of Resets
Conditions for Transition
to Reset Status
Internal Status
Type
RES
MRES
CPU
On-Chip Peripheral Module
Power-on reset
Low
—
Initialized
Initialized
Manual reset
High
Low
Initialized
Not initialized
5.2.1
Power-On Reset
When the RES pin is driven low, the LSI does a power-on reset. To reliably reset the LSI, the RES
pin should be kept at low for at least the duration of the oscillation settling time when applying
power or when in standby mode (when the clock circuit is halted) or at least 20 t cyc (when the
clock circuit is running). During power-on reset, CPU internal status and all registers of on-chip
peripheral modules are initialized. See Appendix C, Pin States, for the status of individual pins
during the power-on reset status.
In the power-on reset status, power-on reset exception processing starts when the RES pin is first
driven low for a set period of time and then returned to high. The CPU will then operate as
follows:
1. The initial value (execution start address) of the program counter (PC) is fetched from the
exception processing vector table.
2. The initial value of the stack pointer (SP) is fetched from the exception processing vector table.
3. The vector base register (VBR) is cleared to H'00000000 and the interrupt mask bits (I3–I0) of
the status register (SR) are set to H'F (1111).
4. The values fetched from the exception processing vector table are set in the program counter
(PC) and SP and the program begins executing.
Be certain to always perform power-on reset processing when turning the system power on.
5.2.2
Manual Reset
When the RES pin is high and the MRES pin is driven low, the LSI does a manual reset. To
reliably reset the LSI, the MRES pin should be kept at low for at least the duration of the
oscillation settling time when in standby mode (when the clock is halted) or at least 20 t cyc when
the clock is operating. During manual reset, the CPU internal status is initialized. Registers of onchip peripheral modules are not initialized. Since the BSC is not affected, the DRAM refresh
control functions remain operational even when the manual reset status continues for a long period
of time. When the LSI enters manual reset status in the middle of a bus cycle, manual reset
exception processing does not start until the bus cycle has ended. Thus, manual resets do not abort
bus cycles. However, the bus cycle ends once MRES is driven low. Hold at low level until manual
91
reset mode. (Keep at low level for at least the longest bus cycle.) See Appendix C, Pin States, for
the status of individual pins during manual reset mode.
In the manual reset status, manual reset exception processing starts when the MRES pin is first
kept low for a set period of time and then returned to high. The CPU will then operate the same as
described for power-on resets.
5.3
Address Errors
Address errors occur when instructions are fetched or data read or written, as shown in table 5.6.
Table 5.6
Bus Cycles and Address Errors
Bus Cycle
Type
Bus
Master
Bus Cycle Description
Address Errors
Instruction CPU
Instruction fetched from even address
None (normal)
fetch
Instruction fetched from odd address
Address error occurs
Instruction fetched from other than on-chip
peripheral module space *
None (normal)
Instruction fetched from on-chip peripheral module Address error occurs
space*
Instruction fetched from external memory space
when in single chip mode
Address error occurs
Data
CPU or
Word data accessed from even address
None (normal)
read/write
DMAC
Word data accessed from odd address
Address error occurs
or DTC
Longword data accessed from a longword
boundary
None (normal)
Longword data accessed from other than a longword boundary
Address error occurs
Byte or word data accessed in on-chip peripheral
module space*
None (normal)
Longword data accessed in 16-bit on-chip
peripheral module space *
None (normal)
Longword data accessed in 8-bit on-chip peripheral Address error occurs
module space*
External memory space accessed when in single
chip mode
Note: * See section 10, Bus State Controller (BSC).
92
Address error occurs
5.3.1
Address Error Exception Processing
When an address error occurs, the bus cycle in which the address error occurred ends. When the
executing instruction then finishes, address error exception processing starts up. The CPU operates
as follows:
1. The status register (SR) is saved to the stack.
2. The program counter (PC) is saved to the stack. The PC value saved is the start address of the
instruction to be executed after the last executed instruction.
3. The exception service routine start address is fetched from the exception processing vector
table that corresponds to the address error that occurred and the program starts executing from
that address. The jump that occurs is not a delayed branch.
5.4
Interrupts
Table 5.7 shows the sources that start up interrupt exception processing. These are divided into
NMI, user breaks, IRQ, and on-chip peripheral modules.
Table 5.7
Interrupt Sources
Type
Request Source
Number of
Sources
NMI
NMI pin (external input)
1
User break
User break controller
1
IRQ
IRQ0–IRQ7 (external input)
8
On-chip peripheral module
Direct memory access controller (DMAC)
4
Multifunction timer/pulse unit (MTU)
24
Serial communications interface (SCI)
8
A/D converter
1*
Data transfer controller (DTC)
1
Compare match timer (CMT)
2
Watchdog timer (WDT)
1
Bus state controller (BSC)
1
Port
1
Note: * For A mask products, (A/D0, A/D1) is 2
Each interrupt source is allocated a different vector number and vector table offset. See section 6,
Interrupt Controller (INTC), and table 6.3, Interrupt Exception Processing Vectors and Priorities,
for more information on vector numbers and vector table address offsets.
93
5.4.1
Interrupt Priority Level
The interrupt priority order is predetermined. When multiple interrupts occur simultaneously
(overlap), the interrupt controller (INTC) determines their relative priorities and starts up
processing according to the results.
The priority order of interrupts is expressed as priority levels 0–16, with priority 0 the lowest and
priority 16 the highest. The NMI interrupt has priority 16 and cannot be masked, so it is always
accepted. The user break interrupt priority level is 15. IRQ interrupts and on-chip peripheral
module interrupt priority levels can be set freely using the INTC’s interrupt priority level setting
registers A through H (IPRA–IPRH) as shown in table 5.8. The priority levels that can be set are
0–15. Level 16 cannot be set. See section 6.3.1, Interrupt Priority Registers A-H (IPRA-IPRH), for
more information on IPRA to IPRH.
Table 5.8
Interrupt Priority Order
Type
Priority Level
Comment
NMI
16
Fixed priority level. Cannot be masked.
User break
15
Fixed priority level.
IRQ
0–15
Set with interrupt priority level setting registers A
through H (IPRA–IPRH).
On-chip peripheral module
0–15
Set with interrupt priority level setting registers A
through H (IPRA–IPRH).
5.4.2
Interrupt Exception Processing
When an interrupt occurs, its priority level is ascertained by the interrupt controller (INTC). NMI
is always accepted, but other interrupts are only accepted if they have a priority level higher than
the priority level set in the interrupt mask bits (I3–I0) of the status register (SR).
When an interrupt is accepted, exception processing begins. In interrupt exception processing, the
CPU saves SR and the program counter (PC) to the stack. The priority level value of the accepted
interrupt is written to SR bits I3–I0. For NMI, however, the priority level is 16, but the value set in
I3–I0 is H'F (level 15). Next, the start address of the exception service routine is fetched from the
exception processing vector table for the accepted interrupt, that address is jumped to and
execution begins. See section 6.4, Interrupt Operation, for more information on the interrupt
exception processing.
5.5
Exceptions Triggered by Instructions
Exception processing can be triggered by trap instructions, general illegal instructions, and illegal
slot instructions, as shown in table 5.9.
94
Table 5.9
Types of Exceptions Triggered by Instructions
Type
Source Instruction
Comment
Trap instructions
TRAPA
—
Illegal slot
instructions
Undefined code placed
immediately after a delayed
branch instruction (delay slot)
and instructions that rewrite the
PC
Delayed branch instructions: JMP, JSR,
BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BF/S, BT/S, BSRF,
BRAF
Undefined code anywhere
besides in a delay slot
—
General illegal
instructions
5.5.1
Instructions that rewrite the PC: JMP, JSR,
BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BT, BF, TRAPA,
BF/S, BT/S, BSRF, BRAF
Trap Instructions
When a TRAPA instruction is executed, trap instruction exception processing starts up. The CPU
operates as follows:
1. The status register (SR) is saved to the stack.
2. The program counter (PC) is saved to the stack. The PC value saved is the start address of the
instruction to be executed after the TRAPA instruction.
3. The exception service routine start address is fetched from the exception processing vector
table that corresponds to the vector number specified in the TRAPA instruction. That address
is jumped to and the program starts executing. The jump that occurs is not a delayed branch.
5.5.2
Illegal Slot Instructions
An instruction placed immediately after a delayed branch instruction is said to be placed in a delay
slot. When the instruction placed in the delay slot is undefined code, illegal slot exception
processing starts up when that undefined code is decoded. Illegal slot exception processing also
starts up when an instruction that rewrites the program counter (PC) is placed in a delay slot. The
processing starts when the instruction is decoded. The CPU handles an illegal slot instruction as
follows:
1. The status register (SR) is saved to the stack.
2. The program counter (PC) is saved to the stack. The PC value saved is the jump address of the
delayed branch instruction immediately before the undefined code or the instruction that
rewrites the PC.
3. The exception service routine start address is fetched from the exception processing vector
table that corresponds to the exception that occurred. That address is jumped to and the
program starts executing. The jump that occurs is not a delayed branch.
95
5.5.3
General Illegal Instructions
When undefined code placed anywhere other than immediately after a delayed branch instruction
(i.e., in a delay slot) is decoded, general illegal instruction exception processing starts up. The
CPU handles general illegal instructions the same as illegal slot instructions. Unlike processing of
illegal slot instructions, however, the program counter value stored is the start address of the
undefined code.
5.6
When Exception Sources Are Not Accepted
When an address error or interrupt is generated after a delayed branch instruction or interruptdisabled instruction, it is sometimes not accepted immediately but stored instead, as shown in
table 5.10. When this happens, it will be accepted when an instruction that can accept the
exception is decoded.
Table 5.10 Generation of Exception Sources Immediately after a Delayed Branch
Instruction or Interrupt-Disabled Instruction
Exception Source
Point of Occurrence
Immediately after a delayed branch instruction*
1
Immediately after an interrupt-disabled instruction*
2
Address Error
Interrupt
Not accepted
Not accepted
Accepted
Not accepted
Notes: *1 Delayed branch instructions: JMP, JSR, BRA, BSR, RTS, RTE, BF/S, BT/S, BSRF,
BRAF
*2 Interrupt-disabled instructions: LDC, LDC.L, STC, STC.L, LDS, LDS.L, STS, STS.L
5.6.1
Immediately after a Delayed Branch Instruction
When an instruction placed immediately after a delayed branch instruction (delay slot) is decoded,
neither address errors nor interrupts are accepted. The delayed branch instruction and the
instruction located immediately after it (delay slot) are always executed consecutively, so no
exception processing occurs during this period.
5.6.2
Immediately after an Interrupt-Disabled Instruction
When an instruction immediately following an interrupt-disabled instruction is decoded, interrupts
are not accepted. Address errors are accepted.
96
5.7
Stack Status after Exception Processing Ends
The status of the stack after exception processing ends is as shown in table 5.11.
Table 5.11 Types of Stack Status after Exception Processing Ends
Types
Stack Status
Address error
SP
Address of instruction
32 bits
after executed instruction
SR
32 bits
Address of instruction
after TRAPA instruction
32 bits
SR
32 bits
Start address of illegal
instruction
32 bits
SR
32 bits
Trap instruction
SP
General illegal instruction
SP
Interrupt
SP
Address of instruction
after executed instruction 32 bits
SR
Illegal slot instruction
SP
32 bits
Jump destination address
of delay branch instruction 32 bits
SR
32 bits
97
5.8
Notes on Use
5.8.1
Value of Stack Pointer (SP)
The value of the stack pointer must always be a multiple of four. If it is not, an address error will
occur when the stack is accessed during exception processing.
5.8.2
Value of Vector Base Register (VBR)
The value of the vector base register must always be a multiple of four. If it is not, an address error
will occur when the stack is accessed during exception processing.
5.8.3
Address Errors Caused by Stacking of Address Error Exception Processing
When the stack pointer is not a multiple of four, an address error will occur during stacking of the
exception processing (interrupts, etc.) and address error exception processing will start up as soon
as the first exception processing is ended. Address errors will then also occur in the stacking for
this address error exception processing. To ensure that address error exception processing does not
go into an endless loop, no address errors are accepted at that point. This allows program control
to be shifted to the address error exception service routine and enables error processing.
When an address error occurs during exception processing stacking, the stacking bus cycle (write)
is executed. During stacking of the status register (SR) and program counter (PC), the SP is –4 for
both, so the value of SP will not be a multiple of four after the stacking either. The address value
output during stacking is the SP value, so the address where the error occurred is itself output.
This means the write data stacked will be undefined.
98
Section 6 Interrupt Controller (INTC)
6.1
Overview
The interrupt controller (INTC) ascertains the priority of interrupt sources and controls interrupt
requests to the CPU. The INTC has registers for setting the priority of each interrupt which can be
used by the user to order the priorities in which the interrupt requests are processed.
6.1.1
Features
The INTC has the following features:
• 16 levels of interrupt priority: By setting the eight interrupt-priority level registers, the
priorities of IRQ interrupts and on-chip peripheral module interrupts can be set in 16 levels for
different request sources.
• NMI noise canceler function: NMI input level bits indicate the NMI pin status. By reading
these bits with the interrupt exception service routine, the pin status can be confirmed, enabling
it to be used as a noise canceler.
• Notification of interrupt occurrence can be reported externally (IRQOUT pin). For example, it
is possible to request bus rights if an external bus master is informed that a peripheral module
interrupt has occurred when the LSI has released the bus rights.
6.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 6.1 is a block diagram of the INTC.
99
IRQOUT
NMI
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
UBC
DMAC
MTU
CMT
SCI
A/D
DTC
WDT
BSC
I/O
Input
control
CPU/
DTC
request
judgment
Priority
ranking
judgment
Comparator
Interrupt
request
SR
(Interrupt request)
(Interrupt request)
(Interrupt request)
(Interrupt request)
(Interrupt request)
(Interrupt request)
(Interrupt request)
(Interrupt request)
(Interrupt request)
(Interrupt request)
I3 I2 I1 I0
CPU
DTER
ICR
DTC
IPR
ISR
Module bus
Bus
interface
INTC
UBC:
DMAC:
MTU:
CMT:
SCI:
A/D:
DTC:
WDT:
BSC:
I/O: I/O port (port output control section)
User break controller
ICR: Interrupt control register
Direct memory access controller
ISR: IRQ ststus register
Multifunction timer pulse unit
DTER: DTC enable register
Compare match timer
Serial communication interface IPRA–IPRH: Interrupt priority level setting
registers A to H
A/D converter
SR: Status register
Data transfer controller
Watchdog timer
Bus state controller (DRAM
refresh control section)
Figure 6.1 INTC Block Diagram
100
Internal bus
IPRA–IPRH
6.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 6.1 shows the INTC pin configuration.
Table 6.1
Pin Configuration
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Non-maskable interrupt input pin
NMI
I
Input of non-maskable interrupt
request signal
Interrupt request input pins
IRQ0–IRQ7
I
Input of maskable interrupt request
signals
Interrupt request output pin
IRQOUT
O
Output of notification signal when an
interrupt has occurred
6.1.4
Register Configuration
The INTC has the 10 registers shown in table 6.2. These registers set the priority of the interrupts
and control external interrupt input signal detection.
Table 6.2
Register Configuration
Name
Abbr.
R/W
Initial Value Address
Access Sizes
Interrupt priority register A
IPRA
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8348
8, 16, 32
Interrupt priority register B
IPRB
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF834A
8, 16, 32
Interrupt priority register C
IPRC
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF834C
8, 16, 32
Interrupt priority register D
IPRD
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF834E
8, 16, 32
Interrupt priority register E
IPRE
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8350
8, 16, 32
Interrupt priority register F
IPRF
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8352
8, 16, 32
Interrupt priority register G
IPRG
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8354
8, 16, 32
Interrupt priority register H
IPRH
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8356
8, 16, 32
H'FFFF8358
8, 16, 32
H'FFFF835A
8, 16, 32
Interrupt control register
IRQ status register
ICR
ISR
*
R/W
2
1
R(W)* H'0000
Notes: *1 The value when the NMI pin is high is H'8000; when the NMI pin is low, it is H'0000.
*2 Only 0 can be written, in order to clear flags.
101
6.2
Interrupt Sources
There are four types of interrupt sources: NMI, user breaks, IRQ, and on-chip peripheral modules.
Each interrupt has a priority expressed as a priority level (0 to 16, with 0 the lowest and 16 the
highest). Giving an interrupt a priority level of 0 masks it.
6.2.1
NMI Interrupts
The NMI interrupt has priority 16 and is always accepted. Input at the NMI pin is detected by
edge. Use the NMI edge select bit (NMIE) in the interrupt control register (ICR) to select either
the rising or falling edge. NMI interrupt exception processing sets the interrupt mask level bits
(I3–I0) in the status register (SR) to level 15.
6.2.2
User Break Interrupt
A user break interrupt has a priority of level 15, and occurs when the break condition set in the
user break controller (UBC) is satisfied. User break interrupt requests are detected by edge and are
held until accepted. User break interrupt exception processing sets the interrupt mask level bits
(I3–I0) in the status register (SR) to level 15. For more information about the user break interrupt,
see section 7, User Break Controller (UBC).
6.2.3
IRQ Interrupts
IRQ interrupts are requested by input from pins IRQ0–IRQ7. Set the IRQ sense select bits
(IRQ0S–IRQ7S) of the interrupt control register (ICR) to select low level detection or falling edge
detection for each pin. The priority level can be set from 0 to 15 for each pin using the interrupt
priority registers A and B (IPRA–IPRB).
When IRQ interrupts are set to low level detection, an interrupt request signal is sent to the INTC
during the period the IRQ pin is low level. Interrupt request signals are not sent to the INTC when
the IRQ pin becomes high level. Interrupt request levels can be confirmed by reading the IRQ
flags (IRQ0F–IRQ7F) of the IRQ status register (ISR).
When IRQ interrupts are set to falling edge detection, interrupt request signals are sent to the
INTC upon detecting a change on the IRQ pin from high to low level. IRQ interrupt request
detection results are maintained until the interrupt request is accepted. Confirmation that IRQ
interrupt requests have been detected is possible by reading the IRQ flags (IRQ0F–IRQ7F) of the
IRQ status register (ISR), and by writing a 0 after reading a 1, IRQ interrupt request detection
results can be withdrawn.
In IRQ interrupt exception processing, the interrupt mask bits (I3–I0) of the status register (SR)
are set to the priority level value of the accepted IRQ interrupt.
102
6.2.4
On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupts
On-chip peripheral module interrupts are interrupts generated by the following on-chip peripheral
modules:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct memory access controller (DMAC)
Multifunction timer/pulse unit (MTU)
Compare match timer (CMT)
Serial communications interface (SCI)
A/D converter (A/D)
Data transfer controller (DTC)
Watchdog timer (WDT)
Bus state controller (BSC)
I/O port (I/O)
A different interrupt vector is assigned to each interrupt source, so the exception service routine
does not have to decide which interrupt has occurred. Priority levels between 0 and 15 can be
assigned to individual on-chip peripheral modules in interrupt priority registers C–H (IPRC–
IPRH).
On-chip peripheral module interrupt exception processing sets the interrupt mask level bits (I3–I0)
in the status register (SR) to the priority level value of the on-chip peripheral module interrupt that
was accepted.
6.2.5
Interrupt Exception Vectors and Priority Rankings
Table 6.3 lists interrupt sources and their vector numbers, vector table address offsets and interrupt
priorities.
Each interrupt source is allocated a different vector number and vector table address offset. Vector
table addresses are calculated from vector numbers and address offsets. In interrupt exception
processing, the exception service routine start address is fetched from the vector table indicated by
the vector table address. See table 5.4, Calculating Exception Processing Vector Table Addresses.
IRQ interrupts and on-chip peripheral module interrupt priorities can be set freely between 0 and
15 for each pin or module by setting interrupt priority registers A–H (IPRA–IPRH). The ranking
of interrupt sources for IPRC–IPRH, however, must be the order listed under Priority Order
Within IPR Setting Range in table 6.3 and cannot be changed. A power-on reset assigns priority
level 0 to IRQ interrupts and on-chip peripheral module interrupts. If the same priority level is
assigned to two or more interrupt sources and interrupts from those sources occur simultaneously,
their priority order is the default priority order indicated at the right in table 6.3.
103
Table 6.3
Interrupt Exception Processing Vectors and Priorities
Interrupt Vector
Vector Table
Address
Offset
Interrupt
Priority
(Initial
Value)
Corresponding
IPR (Bits)
Priority
within IPR
Setting
Default
Range
Priority
Interrupt Source
Vector
No.
NMI
11
H'0000002C–
H'0000002F
16
—
—
User break
12
H'00000030–
H'00000033
15
—
—
IRQ0
64
H'00000100–
H'00000103
0–15 (0)
IPRA
(15–12)
—
IRQ1
65
H'00000104–
H'00000107
0–15 (0)
IPRA
(11–8)
—
IRQ2
66
H'00000108–
H'0000010B
0–15 (0)
IPRA
(7–4)
—
IRQ3
67
H'0000010C–
H'0000010F
0–15 (0)
IPRA
(3–0)
—
IRQ4
68
H'00000110–
H'00000113
0–15 (0)
IPRB
(15–12)
—
IRQ5
69
H'00000114–
H'00000117
0–15 (0)
IPRB
(11–8)
—
IRQ6
70
H'00000118–
H'0000011B
0–15 (0)
IPRB
(7–4)
—
IRQ7
71
H'0000011C–
H'0000011F
0–15 (0)
IPRB
(3–0)
—
DMAC0
DEI0
72
H'00000120–
H'00000123
0–15 (0)
IPRC
(15–12)
—
DMAC1
DEI1
76
H'00000130–
H'00000133
0–15 (0)
IPRC
(11–8)
—
DMAC2
DEI2
80
H'00000140–
H'00000143
0–15 (0)
IPRC
(7–4)
—
DMAC3
DEI3
84
H'00000150–
H'00000153
0–15 (0)
IPRC
(3–0)
—
104
High
Low
Table 6.3
Interrupt Exception Processing Vectors and Priorities (cont)
Interrupt Vector
Vector Table
Address
Offset
Interrupt
Priority
(Initial
Value)
Interrupt Source
Vector
No.
MTU0
TGI0A
88
H'00000160–
H'00000163
0–15 (0)
TGI0B
89
H'00000164–
H'00000167
0–15 (0)
TGI0C
90
H'00000168–
H'0000016B
0–15 (0)
TGI0D
91
H'0000016C–
H'0000016F
0–15 (0)
MTU1
MTU2
Corresponding
IPR (Bits)
IPRD
(15–12)
Priority
within IPR
Setting
Default
Range
Priority
High
High
Low
TCI0V
92
H'00000170–
H'00000173
0–15 (0)
IPRD
(11–8)
—
TGI1A
96
H'00000180–
H'00000183
0–15 (0)
IPRD
(7–4)
High
TGI1B
97
H'00000184–
H'00000187
0–15 (0)
Low
TCI1V
100
H'00000190–
H'00000193
0–15 (0)
TCI1U
101
H'00000194–
H'00000197
0–15 (0)
IPRD
(3–0)
High
Low
TGI2A
104
H'000001A0–
H'000001A3
0–15 (0)
TGI2B
105
H'000001A4–
H'000001A7
0–15 (0)
IPRE
(15–12)
High
Low
TCI2V
108
H'000001B0–
H'000001B3
0–15 (0)
TCI2U
109
H'000001B4–
H'000001B7
0–15 (0)
IPRE
(11–8)
High
Low
Low
105
Table 6.3
Interrupt Exception Processing Vectors and Priorities (cont)
Interrupt Vector
Vector Table
Address
Offset
Interrupt
Priority
(Initial
Value)
Interrupt Source
Vector
No.
MTU3
TGI3A
112
H'000001C0–
H'000001C3
0–15 (0)
TGI3B
113
H'000001C4–
H'000001C7
0–15 (0)
TGI3C
114
H'000001C8–
H'000001CB
0–15 (0)
TGI3D
115
H'000001CC–
H'000001CF
0–15 (0)
MTU4
106
IPRE
(7–4)
Priority
within IPR
Setting
Default
Range
Priority
High
High
Low
TCI3V
116
H'000001D0–
H'000001D3
0–15 (0)
IPRE
(3–0)
—
TGI4A
120
H'000001E0–
H'000001E3
0–15 (0)
IPRF
(15–12)
High
TGI4B
121
H'000001E4–
H'000001E7
0–15 (0)
TGI4C
122
H'000001E8–
H'000001EB
0–15 (0)
TGI4D
123
H'000001EC–
H'000001EF
0–15 (0)
124
H'000001F0–
H'000001F3
0–15 (0)
Reserved 125
H'000001F4–
H'000001F7
0–15 (0)
TCI4V
SCI0
Corresponding
IPR (Bits)
Low
IPRF
(11–8)
High
Low
ERI0
128
H'00000200–
H'00000203
0–15 (0)
RXI0
129
H'00000204–
H'00000207
0–15 (0)
TXI0
130
H'00000208–
H'0000020B
0–15 (0)
TEI0
131
H'0000020C–
H'0000020F
0–15 (0)
IPRF
(7–4)
High
Low
Low
Table 6.3
Interrupt Exception Processing Vectors and Priorities (cont)
Interrupt Vector
Vector Table
Address
Offset
Interrupt
Priority
(Initial
Value)
Interrupt Source
Vector
No.
SCI1
ERI1
132
H'00000210–
H'00000213
0–15 (0)
RXI1
133
H'00000214–
H'00000217
0–15 (0)
TXI1
134
H'00000218–
H'0000021B
0–15 (0)
TEI1
135
H'0000021C–
H'0000021F
0–15 (0)
Corresponding
IPR (Bits)
IPRF
(3–0)
Priority
within IPR
Setting
Default
Range
Priority
High
Low
A/D*
ADI
136
H'00000220–
H'00000223
0–15 (0)
IPRG
(15–12)
—
DTC
SWDTCE 140
H'00000230–
H'00000233
0–15 (0)
IPRG
(11–8)
—
CMT0
CMI0
144
H'00000240–
H'00000243
0–15 (0)
IPRG
(7–4)
—
CMT1
CMI1
148
H'00000250–
H'00000253
0–15 (0)
IPRG
(3–0)
—
WDT
ITI
152
H'00000260–
H'00000263
0–15 (0)
IPRH
(15–12)
High
BSC
CMI
153
H'00000264–
H'00000267
0–15 (0)
H'00000270–
H'00000273
0–15 (0)
I/O
OEI
156
High
Low
IPRH
(11–8)
—
IPRG
(15–12)
High
Low
Note: * For A mask products, A/D is as follows
A/D
ADI0
136
H'00000220–
H'00000223
0–15 (0)
ADI1
137
H'00000224–
H'00000227
0–15 (0)
Low
107
6.3
Description of Registers
6.3.1
Interrupt Priority Registers A–H (IPRA–IPRH)
Interrupt priority registers A–H (IPRA–IPRH) are 16-bit readable/writable registers that set
priority levels from 0 to 15 for IRQ interrupts and on-chip peripheral module interrupts.
Correspondence between interrupt request sources and each of the IPRA–IPRH bits is shown in
table 6.4.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
R/W:
Table 6.4
Interrupt Request Sources and IPRA–IPRH
Bits
Register
15–12
11–8
7–4
3–0
Interrupt priority register A
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
Interrupt priority register B
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
Interrupt priority register C
DMAC0
DMAC1
DMAC2
DMAC3
Interrupt priority register D
MTU0
MTU0
MTU1
MTU1
Interrupt priority register E
MTU2
MTTU2
MTU3
MTU3
Interrupt priority register F
MTU4
MTU4
SCI0
SCI1
Interrupt priority register G
A/D(A/D0,
A/D1)*
DTC
CMT0
CMT1
Interrupt priority register H
WDT, BSC
I/O
Reserved
Reserved
Note: * Excluding A mask products are A/D, A mask products are A/D0 and A/D1.
108
As indicated in table 6.4, four IRQ pins or groups of 4 on-chip peripheral modules are allocated to
each register. Each of the corresponding interrupt priority ranks are established by setting a value
from H'0 (0000) to H'F (1111) in each of the four-bit groups 15–12, 11–8, 7–4, and 3–0. Interrupt
priority rank becomes level 0 (lowest) by setting H'0, and level 15 (highest) by setting H'F. If
multiple on-chip peripheral modules are assigned to WDT and BSC, those multiple modules are
set to the same priority rank.
IPRA–IPRH are initialized to H'0000 by a power-on reset or a manual reset. They are not
initialized in standby mode.
6.3.2
Interrupt Control Register (ICR)
The ICR is a 16-bit register that sets the input signal detection mode of the external interrupt input
pin NMI and IRQ0 –IRQ7 and indicates the input signal level to the NMI pin. A power-on reset
initializes ICR but the standby mode does not.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
NMIL
—
—
—
—
—
—
NMIE
Initial value:
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ0S
IRQ1S
IRQ2S
IRQ3S
IRQ4S
IRQ5S
IRQ6S
IRQ7S
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
Note: * When NMI input is high: 1; when NMI input is low: 0
• Bit 15—NMI Input Level (NMIL): Sets the level of the signal input at the NMI pin. This bit
can be read to determine the NMI pin level. This bit cannot be modified.
Bit 15: NMIL
Description
0
NMI input level is low
1
NMI input level is high
• Bits 14–9—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
109
• Bit 8—NMI Edge Select (NMIE)
Bit 8: NMIE
Description
0
Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of NMI input (initial value)
1
Interrupt request is detected on rising edge of NMI input
• Bits 7–0—IRQ0–IRQ7 Sense Select (IRQ0S–IRQ7S): These bits set the IRQ0–IRQ7 interrupt
request detection mode.
Bits 7-0: IRQ0S–IRQ7S
Description
0
Interrupt request is detected on low level of IRQ input (initial value)
1
Interrupt request is detected on falling edge of IRQ input
6.3.3
IRQ Status Register (ISR)
The ISR is a 16-bit register that indicates the interrupt request status of the external interrupt input
pins IRQ0–IRQ7. When IRQ interrupts are set to edge detection, held interrupt requests can be
withdrawn by writing a 0 to IRQnF after reading an IRQnF = 1.
A power-on reset initializes ISR but the standby mode does not.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ0F
IRQ1F
IRQ2F
IRQ3F
IRQ4F
IRQ5F
IRQ6F
IRQ7F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
• Bits 15–8—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
110
• Bits 7–0—IRQ0–IRQ7 Flags (IRQ0F–IRQ7F): These bits display the IRQ0–IRQ7 interrupt
request status.
Bits 7-0:
IRQ0F–IRQ7F
Detection Setting
Description
0
Level detection
No IRQn interrupt request exists.
Clear conditions: When IRQn input is high level
Edge detection
No IRQn interrupt request was detected. (initial value)
Clear conditions:
1. When a 0 is written after reading IRQnF = 1 status
2. When IRQn interrupt exception processing has been
executed
3. When a DTC transfer due to IRQn interrupt has been
executed
1
Level detection
An IRQn interrupt request exists.
Set conditions: When IRQn input is low level
Edge detection
An IRQn interrupt request was detected.
Set conditions: When a falling edge occurs at an IRQn input
ISR.IRQnF
IRQnS
(0: level,
1: edge)
IRQ pin
DTC
Level
detection
Edge
detection
Selection
Judgment
S Q
CPU
interrupt
request
DTC
activation
request
R
RESIRQn
(IRQn interrupt acceptance/DTC transfer completion/IRQnF = 0 write after IRQnF = 1 read)
Figure 6.2 External Interrupt Process
111
6.4
Interrupt Operation
6.4.1
Interrupt Sequence
The sequence of interrupt operations is explained below. Figure 6.3 is a flowchart of the
operations.
1. The interrupt request sources send interrupt request signals to the interrupt controller.
2. The interrupt controller selects the highest priority interrupt in the interrupt requests sent,
following the priority levels set in interrupt priority level setting registers A–H (IPRA–IPRH).
Lower-priority interrupts are ignored. They are held pending until interrupt requests designated
as edge-detect type are accepted. For IRQ interrupts, however, withdrawal is possible by
accessing the IRQ status register (ISR). See section 6.2.3, IRQ Interrupts, for details. Interrupts
held pending due to edge detection are cleared by a power-on reset or a manual reset. If two of
these interrupts have the same priority level or if multiple interrupts occur within a single
module, the interrupt with the highest default priority or the highest priority within its IPR
setting range (as indicated in table 6.3) is selected.
3. The interrupt controller compares the priority level of the selected interrupt request with the
interrupt mask bits (I3–I0) in the CPU’s status register (SR). If the request priority level is
equal to or less than the level set in I3–I0, the request is ignored. If the request priority level is
higher than the level in bits I3–I0, the interrupt controller accepts the interrupt and sends an
interrupt request signal to the CPU.
4. When the interrupt controller accepts an interrupt, a low level is output from the IRQOUT pin.
5. The CPU detects the interrupt request sent from the interrupt controller when it decodes the
next instruction to be executed. Instead of executing the decoded instruction, the CPU starts
interrupt exception processing (figure 6.4).
6. SR and PC are saved onto the stack.
7. The priority level of the accepted interrupt is copied to the interrupt mask level bits (I3–I0) in
the status register (SR).
8. When the accepted interrupt is sensed by level or is from an on-chip peripheral module, a high
level is output from the IRQOUT pin. When the accepted interrupt is sensed by edge, a high
level is output from the IRQOUT pin at the point when the CPU starts interrupt exception
processing instead of instruction execution as noted in (5) above. However, if the interrupt
controller accepts an interrupt with a higher priority than one it is in the midst of accepting, the
IRQOUT pin will remain low level.
9. The CPU reads the start address of the exception service routine from the exception vector
table for the accepted interrupt, jumps to that address, and starts executing the program there.
This jump is not a delay branch.
112
Program
execution state
Interrupt?
No
Yes
No
NMI?
Yes
User break?
Yes
No
Level 15
interrupt?
No
IRQOUT = low level*1
Yes
Save SR to stack
Yes
Save PC to stack
I3 to I0 ≤
level 14?
No
Copy accept-interrupt
level to I3 to I0
Yes
IRQOUT = high level*2
Level 14
interrupt?
No
Yes
Level 1
interrupt?
I3 to I0 ≤
level 13?
Yes
No
Yes
No
I3 to I0 =
level 0?
No
Reads exception
vector table
Branches to exception
service routine
I3 to I0: Interrupt mask bits of status register
Notes: *1
*2
IRQOUT is the same signal as the interrupt request signal to the CPU (see
figure 6.1). Thus, it is output when there is a higher priority interrupt request
than the one in the I3 to I0 bits of the SR.
When the accepted interrupt is sensed by edge, the IRQOUT pin becomes
high level at the point when the CPU starts interrupt exception processing
instead of instruction execution (before SR is saved to the stack).
If the interrupt controller has accepted another interrupt with a higher priority
and has output an interrupt request to the CPU, the IRQOUT pin will remain
low level.
Figure 6.3 Interrupt Sequence Flowchart
113
6.4.2
Stack after Interrupt Exception Processing
Figure 6.4 shows the stack after interrupt exception processing.
Address
4n–8
PC*1
32 bits
4n–4
SR
32 bits
SP*2
4n
Notes: *1
*2
PC: Start address of the next instruction (return destination instruction)
after the executing instruction
Always be certain that SP is a multiple of 4
Figure 6.4 Stack after Interrupt Exception Processing
6.5
Interrupt Response Time
Table 6.5 indicates the interrupt response time, which is the time from the occurrence of an
interrupt request until the interrupt exception processing starts and fetching of the first instruction
of the interrupt service routine begins. Figure 6.5 shows the pipeline when an IRQ interrupt is
accepted.
114
Table 6.5
Interrupt Response Time
Number of States
NMI, Peripheral
Module
IRQ
Notes
DMAC/DTC active
judgment
0 or 1
1
1 state required for interrupt
signals for which
DMAC/DTC activation is
possible
Compare identified interrupt priority with SR mask
level
2
3
Wait for completion of
sequence currently being
executed by CPU
X (≥ 0)
Item
The longest sequence is for
interrupt or address-error
exception processing (X = 4
+ m1 + m2 + m3 + m4). If an
interrupt-masking instruction
follows, however, the time
may be even longer.
Time from start of interrupt 5 + m1 + m2 + m3
exception processing until
fetch of first instruction of
exception service routine
starts
Interrupt
response
time
Total: 7 + m1 + m2 + m3
Performs the PC and SR
saves and vector address
fetch.
9 + m1 + m2 + m3
Minimum: 10
12
0.35–0.42 µs at 28.7 MHz
Maximum: 12 + 2 (m1 + m2 +
m3) + m4
13 + 2 (m1 + m2 +
m3) + m4
0.67–0.70 µs at 28.7 MHz*
Note: * When m1 = m2 = m3 = m4 = 1
m1–m4 are the number of states needed for the following memory accesses.
m1: SR save (longword write)
m2: PC save (longword write)
m3: Vector address read (longword read)
m4: Fetch first instruction of interrupt service routine
115
Interrupt acceptance
1
5 + m1 + m2 + m3
3
m1 m2 1 m3 1
3
IRQ
Instruction (instruction
replaced by interrupt
exception processing)
Overrun fetch
F D E E M M E M E E
F
Interrupt service routine
start instruction
F D E
F: Instruction fetch (instruction fetched from memory where program is stored).
D: Instruction decoding (fetched instruction is decoded).
E: Instruction execution (data operation and address calculation is performed
according to the results of decoding).
M: Memory access (data in memory is accessed).
Figure 6.5 Pipeline when an IRQ Interrupt is Accepted
6.6
Data Transfer with Interrupt Request Signals
The following data transfers can be done using interrupt request signals:
• Activate DMAC only, without generating CPU interrupt
• Activate DTC only, CPU interrupts according to DTC settings
Among interrupt sources, those designated as DMAC activating sources are masked and not input
to the INTC. The masking condition is listed below:
Mask condition = DME • (DE0 • source selection 0 + DE1 × source selection 1 + DE2 •
source selection 2 + DE3 • source selection 3)
The INTC masks CPU interrupts when the corresponding DTE bit is a 1. The DTE clear condition
and interrupt source flag clear condition are listed below.
DTE clear condition = DTC transfer end • DTECLR
Interrupt source flag clear condition = DTC transfer end • DTECLR + DMAC transfer end
Where: DTECLR = DISEL + counter 0.
Figure 6.6 shows a control block diagram.
116
Interrupt source
Interrupt source
flag clear
(by DMAC)
DMAC
Interrupt source
(those not designated as DMAC activating sources)
CPU interrupt request
DTC activation
request
DTER
Interrupt source
flag clear (by DTC)
DTE clear
DTECLR
Transfer end
Figure 6.6 Interrupt Control Block Diagram
6.6.1
Handling DTC Activating and CPU Interrupt Sources, but Not DMAC Activating
Sources
1.
2.
3.
4.
Either do not select the DMAC as a source, or clear the DME bit to 0.
For DTC, set the corresponding DTE bits and DISEL bits to 1.
Activating sources are applied to the DTC when interrupts occur.
When the DTC performs a data transfer, it clears the DTE bit to 0 and sends an interrupt
request to the CPU. The activating source does not clear.
5. The CPU clears interrupt sources with its interrupt processing routine. It then confirms the
transfer counter value. When the transfer counter value ≠ 0, it sets the DTE bit to 1 and allows
the next data transfer. If the transfer counter value = 0, it performs the necessary end
processing in the interrupt processing routine.
117
6.6.2
Handling DMAC Activating Sources but Not CPU Interrupt or DTC Activating
Sources
1. Select the DMAC as a source and set the DME bit to 1. CPU interrupt sources and DTC
activating sources are masked regardless of the interrupt priority level register settings or DTC
register settings.
2. Activating sources are applied to the DMAC when interrupts occur.
3. The DMAC clears activating sources at the time of data transfer.
6.6.3
Handling DTC Activating Sources but Not CPU Interrupt or DMAC Activating
Sources
1.
2.
3.
4.
Either do not select the DMAC as a source, or clear the DME bit to 0.
For DTC, set the corresponding DTE bits to 1 and clear the DISEL bits to 0.
Activating sources are applied to the DTC when interrupts occur.
When the DTC performs a data transfer, it clears the activating source. An interrupt request is
not sent to the CPU, because the DTE bit is maintained as a 1.
5. However, when the transfer counter value = 0 the DTE bit is cleared to 0 and an interrupt
request is sent to the CPU.
6. The CPU performs the necessary end processing in the interrupt processing routine.
6.6.4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Treating CPU Interrupt Sources but Not DTC or DMAC Activating Sources
Either do not select the DMAC as a source, or clear the DME bit to 0.
For DTC, clear the corresponding DTE bits to 0.
When interrupts occur, interrupt requests are sent to the CPU.
The CPU clears the interrupt source and performs the necessary processing in the interrupt
processing routine.
118
Section 7 User Break Controller (UBC)
7.1
Overview
The user break controller (UBC) provides functions that simplify program debugging. Break
conditions are set in the UBC and a user break interrupt is generated according to the conditions of
the bus cycle generated by the CPU, DMAC, or DTC. This function makes it easy to design an
effective self-monitoring debugger, enabling the chip to easily debug programs without using a
large in-circuit emulator.
7.1.1
Features
The features of the user break controller are:
• Break compare conditions can be set:
 Address
 CPU cycle or DMA/DTC cycle
 Instruction fetch or data access
 Read or write
 Operand size: byte/word/longword
• User break interrupt generated upon satisfying break conditions. A user-designed user break
interrupt exception processing routine can be run.
• Select either to break in the CPU instruction fetch cycle before the instruction is executed or
after.
7.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the UBC.
119
UBBR
UBAMRH
UBARH
UBAMRL
UBARL
Internal bus
Bus
interface
Module bus
Break condition comparator
User break
interrupt
generating
circuit
UBC
Interrupt request
Interrupt controller
UBARH, UBARL: User break address registers H, L
UBAMRH, UBAMRL: User break address mask registers H, L
UBBR: User break bus cycle register
Figure 7.1 User Break Controller Block Diagram
7.1.3
Register Configuration
The UBC has the five registers shown in table 7.1. Break conditions are established using these
registers.
120
Table 7.1
Register Configuration
Name
Abbr.
R/W
Initial
Value
Address
User break address register H
UBARH
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8600 8, 16, 32
User break address register L
UBARL
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8602 8, 16, 32
User break address mask register H UBAMRH
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8604 8, 16, 32
User break address mask register L
UBAMRL
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8606 8, 16, 32
User break bus cycle register
UBBR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8608 8, 16, 32
7.2
Register Descriptions
7.2.1
User Break Address Register (UBAR)
Access
Size
The user break address register (UBAR) consists of user break address register H (UBARH) and
user break address register L (UBARL). Both are 16-bit readable/writable registers. UBARH
stores the upper bits (bits 31–16) of the address of the break condition, while UBARL stores the
lower bits (bits 15–0). Resets and hardware standbys initialize both UBARH and UBARL to
H'0000. They are not initialized in manual reset or software standby mode.
UBARH:
Bit:
UBARH
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
UBARH
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
UBA31
UBA30
UBA29
UBA28
UBA27
UBA26
UBA25
UBA24
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UBA23
UBA22
UBA21
UBA20
UBA19
UBA18
UBA17
UBA16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
121
UBARL:
Bit:
UBARL
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
UBARL
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
UBA15
UBA14
UBA13
UBA12
UBA11
UBA10
UBA9
UBA8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UBA7
UBA6
UBA5
UBA4
UBA3
UBA2
UBA1
UBA0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• UBARH Bits 15–0—User Break Address 31–16 (UBA31–UBA16): These bits store the upper
bit values (bits 31–16) of the address of the break condition.
• UBARL Bits 15–0—User Break Address 15–0 (UBA15–UBA0): These bits store the lower bit
values (bits 15–0) of the address of the break condition.
7.2.2
User Break Address Mask Register (UBAMR)
The user break address mask register (UBAMR) consists of user break address mask register H
(UBAMRH) and user break address mask register L (UBAMRL). Both are 16-bit
readable/writable registers. UBAMRH designates whether to mask any of the break address bits
established in the UBARH, and UBAMRL designates whether to mask any of the break address
bits established in the UBARL. Resets and hardware standbys initialize both UBAMRH and
UBAMRL to H'0000. They are not initialized in manual reset or software standby mode.
UBAMRH:
Bit:
UBAMRH
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
UBAMRH
Initial value:
R/W:
122
15
UBM31
14
13
UBM30 UBM29
12
11
UBM28 UBM27
10
UBM26
9
8
UBM25 UBM24
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UBM23
UBM22 UBM21
UBM20 UBM19
UBM18
UBM17 UBM16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
UBAMRL:
Bit:
UBAMRL
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
UBAMRL
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
UBM15
13
UBM14 UBM13
12
11
UBM12 UBM11
10
9
8
UBM10
UBM9
UBM8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UBM7
UBM6
UBM5
UBM4
UBM3
UBM2
UBM1
UBM0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• UBAMRH Bits 15–0—User Break Address Mask 31–16 (UBM31–UBM16): These bits
designate whether to mask any of the break address 31–16 bits (UBA31–UBA16) established
in the UBARH.
• UBAMRL Bits 15–0—User Break Address Mask 15–0 (UBM15–UBM0): These bits
designate whether to mask any of the break address 15–0 bits (UBA15–UBA0) established in
the UBARL.
Bits 15–0: UBMn
Description
0
Break address UBAn is included in the break conditions (initial value)
1
Break address UBAn is not included in the break conditions
Note: n = 31–0
7.2.3
User Break Bus Cycle Register (UBBR)
User break bus cycle register (UBBR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that selects from
among the following four break conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
CPU cycle/ DMAC/DTC cycle
Instruction fetch/data access
Read/write
Operand size (byte, word, longword)
Resets and hardware standbys initialize the UBBR to H'0000. It is not initialized in software
standby mode.
123
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CP1
CP0
ID1
ID0
RW1
RW0
SZ1
SZ0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
Bits 15–8—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bits 7 and 6—CPU Cycle/Peripheral Cycle Select (CP1, CP0): These bits designate break
conditions for CPU cycles or peripheral cycles (DMA/DTC cycles).
Bit 7: CP1
Bit 6: CP0
Description
0
0
No user break interrupt occurs (initial value)
1
Break on CPU cycles
0
Break on peripheral cycles
1
Break on both CPU and peripheral cycles
1
• Bits 5 and 4—Instruction Fetch/Data Access Select (ID1, ID0): These bits select whether to
break on instruction fetch and/or data access cycles.
Bit 5: ID1
Bit 4: ID0
Description
0
0
No user break interrupt occurs (initial value)
1
Break on instruction fetch cycles
0
Break on data access cycles
1
Break on both instruction fetch and data access cycles
1
124
• Bits 3 and 2—Read/Write Select (RW1, RW0): These bits select whether to break on read
and/or write cycles.
Bit 3: RW1
Bit 2: RW0
Description
0
0
No user break interrupt occurs (initial value)
1
Break on read cycles
0
Break on write cycles
1
Break on both read and write cycles
1
• Bits 1 and 0—Operand Size Select (SZ1, SZ0): These bits select operand size as a break
condition.
Bit 1: SZ1
Bit 0: SZ0
Description
0
0
Operand size is not a break condition (initial value)
1
Break on byte access
0
Break on word access
1
Break on longword access
1
Note: When breaking on an instruction fetch, set the SZ0 bit to 0. All instructions are considered
to be word-size accesses (even when there are instructions in on-chip memory and 2
instruction fetches are done simultaneously in 1 bus cycle).
Operand size is word for instructions or determined by the operand size specified for the
CPU/DMAC data access. It is not determined by the bus width of the space being
accessed.
125
7.3
Operation
7.3.1
Flow of the User Break Operation
The flow from setting of break conditions to user break interrupt exception processing is described
below:
1. The user break addresses are set in the user break address register (UBAR), the desired masked
bits in the addresses are set in the user break address mask register (UBAMR) and the breaking
bus cycle type is set in the user break bus cycle register (UBBR). If even one of the three
groups of the UBBR’s CPU cycle/peripheral cycle select bits (CP1, CP0), instruction
fetch/data access select bits (ID1, ID0), and read/write select bits (RW1, RW0) is set to 00 (no
user break interrupt is generated), no user break interrupt will be generated even if all other
conditions are in agreement. When using user break interrupts, always be certain to establish
bit conditions for all of these three groups.
2. The UBC uses the method shown in figure 7.2 to judge whether set conditions have been
fulfilled. When the set conditions are satisfied, the UBC sends a user break interrupt request
signal to the interrupt controller (INTC).
3. The interrupt controller checks the accepted user break interrupt request signal’s priority level.
The user break interrupt has priority level 15, so it is accepted only if the interrupt mask level
in bits I3–I0 in the status register (SR) is 14 or lower. When the I3–I0 bit level is 15, the user
break interrupt cannot be accepted but it is held pending until user break interrupt exception
processing can be carried out. Consequently, user break interrupts within NMI exception
service routines cannot be accepted, since the I3–I0 bit level is 15. However, if the I3–I0 bit
level is changed to 14 or lower at the start of the NMI exception service routine, user break
interrupts become acceptable thereafter. Section 6, Interrupt Controller (INTC), describes the
handling of priority levels in greater detail.
4. The INTC sends the user break interrupt request signal to the CPU, which begins user break
interrupt exception processing upon receipt. See Section 6.4, Interrupt Operation, for details on
interrupt exception processing.
126
UBARH/UBARL
UBAMRH/UBAMRL
32
32
Internal address
bits 31–0
32
CP1
CP0
ID1
ID0
32
32
CPU cycle
DMA/DTC cycle
Instruction fetch
User
break
interrupt
Data access
RW1
RW0
SZ1
SZ0
Read cycle
Write cycle
Byte size
Word size
Longword size
Figure 7.2 Break Condition Judgment Method
127
7.3.2
Break on On-Chip Memory Instruction Fetch Cycle
On-chip memory (on-chip ROM and/or RAM) is always accessed as 32 bits in 1 bus cycle.
Therefore, 2 instructions can be retrieved in 1 bus cycle when fetching instructions from on-chip
memory. At such times, only 1 bus cycle is generated, but by setting the start addresses of both
instructions in the user break address register (UBAR) it is possible to cause independent breaks.
In other words, when wanting to effect a break using the latter of two addresses retrieved in 1 bus
cycle, set the start address of that instruction in UBAR. The break will occur after execution of the
former instruction.
7.3.3
Program Counter (PC) Values Saved
Break on Instruction Fetch (Before Execution): The program counter (PC) value saved to the
stack in user break interrupt exception processing is the address that matches the break condition.
The user break interrupt is generated before the fetched instruction is executed. If a break
condition is set in an instruction fetch cycle placed immediately after a delayed branch instruction
(delay slot), or on an instruction that follows an interrupt-disabled instruction, however, the user
break interrupt is not accepted immediately, but the break condition establishing instruction is
executed. The user break interrupt is accepted after execution of the instruction that has accepted
the interrupt. In this case, the PC value saved is the start address of the instruction that will be
executed after the instruction that has accepted the interrupt.
Break on Data Access (CPU/Peripheral): The program counter (PC) value is the top address of
the next instruction after the last instruction executed before the user break exception processing
started. When data access (CPU/peripheral) is set as a break condition, the place where the break
will occur cannot be specified exactly. The break will occur at the instruction fetched close to
where the data access that is to receive the break occurs.
7.4
Use Examples
7.4.1
Break on CPU Instruction Fetch Cycle
1. Register settings:
Conditions set:
UBARH = H'0000
UBARL = H'0404
UBBR = H'0054
Address: H'00000404
Bus cycle: CPU, instruction fetch, read
(operand size not included in conditions)
A user break interrupt will occur before the instruction at address H'00000404. If it is possible for
the instruction at H'00000402 to accept an interrupt, the user break exception processing will be
executed after execution of that instruction. The instruction at H'00000404 is not executed. The
PC value saved is H'00000404.
128
2. Register settings:
Conditions set:
UBARH = H'0015
UBARL = H'389C
UBBR = H'0058
Address: H'0015389C
Bus cycle: CPU, instruction fetch, write
(operand size not included in conditions)
A user break interrupt does not occur because the instruction fetch cycle is not a write cycle.
3. Register settings:
Conditions set:
UBARH = H'0003
UBARL = H'0147
UBBR = H'0054
Address: H'00030147
Bus cycle: CPU, instruction fetch, read
(operand size not included in conditions)
A user break interrupt does not occur because the instruction fetch was performed for an even
address. However, if the first instruction fetch address after the branch is an odd address set by
these conditions, user break interrupt exception processing will be done after address error
exception processing.
7.4.2
Break on CPU Data Access Cycle
1. Register settings:
Conditions set:
UBARH = H'0012
UBARL = H'3456
UBBR = H'006A
Address: H'00123456
Bus cycle: CPU, data access, write, word
A user break interrupt occurs when word data is written into address H'00123456.
2. Register settings:
Conditions set:
UBARH = H'00A8
UBARL = H'0391
UBBR = H'0066
Address: H'00A80391
Bus cycle: CPU, data access, read, word
A user break interrupt does not occur because the word access was performed on an even address.
129
7.4.3
Break on DMA/DTC Cycle
1. Register settings:
Conditions set:
UBARH = H'0076
UBARL = H'BCDC
UBBR = H'00A7
Address: H'0076BCDC
Bus cycle: DMA/DTC, data access, read, longword
A user break interrupt occurs when longword data is read from address H'0076BCDC.
2. Register settings:
Conditions set:
UBARH = H'0023
UBARL = H'45C8
UBBR = H'0094
Address: H'002345C8
Bus cycle: DMA/DTC, instruction fetch, read
(operand size not included in conditions)
A user break interrupt does not occur because no instruction fetch is performed in the DMA/DTC
cycle.
7.5
Cautions on Use
7.5.1
On-Chip Memory Instruction Fetch
Two instructions are simultaneously fetched from on-chip memory. If a break condition is set on
the second of these two instructions but the contents of the UBC break condition registers are
changed so as to alter the break condition immediately after the first of the two instructions is
fetched, a user break interrupt will still occur when the second instruction is fetched.
7.5.2
Instruction Fetch at Branches
When a conditional branch instruction or TRAPA instruction causes a branch, instructions are
fetched and executed as follows:
1. Conditional branch instruction, branch taken: BT, BF
Instruction fetch cycles: Conditional branch instruction fetch → Next-instruction overrun
fetch → Next-instruction overrun fetch → Branch destination instruction fetch
Instruction execution: Conditional branch instruction execution → Branch destination
instruction execution
2. TRAPA instruction, branch taken: TRAPA
Instruction fetch cycles: TRAPA instruction fetch → Next-instruction overrun fetch
→ Next-instruction overrun fetch → Branch destination instruction fetch
130
Instruction execution: TRAPA instruction execution → Branch destination instruction
execution
3. Conditional delay branch instruction, branch taken: BT/S, BF/S
Instruction fetch cycles: Conditional delay branch instruction fetch → Next-instruction
fetch (delay slot) → Next-instruction overrun fetch → Branch destination instruction
fetch
Instruction execution: Conditional delay branch instruction execution → Delay slot
instruction execution → Branch destination instruction execution
When a conditional branch instruction or TRAPA instruction causes a branch, the branch
destination will be fetched after the next instruction or the one after that does an overrun fetch.
However, because the instruction that is the object of the break first breaks after a definite
instruction fetch and execution, the kind of overrun fetch instructions noted above do not
become objects of a break. If data access breaks are also included with instruction fetch breaks
as break conditions, a break occurs because the instruction overrun fetch is also regarded as
becoming a data break.
7.5.3
Contention between User Break and Exception Handling
If a user break is set for the fetch of a particular instruction, and exception handling with higher
priority than a user break is in contention and is accepted in the decode stage for that instruction
(or the next instruction), user break exception handling may not be performed after completion of
the higher-priority exception handling routine (on return by RTE).
Thus, if a user break condition has been set for the fetch of the branch destination instruction
following a branch (BRA, BRAF, BT, BF, BT/S, BF/S, BSR, BSRF, JMP, JSR, RTS, RTE,
exception handling), and exception handling for this branch destination instruction with a higher
priority than a user break interrupt is accepted, user break exception handling will not be
performed after completion of that exception handling routine.
Therefore, a user break condition must not be set for the fetch of the branch destination instruction
following a branch.
7.5.4
Break at Non-Delay Branch Instruction Jump Destination
When a branch instruction with no delay slot (including exception handling) jumps to the jump
destination instruction on execution of the branch, a user break will not be generated even if a user
break condition has been set for the first jump destination instruction fetch.
131
132
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.1
Overview
The SH7040 Series has an on-chip data transfer controller (DTC), which is activated either by
interrupts or software and can perform data transfers.
8.1.1
Features
• Arbitrary channel number transfer setting possible
 Transfer information can be established for each interrupt source
 Transfer information stored in memory
 Multiple data transfers possible (chain transfers) for one activating source
• Address space: 32-bit addresses can be designated for both transfer source and destination
• Transfer devices
 Memory: On-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, external ROM, external RAM
 On-chip peripheral modules (excluding DMAC/DTC)
 Memory-mapped external devices
• Abundant transfer modes
 Can select between normal mode/repeat mode/block transfer mode
 Can select between increment/decrement/fixed for source/destination address
• Transfer units can be set as byte/word/longword
• Interrupts activating the DTC can be requested of the CPU
 Interrupt requests can be generated to the CPU after completion of a data transfer
 Interrupt requests generated to the CPU after completion of all designated data transfers
• Transfers can be activated by software
133
8.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 8.1 shows the DTC block diagram. DTC transfer information is located in memory.
On-chip
ROM
On-chip
RAM
CPU interrupt request
source clear control
Internal bus
DTDAR
DTIAR
DTER
DTCSR
DTBR
External bus
External
device
(memorymapped)
Activation
control
Request
priority
control
Interrupt request
External
memory
DTCR
DTSAR
Peripheral bus
On-chip
peripheral
module
DTMR
Register
control
Bus interface
DTC module bus
DTC
Bus controller
DTMR:
DTCR:
DTSAR:
DTDAR:
DTC mode register
DTC count register
DTC source address register
DTC destination address register
DTIAR:
DTER:
DTCSR:
DTBR:
DTC initial address register
DTC enable register
DTC control/status register
DTC information base register
Figure 8.1 DTC Block Diagram
134
8.1.3
Register Configuration
The DTC has five registers in memory used for storing transfer data: DTMR, DTCR, DTSAR,
DTDAR, and DTIAR. It is controlled by the three registers DTER (DTEA–DTEE), DTCSR, and
DTBR. The register configurations are listed in table 8.1.
Table 8.1
Register Configuration *1
Name
Abbr.
R/W
DTC mode register
DTC source address register
Initial Value Address
Access Size
Undefined
—*
2
—* 2
—* 2
Undefined
—* 2
—* 2
DTC destination address register DTDAR
—* 2
Undefined
—* 2
—* 2
DTC initial address register
DTIAR
—* 2
Undefined
—* 2
—* 2
DTC transfer count register A
DTCRA
—* 2
Undefined
—* 2
—* 2
DTC transfer count register B
DTCRB
—* 2
Undefined
—* 2
—* 2
DTC enable register A
DTEA
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8700
8, 16, 32
DTC enable register B
DTEB
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8701
8, 16, 32
DTC enable register C
DTEC
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8702
8, 16, 32
DTC enable register D
DTED
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8703
8, 16, 32
DTC enable register E
DTEE
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8704
8, 16, 32
DTC control/status register
DTCSR
R/(W)* H'0000
H'FFFF8706
8, 16, 32
DTC information base register
DTBR
R/W
H'FFFF8708
16, 32
DTMR
—*
2
DTSAR
3
Undefined
Notes: *1 DTC registers cannot be accessed by DMAC/DTC.
*2 DTC internal registers cannot be directly accessed.
*3 Only a 0 write after a 1 read is possible for the NMIF, AE bits of the DTCSR.
8.2
Register Description
8.2.1
DTC Mode Register (DTMR)
The DTC mode register (DTMR) is a 16-bit register that controls the DTC operation mode. The
contents of this register is located in memory.
135
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
SM1
SM0
DM1
DM0
MD1
MD0
SZ1
SZ0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTS
CHNE
DISEL
NMIM
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit name:
Note: * Initial value undefined.
• Bits 15–14—Source Address Mode 1, 0 (SM1, SM0): These bits designate whether to hold,
increment, or decrement the DTSAR after a data transfer.
Bit 15 (SM1)
Bit 14 (SM0)
Description
0
—
DTSAR remains fixed
1
0
DTSAR is incremented after transfer
(+1 for byte unit transfer, +2 for word, +4 for longword)
1
1
DTSAR is decremented after transfer
(–1 for byte unit transfer, –2 for word, –4 for longword)
• Bits 13–12—Destination Address Mode 1, 0 (DM1, DM0): These bits designate whether to
hold, increment or decrement the DTDAR after a data transfer.
Bit 13 (DM1)
Bit 12 (DM0)
Description
0
—
DTDAR remains fixed
1
0
DTDAR is incremented after transfer
(+1 for byte unit transfer, +2 for word, +4 for longword)
1
1
DTDAR is decremented after transfer
(–1 for byte unit transfer, –2 for word, –4 for longword)
136
• Bits 11–10—DTC Mode 1, 0 (MD1, MD0): These bits designate the DTC transfer mode.
Bit 11 (MD1)
Bit 10 (MD0)
Description
0
0
Normal mode
0
1
Repeat mode
1
0
Block transfer mode
1
1
Reserved (setting prohibited)
• Bits 9–8—DTC Data Transfer Size 1, 0 (SZ1, SZ0): These bits designate the data size for data
transfers.
Bit 9 (SZ1)
Bit 8 (SZ0)
Description
0
0
Byte (8 bits)
0
1
Word (16 bits)
1
0
Longword (32 bits)
1
1
Reserved (setting prohibited)
• Bit 7—DTC Transfer Mode Select (DTS): When in repeat mode or block transfer mode, this
bit designates whether the source side or destination side will be the repeat area or block area.
Bit 7 (DTS)
Description
0
Destination side is the repeat area or block area
1
Source side is the repeat area or block area
• Bit 6—DTC Chain Enable (CHNE): This bit designates whether to perform continuous DTC
data transfers with the same activating source. Continued transfer information is read after the
16th byte from the start address of the previous transfer information.
Bit 6 (CHNE)
Description
0
DTC data transfer end (activation wait state ensues)
1
DTC data transfer continue (read continue register information, execute
transfer)
137
• Bit 5—DTC Interrupt Select (DISEL): This bit designates whether to prohibit or allow
interrupt requests to the CPU after one-time DTC transfers.
Bit 5 (DISEL)
Description
0
Prohibit interrupts to the CPU after DTC data transfer completion if the
transfer counter is not 0 (DTC clears the interrupt source flag of the
activating source to 0)
1
Allow interrupts to the CPU after DTC data transfer completion (DTC
clears the DTER bit for the interrupt of the activating source to 0)
• Bit 4—DTC NMI Mode (NMIM): This bit designates whether to terminate transfers when an
NMI is input during DTC transfers.
Bit 4 (NMIM)
Description
0
Terminate DTC transfer upon an NMI
1
Continue DTC transfer until end of transfer being executed
• Bits 3–0—Reserved: They have no effect on DTC operation.
8.2.2
DTC Source Address Register (DTSAR)
The DTC source address register (DTSAR) is a 32-bit register that specifies the DTC transfer
source address. An even address indicates that the transfer size is word; a multiple-of-four address
means it is longword. The contents of this register is located in memory.
Bit:
31
30
29
28
27
…
4
3
2
1
0
…
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
…
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
…
—
—
—
—
—
Note: * Initial value is undefined.
8.2.3
DTC Destination Address Register (DTDAR)
The DTC destination address register (DTDAR) is a 32-bit register that specifies the DTC transfer
destination address. An even address indicates that the transfer size is word; a multiple-of-four
address means it is longword. The contents of this register are located in memory.
138
Bit:
31
30
29
28
27
…
4
3
2
1
0
…
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
…
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
…
—
—
—
—
—
Note: * Initial value is undefined.
8.2.4
DTC Initial Address Register (DTIAR)
The DTC initial address register (DTIAR) specifies the initial transfer source/transfer destination
address in repeat mode. In repeat mode, when the DTS bit is set to 1, specify the initial transfer
source address in the repeat area, and when the DTS bit is cleared to 0, specify the initial transfer
destination address in the repeat area.
The contents of this register are located in memory.
Bit:
31
30
29
28
27
…
4
3
2
1
0
…
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
…
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
…
—
—
—
—
—
Note: * Initial value is undefined.
8.2.5
DTC Transfer Count Register A (DTCRA)
DTCRA is a 16-bit register that specifies the number of DTC transfers. The contents of this
register are located in memory.
In normal mode it functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. The number of transfers is 1 when the set
value is H'0001, 65535 when it is H'FFFF, and 65536 when it is H'0000.
In repeat mode, DTCRAH maintains the transfer count and DTCRAL functions as an 8-bit
transfer counter. The number of transfers is 1 when the set value is DTCRAH = DTCRAL = H'01,
255 when they are H'FF, and 256 when it is H'00.
In block transfer mode it functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. The number of transfers is 1 when
the set value is H'0001, 65535 when it is H'FFFF, and 65536 when it is H'0000.
139
Bit:
15
14
8
DTCRAH
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit:
7
6
0
DTCRAL
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Note: * Initial value is undefined.
8.2.6
DTC Transfer Count Register B (DTCRB)
The DTCRB is a 16-bit register that designates the block length in block transfer mode. The
contents of this register is located in memory. The block length is 1 when the set value is H'0001,
65535 when it is H'FFFF, and 65536 when it is H'0000.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Note: * Initial value is undefined.
8.2.7
DTC Enable Registers (DTER)
The DTER (DTEA–DTEE) are five 8-bit readable/writable registers with bits allocated to each
interrupt source that activates the DTC. They set disable/enable for DTC activation for each
interrupt source. When a bit is 1, DTC activation by the corresponding interrupt source is enabled.
Interrupt sources for each of the DTEA–DTEE registers are indicated in table 8.2.
The DTER are initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does not
initialize DTER.
140
For the A mask, overwrite this register as follows:
When clearing bit to 0: read the 1 bit to clear and write 0.
When setting bit to 1: read the 0 bit to set and write 1.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTE7
DTE6
DTE5
DTE4
DTE3
DTE2
DTE1
DTE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
R/W*
Note: * DTER bits can only be modified by writing 1 after reading 0, or writing 0 after reading 1.
8.2.8
DTC Control/Status Register (DTCSR)
The DTCSR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that sets disable/enable for DTC activation by
software, as well as the DTC vector addresses for software activation. It also indicates the DTC
transfer status.
The DTCSR is initialized to H'0000 by power-on resets and in standby mode. Manual reset does
not initialize DTCSR.
Bit:
Initial value:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
NMIF
AE
SWDTE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R/W*
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
R/W*
0
1
1
R/W*2
0
Bit name: DTVEC7 DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0
Initial value:
R/W:
0
R/W*3
0
R/W*3
0
R/W*3
0
R/W*3
0
R/W*3
0
R/W*3
0
R/W*3
0
R/W*3 * 4
Notes: *1 For the NMIF and AE bits, only a 0 write after a 1 read is possible.
*2 For the SWDTE bit, a 1 write is always possible, but a 0 write is possible only after a 1
is read.
*3 For the DTVEC7–DTVEC0 bits, writes are possible only when SWDTE = 0.
*4 Be sure to write 0 to the DTVEC0 bit.
Bits 15–11—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
141
• Bit 10—NMI Flag Bit (NMIF): Indicates that an NMI interrupt has occurred. When the NMIF
bit is set, DTC transfers are not allowed even if the DTER bit is set to 1. If, however, a transfer
has already started with the NMIM bit of the DTMR set to 1, execution will continue until that
transfer ends. To clear the NMIF bit, read the 1 from it, then write a 0.
The NMIF bit is initialized to 0 by power-on resets and in standby mode.
Bit 10 (NMIF)
Description
0
No NMI interrupts (initial value)
(Clear condition) Write a 0 after reading the NMIF bit
1
NMI interrupt has been generated
• Bit 9—Address Error Flag (AE): Indicates that an address error by the DTC has occurred.
When the AE bit is set, DTC transfers are not allowed even if the DTER bit is set to 1. To clear
the AE bit, read the 1 from it, then write a 0.
The AE bit is initialized to 0 by power-on resets and in standby mode.
Bit 9 (AE)
Description
0
No address error by the DTC (initial value)
(Clear condition) Write a 0 after reading the AE bit
1
An address error by the DTC occurred
• Bit 8—DTC Software Activation Enable Bit (SWDTE): This bit enables/disables DTC
activation by software.
The AE bit is initialized to 0 by resets and standby mode. For details, see section 8.3.2,
Activating Sources.
Bit 8 (SWDTE)
Description
0
DTC activation by software disabled (initial value)
1
DTC activation by software enabled
• Bits 7–0—Software Activation Vectors 7–0 (DTVEC7–DTVEC0): These bits set the DTC
vector addresses for DTC activation by software. A vector address is calculated as H'0400 +
DTVEC[7:0]. Always specify 0 for DTVEC0. 8 bits are available, so you can specify values
H'00 (0)–H'FE (254).
142
8.2.9
DTC Information Base Register (DTBR)
The DTBR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the upper 16 bits of the memory
address containing DTC transfer information. Always access the DTBR in word or longword
units. If it is accessed in byte units the register contents will become undefined at the time of a
write, and undefined values will be read out upon reads.
The DTBR is not initialized either by resets or in standby mode.
Bit:
15
Initial value:
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W:
R/W:
Note: * Initial value is undefined.
8.3
Operation
The DTC stores transfer information in memory. When there are DTC transfer requests, it reads
that transfer information and performs data transfers based on it. It rewrites the transfer
information to memory after data transfers. Storing transfer information in memory makes it
possible to perform data transfers for an arbitrary number of channels. Further, setting the CHNE
bit to 1 makes it possible to perform multiple transfers continuously through one DTC transfer
request.
There are three DTC transfer modes: normal mode, repeat mode, and block transfer mode. After a
DTC transfer, the transfer source address and transfer destination address are incremented,
decremented, or kept the same, according to the respective setting.
8.3.1
Overview of Operation
Figure 8.2 shows a flowchart of DTC operation.
143
Start
Initial settings
DTMR, DTCR, DTIAR, DTSAR, DTDAR
NMIF = AE = 0?
No
Yes
Transfer request
generated?
No
Yes
DTC vector read
Transfer information read
DTCRA = DTCRA – 1 (normal/block transfer mode)
DTCRAL = DTCRAL – 1 (repeat mode)
Transfer (1 transfer unit)
DTSAR, DTDAR update
DTCRB = DTCRB – 1 (block transfer mode)
NMIF • NMIM
+ AE = 1?
No
Block
transfer mode and
DTCRB ≠ 0?
No
Yes
Transfer information write
Transfer information write
NMI or address error
CHNE = 0?
Yes
CPU interrupt request
When DISEL = 1 or DTCRA = 0 (normal/block transfer mode)
When DISEL = 1 (repeat transfer mode)
End
Figure 8.2 DTC Operation Flowchart
144
Yes
No
8.3.2
Activating Sources
The DTC performs write operations to the DTCSR with either interrupt sources or software as its
activating sources. Each interrupt source is designated by specific DTER bits to determine whether
it becomes an interrupt request to the CPU or a DTC activating source.
When the DISEL bit is 1, an interrupt, established as the DTC activating source, is requested of
the CPU after each data transfer in DRC. When the DISEL bit is a 0, a request is made only after
the completion of a designated number of data transfers. When the activating source interrupt is
requested of the CPU, the corresponding DTER bit is automatically cleared.
In the case of software activation also, when the DISEL bit is a 1, a software DTC activation
interrupt (SWDTCE) is requested of the CPU after each data transfer. When the DISEL bit is a 0,
a request is made only after the completion of a designated number of data transfers. When no
SWDTCE interrupt is requested of the CPU, the SWDTE bit of the DTCSR is automatically
cleared. When a request is made of the CPU, the SWDTE bit is maintained as a 1.
When multiple DTC activating sources occur simultaneously, they are accepted and the DTC is
activated in accordance with the default priority rankings shown in table 8.2.
Figure 8.3 shows a block diagram of activating source control.
Interrupt requests
(those not designated as
DMAC activating sources)
Interrupt
requests
DTC
DTER
IRQ
On-chip
peripheral
Source
flag clear
CPU Interrupt requests
(those not designated as
DTC activating sources)
DMAC
Source flag clear
INTC
DTC activation request
Clear
DTC
control
Figure 8.3 Activating Source Control Block Diagram
8.3.3
DTC Vector Table
Figure 8.4 shows the correspondence between DTC vector addresses and register information
placement. For each DTC activating source there are 2 bytes in the DTC vector table, which
contain the register information start address.
Table 8.2 shows the correspondence between activating sources and vector addresses. When
activating with software, the vector address is calculated as H'0400 + DTVEC[7:0].
145
Through DTC activation, a register information start address is read from the vector table, then
register information placed in memory space is read from that register information start address.
Always designate register information start addresses in multiples of four.
DTBR
Memory space
Register information
start address
(upper 16 bits)
DTC vector table
DTC vector address
Register
information
start address
(lower 16 bits)
Register
information
Figure 8.4 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information
146
Table 8.2
Interrupt Sources and DTC Vector Addresses
Source
Activating
Generator Source
DTC Vector Address
DTE
Bit
MTU
(CH4)
Transfer Transfer
Source Destination Priority
TGI4A
H'00000400–H'00000401
DTEA7 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI4B
H'00000402–H'00000403
DTEA6 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI4C
H'00000404–H'00000405
DTEA5 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI4D
H'00000406–H'00000407
DTEA4 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TCI4V
H'00000408–H'00000409
DTEA3 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI3A
H'0000040A–H'0000040B
DTEA2 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI3B
H'0000040C–H'0000040D
DTEA1 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI3C
H'0000040E–H'0000040F
DTEA0 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI3D
H'00000410–H'00000411
DTEB7 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
MTU
(CH2)
TGI2A
H'00000412–H'00000413
DTEB6 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI2B
H'00000414–H'00000415
DTEB5 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
MTU
(CH1)
TGI1A
H'00000416–H'00000417
DTEB4 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI1B
H'00000418–H'00000419
DTEB3 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
MTU
(CH0)
TGI0A
H'0000041A–H'0000041B
DTEB2 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI0B
H'0000041C–H'0000041D
DTEB1 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI0C
H'0000041E–H'0000041F
DTEB0 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
TGI0D
H'00000420–H'00000421
DTEC7 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
MTU
(CH3)
A/D
ADI(ADI0)* 2H'00000422–H'00000423
DTEC6 ADDR
IRQ0 pin
IRQ0
H'00000424–H'00000425
DTEC5 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
IRQ1 pin
IRQ1
H'00000426–H'00000427
DTEC4 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
IRQ2 pin
IRQ2
H'00000428–H'00000429
DTEC3 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
IRQ3 pin
IRQ3
H'0000042A–H'0000042B
DTEC2 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
IRQ4 pin
IRQ4
H'0000042C–H'0000042D
DTEC1 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
IRQ5 pin
IRQ5
H'0000042E–H'0000042F
DTEC0 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
IRQ6 pin
IRQ6
H'00000430–H'00000431
DTED7 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
IRQ7 pin
IRQ7
H'00000432–H'00000433
DTED6 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
CMT (CH0) CMI0
H'00000434–H'00000435
DTED5 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
CMT (CH1) CMI1
H'00000436–H'00000437
DTED4 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
High
Arbitrary* 1
Low
147
Table 8.2
Interrupt Sources and DTC Vector Addresses (cont)
Source
Activating
Generator Source
DTC Vector Address
DTE
Bit
SCI0
H'00000438–H'00000439
DTED3 RDR0
TXI0
H'0000043A–H'0000043B
DTED2 Arbitrary* 1 TDR0
RXI1
H'0000043C–H'0000043D
DTED1 RDR1
TXI1
H'0000043E–H'0000043F
DTED0 Arbitrary* 1 TDR1
BSC
CMI
H'00000440–H'00000441
DTEE7 Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
Software
Write to
DTCSR
H'00000400 + DTVEC[7:0] to —
H'00000401 + DTVEC[7:0]
SCI1
RXI0
Transfer Transfer
Source Destination Priority
Arbitrary* 1
High
Arbitrary* 1
Arbitrary* 1 Arbitrary* 1
Low
Notes: *1 External memory, memory-mapped external devices, on-chip memory, on-chip
peripheral modules (excluding DMAC and DTC)
*2 Excluding A mask products are ADI, A mask products are ADI0.
8.3.4
Register Information Placement
Figure 8.5 shows the placement of register information in memory space. The register information
start addresses are designated by DTBR for the upper 16 bits, and the DTC vector table for the
lower 16 bits.
The placement in order from the register information start address in normal mode is DTMR,
DTCRA, 4 bytes empty (no effect on DTC operation), DTSAR, then DTDAR. In repeat mode it is
DTMR, DTCRA, DTIAR, DTSAR, and DTDAR. In block transfer mode, it is DTMR, DTCRA, 2
bytes empty (no effect on DTC operation), DTCRB, DTSAR, then DTDAR.
Fundamentally, certain RAM areas are designated for addresses storing register information.
148
Memory space
Memory space
Memory space
DTMR
DTCRA
DTMR
DTCRA
DTMR
DTCRA
Register
information
start address
DTIAR
DTCRB
Register
information
DTSAR
DTSAR
DTSAR
DTDAR
DTDAR
DTDAR
Normal mode
Repeat mode
Block transfer mode
Figure 8.5 DTC Register Information Placement in Memory Space
8.3.5
Normal Mode
Performs the transfer of one byte, one word, or one longword for each activation. The total
transfer count is 1 to 65536. An interrupt request is generated to the CPU when the transfer with
DTCRA = 1 ends. Transfers of a number of bytes specified by the SCI are possible.
Table 8.3 shows the register functions for normal mode.
Table 8.3
Normal Mode Register Functions
Values Written Back upon a
Transfer Information Write
When DTCRA
is other than 1
When DTCRA is 1
Operation mode
control
DTMR
DTMR
DTCRA
Transfer count
DTCRA – 1
DTCRA – 1 (= H'0000)
DTSAR
Transfer source
address
Increment/decrement/
fixed
Increment/decrement/
fixed
DTDAR
Transfer destination
address
Increment/decrement/
fixed
Increment/decrement/
fixed
Register
Function
DTMR
8.3.6
Repeat Mode
Performs the transfer of one byte, one word, or one longword for each activation. Either the
transfer source or transfer destination is designated as the repeat area.
149
The total transfer count is specified between 1 and 256. When the specified number of transfers
ends, the address register of the designated repeat area is returned to its initial state and the transfer
is repeated. Other address registers are consecutively incremented, decremented, or remain fixed.
While DISEL = 0, no interrupt request is made to the CPU, even if the transfer with DTCRAL = 1
ends.
Pulses for driving the stepping motor can be output. Table 8.4 shows the register functions for
repeat mode.
Table 8.4
Repeat Mode Register Functions
Values Written Back upon a
Transfer Information Write
When DTCRA is
other than 1
When DTCRA is 1
Operation mode
control
DTMR
DTMR
DTCRAH
Transfer count
maintenance
DTCRAH
DTCRAH
DTCRAL
Transfer count
DTCRAL – 1
DTCRAH
DTIAR
Initial address
(Not written back)
(Not written back)
DTSAR
Transfer source
address
Increment/decrement/
fixed
(DTS = 0) Increment/
decrement/ fixed
Register
Function
DTMR
(DTS = 1) DTIAR
DTDAR
8.3.7
Transfer destination
address
Increment/decrement/
fixed
(DTS = 0) DTIAR
(DTS = 1) Increment/
decrement/ fixed
Block Transfer Mode
Performs the transfer of one block for each one activation. Either the transfer source or transfer
destination is designated as the block area.
The block length is specified between 1 and 65536. When a 1-block transfers ends, the address
register of the designated block area is returned to its initial state. Other address registers are
consecutively incremented, decremented, or remain fixed. The block transfer count is 1 to 65536.
An interrupt request is generated to the CPU when the transfer with DTCRA = 1 ends.
A/D converter group mode transfers and phase compensation PWM data transfers are possible.
Table 8.5 shows the register functions for block transfer mode.
150
Table 8.5
Block Transfer Mode Register Functions
Values Written Back upon a
Transfer Information Write
Register
Function
DTMR
Operation mode
control
DTMR
DTCRA
Transfer count
DTCRA – 1
DTCRB
Block length
(Not written back)
DTSAR
Transfer source
address
(DTS = 0) Increment/ decrement/ fixed
Transfer destination
address
(DTS = 0) DTDAR initial value
DTDAR
8.3.8
(DTS = 1) DTSAR initial value
(DTS = 1) Increment/ decrement/ fixed
Operation Timing
Figure 8.6 shows a DTC operation timing example.
φ
Activating
source
DTC
request
R
Address
Vector
read
Transfer
information
read
W
Data
transfer
Transfer
information
write
Figure 8.6 DTC Operation Timing Example (Normal Mode)
When register information is located in on-chip RAM, each mode requires 4 cycles for transfer
information reads, and 3 cycles for writes.
8.3.9
DTC Execution State Counts
Table 8.6 shows the execution state for one DTC data transfer. Furthermore, table 8.7 shows the
state counts needed for execution state.
151
Table 8.6
Execution State of DTC
Mode
Register
Information
Vector Read I Read/Write J
Data Read K
Data Write L
Internal
Operation M
Normal
1
7
1
1
1
Repeat
1
7
1
1
1
Block transfer
1
7
N
N
1
Note: N: block size (default set values of DTCRB)
Table 8.7
State Counts Needed for Execution State
Access Objective
Onchip
RAM
Onchip Internal I/O
ROM Register
External Device
Bus width
32
32
32
8
16
32
1
1
2* 1
2
2
2
Access
state
Execution
state
3* 2
Vector read
SI
—
1
—
4
2
2
Register information
read/write
SJ
1
1
—
8
4
2
Byte data read
SK
1
1
2
3
2
2
2
Word data read
SK
1
1
2
3
4
2
2
Long word data read
SK
1
1
4
6
8
4
2
Byte data write
SL
1
1
2
3
2
2
2
Word data write
SL
1
1
2
3
4
2
2
Long word write
SL
1
1
4
6
8
4
2
Internal operation
SM
1
Notes: *1 Two state access module : port, INT, CMT, SCI, etc.
*2 Three state access module : WDT, CACHE, UBC, etc.
The execution state count is calculated using the following formula. ∑ indicates the number of
transfers by one activating source (count + 1 when CHNE bit is 1).
Execution state count = I · SI + ∑ (J · S J + K · SK + L · SL ) + M · SM
152
8.3.10
DTC Usage Procedure
The procedure for DTC interrupt activation is as follows:
1. Transfer data (DTMR, DTCRA, DTSAR, DTDAR, DTCRB, and DTIAR) is located in
memory space.
2. Establish the register information start address with DTBR and the DTC vector table.
3. Set the corresponding DTER bit to 1.
4. The DTC is activated when an interrupt source occurs.
5. When interrupt requests are not made to the CPU, the interrupt source is cleared, but the DTER
is not. When interrupts are requested, the interrupt source is not cleared, but the DTER is.
6. Interrupt sources are cleared within the CPU interrupt routine. When doing continuous DTC
data transfers, set the DTER to 1.
The procedure for DTC software activation is as follows:
1. Transfer data (DTMR, DTCRA, DTSAR, DTDAR, DTCRB, and DTIAR) is located in
memory space.
2. Establish the register information start address with DTBR and the DTC vector table.
3. Confirm that the SWDTE bit of the DTCSR is 0. When the SWDTE bit is 1, the DTC is
already being driven by software.
4. Write a 1 to the SWDTE bit and a vector number to the DTVEC (byte data).
5. When SWDTCE interrupt requests are not made to the CPU, the SWDTE bit is cleared. When
interrupts are requested, the SWDTE bit is maintained as a 1.
6. The SWDTE bit is cleared to 0 within the CPU interrupt routine. For continuous DTC data
transfers, set the SWDTE to 1.
8.3.11
DTC Use Example
The following is a DTC use example of a 128-byte data reception by the SCI:
1. The settings are: DTMR source address fixed (SM1 = 0), destination address incremented
(DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), byte size (SZ1 = SZ0 = 0), one
transfer per activating source (CHNE = 0), and a CPU interrupt request after the designated
number of data transfers (DISEL = 0). 128 (H'0080) is set in DTCRA, the RDR address of the
SCI is set in DTSAR, and the start address of the RAM storing the receive data is set in
DTDAR.
2. Establish the register information start address with DTBR and the DTC vector table.
3. Set the corresponding DTER bit to 1.
4. Set the SCI to a specific receive mode and enable RxI interrupts.
153
5. The RDRF flag of the SSR is set to 1 by each completion of a 1-byte data reception by the SCI,
an RxI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The received data is transferred from
RDR to RAM by the DTC, and the RDRF flag is 0 cleared.
6. After completion of 128 data transfers (DTCRA = 0), the DTER is cleared while the RDRF is
maintained as 1, and an RxI interrupt request is made to the CPU. The interrupt processing
routine clears the RDRF, and performs the other completion processing.
8.4
Cautions on Use
• DMAC and DTC register access by the DTC is prohibited.
• DTC register access by the DMAC is prohibited.
• When setting a bit in DTER, first ensure that all transfers on the DTC channel corresponding to
that DTER have ended, or disable the transfer source for each channel so that DTC transfer
corresponding to that DTER will not occur. The above restrictions do not apply for A mask
due to change in the access method of DTER. However, take caution when changing LSI to A
mask, since modification of the program is required.
154
Section 9 Cache Memory (CAC)
9.1
Overview
The LSI has an on-chip cache memory (CAC) with 1 kbyte of cache data and a 256-entry cache
tag. The cache data and cache tag space can be used as on-chip RAM space when the cache is not
being used.
9.1.1
Features
The CAC has the following features. The cache tag and cache data configuration is shown in
figure 9.1.
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-kbyte capacity
External memory (CS space and DRAM space) instruction code and PC relative data caching
256 entry cache tag (tag address 15 bits)
4-byte line length
Direct map replacement algorithm
Valid flag (1 bit) included for purges
15
8
2
CPU
Tag
Entry
Offset
address address address
Valid bit (1 bit)
Cache tag
Tag address (15 bits)
Cache data
Data (32 bits)
256 entries
CMP
Data bus
Hit signal
Figure 9.1 Cache Tag and Cache Data Configuration
155
9.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 9.2 shows a block diagram of the cache.
CCR
Cache tag
Cache
controller
Cache data
Internal data bus
Internal address bus
Cache
Bus state
controller
External bus
interface
CCR: Cache control register
Figure 9.2 Cache Block Diagram
9.1.3
Register Configuration
The cache has one register, which can be used to control the enabling or disabling of each cache
space. The register configuration is shown in table 9.1.
156
Table 9.1
Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Address
Access Size
(Bits)
Cache control register
CCR
R/W
H'0000*
H'FFFF8740
8, 16, 32
Note: * Bits 15–5 are undefined.
9.2
Register Explanation
9.2.1
Cache Control Register (CCR)
The cache control register (CCR) selects the cache enable/disable of each space.
The CCR is a 16-bit readable/writable register. It is initialized to H'0000 by power on resets, but is
not initialized by manual resets or standby mode.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
CE
DRAM
CE
CS3
CE
CS2
CE
CS1
CE
CS0
Initial value:
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Bits 15–5 are undefined.
• Bits 15–5—Reserved: Reading these bits gives undefined values. The write value should
always be 0.
• Bit 4—DRAM Space Cache Enable (CEDRAM): Selects whether to use DRAM space as a
cache object (enable) or to exclude it (disable). A 0 disables, and a 1 enables such use.
Bit 4 (CEDRAM)
Description
0
DRAM space cache disabled (initial value)
1
DRAM space cache enabled
157
• Bit 3—CS3 Space Cache Enable (CECS3): Selects whether to use CS3 space as a cache object
(enable) or to exclude it (disable). A 0 disables, and a 1 enables such use.
Bit 3 (CECS3)
Description
0
CS3 space cache disabled (initial value)
1
CS3 space cache enabled
• Bit 2—CS2 Space Cache Enable (CECS2): Selects whether to use CS2 space as a cache object
(enable) or to exclude it (disable). A 0 disables, and a 1 enables such use.
Bit 2 (CECS2)
Description
0
CS2 space cache disabled (initial value)
1
CS2 space cache enabled
• Bit 1—CS1 Space Cache Enable (CECS1): Selects whether to use CS1 space as a cache object
(enable) or to exclude it (disable). A 0 disables, and a 1 enables such use.
Bit 1 (CECS1)
Description
0
CS1 space cache disabled (initial value)
1
CS1 space cache enabled
• Bit 0—CS0 Space Cache Enable (CECS0): Selects whether to use CS0 space as a cache object
(enable) or to exclude it (disable). A 0 disables, and a 1 enables such use.
Bit 0 (CECS0)
Description
0
CS0 space cache disabled (initial value)
1
CS0 space cache enabled
9.3
Address Array and Data Array
There is a special cache space for controlling the cache. This space is divided into an address array
and a data array, where addresses (tag address, including valid bit) and data (4-byte line length) for
cache control are recorded. The special cache space is shown in table 9.2. It can be used as on-chip
RAM space when the cache is not being used.
158
Table 9.2
Special Cache Space
Space Classification
Address
Size
Bus Width
Address array
H'FFFFF000–H'FFFFF3FF
1 kbyte
32 bit
Data array
H'FFFFF400–H'FFFFF7FF
1 kbyte
32 bit
9.3.1
Cache Address Array Read/Write Space
The cache address array has a compulsory read/write (figure 9.3).
31
Address
10 9
Upper 22 bits of the address array space address
(22 bits)
31
26 25 24
–
(6 bits)
Data
2 1
Entry address
(8 bits)
0
–
(2 bits)
10 9
0
–
(10 bits)
Tag address
(15 bits)
Valid bit (1 bit)
Figure 9.3 Cache Address Array
Address Array Read: Designates entry address and reads out the corresponding tag address
value/valid bit value.
Address Array Write: Designates entry address and writes the designated tag address value/valid
bit value.
9.3.2
Cache Data Array Read/Write Space
The cache data array has a compulsory read/write (figure 9.4).
31
10 9
Upper 22 bits of the data array space address
(22 bits)
Address
2 1
Entry address
(8 bits)
31
Data
0
–
(2 bits)
0
Data
(32 bits)
Figure 9.4 Cache Data Array
Data Array Read: Designates entry address and reads out the corresponding line of data.
Data Array Write: Designates entry address and writes designated data to the corresponding line.
159
9.4
Cautions on Use
9.4.1
Cache Initialization
Always initialize the cache before enabling it. Specifically, use an address array write to write 0 to
all valid bits for all entries (256 times), that is,those in the address range H'FFFFF000–
H'FFFFF3FF.
Writes to the address array or data array by the CPU, DMAC, or DTC are not possible while the
cache is enabled. For reads, undefined values will be read out.
9.4.2
Forced Access to Address Array and Data Array
While the cache is enabled, it is not possible to write to the address array or data array via the
CPU, DMAC, or DTC, and a read will return an undefined value. The cache must be disabled
before making a forced access to the address array or data array.
9.4.3
Cache Miss Penalty and Cache Fill Timing
When a cache miss occurs, a single idle cycle is generated as a penalty immediately before the
cache fill (access from external memory in the event of a cache miss), as shown in figure 9.5.
However, in the case of consecutive cache misses, idle cycles are not generated for the second and
subsequent cache misses, as shown in figure 9.6.
As the timing for a cache fill from normal space, the CS assert period immediately before the end
of the bus cycle (or the last bus cycle when two or four bus cycles are generated, such as in a word
access to 8-bit space) is extended by an additional cycle, as shown in figures 9.5 and 9.6.
Similarly, as the timing for a cache fill from DRAM space, the RAS assert period immediately
before the end of the bus cycle is extended by an additional cycle. In RAS down mode, the next
bus cycle is delayed by one cycle as shown in figure 9.8.
160
CK
Internal
address
Miss-hit
Address
Idle cycle
CSn
Idle cycle
RD
CS assert extension
Idle cycle
Data
Figure 9.5 Cache Fill Timing in Case of Non-Consecutive Cache Miss from Normal Space
(No Wait, No CS Assert Extension)
CK
Internal
address
Miss-hit
Address
CSn
CS assert additional extension
RD
Data
Figure 9.6 Cache Fill Timing in Case of Consecutive Cache Misses from Normal Space
(No Wait, CS Assert Extension)
161
CK
Internal
address
Miss-hit
Idle cycle
Address
ROW
RAS
COLUMN
Idle cycle
RAS assert extension
CASxx
Idle cycle
Data
Figure 9.7 Cache Fill Timing in Case of Non-Consecutive Cache Miss from DRAM Space
(Normal Mode, TPC = 0, RCD = 0, No Wait)
CS space
access
DRAM access
DRAM access
CK
Internal
address
Address
Miss-hit
Miss-hit
ROW
COLUMN
RAS
Wait
CS space
COLUMN
RAS assert extension
CASxx
Data
Figure 9.8 Cache Fill Timing in Case of Consecutive Cache Misses from DRAM Space
(RAS Down Mode, TPC = 0, RCD = 0, No Wait)
9.4.4
Cache Hit after Cache Miss
The first cache hit after a cache miss is regarded as a cache miss, and a cache fill without idle
cycle generation is performed. The next hit operates as a cache hit.
162
Section 10 Bus State Controller (BSC)
10.1
Overview
The bus state controller (BSC) divides up the address spaces and outputs control for various types
of memory. This enables memories like DRAM, SRAM, and ROM to be linked directly to the LSI
without external circuitry.
10.1.1
Features
The BSC has the following features:
• Address space is divided into five spaces
 A maximum linear 2 Mbytes for on-chip ROM effective mode, and a maximum linear
4-Mbyte for on-chip ROM ineffective mode for address space CS0
 A maximum linear 4 Mbytes for each of the address spaces CS1–CS3
 A maximum linear 16 Mbytes for DRAM dedicated space
 Bus width can be selected for each space (8, 16, or 32 bits)
 Wait states can be inserted by software for each space
 Wait states can be inserted via the WAIT pin in external memory spce accesses.
 Outputs control signals for each space according to the type of memory connected
• On-chip ROM and RAM interfaces
 On-chip RAM access of 32 bits in 1 state
 On-chip ROM access of 32 bits in 1 state
• Direct interface to DRAM
 Multiplexes row/column addresses according to DRAM capacity
 Supports high-speed page mode and RAS down mode
• Access control for each type of memory, peripheral LSI
 Address/data multiplex function
• Refresh
 Supports CAS-before-RAS refresh (auto-refresh) and self-refresh
• Refresh counter can be used as an interval timer
 Interrupt request generated upon compare match (CMI interrupt request signal)
163
10.1.2
Block Diagram
Bus
interface
CS0 to CS3
AH
WCR1
Area
control
unit
BCR1
WCR2
BCR2
RD
DCR
RDWR
WRHH, WRHL
WRH, WRL
RTCSR
CASHH, CASHL
CASH, CASL
Memory
control
unit
RAS
RTCNT
CMI interrupt request
Comparator
Peripheral bus
Interrupt
controller
Module bus
WAIT
Wait
control
unit
RTCOR
BSC
WCR1:
WCR2:
BCR1:
BCR2:
Wait control register 1
Wait control register 2
Bus control register 1
Bus control register 2
DCR:
RTCNT:
RTCOR:
RTSCR:
DRAM area control register
Refresh timer counter
Refresh timer constant register
Refresh timer control/status register
Figure 10.1 BSC Block Diagram
164
Internal bus
Figure 10.1 shows the BSC block diagram.
10.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 10.1 shows the bus state controller pin configuration.
Table 10.1 Pin Configuration
Signal
I/O
Description
A21–A0
O
Address output (A21–A18 will become input ports with power-on reset)
D31–D0
I/O
32-bit data bus. D15-D0 are address output and data I/O during address/data
multiplex I/O.
CS0–
CS3
O
Chip select
RD
O
Strobe that indicates the read cycle for ordinary space/multiplex I/O. Also
output during DRAM access.
WRHH
O
Strobe that indicates a write cycle to the most significant byte (D31–D24) for
ordinary space/multiplex I/O. Also output during DRAM access.
WRHL
O
Strobe that indicates a write cycle to the 2nd byte (D23–D16) for ordinary
space/multiplex I/O. Also output during DRAM access.
WRH
O
Strobe that indicates a write cycle to the 3rd byte (D15–D8) for ordinary
space/multiplex I/O. Also output during DRAM access.
WRL
O
Strobe that indicates a write cycle to the least significant byte (D7–D0) for
ordinary space/multiplex I/O. Also output during DRAM access.
RDWR
O
Strobe indicating a write cycle to DRAM (used for DRAM space)
RAS
O
RAS signal for DRAM (used for DRAM space)
CASHH
O
CAS signal when accessing the most significant byte (D31–D24) of DRAM
(used for DRAM space)
CASHL
O
CAS signal when accessing the 2nd byte (D23–D16) of DRAM (used for DRAM
space)
CASH
O
CAS signal when accessing the 3rd byte (D15–D8) of DRAM (used for DRAM
space)
CASL
O
CAS signal when accessing the least significant byte (D7–D0) of DRAM (used
for DRAM space)
AH
O
Signal to hold the address during address/data multiplex
WAIT
I
Wait state request signal
BREQ
I
Bus release request input
BACK
O
Bus use enable output
165
10.1.4
Register Configuration
The BSC has eight registers. These registers are used to control wait states, bus width, and
interfaces with memories like DRAM, ROM, and SRAM, as well as refresh control. The register
configurations are listed in table 10.2.
All registers are 16 bits. Do not access DRAM space before completing the memory interface
settings. All BSC registers are all initialized by a power-on reset, but are not by a manual reset.
Values are maintained in standby mode.
Table 10.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbr.
R/W
Initial Value Address
Bus control register 1
BCR1
R/W
H'200F
H'FFFF8620 8, 16, 32
Bus control register 2
BCR2
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8622 8, 16, 32
Wait state control register 1
WCR1
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8624 8, 16, 32
Wait state control register 2
WCR2
R/W
H'000F
H'FFFF8626 8, 16, 32
DRAM area control register
DCR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF862A 8, 16, 32
Refresh timer control/status register RTCSR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF862C 8, 16, 32
Refresh timer counter
RTCNT
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF862E 8, 16, 32
Refresh time constant register
RTCOR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8630 8, 16, 32
166
Access Size
10.1.5
Address Map
Figure 10.2 shows the address format used by the SH7040 Series.
A31–A24
A23, A22
A0
A21
Output address:
Output from the address pins
CS space selection:
Decoded, outputs CS0 to CS3 when A31 to A24 = 00000000
Space selection:
Not output externally; used to select the type of space
On-chip ROM space or CS space when 00000000 (H'00)
DRAM space when 00000001 (H'01)
Reserved (do not access) when 00000010 to 11111110 (H'02 to H'FE)
On-chip peripheral module space or on-chip RAM space when 11111111 (H'FF)
Figure 10.2 Address Format
This LSI uses 32-bit addresses:
• A31–A24 are used to select the type of space and are not output externally.
• Bits A23 and A22 are decoded and output as chip select signals (CS0–CS3) for the
corresponding areas when bits A31–A24 are 00000000.
• A21–A0 are output externally.
Table 10.3 shows an address map for on-chip ROM effective mode. Table 10.4 shows an address
map for on-chip ROM ineffective mode.
167
Table 10.3 Address Map for On-Chip ROM Effective Mode
Address
Space
H'00000000–H'0003FFFF*1
Memory
Size
Bus Width
On-chip ROM On-chip ROM memory
H'00040000–H'001FFFFF
Reserved
Reserved
H'00200000–H'003FFFFF
CS0 space
Ordinary space
2 Mbytes
8/16/32 bits * 2
H'00400000–H'007FFFFF
CS1 space
Ordinary space
4 Mbytes
8/16/32 bits * 2
H'00800000–H'00BFFFFF
CS2 space
Ordinary space
4 Mbytes
8/16/32 bits * 2
H'00C00000–H'00FFFFFF
CS3 space
Ordinary space or
multiplex I/O space
4 Mbytes
8/16/32 bits * 3
H'01000000–H'01FFFFFF
DRAM space DRAM
H'02000000–H'FFFF7FFF
Reserved
Reserved
H'FFFF8000–H'FFFF87FF
On-chip
peripheral
module
On-chip peripheral
module
H'FFFF8800–H'FFFFEFFF
Reserved
Reserved
H'FFFFF000–H'FFFFFFFF
On-chip RAM On-chip RAM
256 kbytes 32 bits
16 Mbytes 8/16/32 bits * 2
2 kbytes
8/16 bits
4 kbytes
32 bits
Notes: Do not access reserved spaces. Operation cannot be guaranteed if they are accessed.
*1 With the 64-kbyte version of on-chip ROM, the ROM address is H'0000000–
H'0000FFFF, and address H'00010000–H'0003FFFF is reserved space.
With the 128-kbyte version of on-chip ROM, the ROM address is H'00000000–
H'0001FFFF, and address H'00020000–H'0003FFFF is reserved space.
*2 Selected by on-chip register settings.
*3 Ordinary space: selected by on-chip register settings.
Multiplex I/O space: 8/16 bit selected by the A14 bit.
168
Table 10.4 Address Map for On-Chip ROM Ineffective Mode
Address
Space
Memory
Size
Bus Width
H'00000000–H'003FFFFF
CS0 space
Ordinary space
4 Mbytes 8/16/32 bist * 1
H'00400000–H'007FFFFF
CS1 space
Ordinary space
4 Mbytes 8/16/32 bits * 2
H'00800000–H'00BFFFFF
CS2 space
Ordinary space
4 Mbytes 8/16/32 bits * 2
H'00C00000–H'00FFFFFF
CS3 space
Ordinary space or multiplex 4 Mbytes 8/16/32 bits * 3
I/O space
H'01000000–H'01FFFFFF
DRAM space DRAM
H'02000000–H'FFFF7FFF
Reserved
Reserved
H'FFFF8000–H'FFFF87FF
On-chip
peripheral
module
On-chip peripheral module 2 kbytes
H'FFFF8800–H'FFFFEFFF
Reserved
Reserved
H'FFFFF000–H'FFFFFFFF
On-chip RAM On-chip RAM
16 Mbytes 8/16/32 bits * 2
4 kbytes
8/16 bits
32 bits
Notes: 1. Do not access reserved spaces. Operation cannot be guaranteed if they are accessed.
2. In the single-chip mode, spaces other than on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM and on-chip
peripheral modules are unavailable.
*1 Selected by the mode pin:
8/16 bit when 112 pin and 120 pin.
16/32 bit when 144 pin.
*2 Selected by on-chip register settings.
*3 Ordinary space: selected by on-chip register settings.
Multiplex I/O space: 8/16 bit selected by the A14 bit.
10.2
Description of Registers
10.2.1
Bus Control Register 1 (BCR1)
BCR1 is a 16-bit read/write register that enables access to the MTU control register, selects
multiplex I/O, and specifies the bus size of the CS spaces. With the 112-pin version
(SH7040/SH7042/SH7044), and the 120-pin version (SH7040/SH7042), specify the bus width as
word (16 bits) or less.
Write bits 8–0 of BCR1 during the initialization stage after a power-on reset, and do not change
the values thereafter. In on-chip ROM effective mode, do not access any of the CS spaces until
after completion of register initialization. In on-chip ROM ineffective mode, do not access any CS
space other than CS0 until after completion of register initialization.
BCR1 is initialized by power-on resets to H'200F, but is not initialized by manual resets or
software standbys.
169
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
MTU
RWE
—
—
—
—
IOE
Initial value:
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A3LG
A2LG
A1LG
A0LG
A3SZ
A2SZ
A1SZ
A0SZ
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
• Bits 15, 14, 12–9—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 13—MTU Read/Write Enable (MTURWE): When this bit is 1, MTU control register
access is enabled. See section 12, Multifunction Timer Pulse Unit (MTU), for details.
Bit 13 (MTURWE)
Description
0
MTU control register access is disabled
1
MTU control register access is enabled (initial value)
• Bit 8—Multiplex I/O Enable (IOE): Selects the use of CS3 space as ordinary space or
address/data multiplex I/O space. A 0 selects ordinary space and a 1 selects address/data
multiplex I/O space. When address/data multiplex I/O space is selected, the address and data
are multiplexed and output from the data bus. When CS3 space is an address/data multiplex
I/O space, bus size is decided by the A14 bit (A14 = 0: 8 bit, A14 = 1: 16 bit).
Bit 8 (IOE)
Description
0
CS3 space is ordinary space (initial value)
1
CS3 space is address/data multiplex I/O space
• Bit 7—CS3 Space Long Size Specification (A3LG): Specifies the CS3 space bus size. This is
effective only when CS3 space is ordinary space. When CS3 space is an address/data multiplex
I/O space, bus size is decided by the A14 bit.
Bit 7 (A3LG)
Description
0
According to the A3SZ bit specified value (initial value)
1
Longword (32 bit) size
170
• Bit 6—CS2 Space Long Size Specification (A2LG): Specifies the CS2 space bus size.
Bit 6 (A2LG)
Description
0
According to the A2SZ bit value (initial value)
1
Longword (32 bit) size
• Bit 5—CS1 Space Long Size Specification (A1LG): Specifies the CS1 space bus size.
Bit 5 (A1LG)
Description
0
According to the A1SZ bit value (initial value)
1
Longword (32 bit) size
• Bit 4—CS0 Space Long Size Specification (A0LG): Specifies the CS0 space bus size.
Bit 4 (A0LG)
Description
0
According to the A0SZ bit value (initial value)
1
Longword (32 bit) size
Note: A0LG is effective only in on-chip ROM effective mode. When in on-chip ROM ineffective
mode, the CS0 space bus size is specified by the mode pin.
• Bit 3—CS3 Space Size Specification (A3SZ): Specifies the CS3 space bus size when A3LG =
0. This is effective only when CS3 space is ordinary space. When CS3 space is an address/data
multiplex I/O space, bus size is decided by the A14 bit.
Bit 3 (A3SZ)
Description
0
Byte (8 bit) size
1
Word (16 bit) size (initial value)
Note: This bit is ignored when A3LG = 1; CS3 space bus size becomes longword (32 bit) (for
ordinary space).
• Bit 2—CS2 Space Size Specification (A2SZ): Specifies the CS2 space bus size when A2LG =
0.
Bit 2 (A2SZ)
Description
0
Byte (8 bit) size
1
Word (16 bit) size (initial value)
Note: This bit is ignored when A2LG = 1; CS2 space bus size becomes longword (32 bit).
171
• Bit 1—CS1 Space Size Specification (A1SZ): Specifies the CS1 space bus size when A1LG =
0.
Bit 1 (A1SZ)
Description
0
Byte (8 bit) size
1
Word (16 bit) size (initial value)
Note: This bit is ignored when A1LG = 1; CS1 space bus size becomes longword (32 bit).
• Bit 0—CS0 Space Size Specification (A0SZ): Specifies the CS0 space bus size when A0LG =
0.
Bit 0 (A0SZ)
Description
0
Byte (8 bit) size
1
Word (16 bit) size (initial value)
Note: A0SZ is effective only in on-chip ROM effective mode. In on-chip ROM ineffective mode,
the CS0 space bus size is specified by the mode pin. However, even in on-chip ROM
effective mode, this bit is ignored when A0LG = 1; CS0 space bus size becomes longword
(32 bit).
10.2.2
Bus Control Register 2 (BCR2)
BCR2 is a 16-bit read/write register that specifies the number of idle cycles and CS signal assert
extension of each CS space.
BCR2 is initialized by power-on resets to H'FFFF, but is not initialized by manual resets or
software standbys.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
172
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
IW31
IW30
IW21
IW20
IW11
IW10
IW01
IW00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CW3
CW2
CW1
CW0
SW3
SW2
SW1
SW0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 15–8—Idles between Cycles (IW31, IW30, IW21, IW20, IW11, IW10, IW01, IW00):
These bits specify idle cycles inserted between consecutive accesses when the second one is to
a different CS area after a read. Idles are used to prevent data conflict between ROM (and
other memories, which are slow to turn the read data buffer off), fast memories, and I/O
interfaces. Even when access is to the same area, idle cycles must be inserted when a read
access is followed immediately by a write access. The idle cycles to be inserted comply with
the area specification of the previous access. Refer to section 10.6, Waits between Access
Cycles, for details.
IW31, IW30 specify the idle between cycles for CS3 space; IW21, IW20 specify the idle
between cycles for CS2 space; IW11, IW10 specify the idle between cycles for CS1 space and
IW01, IW00 specify the idle between cycles for CS0 space.
Bit 15 (IW31)
Bit 14 (IW30)
Description
0
0
No idle cycle after accessing CS3 space
1
Inserts one idle cycle after accessing CS3
space
0
Inserts two idle cycles after accessing CS3
space
1
Inserts three idle cycles after accessing CS3
space (initial value)
Bit 13 (IW21)
Bit 12 (IW20)
Description
0
0
No idle cycle after accessing CS2 space
1
Inserts one idle cycle
0
Inserts two idle cycles
1
Inserts three idle cycles (initial value)
Bit 11 (IW11)
Bit 10 (IW10)
Description
0
0
No idle cycle after accessing CS1 space
1
Inserts one idle cycle
0
Inserts two idle cycles
1
Inserts three idle cycles (initial value)
1
1
1
173
Bit 9 (IW01)
Bit 8 (IW00)
Description
0
0
No idle cycle after accessing CS0 space
1
Inserts one idle cycle
0
Inserts two idle cycles
1
Inserts three idle cycles (initial value)
1
• Bits 7–4—Idle Specification for Continuous Access (CW3, CW2, CW1, CW0): The
continuous access idle specification makes insertions to clearly delineate the bus intervals by
once negating the CSn signal when doing consecutive accesses of the same CS space. When a
write immediately follows a read, the number of idle cycles inserted is the larger of the two
values specified by IW and CW. Refer to section 10.6, Waits between Access Cycles, for
details.
CW3 specifies the continuous access idles for CS3 space; CW2 specifies the continuous access
idles for CS2 space; CW1 specifies the continuous access idles for CS1 space and CW0
specifies the continuous access idles for CS0 space.
Bit 7 (CW3)
Description
0
No CS3 space continuous access idle cycles
1
One CS3 space continuous access idle cycle (initial value)
Bit 6 (CW2)
Description
0
No CS2 space continuous access idle cycles
1
One CS2 space continuous access idle cycle (initial value)
Bit 5 (CW1)
Description
0
No CS1 space continuous access idle cycles
1
One CS1 space continuous access idle cycle (initial value)
Bit 4 (CW0)
Description
0
No CS0 space continuous access idle cycles
1
One CS0 space continuous access idle cycle (initial value)
174
• Bits 3–0—CS Assert Extension Specification (SW3, SW2, SW1, SW0): The CS assert cycle
extension specification is for making insertions to prevent extension of the RD signal or WRx
signal assert period beyond the length of the CSn signal assert period. Extended cycles insert
one cycle before and after each bus cycle, which simplifies interfaces with external devices and
also has the effect of extending write data hold time. Refer to section 10.3.3, CS Assert Period
Extension, for details.
SW3 specifies the CS assert extension for CS3 space access; SW2 specifies the CS assert
extension for CS2 space access; SW1 specifies the CS assert extension for CS1 space access
and SW0 specifies the CS assert extension for CS0 space access.
Bit 3 (SW3)
Description
0
No CS3 space CS assert extension
1
CS3 space CS assert extension (initial value)
Bit 2 (SW2)
Description
0
No CS2 space CS assert extension
1
CS2 space CS assert extension (initial value)
Bit 1 (SW1)
Description
0
No CS1 space CS assert extension
1
CS1 space CS assert extension (initial value)
Bit 0 (SW0)
Description
0
No CS0 space CS assert extension
1
CS0 space CS assert extension (initial value)
10.2.3
Wait Control Register 1 (WCR1)
WCR1 is a 16-bit read/write register that specifies the number of wait cycles (0–15) for each CS
space.
WCR1 is initialized by power-on resets to H'FFFF, but is not initialized by manual resets or
software standbys.
175
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
W33
W32
W31
W30
W23
W22
W21
W20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
W13
W12
W11
W10
W03
W02
W01
W00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 15–12—CS3 Space Wait Specification (W33, W32, W31, W30): Specifies the number of
waits for CS3 space access.
Bit 15
(W33)
Bit 14
(W32)
Bit 13
(W31)
Bit 12
(W30)
Description
0
0
0
0
No wait (external wait input disabled)
0
0
0
1
1 wait external wait input enabled
1
1
15 wait external wait input enabled (initial value)
⋅⋅⋅
1
1
• Bits 11–8—CS2 Space Wait Specification (W23, W22, W21, W20): Specifies the number of
waits for CS2 space access.
Bit 11
(W23)
Bit 10
(W22)
Bit 9
(W21)
Bit 8
(W20)
Description
0
0
0
0
No wait (external wait input disabled)
0
0
0
1
1 wait external wait input enabled
1
1
15 wait external wait input enabled (initial value)
⋅⋅⋅
1
176
1
• Bits 7–4—CS1 Space Wait Specification (W13, W12, W11, W10): Specifies the number of
waits for CS1 space access.
Bit 7
(W13)
Bit 6
(W12)
Bit 5
(W11)
Bit 4
(W10)
Description
0
0
0
0
No wait (external wait input disabled)
0
0
0
1
1 wait external wait input enabled
1
1
15 wait external wait input enabled (initial value)
⋅⋅⋅
1
1
• Bits 3–0—CS0 Space Wait Specification (W03, W02, W01, W00): Specifies the number of
waits for CS0 space access.
Bit 3
(W03)
Bit 2
(W02)
Bit 1
(W01)
Bit 0
(W00)
Description
0
0
0
0
No wait (external wait input disabled)
0
0
0
1
1 wait external wait input enabled
1
1
15 wait external wait input enabled (initial value)
⋅⋅⋅
1
1
10.2.4
Wait Control Register 2 (WCR2)
WCR2 is a 16-bit read/write register that specifies the number of access cycles for DRAM space
and CS space for DMA single address mode transfers.
Do not perform any DMA single address transfers before WCR2 is set.
WCR2 is initialized by power-on resets to H'000F, but is not initialized by manual resets or
software standbys.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
DDW1
DDW0
DSW3
DSW2
DSW1
DSW0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
R/W:
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
177
• Bits 15–6—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bits 5–4—DRAM Space DMA Single Address Mode Access Wait Specification (DDW1,
DDW0): Specifies the number of waits for DRAM space access during DMA single address
mode accesses. These bits are independent of the DWW and DWR bits of the DCR.
Bit 5 (DDW1)
Bit 4 (DDW0)
Description
0
0
2-cycle (no wait) external wait disabled
(initial value)
1
3-cycle (1 wait) external wait disabled
0
4-cycle (2 wait) external wait enabled
1
5-cycle (3 wait) external wait enabled
1
• Bits 3–0—CS Space DMA Single Address Mode Access Wait Specification (DSW3, DSW2,
DSW1, DSW0): Specifies the number of waits for CS space access (0–15) during DMA single
address mode accesses. These bits are independent of the W bits of the WCR1.
Bit 3
(DSW3)
Bit 2
(DSW2)
Bit 1
(DSW1)
Bit 0
(DSW0)
Description
0
0
0
0
No wait (external wait input disabled)
0
0
0
1
1 wait (external wait input enabled)
1
1
15 wait (external wait input enabled) (initial value)
⋅⋅⋅
1
1
10.2.5
DRAM Area Control Register (DCR)
DCR is a 16-bit read/write register that selects the number of waits, operation mode, number of
address multiplex shifts and the like for DRAM control.
Do not perform any DRAM space accesses before DCR initial settings are completed.
DCR is initialized by power-on resets to H'0000, but is not initialized by manual resets or software
standbys.
178
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
TPC
RCD
TRAS1
TRAS0
DWW1
DWW0
DWR1
DWR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DIW
—
BE
RASD
SZ1
SZ0
AMX1
AMX0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bit 15—RAS Precharge Cycle Count (TPC): Specifies the minimum number of cycles after
RAS is negated before next assert.
Bit 15 (TPC)
Description
0
1.5 cycles (initial value)
1
2.5 cycles
• Bit 14—RAS-CAS Delay Cycle Count (RCD): Specifies the number of row address output
cycles.
Bit 14 (RCD)
Description
0
1 cycle (initial value)
1
2 cycles
• Bits 13–12—CAS-Before-RAS Refresh RAS Assert Cycle Count (TRAS1–TRAS0): Specify
the number of RAS assert cycles for CAS before RAS refreshes.
Bit 13 (TRAS1)
Bit 12 (TRAS0)
Description
0
0
2.5 cycles (initial value)
1
3.5 cycles
0
4.5 cycles
1
5.5 cycles
1
179
• Bits 11–10—DRAM Write Cycle Wait Count (DWW1–DWW0): Specifies the number of
DRAM write cycle column address output cycles.
Bit 11 (DWW1)
Bit 10 (DWW0)
Description
0
0
2-cycle (no wait) external wait disabled (initial value)
1
3-cycle (1 wait) external wait disabled
0
4-cycle (2 wait) external wait enabled
1
5-cycle (3 wait) external wait enabled
1
• Bits 9–8—DRAM Read Cycle Wait Count (DWR1–DWR0): Specifies the number of DRAM
read cycle column address output cycles.
Bit 9 (DWR1)
Bit 8 (DWR0)
Description
0
0
2-cycle (no wait) external wait disabled (initial value)
1
3-cycle (1 wait) external wait disabled
0
4-cycle (2 wait) external wait enabled
1
5-cycle (3 wait) external wait enabled
1
• Bit 7—DRAM Idle Cycle Count (DIW): Specifies whether to insert idle cycles, either when
accessing a different external space (CS space) or when doing a DRAM write, after DRAM
reads.
Bit 7 (DIW)
Description
0
No idle cycles (initial value)
1
1 idle cycle
• Bit 6—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 5—Burst Enable (BE): Specifies the DRAM operation mode.
Bit 5 (BE)
Description
0
Burst disabled (initial value)
1
DRAM high-speed page mode enabled.
• Bit 4—RAS Down Mode (RASD): Specifies the DRAM operation mode.
Bit 4 (RASD)
Description
0
Access DRAM by RAS up mode (initial value)
1
Access DRAM by RAS down mode
180
• Bits 3–2—DRAM Bus Width Specification (SZ1, SZ0): Specifies the DRAM space bus width.
Bit 3 (SZ1)
Bit 2 (SZ0)
Description
0
0
Byte (8 bits) (initial value)
1
Word (16 bits)
Don’t care
Longword (32 bits)
1
• Bits 1–0—DRAM Address Multiplex (AMX1–AMX0): Specifies the DRAM address
multiplex count.
Bit 1 (AMX1)
Bit 0 (AMX0)
Description
0
0
9 bit (initial value)
1
10 bit
0
11 bit
1
12 bit
1
10.2.6
Refresh Timer Control/Status Register (RTCSR)
RTCSR is a 16-bit read/write register that selects the refresh mode and the clock input to the
refresh timer counter (RTCNT), and controls compare match interrupts (CMI).
RTCSR is initialized by power-on resets and hardware standbys to H'0000, but is not initialized by
manual resets or software standbys.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
CMF
CMIE
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
RFSH
RMD
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 15–7—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
181
• Bit 6—Compare Match Flag (CMF): This status flag, which indicates that the values of
RTCNT and RTCOR match, is set/cleared under the following conditions:
Bit 6 (CMF)
Description
0
Clear condition: After RTCSR is read when CMF is 1, 0 is written in
CMF. In some cases it will clear when DTC is activated by a compare
match interrupt; refer to section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC), for
details. (initial value)
1
Set condition: RTCNT = RTCOR. When both RTCNT and RTCOR are
in an initialized state (when values have not been rewritten since
initialization, and RTCNT has not had its value changed due to a countup), RTCNT and RTCOR match, as both are H'0000, but in this case
CMF is not set.
• Bit 5—Compare Match Interrupt Enable (CMIE): Enables or disables an interrupt request
caused by the CMF bit of the RTCSR when CMF is set to 1.
Bit 5 (CMIE)
Description
0
Disables an interrupt request caused by CMF (initial value)
1
Enables an interrupt request caused by CMF
• Bits 4–2—Clock Select (CKS2–CKS0): Select the clock to input to RTCNT from among the
seven types of internal clock obtained from dividing the system clock (φ).
Bit 4 (CKS2)
Bit 3 (CKS1)
Bit 2 (CKS0)
Description
0
0
0
Stops count-up (initial value)
1
φ/2
0
φ/8
1
φ/32
0
φ/128
1
φ/512
0
φ/2048
1
φ/4096
1
1
0
1
• Bit 1—Refresh Control (RFSH): Selects whether to use refresh control for DRAM.
Bit 1 (RFSH)
Description
0
Do not refresh DRAM (initial value)
1
Refresh DRAM
182
• Bit 0—Refresh Mode (RMD): When the RFSH bit is 1, this bit selects normal refresh or selfrefresh. When the RFSH bit is 1, self-refresh mode is entered immediately after the RMD bit is
set to 1. When RMD is cleared to 0, a CAS-before-RAS refresh is performed at the interval set
in the refresh time constant register (RTCNT).
When set for self-refresh, the SH7040 Series enters self-refresh mode immediately unless it is
in the middle of a DRAM access. If it is, it enters self-refresh mode when the access ends.
Refresh requests from the interval timer are ignored in self-refresh mode.
Bit 0 (RMD)
Description
0
CAS-before-RAS refresh (initial value)
1
Self-refresh
10.2.7
Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT)
RTCNT is a 16-bit read/write register that is used as an 8-bit up counter for refreshes or generating
interrupt requests.
RTCNT counts up with the clock selected by the CKS2–CKS0 bits of the RTCSR. RTCNT values
can always be read/written by the CPU. When RTCNT matches RTCOR, RTCNT is cleared to
H'0000 and the CMF flag of the RTCSR is set to 1. If the RFSH bit of RTCSR is 1 and the RMD
bit is 0 at this time, a CAS-before-RAS refresh is performed. Additionally, if the CMIE bit of
RTCSR is a 1, a compare match interrupt (CMI) is generated.
Bits 15–8 are reserved and play no part in counter operation. They are always read as 0.
RTCNT is initialized by power-on resets H'0000, but is not initialized by manual resets or
software standbys.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W:
183
10.2.8
Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR)
RTCOR is a 16-bit read/write register that establishes the compare match period with RTCNT.
The values of RTCOR and RTCNT are constantly compared. When the values correspond, the
compare match flag of RTCSR is set and RTCNT is cleared to 0.
When the refresh bit (RFSH) of the RTCSR is set to 1 and the RMD bit is 0, a refresh request
signal is produced by this match. The refresh request signal is held until a refresh operation is
performed. If the refresh request is not processed before the next match, the previous request
becomes ineffective.
When the CMIE bit of the RTSCR is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller
by this match signal. The interrupt request is output continuously until the CMF bit of the RTSCR
is cleared.
Bits 15–8 are reserved and cannot be used in setting the period. They always read 0.
RTCOR is initialized by power-on resets to H'0000, but is not initialized by manual resets or
software standbys.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W:
184
10.3
Accessing Ordinary Space
A strobe signal is output by ordinary space accesses to provide primarily for SRAM or ROM
direct connections.
10.3.1
Basic Timing
Figure 10.3 shows the basic timing of ordinary space accesses. Ordinary access bus cycles are
performed in 2 states.
T1
T2
CK
Address
CSn
RD
Read
Data
WRx
Write
Data
Figure 10.3 Basic Timing of Ordinary Space Access
During a read, irrespective of operand size, all bits in the data bus width for the access space
(address) are fetched by the LSI on RD, using the required byte locations.
During a write, the following signals are associated with transfer of these actual byte locations:
WRHH (bits 31–24), WRHL (bits 23–16), WRH (bits 15–8), and WRL (bits 7–0).
185
10.3.2
Wait State Control
The number of wait states inserted into ordinary space access states can be controlled using the
WCR settings (figure 10.4).
T1
TW
T2
CK
Address
CSn
RD
Read
Data
WRx
Write
Data
Figure 10.4 Wait Timing of Ordinary Space Access (Software Wait Only)
186
When the wait is specified by software using WCR, the wait input WAIT signal from outside is
sampled. Figure 10.5 shows the WAIT signal sampling. The WAIT signal is sampled at the clock
rise one cycle before the clock rise when T w state shifts to T2 state.
T1
TW
TW
TW0
T2
CK
Address
CSn
RD
Read
Data
WRx
Write
Data
WAIT
Figure 10.5 Wait State Timing of Ordinary Space Access (Wait States from Software Wait
2 State + WAIT Signal)
187
10.3.3
CS Assert Period Extension
Idle cycles can be inserted to prevent extension of the RD signal or WRx signal assert period
beyond the length of the CSn signal assert period by setting the SW3–SW0 bits of BCR2. This
allows for flexible interfaces with external circuitry. The timing is shown in figure 10.6. Th and T f
cycles are added respectively before and after the ordinary cycle. Only CSn is asserted in these
cycles; RD and WRx signals are not. Further, data is extended up to the Tf cycle, which is
effective for gate arrays and the like, which have slower write operations.
Th
T1
T2
Tf
CK
Address
CSn
RD
Read
Data
WRx
Write
Data
DACK
Figure 10.6 CS Assert Period Extension Function
188
10.4
DRAM Access
10.4.1
DRAM Direct Connection
When address space A31–A24 = H'01 has been accessed, the corresponding space becomes a 16Mbyte DRAM space, and the DRAM interface function can be used to directly connect the
SH7040 Series to DRAM.
Row address and column address are always multiplexed for DRAM space. The amount of row
address multiplexing can be selected as from 9 to 12 bits by setting the AMX1 and AMX0 bits of
the DCR.
Table 10.5 AMX Bits and Address Multiplex Output
Row Address
Column Address
AMX0
Shift
Amount
Output Pins
AMX1
Output
Address
Output
Address
Output
Pins
0
0
9 bit
A21–A15
A21–A15
A21–A0
A21–A0
A14–A0
A23–A9
A21–A14
A21–A14
A21–A0
A21–A0
A13–A0
A23–A10
A21–A13
A21–A13
A21–A0
A21–A0
A12–A0
A23–A11
A21–A12
A21–A12
A21–A0
A21–A0
A11–A0
A23–A12
0
1
1
1
0
1
10 bit
11 bit
12 bit
In addition to ordinary read and write accesses, burst mode access using high speed page mode is
supported.
189
10.4.2
Basic Timing
The SH7040 Series supports 2 CAS format DRAM access. The DRAM access basic timing is a
minimum of 3 cycles for normal mode. Figure 10.7 shows the basic DRAM access timing. DRAM
space access is controlled by RAS, CASx, and RDWR signals. The following signals are
associated with transfer of these actual byte locations: CASHH (bits 31–24), CASHL (bits 23–16),
CASH (bits 15–8), and CASL (bits 7–0). However, the signals for ordinary space, WRx and RD,
are also output during the DMAC single transfer column address cycle period. Tp is the precharge
cycle, Tr is the RAS assert cycle, Tc is the CAS assert cycle and Tc2 is the read data fetch cycle.
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tc2
CK
Address
Row
Column
Data
RAS
Write
CASx
RDWR
Data
RAS
Read
CASx
RDWR
Figure 10.7 DRAM Bus Cycle (Normal Mode, TPC = 0, RCD = 0, No Waits)
190
10.4.3
Wait State Control
Wait state insertion during DRAM space access is controlled by setting the TPC, RCD, DWW1,
DWW0, DWR1, and DWR0 bits of the DCR. TPC and RCD are common to both reads and
writes. The timing with waits inserted is shown in figures 10.8 through 10.11. External waits can
be inserted at the time of software waits 2, 3. The sampling location is the same as that of ordinary
space: at one cycle before the T c2 cycle clock rise. Wait cycles are extended by external waits.
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tcw1
Tc2
CK
Address
Row
Column
Data
RAS
Write
CASx
RDWR
Data
RAS
Read
CASx
RDWR
Figure 10.8 DRAM Bus Cycle (Normal Mode, TPC = 0, RCD = 0, One Wait)
191
Tp
Tpw
Tr
Trw
Tc1
Tcw1
Tcw2
Tcw2
CK
Address
Row
Column
Data
RAS
Write
CASx
RDWR
Data
RAS
Read
CASx
RDWR
Figure 10.9 DRAM Bus Cycle (Normal Mode, TPC = 1, RCD = 1, Two Waits)
192
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tcw1
Tcw2
Tcw3
Tc2
CK
Address
Row
Column
Data
RAS
Write
CASx
RDWR
Data
RAS
Read
CASx
RDWR
Figure 10.10 DRAM Bus Cycle (Normal Mode, TPC = 0, RCD = 0, Three Waits)
193
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tcw1
Tcw2
Tcw0
Tc2
CK
Address
Row
Column
Data
RAS
Write
CASx
RDWR
Data
RAS
Read
CASx
RDWR
WAIT
Figure 10.11 DRAM Bus Cycle (Normal Mode, TPC = 0, RCD= 0, Two Waits + Wait Due
to WAIT Signal)
194
10.4.4
Burst Operation
High-Speed Page Mode: When the burst enable bit (BE) of the DCR is set, burst accesses can be
performed using high speed page mode. The timing is shown in figure 10.12. Wait cycles can be
inserted during burst accesses by using the DCR.
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tc2
Tc1
Tc2
CK
Address
Row
Column
Column
Data
RAS
Write
CASx
RDWR
Data
RAS
Read
CASx
RDWR
Figure 10.12 DRAM Bus Cycle (High-Speed Page Mode)
RAS Down Mode: There are some instances where even if burst operation is selected, continuous
accesses to DRAM will not occur, but another space will be accessed instead part way through the
access. In such cases, if the RAS signal is maintained at low level during the time the other space
is accessed, it is possible to continue burst operation at the time the next DRAM same row address
is accessed. This is called RAS down mode.
To use RAS down mode, set both the BE and RASD bits of the DCR to 1.
Figures 10.13 and 10.14 show operation in RAS up and down modes.
195
DRAM access
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tc2
CS space
access
T1
T2
DRAM access
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tc2
CK
Address
Row
Column
CS space
Row
Column
RAS
CASx
Data
Figure 10.13 DRAM Access Normal Operation (RAS Up Mode)
DRAM access
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tc2
CS space
access
T1
T2
DRAM
access
Tc1
Tc2
CK
Address
Row
Column
CS space
RAS
CASx
Data
Figure 10.14 RAS Down Mode
196
Column
10.4.5
Refresh Timing
The bus state controller is equipped with a function to control refreshes of DRAM. CAS-beforeRAS (CBR) refresh or self-refresh can be selected by setting the RTCSR’s RMD bit.
CAS-before-RAS Refresh: For CBR refreshes, set the RCR’s RMD bit to 0 and the RFSH bit to
1. Also write the values in RTCNT and RTCOR necessary to fulfill the refresh interval prescribed
for the DRAM being used. When a clock is selected with the CKS2–CKS0 bits of the RSTCR,
RTCNT starts counting up from the value at that time. The RTCNT value is constantly compared
to the RTCOR value and a CBR refresh is performed when the two match. RTCNT is cleared at
that time and the count starts again. Figure 10.15 shows the timing for the CBR refresh operation.
The number of RAS assert cycles in the refresh cycle is set by the TRAS1, TRAS0 bits of the
DCR.
TRp
TRr1
TRr2
TRc
TRc
CK
RAS
CASx
Figure 10.15 CAS-Before-RAS Refresh Timing (TRAS1, TRAS0 = 0, 0)
197
Self-Refresh: When both the RMD and RFSH bits of the RTCSR are set to 1, the CAS signal and
RAS signal are output and the DRAM enters self-refresh mode, as shown in figure 10.16. Do not
access DRAM during self-refreshes, in order to preserve DRAM data. When performing DRAM
accesses, first cancel the self-refresh, then access only after doing individual refreshes for all row
addresses within the time prescribed for the particular DRAM.
For external bus right requests during self-refreshes, to preserve DRAM data at the time of
releasing the bus rights, only CASx, RAS, and RDWR are output and the bus rights are released to
the external device with the self-refresh maintained. Consequently, do not perform DRAM
accesses from external devices at such a time.
TRp
TRr1
TRr2
TRc
CK
RAS
CASx
Figure 10.16 Self-Refresh Timing
198
TRc
10.5
Address/Data Multiplex I/O Space Access
When the BCR1 register IOE bit is set to 1, the D15–D0 pins can be used for multiplexed
address/data I/O for the CS3 space. Consequently, peripheral LSIs requiring address/data
multiplexing can be directly connected to this LSI.
Address/data multiplex I/O space bus width is selected by the A14 bit, and is 8 bit when A14 = 0
and 16 bit when A14 = 1.
10.5.1
Basic Timing
When the IOE bit of the BCR1 is set to 1, CS3 space becomes address/data multiplex I/O space.
When this space is accessed, addresses and data are multiplexed. When the A14 address bit is 0,
the bus size becomes 8 bit and addresses and data are input and output through the D7–D0 pins.
When the A14 address bit is 1, the bus size becomes 16 bit and address output and data I/O occur
through the D15–D0 pins. Access for the address/data multiplex I/O space is controlled by the
AH, RD, and WRx signals.
Address/data multiplex I/O space accesses are done after a 3-cycle (fixed) address output, as an
ordinary space type access (figure 10.17).
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
T1
T2
CK
Address
CS3
AH
Read
RD
Data input
Data
Write
Address output
WRx
Data
Address output
Data output
Figure 10.17 Address/Data Multiplex I/O Space Access Timing (No Waits)
199
10.5.2
Wait State Control
Setting the WCR controls waits during address/data multiplex I/O space accesses. Software wait
and external wait insertion timing is the same as during ordinary space accesses. The timing for
one software wait + one external wait inserted is shown in figure 10.18.
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
T1
TW
TWo
T2
CK
Address
CS3
AH
Read
RD
Data
Data
input
Address output
WRx
Write
Data
Address output
Data output
WAIT
Figure 10.18 Address/Data Multiplex I/O Space Access Wait State Timing (One Software
Wait + One External Wait)
200
10.5.3
CS Assertion Extension
The timing diagram when setting CS assertion extension during address/data multiplex I/O space
access is shown in figure 10.19.
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
Th
T1
T2
Tf
Address
CS3
AH
Read
RD
Data
Address output
Data input
WRxx
Write
Data
Address output
Data output
Figure 10.19 Wait Timing in Address/Data Multiplex I/O Space when CS Assertion
Extension is Set
10.6
Waits between Access Cycles
When a read from a slow device is completed, data buffers may not go off in time to prevent data
conflicts with the next access. If there is a data conflict during memory access, the problem can be
solved by inserting a wait in the access cycle.
To enable detection of bus cycle starts, waits can be inserted between access cycles during
continuous accesses of the same CS space by negating the CSn signal once.
10.6.1
Prevention of Data Bus Conflicts
For the two cases of write cycles after read cycles, and read cycles for a different area after read
cycles, waits are inserted so that the number of idle cycles specified by the IW31–IW00 bits of the
201
BCR2 and the DIW of the DCR occur. When idle cycles already exist between access cycles, only
the number of empty cycles remaining beyond the specified number of idle cycles are inserted.
Figure 10.20 shows an example of idles between cycles. In this example, 1 idle between CSn
space cycles has been specified, so when a CSm space write immediately follows a CSn space
read cycle, 1 idle cycle is inserted.
T1
T2
Tidle
T1
T2
CK
Address
CSn
CSm
RD
WRx
Data
CSn space read
Idle cycle
CSm space write
Figure 10.20 Idle Cycle Insertion Example
IW31 and IW30 specify the number of idle cycles required after a CS3 space read either to read
other external spaces, or for this LSI, to do write accesses. In the same manner, IW21 and IW20
specify the number of idle cycles after a CS2 space read, IW11 and IW10, the number after a CS1
space read, and IW01 and IW00, the number after a CS0 space read.
DIW specifies the number of idle cycles required, after a DRAM space read either to read other
external spaces (CS space), or for this LSI, to do write accesses.
0 to 3 cycles can be specified for CS space, and 0 to 1 cycle for DRAM space.
202
10.6.2
Simplification of Bus Cycle Start Detection
For consecutive accesses of the same CS space, waits are inserted so that the number of idle cycles
designated by the CW3–CW0 bits of the BCR2 occur. However, for write cycles after reads, the
number of idle cycles inserted will be the larger of the two values defined by the IW and CW bits.
When idle cycles already exist between access cycles, waits are not inserted. Figure 10.21 shows
an example. A continuous access idle is specified for CSn space, and CSn space is consecutively
write accessed.
T1
T2
Tidle
T1
T2
CK
Address
CSn
RD
WRx
Data
CSn space access
Idle cycle
CSn space access
Figure 10.21 Same Space Consecutive Access Idle Cycle Insertion Example
10.7
Bus Arbitration
The SH7040 series has a bus arbitration function that, when a bus release request is received from
an external device, releases the bus to that device. It also has two internal bus masters, the CPU
and the DMAC, DTC. The priority ranking for determining bus right transfer between these bus
masters is:
Bus right request from external device > refresh > DTC > DMAC > CPU
However, during a read or write in DMAC dual address mode, a burst transfer, or indirect address
transfer mode operation, the DMAC continues operating even if a DTC request is received.
Through port register settings, IRQOUT is asserted to indicate that a CAS-before-RAS refresh
request for DRAM has been generated during release of bus rights to an external device. Use this
203
to cause the external device to negate the BREQ and return the bus rights to the SH7040 Series.
Please note that if the external device does not return the bus rights within the time prescribed for
the DRAM refresh interval, this LSI will not be able to perform the refresh operation and the
DRAM contents cannot be guaranteed.
Figure 10.22 shows the bus right release procedure.
SH704X
BREQ accepted
External device
BREQ = Low
Bus right request
Strobe pin:
high-level output
Address, data,
strobe pin:
high impedance
Bus right release
response
Bus right release status
BACK confirmation
BACK = Low
Bus right acquisition
Figure 10.22 Bus Right Release Procedure
204
10.8
Memory Connection Examples
Figures 10.23–10.31 show examples of the memory connections.
As A21–A18 become input ports in power-on reset, they should be handled (e.g.
pulled down) as necessary.
32k × 8 bits
ROM
SH704x
CSn
CE
RD
OE
A0–A14
D0–D7
A0–A14
I/O0–I/O7
Figure 10.23 8-Bit Data Bus Width ROM Connection
256k × 16 bits
ROM
SH704x
CSn
CE
RD
OE
A0
A1–A18
A0–A17
D0–D15
I/O0–I/O15
Figure 10.24 16-Bit Data Bus Width ROM Connection
205
256k × 16 bits
ROM
SH704x
CSn
CE
RD
OE
A0
A1
A2–A19
A0–A17
D16–D31
I/O0–I/O15
D0–D15
CE
OE
A0–A17
I/O0–I/O15
Figure 10.25 32-Bit Data Bus Width ROM Connection
123k × 8 bits
SRAM
SH704x
CSn
CS
RD
OE
A0–A16
WRL
D0–D7
A0–A16
WE
I/O0–I/O7
Figure 10.26 8-Bit Data Bus Width SRAM Connection
206
SH704x
128k × 8 bits
SRAM
CSn
RD
A0
A1–A17
CS
WRH
D8–D15
WE
OE
A0–A16
I/O0–I/O7
WRL
D0–D7
CS
OE
A0–A16
WE
I/O0–I/O7
Figure 10.27 16-Bit Data Bus Width SRAM Connection
207
128k × 8 bits
SRAM
SH704x
CSn
CS
RD
A0
A1
A2–A18
WRHH
D24–D31
OE
WRHL
D16–D23
WRH
D8–D15
WRL
D0–D7
A0–A16
WE
I/O0–I/O7
CS
OE
A0–A16
WE
I/O0–I/O7
CS
OE
A0–A16
WE
I/O0–I/O7
CS
OE
A0–A16
WE
I/O0–I/O7
Figure 10.28 32-Bit Data Bus Width SRAM Connection
208
512k × 8 bits
DRAM
SH704x
RAS
RDWR
RAS
WE
OE
A0–A9
CASL
AD0–AD7
A0–A9
CAS
I/O0–I/O7
Figure 10.29 8-Bit Data Bus Width DRAM Connection
256k × 16 bits
DRAM
SH704x
RAS
RAS
RDWR
WE
OE
A0
A1–A9
A0–A8
CASH
UCAS
CASL
LCAS
AD0–AD15
I/O0–I/O15
Figure 10.30 16-Bit Data Bus Width DRAM Connection
209
256k × 16 bits
DRAM
SH704x
RAS
RAS
RDWR
WE
A0
OE
A1
A2–A10
A0–A8
CASHH
UCAS
CASHL
AD16–AD31
LCAS
I/O0–I/O15
CASH
CASL
AD0–AD15
RAS
WE
OE
A0–A8
UCAS
LCAS
I/O0–I/O15
Figure 10.31 32-Bit Data Bus Width DRAM Connection
10.9
On-Chip Peripheral I/O Register Access
On-chip peripheral I/O registers are accessed from the bus state controller, as shown in table 10.6.
Table 10.6 On-Chip Peripheral I/O Register Access
On-chip
Peripheral Module SCI
MTU,
POE
INTC
PFC,
PORT CMT
A/D*
UBC
WDT
DMAC DTC
CACHE
Connected bus
width
8bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
Access cycle
2cyc
2cyc
2cyc
2cyc
2cyc
2cyc
3cyc
3cyc
3cyc
3cyc
3cyc
Note: * A/D of A mask products are accessed in 8-bit width, 3 cyc.
210
Cycles in which Bus is not Released
(a) One bus cycle:
The bus is never released during a single bus cycle. For example, in the case of a longword read
(or write) in 8-bit normal space, the four memory accesses to the 8-bit normal space constitute a
single bus cycle, and the bus is never released during this period. Assuming that one memory
access requires two states, the bus is not released during an 8-state period.
8 bit
8 bit
8 bit
8 bit
Cycles in which
Bus is not Released
Figure 10.32 One Bus Cycle
10.10
CPU Operation when Program is in External Memory
In the SH7040 Series, two words (equivalent to two instructions) are normally fetched in a single
instruction fetch. This is also true when the program is located in external memory, irrespective of
whether the external memory bus width is 8 or 16 bits.
If the program counter value immediately after the program branches is an odd-word (2n + 1)
address, or if the program counter value immediately before the program branches is an even-word
(2n) address, the CPU will always fetch 32 bits (equivalent to two instructions) that include the
respective word instruction.
211
212
Section 11 Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC)
11.1
Overview
The SH7040 Series includes an on-chip four-channel direct memory access controller (DMAC).
The DMAC can be used in place of the CPU to perform high-speed data transfers among external
devices equipped with DACK (transfer request acknowledge signal), external memories, memorymapped external devices, and on-chip peripheral modules (except for the DMAC, DTC, BSC, and
UBC). Using the DMAC reduces the burden on the CPU and increases operating efficiency of the
LSI as a whole.
11.1.1
Features
The DMAC has the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
Four channels
Four Gbytes of address space in the architecture
Byte, word, or longword selectable data transfer unit
16 Mbytes (16,777,216 transfers, maximum)
Single or dual address mode. Dual address mode can be direct or indirect address transfer.
 Single address mode: Either the transfer source or transfer destination (peripheral device) is
accessed by a DACK signal while the other is accessed by address. One transfer unit of
data is transferred in each bus cycle.
 Dual address mode: Both the transfer source and transfer destination are accessed by
address. Dual address mode can be direct or indirect address transfer.
• Direct access: Values set in a DMAC internal register indicate the accessed address for
both the transfer source and transfer destination. Two bus cycles are required for one
data transfer.
• Indirect access: The value stored at the location pointed to by the address set in the
DMAC internal transfer source register is used as the address. Operation is otherwise
the same as direct access. This function can only be set for channel 3. Four bus cycles
are required for one data transfer.
• Channel function: Transfer modes that can be set are different for each channel. (Dual address
mode indirect access can only be set for channel 1. Only direct access is possible for the other
channels.)
 Channel 0: Single or dual address mode. External requests are accepted.
 Channel 1: Single or dual address mode. External requests are accepted.
 Channel 2: Dual address mode only. Source address reload function operates every fourth
transfer.
213
•
•
•
•
•
 Channel 3: Dual address mode only. Direct address transfer mode and indirect address
transfer mode selectable.
Reload function: Enables automatic reloading of the value set in the first source address
register every fourth DMA transfer. This function can be executed on channel 2 only.
Transfer requests: There are three DMAC transfer activation requests, as indicated below.
 External request: From two DREQ pins. DREQ can be detected either by falling edge or by
low level. External requests can only be received on channels 0 or 1.
 Requests from on-chip peripheral modules: Transfer requests from on-chip modules such as
SCI or A/D. These can be received by all channels.
 Auto-request: The transfer request is generated automatically within the DMAC.
Selectable bus modes: Cycle-steal mode or burst mode
Two types of DMAC channel priority ranking:
 Fixed priority mode: Always fixed
 Round robin mode: Sets the lowest priority level for the channel that received the execution
request last
CPU can be interrupted when the specified number of data transfers are complete.
214
11.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 11.1 is a block diagram of the DMAC.
DMAC module
SARn
On-chip RAM
Register
control
DARn
On-chip
peripheral
module
Internal bus
Circuit
control
Peripheral bus
On-chip ROM
DMATCRn
Activation
control
CHCRn
DMAOR
DREQ0, DREQ1
MTU
SCI0, SCI1
A/D converter*
DEIn
Request
priority
control
DACK0, DACK1
DRAK0, DRAK1
External
ROM
Bus interface
External
RAM
External I/O
(memory
mapped)
External I/O
(with
acknowledge)
Bus state
controller
SARn:
DARn:
DMATCRn:
CHCRn:
DMAOR:
n:
DMAC source address register
DMAC destination address register
DMAC transfer count register
DMAC channel control register
DMAC operation register
0, 1, 2, 3
Note: * A/D1 for A mask and A/D for others
Figure 11.1 DMAC Block Diagram
215
11.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 11.1 shows the DMAC pins.
Table 11.1 DMAC Pin Configuration
Channel
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
0
DMA transfer request
DREQ0
I
DMA transfer request input from
external device to channel 0
DMA transfer request
acknowledge
DACK0
O
DMA transfer strobe output from
channel 0 to external device
DREQ0 acceptance
confirmation
DRAK0
O
Sampling receive acknowledge output
for DMA transfer request input from
external source
DMA transfer request
DREQ1
I
DMA transfer request input from
external device to channel 1
DMA transfer request
acknowledge
DACK1
O
DMA transfer strobe output from
channel 1 to external device
DREQ1 acceptance
confirmation
DRAK1
O
Sampling receive acknowledge output
for DMA transfer request input from
external source
1
216
11.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 11.2 summarizes the DMAC registers. DMAC has a total of 17 registers. Each channel has
four control registers. One other control register is shared by all channels
Table 11.2 DMAC Registers
Channel
Name
0
1
2
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Address
DMA source address SAR0
register 0
R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86C0 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA destination
address register 0
DAR0
R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86C4 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA transfer count
register 0
DMATCR0 R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86C8 32 bit
16, 32* 3
DMA channel control CHCR0
register 0
R/W*1 H'00000000 H'FFFF86CC 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA source address SAR1
register 1
R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86D0 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA destination
address register 1
DAR1
R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86D4 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA transfer count
register 1
DMATCR1 R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86D8 32 bit
16, 32* 3
DMA channel control CHCR1
register 1
R/W*1 H'00000000 H'FFFF86DC 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA source address SAR2
register 2
R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86E0 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA destination
address register 2
R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86E4 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DAR2
Register Access
Size
Size
217
Table 11.2 DMAC Registers (cont)
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
2
DMA transfer count
(cont) register 2
DMATCR2 R/W
3
Initial
Value
Address
Undefined
H'FFFF86E8 32 bit
16, 32* 3
DMA channel control CHCR2
register 2
R/W*1 H'00000000 H'FFFF86EC 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA source address SAR3
register 3
R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86F0 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA destination
address register 3
DAR3
R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86F4 32 bit
16, 32* 2
DMA transfer count
register 3
DMATCR3 R/W
Undefined
H'FFFF86F8 32 bit
16, 32* 3
R/W*1 H'00000000 H'FFFF86FC 32 bit
16, 32* 2
R/W*1 H'0000
16, 32* 4
DMA channel control CHCR3
register 3
Shared DMA operation
register
DMAOR
R/W
Register Access
Size
Size
H'FFFF86B0 16 bit
Notes: Do not attempt to access an empty address. If an access is attemped, the system
operation is not guarenteed.
*1 Write 0 after reading 1 in bit 1 of CHCR0–CHCR3 and in bits 1 and 2 of the DMAOR to
clear flags. No other writes are allowed.
*2 For 16-bit access of SAR0–SAR3, DAR0–DAR3, and CHCR0–CHCR3, the 16-bit value
on the side not accessed is held.
*3 DMATCR has a 24-bit configuration: bits 0–23. Writing to the upper 8 bits (bits 24–31)
is invalid, and these bits always read 0.
*4 Do not make 32-bit access for DMAOR.
11.2
Register Descriptions
11.2.1
DMA Source Address Registers 0–3 (SAR0–SAR3)
DMA source address registers 0–3 (SAR0–SAR3) are 32-bit read/write registers that specify the
source address of a DMA transfer. These registers have a count function, and during a DMA
transfer, they indicate the next source address. In single-address mode, SAR values are ignored
when a device with DACK has been specified as the transfer source.
Specify a 16-bit or 32-bit boundary address when doing 16-bit or 32-bit data transfers. Operation
cannot be guaranteed on any other addresses.
The initial value after power-on resets or in software standby mode is undefined. These registers
are not initialized with manual reset.
218
Bit:
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Initial value:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
23
22
21
…
…
2
1
0
…
…
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
11.2.2
—
—
—
…
…
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
…
…
R/W
R/W
R/W
DMA Destination Address Registers 0–3 (DAR0–DAR3)
DMA destination address registers 0–3 (DAR0–DAR3) are 32-bit read/write registers that specify
the destination address of a DMA transfer. These registers have a count function, and during a
DMA transfer, they indicate the next destination address. In single-address mode, DAR values are
ignored when a device with DACK has been specified as the transfer destination.
Specify a 16-bit or 32-bit boundary address when doing 16-bit or 32-bit data transfers. Operation
cannot be guaranteed on any other address. The initial value after power-on resets or in software
standby mode, is undefined. These registers are not initialized with manual reset.
Bit:
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Initial value:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
23
22
21
…
…
2
1
0
…
…
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
—
—
—
…
…
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
…
…
R/W
R/W
R/W
219
11.2.3
DMA Transfer Count Registers 0–3 (DMATCR0–DMATCR3)
DMA transfer count registers 0–3 (DMATCR0–DMATCR3) are 24-bit read/write registers that
specify the transfer count for the channel (byte count, word count, or longword count). Specifying
a H'000001 gives a transfer count of 1, while H'000000 gives the maximum setting, 16,777,216
transfers. The data for the upper 8 bits of a DMATCR is 0 when read. Always write 0. The initial
value after power-on resets or in software standby mode is undefined. These registers are not
initialized with manual reset.
Always write 0 to the upper 8 bits of a DMATCR.
Bit:
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Initial value:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W:
R/W:
220
11.2.4
DMA Channel Control Registers 0–3 (CHCR0–CHCR3)
DMA channel control registers 0–3 (CHCR0–CHCR3) is a 32-bit read/write register where the
operation and transmission of each channel is designated. They are initialized by a power-on reset
and in software standby mode. There is no initializing with manual reset.
Bit:
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
RO*2
RL * 2
AM*2
AL* 2
Initial value:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
—
—
—
DI* 2
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
(R/W)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DM1
DM0
SM1
SM0
RS3
RS2
RS1
RS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
DS *
TM
TS1
TS0
IE
TE
DE
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/(W) *
R
2
(R/W)
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
1
R/W
Notes: *1 TE bit: Allows only 0 write after reading 1.
*2 The DI, RO, RL, AM, AL, or DS bit may be absent, depending on the channel.
• Bits 31–21—Reserved bits: Data are 0 when read. The write value always be 0.
• Bit 20—Direct/Indirect (DI): Specifies either direct address mode operation or indirect address
mode operation for channel 3 source address. This bit is valid only in CHCR3. It always reads
0 for CHCR0–CHCR2, and cannot be modified.
Bit 20: DI
Description
0
Direct access mode operation for channel 3 (initial value)
1
Indirect access mode operation for channel 3
221
• Bit 19—Source Address Reload (RO): Selects whether to reload the source address initial
value during channel 2 transfer. This bit is valid only for channel 2. It always reads 0 for
CHCR0, CHCR1, and CHCR3, and cannot be modified.
Bit 19: RO
Description
0
Does not reload source address (initial value)
1
Reloads source address
• Bit 18—Request Check Level (RL): Selects whether to output DRAK notifying external
device of DREQ received, with active high or active low. This bit is valid only for CHCR0 and
CHCR1. It always reads 0 for CHCR2 and CHCR3, and cannot be modified.
Bit 18: RL
Description
0
Output DRAK with active high (initial value)
1
Output DRAK with active low
• Bit 17—Acknowledge Mode (AM): In dual address mode, selects whether to output DACK in
the data write cycle or data read cycle. In single address mode, DACK is always output
irrespective of the setting of this bit. This bit is valid only for CHCR0 and CHCR1. It always
reads as 0 for CHCR2 and CHCR3, and cannot be modified.
Bit 17: AM
Description
0
Outputs DACK during read cycle (initial value)
1
Outputs DACK during write cycle
• Bit 16—Acknowledge Level (AL): Specifies whether to set DACK (acknowledge) signal
output to active high or active low. This bit is valid only with CHCR0 and CHCR1. It always
reads as 0 for CHCR2 and CHCR3, and cannot be modified.
Bit 16: AL
Description
0
Active high output (initial value)
1
Active low output
222
• Bits 15 and 14—Destination Address Mode 1, 0 (DM1 and DM0): These bits specify
increment/decrement of the DMA transfer destination address. These bit specifications are
ignored when transferring data from an external device to address space in single address
mode.
Bit 15: DM1
Bit 14: DM0
Description
0
0
Destination address fixed (initial value)
0
1
Destination address incremented (+1 during 8-bit transfer, +2
during 16-bit transfer, +4 during 32-bit transfer)
1
0
Destination address decremented (–1 during 8-bit transfer, –2
during 16-bit transfer, –4 during 32-bit transfer)
1
1
Setting prohibited
• Bits 13 and 12—Source Address Mode 1, 0 (SM1 and SM0): These bits specify
increment/decrement of the DMA transfer source address. These bit specifications are ignored
when transferring data from an external device to address space in single address mode.
Bit 13: SM1
Bit 12: SM0
Description
0
0
Source address fixed (initial value)
0
1
Source address incremented (+1 during 8-bit transfer, +2
during 16-bit transfer, +4 during 32-bit transfer)
1
0
Source address decremented (–1 during 8-bit transfer, –2
during 16-bit transfer, –4 during 32-bit transfer)
1
1
Setting prohibited
When the transfer source is specified at an indirect address, specify in source address register 3
(SAR3) the actual storage address of the data you want to transfer as the data storage address
(indirect address).
During indirect address mode, SAR3 obeys the SM1/SM0 setting for increment/decrement. In this
case, SAR3’s increment/decrement is fixed at +4/–4 or 0, irrespective of the transfer data size
specified by TS1 and TS0.
223
• Bits 11–8—Resource Select 3–0 (RS3–RS0): These bits specify the transfer request source.
Bit 11:
RS3
Bit 10:
RS2
Bit 9:
RS1
Bit 8:
RS0
Description
0
0
0
0
External request, dual address mode (initial value)
0
0
0
1
Prohibited
0
0
1
0
External request, single address mode. External address
space → external device.
0
0
1
1
External request, single address mode. External device →
external address space.
0
1
0
0
Auto-request
0
1
0
1
Prohibited
0
1
1
0
MTU TGI0A
0
1
1
1
MTU TGI1A
1
0
0
0
MTU TGI2A
1
0
0
1
MTU TGI3A
1
0
1
0
MTU TGI4A
1
0
1
1
A/D ADI *
1
1
0
0
SCI0 TXI0
1
1
0
1
SCI0 RXI0
1
1
1
0
SCI1 TXI1
1
1
1
1
SCI1 RXI1
Notes: External request designations are valid only for channels 0 and 1. No transfer request
sources can be set for channels 2 or 3.
* ADI1 for A mask.
• Bit 7—Reserved bits: Data is 0 when read. The write value always be 0.
• Bit 6—DREQ Select (DS): Sets the sampling method for the DREQ pin in external request
mode to either low-level detection or falling-edge detection. This bit is valid only with CHCR0
and CHCR1. For CHCR2 and CHCR3, this bit always reads as 0 and cannot be modified.
Even with channels 0 and 1, when specifying an on-chip peripheral module or auto-request as
the transfer request source, this bit setting is ignored. The sampling method is fixed at fallingedge detection in cases other than auto-request.
Bit 6: DS
Description
0
Low-level detection (initial value)
1
Falling-edge detection
224
• Bit 5—Transfer Mode (TM): Specifies the bus mode for data transfer.
Bit 5: TM
Description
0
Cycle steal mode (initial value)
1
Burst mode
• Bits 4 and 3—Transfer Size 1, 0 (TS1, TS0): Specifies size of data for transfer.
Bit 4: TS1
Bit 3: TS0
Description
0
0
Specifies byte size (8 bits) (initial value)
0
1
Specifies word size (16 bits)
1
0
Specifies longword size (32 bits)
1
1
Prohibited
• Bit 2—Interrupt Enable (IE): When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests are generated after the
number of data transfers specified in the DMATCR (when TE = 1).
Bit 2: IE
Description
0
Interrupt request not generated after DMATCR-specified transfer count
(initial value)
1
Interrupt request enabled on completion of DMATCR specified number
of transfers
• Bit 1—Transfer End Flag (TE): This bit is set to 1 after the number of data transfers specified
by the DMATCR. At this time, if the IE bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated.
If data transfer ends before TE is set to 1 (for example, due to an NMI or address error, or
clearing of the DE bit or DME bit of the DMAOR) the TE is not set to 1. With this bit set to 1,
data transfer is disabled even if the DE bit is set to 1.
Bit 1: TE
Description
0
DMATCR-specified transfer count not ended (initial value)
Clear condition: 0 write after TE = 1 read, Power-on reset, standby
mode
1
DMATCR specified number of transfers completed
225
• Bit 0—DMAC Enable (DE): DE enables operation in the corresponding channel.
Bit 0: DE
Description
0
Operation of the corresponding channel disabled (initial value)
1
Operation of the corresponding channel enabled
Transfer mode is entered if this bit is set to 1 when auto-request is specified (RS3–RS0 settings).
With an external request or on-chip module request, when a transfer request occurs after this bit is
set to 1, transfer is enabled. If this bit is cleared during a data transfer, transfer is suspended.
If the DE bit has been set, but TE = 1, then if the DME bit of the DMAOR is 0, and the NMI or
AE bit of the DMAOR is 1, transfer enable mode is not entered.
11.2.5
DMAC Operation Register (DMAOR)
The DMAOR is a 16-bit read/write register that specifies the transfer mode of the DMAC
Register values are initialized to 0 during power-on reset or in software standby mode. Manual
reset does not initialize DMAOR.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
PR1
PR0
Initial value:
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
AE
NMIF
DME
Initial value:
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
R
R
R
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
0
R/W:
Note: * 0 write only is valid after 1 is read at the AE and NMIF bits.
• Bits 15–10—Reserved bits: Data are 0 when read. The write value always be 0.
226
R
• Bits 9–8—Priority Mode 1 and 0 (PR1 and PR0): These bits determine the priority level of
channels for execution when transfer requests are made for several channels simultaneously.
Bit 9: PR1
Bit 8: PR0
Description
0
0
CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3 (initial value)
0
1
CH0 > CH2 > CH3 > CH1
1
0
CH2 > CH0 > CH1 > CH3
1
1
Round robin mode
• Bits 7–3—Reserved bits: Data are 0 when read. The write value always be 0.
• Bit 2—Address Error Flag (AE): Indicates that an address error has occurred during DMA
transfer. If this bit is set during a data transfer, transfers on all channels are suspended. The
CPU cannot write a 1 to the AE bit. Clearing is effected by 0 write after 1 read.
Bit 2: AE
Description
0
No address error, DMA transfer enabled (initial value)
Clearing condition: Write AE = 0 after reading AE = 1
1
Address error, DMA transfer disabled
Setting condition: Address error due to DMAC
• Bit 1—NMI Flag (NMIF): Indicates input of an NMI. This bit is set irrespective of whether the
DMAC is operating or suspended. If this bit is set during a data transfer, transfers on all
channels are suspended. The CPU is unable to write a 1 to the NMIF. Clearing is effected by a
0 write after 1 read.
Bit 1: NMIF
Description
0
No NMI interrupt, DMA transfer enabled (initial value)
Clearing condition: Write NMIF = 0 after reading NMIF = 1
1
NMI has occurred, DMC transfer prohibited
Set condition: NMI interrupt occurrence
227
• Bit 0—DMAC Master Enable (DME): This bit enables activation of the entire DMAC. When
the DME bit and DE bit of the CHCR for the corresponding channel are set to 1, that channel
is transfer-enabled. If this bit is cleared during a data transfer, transfers on all channels are
suspended.
Even when the DME bit is set, when the TE bit of the CHCR is 1, or its DE bit is 0, transfer is
disabled in the case of an NMI of the DMAOR or when AE = 1.
Bit 0: DME
Description
0
Disable operation on all channels (initial value)
1
Enable operation on all channels
11.3
Operation
When there is a DMA transfer request, the DMAC starts the transfer according to the
predetermined channel priority order; when the transfer end conditions are satisfied, it ends the
transfer. Transfers can be requested in three modes: auto-request, external request, and on-chip
peripheral module request. Transfer can be in either the single address mode or the dual address
mode, and dual address mode can be either direct or indirect address transfer mode. The bus mode
can be either burst or cycle steal.
11.3.1
DMA Transfer Flow
After the DMA source address registers (SAR), DMA destination address registers (DAR), DMA
transfer count register (DMATCR), DMA channel control registers (CHCR), and DMA operation
register (DMAOR) are set to the desired transfer conditions, the DMAC transfers data according
to the following procedure:
1. The DMAC checks to see if transfer is enabled (DE = 1, DME = 1, TE = 0, NMIF = 0,
AE = 0).
2. When a transfer request comes and transfer has been enabled, the DMAC transfers 1 transfer
unit of data (determined by TS0 and TS1 setting). For an auto-request, the transfer begins
automatically when the DE bit and DME bit are set to 1. The DMATCR value will be
decremented by 1 upon each transfer. The actual transfer flows vary by address mode and bus
mode.
3. When the specified number of transfers have been completed (when DMATCR reaches 0), the
transfer ends normally. If the IE bit of the CHCR is set to 1 at this time, a DEI interrupt is sent
to the CPU.
4. When an address error occurs in the DMAC or an NMI interrupt is generated, the transfer is
aborted. Transfers are also aborted when the DE bit of the CHCR or the DME bit of the
DMAOR are changed to 0.
228
Figure 11.2 is a flowchart of this procedure.
Start
Initial settings
(SAR, DAR, TCR, CHCR, DMAOR)
DE, DME = 1 and
NMIF, AE, TE = 0?
No
Yes
Transfer request
occurs?*1
No
*3
Yes
Transfer (1 transfer unit);
DMATCR – 1 → DMATCR, SAR, and DAR
updated
DMATCR = 0?
No
Yes
DEI interrupt request (when IE = 1)
Does
NMIF = 1, AE = 1,
DE = 0, or DME
= 0?
Yes
Transfer ends
Notes: *1
*2
*3
*2
Bus mode,
transfer request mode,
DREQ detection selection
system
Does
NMIF = 1, AE = 1,
DE = 0, or DME
= 0?
Yes
No
Transfer aborted
No
Normal end
In auto-request mode, transfer begins when NMIF, AE, and TE are all 0,
and the DE and DME bits are set to 1.
DREQ = level detection in burst mode (external request), or cycle-steal
mode.
DREQ = edge detection in burst mode (external request), or auto-request
mode in burst mode.
Figure 11.2 DMAC Transfer Flowchart
229
11.3.2
DMA Transfer Requests
DMA transfer requests are usually generated in either the data transfer source or destination, but
they can also be generated by devices and on-chip peripheral modules that are neither the source
nor the destination. Transfers can be requested in three modes: auto-request, external request, and
on-chip peripheral module request. The request mode is selected in the RS3–RS0 bits of the DMA
channel control registers 0–3 (CHCR0–CHCR3).
Auto-Request Mode: When there is no transfer request signal from an external source, as in a
memory-to-memory transfer or a transfer between memory and an on-chip peripheral module
unable to request a transfer, the auto-request mode allows the DMAC to automatically generate a
transfer request signal internally. When the DE bits of CHCR0–CHCR3 and the DME bit of the
DMAOR are set to 1, the transfer begins (so long as the TE bits of CHCR0–CHCR3 and the
NMIF and AE bits of DMAOR are all 0).
External Request Mode: In this mode a transfer is performed at the request signal (DREQ) of an
external device. Choose one of the modes shown in table 11.3 according to the application system.
When this mode is selected, if the DMA transfer is enabled (DE = 1, DME = 1, TE = 0, NMIF = 0,
AE = 0), a transfer is performed upon a request at the DREQ input. Choose to detect DREQ by
either the falling edge or low level of the signal input with the DS bit of CHCR0–CHCR3 (DS = 0
is level detection, DS = 1 is edge detection). The source of the transfer request does not have to be
the data transfer source or destination.
Table 11.3 Selecting External Request Modes with the RS Bits
RS3
RS2
RS1
RS0
Address Mode
Source
Destination
0
0
0
0
Dual address
mode
Any *
Any *
0
0
1
0
Single address
mode
External memory or
memory-mapped
external device
External device with
DACK
0
0
1
1
Single address
mode
External device with
DACK
External memory or
memory-mapped
external device
Note: * External memory, memory-mapped external device, on-chip memory, on-chip peripheral
module (excluding DMAC, DTC, BSC, UBC).
On-Chip Peripheral Module Request Mode: In this mode a transfer is performed at the transfer
request signal (interrupt request signal) of an on-chip peripheral module. As indicated in table
11.4, there are ten transfer request signals: five from the multifunction timer pulse unit (MTU),
which are compare match or input capture interrupts; the receive data full interrupts (RxI) and
transmit data empty interrupts (TxI) of the two serial communication interfaces (SCI); and the A/D
conversion end interrupt (ADI1 for A mask, ADI for others) of the A/D converter. When DMA
230
transfers are enabled (DE = 1, DME = 1, TE = 0, NMIF = 0, AE = 0), a transfer is performed upon
the input of a transfer request signal.
The transfer request source need not be the data transfer source or transfer destination. However,
when the transfer request is set by RxI (transfer request because SCI’s receive data is full), the
transfer source must be the SCI’s receive data register (RDR). When the transfer request is set by
TxI (transfer request because SCI’s transmit data is empty), the transfer destination must be the
SCI’s transmit data register (TDR). Also, if the transfer request is set to the A/D converter, the
data transfer destination must be the A/D converter register.
Table 11.4 Selecting On-Chip Peripheral Module Request Modes with the RS Bits
DMAC Transfer
RS3 RS2 RS1 RS0 Request Source
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
MTU*2
1
MTU*2
0
MTU*2
1
MTU*2
0
MTU*2
1
A/D
0
SCI0* 3 transmit block
1
SCI0* 3 transmit block
0
SCI1* 3 transmit block
1
SCI1* 3 transmit block
DMA Transfer
DestinRequest Signal Source ation
Bus Mode
TGI0A
Any * 1
Any * 1
Burst/cycle steal
TGI1A
Any * 1
Any * 1
Burst/cycle steal
TGI2A
Any * 1
Any * 1
Burst/cycle steal
TGI3A
Any * 1
Any * 1
Burst/cycle steal
TGI4A
Any * 1
Any * 1
Burst/cycle steal
ADI* 5
ADDR*4 Any * 1
Burst/cycle steal
TxI0
Any * 1
TDR0
Burst/cycle steal
RxI0
RDR0
Any * 1
Burst/cycle steal
TxI1
Any * 1
TDR1
Burst/cycle steal
RDR1
Any * 1
Burst/cycle steal
RxI1
Notes: *1 External memory, memory-mapped external device, on-chip memory, on-chip
peripheral module (excluding DMAC, DTC, BSC, UBC).
*2 MTU: Multifunction timer pulse unit.
*3 SCI0, SCI1: Serial communications interface.
*4 ADDR0, ADDR1: A/D converter’s A/D register.
*5 ADI1 for A mask.
In order to output a transfer request from an on-chip peripheral module, set the relevant interrupt
enable bit for each module, and output an interrupt signal.
When an on-chip peripheral module’s interrupt request signal is used as a DMA transfer request
signal, interrupts for the CPU are not generated.
When a DMA transfer is conducted corresponding with one of the transfer request signals in table
11.4, it is automatically discontinued. In cycle steal mode this occurs in the first transfer, and in
burst mode with the last transfer.
231
11.3.3
Channel Priority
When the DMAC receives simultaneous transfer requests on two or more channels, it selects a
channel according to a predetermined priority order, either in a fixed mode or in round robin
mode. These modes are selected by priority bits PR1 and PR0 in the DMA operation register
(DMAOR).
Fixed Mode: In these modes, the priority levels among the channels remain fixed.
The following priority orders are available for fixed mode:
• CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3
• CH0 > CH2 > CH3 > CH1
• CH2 > CH0 > CH1 > CH3
These are selected by settings of the PR1 and PR0 bits of the DMA operation register (DMAOR).
Round Robin Mode: In round robin mode, each time the transfer of one transfer unit (byte, word
or long word) ends on a given channel, that channel receives the lowest priority level (figure 11.3).
The priority level in round robin mode immediately after a reset is CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3.
232
Transfer on channel 0
Initial priority setting
Priority after transfer
CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3
Channel 0 is given the lowest
priority.
CH1 > CH2 > CH3 > CH0
Transfer on channel 1
Initial priority setting
Priority after transfer
CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3
CH2 > CH3 > CH0 > CH1
When channel 1 is given the
lowest priority, the priority
of channel 0, which was
above channel 1, is also shifted
simultaneously.
Transfer on channel 2
Initial priority setting
CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3
When channel 2 receives the
lowest priority, the priorities
of channel 0 and 1, which
were above channel 2, are also
shifted simultaneously. ImmediPriority after transfer
CH3 > CH0 > CH1 > CH2
ately thereafter, if there is a transfer
request for channel 1 only, channel
1 is given the lowest priority,
and the priorities of channels 3
Priority after transfer
due to issue of a transfer CH2 > CH3 > CH0 > CH1 and 0 are simultaneously
shifted down.
request for channel 1
only.
Transfer on channel 3
Initial priority setting
CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3
No change in priority.
Priority after transfer CH0 > CH1 > CH2 > CH3
Figure 11.3 Round Robin Mode
233
Figure 11.4 shows the changes in priority levels when transfer requests are issued simultaneously
for channels 0 and 3, and channel 1 receives a transfer request during a transfer on channel 0. The
DMAC operates in the following manner under these circumstances:
1. Transfer requests are issued simultaneously for channels 0 and 3.
2. Since channel 0 has a higher priority level than channel 3, the channel 0 transfer is conducted
first (channel 3 is on transfer standby).
3. A transfer request is issued for channel 1 during a transfer on channel 0 (channels 1 and 3 are
on transfer standby).
4. At the end of the channel 0 transfer, channel 0 shifts to the lowest priority level.
5. At this point, channel 1 has a higher priority level than channel 3, so the channel 1 transfer
comes first (channel 3 is on transfer standby).
6. When the channel 1 transfer ends, channel 1 shifts to the lowest priority level.
7. Channel 3 transfer begins.
8. When the channel 3 transfer ends, channel 3 and channel 2 priority levels are lowered, giving
channel 3 the lowest priority.
Transfer request
Channel waiting
Issued for
channels 0 and 3
Issued for channel 1
3
1,3
DMAC operation
Channel priority
Channel 0
transfer begins
0>1>2>3
Channel 0
transfer ends
Change of
priority
1>2>3>0
Channel 1
transfer begins
3
Channel 1
transfer ends
Change of
priority
2>3>0>1
Channel 3
transfer begins
None
Channel 3
transfer ends
Change of
priority
0>1>2>3
Figure 11.4 Example of Changes in Priority in Round Robin Mode
234
11.3.4
DMA Transfer Types
The DMAC supports the transfers shown in table 11.5. It can operate in the single address mode,
in which either the transfer source or destination is accessed using an acknowledge signal, or dual
access mode, in which both the transfer source and destination addresses are output. The dual
access mode consists of a direct address mode, in which the output address value is the object of a
direct data transfer, and an indirect address mode, in which the output address value is not the
object of the data transfer, but the value stored at the output address becomes the transfer object
address. The actual transfer operation timing varies with the bus mode. The DMAC has two bus
modes: cycle-steal mode and burst mode.
Table 11.5 Supported DMA Transfers
Destination
MemoryMapped
External Device External External On-Chip
with DACK
Memory Device Memory
Source
On-Chip
Peripheral
Module
External device with DACK Not available
Single
Single
Not available Not available
External memory
Single
Dual
Dual
Dual
Dual
Memory-mapped external
device
Single
Dual
Dual
Dual
Dual
On-chip memory
Not available
Dual
Dual
Dual
Dual
On-chip peripheral module Not available
Dual
Dual
Dual
Dual
Notes: 1. Single: Single address mode
2. Dual: Dual address mode; includes both direct address mode and indirect address
mode.
11.3.5
Address Modes
Single Address Mode: In the single address mode, both the transfer source and destination are
external; one (selectable) is accessed by a DACK signal while the other is accessed by an address.
In this mode, the DMAC performs the DMA transfer in 1 bus cycle by simultaneously outputting a
transfer request acknowledge DACK signal to one external device to access it while outputting an
address to the other end of the transfer. Figure 11.5 shows an example of a transfer between an
external memory and an external device with DACK in which the external device outputs data to
the data bus while that data is written in external memory in the same bus cycle.
235
External address bus External data bus
This LSI
External
memory
DMAC
External device
with DACK
DACK
DREQ
: Data flow
Figure 11.5 Data Flow in Single Address Mode
Two types of transfers are possible in the single address mode: (a) transfers between external
devices with DACK and memory-mapped external devices, and (b) transfers between external
devices with DACK and external memory. The only transfer requests for either of these is the
external request (DREQ). Figure 11.6 shows the DMA transfer timing for the single address mode.
236
CK
A21–A0
Address output to external memory space
CSn
Data that is output from the external
device with DACK
D15–D0
WRH
WRL
WR signal to external memory space
DACK
DACK signal to external devices with
DACK (active low)
a. External device with DACK to external memory space
CK
A21–A0
Address output to external memory space
CSn
Data that is output from external memory space
D15–D0
RD
RD signal to external memory space
DACK
DACK signal to external device with DACK
(active low)
b. External memory space to external device with DACK
Figure 11.6 Example of DMA Transfer Timing in the Single Address Mode
11.3.6
Dual Address Mode
Dual address mode is used for access of both the transfer source and destination by address.
Transfer source and destination can be accessed either internally or externally. Dual address mode
is subdivided into two other modes: direct address transfer mode and indirect address transfer
mode.
Direct Address Transfer Mode: Data is read from the transfer source during the data read cycle,
and written to the transfer destination during the write cycle, so transfer is conducted in two bus
cycles. At this time, the transfer data is temporarily stored in the DMAC. With the kind of external
memory transfer shown in figure 11.7, data is read from one of the memories by the DMAC
during a read cycle, then written to the other external memory during the subsequent write cycle.
Figure 11.8 shows the timing for this operation.
237
1st bus cycle
DMAC
SAR
Data bus
Address bus
DAR
Memory
Transfer source
module
Transfer destination
module
Data buffer
The SAR value is taken as the address, and data is read from the transfer source
module and stored temporarily in the DMAC.
2nd bus cycle
DMAC
SAR
Data buffer
Data bus
Address bus
DAR
Memory
Transfer source
module
Transfer destination
module
The DAR value is taken as the address, and data stored in the DMAC's data
buffer is written to the transfer destination module.
Figure 11.7 Direct Address Operation during Dual Address Mode
238
CK
A21–A0
Transfer source
address
Transfer destination
address
CSn
D15–D0
RD
WRH, WRL
DACK
Data read cycle
(1st cycle)
Note:
Data write cycle
(2nd cycle)
Transfer between external memories with DACK are output during read
cycle.
Figure 11.8 Example of Direct Address Transfer Timing in Dual Address Mode
239
Indirect Address Transfer Mode: In this mode the memory address storing the data you actually
want to transfer is specified in DMAC internal transfer source address register (SAR3). Therefore,
in indirect address transfer mode, the DMAC internal transfer source address register value is read
first. This value is stored once in the DMAC. Next, the read value is output as the address, and the
value stored at that address is again stored in the DMAC. Finally, the subsequent read value is
written to the address specified by the transfer destination address register, ending one cycle of
DMA transfer.
In indirect address mode (figure 11.9), transfer destination, transfer source, and indirect address
storage destination are all 16-bit external memory locations, and transfer in this example is
conducted in 16-bit or 8-bit units. Timing for this transfer example is shown in figure 11.10.
In indirect address mode, one NOP cycle (figure 11.10) is required until the data read as the
indirect address is output to the address bus. When transfer data is 32-bit, the third and fourth bus
cycles each need to be doubled, giving a required total of six bus cycles and one NOP cycle for the
whole operation.
240
1st, 2nd bus cycles
DMAC
SAR3
Data bus
Temporary
buffer
Address bus
DAR3
Memory
Transfer source
module
Transfer destination
module
Data
buffer
The SAR3 value is taken as the address, memory data is read, and the value is stored in the
temporary buffer. Since the value read at this time is used as the address, it must be 32 bits.
When external connection data bus is 16 bits, two bus cycles are required.
3rd bus cycle
DMAC
SAR3
Data bus
Temporary
buffer
Address bus
DAR3
Memory
Data
buffer
Transfer source
module
Transfer destination
module
The value in the temporary buffer is taken as the address, and data is read from the
transfer source module to the data buffer.
4th bus cycle
DMAC
SAR3
Data
buffer
Data bus
Temporary
buffer
Address bus
DAR3
Memory
Transfer source
module
Transfer destination
module
The DAR3 value is taken as the address, and the value in the data buffer is written to the
transfer destination module.
Note:
Memory, transfer source, and transfer destination modules are shown here.
In practice, connection can be made anywhere there is address space.
Figure 11.9 Dual Address Mode and Indirect Address Operation
(When External Memory Space is 16 bits)
241
CK
A21–A0
Transfer
source
address (H)
Transfer
source
address (L)
NOP
Indirect
address
Transfer
destination
address
CSn
D15–D0
Indirect
address (H)
Internal
address
bus
Transfer source
address *1
Internal
data bus
Indirect
address (L)
Transfer
data
Transfer
data
Indirect
address
NOP
Transfer
data
Indirect address *2
DMAC
indirect
address
buffer
Transfer
data
Indirect
address
DMAC
data
buffer
Transfer
data
RD
WRH,
WRL
Address read cycle
(1st)
(2nd)
NOP
cycle
Data
read cycle
Data
write cycle
(3rd)
(4th)
Notes: External memory space has 16-bit width.
*1 The internal address bus is controlled by the port and does not change.
*2 DMAC does not fetch value until 32-bit data is read from the internal data
bus.
Figure 11.10 Dual Address Mode and Indirect Address Transfer Timing Example 1
(External Memory Space to External Memory Space)
242
Figure 11.11 shows an example of timing in indirect address mode when transfer source and
indirect address storage locations are in internal memory, the transfer destination is an on-chip
peripheral module with 2-cycle access space, and transfer data is 8-bit.
Since the indirect address storage destination and the transfer source are in internal memory, these
can be accessed in one cycle. The transfer destination is 2-cycle access space, so two data write
cycles are required. One NOP cycle is required until the data read as the indirect address is output
to the address bus.
CK
Internal
address
bus
Internal
data
bus
Transfer
source
address
NOP
Indirect
address
Transfer
destination
address
Indirect
address
NOP
Transfer
data
DMAC
indirect
address
buffer
Transfer data
Indirect
address
DMAC
data
buffer
Transfer data
Address
read cycle
(1st)
NOP
cycle
(2nd)
Data
read cycle
(3rd)
Data write cycle (4th)
Figure 11.11 Dual Address Mode and Indirect Address Transfer Timing Example 2
(On-chip Memory Space to On-chip Memory Space)
243
11.3.7
Bus Modes
Select the appropriate bus mode in the TM bits of CHCR0–CHCR3. There are two bus modes:
cycle steal and burst.
Cycle-Steal Mode: In the cycle steal mode, the bus right is given to another bus master after each
one-transfer-unit (byte, word, or longword) DMAC transfer. When the next transfer request
occurs, the bus rights are obtained from the other bus master and a transfer is performed for one
transfer unit. When that transfer ends, the bus right is passed to the other bus master. This is
repeated until the transfer end conditions are satisfied.
The cycle steal mode can be used with all categories of transfer destination, transfer source and
transfer request. Figure 11.12 shows an example of DMA transfer timing in the cycle steal mode.
Transfer conditions are dual address mode and DREQ level detection.
DREQ
Bus control returned to CPU
Bus cycle
CPU
CPU
CPU
DMAC DMAC
Read
Write
CPU DMAC DMAC CPU
Read
CPU
Write
Figure 11.12 DMA Transfer Example in the Cycle-Steal Mode
Burst Mode: Once the bus right is obtained, the transfer is performed continuously until the
transfer end condition is satisfied. In the external request mode with low level detection of the
DREQ pin, however, when the DREQ pin is driven high, the bus passes to the other bus master
after the bus cycle of the DMAC that currently has an acknowledged request ends, even if the
transfer end conditions have not been satisfied.
Figure 11.13 shows an example of DMA transfer timing in the burst mode. Transfer conditions are
single address mode and DREQ level detection.
DREQ
Bus cycle
CPU
CPU
CPU
DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC DMAC
Figure 11.13 DMA Transfer Example in the Burst Mode
244
CPU
11.3.8
Relationship between Request Modes and Bus Modes by DMA Transfer Category
Table 11.6 shows the relationship between request modes and bus modes by DMA transfer
category.
Table 11.6 Relationship of Request Modes and Bus Modes by DMA Transfer Category
Address
Mode
Transfer Category
Request
Mode
Bus* 6
Mode
Transfer Usable
Size (Bits) Channels
Single
External device with DACK and
external memory
External
B/C
8/16/32
0, 1
External device with DACK and
memory-mapped external device
External
B/C
8/16/32
0, 1
B/C
8/16/32
B/C
8/16/32
0–3* 5
0–3* 5
B/C
8/16/32
0–3* 5
B/C
8/16/32
Dual
Any * 1
External memory and memory-mapped Any * 1
external device
Memory-mapped external device and
Any * 1
memory-mapped external device
External memory and on-chip memory Any * 1
External memory and external memory
External memory and on-chip
peripheral module
Any * 2
B/C* 3
8/16/32* 4
0–3* 5
0–3* 5
Memory-mapped external device and
on-chip memory
Any * 1
B/C
8/16/32
0–3* 5
Memory-mapped external device and
on-chip peripheral module
Any * 2
B/C* 3
8/16/32* 4
0–3* 5
On-chip memory and on-chip memory
Any * 1
Any * 2
B/C
8/16/32
B/C* 3
8/16/32* 4
0–3* 5
0–3* 5
Any * 2
B/C* 3
8/16/32* 4
0–3* 5
On-chip memory and on-chip
peripheral module
On-chip peripheral module and onchip peripheral module
Notes: *1 External request, auto-request or on-chip peripheral module request enabled. However,
in the case of on-chip peripheral module request, it is not possible to specify the SCI or
A/D converter for the transfer request source.
*2 External request, auto-request or on-chip peripheral module request possible. However,
if transfer request source is also the SCI or A/D converter (A/D1 for A mask), the
transfer source or transfer destination must be the SCI or A/D converter (A/D1 for A
mask). For A mask, setting A/D0 as the transfer request source is not permitted.
*3 When the transfer request source is the SCI, only cycle steal mode is possible.
*4 Access size permitted by register of on-chip peripheral module that is the transfer
source or transfer destination.
*5 When the transfer request is an external request, channels 0 and 1 only can be used.
*6 B: Burst, C: Cycle steal
245
11.3.9
Bus Mode and Channel Priority Order
When a given channel is transferring in burst mode, and a transfer request is issued to channel 0,
which has a higher priority ranking, transfer on channel 0 begins immediately. If the priority level
setting is fixed mode (CH0 > CH1), channel 1 transfer is continued after transfer on channel 0 are
completely ended, whether the channel 0 setting is cycle steal mode or burst mode.
When the priority level setting is for round robin mode, transfer on channel 1 begins after transfer
of one transfer unit on channel 0, whether channel 0 is set to cycle steal mode or burst mode.
Thereafter, bus right alternates in the order: channel 1 > channel 0 > channel 1 > channel 0.
Whether the priority level setting is for fixed mode or round robin mode, since channel 1 is set to
burst mode, the bus right is not given to the CPU. An example of round robin mode is shown in
figure 11.14.
CPU
CPU
DMAC
ch1
DMAC
ch1
DMAC ch1
burst mode
DMAC
ch0
DMAC
ch1
DMAC
ch0
ch0
ch1
ch0
DMAC ch0 and ch1
round-robin mode
DMAC
ch1
DMAC
ch1
DMAC ch1
burst mode
CPU
CPU
Priority: Round-robin mode
ch0: Cycle-steal mode
ch1: Burst mode
Figure 11.14 Bus Handling when Multiple Channels Are Operating
11.3.10 Number of Bus Cycle States and DREQ Pin Sample Timing
Number of States in Bus Cycle: The number of states in the bus cycle when the DMAC is the
bus master is controlled by the bus state controller (BSC) just as it is when the CPU is the bus
master. For details, see section 10, Bus State Controller (BSC).
DREQ Pin Sampling Timing and DRAK Signal: In external request mode, the DREQ pin is
sampled by either falling edge or low-level detection. When a DREQ input is detected, a DMAC
bus cycle is issued and DMA transfer effected, at the earliest, after three states. However, in burst
mode when single address operation is specified, a dummy cycle is inserted for the first bus cycle.
In this case, the actual data transfer starts from the second bus cycle. Data is transferred
continuously from the second bus cycle. The dummy cycle is not counted in the number of
transfer cycles, so there is no need to recognize the dummy cycle when setting the TCR.
DREQ sampling from the second time begins from the start of the transfer one bus cycle prior to
the DMAC transfer generated by the previous sampling.
246
DRAK is output once for the first DREQ sampling, irrespective of transfer mode or DREQ
detection method. In burst mode, using edge detection, DREQ is sampled for the first cycle only,
so DRAK is also output for the first cycle only. Therefore, the DREQ signal negate timing can be
ascertained, and this facilitates handshake operations of transfer requests with the DMAC.
Cycle Steal Mode Operations: In cycle steal mode, DREQ sampling timing is the same
irrespective of dual or single address mode, or whether edge or low-level DREQ detection is used.
For example, DMAC transfer begins (figure 11.15), at the earliest, three cycles from the first
sampling timing. The second sampling begins at the start of the transfer one bus cycle prior to the
start of the DMAC transfer initiated by the first sampling (i.e., from the start of the CPU(3)
transfer). At this point, if DREQ detection has not occurred, sampling is executed every cycle
thereafter.
As in figure 11.16, whatever cycle the CPU transfer cycle is, the next sampling begins from the
start of the transfer one bus cycle before the DMAC transfer begins.
Figure 11.15 shows an example of output during DACK read and figure 11.16 an example of
output during DACK write.
247
Figure 11.15 Cycle Steal, Dual Address, and Level Detection (Fastest Operation)
248
DACK
Bus
cycle
DRAK
DREQ
CK
CPU(1)
CPU(2)
1st sampling
CPU(3) DMAC(R) DMAC(W)
2nd sampling
CPU(4) DMAC(R) DMAC(W)
CPU(5) DMAC(R) DMAC(W)
Figure 11.16 Cycle Steal, Dual Address, and Level Detection (Normal Operation)
249
CPU
CPU
CPU
2nd sampling
DMAC(R)
Note: With cycle-steal and dual address operation, sampling timing is the same
whether DREQ detection is by level or by edge.
DACK
Bus
cycle
DRAK
DREQ
CK
1st sampling
DMAC(W)
CPU
DMAC
(R)
Figures 11.17 and 11.18 show cycle steal mode and single address mode. In this case, transfer
begins at earliest three cycles after the first DREQ sampling. The second sampling begins from the
start of the transfer one bus cycle before the start of the first DMAC transfer. In single address
mode, the DACK signal is output during the DMAC transfer period.
250
DMAC
CPU
DMAC
CPU
DMAC
CPU
CPU
DACK
CPU
Bus
cycle
DRAK
DREQ
CK
Figure 11.17 Cycle Steal, Single Address, and Level Detection (Fastest Operation)
251
CPU
DMAC
CPU
DMAC
CPU
CPU
DACK
CPU
Bus
cycle
DRAK
DREQ
CK
Figure 11.18 Cycle Steal, Single Address, and Level Detection (Normal Operation)
252
Burst Mode, Dual Address, and Level Detection: DREQ sampling timing in burst mode with
dual address and level detection is virtually the same as that of cycle steal mode.
For example, DMAC transfer begins (figure 11.19), at the earliest, three cycles after the timing of
the first sampling. The second sampling also begins from the start of the transfer one bus cycle
before the start of the first DMAC transfer. In burst mode, as long as transfer requests are issued,
DMAC transfer continues. Therefore, the “transfer one bus cycle before the start of the DMAC
transfer” may be a DMAC transfer.
In burst mode, the DACK output period is the same as that of cycle steal mode. Figure 11.20
shows the normal operation of this burst mode.
253
Figure 11.19 Burst Mode, Dual Address, and Level Detection (Fastest Operation)
254
DACK
Bus
cycle
DRAK
DREQ
CK
CPU
CPU
CPU
DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W)
CPU
DMAC(R)
DMAC(R)
DMAC(R) DMAC(W)
DMAC(W)
DMAC(R)
CPU
CPU
DACK
CPU
Bus
cycle
DRAK
DREQ
CK
Figure 11.20 Burst Mode, Dual Address, and Level Detection (Normal Operation)
255
Burst Mode, Single Address, and Level Detection: DREQ sampling timing in burst mode with
single address and level detection is shown in figures 11.21 and 11.22.
In burst mode with single address and level detection, a dummy cycle is inserted as one bus cycle,
at the earliest, three cycles after timing of the first sampling. Data during this period is undefined,
and the DACK signal is not output. Nor is the number of DMAC transfers counted. The actual
DMAC transfer begins after one dummy bus cycle output.
The dummy cycle is not counted either at the start of the second sampling (transfer one bus cycle
before the start of the first DMAC transfer). Therefore, the second sampling is not conducted from
the bus cycle starting the dummy cycle, but from the start of the CPU(3) bus cycle.
Thereafter, as long the DREQ is continuously sampled, no dummy cycle is inserted. DREQ
sampling timing during this period begins from the start of the transfer one bus cycle before the
start of DMAC transfer, in the same way as with cycle steal mode.
As with the fourth sampling in figure 11.21, once DMAC transfer is interrupted, a dummy cycle is
again inserted at the start as soon as DMAC transfer is resumed.
The DACK output period in burst mode is the same as in cycle steal mode.
256
Figure 11.21 Burst Mode, Single Address, and Level Detection (Fastest Operation)
257
DACK
Bus
cycle
DRAK
DREQ
CK
CPU(1)
2nd sampling
CPU(2) CPU(3) Dummy
1st sampling
DMAC
3rd sampling
DMAC
DMAC
4th sampling
CPU(4) Dummy
DMAC
DMAC
DMAC
Dummy
CPU
CPU
DACK
CPU
Bus
cycle
DRAK
DREQ
CK
Figure 11.22 Burst Mode, Single Address, and Level Detection (Normal Operation)
258
Burst Mode, Dual Address, and Edge Detection: In burst mode with dual address and edge
detection, DREQ sampling is conducted only on the first cycle.
In figure 11.23, DMAC transfer begins, at the earliest, three cycles after the timing of the first
sampling. Thereafter, DMAC transfer continues until the end of the data transfer count set in the
TCR. DREQ sampling is not conducted during this period. Therefore, DRAK is output on the first
cycle only.
When DMAC transfer is resumed after being halted by a NMI or address error, be sure to reinput
an edge request. The remaining transfer restarts after the first DRAK output.
The DACK output period in burst mode is the same as in cycle steal mode.
259
Figure 11.23 Burst Mode, Dual Address, and Edge Detection
260
DACK
DRAK
Bus
cycle
DREQ
CK
CPU
CPU
CPU
DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W) DMAC(R) DMAC(W)
Burst Mode, Single Address, and Edge Detection: In burst mode with single address and edge
detection, DREQ sampling is conducted only on the first cycle. In figure 11.24, a dummy cycle is
inserted, at the earliest, three cycles after the timing for the first sampling. During this period, data
is undefined, and DACK is not output. Nor is the number of DMAC transfers counted. Thereafter,
DMAC transfer continues until the data transfer count set in the DMATCR has ended. DREQ
sampling is not conducted during this period. Therefore, DRAK is output on the first cycle only.
When DMAC transfer is resumed after being halted by a NMI or address error, be sure to reinput
an edge request. DRAK is output once, and the remaining transfer restarts after output of one
dummy cycle.
The DACK output period in burst mode is the same as in cycle steal mode.
261
DMAC
DMAC
DMAC
DMAC
Dummy
CPU
CPU
DACK
CPU
Bus
cycle
DRAK
DREQ
CK
Figure 11.24 Burst Mode, Single Address and Edge Detection
262
11.3.11 Source Address Reload Function
Channel 2 has a source address reload function. This returns to the first value set in the source
address register (SAR2) every four transfers by setting the RO bit of CHCR2 to 1. Figure 11.25
illustrates this operation. Figure 11.26 is a timing chart for reload ON mode, with burst mode,
autorequest, 16-bit transfer data size, SAR2 increment, and DAR2 fixed mode.
DMAC
DMAC control block
RO bit = 1
Reload signal
Reload control
DMATCR2
Address bus
Count signal
Transfer
request
CHCR2
SAR2
(initial value)
Reload
signal
SAR2
4th count
Figure 11.25 Source Address Reload Function
CK
Internal
address bus
Internal
data bus
SAR2
DAR2
SAR2+2
SAR2 data
DAR2
SAR2+4
SAR2+2 data
DAR2
SAR2+6
DAR2
SAR2+4 data
SAR2
SAR2+6 data
DAR2
SAR2 data
1st channel 2
transfer
2nd channel 2
transfer
3rd channel 2
transfer
4th channel 2
transfer
5th channel 2
transfer
SAR2 output
DAR2 output
SAR2+2 output
DAR2 output
SAR2+4 output
DAR2 output
SAR2+6 output
DAR2 output
SAR2 output
DAR2 output
After SAR2+6 output, SAR2 is reloaded
Bus right is returned one time in four
Figure 11.26 Source Address Reload Function Timing Chart
263
The reload function can be executed whether the transfer data size is 8, 16, or 32 bits.
DMATCR2, which specifies the number of transfers, is decremented by 1 at the end of every
single-transfer-unit transfer, regardless of whether the reload function is on or off. Therefore,
when using the reload function in the on state, a multiple of 4 must be specified in DMATCR2.
Operation will not be guaranteed if any other value is set. Also, the counter which counts the
occurrence of four transfers for address reloading is reset by clearing of the DME bit in DMAOR
or the DE bit in CHCR2, setting of the transfer end flag (the TE bit in CHCR2), NMI input, and
setting of the AE flag (address error generation in DMAC transfer), as well as by a reset and in
software standby mode, but SAR2, DAR2, DMATCR2, and other registers are not reset.
Consequently, when one of these sources occurs, there is a mixture of initialized counters and
uninitialized registers in the DMAC, and incorrect operation may result if a restart is executed in
this state. Therefore, when one of the above sources, other than TE setting, occurs during use of
the address reload function, SAR, DAR2, and DMATCR2 settings must be carried out before reexecution.
11.3.12 DMA Transfer Ending Conditions
The DMA transfer ending conditions vary for individual channels ending and for all channels
ending together.
Individual Channel Ending Conditions: There are two ending conditions. A transfer ends when
the value of the channel’s DMA transfer count register (DMATCR) is 0, or when the DE bit of the
channel’s CHCR is cleared to 0.
• When DMATCR is 0: When the DMATCR value becomes 0 and the corresponding channel's
DMA transfer ends, the transfer end flag bit (TE) is set in the CHCR. If the IE (interrupt
enable) bit has been set, a DMAC interrupt (DEI) is requested of the CPU.
• When DE of CHCR is 0: Software can halt a DMA transfer by clearing the DE bit in the
channel’s CHCR. The TE bit is not set when this happens.
Conditions for Ending All Channels Simultaneously: Transfers on all channels end when the
NMIF (NMI flag) bit or AE (address error flag) bit is set to 1 in the DMAOR, or when the DME
bit in the DMAOR is cleared to 0.
• When the NMIF or AE bit is set to 1 in DMAOR: When an NMI interrupt or DMAC address
error occurs, the NMIF or AE bit is set to 1 in the DMAOR and all channels stop their
transfers. The DMAC obtains the bus rights, and if these flags are set to 1 during execution of
a transfer, DMAC halts operation when the transfer processing currently being executed ends,
and transfers the bus right to the other bus master. Consequently, even if the NMIF or AE bits
are set to 1 during a transfer, the DMA source address register (SAR), designation address
register (DAR), and transfer count register (TCR) are all updated. The TE bit is not set. To
resume the transfers after NMI interrupt or address error processing, clear the appropriate flag
bit to 0. To avoid restarting a transfer on a particular channel, clear its DE bit to 0.
264
When the processing of a one unit transfer is complete. In a dual address mode direct address
transfer, even if an address error occurs or the NMI flag is set during read processing, the
transfer will not be halted until after completion of the following write processing. In such a
case, SAR, DAR, and TCR values are updated. In the same manner, the transfer is not halted in
dual address mode indirect address transfers until after the final write processing has ended.
• When DME is cleared to 0 in DMAOR: Clearing the DME bit to 0 in the DMAOR aborts the
transfers on all channels. The TE bit is not set.
11.3.13 DMAC Access from CPU
The space addressed by the DMAC is 3-cycle space. Therefore, when the CPU becomes the bus
master and accesses the DMAC, a minimum of three basic clock (CLK) cycles are required for
one bus cycle. Also, since the DMAC is located in word space, while a word-size access to the
DMAC is completed in one bus cycle, a longword-size access is automatically divided into two
word accesses, requiring two bus cycles (six basic clock cycles). These two bus cycles are
executed consecutively; a different bus cycle is never inserted between the two word accesses.
This applies to both write accesses and read accesses.
11.4
Examples of Use
11.4.1
Example of DMA Transfer between On-Chip SCI and External Memory
In this example, on-chip serial communication interface channel 0 (SCI0) received data is
transferred to external memory using the DMAC channel 3.
Table 11.7 indicates the transfer conditions and the setting values of each of the registers.
Table 11.7 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between On-Chip
SCI and External Memory
Transfer Conditions
Register
Value
Transfer source: RDR0 of on-chip SCI0
SAR3
H'FFFF81A5
Transfer destination: external memory
DAR3
H'00400000
Transfer count: 64 times
DMATCR3
H'00000040
Transfer source address: fixed
CHCR3
H'00004D05
DMAOR
H'0001
Transfer destination address: incremented
Transfer request source: SCI0 (RDR0)
Bus mode: cycle steal
Transfer unit: byte
Interrupt request generation at end of transfer
Channel priority ranking: 0 > 1 > 2 > 3
265
11.4.2
Example of DMA Transfer between External RAM and External Device with
DACK
In this example, an external request, serial address mode transfer with external memory as the
transfer source and an external device with DACK as the transfer destination is executed using
DMAC channel 1.
Table 11.8 indicates the transfer conditions and the setting values of each of the registers.
Table 11.8 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between External
RAM and External Device with DACK
Transfer Conditions
Register
Value
Transfer source: external RAM
SAR1
H'00400000
Transfer destination: external device with DACK
DAR1
(access by DACK)
Transfer count: 32 times
DMATCR1
H'00000020
Transfer source address: decremented
CHCR1
H'00002269
DMAOR
H'0201
Transfer destination address: (setting ineffective)
Transfer request source: external pin (DREQ1) edge
detection
Bus mode: burst
Transfer unit: word
No interrupt request generation at end of transfer
Channel priority ranking: 2 > 0 > 1 > 3
11.4.3
Example of DMA Transfer between A/D Converter and On-Chip Memory
(Address Reload On) (Excluding A Mask)
In this example, the on-chip A/D converter channel 0 is the transfer source and on-chip memory is
the transfer destination, and the address reload function is on.
Table 11.9 indicates the transfer conditions and the setting values of each of the registers.
266
Table 11.9 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between A/D
Converter and On-Chip Memory
Transfer Conditions
Register
Value
Transfer source: on-chip A/D converter ch0
SAR2
H'FFFF83F0
Transfer destination: on-chip memory
DAR2
H'FFFFF000
Transfer count: 128 times (reload count 32 times)
DMATCR2
H'00000080
Transfer source address: incremented
CHCR2
H'00085B25
DMAOR
H'0101
Transfer destination address: incremented
Transfer request source: A/D converter
Bus mode: burst
Transfer unit: byte
Interrupt request generation at end of transfer
Channel priority ranking: 0 > 2 > 3 > 1
When address reload is on, the SAR value returns to its initially established value every four
transfers. In the above example, when a transfer request is input from the A/D converter, the byte
size data is first read in from the H'FFFF83F0 register of AD0 and that data is written to the onchip memory address H'FFFFF001. Because a byte size transfer was performed, the SAR and
DAR values at this point are H'FFFF83F1 and H'FFFFF001, respectively. Also, because this is a
burst transfer, the bus rights remain secured, so continuous data transfer is possible.
When four transfers are completed, if the address reload is off, execution continues with the fifth
and sixth transfers and the SAR value continues to increment from H'FFFF83F3 to H'FFFF83F4 to
H'FFFF83F5 and so on. However, when the address reload is on, the DMAC transfer is halted
upon completion of the fourth one and the bus right request signal to the CPU is cleared. At this
time, the value stored in SAR is not H'FFFF83F3–H'FFFF83F4, but H'FFFF83F3–H'FFFF83F0, a
return to the initially established address. The DAR value always continues to be decremented
regardless of whether the address reload is on or off.
The DMAC internal status, due to the above operation after completion of the fourth transfer, is
indicated in table 11.10 for both address reload on and off.
267
Table 11.10 DMAC Internal Status
Item
Address Reload On
Address Reload Off
SAR
H'FFFF83F0
H'FFFF83F4
DAR
H'FFFFF004
H'FFFFF004
DMATCR
H'0000007C
H'0000007C
Bus rights
Released
Maintained
DMAC operation
Halted
Processing continues
Interrupts
Not issued
Not issued
Transfer request source flag clear
Executed
Not executed
Notes: 1. Interrupts are executed until the DMATCR value becomes 0, and if the IE bit of the
CHCR is set to 1, are issued regardless of whether the address reload is on or off.
2. If transfer request source flag clears are executed until the DMATCR value becomes 0,
they are executed regardless of whether the address reload is on or off.
3. Designate burst mode when using the address reload function. There are cases where
abnormal operation will result if it is executed in cycle steal mode.
4. Designate a multiple of four for the TCR value when using the address reload function.
There are cases where abnormal operation will result if anything else is designated.
To execute transfers after the fifth one when the address reload is on, make the transfer request
source issue another transfer request signal.
11.4.4
Example of DMA Transfer between A/D Converter and Internal Memory (Address
Reload On) (A Mask)
In this example the on-chip A/D converter (A/D1) is the transfer source and the internal memory is
the transfer destination, and the address reload on.
Table 11.11 indicates the transfer conditions and the setting values of each of the registers.
268
Table 11.11 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between A/D
Converter (A/D1) and Internal Memory
Transfer Conditions
Register
Value
Transfer source: on-chip A/D converter (A/D1)
SAR2
H'FFFF8408
Transfer destination: internal memory
DAR2
H'FFFFF000
Transfer count: 128 times (reload count 32 times)
DMATCR2
H'00000080
Transfer source address: incremented
CHCR2
H'00085B25
DMAOR
H'0101
Transfer target address: incremented
Transfer request source: A/D converter (A/D1)
Bus mode: burst
Transfer unit: byte
Interrupt request generated at end of transfer
Channel priority sequence: 0>2>3>1
When address reload is on, the SAR value returns to its initially established value every four
transfers. In the above example, when a transfer request is input from the A/D converter (A/D1),
the byte size data is first read in from the H'FFFF8408 register and that data is written to the onchip memory address H'FFFFF001. Because a byte size transfer was performed, the SAR and
DAR values at this point are H'FFFF8409 and H'FFFFF001, respectively. Also, because this is a
burst transfer, the bus rights remain secured, so continuous data transfer is possible.
When four transfers are completed, if the address reload is off, execution continues with the fifth
and sixth transfers and the SAR value continues to increment from H'FFFF840B to H'FFFF840C
to H'FFFF840D and so on. However, when the address reload is on, the DMAC transfer is halted
upon completion of the fourth transfer and the bus right request signal to the CPU is cleared. At
this time, the values stored in SAR are not H'FFFF840B–H'FFFF840C, but H'FFFF840B–
H'FFFF8408, a return to the initially established address. The DAR value always continues to be
decremented regardless of whether the address reload is on or off.
The DMAC internal status, due to the above operation after completion of the fourth transfer, is
indicated in table 11.12 for both address reload on and off.
269
Table 11.12 DMAC Internal Status
Item
Address Reload On
Address Reload Off
SAR
H'FFFF8408
H'FFFF840C
DAR
H'FFFFF004
H'FFFFF004
DMATCR
H'0000007C
H'0000007C
Bus rights
Released
Maintained
DMAC operation
Halted
Processing continues
Interrupts
Not issued
Not issued
Transfer request source flag clear
Executed
Not executed
Notes: 1. Interrupts are executed until the DMATCR value becomes 0, and if the IE bit of the
CHCR is set to 1, are issued regardless of whether the address reload is on or off.
2. If transfer request source flag clears are executed until the DMATCR value becomes 0,
they are executed regardless of whether the address reload is on or off.
3. Designate burst mode when using the address reload function. There are cases where
abnormal operation will result if it is executed in cycle steal mode.
4. Designate a multiple of four for the TCR value when using the address reload function.
There are cases where abnormal operation will result if anything else is designated.
To execute more than four transfers with the address reload on, make the transfer request source
issue another transfer request signal.
11.4.5
Example of DMA Transfer between External Memory and SCI1 Send Side
(Indirect Address On)
In this example, DMAC channel 3 is used, an indirect address designated external memory is the
transfer source and the SCI1 sending side is the transfer destination.
Table 11.13 indicates the transfer conditions and the setting values of each of the registers.
270
Table 11.13 Transfer Conditions and Register Set Values for Transfer between External
Memory and SCI1 Sending Side
Transfer Conditions
Register
Value
Transfer source: external memory
SAR3
H'00400000
Value stored in address H'00400000
—
H'00450000
Value stored in address H'00450000
—
H'55
Transfer destination: on-chip SCI TDR1
DAR3
H'FFFF81B3
Transfer count: 10 times
DMATCR3
H'0000000A
Transfer source address: incremented
CHCR3
H'00011E01
DMAOR
H'0001
Transfer destination address: fixed
Transfer request source: SCI1 (TDR1)
Bus mode: cycle steal
Transfer unit: byte
Interrupt request not generated at end of transfer
Channel priority ranking: 0 > 1 > 2 > 3
When indirect address mode is on, the data stored in the address established in SAR is not used as
the transfer source data. In the case of indirect addressing, the value stored in the SAR address is
read, then that value is used as the address and the data read from that address is used as the
transfer source data, then that data is stored in the address designated by the DAR.
In the table 11.13 example, when a transfer request from the TDR1 of SCI1 is generated, a read of
the address located at H'00400000, which is the value set in SAR3, is performed first. The data
H'00450000 is stored at this H'00400000 address, and the DMAC first reads this H'00450000
value. It then uses this read value of H'00450000 as an address and reads the value of H'55 that is
stored in the H'00450000 address. It then writes the value H'55 to the address H'FFFF81B3
designated by DAR3 to complete one indirect address transfer.
With indirect addressing, the first executed data read from the address established in SAR3 always
results in a longword size transfer regardless of the TS0, TS1 bit designations for transfer data
size. However, the transfer source address fixed and increment or decrement designations are as
according to the SM0, SM1 bits. Consequently, despite the fact that the transfer data size
designation is byte in this example, the SAR3 value at the end of one transfer is H'00400004. The
write operation is exactly the same as an ordinary dual address transfer write operation.
271
11.5
Cautions on Use
1. Other than the DMA operation register (DMAOR) accessing in word (16-bit) units, access all
registers in word (16-bit) or longword (32-bit) units.
2. When rewriting the RS0–RS3 bits of CHCR0–CHCR3, first clear the DE bit to 0 (set the DE
bit to 0 before doing rewrites with a CHCR byte address).
3. When an NMI interrupt is input, the NMIF bit of the DMAOR is set even when the DMAC is
not operating.
4. Set the DME bit of the DMAOR to 0 and make certain that any DMAC received transfer
request processing has been completed before entering standby mode.
5. Do not access the DMAC, DTC, BSC, or UBC on-chip peripheral modules from the DMAC.
6. When activating the DMAC, do the CHCR or DMAOR setting as the final step. There are
instances where abnormal operation will result if any other registers are established last.
7. After the DMATCR count becomes 0 and the DMA transfer ends normally, always write a 0 to
the DMATCR, even when executing the maximum number of transfers on the same channel.
There are instances where abnormal operation will result if this is not done.
8. Designate burst mode as the transfer mode when using the address reload function. There are
instances where abnormal operation will result in cycle steal mode.
9. Designate a multiple of four for the DMATCR value when using the address reload function.
There are instances where abnormal operation will result if anything else is designated.
10. When detecting external requests by falling edge, maintain the external request pin at high
level when performing the DMAC establishment.
11. When operating in single address mode, establish an external address as the address. There are
instances where abnormal operation will result if an internal address is established.
12. Do not access DMAC register empty addresses (H'FFFF86B2–H'FFFF86BF). Operation
cannot be guaranteed when empty addresses are accessed.
272
Section 12 Multifunction Timer Pulse Unit (MTU)
12.1
Overview
The SuperH microprocessor has an on-chip 16-bit multifunction timer pulse unit (MTU) with five
channels of 16-bit timers.
12.1.1
Features
• Can process a maximum of sixteen different pulse outputs and inputs.
• Has sixteen timer general registers (TGR): four each for channels 0, 3, and 4, and two each for
channels 1 and 2 that can be set to function independently as output compare or input capture.
The channel 0, 3, and 4 TGRC and TGRD registers can be used as buffer registers.
• Can select eight counter input clock sources for all channels
• All channels can be set for the following operating modes:
 Compare match waveform output: 0 output/1 output/toggle output selectable.
 Input capture function: Selectable rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edge
detection.
 Counter clearing function: Counters can be cleared by a compare-match or input capture.
 Synchronizing mode: Two or more timer counters (TCNT) can be written to
simultaneously. Two or more timer counters can be simultaneously cleared by a comparematch or input capture. Counter synchronization functions enable synchronized register
input/output.
•
•
•
•
 PWM mode: PWM output can be provided with any duty cycle. When combined with the
counter synchronizing function, enables up to twelve-phase PWM output. (With channels
0–2 set to PWM mode 2, channels 3–4, and channels 0–4 synchronized with TGR3A of
channel 3 as the sync register (channels 0–4 phase output: 4, 2, 2, 2, 2).)
Channels 0, 3, and 4 can be set for buffer operation
 Input capture register double buffer configuration possible
 Output compare register automatic re-write possible
Channels 1 and 2 can be independently set to the phase counting mode
 Two-phase encoder pulse up/down count possible
Cascade connection operation
 Can be operated as a 32-bit counter by using the channel 2 input clock for channel 1
overflow/underflow
Channels 3 and 4 can be set in the following modes:
 Reset-synchronized PWM mode: By combining channels 3 and 4, a sawtooth wave
comparator type six-phase PWM waveform can be output.
273
•
•
•
•
 Complementary PWM mode: By combining channels 3 and 4, a triangle wave comparator
type six-phase PWM output is possible with non-overlapping times.
High speed access via internal 16-bit bus
Twenty-three interrupt sources
 Channels 0, 3, and 4 have four compare-match/input capture interrupts and one overflow
interrupt which can be requested independently.
 Channels 1 and 2 have two compare-match/input capture interrupts, one overflow interrupt,
and one underflow interrupt which can be requested independently.
Automatic transfer of register data
Block transfer, 1-word data transfers and 1-byte data transfers are possible through DTC or
DMAC activation.
A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated
 Channels 0–4 compare-match/input capture signals can be used as A/D converter
conversion start triggers.
274
Table 12.1 summarizes the MTU functions.
Table 12.1 MTU Functions
Item
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Counter clocks
Internal: φ/1, φ/4, φ/16, φ/64, φ/256, φ/1024
External: Eight to each channel from TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, and TCLKD
General registers
TGR0A
TGR1A
TGR2A
TGR3A
TGR4A
TGR0B
TGR1B
TGR2B
TGR3B
TGR4B
General
registers/buffer
registers
TGR0C
TGR0D
No
No
TGR3C
TGR3D
TGR4C
TGR4D
Input/output pins
TIOC0A
TIOC1A
TIOC2A
TIOC3A
TIOC4A
TIOC0B
TIOC1B
TIOC2B
TIOC3B
TIOC4B
TIOC0C
TIOC3C
TIOC4C
TIOC0D
TIOC3D
TIOC4D
Counter clear
function
TGR compare- TGR compare- TGR compare- TGR compare- TGR comparematch or input match or input match or input match or input match or input
capture
capture
capture
capture
capture
Compare
0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
match output 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Toggle Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Input capture
function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Synchronization
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Buffer operation
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
PWM mode 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PWM mode 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Phase counting
mode
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Reset-synchronized No
PWM mode
No
No
Yes
Yes
Complementary
PWM mode
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
DMAC activation
TGR0A com- TGR1A com- TGR2A com- TGR3A com- TGR4A compare match or pare match or pare match or pare match or pare match or
input capture input capture input capture input capture input capture
275
Table 12.1 MTU Functions (cont)
Item
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Hard DTC
activation
TGR compare- TGR compare- TGR compare- TGR compare- TGR comparematch or input match or input match or input match or input match or input
capture and
capture
capture
capture
capture
TCNT4
overflow/
underflow
A/D conversion start TGR0A com- TGR1A com- TGR2A com- TGR3A com- TGR4A comtrigger
pare match or pare match or pare match or pare match or pare match or
input capture input capture input capture input capture input capture
Interrupt sources
12.1.2
Compare
match/input
capture 0A
Compare
match/input
capture 1A
Compare
match/input
capture 2A
Compare
match/input
capture 3A
Compare
match/input
capture 4A
Compare
match/input
capture 0B
Compare
match/input
capture 1B
Compare
match/input
capture 2B
Compare
match/input
capture 3B
Compare
match/input
capture 4B
Compare
match/input
capture 0C
Overflow
Overflow
Compare
match/input
capture 3C
Compare
match/input
capture 4C
Compare
match/input
capture 0D
Underflow
Underflow
Compare
match/input
capture 3D
Compare
match/input
capture 4D
Overflow
—
—
Overflow
Overflow/
underflow
Block Diagram
Figure 12.1 is the block diagram of the MTU.
276
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
TGRC
TGRD
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
TGRC
TGRD
BUS I/F
TCNTS
TCDR
TCBR
TDDR
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
Module data bus
TSTR TSYR
Control logic
TOER TOCR
TGCR
Channel 3
TCR TMDR
TIORH TIORL
TIER TSR
Channel 4
TCR TMDR
TIOR TIORL
TIER TSR
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
Channel 2:
TIOC2A
TIOC2B
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
TGRC
TGRD
Channel 1:
TIOC1A
TIOC1B
Channel 2
TCR TMDR
TIOR
TIER TSR
(I/O pins)
Channel 0:
TIOC0A
TIOC0B
TIOC0C
TIOC0D
Channels 0–2 control logic
External clock:
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
Channel 1
TCR TMDR
TIOR
TIER TSR
Shared
(Clock input)
Internal clock:
φ/1
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
φ/1024
Channel 0
TCR TMDR
TIORH TIORL
TIER TSR
Channel 4:
TIOC4A
TIOC4B
TIOC4C
TIOC4D
Channels 3, 4 control logic
(I/O pins)
Channel 3:
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3C
TIOC3D
(Interrupt
request signals)
Channel 3:
TGI3A
TGI3B
TGI3C
TGI3D
TGI3V
Channel 4:
TGI4A
TGI4B
TGI4C
TGI4D
TGI4V
Internal data bus
A/D conversion
start request signal
(Interrupt
request signal)
Channel 0:
TGI0A
TGI0B
TGI0C
TGI0D
TGI0V
Channel 1:
TGI1A
TGI1B
TGI1V
TGI1U
Channel 2:
TGI2A
TGI2B
TGI2V
TGI2U
Figure 12.1 MTU Block Diagram
277
12.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 12.2 summarizes the MTU pins.
Table 12.2 Pin Configuration
Channel Name
Pin Name I/O Function
Shared
Clock input A
TCLKA
I
Clock A input pin (A-phase input pin in channel 1
phase counting mode)
Clock input B
TCLKB
I
Clock B input pin (B-phase input pin in channel 1
phase counting mode)
Clock input C
TCLKC
I
Clock C input pin (A-phase input pin in channel 2
phase counting mode)
Clock input D
TCLKD
I
Clock D input pin (B-phase input pin in channel 2
phase counting mode)
0
1
2
278
Input
TIOC0A
capture/output
compare-match 0A
I/O TGR0A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC0B
capture/output
compare-match 0B
I/O TGR0B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC0C
capture/output
compare-match 0C
I/O TGR0C input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC0D
capture/output
compare-match 0D
I/O TGR0D input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC1A
capture/output
compare-match 1A
I/O TGR1A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC1B
capture/output
compare-match 1B
I/O TGR1B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC2A
capture/output
compare-match 2A
I/O TGR2A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC2B
capture/output
compare-match 2B
I/O TGR2B input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Table 12.2 Pin Configuration (cont)
Channel Name
3
4
Pin Name I/O Function
TIOC3A
Input
capture/output
compare-match 3A
I/O TGR3A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC3B
capture/output
compare-match 3B
I/O TGR3B input capture input/output compare output
pin
Input
TIOC3C
capture/output
compare-match 3C
I/O TGR3C input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC3D
capture/output
compare-match 3D
I/O TGR3D input capture input/output compare output
pin
TIOC4A
Input
capture/output
compare-match 4A
I/O TGR4A input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC4B
capture/output
compare-match 4B
I/O TGR4B input capture input/output compare output
pin
Input
TIOC4C
capture/output
compare-match 4C
I/O TGR4C input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
Input
TIOC4D
capture/output
compare-match 4D
I/O TGR4D input capture input/output compare output
pin
In complementary PWM/reset synchronous PWM
mode, 1/2 PWM period toggle output pin
In complementary PWM/reset synchronous PWM
mode, PWM output/U phase output pin
In complementary PWM/reset synchronous PWM
mode
In complementary PWM/reset synchronous PWM
mode, PWM output/U phase output pin
In complementary PWM/reset synchronous PWM
mode, PWM output/V phase output pin
In complementary PWM/reset synchronous PWM
mode, PWM output/W phase output pin
In complementary PWM/reset synchronous PWM
mode, PWM output/V phase output pin
In complementary PWM/reset synchronous PWM
mode, PWM output/W phase output pin
Note: The TIOC pins output undefined values when they are set to input capture and timer output
by the pin function controller (PFC).
279
12.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 12.3 summarizes the MTU register configuration.
Table 12.3 Register Configuration
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Address
Access Size
(Bits) *1
Shared Timer start register
TSTR
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8240
8, 16, 32
Timer synchro register
TSYR
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8241
Timer control register 0
TCR0
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8260
Timer mode register 0
TMDR0
R/W
H'C0
H'FFFF8261
Timer I/O control register 0H TIOR0H R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8262
Timer I/O control register 0L TIOR0L R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8263
Timer interrupt enable
register 0
TIER0
R/W
H'40
H'FFFF8264
Timer status register 0
TSR0
R/(W)*2 H'C0
H'FFFF8265
Timer counter 0
TCNT0
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8266
General register 0A
TGR0A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8268
General register 0B
TGR0B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF826A
General register 0C
TGR0C
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF826C
General register 0D
TGR0D
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF826E
Timer control register 1
TCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8280
Timer mode register 1
TMDR1
R/W
H'C0
H'FFFF8281
Timer I/O control register 1
TIOR1
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF8282
Timer interrupt enable
register 1
TIER1
R/W
H'40
H'FFFF8284
Timer status register 1
TSR1
R/(W)*2 H'C0
H'FFFF8285
Timer counter 1
TCNT1
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8286
General register 1A
TGR1A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8288
General register 1B
TGR1B
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF828A
0
1
280
16, 32
8, 16, 32
16, 32
Table 12.3 Register Configuration (cont)
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Address
Access Size
(Bits)* 1
2
Timer control register 2
TCR2
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF82A0
8, 16, 32
Timer mode register 2
TMDR2
R/W
H'C0
H'FFFF82A1
Timer I/O control register 2
TIOR2
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF82A2
Timer interrupt enable
register 2
TIER2
R/W
H'40
H'FFFF82A4
Timer status register 2
TSR2
R/(W)*2 H'C0
H'FFFF82A5
Timer counter 2
TCNT2
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF82A6
General register 2A
TGR2A
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF82A8
General register 2B
TGR2B
R/W
TCR3
TMDR3
3
H'FFFF
H'FFFF82AA
R/W*
3
H'00
H'FFFF8200
R/W*
3
H'C0
H'FFFF8202
Timer I/O control register 3H TIOR3H R/W*
3
H'00
H'FFFF8204
Timer I/O control register 3L TIOR3L R/W*
3
H'00
H'FFFF8205
3
Timer control register 3
Timer mode register 3
8, 16, 32
Timer interrupt enable
register 3
TIER3
R/W*
H'40
H'FFFF8208
Timer status register 3
TSR3
R/(W)*2 H'C0
H'FFFF822C
8, 16, 32
TCNT3
16, 32
R/W*
3
H'0000
H'FFFF8210
TGR3A
R/W*
3
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8218
General register 3B
TGR3B
R/W*
3
H'FFFF
H'FFFF821A
General register 3C
TGR3C
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8224
General register 3D
TGR3D
R/W
TCR4
TMDR4
Timer counter 3
General register 3A
4
16, 32
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8226
R/W*
3
H'00
H'FFFF8201
R/W*
3
H'C0
H'FFFF8203
Timer I/O control register 4H TIOR4H R/W*
3
H'00
H'FFFF8206
Timer I/O control register 4L TIOR4L R/W*
3
H'00
H'FFFF8207
3
Timer control register 4
Timer mode register 4
Timer interrupt enable
register 4
TIER4
R/W*
H'40
H'FFFF8209
Timer status register 4
TSR4
R/(W)*2 H'C0
H'FFFF822D
16, 32
8, 16, 32
8, 16, 32
281
Table 12.3 Register Configuration (cont)
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Address
Access Size
(Bits) *1
4 (cont) Timer counter 4
TCNT4
R/W*3
H'0000
H'FFFF8212
16, 32
TGR4A
R/W*3
H'FFFF
H'FFFF821C
General register 4B
TGR4B
R/W*3
H'FFFF
H'FFFF821E
General register 4C
TGR4C
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8228
General register 4D
TGR4D
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF822A
3 and 4 Timer output master enable TOER
register
R/W*3
H'C0
H'FFFF820A
Timer output control register TOCR
R/W*3
H'00
H'FFFF820B
Timer gate control register
TGCR
R/W*
3
H'80
H'FFFF820D
TCDR
R/W*
3
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8214
Timer dead time data
register
TDDR
R/W*
3
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8216
Timer subcounter
TCNTS
R
H'0000
H'FFFF8220
Timer cycle buffer register
TCBR
R/W
H'FFFF
H'FFFF8222
General register 4A
Timer cycle data register
16, 32
8, 16, 32
16, 32
16, 32
Notes: *1 16-bit registers (TCNT, TGR) cannot be read or written in 8-bit units.
*2 Write 0 to clear flags.
*3 If the MTURWE bit of bus control register 1 (BCR) in the bus state controller (BSC) is 0
cleared, access becomes impossible (undefined read/write disabled).
282
12.2
MTU Register Descriptions
12.2.1
Timer Control Register (TCR)
The TCR is an 8-bit read/write register for controlling the TCNT counter for each channel. The
MTU has five TCR registers, one for each of the channels 0 to 4. TCR is initialized to H'00 by a
power-on reset or the standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize TCR.
Channels 0, 3, 4: TCR0, TCR3, TCR4:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
CCLR2
CCLR1
CCLR0
4
3
CKEG1 CKEG0
2
1
0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
CCLR1
CCLR0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
Channels 1, 2: TCR1, TCR2:
Bit:
CKEG1 CKEG0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 7–5—Counter Clear 2, 1, 0 (CCLR2, CCLR1, CCLR0): Select the counter clear source for
the TCNT counter.
283
Channels 0, 3, 4:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
CCLR2 CCLR1
Bit 5:
CCLR0
Description
0
0
TCNT clear disabled (initial value)
1
TCNT is cleared by TGRA compare-match or input capture
0
TCNT is cleared by TGRB compare-match or input capture
1
Synchronizing clear: TCNT is cleared in synchronization with clear of
other channel counters operating in sync. * 1
0
TCNT clear disabled
1
TCNT is cleared by TGRC compare-match or input capture* 2
0
TCNT is cleared by TGRD compare-match or input capture* 2
1
Synchronizing clear: TCNT is cleared in synchronization with clear of
other channel counters operating in sync* 1
0
1
1
0
1
Notes: *1 Setting the SYNC bit of the TSYR to 1 sets the synchronization.
*2 When TGRC or TGRD are functioning as buffer registers, TCNT is not cleared because
the buffer registers have priority and compare-match/input captures do not occur.
Channels 1, 2:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Reserved * 1 CCLR1
Bit 5:
CCLR0
Description
0
0
TCNT clear disabled (initial value)
1
TCNT is cleared by TGRA compare-match or input capture
0
TCNT is cleared by TGRB compare-match or input capture
1
Synchronizing clear: TCNT is cleared in synchronization with
clear of other channel counters operating in sync* 2
0
1
Notes: *1 The bit 7 of channels 1 and 2 is reserved. It always reads 0, and cannot be modified.
*2 Setting the SYNC bit of the TSYR to 1 sets the synchronization.
• Bits 4–3—Clock Edge 1, 0 (CKEG1 and CKEG0): CKEG1 and CKEG0 select the input clock
edges. When counting is done on both edges of the internal clock the input clock frequency
becomes 1/2 (Example: both edges of φ/4 = rising edge of φ/2). When phase count mode is
used with channels 1, 2, these settings are ignored, as the phase count mode settings have
priority.
284
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
CKEG1 CKEG0 Description
0
1
0
Count on rising edges (initial value)
1
Count on falling edges
X
Count on both rising and falling edges
Notes: 1. X: 0 or 1, don’t care.
2. Internal clock edge selection is effective when the input clock is φ/4 or slower. When ø/1
or the overflow/underflow of another channel is selected for the input clock, although
values can be written, counter operation complies with the initial value (count on rising
edges).
• Bits 2–0—Timer Prescaler 2–0 (TPSC2–TPSC0): TPSC2–TPSC0 select the counter clock
source for the TCNT. An independent clock source can be selected for each channel. Table
12.4 shows the possible settings for each channel.
Table 12.4 MTU Clock Sources
Internal Clock
Channel
φ/1
φ/4
φ/
16
φ/
64
φ/
256
φ/
1024
Other Channel
Overflow/
Underflow
0
O
O
O
O
X
X
1
O
O
O
O
O
2
O
O
O
O
3
O
O
O
4
O
O
O
External Clock
TCL
KA
TCL
KB
TCL
KC
TCL
KD
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
Note: Symbols: O: Setting possible
X: Setting not possible
Channel 0:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
TPSC2 TPSC1
Bit 0:
TPSC0
Description
0
0
Internal clock: count with φ/1 (initial value)
1
Internal clock: count with φ/4
0
Internal clock: count with φ/16
1
Internal clock: count with φ/64
0
External clock: count with the TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: count with the TCLKB pin input
0
External clock: count with the TCLKC pin input
1
External clock: count with the TCLKD pin input
0
1
1
0
1
285
Channel 1:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
TPSC2 TPSC1
Bit 0:
TPSC0
Description
0
0
Internal clock: count with φ/1 (initial value)
1
Internal clock: count with φ/4
0
Internal clock: count with φ/16
1
Internal clock: count with φ/64
0
External clock: count with the TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: count with the TCLKB pin input
0
Internal clock: count with φ/256
1
Count with the TCNT2 overflow/underflow
0
1
1
0
1
Note: These settings are ineffective when channel 1 is in phase counting mode.
Channel 2:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
TPSC2 TPSC1
Bit 0:
TPSC0
Description
0
0
Internal clock: count with φ/1 (initial value)
1
Internal clock: count with φ/4
0
Internal clock: count with φ/16
1
Internal clock: count with φ/64
0
External clock: count with the TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: count with the TCLKB pin input
0
External clock: count with the TCLKC pin input
1
Internal clock: count with φ/1024
0
1
1
0
1
Note: These settings are ineffective when channel 2 is in phase counting mode.
286
Channel 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
TPSC2 TPSC1
Bit 0:
TPSC0
Description
0
0
Internal clock: count with φ/1 (initial value)
1
Internal clock: count with φ/4
0
Internal clock: count with φ/16
1
Internal clock: count with φ/64
0
Internal clock: count with φ/256
1
Internal clock: count with φ/1024
0
External clock: count with the TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: count with the TCLKB pin input
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
TPSC2 TPSC1
Bit 0:
TPSC0
Description
0
0
Internal clock: count with φ/1 (initial value)
1
Internal clock: count with φ/4
0
Internal clock: count with φ/16
1
Internal clock: count with φ/64
0
Internal clock: count with φ/256
1
Internal clock: count with φ/1024
0
External clock: count with the TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: count with the TCLKB pin input
0
1
1
0
1
Channel 4:
0
1
1
0
1
287
12.2.2
Timer Mode Register (TMDR)
The TMDR is an 8-bit read/write register that sets the operating mode for each channel. The MTU
has five TMDR registers, one for each channel. TMDR is initialized to H'C0 by a power-on reset
or the standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize TMDR.
Channels 0, 3, 4: TMDR0, TMDR3, TMDR4:
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
BFB
BFA
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Initial value:
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channels 1, 2: TMDR1, TMDR2:
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Initial value:
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 7, 6—Reserved: These bits are reserved. They always read as 1, and cannot be modified.
• Bit 5—Buffer Operation B (BFB): Designates whether to use the TGRB register for normal
operation, or buffer operation in combination with the TGRD register. When using TGRD as a
buffer register, no TGRD register input capture/output compares are generated.
This bit is reserved in channels 1 and 2, which have no TGRD registers. It is always read as 0,
and cannot be modified.
Bit 5: BFB
Description
0
TGRB operates normally (initial value)
1
TGRB and TGRD buffer operation
288
• Bit 4—Buffer Operation A (BFA): Designates whether to use the TGRA register for normal
operation, or buffer operation in combination with the TGRC register. When using TGRC as a
buffer register, no TGRC register input capture/output compares are generated.
This bit is reserved in channels 1 and 2, which have no TGRC registers. It is always read as 0,
and cannot be modified.
Bit 4: BFA
Description
0
TGRA operates normally (initial value)
1
TGRA and TGRC buffer operation
• Bits 3–0—Modes 3–0 (MD3–MD0): These bits set the timer operation mode.
Bit 3:
MD3
Bit 2:
MD2
Bit 1:
MD1
Bit 0:
MD0
Description
0
0
0
0
Normal operation (initial value)
1
Reserved (do not set)
0
PWM mode 1
1
PWM mode 2 * 1
0
Phase counting mode 1 * 2
1
Phase counting mode 2 * 2
0
Phase counting mode 3 * 2
1
Phase counting mode 4 * 2
0
Reset synchronous PWM mode * 3
1
Reserved (do not set)
0
Reserved (do not set)
1
Reserved (do not set)
0
Reserved (do not set)
1
Complementary PWM mode 1 (transmit at peak)* 3
0
Complementary PWM mode 2 (transmit at valley)*3
1
Complementary PWM mode 3 (transmit at peak and valley) *3
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Notes: *1 PWM mode 2 can not be set for channels 3, 4.
*2 Phase measurement mode can not be set for channels 0, 3, 4.
*3 Reset synchronous PWM mode, complementary PWM mode can only be set for
channel 3. When channel 3 is set to reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary
PWM mode, the channel 4 settings become ineffective and automatically conform to the
channel 3 settings. However, do not set channel 4 to reset synchronous PWM mode or
complementary PWM mode. Reset synchronous PWM mode and complementary PWM
mode can not be set for channels 0, 1, 2.
289
12.2.3
Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)
The TIOR is a register that controls the TGR. The MTU has eight TIOR registers, two each for
channels 0, 3, and 4, and one each for channels 1 and 2. TIOR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on
reset or the standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize TIOR.
Channels 0, 3, 4: TIOR0H, TIOR3H, TIOR4H
Channels 1, 2: TIOR1, TIOR2:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control B3–B0 (IOB3–IOB0): These bits set the TGRB register function.
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control A3–B0 (IOA3–IOA0): These bits set the TGRA register function.
Channels 0, 3, 4: TIOR0L, TIOR3L, TIOR4L:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: When the TGRC or TGRD registers are set for buffer operation, these settings become
ineffective and the operation is as a buffer register.
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control D3–D0 (IOD3–IOD0): These bits set the TGRD register function.
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control C3–C0 (IOC3–IOC0): These bits set the TGRC register function.
290
Channel 0 (TIOR0H Register):
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control B3–B0 (IOB3–IOB0): These bits set the TGR0B register function.
Bit 7:
IOB3
Bit 6: Bit 5:
IOB2 IOB1
Bit 4:
IOB0 Description
0
0
0
TGR0B
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR0B
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC0B pin
0
register
Capture
Input capture
1
input source
on TCNT1
0
is channel 1/
count up/count down
1
count clock
291
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control A3–A0 (IOA3–IOA0): These bits set the TGR0A register function.
Bit 3:
IOA3
Bit 2: Bit 1:
IOA2 IOA1
Bit 0:
IOA0 Description
0
0
0
TGR0A
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
292
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR0A
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC0A pin
0
register
Capture
Input capture
1
input source
on TCNT1
0
is channel 1/
count up/count down
1
count clock
Channel 0 (TIOR0L Register):
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control D3–D0 (IOD3–IOD0): These bits set the TGR0D register function.
Bit 7:
IOD3
Bit 6: Bit 5:
IOD2 IOD1
Bit 4:
IOD0 Description
0
0
0
TGR0D
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR0D
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC0D pin
0
register
Capture
Input capture
1
input source
on TCNT1
0
is channel 1/
count up/count down
1
count clock
Note: When the BFB bit of TMDR0 is set to 1 and TGR0D is being used as a buffer register, these
settings become ineffective and input capture/output compares do not occur.
293
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control C3–C0 (IOC3–IOC0): These bits set the TGR0C register function.
Bit 3:
IOC3
Bit 2: Bit 1:
IOC2 IOC1
Bit 0:
IOC0 Description
0
0
0
TGR0C
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR0C
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC0C pin
0
register
Capture
Input capture
1
input source
on TCNT1
0
is channel 1/
count up/count down
1
count clock
Note: When the BFA bit of TMDR0 is set to 1 and TGR0C is being used as a buffer register, these
settings become ineffective and input capture/output compares do not occur.
294
Channel 1 (TIOR1 Register):
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control B3–B0 (IOB3–IOB0): These bits set the TGR1B register function.
Bit 7:
IOB3
Bit 6: Bit 5:
IOB2 IOB1
Bit 4:
IOB0
Description
0
0
0
TGR1B
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR1B
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC1B pin
0
register
Capture input
Input capture
1
source TGR0C
on channel TGR0C
0
compare/match compare-match/input
1
input capture
capture generation
295
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control A3–A0 (IOA3–IOA0): These bits set the TGR1A register function.
Bit 3:
IOA3
Bit 2: Bit 1:
IOA2 IOA1
Bit 0:
IOA0 Description
0
0
0
TGR1A
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
296
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR1A
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC1A pin
0
register
Capture input
Input capture
1
source is TGR0A on channel 0/TGR0A
0
comparematch/input
1
capture
compare-match/input capture
generation
Channel 2 (TIOR2 Register):
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control B3–B0 (IOB3–IOB0): These bits set the TGR2B register function.
Bit 7:
IOB3
Bit 6: Bit 5:
IOB2 IOB1
Bit 4:
IOB0 Description
0
0
0
TGR2B
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR2B
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC2B pin
0
register
Input capture on rising edge
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
297
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control A3–A0 (IOA3–IOA0): These bits set the TGR2A register function.
Bit 3:
IOA3
Bit 2: Bit 1:
IOA2 IOA1
Bit 0:
IOA0 Description
0
0
0
TGR2A
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR2A
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC2A pin
0
register
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
298
Input capture on rising edge
Channel 3 (TIOR3H Register):
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control B3–B0 (IOB3–IOB0): These bits set the TGR3B register function.
Bit 7:
IOB3
Bit 6: Bit 5:
IOB2 IOB1
Bit 4:
IOB0 Description
0
0
0
TGR3B
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR3B
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC3B pin
0
register
Input capture on rising edge
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
299
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control A3–A0 (IOA3–IOA0): These bits set the TGR3A register function.
Bit 3:
IOA3
Bit 2: Bit 1:
IOA2 IOA1
Bit 0:
IOA0 Description
0
0
0
TGR3A
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR3A
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC3A pin
0
register
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
300
Input capture on rising edge
Channel 3 (TIOR3L Register):
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control D3–D0 (IOD3–IOD0): These bits set the TGR4D register function.
Bit 7:
IOD3
Bit 6: Bit 5:
IOD2 IOD1
Bit 4:
IOD0 Description
0
0
0
TGR3D
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR3D
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC3D pin
0
register
Input capture on rising edge
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
Note: When the BFB bit of TMDR3 is set to 1 and TGR3D is being used as a buffer register, these
settings become ineffective and input capture/output compares do not occur.
301
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control C3–C0 (IOC3–IOC0): These bits set the TGR4C register function.
Bit 3:
IOC3
Bit 2: Bit 1:
IOC2 IOC1
Bit 0:
IOC0 Description
0
0
0
TGR3C
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR3C
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC3C pin
0
register
Input capture on rising edge
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
Note: When the BFA bit of TMDR3 is set to 1 and TGR3C is being used as a buffer register, these
settings become ineffective and input capture/output compares do not occur.
302
Channel 4 (TIOR4H Register):
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control B3–B0 (IOB3–IOB0): These bits set the TGR4B register function.
Bit 7:
IOB3
Bit 6: Bit 5:
IOB2 IOB1
Bit 4:
IOB0 Description
0
0
0
TGR4B
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR4B
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC4B pin
0
register
Input capture on rising edge
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
303
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control A3–A0 (IOA3–IOA0): These bits set the TGR4A register function.
Bit 3:
IOA3
Bit 2: Bit 1:
IOA2 IOA1
Bit 0:
IOA0 Description
0
0
0
TGR4A
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR4A
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC4A pin
0
register
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
304
Input capture on rising edge
Channel 4 (TIOR4L Register):
• Bits 7–4—I/O Control D3–D0 (IOD3–IOD0): These bits set the TGR4D register function.
Bit 7:
IOD3
Bit 6: Bit 5:
IOD2 IOD1
Bit 4:
IOD0 Description
0
0
0
TGR4D
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR4D
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC4D pin
0
register
Input capture on rising edge
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
Note: When the BFB bit of TMDR4 is set to 1 and TGR4D is being used as a buffer register, these
settings become ineffective and input capture/output compares do not occur.
305
• Bits 3–0—I/O Control C3–C0 (IOC3–IOC0): These bits set the TGR4C register function.
Bit 3:
IOC3
Bit 2: Bit 1:
IOC2 IOC1
Bit 0:
IOC0 Description
0
0
0
TGR4C
Output disabled (initial value)
1
is an
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
compare
is 0
Toggle output on compare-match
0
register
Output disabled
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Initial
Output 0 on compare-match
0
output
Output 1 on compare-match
1
is 1
Toggle output on compare-match
0
TGR4C
Capture
Input capture on rising edge
1
is an
input source
Input capture on falling edge
0
input
is the
Input capture on both edges
1
capture
TIOC4C pin
0
register
Input capture on rising edge
1
Input capture on falling edge
0
Input capture on both edges
1
Note: When the BFA bit of TMDR4 is set to 1 and TGR4C is being used as a buffer register, these
settings become ineffective and input capture/output compares do not occur.
12.2.4
Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)
The TIER is an 8-bit register that controls the enable/disable of interrupt requests for each channel.
The MTU has five TIER registers, one each for channel. TIER is initialized to H'40 by a reset or
by standby mode.
Channel 0: TIER0:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
306
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TTGE
—
—
TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channels 1, 2: TIER1, TIER2:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TTGE
—
TCIEU
TCIEV
—
—
TGIEB
TGIEA
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TTGE
—
—
TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channels 3, 4: TIER3, TIER4:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
• Bit 7—A/D Conversion Start Request Enable (TTGE): Enables or disables generation of an
A/D conversion start request by a TGRA register input capture/compare-match.
Bit 7: TTGE
Description
0
Disable A/D conversion start requests (initial value)
1
Enable A/D conversion start request generation
• Bit 6—Reserved: This bit is reserved. It always reads as 0, and cannot be modified.
• Bit 5—Underflow Interrupt Enable (TCIEU): Enables or disables interrupt requests when the
underflow flag (TCFU) of the channel 1, 2 timer status register (TSR) is set to 1.
This bit is reserved for channels 0, 3, and 4. It always reads as 0. The write value should
always be 1.
Bit 5: TCIEU
Description
0
Disable UDF interrupt requests (TCIU) (initial value)
1
Enable UDF interrupt requests (TCIU)
• Bit 4—Overflow Interrupt Enable (TCIEV): Enables or disables interrupt requests when the
overflow flag TCFV of the timer status register (TSR) is set to 1.
Bit 4: TCIEV
Description
0
Disable TCFV interrupt requests (TCIV) (initial value)
1
Enable TCFV interrupt requests (TCIV)
307
• Bit 3—TGR Interrupt Enable D (TGIED): Enables or disables interrupt TGFD requests when
the TGFD bit of the channel 0, 3, 4 TSR register is set to 1.
This bit is reserved for channels 1 and 2. It always reads as 1. The write value should always
be 1.
Bit 3: TGIED
Description
0
Disable interrupt requests (TGID) due to the TGFD bit (initial value)
1
Enable interrupt requests (TGID) due to the TGFD bit
• Bit 2—TGR Interrupt Enable C (TGIEC): Enables or disables TGFC interrupt requests when
the TGFC bit of the channel 0, 3, 4 TSR register is set to 1.
This bit is reserved for channels 1 and 2. It always reads as 1. The write value should always
be 1.
Bit 2: TGIEC
Description
0
Disable interrupt requests (TGIC) due to the TGFC bit (initial value)
1
Enable interrupt requests (TGIC) due to the TGFC bit
• Bit 1—TGR Interrupt Enable B (TGIEB): Enables or disables TGFB interrupt requests when
the TGFB bit of the TSR register is set to 1.
Bit 1: TGIEB
Description
0
Disable interrupt requests (TGIB) due to the TGFB bit (initial value)
1
Enable interrupt requests (TGIB) due to the TGFB bit
• Bit 0—TGR Interrupt Enable A (TGIEA): Enables or disables TGFA interrupt requests when
the TGFA bit of the TSR register is set to 1.
Bit 0: TGIEA
Description
0
Disable interrupt requests (TGIA) due to the TGFA bit (initial value)
1
Enable interrupt requests (TGIA) due to the TGFA bit
308
12.2.5
Timer Status Register (TSR)
The timer status register (TSR) is an 8-bit register that indicates the status of each channel. The
MTU has five TSR registers, one each for channel. TSR is initialized to H'C0 by a power-on reset
or by standby mode. This register is not initialized by a manual reset.
Channel 0: TSR0:
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
TGFA
Initial value:
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 writes to clear the flags are possible.
Channels 1, 2: TSR1, TSR2:
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCFD
—
TCFU
TCFV
—
—
TGFB
TGFA
Initial value:
1
1
0
R
0
R/(W)*
0
R
0
R/(W)*
0
R/W:
R
R
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 writes to clear the flags are possible.
Channels 3, 4: TSR3, TSR4:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCFD
—
—
TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
TGFA
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
Note: * Only 0 writes to clear the flags are possible.
• Bit 7—Count Direction Flag (TCFD): This status flag indicates the count direction of the
channel 1, 2, 3, 4 TCNT counters.
This bit is reserved in channel 0. This bit always reads as 1. The write value should always be
1.
Bit 7: TCFD
Description
0
TCNT counts down
1
TCNT counts up (initial value)
• Bit 6—Reserved: This bit always reads as 1. The write value should always be 1.
309
• Bit 5—Underflow Flag (TCFU): This status flag indicates the occurrence of a channel 1, 2
TCNT counter underflow.
This bit is reserved in channels 0, 3, and 4. This bit always reads as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
Bit 5: TCFU
Description
0
Clear condition: With TCFU=1, a 0 write to TCFU after reading it (initial
value)
1
Set condition: When the TCNT value underflows (H'0000 → H'FFFF)
• Bit 4—Overflow Flag (TCFV): This status flag indicates the occurrence of a TCNT counter
overflow.
Bit 4: TCFV
Description
0
Clear condition: With TCFV =1, a 0 write to TCFV after reading it* 1
(initial value)
1
Set condition: When the TCNT value overflows (H'FFFF → H'0000)* 2
Notes: *1 For channel 4, this flag is cleared by DTC transfer due to TCFV.
*2 For channel 4, this flag is also set when the TCNT value underflows (H'0001 → H'0000)
in complementary PWM mode.
• Bit 3—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D (TGFD): This status flag indicates the
occurrence of a channel 0, 3, or 4 TGRD register input capture or compare-match.
This bit is reserved in channels 1 and 2. It always reads as 0. The write value should always be
0.
Bit 3: TGFD
Description
0
Clear condition: With TGFD = 1, a 0 write to TGFD following a read
(Cleared by DTC transfer due to TGFD) (initial value)
1
Set conditions:
310
•
When TGRD is functioning as an output compare register
(TCNT = TGRD)
•
When TGRD is functioning as input capture (the TCNT value is sent
to TGRD by the input capture signal)
• Bit 2—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C (TGFC): This status flag indicates the
occurrence of a channel 0, 3, or 4 TGRC register input capture or compare-match.
This bit is reserved for channels 1 and 2. It always reads as 0. The write value should always
be 0.
Bit 2: TGFC
Description
0
Clear condition:
With TGFC = 1, a 0 write to TGFC following a read (Cleared by DTC
transfer due to TGFC) (initial value)
1
Set conditions:
•
When TGRC is functioning as an output compare register
(TCNT = TGRC)
•
When TGRC is functioning as input capture (the TCNT value is sent
to TGRC by the input capture signal)
• Bit 1—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B (TGFB): This status flag indicates the
occurrence of a TGRB register input capture or compare-match.
Bit 1: TGFB
Description
0
Clear condition: With TGFB = 1, a 0 write to TGFB following a read
(Cleared by DTC transfer due to TGFB) (initial value)
1
Set conditions:
•
When TGRB is functioning as an output compare register
(TCNT = TGRB)
•
When TGRB is functioning as input capture (the TCNT value is sent
to TGRB by the input capture signal)
• Bit 0—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A (TGFA): This status flag indicates the
occurrence of a TGRA register input capture or compare-match.
Bit 0: TGFA
Description
0
Clear condition: With TGFA = 1, a 0 write to TGFA following a read
(Cleared by DMAC transfer due to TGFA) (initial value)
1
Set conditions:
•
When TGRA is functioning as an output compare register
(TCNT = TGRA)
•
When TGRA is functioning as input capture (the TCNT value is sent
to TGRA by the input capture signal)
311
12.2.6
Timer Counters (TCNT)
The timer counters (TCNT) are 16-bit counters, with one for each channel, for a total of five.
The TCNT are initialized to H'0000 by a power-on reset and when in standby mode. Manual reset
does not initialize TCNT. Accessing the TCNT counters in 8-bit units is prohibited. Always access
in 16-bit units.
Channel Abbreviation
Function
0
TCNT0
Increment counter
1
TCNT1
Increment/decrement counter * 1
2
TCNT2
Increment/decrement counter * 1
3
TCNT3
Increment/decrement counter * 2
4
TCNT4
Increment/decrement counter * 2
Notes: *1 Can only be used as an increment/decrement counter in phase counting mode, with
other channel overflow/underflow counting. It becomes an increment counter in all other
cases.
*2 Can only be used as an increment counter in complementary PWM mode. It becomes
an increment counter in all other cases.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
R/W:
312
12.2.7
Timer General Register (TGR)
Each timer general register (TGR) is a 16-bit register that can function as either an output compare
register or an input capture register. There are a total of sixteen TGR, four each for channels 0, 3,
and 4, and two each for channels 1 and 2. The TGRC and TGRD of channels 0, 3, and 4 can be set
to operate as buffer registers. The TGR register and buffer register combinations are TGRA with
TGRC, and TGRB with TGRD.
The TGRs are initialized to H'FFFF by a power-on reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does
not initialize TGR. Accessing of the TGRs in 8-bit units is disabled; they may only be accessed in
16-bit units.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
12.2.8
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Timer Start Register (TSTR)
The timer start register (TSTR) is an 8-bit read/write register that starts and stops the timer
counters (TCNT) of channels 0–4. TSTR is initialized to H'00 upon power-on reset or standby
mode. Manual reset does not initialize TSTR.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CST4
CST3
—
—
—
CST2
CST1
CST0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 7, 6, 2–0—Counter Start 4–0 (CST4–CST0): Select the start and stop of the timer counters
(TCNT). The counter start to channel and bit to channel correspondence are indicated in the
tables below.
313
Counter Start
Channel
CST4
Channel 4 (TCNT4)
CST3
Channel 3 (TCNT3)
CST2
Channel 2 (TCNT2)
CST1
Channel 1 (TCNT1)
CST0
Channel 0 (TCNT0)
Bit n: CSTn
Description
0
TCNTn count is halted (initial value)
1
TCNTn counts
Note: n = 4 to 0. However, CST4 is bit 7, CST3 is bit 6.
If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the TIOC pin in output status, the counter
stops, but the TIOC pin output compare output level is maintained. If a write is done to the
TIOR register while the CST bit is a 0, the pin output level is updated to the established
initial output value. In complementary PWM mode or reset sync PWM mode, when a 0 is
written to the CST bit of a TIOC pin in output mode during operation, it returns to the initial
output.
• Bits 5–3—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
12.2.9
Timer Synchro Register (TSYR)
The timer synchro register (TSYR) is an 8-bit read/write register that selects independent or
synchronous TCNT counter operation for channels 0–4. Channels for which 1 is set in the
corresponding bit will be synchronized. TSYR is initialized to H'00 upon power-on reset or
standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize TSYR.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SYNC4
SYNC3
—
—
—
SYNC2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
SYNC1 SYNC0
• Bits 7, 6, 2–0—Timer Synchronization 4–0 (SYNC4–SYNC0): Selects operation independent
of, or synchronized to, other channels. Synchronous operation allows synchronous clears due
to multiple TCNT synchronous presets and other channel counter clears. A minimum of two
channels must have SYNC bits set to 1 for synchronous operation. For synchronization
clearing, it is necessary to set the TCNT counter clear sources (the CCLR2–CCLR0 bits of the
TCR register), in addition to the SYNC bit. The counter start to channel and bit-to-channel
correspondence are indicated in the tables below.
314
Counter Start
Channel
SYNC4
Channel 4 (TCNT4)
SYNC3
Channel 3 (TCNT3)
SYNC2
Channel 2 (TCNT2)
SYNC1
Channel 1 (TCNT1)
SYNC0
Channel 0 (TCNT0)
Bit n: SYNCn
Description
0
Timer counter (TCNTn) independent operation (initial value)
(TCNTn preset/clear unrelated to other channels)
Timer counter synchronous operation* 1
1
TCNTn synchronous preset/ synchronous clear* 2 possible
Notes: n = 4 to 0. However, SYNC4 is bit 7, SYNC3 is bit 6.
*1 Minimum of two channel SYNC bits must be set to 1 for synchronous operation.
*2 TCNT counter clear sources (CCLR2–CCLR0 bits of the TCR register) must be set in
addition to the SYNC bit in order to have clear synchronization.
• Bits 5–3—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
12.2.10 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER)
The timer output master enable register (TOER) enables/disables output settings for output pins
TIOC4D, TIOC4C, TIOC3D, TIOC4B, TIOC4A, and TIOC3B. These pins do not output correctly
if the TOER bits have not been set. Set TOER of CH3 and CH2 prior to setting TIOR of CH3 and
CH4. The TOER is an 8-bit read/write register. The register is initialized to H'C0 by a power-on
reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize TOER.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
OE4D
OE4C
OE3D
OE4B
OE4A
OE3B
Initial value:
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 7–6—Reserved: These bits always read as 1. The write value should always be 1.
315
• Bit 5—Master Enable TIOC4D (OE4D): Enables or disables the TIOC4D pin MTU output.
Bit 5: OE4D
Description
0
Disable TIOC4D pin MTU output (initial value)
1
Enable TIOC4D pin MTU output
• Bit 4—Master Enable TIOC4C (OE4C): Enables or disables the TIOC4C pin MTU output.
Bit 4: OE4C
Description
0
Disable TIOC4C pin MTU output (initial value)
1
Enable TIOC4C pin MTU output
• Bit 3—Master Enable TIOC3D (OE3D): Enables or disables the TIOC3D pin MTU output.
Bit 3: OE3D
Description
0
Disable TIOC3D pin MTU output (initial value)
1
Enable TIOC3D pin MTU output
• Bit 2—Master Enable TIOC4B (OE4B): Enables or disables the TIOC4B pin MTU output.
Bit 2: OE4B
Description
0
Disable TIOC4B pin MTU output (initial value)
1
Enable TIOC4B pin MTU output
• Bit 1—Master Enable TIOC4A (OE4A): Enables or disables the TIOC4A pin MTU output.
Bit 1: OE4A
Description
0
Disable TIOC4A pin MTU output (initial value)
1
Enable TIOC4A pin MTU output
• Bit 0—Master Enable TIOC3B (OE3B): Enables or disables the TIOC3B pin MTU output.
Bit 0: OE3B
Description
0
Disable TIOC3B pin MTU output (initial value)
1
Enable TIOC3B pin MTU output
316
12.2.11 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR)
The timer output control register (TOCR) enables/disables PWM synchronized toggle output in
complementary PWM mode and reset sync PWM mode, and controls output level inversion of
PWM output. The TOCR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset or in the standby mode.
Manual reset does not initialize TOCR. These register settings are ineffective for anything other
than complementary PWM mode/reset-synchronized PWM mode.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
PSYE
—
—
—
—
OLSN
OLSP
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
• Bits 7, 5–2—Reserved: These bits always read as 1. The write value should always be 1.
• Bit 6—PWM Synchronous Output Enable (PSYE): Selects the enable/disable of toggle output
synchronized with the PWM period.
Bit 6: PSYE
Description
0
Toggle output synchronous with PWM period disabled (initial value)
1
Toggle output synchronous with PWM period enabled
• Bit 1—Output Level Select N (OLSN): Selects the reverse phase output level of the
complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode.
Compare Match Output
OLSN
Initial Output
Active Level
Increment Count
Decrement Count
0
High level *
Low level
High level
Low level (initial
value)
1
Low level *
High level
Low level
High level
Note: * The reverse phase waveform initial output value changes to active level after elapse of the
dead time after count start.
• Bit 0—Output Level Select P (OLSP): Selects the positive phase output level of the
complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode.
Compare Match Output
OLSP
Initial Output
Active Level
Increment Count
Decrement Count
0
High level
Low level
Low level
High level (initial value)
1
Low level
High level
High level
Low level
317
Figure 12.2 shows an example of complementary PWM mode output (1 phase) when OLSN = 1,
OLSP = 1.
TCNT3 and
TCNT4 values
TGR3A
TCNT4
TCNT3
TGR4A
TDDR
H'0000
Positive
phase output
Time
Compare match
output (up count)
Initial
output
Initial
output
Reverse
phase output
Compare match
output (down count)
Active level
Compare match
output (down count)
Compare match
output (up count)
Active
level
Active level
Figure 12.2 Complementary PWM Mode Output Level Example
12.2.12 Timer Gate Control Register (TGCR)
The timer gate control register (TGCR) is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the waveform
output necessary for brushless DC motor control in complementary PWM mode/resetsynchronized PWM mode. The TGCR is initialized to H'80 by a power-on reset or in the standby
mode. Manual reset does not initialize TGCR. These register settings are ineffective for anything
other than complementary PWM mode/reset-synchronized PWM mode.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
BDC
N
P
FB
WF
VF
UF
Initial value:
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bit 7—Reserved: This bit always reads as 1. The write value should always be 1.
318
• Bit 6—Brushless DC Motor (BDC): Selects gate signal output/chopping output function for
brushless DC motor control.
Bit 6: BDC
Description
0
Ordinary output (initial value)
1
Gate signal/chopping output for brushless DC motor
• Bit 5—Reverse Phase Output (N): Selects whether to output gate signals directly to the reverse
phase pin (TIOC3D, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D) output, or to output by chopping the gate signal
and the complementary PWM/reset-synchronized PWM output.
Bit 5: N
Description
0
Output gate signals directly to reverse phase pin output (initial value)
1
Output chopped gate signal and complementary PWM /resetsynchronized PWM output to reverse phase pin output
• Bit 4—Positive Phase Output (P): Selects whether to output gate signals directly to the positive
phase pin (TIOC3B, TIOC4A, and TIOC4B) output, or to output by chopping the gate signal
and the complementary PWM/reset-synchronized PWM output.
Bit 4: P
Description
0
Output gate signals directly to positive phase pin output (initial value)
1
Output chopped gate signal and complementary PWM /resetsynchronized PWM output to positive phase pin output
• Bit 3—Feedback Input (FB): Selects whether to use external input or register input for the
feedback input to generate gate signals.
Bit 3: FB
Description
0
Feedback input is external input (initial value)
(Input sources are channel 0 TGRA, TGRB, TGRC input capture signals)
1
Feedback input is register input (TGCR’s UF, VF, WF settings)
319
• Bits 2–0—Output Phase Switch 2–0 (WF, VF, UF): These bits set the positive phase/negative
phase output phase on or off state. The setting of these bits is valid only when the FB bit in this
register is set to 1. In this case, the setting of bits 2–0 is a substitute for external input.
Function
TIOC3B TIOC4A TIOC4B TIOC3D TIOC4C TIOC4D
Bit 2:
WF
Bit 1:
VF
Bit 0:
UF
U
Phase
V
Phase
W
Phase
U
Phase
V
Phase
W
Phase
0
0
0
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Initial value
1
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
—
0
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
—
1
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
—
0
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
—
1
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
—
0
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
—
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
—
1
1
0
1
12.2.13 Timer Subcounter (TCNTS)
The timer subcounter (TCNTS) is a 16-bit read-only counter that is used only in complementary
PWM mode. The TCNTS counter is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset or in standby mode.
Manual reset does not initialize TCNTS. Accessing the TCNTS counter in 8-bit units is
prohibited. Always access in 16-bit units.
Bit:
320
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
12.2.14 Timer Dead Time Data Register (TDDR)
The timer dead time data register (TDDR) is a 16-bit register, used only in complementary PWM
mode, that specifies the TCNT3 and TCNT4 counter offset values. In complementary PWM mode,
when the TCNT3 and TCNT4 counters are cleared and then restarted, the TDDR register value is
loaded into the TCNT3 counter and the count operation starts. The TDDR register is initialized to
H'FFFF by a power-on reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize TDDR.
Accessing the TDDR in 8-bit units is prohibited. Always access in 16-bit units.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
R/W:
12.2.15 Timer Period Data Register (TCDR)
The timer period data register (TCDR) is a 16-bit register used only in complementary PWM
mode. Set the PWM carrier sync value as the TCDR register value. This register is constantly
compared with the TCNTS counter in complementary PWM mode, and when a match occurs the
TCNTS counter switches direction (decrement to increment).
The TCDR register is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does not
initialize TCDR. Accessing the TCDR in 8-bit units is prohibited. Always access in 16-bit units.
Bit:
Initial value:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W:
R/W:
321
12.2.16 Timer Period Buffer Register (TCBR)
The timer period buffer register (TCBR) is a 16-bit register used only in complementary PWM
mode. It functions as a buffer register for the TCDR register. The TCBR register values are
transferred to the TCDR register with the transfer timing established in the TMDR register. The
TCBR register is initialized to H'FFFF by a power-on reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does
not initialize TCBR. Accessing the TCBR in 8-bit units is prohibited. Always access in 16-bit
units.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
12.3
Bus Master Interface
12.3.1
16-Bit Registers
The timer counters (TCNT) and general registers (TGR) are 16-bit registers. A 16-bit data bus to
the bus master enables 16-bit read/writes. 8-bit read/write is not possible. Always access in 16-bit
units. Figure 12.3 shows an example of 16-bit register access operation.
Internal data bus
Upper 8 bits
Module data bus
Bus
interface
Bus master
Lower 8 bits
TCNTH
TCNTL
Figure 12.3 16-Bit Register Access Operation (Bus Master ↔ TCNT (16 Bit))
322
12.3.2
8-Bit Registers
All registers other than the TCNT and general registers (TGR) are 8-bit registers. These are
connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, so 16-bit read/writes and as 8-bit read/writes are both
possible (figures 12.4 ,12.5, and 12.6).
Internal data bus
Upper 8 bits
Module data bus
Bus
interface
Bus master
Lower 8 bits
TCR
Figure 12.4 8-Bit Register Access Operation (Bus Master ↔ TCR (Upper 8 Bits))
Internal data bus
Upper 8 bits
Module data bus
Bus
interface
Bus master
Lower 8 bits
TMDR
Figure 12.5 8-Bit Register Access Operation (Bus Master ↔ TMDR (Lower 8 Bits))
Internal data bus
Upper 8 bits
Module data bus
Bus
interface
Bus master
Lower 8 bits
TCR
TMDR
Figure 12.6 8-Bit Register Access Operation (Bus Master ↔ TCR, TMDR (16 Bit))
323
12.4
Operation
12.4.1
Overview
The operation modes are described below.
Ordinary Operation: Each channel has a timer counter (TCNT) and general register (TGR). The
TCNT is an upcounter and can also operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter or external
event counter. General registers (TGR) can be used as output compare registers or input capture
registers.
Synchronized Operation: The TCNT of a channel set for synchronized operation does a
synchronized preset. When any TCNT of a channel operating in the synchronized mode is
rewritten, the TCNTs of other channels are simultaneously rewritten as well. The timer
synchronization bits of the TSYR registers of multiple channels set for synchronous operation can
be set to clear the TCNTs simultaneously.
Buffer Operation: When TGR is an output compare register, the buffer register value of the
corresponding channel is transferred to the TGR when a compare-match occurs. When TGR is an
input capture register, the TCNT counter value is transferred to the TGR when an input capture
occur simultaneously the value previously stored in the TGR is transferred to the buffer register.
Cascade Connection Operation: The channel 1 and channel 2 counters (TCNT1 and TCNT2)
can be connected together to operate as a 32-bit counter.
PWM Mode: In PWM mode, a PWM waveform is output. The output level can be set by the
TIOR register. Each TGR can be set for PWM waveform output with a duty cycle between 0%
and 100%.
Phase Counting Mode: In phase counting mode, the phase differential between two clocks input
from the channel 1 and channel 2 external clock input pins is detected and the TCNT counter
operates as an up/down counter. In phase counting mode, the corresponding TCLK pins become
clock inputs and TCNT functions as an up/down counter. It can be used as a two-phase encoder
pulse input.
Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode: Three-phase positive and negative PWM waveforms can be
obtained using channels 3 and 4 (the three phases of the PWM waveform share a transition point
on one side). When set for reset-synchronized PWM mode, TGR3A, TGR3B, TGR4A, and
TGR4B automatically become output compare registers. The TIOC3A, TIOC3B, TIOC4A,
TIOC4B, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D pins also become PWM output pins, and TCNT3 and TCNT4
become upcounters. TCNT4, TGR4A, and TGR4B are isolated from TCNT4.
324
Complementary PWM Mode: Three-phase complementary positive and negative PWM
waveforms whose positive and negative phases do not overlap can be obtained using channels 3
and 4. When set for complementary PWM mode, TGR3A, TGR3B, TGR4A, and TGR4B become
output compare registers. The TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4B, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D pins
also automatically become PWM output pins while TCNT3 and TCNT4 become up/down
counters.
12.4.2
Basic Functions
Always select MTU external pin set function using the pin function controller (PFC).
Counter Operation: When a start bit (CST0–CST4) in the timer start register (TSTR) is set to 1,
the corresponding timer counter (TCNT) starts counting. There are two counting modes: a freerunning mode and a periodic mode.
To select the counting operation (figure 12.7):
1. Set bits TPSC2–TPSC0 in the TCR to select the counter clock. At the same time, set bits
CKEG1 and CKEG0 in the TCR to select the desired edge of the input clock.
2. To operate as a periodic counter, set the CCLR2–CCLR0 bits in the TCR to select TGR as a
clearing source for the TCNT.
3. Set the TGR selected in step 2 as an output compare register using the timer I/O control
register (TIOR).
4. Write the desired cycle value in the TGR selected in step 2.
5. Set the CST bit in the TSTR to 1 to start counting.
325
Counting mode selection
Select counter clock
1
Free-running counter
Periodic counter
Select counter
clear source
2
Select output
compare register
3
Set period
4
Start counting
5
Periodic counter
Start counting
5
Free-running counter
Figure 12.7 Procedure for Selecting the Counting Operation
Free-Running Counter Operation Example: A reset of the MTU timer counters (TCNT) leaves
them all in the free-running mode. When a bit in the TSTR is set to 1, the corresponding timer
counter operates as a free-running counter and begins to increment. When the count overflows
from H'FFFF–H'0000, the TCFV bit in the timer status register (TSR) is set to 1. If the TCIEV bit
in the timer’s corresponding timer interrupt enable register (TIER) is set to 1, the MTU will make
an interrupt request to the interrupt controller. After the TCNT overflows, counting continues from
H'0000. Figure 12.8 shows an example of free-running counter operation.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'0000
Time
CST bit
TCFV
Figure 12.8 Free-Running Counter Operation
326
Periodic Counter Operation Example: Periodic counter operation is obtained for a given
channel’s TCNT by selecting compare-match as a TCNT clear source. Set the TGR register for
period setting to output compare register and select counter clear upon compare-match using the
CCLR2–CCLR0 bits of the timer control register (TCR). After these settings, the TCNT begins
incrementing as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit of TSTR is set to 1. When the
count matches the TGR register value, the TGF bit in the TSR is set to 1 and the counter is cleared
to H'0000. If the TGIE bit of the corresponding TIER is set to 1 at this point, the MTU will make
an interrupt request to the interrupt controller. After the compare-match, TCNT continues counting
from H'0000. Figure 12.9 shows an example of periodic counting.
TCNT value
TGR
Counter cleared by
TGR compare match
H'0000
Time
CST bit
Flag cleared by software
or DTC/DMAC activation
TGF
Figure 12.9 Periodic Counter Operation
Compare-Match Waveform Output Function: The MTU can output 0 level, 1 level, or toggle
output from the corresponding output pins upon compare-matches.
Procedure for selecting the compare-match waveform output operation (figure 12.10):
1. Set the TIOR to select 0 output or 1 output for the initial value, and 0 output, 1 output, or
toggle output for compare-match output. The TIOC pin will output the set initial value until the
first compare-match occurs.
2. Set a value in the TGR to select the compare-match timing.
3. Set the CST bit in the TSTR to 1 to start counting.
327
Output selection
Select waveform
output mode
1
Select
output timing
2
Start counting
3
Figure 12.10 Procedure for Selecting Compare Match Waveform Output Operation
Waveform Output Operation (0 Output/1 Output): Figure 12.11 shows 0 output/1 output. In
the example, TCNT is a free-running counter, 1 is output upon compare-match A and 0 is output
upon compare-match B. When the pin level matches the set level, the pin level does not change.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
TGRA
TGRB
H'0000
TIOCA
Time
Does not change
Does not change
TIOCB
1 output
0 output
Does not change
Does not change
Figure 12.11 Example of 0 Output/1 Output
Waveform Output Operation (Toggle Output): Figure 12.12 shows the toggle output. In the
example, the TCNT operates as a periodic counter cleared by compare-match B, with toggle
output at both compare-match A and compare-match B.
328
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGRB compare match
H'FFFF
TGRB
TGRA
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
Toggle
output
TIOCB
Toggle
output
Figure 12.12 Example of Toggle Output
Input Capture Function: In the input capture mode, the TCNT value is transferred into the TGR
register when the input edge is detected at the input capture/output compare pin (TIOC).
Detection can take place on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges. Channels 0 and 1 can use
other channel counter input clocks or compare-match signals as input capture sources.
The procedure for selecting the input capture operation (figure 12.13) is:
1. Set the TIOR to select the input capture function of the TGR, then select the input capture
source, and rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge.
2. Set the CST bit in the TSTR to 1 to start the TCNT counting.
Input selection
Select input-capture input
1
Start counting
2
Input capture operation
Figure 12.13 Procedure for Selecting Input Capture Operation
329
Input Capture Operation: Figure 12.14 shows input capture. The falling edge of TIOCB and
both edges of TIOCA are selected as input capture input edges. In the example, TCNT is set to
clear at the input capture of the TGRB register.
Counter cleared
by TIOCB input
(falling edge)
TCNT value
H'0180
H'0160
H'0010
H'0005
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0005
H'0160
H'0010
TIOCB
TGRB
H'0180
Figure 12.14 Input Capture Operation
12.4.3
Synchronous Operation
In the synchronizing mode, two or more timer counters can be rewritten simultaneously
(synchronized preset). Multiple timer counters can also be cleared simultaneously using TCR
settings (synchronized clear).
The synchronizing mode can increase the number of TGR registers for a single time base. All five
channels can be set for synchronous operation.
330
Procedure for Selecting the Synchronizing Mode (Figure 12.15):
1. Set 1 in the SYNC bit of the timer synchro register (TSYR) to use the corresponding channel
in the synchronizing mode.
2. When a value is written in the TCNT in any of the synchronized channels, the same value is
simultaneously written in the TCNT in the other channels.
3. Set the counter to clear with output compare/input capture using bits CCLR2–CCLR0 in the
TCR.
4. Set the counter clear source to synchronized clear using the CCLR2–CCLR0 bits of the TCR.
5. Set the CST bits for the corresponding channels in the TSTR to 1 to start counting in the
TCNT.
Select
synchronizing mode
Set synchronizing
mode
1
Synchronized preset
Set TCNT
Synchronized preset
Synchronized clear
2
Channel that
generated clear
source?
No
Yes
Select counter
clear source
3
Set counter
synchronous clear
4
Start counting
5
Start counting
5
Counter clear
Synchronized clear
Figure 12.15 Procedure for Selecting Synchronizing Operation
331
Synchronized Operation: Figure 12.16 shows an example of synchronized operation. Channels
0, 1, and 2 are set to synchronized operation and PWM mode 1. Channel 0 is set for a counter
clear upon compare-match with TGR0B. Channels 1 and 2 are set for synchronous counter clears
by synchronous presets and TGR0B register compare-matches. Accordingly, a three-phase PWM
waveform with the data set in the TGR0B register as its PWM period is output from the TIOC0A,
TIOC1A, and TIOC2A pins.
See section 12.4.6, PWM Mode, for details on the PWM mode.
TCNT0–TCNT2
values
Synchronized clear on TGR0B compare match
TGR0B
TGR1B
TGR0A
TGR2B
TGR1A
TGR2A
H'0000
Time
TIOC0A
TIOC1A
TIOC2A
Figure 12.16 Synchronized Operation Example
332
12.4.4
Buffer Operation
Buffer operation is a function of channels 0, 3, and 4. TGRC and TGRD can be used as buffer
registers. Table 12.5 shows the register combinations for buffer operation.
Table 12.5 Register Combinations
Channel
General Register
Buffer Register
0
TGR0A
TGR0C
TGR0B
TGR0D
TGR3A
TGR3C
TGR3B
TGR3D
TGR4A
TGR4C
TGR4B
TGR4D
3
4
The buffer operation differs, depending on whether the TGR has been set as an input capture
register or an output compare register.
When TGR Is an Output Compare Register: When a compare-match occurs, the corresponding
channel buffer register value is transferred to the general register. Figure 12.17 shows an example.
Compare match signal
General
register
Buffer
register
Comparator
TCNT
Figure 12.17 Compare Match Buffer Operation
When TGR Is an Input Capture Register: When an input capture occurs, the timer counter
(TCNT) value is transferred to the general register (TGR), and the value that had been held up to
that time in the TGR is transferred to the buffer register (figure 12.18).
Input capture signal
Buffer
register
General
register
TCNT
Figure 12.18 Input Capture Buffer Operation
333
Procedure for Setting Buffer Mode (Figure 12.19):
1. Use the timer I/O control register (TIOR) to set the TGR as either an input capture or output
compare register.
2. Use the timer mode register (TMDR) BFA, and BFB bits to set the TGR for buffer mode.
3. Set the CST bit in the TSTR to 1 to start the count operation.
Buffer mode
Select TGR function
1
Select buffer mode
2
Start counting
3
Buffer mode
Figure 12.19 Buffer Operation Setting Procedure
Buffer Operation Examples—when TGR Is an Output Compare Register: Figure 12.20
shows an example of channel 0 set to PWM mode 1, and the TGRA and TGRC registers set for
buffer operation.
The TCNT counter is cleared by a compare-match B, and the output is a 1 upon compare-match A
and 0 output upon compare-match B. Because buffer mode is selected, a compare-match A
changes the output, and the buffer register TGRC value is simultaneously transferred to the
general register TGRA. This operation is repeated with each occurrence of a compare-match A.
See section 12.4.6, PWM Mode, for details on the PWM mode.
334
TCNT value
TGR0B
H'0520
H'0450
H'0200
TGR0A
H'0000
Time
H'0200
TGR0C
Transfer
TGR0A
H'0450
H'0200
H'0520
H'0450
TIOC0A
Figure 12.20 Buffer Operation Example (Output Compare Register)
Buffer Operation Examples—when TGR Is an Input Capture Register: Figure 12.21 shows
an example of TGRA set as an input capture register with the TGRA and TGRB registers set for
buffer operation.
The TCNT counter is cleared by a TGRA register input capture, and the TIOCA pin input capture
input edge is selected as both rising and falling edge. Because buffer mode is selected, an input
capture A causes the TCNT counter value to be stored in the TGRA register, and the value that
was stored in the TGRA up until that time is simultaneously transferred to the TGRC register.
TCNT value
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
TGRA
TGRC
H'0532
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0F07
Figure 12.21 Buffer Operation Example (Input Capture Register)
335
12.4.5
Cascade Connection Mode
Cascade connection mode is a function that connects the 16-bit counters of two channels together
to act as a 32-bit counter.
This function operates by using the TPSC2–TPSC0 bits of the TCR register to set the channel 1
counter clock to count by TCNT2 counter overflow/underflow.
Note: When channel 1 is set to phase counting mode, the counter clock settings become
ineffective.
Table 12.6 shows the cascade connection combinations.
Table 12.6 Cascade Connection Combinations
Combination
Upper 16 Bits
Lower 16 Bits
Channel 1, channel 2
TCNT1
TCNT2
Procedure for Setting Cascade Connection Mode (Figure 12.22):
1. Set the TPSC2–TPSC 0 bits of the channel 1 timer control register (TCR) to B'111 to select
“count by TCNT2 overflow/underflow.”
2. Set the CST bits corresponding to the upper and lower 16 bits in the TSTR to 1 to start the
count operation.
Cascade connection operation
Select cascade connection
1
Start counting
2
Cascade connection operation
Figure 12.22 Procedure for Selecting Cascade Connection Mode
336
Cascade Connection Operation Examples—Phase Counting Mode: Figure 12.23 shows an
example of operation when the TCNT1 counter is set to count on TCNT2 overflow/underflow and
channel 2 is set to phase counting mode.
The TCNT1 counter increments with a TCNT2 counter overflow and decrements with a TCNT2
underflow.
TCLKC
TCLKD
TCNT2
FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000
TCNT1
0000
0001
0002
0001
0001
0000
FFFF
0000
Figure 12.23 Cascade Connection Operation Example (Phase Counting Mode)
12.4.6
PWM Mode
PWM mode outputs the various PWM waveforms from output pins. Output levels of 0 output, 1
output, or toggle output can be selected as the output level for the compare-match of each TGR.
A period can be set for a register by using the TGR compare-match as a counter clear source. All
five channels can be independently set to PWM mode. Synchronous operation is also possible.
There are two PWM modes:
• PWM mode 1
Generates PWM output using the TGRA and TGRB registers, and TGRC and TGRD registers
as pairs. The initial output values are those established in the TGRA and TGRC registers.
When the values set in TGR registers being used as a pair are equal, output values will not
change even if a compare-match occurs.
A maximum of 8-phase PWM output is possible for PWM mode 1.
• PWM mode 2
Generates PWM output using one TGR register as a period register and another as a duty cycle
register. The output value of each pin upon a counter clear is the initial value established by the
TIOR register. When the values set in the period register and duty register are equal, output
values will not change even if a compare-match occurs. PWM mode 2 can be set only for
channels 0, 1, and 2.
337
Table 12.7 lists the combinations of PWM output pins and registers.
Table 12.7 Combinations of PWM Output Pins and Registers
Output Pin
Channel
Register
PWM Mode 1
PWM Mode 2
0 (AB pair)
TGR0A
TGR0B
TIOC0A
TIOC 0A
TIOC 0B
0 (CD pair)
TGR0C
TGR0D
TIOC0C
TIOC 0C
TIOC 0D
1
TGR1A
TGR1B
TIOC1A
TIOC 1A
TIOC 1B
2
TGR2A
TGR2B
TIOC2A
TIOC 2A
TIOC 2B
3 (AB pair)
TGR3A
TGR3B
TIOC3A
Setting not possible
3 (CD pair)
TGR3C
TGR3D
TIOC3C
4 (AB pair)
TGR4A
TGR4B
TIOC4A
4 (CD pair)
TGR4C
TGR4D
TIOC4C
Note: PWM output of the period setting TGR is not possible in PWM mode 2.
Procedure for Selecting the PWM Mode (Figure 12.24):
1. Set bits TPSC2–TPSC0 in the TCR to select the counter clock source. At the same time, set
bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in the TCR to select the desired edge of the input clock.
2. Set bits CCLR2–CCLR0 in the TCR to select the TGR to be used as a counter clear source.
3. Set the period in the TGR selected in step 2, and the duty cycle in another TGR.
4. Using the timer I/O control register (TIOR), set the TGR selected in step 3 to act as an output
compare register, and select the initial value and output value.
5. Set the MD3–MD 0 bits in TMDR to select the PWM mode.
6. Set the CST bit in the TSTR to 1 to let the TCNT start counting.
338
PWM mode
Select counter clock
1
Select counter clear source
2
Select waveform output level
3
Set TGR
4
Select PWM mode
5
Start counting
6
PWM mode
Figure 12.24 Procedure for Selecting the PWM Mode
PWM Mode Operation Examples—PWM Mode 1 (Figure 12.25): A TGRA register comparematch is used as a TCNT counter clear source, the TGRA register initial output value and output
compare output value are both 0, and the TGRB register output compare output value is a 1. In this
example, the value established in the TGRA register becomes the period and the value established
in the TGRB register becomes the duty cycle.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGRA compare match
TGRA
TGRB
Time
H'0000
TIOCA
Figure 12.25 PWM Mode Operation Example (Mode 1)
339
PWM Mode Operation Examples—PWM Mode 2 (Figure 12.26): Channels 0 and 1 are set for
synchronous operation, TGR1B register compare-match is used as a TCNT counter clear source,
the other TGR register initial output value is 0 and output compare output value is 1, and a 5-phase
PWM waveform is output. In this example, the value established in the TGR1B register becomes
the period and the value established in the other TGR register becomes the duty cycle.
TCNT value
Counter cleared on TGR1B compare match
TGR1B
TGR1A
TGR0D
TGR0C
TGR0B
TGR0A
H'0000
Time
TIOC0A
TIOC0B
TIOC0C
TIOC0D
TIOC1A
Figure 12.26 PWM Mode Operation Example (Mode 2)
0% Duty Cycle: Figure 12.27 shows an example of a 0% duty cycle PWM waveform output in
PWM mode.
TCNT value
TGRB rewrite
TGRA
TGRB
TGRB rewrite
TGRB rewrite
Time
TIOCA
0% duty cycle
Figure 12.27 PWM Mode Operation Example (0% Duty Cycle)
340
100% Duty Cycle: Figure 12.28 shows an example of a 100% duty cycle PWM waveform output
in PWM mode.
In PWM mode, when setting cycle = duty cycle the output waveform does not change, nor is there
a change of waveform for the first pulse immediately after clearing the counter.
TCNT value
TGRA
TGRB rewrite
Output does not change if period register and duty
cycle register compare matches occur simultaneously
TGRB rewrite
TGRB
TGRB rewrite
Time
100% duty cycle
TIOCA
TCNT value
Output does not change if period register and duty
cycle register compare matches occur simultaneously
TGRB rewrite
TGRA
TGRB rewrite
TGRB
TGRB rewrite
Time
100% duty cycle
TIOCA
0% duty cycle
Figure 12.28 PWM Mode Operation Example (100% Duty Cycle)
12.4.7
Phase Counting Mode
The phase counting mode detects the phase differential of two external clock inputs and counts the
TCNT counter up or down. This mode can be set for channels 1 and 2.
When set in the phase counting mode, an external clock is selected for the counter input clock,
regardless of the settings of the TPSC2–TPSC0 bits of TCR or the CKEG1 and CKEG0 bits.
TCNT also becomes an up/down counter. Since the TCR CCLR1/CCLR0 bits, TIOR, TIER, and
TGR functions are all enabled, input capture and compare-match functions and interrupt sources
can be used.
When the TCNT counter is incrementing, an overflow sets the TSR register TCFV (overflow
flag). When it is decrementing, an underflow sets the TCFU (underflow flag).
341
The TSR register TCFD bit is a count direction flag. Read the TCFD flag to confirm whether the
TCNT is incrementing or decrementing.
Table 12.8 shows the correspondence between channels and external clock pins.
Table 12.8 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins
Channel
A Phase Input Pin
B Phase Input Pin
1
TCLKA
TCLKB
2
TCLKC
TCLKD
Procedure for Selecting the Phase Counting Mode (Figure 12.29):
1. Set the MD3–MD0 bits of the timer mode register (TMDR) to select the phase counting mode.
2. Set the CST bit of the timer start register (TSTR) to 1 to start the count.
Phase counting mode
Select phase counting mode
1
Start counting
2
Phase counting mode
Figure 12.29 Procedure for Selecting the Phase Counting Mode
Phase Counting Operation Examples: The phase counting mode uses the phase difference
between two external clocks to increment/decrement the TCNT counter. There are 4 modes,
depending on the count conditions.
Phase Counting Mode 1: Figure 12.30 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation.
Table 12.9 lists the up counting and down counting conditions for the TCNT.
342
TCLKA (channel 1)
TCLKC (channel 2)
TCLKB (channel 1)
TCLKD (channel 2)
TCNT value
Increment
Decrement
Time
Figure 12.30 Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation
Table 12.9 Phase Count Mode 1 Up/Down Counting Conditions
TCLKA (Channel 1)
TCLKC (Channel 2)
TCLKB (Channel 1)
TCLKD (Channel 2)
Operation
1 (high level)
Rising edge
Increment
0 (low level)
Falling edge
Rising edge
0 (low level)
Falling edge
1 (high level)
1 (high level)
Falling edge
0 (low level)
Rising edge
Rising edge
1 (high level)
Falling edge
0 (low level)
Decrement
343
Phase Count Mode 2: Figure 12.31 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation. Table
12.10 lists the up counting and down counting conditions for the TCNT.
TCLKA (Channel 1)
TCLKC (Channel 2)
TCLKB (Channel 1)
TCLKD (Channel 2)
TCNT value
Increment
Decrement
Time
Figure 12.31 Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation
Table 12.10 Phase Count Mode 2 Up/Down Counting Conditions
TCLKA (Channel 1)
TCLKC (Channel 2)
TCLKB (Channel 1)
TCLKD (Channel 2)
Operation
1 (high level)
Rising edge
Does not count (don’t care)
0 (low level)
Falling edge
Does not count (don’t care)
Rising edge
0 (low level)
Does not count (don’t care)
Falling edge
1 (high level)
Increment
1 (high level)
Falling edge
Does not count (don’t care)
0 (low level)
Rising edge
Does not count (don’t care)
Rising edge
1 (high level)
Does not count (don’t care)
Falling edge
0 (low level)
Decrement
344
Phase Count Mode 3: Figure 12.32 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation. Table
12.11 lists the up counting and down counting conditions for the TCNT.
TCLKA (channel 1)
TCLKC (channel 2)
TCLKB (channel 1)
TCLKD (channel 2)
TCNT value
Increment
Decrement
Time
Figure 12.32 Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation
Table 12.11 Phase Count Mode 3 Up/Down Counting Conditions
TCLKA (Channel 1)
TCLKC (Channel 2)
TCLKB (Channel 1)
TCLKD (Channel 2)
Operation
1 (high level)
Rising edge
Does not count (don’t care)
0 (low level)
Falling edge
Does not count (don’t care)
Rising edge
0 (low level)
Does not count (don’t care)
Falling edge
1 (high level)
Increment
1 (high level)
Falling edge
Decrement
0 (low level)
Rising edge
Does not count (don’t care)
Rising edge
1 (high level)
Does not count (don’t care)
Falling edge
0 (low level)
Does not count (don’t care)
345
Phase Count Mode 4: Figure 12.33 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation. Table
12.12 lists the up counting and down counting conditions for the TCNT.
TCLKA (Channel 1)
TCLKC (Channel 2)
TCLKB (Channel 1)
TCLKD (Channel 2)
TCNT value
Increment
Decrement
Time
Figure 12.33 Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation
Table 12.12 Phase Count Mode 4 Up/Down Counting Conditions
TCLKA (Channel 1)
TCLKC (Channel 2)
TCLKB (Channel 1)
TCLKD (Channel 2)
Operation
1 (high level)
Rising edge
Increment
0 (low level)
Falling edge
Rising edge
0 (low level)
Falling edge
1 (high level)
1 (high level)
Falling edge
0 (low level)
Rising edge
Rising edge
1 (high level)
Falling edge
0 (low level)
Does not count (don’t care)
Decrement
Does not count (don’t care)
Phase Counting Mode Application Example: Figure 12.34 shows an example where channel 1
is set to phase counting mode and is teamed with channel 0 to input a two-phase encoder pulse for
a servo motor to accurately detect position and speed.
Channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse A phase and B phase are input to
the TCLKA and TCLKB pins.
Channel 0 is set so that the TCNT counter is cleared on a TGR0C register compare-match, and the
TGR0A and TGR0C registers are used with the compare-match function to establish the speed
control and position control periods. The TGR0B register is used with the input capture function,
and the TGR0B and TGR0D registers are employed for buffer operation. The channel 1 counter
346
input clock is used as the TGR0B register input capture source, and a pulse width of four times the
2-phase encoder pulse is detected.
The channel 1 TGR1A and TGR1B registers are set for the input capture function, the channel 0
TGR0A and TGR0C register compare-match is used as an input capture source, and all of the
control period increment and decrement values are stored.
Channel 1
TCLKA
TCLKB
Edge
detection
circuit
TCNT1
TGR1A (speed
period capture)
TGR1B (position
period capture)
TCNT0
TGR0A (speed
control period)
+
–
TGR0C (position
control period)
+
–
TGR0B (pulse
width capture)
TGR0D (buffer
operation)
Channel 0
Figure 12.34 Phase Count Mode Application Example
347
12.4.8
Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode
In the reset-synchronized PWM mode, three-phase output of positive and negative PWM
waveforms that share a common wave transition point can be obtained using channels 3 and 4.
When set for reset-synchronized PWM mode, the TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4C,
TIOC4B, and TIOC4D pins become PWM output pins and TCNT3 becomes an upcounter.
Table 12.13 shows the PWM output pins used. Table 12.14 shows the settings of the registers.
Table 12.13 Output Pins for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode
Channel
Output Pin
Description
3
TIOC3B
PWM output 1
TIOC3D
PWM output 1' (negative-phase waveform of PWM output 1)
TIOC4A
PWM output 2
TIOC4C
PWM output 2' (negative-phase waveform of PWM output 2)
TIOC4B
PWM output 3
TIOC4D
PWM output 3' (negative-phase waveform of PWM output 3)
4
Table 12.14 Register Settings for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode
Register Description of Contents
TCNT3
Initial setting of H'0000
TCNT4
Initial setting of H'0000
TGR3A
Set count cycle for TCNT3
TGR3B
Sets the turning point for PWM waveform output by the TIOC3B and TIOC3D pins
TGR4A
Sets the turning point for PWM waveform output by the TIOC4A and TIOC4C pins
TGR4B
Sets the turning point for PWM waveform output by the TIOC4B and TIOC4D pins
Procedure for Selecting the Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode (Figure 12.35):
1. Clear the CST3 and CST4 bits in the TSTR to 0 to halt TCNT3 and TCNT4. The resetsynchronized PWM mode must be set up while TCNT3 and TCNT4 are halted.
2. Set bits TPSC2–TPSC0 and CKEG1 and CKEG0 in the TCR to select the counter clock and
clock edge for channel 3.
3. Set bits CCLR2–CCLR0 in the TCR3 to select TGRA compare-match as a counter clear
source.
348
4. When performing brushless DC motor control, set bit BDC in the timer gate control register
(TGCR) and set the feedback signal input source and output chopping or gate signal direct
output.
5. Reset TCNT3 and TCNT4 to H'0000.
6. TGR3A is the period register. Set the waveform period value in TGR3A. Set the transition
times of the PWM output waveforms in TGR3B, TGR4A, and TGR4B. Set times within the
compare-match range of TCNT3. X ≤ TGR3A (X: set value). With X = TGRA (cycle = duty
cycle), the output waveform goes into toggle operation at the point where TCNT3 = TGR3A =
X.
7. Select enabling/disabling of toggle output synchronized with the PMW cycle using bit PSYE
in the timer output control register (TOCR), and set the PWM output level with bits OLSP and
OLSN.
8. Set bits MD3–MD0 in TMDR3 to B'1000 to select the reset-synchronized PWM mode.
TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4B, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D become PWM output pins.
9. Set the CST3 bit in the TSTR to 1 to start the count operation.
10. Set the STR3 bit in the TSTR to 1 to let the TCNT3 start counting.
349
Reset-synchronized
PWM mode
Stop counting
1
Select counter clock
2
Select counter clear source
3
Brushless DC motor
control setting
4
Set TCNT
5
Set TGR
6
PWM cycle output enabling,
PWM output level setting
7
Set reset-synchronized
PWM mode
8
Enable PWM output
9
Start count operation
10
Reset-synchronized PWM mode
Figure 12.35 Procedure for Selecting the Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode
350
Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Operation: Figure 12.36 shows an example of operation in the
reset-synchronized PWM mode. TCNT3 and TCNT4 operate as upcounters. The counter is cleared
when a TCNT3 and TGR3A compare-match occurs, and then begins incrementing from H'0000.
The PWM output pin output toggles with each occurrence of a TGR3B, TGR4A, TGR4B
compare-match, and upon counter clears.
TCNT3 and TCNT4
values
TGR3A
TGR3B
TGR4A
TGR4B
H'0000
Time
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
TIOC4A
TIOC4C
TIOC4B
TIOC4D
Figure 12.36 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode Operation Example (When the TOCR’s
OLSN = 1 and OLSP = 1)
351
12.4.9
Complementary PWM Mode
In the complementary PWM mode, three-phase output of non-overlapping positive and negative
PWM waveforms can be obtained using channels 3 and 4.
In complementary PWM mode, TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4B, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D
pins become PWM output pins, the TIOC3A pin can be set for toggle output synchronized with
the PWM period. TCNT3 and TCNT4 function as increment/decrement counters.
Table 12.15 shows the PWM output pins used. Table 12.16 shows the settings of the registers.
A function to directly cut off the PWM output by using an external signal is supported as a port
function.
Table 12.15 Output Pins for Complementary PWM Mode
Channel
Output Pin
Description
3
TIOC3A
Toggle output synchronized with PWM period (or I/O port)
TIOC3B
PWM output 1
TIOC3C
I/O port (Avoid setting this pin as a timer I/O pin in the
complementary PWM mode.)
TIOC3D
PWM output 1 (non-overlapping negative-phase waveform of
PWM output 1)
TIOC4A
PWM output 2
TIOC4B
PWM output 3
TIOC4C
PWM output 2 (non-overlapping negative-phase waveform of
PWM output 2)
TIOC4D
PWM output 3 (non-overlapping negative-phase waveform of
PWM output 3)
4
352
Table 12.16 Register Settings for Complementary PWM Mode
Channel
Counter/Register
Description
Read/Write from CPU
3
TCNT3
Start of up-count from value set
in dead time register
Maskable by BSC/BCR1
setting *
TGR3A
Set TCNT3 upper limit value
(1/2 carrier cycle + dead time)
Maskable by BSC/BCR1
setting *
TGR3B
PWM output 1 compare register
Maskable by BSC/BCR1
setting *
TGR3C
TGR3A buffer register
Always readable/writable
TGR3D
PWM output 1/TGR3B buffer
register
Always readable/writable
TCNT4
Up-count start, initialized to
H'0000
Maskable by BSC/BCR1
setting *
TGR4A
PWM output 2 compare register
Maskable by BSC/BCR1
setting *
TGR4B
PWM output 3 compare register
Maskable by BSC/BCR1
setting *
TGR4C
PWM output 2/TGR4A buffer
register
Always readable/writable
TGR4D
PWM output 3/TGR4B buffer
register
Always readable/writable
Timer dead time data register
(TDDR)
Set TCNT4 and TCNT3 offset
value (dead time value)
Maskable by BSC/BCR1
setting *
Timer cycle data register
(TCDR)
Set TCNT4 upper limit value
(1/2 carrier cycle)
Maskable by BSC/BCR1
setting *
Timer cycle buffer register
(TCBR)
TCDR buffer register
Always readable/writable
Subcounter (TCNTS)
Subcounter for dead time
generation
Read-only
Temporary register 1 (TEMP1)
PWM output 1/TGR3B temporary
register
Not readable/writable
Temporary register 2 (TEMP2)
PWM output 2/TGR4A temporary
register
Not readable/writable
Temporary register 3 (TEMP3)
PWM output 3/TGR4B temporary
register
Not readable/writable
4
Note: * Access can be enabled or disabled according to the setting of bit 13 (MTURWE) in
BSC/BCR1 (bus controller/bus control register 1).
353
TGR3A
TCDR
Comparator
TCNT3
Match
signal
TCNTS
TCNT4
TGR3D
TGR4C
TGR4B
Temp 3
Match
signal
TGR4A
Temp 2
TGR3B
Temp 1
Comparator
PWM cycle
output
Output protection circuit
TCBR
Output controller
TCNT4 underflow
interrupt
TGR3A comparematch interrupt
;;
ÀÀ
€€
@@
À
€
@
;
;;
ÀÀ
€€
@@
;
ÀÀ
€€
@@
;;
;
;;
ÀÀ
€€
@@
;
@;
€
À
;
@;;
€
À
@@
€€
ÀÀ
@;
€
À
;
@;;
€
À
@@
€€
ÀÀ
À
€
@
;
TDDR
TGR3C
PWM output 1
PWM output 2
PWM output 3
PWM output 4
PWM output 5
PWM output 6
External cutoff
input
POE0
POE1
POE2
POE3
TGR4D
External cutoff
interrupt
: Registers that can always be read or written from the CPU
: Registers that can be read or written from the CPU
(but for which access disabling can be set by the bus controller)
: Registers that cannot be read or written from the CPU
(except for TCNTS, which can only be read)
Figure 12.37 Block Diagram of Channels 3 and 4 in Complementary PWM Mode
354
Example of Complementary PWM Mode Setting Procedure: An example of the
complementary PWM mode setting procedure is shown in figure 12.38.
1. Clear bits CST3 and CST4 in the timer start register (TSTR) to 0, and halt timer counter
(TCNT) operation. Perform complementary PWM mode setting when TCNT3 and TCNT4 are
stopped.
2. Set the same counter clock and clock edge for channels 3 and 4 with bits TPSC2–TPSC0 and
bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in the timer control register (TCR). Use bits CCLR2–CCLR0 to set
synchronous clearing only when restarting by a synchronous clear from another channel during
complementary PWM mode operation.
3. When performing brushless DC motor control, set bit BDC in the timer gate control register
(TGCR) and set the feedback signal input source and output chopping or gate signal direct
output.
4. Set the dead time in TCNT3. Set TCNT4 to H'0000.
5. Set only when restarting by a synchronous clear from another channel during complementary
PWM mode operation. In this case, synchronize the channel generating the synchronous clear
with channels 3 and 4 using the timer synchro register (TSYR).
6. Set the output PWM duty in the duty registers (TGR3B, TGR4A, TGR4B) and buffer registers
(TGR3D, TGR4C, TGR4D). Set the same initial value in each corresponding TGR.
7. Set the dead time in the dead time register (TDDR), 1/2 the carrier cycle in the carrier cycle
data register (TCDR) and carrier cycle buffer register (TCBR), and 1/2 the carrier cycle plus
the dead time in TGR3A and TGR3C.
8. Select enabling/disabling of toggle output synchronized with the PWM cycle using bit PSYE
in the timer output control register (TOCR), and set the PWM output level with bits OLSP and
OLSN.
9. Select complementary PWM mode in timer mode register 3 (TMDR3). Pins TIOC3A,
TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4B, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D function as output pins. Do not
set in TMDR4.
10. Set enabling/disabling of PWM waveform output pin output in the timer output master enable
register (TOER).
11. Set bits CST3 and CST4 in TSTR to 1 simultaneously to start the count operation.
355
Complementary PWM mode
Stop count operation
1
Counter clock, counter clear
source selection
2
Brushless DC motor control
setting
3
TCNT setting
4
Inter-channel cycle setting
5
TGR setting
6
Dead time, carrier cycle
setting
7
PWM cycle output enabling,
PWM output level setting
8
Complementary PWM mode
setting
9
Enable waveform output
10
Start count operation
11
<Complementary PWM mode>
Figure 12.38 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Setting Procedure
356
Outline of Complementary PWM Mode Operation: In complementary PWM mode, 6-phase
PWM output is possible. Figure 12.39 illustrates counter operation in complementary PWM
mode, and figure 12.40 shows an example of complementary PWM mode operation.
• Counter operation
In complementary PWM mode, three counters—TCNT3, TCNT4, and TCNTS—perform
up/down-count operations.
TCNT3 is automatically initialized to the value set in TDDR when complementary PWM
mode is selected and the CST bit in TSTR is 0.
When the CST bit is set to 1, TCNT3 counts up to the value set in TGR3A, then switches to
down-counting when it matches TGR3A,. When the TCNT3 value matches TDDR, the counter
switches to up-counting, and the operation is repeated in this way.
TCNT4 is initialized to H'0000.
When the CST bit is set to 1, TCNT4 counts up in synchronization with TCNT3, and switches
to down-counting when it matches TCDR . On reaching H'0000, TCNT4 switches to upcounting, and the operation is repeated in this way.
TCNTS is a read-only counter. It need not be initialized.
When TCNT3 matches TCDR during TCNT3 and TCNT4 up/down-counting, down-counting
is started, and when TCNTS matches TCDR, the operation switches to up-counting. When
TCNTS matches TGR3A, it is cleared to H'0000.
When TCNT4 matches TDDR during TCNT3 and TCNT4 down-counting, up-counting is
started, and when TCNTS matches TDDR, the operation switches to down-counting. When
TCNTS reaches H'0000, it is set with the value in TGR3A.
TCNTS is compared with the compare register and temporary register in which the PWM duty
is set during the count operation only.
TCNT3
TCNT4
TCNTS
Counter value
TGR3A
TCDR
TCNT3
TCNT4
TCNTS
TDDR
H'0000
Time
Figure 12.39 Complementary PWM Mode Counter Operation
357
• Register operation
In complementary PWM mode, nine registers are used, comprising compare registers, buffer
registers, and temporary registers. Figure 12.40 shows an example of complementary PWM
mode operation.
The registers which are constantly compared with the counters to perform PWM output are
TGR3B, TGR4A, and TGR4B. When these registers match the counter, the value set in bits
OLSN and OLSP in the timer output control register (TOCR) is output.
The buffer registers for these compare registers are TGR3D, TGR4C, and TGR4D.
Between a buffer register and compare register there is a temporary register. The temporary
registers cannot be accessed by the CPU.
Data in a compare register is changed by writing the new data to the corresponding buffer
register. The buffer registers can be read or written at any time.
The data written to a buffer register is constantly transferred to the temporary register in the Ta
interval. Data is not transferred to the temporary register in the Tb interval. Data written to a
buffer register in this interval is transferred to the temporary register at the end of the Tb
interval.
The value transferred to a temporary register is transferred to the compare register when
TCNTS for which the Tb interval ends matches TGR3A when counting up, or H'0000 when
counting down. The timing for transfer from the temporary register to the compare register can
be selected with bits MD3–MD0 in the timer mode register (TMDR). Figure 12.40 shows an
example in which the mode is selected in which the change is made in the trough.
In the tb interval (tb2 in figure 12.40) in which data transfer to the temporary register is not
performed, the temporary register has the same function as the compare register, and is
compared with the counter. In this interval, therefore, there are two compare registers for onephase output, with the compare register containing the pre-change data, and the temporary
register containing the new data. In this interval, the three counters—TCNT3, TCNT4, and
TCNTS—and two registers—compare register and temporary register—are compared, and
PWM output controlled accordingly.
358
Transfer from temporary
register to compare register
Tb2
Transfer from temporary
register to compare register
Ta
Tb1
Ta
Tb2
Ta
TGR3A
TCNTS
TCDR
TCNT3
TGR4A
TCNT4
TGR4C
TDDR
H'0000
Buffer register
TGR4C
H'6400
H'0080
Temporary register
TEMP2
H'6400
H'0080
Compare register
TGR4A
H'6400
H'0080
Output waveform
Output waveform
(Output waveform is active-low)
Figure 12.40 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Operation
359
• Initialization
In complementary PWM mode, there are six registers that must be initialized.
Before setting complementary PWM mode with bits MD3–MD0 in the timer mode register
(TMDR), the following initial register values must be set.
TGR3C operates as the buffer register for TGR3A, and should be set with 1/2 the PWM carrier
cycle + dead time Td. The timer cycle buffer register (TCBR) operates as the buffer register for
the timer cycle data register (TCDR), and should be set with 1/2 the PWM carrier cycle. Set
dead time Td in the timer dead time data register (TDDR).
Set the respective initial PWM duty values in buffer registers TGR3D, TGR4C, and TGR4D.
The values set in the five buffer registers excluding TDDR are transferred simultaneously to
the corresponding compare registers when complementary PWM mode is set.
Set TCNT4 to H'0000 before setting complementary PWM mode.
Table 12.17 Registers and Counters Requiring Initialization
Register/Counter
Set Value
TGR3C
1/2 PWM carrier cycle + dead time Td
TDDR
Dead time Td
TCBR
1/2 PWM carrier cycle
TGR3D, TGR4C, TGR4D
Initial PWM duty value for each phase
TCNT4
H'0000
Note: The TGR3C set value must be the sum of 1/2 the PWM carrier cycle set in TCBR and dead
time Td set in TDDR.
• PWM output level setting
In complementary PWM mode, the PWM pulse output level is set with bits OLSN and OLSP
in the timer output control register (TOCR).
The output level can be set for each of the three positive phases and three negative phases of 6phase output.
Complementary PWM mode should be cleared before setting or changing output levels.
• Dead time setting
In complementary PWM mode, PWM pulses are output with a non-overlapping relationship
between the positive and negative phases. This non-overlap time is called the dead time.
The non-overlap time is set in the timer dead time data register (TDDR). The value set in
TDDR is used as the TCNT3 counter start value, and creates non-overlap between TCNT3 and
TCNT4. Complementary PWM mode should be cleared before changing the contents of
TDDR.
360
• PWM cycle setting
In complementary PWM mode, the PWM pulse cycle is set in two registers—TGR3A, in
which the TCNT3 upper limit value is set, and TCDR, in which the TCNT4 upper limit value
is set. The settings should be made so as to achieve the following relationship between these
two registers:
TGR3A set value = TCDR set value + TDDR set value
The TGR3A and TCDR settings are made by setting the values in buffer registers TGR3C and
TCBR. The values set in TGR3C and TCBR are transferred simultaneously to TGR3A and
TCDR in accordance with the transfer timing selected with bits MD3–MD0 in the timer mode
register (TMDR).
The updated PWM cycle is reflected from the next cycle when the data update is performed at
the crest, and from the current cycle when performed in the trough. Figure 12.41 illustrates the
operation when the PWM cycle is updated at the crest.
See the following section, Register data updating, for the method of updating the data in each
buffer register.
Counter value
TGR3C
update
TGR3A
update
TCNT3
TGR3A
TCNT4
Time
Figure 12.41 Example of PWM Cycle Updating
361
• Register data updating
In complementary PWM mode, the buffer register is used to update the data in a compare
register. The update data can be written to the buffer register at any time. There are five PWM
duty and carrier cycle registers that have buffer registers and can be updated during operation.
There is a temporary register between each of these registers and its buffer register. When
subcounter TCNTS is not counting, if buffer register data is updated, the temporary register
value is also rewritten. Transfer is not performed from buffer registers to temporary registers
when TCNTS is counting; in this case, the value written to a buffer register is transferred after
TCNTS halts.
The temporary register value is transferred to the compare register at the data update timing set
with bits MD3–MD0 in the timer mode register (TMDR). Figure 12.42 shows an example of
data updating in complementary PWM mode. This example shows the mode in which data
updating is performed at both the counter crest and trough.
When rewriting buffer register data, a write to TGR4D must be performed at the end of the
update. Data transfer from the buffer registers to the temporary registers is performed
simultaneously for all five registers after the write to TGR4D.
A write to TGR4D must be performed after writing data to the registers to be updated, even
when not updating all five registers, or when updating the TGR4D data. In this case, the data
written to TGR4D should be the same as the data prior to the write operation.
362
Figure 12.42 Example of Data Update in Complementary PWM Mode
363
data1
Temp_R
GR
data1
BR
H'0000
TGR4C
TGR4A
TGR3A
Counter value
data1
Transfer from
temporary register
to compare register
data2
data2
data2
Transfer from
temporary register
to compare register
Data update timing: counter crest and trough
data3
data3
Transfer from
temporary register
to compare register
data3
data4
data4
Transfer from
temporary register
to compare register
data4
data5
data5
Transfer from
temporary register
to compare register
data6
data6
data6
Transfer from
temporary register
to compare register
: Compare register
: Buffer register
Time
• Initial output in complementary PWM mode
In complementary PWM mode, the initial output is determined by the setting of bits OLSN and
OLSP in the timer output control register (TOCR).
This initial output is the PWM pulse non-active level, and is output from when complementary
PWM mode is set with the timer mode register (TMDR) until TCNT4 exceeds the value set in
the dead time register (TDDR). Figure 12.43 shows an example of the initial output in
complementary PWM mode.
An example of the waveform when the initial PWM duty value is smaller than the TDDR
value is shown in figure 12.44.
Timer output control register settings
OLSN bit: 0 (initial output: high; active level: low)
OLSP bit: 0 (initial output: high; active level: low)
TCNT3, 4 value
TCNT3
TCNT4
TGR4A
TDDR
Time
Initial output
Dead time
Positive phase
output
Active level
Negative phase
output
Active level
Complementary
PWM mode
(TMDR setting)
TCNT3, 4 count start
(TSTR setting)
Figure 12.43 Example of Initial Output in Complementary PWM Mode (1)
364
Timer output control register settings
OLSN bit: 0 (initial output: high; active level: low)
OLSP bit: 0 (initial output: high; active level: low)
TCNT3, 4 value
TCNT3
TCNT4
TDDR
TGR4A
Time
Initial output
Positive phase
output
Negative phase
output
Active level
Complementary
PWM mode
(TMDR setting)
TCNT3, 4 count start
(TSTR setting)
Figure 12.44 Example of Initial Output in Complementary PWM Mode (2)
365
• Complementary PWM mode PWM output generation method
In complementary PWM mode, 3-phase output is performed of PWM waveforms with a nonoverlap time between the positive and negative phases. This non-overlap time is called the
dead time.
A PWM waveform is generated by output of the output level selected in the timer output
control register in the event of a compare-match between a counter and data register. While
TCNTS is counting, data register and temporary register values are simultaneously compared
to create consecutive PWM pulses from 0 to 100%. The relative timing of on and off comparematch occurrence may vary, but the compare-match that turns off each phase takes precedence
to secure the dead time and ensure that the positive phase and negative phase on times do not
overlap. Figures 12.45 to 12.47 show examples of waveform generation in complementary
PWM mode.
The positive phase/negative phase off timing is generated by a compare-match with the solidline counter, and the on timing by a compare-match with the dotted-line counter operating with
a delay of the dead time behind the solid-line counter. In the T1 period, compare-match a that
turns off the negative phase has the highest priority, and compare-matches occurring prior to a
are ignored. In the T2 period, compare-match c that turns off the positive phase has the highest
priority, and compare-matches occurring prior to c are ignored.
In normal cases, compare-matches occur in the order a → b → c → d (or c → d → a' → b'),
as shown in figure 12.45.
If compare-matches deviate from the a → b → c → d order, since the time for which the
negative phase is off is less than twice the dead time, the figure shows the positive phase as not
being turned on. If compare-matches deviate from the c → d → a' → b' order, since the time
for which the positive phase is off is less than twice the dead time, the figure shows the
negative phase as not being turned on.
If compare-match c occurs first following compare-match a, as shown in figure 12.46,
compare-match b is ignored, and the negative phase is turned off by compare-match d. This is
because turning off of the positive phase has priority due to the occurrence of compare-match c
(positive phase off timing) before compare-match b (positive phase on timing) (consequently,
the waveform does not change since the positive phase goes from off to off).
Similarly, in the example in figure 12.47, compare-match a' with the new data in the
temporary register occurs before compare-match c, but other compare-matches occurring up to
c, which turns of the positive phase, are ignored. As a result, the positive phase is not turned
on.
Thus, in complementary PWM mode, compare-matches at turn-off timings take precedence,
and turn-on timing compare-matches that occur before a turn-off timing compare-match are
ignored.
366
T2 period
T1 period
T1 period
TGR3A
c
d
TCDR
a
b
a'
b'
TDDR
H'0000
Positive phase
Negative phase
Figure 12.45 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform Output (1)
T2 period
T1 period
T1 period
TGR3A
c
d
TCDR
a
b
a
b
TDDR
H'0000
Positive phase
Negative phase
Figure 12.46 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform Output (2)
367
T1 period
T2 period
T1 period
TGR3A
TCDR
a
b
TDDR
c
a'
d
b'
H'0000
Positive phase
Negative phase
Figure 12.47 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform Output (3)
T1 period
T2 period
c
TGR3A
T1 period
d
TCDR
a
b
a'
b'
TDDR
H'0000
Positive phase
Negative phase
Figure 12.48 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (1)
368
T1 period
T2 period
T1 period
TGR3A
TCDR
a
b
a
b
TDDR
H'0000
c
d
Positive phase
Negative phase
Figure 12.49 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (2)
T1 period
T2 period
c
TGR3A
T1 period
d
TCDR
a
b
TDDR
H'0000
Positive phase
Negative phase
Figure 12.50 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (3)
369
T1 period
T2 period
T1 period
TGR3A
TCDR
a
b
TDDR
H'0000
c b'
d a'
Positive phase
Negative phase
Figure 12.51 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (4)
T1 period
TGR3A
T2 period
c
ad
T1 period
b
TCDR
TDDR
H'0000
Positive phase
Negative phase
Figure 12.52 Example of Complementary PWM Mode 0% and 100% Waveform Output (5)
370
• Complementary PWM mode 0% and 100% duty output
In complementary PWM mode, 0% and 100% duty cycles can be output as required. Figures
12.48 to 12.52 show output examples.
100% duty output is performed when the data register value is set to H'0000. The waveform in
this case has a positive phase with a 100% on-state. 0% duty output is performed when the data
register value is set to the same value as TGR3A. The waveform in this case has a positive
phase with a 100% off-state.
On and off compare-matches occur simultaneously, but if a turn-on compare-match and turnoff compare-match for the same phase occur simultaneously, both compare-matches are
ignored and the waveform does not change.
• Toggle output synchronized with PWM cycle
In complementary PWM mode, toggle output can be performed in synchronization with the
PWM carrier cycle by setting the PSYE bit to 1 in the timer output control register (TOCR).
An example of a toggle output waveform is shown in figure 12.53.
This output is toggled by a compare-match between TCNT3 and TGR3A and a compare-match
between TCNT4 and H'0000.
The output pin for this toggle output is the TIOC3A pin. The initial output is 1.
TGR3A
TCNT3
TCNT4
H'0000
Toggle output
TIOC3A pin
Figure 12.53 Example of Toggle Output Waveform Synchronized with PWM Output
371
• Counter clearing by another channel
In complementary PWM mode, by setting a mode for synchronization with another channel by
means of the timer synchro register (TSYR), and selecting synchronous clearing with bits
CCLR2–CCLR0 in the timer control register (TCR), it is possible to have TCNT3, TCNT4,
and TCNTS cleared by another channel.
Figure 12.54 illustrates the operation.
Use of this function enables counter clearing and restarting to be performed by means of an
external signal.
TCNTS
TGR3A
TCDR
TCNT3
TCNT4
TDDR
H'0000
Channel 1
input capture A
TCNT1
Synchronous counter clearing by channel 1 input capture A
Figure 12.54 Counter Clearing Synchronized with Another Channel
372
• Example of AC synchronous motor (brushless DC motor) drive waveform output
In complementary PWM mode, a brushless DC motor can easily be controlled using the timer
gate control register (TGCR). Figures 12.55 to 12.58 show examples of brushless DC motor
drive waveforms created using TGCR.
When output phase switching for a 3-phase brushless DC motor is performed by means of
external signals detected with a Hall element, etc., clear the FB bit in TGCR to 0. In this case,
the external signals indicating the polarity position are input to channel 0 timer input pins
TIOC0A, TIOC0B, and TIOC0C (set with PFC). When an edge is detected at pin TIOC0A,
TIOC0B, or TIOC0C, the output on/off state is switched automatically.
When the FB bit is 1, the output on/off state is switched when the UF, VF, or WF bit in TGCR
is cleared to 0 or set to 1.
The drive waveforms are output from the complementary PWM mode 6-phase output pins.
With this 6-phase output, in the case of on output, it is possible to use complementary PWM
mode output and perform chopping output by setting the N bit or P bit to 1. When the N bit or
P bit is 0, level output is selected.
The 6-phase output active level (on output level) can be set with the OLSN and OLSP bits in
the timer output control register (TOCR) regardless of the setting of the N and P bits. When
using this mode, set the 6-phase output waveform to High active (Low active is also permitted
for A masks).
External input
TIOC0A pin
TIOC0B pin
TIOC0C pin
6-phase output TIOC3B pin
TIOC3D pin
TIOC4A pin
TIOC4C pin
TIOC4B pin
TIOC4D pin
When BDC = 1, N = 0, P = 0, FB = 0, output active level = high
Figure 12.55 Example of Output Phase Switching by External Input (1)
373
External input
TIOC0A pin
TIOC0B pin
TIOC0C pin
6-phase output TIOC3B pin
TIOC3D pin
TIOC4A pin
TIOC4C pin
TIOC4B pin
TIOC4D pin
When BDC = 1, N = 1, P = 1, FB = 0, output active level = high
Figure 12.56 Example of Output Phase Switching by External Input (2)
TGCR
UF bit
VF bit
WF bit
6-phase output TIOC3B pin
TIOC3D pin
TIOC4A pin
TIOC4C pin
TIOC4B pin
TIOC4D pin
When BDC = 1, N = 0, P = 0, FB = 0, output active level = high
Figure 12.57 Example of Output Phase Switching by Means of UF, VF, WF Bit Settings (1)
374
TGCR
UF bit
VF bit
WF bit
6-phase output TIOC3B pin
TIOC3D pin
TIOC4A pin
TIOC4C pin
TIOC4B pin
TIOC4D pin
When BDC = 1, N = 1, P = 1, FB = 0, output active level = high
Figure 12.58 Example of Output Phase Switching by Means of UF, VF, WF Bit Settings (2)
• A/D conversion start request setting
In complementary PWM mode, an A/D conversion start request can be issued using a TGR3A
compare-match or a compare-match on a channel other than channels 3 and 4.
When start requests using a TGR3A compare-match are set, A/D conversion can be started at
the center of the PWM pulse.
A/D conversion start requests can be set by setting the TTGE bit to 1 in the timer interrupt
enable register (TIER).
375
Complementary PWM Mode Output Protection Function: Complementary PWM mode output
has the following protection functions.
• Register and counter miswrite prevention function
With the exception of the buffer registers, which can be rewritten at any time, access by the
CPU can be enabled or disabled for the mode registers, control registers, compare registers,
and counters used in complementary PWM mode by means of bit 13 in the bus controller’s bus
control register 1 (BCR1). The registers and counters concerned are listed in table 12.3.
This function enables miswriting due to CPU runaway to be prevented by disabling CPU
access to the mode registers, control registers, and counters.
• Halting of PWM output by external signal
The 6-phase PWM output pins can be set automatically to the high-impedance state by
inputting specified external signals. There are four external signal input pins.
See section 12.9, Port Output Enable (POE), for details.
• Halting of PWM output when oscillator is stopped
If it is detected that the clock input to the SH7040 chip has stopped, the 6-phase PWM output
pins automatically go to the high-impedance state. The pin states are not guaranteed when the
clock is restarted.
See section 4.4, Oscillator Halt Function, for details.
376
12.5
Interrupts
12.5.1
Interrupt Sources and Priority Ranking
The MTU has three interrupt sources: TGR register compare-match/input captures, TCNT counter
overflows and TCNT counter underflows. Because each of these three types of interrupts are
allocated its own dedicated status flag and enable/disable bit, the issuing of interrupt request
signals to the interrupt controller can be independently enabled or disabled.
When an interrupt source is generated, the corresponding status flag in the timer status register
(TSR) is set to 1. If the corresponding enable/disable bit in the timer input enable register (TIER)
is set to 1 at this time, the MTU makes an interrupt request of the interrupt controller. The
interrupt request is canceled by clearing the status flag to 0.
The channel priority order can be changed with the interrupt controller. The priority ranking
within a channel is fixed. For more information, see section 6, Interrupt Controller (INTC).
Table 12.17 lists the MTU interrupt sources.
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupts: If the TGIE bit of the timer input enable register
(TIER) is already set to 1 when the TGF flag in the timer status register (TSR) is set to 1 by a TGR
register input capture/compare-match of any channel, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt
controller. The interrupt request is canceled by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The MTU has 16 input
capture/compare-match interrupts; four each for channels 0, 3, and 4, and two each for channels 1
and 2.
Overflow Interrupts: If the TCIEV bit of the TIER is already set to 1 when the TCFV flag in the
TSR is set to 1 by a TCNT counter overflow of any channel, an interrupt request is sent to the
interrupt controller. The interrupt request is canceled by clearing the TCFV flag to 0. The MTU
has five overflow interrupts, one for each channel.
Underflow Interrupts: If the TCIEU bit of the TIER is already set to 1 when the TCFU flag in
the TSR is set to 1 by a TCNT counter underflow of any channel, an interrupt request is sent to the
interrupt controller. The interrupt request is canceled by clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The MTU
has two underflow interrupts, one each for channels 1 and 2.
377
Table 12.17 MTU Interrupt Sources
Channel
Interrupt
Source
Description
DMAC
DTC
Activation Activation Priority *
0
TGI0A
TGR0A input capture/compare-match
Yes
Yes
TGI0B
TGR0B input capture/compare-match
No
Yes
TGI0C
TGR0C input capture/compare-match No
Yes
TGI0D
TGR0D input capture/compare-match No
Yes
TCI0V
TCNT0 overflow
No
No
TGI1A
TGR1A input capture/compare-match
Yes
Yes
TGI1B
TGR1B input capture/compare-match
No
Yes
TCI1V
TCNT1 overflow
No
No
TCI1U
TCNT1 underflow
No
No
TGI2A
TGR2A input capture/compare-match
Yes
Yes
TGI2B
TGR2B input capture/compare-match
No
Yes
TCI2V
TCNT2 overflow
No
No
TCI2U
TCNT2 underflow
No
No
TGI3A
TGR3A input capture/compare-match
Yes
Yes
TGI3B
TGR3B input capture/compare-match
No
Yes
TGI3C
TGR3C input capture/compare-match No
Yes
TGI3D
TGR3D input capture/compare-match No
Yes
TCI3V
TCNT3 overflow
No
No
TGI4A
TGR4A input capture/compare-match
Yes
Yes
TGI4B
TGR4B input capture/compare-match
No
Yes
TGI4C
TGR4C input capture/compare-match No
Yes
TGI4D
TGR4D input capture/compare-match No
Yes
TCI4V
TCNT overflow/underflow
Yes
1
2
3
4
No
High
Low
Note: * Indicates the initial status following reset. The ranking of channels can be altered using
the interrupt controller.
378
12.5.2
DTC/DMAC Activation
DTC Activation: The TGR register input capture/compare-match interrupt of any channel can be
used as a source to activate the on-chip data transfer controller (DTC). For details, refer to section
8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
The MTU has 17 input capture/compare-match interrupts that can be used as DTC activation
sources, four each for channels 0 and 3, two each for channels 1 and 2, and five for channel 4.
DMAC Activation: The TGRA register input capture/compare-match interrupt of any channel
can be used as a source to activate the on-chip DMAC. For details, refer to section 11, Direct
Memory Access Controller (DMAC).
The MTU has 5 TGRA register input capture/compare-match interrupts, one for any channel, that
can be used as DMAC activation sources.
12.5.3
A/D Converter Activation
The TGRA register input capture/compare-match of any channel can be used to activate the onchip A/D converter.
If the TTGE bit of the TIER is already set to 1 when the TGFA flag in the TSR is set to 1 by a
TGRA register input capture/compare-match of any of the channels, an A/D conversion start
request is sent to the A/D converter. If the MTU conversion start trigger is selected at such a time
on the A/D converter side when this happens, the A/D conversion starts.
The MTU has 5 TGRA register input capture/compare-match interrupts, one for each channel, that
can be used as A/D converter activation sources.
379
12.6
Operation Timing
12.6.1
Input/Output Timing
TCNT Count Timing: Count timing for the TCNT counter with internal clock operation is shown
in figure 12.59. Count timing with external clock operation (normal mode) is shown in figure
12.60, and figure 12.61 shows count timing with external clock operation (phase counting mode).
φ
Internal
clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT
input
clock
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 12.59 TCNT Count Timing during Internal Clock Operation
φ
External
clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT
input
clock
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 12.60 TCNT Count Timing during External Clock Operation (Normal Mode)
380
φ
External
clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT
input clock
N–1
TCNT
N
N+1
Figure 12.61 TCNT Count Timing during External Clock Operation (Phase Counting
Mode)
Output Compare Output Timing: The compare-match signal is generated at the final state of
TCNT and TGR matching. When a compare-match signal is issued, the output value set in TIOR
or TOCR is output to the output compare output pin (TIOC pin). After TCNT and TGR matching,
a compare-match signal is not issued until immediately before the TCNT input clock.
Output compare output timing (normal mode and PWM mode) is shown in figure 12.62. See
figure 12.63 for output compare output timing in complementary PWM mode and reset sync
PWM mode.
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N
TGR
N
N+1
Comparematch signal
TIOC pin
Figure 12.62 Output Compare Output Timing (Normal Mode/PWM Mode)
381
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N
TGR
N
N+1
Comparematch signal
TIOC pin
Figure 12.63 Output Compare Output Timing (Complementary PWM Mode/Reset Sync
PWM Mode)
Input Capture Signal Timing: Figure 12.64 illustrates input capture timing.
φ
Input capture
input
Rising edge
Falling edge
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
N
N+1
N+2
N
Figure 12.64 Input Capture Input Signal Timing
382
N+2
Counter Clearing Timing Due to Compare-Match/Input Capture: Timing for counter clearing
due to compare-match is shown in figure 12.65. Figure 12.66 shows the timing for counter
clearing due to input capture.
φ
Comparematch signal
Counter
clear signal
TCNT
N
TGR
N
H'0000
Figure 12.65 Counter Clearing Timing (Compare-Match)
φ
Input
capture
signal
Counter
clear signal
TCNT
TGR
N
H'0000
N
Figure 12.66 Counter Clearing Timing (Input Capture)
383
Buffer Operation Timing: Compare-match buffer operation timing is shown in figure 12.67.
Figure 12.68 shows input capture buffer operation timing.
φ
n
n+1
TGRA, TGRB
n
N
TGRC, TGRD
N
TCNT
Comparematch signal
Comparematch buffer
signal
Figure 12.67 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare-Match)
φ
Input capture
signal
Input capture
signal buffer
TCNT
N
TGRA, TGRB
n
TGRC, TGRD
N+1
N
N+1
n
N
Figure 12.68 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)
384
12.6.2
Interrupt Signal Timing
Setting TGF Flag Timing during Compare-Match: Figure 12.69 shows timing for the TGF flag
of the timer status register (TSR) due to compare-match, as well as TGI interrupt request signal
timing.
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N
TGR
N
N+1
Comparematch signal
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 12.69 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match)
Setting TGF Flag Timing during Input Capture: Figure 12.70 shows timing for the TGF flag
of the timer status register (TSR) due to input capture, as well as TGI interrupt request signal
timing.
385
φ
Input capture
signal
TCNT
N
TGR
N
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 12.70 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture)
Setting Timing for Overflow Flag (TCFV)/Underflow Flag (TCFU): Figure 12.71 shows
timing for the TCFV flag of the timer status register (TSR) due to overflow, as well as TCIV
interrupt request signal timing. Figure 12.72 shows timing for the TCFU flag of the timer status
register (TSR) due to underflow, as well as TCIU interrupt request signal timing. Figure 12.73
shows timing for the TCFV flag of TSR4 due to underflow in complementary PWM mode, as well
as TCIV interrupt request signal timing.
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
(underflow)
H'FFFF
H'0000
Overflow
signal
TCFV flag
TCIV interrupt
Figure 12.71 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing
386
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
(underflow)
H'0000
H'FFFF
Underflow
signal
TCFU flag
TCIU interrupt
Figure 12.72 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
(underflow) H'0001
H'0000
H'0001
Underflow
signal
TCFV flag
TCIV
interrupt
Figure 12.73 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing (TSR4, Complementary PWM Mode)
387
Status Flag Clearing Timing: The status flag is cleared when the CPU reads a 1 status followed
by a 0 write. For DTC/DMA controller activation, clearing can also be done automatically. Figure
12.74 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the CPU. Figure 12.75 shows timing for clearing
due to the DTC/DMA controller.
TSR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
TSR address
Write signal
Status flag
Interrupt
request signal
Figure 12.74 Timing of Status Flag Clearing by the CPU
DTC/DMAC
read cycle
T1
T2
DTC/DMAC
write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
Source
address
Destination
address
Status flag
Interrupt
request signal
Figure 12.75 Timing of Status Flag Clearing by DTC/DMAC Activation
388
12.7
Notes and Precautions
This section describes contention and other matters requiring special attention during MTU
operations.
12.7.1
Input Clock Limitations
The input clock pulse width, in the case of single edge, must be 1.5 states or greater, and 2.5 states
or greater for both edges. Normal operation cannot be guaranteed with lesser pulse widths.
In phase counting mode, the phase difference between the two input clocks and the overlap must
be 1.5 states or greater for each, and the pulse width must be 2.5 states or greater. Input clock
conditions for phase counting mode are shown in figure 12.76.
Phase
Phase
difference
difference
Overlap
Overlap
Pulse width
Pulse width
TCLKA
(TCLKC)
TCLKB
(TCLKD)
Pulse width
Pulse width
Note: Phase difference and overlap: 1.5 states or greater
Pulse width: 2.5 states or greater
Figure 12.76 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Count Mode
12.7.2
Note on Cycle Setting
When setting a counter clearing by compare-match, clearing is done in the final state when TCNT
matches the TGR value (update timing for count value on TCNT match). The actual number of
states set in the counter is given by the following equation:
f =
φ
(N + 1)
(f: counter frequency, φ: operating frequency, N: value set in the TGR)
389
12.7.3
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear
If a counter clear signal is issued in the T 2 state during the TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing has
priority, and TCNT write is not conducted (figure 12.77).
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
TCNT address
Write signal
Counter
clear signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
Figure 12.77 TCNT Write and Clear Contention
390
12.7.4
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment
If a count-up signal is issued in the T2 state during the TCNT write cycle, TCNT write has priority,
and the counter is not incremented (figure 12.78).
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
TCNT address
Write signal
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
M
TCNT write data
Figure 12.78 TCNT Write and Increment Contention
391
12.7.5
Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match
If a compare-match occurs in the T2 state of the TGR write cycle, data is transferred by the buffer
operation from the buffer register to the TGR. Data to be transferred differs depending on channels
0 and 3 and 4: data on channel 0 is that after write, and on channels 3 and 4, before write (figures
12.79 and 12.80).
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
Buffer register
address
Write signal
Compare
match
signal
Compare
match buffer
signal
Buffer register write data
Buffer
register
TGR
N
M
M
Figure 12.79 TGR Write and Compare-Match Contention (Channel 0)
392
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Buffer register
address
Address
Write signal
Compare
match signal
Compare
match buffer
signal
Buffer
register
TGR
Buffer register write data
N
M
N
Figure 12.80 TGR Write and Compare-Match Contention (Channels 3 and 4)
393
12.7.6
Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is issued in the T1 state of the TGR read cycle, the read data is that after
input capture transfer (figure 12.81).
TGR read cycle
T1
T2
φ
TGR
address
Address
Read signal
Input capture
signal
TGR
Internal data
bus
X
M
M
Figure 12.81 TGR Read and Input Capture Contention
394
12.7.7
Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is issued in the T2 state of the TGR read cycle, input capture has priority,
and TGR write does not occur (figure 12.82).
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
TGR address
Write signal
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
M
M
Figure 12.82 TGR Write and Input Capture Contention
395
12.7.8
Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is issued in the T2 state of the buffer write cycle, write to the buffer
register does not occur, and buffer operation takes priority (figure 12.83).
Buffer register write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
Buffer register
address
Write signal
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
Buffer
register
N
M
N
M
Figure 12.83 Buffer Register Write and Input Capture Contention
396
12.7.9
Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match
If a compare-match occurs in the T2 state of the TGR write cycle, data is written to the TGR and a
compare-match signal is issued (figure 12.84).
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
TGR address
Write signal
Compare
match signal
TCNT
N
N+1
TGR
N
M
TGR write data
Figure 12.84 TGR Write and Compare Match Contention
12.7.10 TCNT2 Write and Overflow/Underflow Contention in Cascade Connection
With timer counters TCNT1 and TCNT2 in a cascade connection, when a contention occurs
during TCNT1 count (during a TCNT2 overflow/underflow) in the T2 state of the TCNT2 write
cycle, the write to TCNT2 is conducted, and the TCNT1 count signal is prohibited. At this point, if
there is match with TGR1A or TGR1B and the TCNT1 value, a compare signal is issued. The
timing is shown in figure 12.85.
For cascade connections, be sure to synchronize settings for channels 1 and 2 when setting TCNT
clearing.
397
TCNT write cycle
T1
T1
φ
Address
TCNT2 address
Write signal
TCNT2
H'FFFE
H'FFFF
N
N+1
TCNT2 write data
TGR2A–B
H'FFFF
Ch2 comparematch signal A/B
Disabled
TCNT1
input clock
TCNT1
M
TGR1A
M
Ch1 comparematch signal A
TGR1B
N
M
Ch1 inputcapture
signal B
TCNT0
P
TGR0A–D
Q
P
Ch0 input capture
signal A–D
Figure 12.85 TCNT2 Write and Overflow/Underflow Contention with Cascade Connection
398
12.7.11 Counter Value during Complementary PWM Mode Stop
When counting operation is suspended with TCNT3 and TCNT4 in complementary PWM mode,
TCNT3 has the timer dead time register (TDDR) value, and TCNT4 is held at H'0000.
When restarting complementary PWM mode, counting begins automatically from the initialized
state (figure 12.86).
When counting begins in another operating mode, be sure that TCNT3 and TCNT4 are set to the
initial values.
TGR3A
TCDR
TCNT3
TCNT4
TDDR
H'0000
Complementary PWM
mode operation
Complementary PWM
mode operation
Counter
operation stop
Complementary
PMW restart
Figure 12.86 Counter Value during Complementary PWM Mode Stop
12.7.12 Buffer Operation Setting in Complementary PWM Mode
In complementary PWM mode, conduct rewrites by buffer operation for the PWM cycle setting
register (TGR3A), PWM carrier cycle setting register (TCDR) and duty setting registers (TGR3B,
TRG4A, and TGR4B).
In complementary PWM mode, channel 3 and channel 4 buffers operate in accordance with bit
settings BFA and BFB of TMDR3. When TMDR3’s BFA bit is set to 1, TGR3C functions as a
buffer register for TGR3A. At the same time, TGR4C functions as the buffer register for TRG4A,
while the TCBR functions as the TCDR’s buffer register.
399
12.7.13 Reset Sync PWM Mode Buffer Operation and Compare Match Flag
When setting buffer operation for reset sync PWM mode, set the BFA and BFB bits of TMDR4 to
0. The TIOC4C pin will be unable to produce its waveform output if the BFA bit of TMDR4 is set
to 1.
In reset sync PWM mode, the channel 3 and channel 4 buffers operate in accordance with the BFA
and BFB bit settings of TMDR3. For example, if the BFA bit of TMDR3 is set to 1, TGR3C
functions as the buffer register for TGR3A. At the same time, TGR4C functions as the buffer
register for TRG4A.
When setting buffer operation for reset sync PWM mode, take particular care, since comparematch flag TGFC bit and TGFD bit operations differ with TSR3 and TSR4.
The TGFC bit and TGFD bit of TSR3 are not set when TGR3C and TGR3D are operating as
buffer registers. On the other hand, TSR4’s TGFC and TGFD bits are set even when TGR4C and
TGR4D are operating as buffer registers.
When buffer operation has been set for reset sync PWM mode, set the timer interrupt enable
register’s (TIER4) TGIEC and TGIED bits to 0, to prohibit interrupt output.
Figure 12.87 shows an example of operations for TGR3, TGR4, TIOC3, and TIOC4, with
TMDR3’s BFA and BFB bits set to 1, and TMDR4’s BFA and BFB bits set to 0.
400
TGR3A
TCNT3
Point a
TGR3C
Buffer transfer with
compare match A3
TGR3A,
TGR3C
TGR3B, TGR4A,
TGR4B
TGR3D, TGR4C,
TGR4D
Point b
TGR3B, TGR3D,
TGR4A, TGR4C,
TGR4B, TGR4D
H'0000
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
TIOC4A
TIOC4C
TIOC4B
TIOC4D
TGF3C
TGF3D
TGF4C
TGF4D
Not set
Not set
Set
Set
Figure 12.87 Buffer Operation and Compare-Match Flags in Reset Sync PWM Mode
• A mask operation
For A mask, the above operation is modified as follows:
When setting buffer operation for reset sync PWM mode, set the BFA and BFB bits of
TMDR4 to 0. The TIOC4C pin will be unable to produce its waveform output if the BFA bit of
TMDR4 is set to 1.
In reset sync PWM mode, the channel 3 and channel 4 buffers operate in accordance with the
BFA and BFB bit settings of TMDR3. For example, if the BFA bit of TMDR3 is set to 1,
TGR3C functions as the buffer register for TGR3A. At the same time, TGR4C functions as the
buffer register for TRG4A.
When setting buffer operation for reset sync PWM mode, the compare-match flag TGFC bit
and TGFD bit operations will be the same for TSR3 and TSR4.
The TGFC bit and TGFD bit of TSR3 are not set when TGR3C and TGR3D are operating as
buffer registers. The TGFC bit and TGFD bit of TSR4 are not set when TGR4C and TGR4D
are operating as buffer registers.
401
When setting the buffer operation in the reset synchronous PWM mode, it is not necessary to
set the timer interrupt enable register’s (TIER4) TGIEC and TGIED bits to 0, to prohibit
interrupt output.
Figure 12.88 shows an example of operations for TGR3, TGR4, TIOC3, and TIOC4, with
TMDR3’s BFA and BFB bits set to 1, and TMDR4’s BFA and BFB bits set to 0.
TGR3A
Buffer transfer with compare match A3
TCNT3
Point a
TGR3C
TGR3B,TGR4A
TGR4B
TGR3A,
TGR3C
TGR3B,TGR3D
TGR4A,TGR4C
TGR4B,TGR4D
Point b
TGR3D,TGR4C
TGR4D
H'0000
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
TIOC4A
TIOC4C
TIOC4B
TIOC4D
TGF3C
Not set
TGF3D
Not set
TGF4C
Not set
TGF4D
Not set
Figure 12.88 Buffer Operation and Compare-Match Flags in Reset Sync PWM Mode
(for A Mask)
12.7.14 Overflow Flags in Reset Sync PWM Mode
When set to reset sync PWM mode, TCNT3 and TCNT4 start counting when the CST3 bit of
TSTR is set to 1. At this point, TCNT4’s count clock source and count edge obey the TCR3
setting.
In reset sync PWM mode, with cycle register TGR3A’s set value at H'FFFF, take care when
specifying TGR3A compare-match for the counter clear source, since the operation of the
overflow flag (TCFV bit) differs with TSR3 and TSR4.
402
When TCNT3 and TCNT4 count up to H'FFFF, a compare-match occurs with TGR3A, and
TCNT3 and TCNT4 are both cleared. At this point, TSR3’s TCFV bit is not set, but the TCFV bit
of TSR4 is set.
This can be avoided by sync setting for channel 3 and channel 4. Set the SYNC3 and SYNC4 bits
of the timer sync register (TSYR) to 1, compare-match with TGR3A by TCR3 for the counter
clear source, and sync clear with TCR4. This gives the sync setting for channels 3 and 4.
Figure 12.89 shows a TCFV bit operation example in reset sync PWM mode with a set value for
cycle register TGR3A of H'FFFF, when a TGR3A compare-match has been specified without
synchronous setting for the counter clear source.
Counter cleared by compare match A3
TGR3A
(H'FFFF)
TCNT3 = TCNT4
H'0000
TCF3V
Not set
TCF4V
Set
Figure 12.89 Reset Sync PWM Mode Overflow Flag
• A mask operation
For A mask, the above operation is modified as follows:
When set to reset sync PWM mode, TCNT3 and TCNT4 start counting when the CST3 bit of
TSTR is set to 1. At this point, TCNT4’s count clock source and count edge obey the TCR3
setting.
In reset sync PWM mode, with cycle register TGR3A’s set value at H'FFFF and specifying
TGR3A compare-match for the counter clear source, the operation of the overflow flag TCFV
bit for both TSR3 and TSR4 will be the same.
When TCNT3 and TCNT4 count up to H'FFFF, a compare-match occurs with TGR3A, and
TCNT3 and TCNT4 are both cleared. At this point, TCFV bits for TSR3 and TSR4 are not set.
Figure 12.90 shows a TCFV bit operation example in reset sync PWM mode with a set value
for cycle register TGR3A of H'FFFF, when a TGR3A compare-match has been specified
without synchronous setting for the counter clear source.
403
Counter clear by compare match 3A
TGR3A
(H'FFFF)
TCNT3=TCNT4
H'0000
TCF3V
Not set
TCF4V
Not set
Figure. 12.90 Reset Sync PWM Mode Overflow Flag (for A Mask)
404
12.7.15 Notes on Compare Match Flags in Complementary PWM Mode
In complementary PWM mode, buffer register compare-match flags can be set only for compare
with three counters (TCNT3, TCNT4, and TCNTS).
Note that when the buffer register set value is dead time (Td), 2Td, TGR3A – Td, or
TGR3A – 2Td, the buffer register compare-match flag may not be set.
Figure 12.91 gives a description when TGR3B is the specified duty setting register, TGR3D the
buffer register with TGR3A – Td as the buffer register set value.
TGR3B,
TGR3D
TGR3A
TGR3D
TCDR
(TGR3A –
Td)
TCNT3
TGR3B
TCNT4
TDDR
H'0000
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
TGF3B
setting
signal
TGF3D
setting
signal Point a
Point b
Point c
Point d
Point a: TGR3D setting Td
Point b: TGR3D setting TGR3A – Td or TGR3A – 2TD
Point c: TGR3D setting Td or 2Td
Point d: TGR3D setting TGR3A – Td or TGR3A – 2Td, and the setting signal is
not output
Figure 12.91 Special Properties of Compare Match Flag in Complementary PWM Mode
405
• A mask operation
For A mask, the above operation is modified as follows:
In complementary PWM mode, buffer register compare-match flags can be set only for
compare with three counters (TCNT3, TCNT4, and TCNTS).
Special properties of compare match flag disappear and compare match flags of buffer
registers are set to all set values of buffer registers.
Figure 12.92 shows an example when setting the duty setting register to TGR3B, buffer
register to TGR3D and Buffer register to TGR3A-Td.
TGR3A
TGR3D
TGR3B,
TGR3D
TCDR
(TGR3A -Td)
TCNT3
TGR3B
TCNT4
TDDR
H'0000
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
TGF3B setting
signal
TGF3D setting
signal
Point a
Point b
Point c
Point d
Set signals are output when:
Point a: TGR3D setting is Td
Point b: TGR3D settings are TGR3A-Td, TGR3A-2Td
Point c: TGR3D settings are Td, 2Td
Point d: TGR3D settings are TGR3A-Td, TGR3A-2Td
Figure. 12.92 Special Properties of Compare Match Flag in Complementary PWM Mode
(for A Mask)
406
12.7.16 Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing
If overflow/underflow and counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is
not set and TCNT clearing takes precedence.
Figure 12.93 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare-match is specified as the clearing
source, and H'FFFF is set in TGR.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
H'FFFF
H'0000
Counter clear
signal
TGF flag
Disabled
TCFV flag
Figure 12.93 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing
407
12.7.17 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow
If there is an up-count or down-count in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, and
overflow/underflow occurs, the TCNT write takes precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is
not set .
Figure 12.94 shows the operation timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
Address
TCNT address
Write signal
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
H'FFFF
N
TCNT write data
Disabled
TCFV flag
Figure 12.94 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow
408
12.7.18 Cautions on Transition from Normal Operation or PWM Mode 1 to ResetSynchronous PWM Mode
When making a transition from channel 3 or 4 normal operation or PWM mode 1 to resetsynchronous PWM mode, if the counter is halted with the output pins (TIOC3B, TIOC3D,
TIOC4A, TIOC4C, TIOC4B, TIOC4D) in the high-impedance state, followed by the transition to
reset-synchronous PWM mode and operation in that mode, the initial pin output will not be
correct.
When making a transition from normal operation to reset-synchronous PWM mode, write H'11 to
registers TIOR3H, TIOR3L, TIOR4H, and TIOR4L to initialize the output pins to low level
output, then set an initial register value of H'00 before making the mode transition.
When making a transition from PWM mode 1 to reset-synchronous PWM mode, first switch to
normal operation, then initialize the output pins to low level output and set an initial register value
of H'00 before making the transition to reset-synchronous PWM mode.
12.7.19 Output Level in Complementary PWM Mode and Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode
When channels 3 and 4 are in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronous PWM mode, the
PWM waveform output level is set with the OLSP and OLSN bits in the timer output control
register (TOCR). In the case of complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronous PWM mode,
TIOR should be set to H'00.
12.7.20 Cautions on Using the Chopping Function in Complementary PWM Mode or Reset
Synchronous PWM Mode (A Mask Excluded)
When channels 3 and 4 are in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronous PWM mode and
using the chopping output function, setting the PWM waveform output level to low active with the
OLSP and OLSN bits in the timer output control register (TOCR) will output an incorrect gate
signal or chopping output.
When channels 3 and 4 are in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronous PWM mode and
using the chopping output function, the PWM output level should be set to high active.
12.7.21 Cautions on Carrying Out Buffer Operation of Channel 0 in PWM Mode (A Mask
Excluded)
In PWM mode 1, the TGRA and TGRB registers are used in pairs and PWM waveform is output
to the TIOCA pin. In the same manner, the TGRC and TGRD registers are used in pairs and PWM
waveform is output to the TIOCC pin. If either the TGRC or TGRD register is operating as a
buffer register, the TIOCC pin cannot execute default output setting or PWM waveform output
with the I/O control register (TIOR).
409
Note that for channel 0, the TIOCC pin allows both default output setting by TIOR and PWM
output when setting buffer operation only for the TGRD register in PWM mode.
When using channel 0 in PWM mode 1 and setting buffer operation, use both the TGRC and
TGRD registers as buffer registers.
12.7.22 Cautions on Restarting with Sync Clear of Another Channel in Complementary
PWM Mode (A Mask Excluded)
The complementation PWM mode operates while waiting for the current, next and the following
set values as values of the PWM duty. If clearing sync from another channel during operation, the
PWM output will return to the default output and restart.
When restarting with sync clear, the following operations may occur:
1. When restarting with sync clear, the next set value is used for the PWM duty, however, the
following set value may be used by mistake.
2. If sync clear and the setting of the value following the next value of PWM duty (write to
TGR4D) occurs at the same time, the next set value may be overwritten.
How to avoid 1
When selecting the mode to transfer using the crest/trough in the complementary PWM transfer
mode, set the value following the next value of the PWM duty (write to TGR4D) while the
temporary register is not executing comparisons. Furthermore, set the occurrence timing of sync
clear while the temporary register is not executing comparisons.
When selecting the mode to transfer using the crest in the transfer mode, set the value following
the next value of the PWM duty (write to TGR4D) while the temporary register is not executing
comparisons and while TCNT3 and TCNT4 are counting up. Furthermore, set the occurrence
timing of sync clear while the temporary register is not executing comparisons and while TCNT3
and TCNT4 are counting up.
When selecting the mode to transfer using the trough in the transfer mode, set the value following
the next value of the PWM duty (write to TGR4D) while the temporary register is not executing
comparisons and while TCNT3 and TCNT4 are counting down. Furthermore, set the occurrence
timing of sync clear while the temporary register is not executing comparisons and while TCNT3
and TCNT4 are counting down.
How to avoid 2
Regardless of the transfer mode, set so that the sync clear and the setting of the value following
the next value (write to TGR4D) does not occur at the same time.
410
Figure 12.95 shows an example of the duration while the temporary register is executing
comparisons. initial TB, TA, and TB indicate the duration of the temporary register comparison.
initial TB
TGR3A
TCDR
TDDR
TA
TB
TA
TB
TCNT3
TCNT4
H'0000
Figure. 12.95 Temporary Register Comparison Execution Time
12.8
MTU Output Pin Initialization
12.8.1
Operating Modes
The MTU has the following six operating modes. Waveform output is possible in all of these
modes.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Normal mode (channels 0 and 4)
PWM mode 1 (channels 0 and 4)
PWM mode 2 (channels 0 and 2)
Phase counting modes 1–4 (channels 1 and 2)
Complementary PWM mode (channels 3 and 4)
Reset-synchronous PWM mode (channels 3 and 4)
The MTU output pin initialization method for each of these modes is described in this section.
12.8.2
Reset Start Operation
The MTU output pins (TIOC *) are initialized low by a reset and in standby mode. Since MTU pin
function selection is performed by the pin function controller (PFC), when the PFC is set, the
MTU pin states at that point are output to the ports. When MTU output is selected by the PFC
immediately after a reset, the MTU output initial level, low, is output directly at the port. When
the active level is low, the system will operate at this point, and therefore the PFC setting should
be made after initialization of the MTU output pins is completed.
Note:
Channel number and port notation are substituted for *.
411
12.8.3
Operation in Case of Re-Setting Due to Error During Operation, Etc.
If an error occurs during MTU operation, MTU output should be cut by the system. Cutoff is
performed by switching the pin output to port output with the PFC and outputting the inverse of
the active level. For large-current pins, output can also be cut by hardware, using port output
enable (POE). The pin initialization procedures for re-setting due to an error during operation, etc.,
and the procedures for restarting in a different mode after re-setting, are shown below.
The MTU has six operating modes, as stated above. There are thus 36 mode transition
combinations, but some transitions are not available with certain channel and mode combinations.
Possible mode transition combinations are shown in table 12.18.
Table 12.18 Mode Transition Combinations
After
Before
Normal
PWM1
PWM2
PCM
CPWM
RPWM
Normal
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
PWM1
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
PWM2
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
None
None
PCM
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
None
None
CPWM
(21)
(22)
None
None
(23)
(24)
RPWM
(25)
(26)
None
None
(27)
(28)
Legend:
Normal: Normal mode
PWM1: PWM mode 1
PWM2: PWM mode 2
PCM: Phase counting modes 1–4
CPWM: Complementary PWM mode
RPWM: Reset-synchronous PWM mode
The above abbreviations are used in some places in following descriptions.
12.8.4
Overview of Initialization Procedures and Mode Transitions in Case of Error
during Operation, Etc.
• When making a transition to a mode (Normal, PWM1, PWM2, PCM) in which the pin output
level is selected by the timer I/O control register (TIOR) setting, initialize the pins by means of
a TIOR setting.
• In PWM mode 1, since a waveform is not output to the TIOC*B (TIOC *D) pin, setting TIOR
will not initialize the pins. If initialization is required, carry it out in normal mode, then switch
to PWM mode 1.
412
• In PWM mode 2, since a waveform is not output to the cycle register pin, setting TIOR will
not initialize the pins. If initialization is required, carry it out in normal mode, then switch to
PWM mode 2.
• In normal mode or PWM mode 2, if TGRC and TGRD operate as buffer registers, setting
TIOR will not initialize the buffer register pins. If initialization is required, clear buffer mode,
carry out initialization, then set buffer mode again.
• In PWM mode 1, if either TGRC or TGRD operates as a buffer register, setting TIOR will not
initialize the TGRC pin. To initialize the TGRC pin, clear buffer mode, carry out initialization,
then set buffer mode again.
• When making a transition to a mode (CPWM, RPWM) in which the pin output level is selected
by the timer output control register (TOCR) setting, switch to normal mode and perform
initialization with TIOR, then restore TIOR to its initial value, and temporarily disable channel
3 and 4 output with the timer output master enable register (TOER). Then operate the unit in
accordance with the mode setting procedure (TOCR setting, TMDR setting, TOER setting).
Pin initialization procedures are described below for the numbered combinations in table 12.19.
The active level is assumed to be low.
Note: Channel number is substituted for * indicated in this article.
413
(1) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 12.96 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
RESET TMDR TOER
(normal) (1)
4
5
6
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.96 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
414
After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state.
After a reset, the TMDR setting is for normal mode.
For channels 3 and 4, enable output with TOER before initializing the pins with TIOR.
Initialize the pins with TIOR. (The example shows initial high output, with low output on
compare-match occurrence.)
Set MTU output with the PFC.
The count operation is started by TSTR.
Output goes low on compare-match occurrence.
An error occurs.
Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level.
The count operation is stopped by TSTR.
Not necessary when restarting in normal mode.
Initialize the pins with TIOR.
Set MTU output with the PFC.
Operation is restarted by TSTR.
(2) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 12.97 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting.
1
2
3
RESET TMDR TOER
(normal) (1)
4
5
6
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
TIOC*B
• Not initialized (TIOC*B)
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.97 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.96.
11. Set PWM mode 1.
12. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC*B side is not initialized. If
initialization is required, initialize in normal mode, then switch to PWM mode 1.)
13. Set MTU output with the PFC.
14. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
415
(3) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in PWM Mode 2: Figure 12.98 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 2 after re-setting.
1
2
3
RESET TMDR TOER
(normal) (1)
4
5
6
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM2) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
• Not initialized (cycle register)
TIOC*A
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.98 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 2
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.96.
11. Set PWM mode 2.
12. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized. If
initialization is required, initialize in normal mode, then switch to PWM mode 2.)
13. Set MTU output with the PFC.
14. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
Note: PWM mode 2 can only be set for channels 0–2, and therefore TOER setting is not
necessary.
416
(4) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Phase Counting Mode: Figure 12.99 shows an explanatory diagram of the case
where an error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in phase counting mode after resetting.
1
2
3
RESET TMDR TOER
(normal) (1)
4
5
6
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR
occurs (PORT) (0)
(PCM)
12
13
14
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.99 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.96.
11. Set phase counting mode.
12. Initialize the pins with TIOR.
13. Set MTU output with the PFC.
14. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
Note: Phase counting mode can only be set for channels 1 and 2, and therefore TOER setting is
not necessary.
417
(5) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 12.100 shows an explanatory diagram of the
case where an error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in complementary PWM
mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
RESET TMDR TOER TIOR
(normal) (1)
(1 init
0 out)
5
6
PFC TSTR
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
Error
PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0)
13
14
15
(16)
(17)
(18)
11
12
TIOR TIOR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(1)
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(0 init (disabled) (0)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.100 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Complementary PWM
Mode
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.96.
11. Initialize the normal mode waveform generation section with TIOR.
12. Disable operation of the normal mode waveform generation section with TIOR.
13. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
14. Select the complementary PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with
TOCR.
15. Set complementary PWM.
16. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
17. Set MTU output with the PFC.
18. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
418
(6) Operation when Error Occurs during Normal Mode Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode: Figure 12.101 shows an explanatory diagram of
the case where an error occurs in normal mode and operation is restarted in reset-synchronous
PWM mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
RESET TMDR TOER TIOR
(normal) (1)
(1 init
0 out)
5
6
PFC TSTR
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
Error
PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0)
13
14
15
16
17
18
11
12
TIOR TIOR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(1)
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(0 init (disabled) (0)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.101 Error Occurrence in Normal Mode, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous
PWM Mode
1 to 13 are the same as in figure 12.100.
14. Select the reset-synchronous PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with
TOCR.
15. Set reset-synchronous PWM.
16. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
17. Set MTU output with the PFC.
18. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
419
(7) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 12.102 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
RESET TMDR TOER
(PWM1) (1)
4
5
6
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
• Not initialized (TIOC*B)
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.102 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Normal Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
420
After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state.
Set PWM mode 1.
For channels 3 and 4, enable output with TOER before initializing the pins with TIOR.
Initialize the pins with TIOR. (The example shows initial high output, with low output on
compare-match occurrence. In PWM mode 1, the TIOC*B side is not initialized.)
Set MTU output with the PFC.
The count operation is started by TSTR.
Output goes low on compare-match occurrence.
An error occurs.
Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level.
The count operation is stopped by TSTR.
Set normal mode.
Initialize the pins with TIOR.
Set MTU output with the PFC.
Operation is restarted by TSTR.
(8) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 12.103 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting.
1
2
3
RESET TMDR TOER
(PWM1) (1)
4
5
6
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
• Not initialized (TIOC*B)
TIOC*B
• Not initialized (TIOC*B)
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.103 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in PWM Mode 1
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.102.
11. Not necessary when restarting in PWM mode 1.
12. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC*B side is not initialized.)
13. Set MTU output with the PFC.
14. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
421
(9) Operation when Rrror Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in PWM Mode 2: Figure 12.104 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in PWM mode 2 after re-setting.
1
2
3
RESET TMDR TOER
(PWM1) (1)
4
5
6
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM2) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
• Not initialized (cycle register)
TIOC*A
• Not initialized (TIOC*B)
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.104 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in PWM Mode 2
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.102.
11. Set PWM mode 2.
12. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized.)
13. Set MTU output with the PFC.
14. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
Note: PWM mode 2 can only be set for channels 0–2, and therefore TOER setting is not
necessary.
422
(10) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Phase Counting Mode: Figure 12.105 shows an explanatory diagram of the case
where an error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in phase counting mode after resetting.
1
2
3
RESET TMDR TOER
(PWM1) (1)
4
5
6
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR
occurs (PORT) (0)
(PCM)
12
13
14
TIOR PFC TSTR
(1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
• Not initialized (TIOC*B)
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.105 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.102.
11. Set phase counting mode.
12. Initialize the pins with TIOR.
13. Set MTU output with the PFC.
14. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
Note: Phase counting mode can only be set for channels 1 and 2, and therefore TOER setting is
not necessary.
423
(11) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 12.106 shows an explanatory diagram of the
case where an error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in complementary PWM
mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
RESET TMDR TOER TIOR
(PWM1) (1)
(1 init
0 out)
5
6
PFC TSTR
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
14
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR TIOR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (0 init (disabled) (0)
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
• Not initialized (TIOC3B)
TIOC3D
• Not initialized (TIOC3D)
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.106 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Complementary
PWM Mode
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.102.
11. Set normal mode for initialization of the normal mode waveform generation section.
12. Initialize the PWM mode 1 waveform generation section with TIOR.
13. Disable operation of the PWM mode 1 waveform generation section with TIOR.
14. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
15. Select the complementary PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with
TOCR.
16. Set complementary PWM.
17. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
18. Set MTU output with the PFC.
19. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
424
(12) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 1 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode: Figure 12.107 shows an explanatory diagram of
the case where an error occurs in PWM mode 1 and operation is restarted in reset-synchronous
PWM mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
RESET TMDR TOER TIOR
(PWM1) (1)
(1 init
0 out)
5
6
PFC TSTR
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
14
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR TIOR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (0 init (disabled) (0)
(RPWM) (1)
(MTU)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
• Not initialized (TIOC3B)
TIOC3D
• Not initialized (TIOC3D)
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.107 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 1, Recovery in Reset-Synchronous
PWM Mode
1 to 14 are the same as in figure 12.106.
15. Select the reset-synchronous PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with
TOCR.
16. Set reset-synchronous PWM.
17. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
18. Set MTU output with the PFC.
19. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
425
(13) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 2 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 12.108 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in PWM mode 2 and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
RESET TMDR TIOR
(PWM2) (1 init
0 out)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
PFC TSTR Match Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
(MTU)
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
• Not initialized (cycle register)
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.108 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in Normal Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
426
After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state.
Set PWM mode 2.
Initialize the pins with TIOR. (The example shows initial high output, with low output on
compare-match occurrence. In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized. In the
example, TIOC *A is the cycle register.)
Set MTU output with the PFC.
The count operation is started by TSTR.
Output goes low on compare-match occurrence.
An error occurs.
Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level.
The count operation is stopped by TSTR.
Set normal mode.
Initialize the pins with TIOR.
Set MTU output with the PFC.
Operation is restarted by TSTR.
(14) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 2 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 12.109 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in PWM mode 2 and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RESET TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
(PWM2) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
• Not initialized (cycle register)
TIOC*B
• Not initialized (TIOC*B)
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.109 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in PWM Mode 1
1 to 9 are the same as in figure 12.108.
10. Set PWM mode 1.
11. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC*B side is not initialized.)
12. Set MTU output with the PFC.
13. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
427
(15) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 2 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in PWM Mode 2: Figure 12.110 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in PWM mode 2 and operation is restarted in PWM mode 2 after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RESET TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
(PWM2) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM2) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
• Not initialized (cycle register)
• Not initialized (cycle register)
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.110 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in PWM Mode 2
1 to 9 are the same as in figure 12.108.
10. Not necessary when restarting in PWM mode 2.
11. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized.)
12. Set MTU output with the PFC.
13. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
428
(16) Operation when Error Occurs during PWM Mode 2 Operation, and Operation is
Restarted in Phase Counting Mode: Figure 12.111 shows an explanatory diagram of the case
where an error occurs in PWM mode 2 and operation is restarted in phase counting mode after resetting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RESET TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
(PWM2) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0)
(PCM) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
• Not initialized (cycle register)
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.111 Error Occurrence in PWM Mode 2, Recovery in Phase Counting Mode
1 to 9 are the same as in figure 12.108.
10. Set phase counting mode.
11. Initialize the pins with TIOR.
12. Set MTU output with the PFC.
13. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
429
(17) Operation when Error Occurs during Phase Counting Mode Operation, and Operation
is Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 12.112 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in phase counting mode and operation is restarted in normal mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RESET TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
(PCM) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.112 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in Normal Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
430
After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state.
Set phase counting mode.
Initialize the pins with TIOR. (The example shows initial high output, with low output on
compare-match occurrence.)
Set MTU output with the PFC.
The count operation is started by TSTR.
Output goes low on compare-match occurrence.
An error occurs.
Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level.
The count operation is stopped by TSTR.
Set in normal mode.
Initialize the pins with TIOR.
Set MTU output with the PFC.
Operation is restarted by TSTR.
(18) Operation when Error Occurs during Phase Counting Mode Operation, and Operation
is Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 12.113 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in phase counting mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 1 after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RESET TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
(PCM) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
TIOC*B
• Not initialized (TIOC*B)
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.113 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 1
1 to 9 are the same as in figure 12.112.
10. Set PWM mode 1.
11. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC *B side is not initialized.)
12. Set MTU output with the PFC.
13. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
431
(19) Operation when Error Occurs during Phase Counting Mode Operation, and Operation
is Restarted in PWM Mode 2: Figure 12.114 shows an explanatory diagram of the case where an
error occurs in phase counting mode and operation is restarted in PWM mode 2 after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RESET TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
(PCM) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM2) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
0 out)
MTU output
• Not initialized (cycle register)
TIOC*A
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.114 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in PWM Mode 2
1 to 9 are the same as in figure 12.112.
10. Set PWM mode 2.
11. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 2, the cycle register pins are not initialized.)
12. Set MTU output with the PFC.
13. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
432
(20) Operation when Error Occurs during Phase Counting Mode Operation, and Operation
is Restarted in Phase Counting Mode: Figure 12.115 shows an explanatory diagram of the case
where an error occurs in phase counting mode and operation is restarted in phase counting mode
after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RESET TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR Match Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
(PCM) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0)
(PCM) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC*A
TIOC*B
Port output
PEn
High-Z
PEn
High-Z
n=0 to 15
Figure 12.115 Error Occurrence in Phase Counting Mode, Recovery in Phase
Counting Mode
1 to 9 are the same as in figure 12.112.
10. Not necessary when restarting in phase counting mode.
11. Initialize the pins with TIOR.
12. Set MTU output with the PFC.
13. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
433
(21) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and
Operation is Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 12.116 shows an explanatory diagram of the
case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and operation is restarted in normal
mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.116 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in
Normal Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
434
After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state.
Select the complementary PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with
TOCR.
Set complementary PWM.
Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
Set MTU output with the PFC.
The count operation is started by TSTR.
The complementary PWM waveform is output on compare-match occurrence.
An error occurs.
Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level.
The count operation is stopped by TSTR. (MTU output becomes the complementary PWM
output initial value.)
Set normal mode. (MTU output goes low.)
Initialize the pins with TIOR.
Set MTU output with the PFC.
Operation is restarted by TSTR.
(22) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and
Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 12.117 shows an explanatory diagram of the
case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and operation is restarted in PWM
mode 1 after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
• Not initialized (TIOC3B)
TIOC3D
• Not initialized (TIOC3D)
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.117 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in PWM
Mode 1
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.116.
11. Set PWM mode 1. (MTU output goes low.)
12. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC *B side is not initialized.)
13. Set MTU output with the PFC.
14. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
435
(23a) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and
Operation is Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 12.118 shows an explanatory
diagram of the case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and operation is
restarted in complementary PWM mode after re-setting (when operation is restarted using the
cycle and duty settings at the time the counter was stopped).
1
2
3
4
5
6
RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
Error
PFC TSTR PFC TSTR Match
occurs (PORT) (0)
(MTU)
(1)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.118 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in
Complementary PWM Mode
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.116.
11. Set MTU output with the PFC.
12. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
13. The complementary PWM waveform is output on compare-match occurrence.
436
(23b) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and
Operation is Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 12.119 shows an explanatory
diagram of the case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and operation is
restarted in complementary PWM mode after re-setting (when operation is restarted using
completely new cycle and duty settings).
1
2
3
4
5
6
RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (0)
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.119 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode, Recovery in
Complementary PWM Mode
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.116.
11. Set normal mode and make new settings. (MTU output goes low.)
12. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
13. Select the complementary PWM mode output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with
TOCR.
14. Set complementary PWM.
15. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
16. Set MTU output with the PFC.
17. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
437
(24) Operation when Error Occurs during Complementary PWM Mode Operation, and
Operation is Restarted in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode: Figure 12.120 shows an
explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in complementary PWM mode and
operation is restarted in reset-synchronous PWM mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(1)
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (0)
(RPWM) (1)
(MTU)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.120 Error Occurrence in Complementary PWM Mode,
Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.116.
11. Set normal mode. (MTU output goes low.)
12. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
13. Select the reset-synchronous PWM mode output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling
with TOCR.
14. Set reset-synchronous PWM.
15. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
16. Set MTU output with the PFC.
17. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
438
(25) Operation when Error Occurs during Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode Operation, and
Operation is Restarted in Normal Mode: Figure 12.121 shows an explanatory diagram of the
case where an error occurs in reset-synchronous PWM mode and operation is restarted in normal
mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (normal) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.121 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode,
Recovery in Normal Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
After a reset, MTU output is low and ports are in the high-impedance state.
Select the reset-synchronous PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with
TOCR.
Set reset-synchronous PWM.
Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
Set MTU output with the PFC.
The count operation is started by TSTR.
The reset-synchronous PWM waveform is output on compare-match occurrence.
An error occurs.
Set port output with the PFC and output the inverse of the active level.
The count operation is stopped by TSTR. (MTU output becomes the reset-synchronous PWM
output initial value.)
Set normal operating mode. (MTU positive phase output is low, and negative phase output is
high.)
Initialize the pins with TIOR.
Set MTU output with the PFC.
Operation is restarted by TSTR.
439
(26) Operation when Error Occurs during Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode Operation, and
Operation is Restarted in PWM Mode 1: Figure 12.122 shows an explanatory diagram of the
case where an error occurs in reset-synchronous PWM mode and operation is restarted in PWM
mode 1 after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(RPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error
PFC TSTR TMDR TIOR PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0) (PWM1) (1 init (MTU)
(1)
0 out)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
• Not initialized (TIOC3B)
TIOC3D
• Not initialized (TIOC3D)
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.122 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode,
Recovery in PWM Mode 1
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.121.
11. Set PWM mode 1. (MTU positive phase output is low, and negative phase output is high.)
12. Initialize the pins with TIOR. (In PWM mode 1, the TIOC *B side is not initialized.)
13. Set MTU output with the PFC.
14. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
440
(27) Operation when Error Occurs during Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode Operation, and
Operation is Restarted in Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 12.123 shows an explanatory
diagram of the case where an error occurs in reset-synchronous PWM mode and operation is
restarted in complementary PWM mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(RPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Error
PFC TSTR TOER TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
occurs (PORT) (0)
(0)
(CPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.123 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode,
Recovery in Complementary PWM Mode
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.121.
11. Disable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
12. Select the complementary PWM output level and cyclic output enabling/disabling with
TOCR.
13. Set complementary PWM. (The MTU cyclic output pin goes low.)
14. Enable channel 3 and 4 output with TOER.
15. Set MTU output with the PFC.
16. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
441
(28) Operation when Error Occurs during Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode Operation, and
Operation is Restarted in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode: Figure 12.124 shows an
explanatory diagram of the case where an error occurs in reset-synchronous PWM mode and
operation is restarted in reset-synchronous PWM mode after re-setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
RESET TOCR TMDR TOER PFC TSTR
(RPWM) (1)
(MTU)
(1)
7
Match
8
9
10
11
12
13
Error
PFC TSTR PFC TSTR Match
occurs (PORT) (0)
(MTU)
(1)
MTU output
TIOC3A
TIOC3B
TIOC3D
Port output
PE8
High-Z
PE9
High-Z
PE11
High-Z
Figure 12.124 Error Occurrence in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode,
Recovery in Reset-Synchronous PWM Mode
1 to 10 are the same as in figure 12.121.
11. Set MTU output with the PFC.
12. Operation is restarted by TSTR.
13. The reset-synchronous PWM waveform is output on compare-match occurrence.
442
12.9
Port Output Enable (POE)
The port output enable (POE) can be used to establish a high-impedance state for high-current
pins, by changing the POE0–POE3 pin input, depending on the output status of the high-current
pins (PE09/TIOC3B, PE11/TIOC3D, PE12/TIOC4A, PE13/TIOC4B/MRES,
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH, PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT). It can also simultaneously
generate interrupt requests.
The high-current pins also become high-impedance regardless of whether these pin functions are
selected in cases such as when the oscillator stops or in standby mode. Refer to section 4, Clock
Pulse Generator (CPG), for details.
12.9.1
Features
• Each of the POE0–POE3 input pins can be set for falling edge, φ/8 × 16, φ/16 × 16, or φ/128 ×
16 low-level sampling.
• High-current pins can be set to high-impedance state by POE0–POE3 pin falling-edge or lowlevel sampling.
• High-current pins can be set to high-impedance state when the high-current pin output levels
are compared and simultaneous low-level output continues for one cycle or more (except in the
33.3 MHz version).
• Interrupts can be generated by input-level sampling or output-level comparison results.
443
12.9.2
Block Diagram
The POE has input-level detection circuitry and output-level detection circuitry, as shown in the
block diagram of figure 12.125.
TIOC3B*
TIOC3D*
Output level
detection circuit
TIOC4A*
TIOC4C*
Output level
detection circuit
TIOC4B*
TIOC4D*
Output level
detection circuit
Highimpedance
request control
signal
OCSR
Interrupt
request
ICSR
Input level detection circuit
Falling-edge
detection circuit
POE3
POE2
POE1
POE0
Low-level
detection circuit
Note: * Includes multiplexed pins.
φ/8
φ/16
φ/128
Figure 12.125 POE Block Diagram
444
12.9.3
Pin Configuration
Table 12.18 shows the POE pins.
Table 12.18 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Description
Port output enable input pins
POE0–POE3
Input
Input request signals to make highcurrent pins high-impedance state
Table 12.19 shows output-level comparisons with pin combinations.
Table 12.19 Output Level Comparisons
Pin Combination
I/O
Description
PE09/TIOC3B and
PE11/TIOC3D
Output
All high-current pins are made high-impedance
state when the pins simultaneously output low-level
for longer than 1 cycle.
PE12/TIOC4A and
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
Output
All high-current pins are made high-impedance
state when the pins simultaneously output low-level
for longer than 1 cycle.
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES and
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
Output
All high-current pins are made high-impedance
state when the pins simultaneously output low-level
for longer than 1 cycle.
12.9.4
Register Configuration
The POE has the two registers shown in table 12.20. The input level control/status register (ICSR)
controls both POE0–POE3 pin input signal detection and interrupts. The output level
control/status register (OCSR) controls both the enable/disable of output comparison and
interrupts.
Table 12.20 Input Level Control/Status Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
Input level control/status
register
ICSR
R/(W)*
H'0000
H'FFFF83C0
H'FFFF83C1
8, 16, 32
Output level
control/status register
OCSR
R/(W)*2 H'0000
H'FFFF83C2
H'FFFF83C3
8, 16, 32
1
Notes: *1 Only 0 writes to bits 15–12 are possible to clear the flags.
*2 Only 0 writes to bits 15 are possible to clear the flags.
445
12.10
POE Register Descriptions
12.10.1 Input Level Control/Status Register (ICSR)
The input level control/status register (ICSR) is a 16-bit read/write register that selects the POE0–
POE3 pin input modes, controls the enable/prohibit of interrupts, and indicates status. If any of the
POE3F–POE0F bits are set to 1, the high current pins become high impedance state.
ICSR is initialized to H'0000 by power-on resets; however, it is not initialized for manual resets,
standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
POE3F
POE2F
POE1F
POE0F
—
—
—
PIE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
POE3M1 POE3M0 POE2M1 POE2M0 POE1M1 POE1M0 POE0M1 POE0M0
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Only 0 writes are possible to clear the flags.
• Bit 15—POE3 Flag (POE3F): This flag indicates that a high impedance request has been input
to the POE3 pin.
Bit 15: POE3F
Description
0
Clear condition: By writing 0 to POE3F after reading a POE3F = 1
(initial value)
1
Set condition: When the input set by ICSR bits 7 and 6 occurs at
the POE3 pin
• Bit 14—POE2 Flag (POE2F): This flag indicates that a high impedance request has been input
to the POE2 pin.
Bit 14: POE2F
Description
0
Clear condition: By writing 0 to POE2F after reading a POE2F = 1
(initial value)
1
Set condition: When the input set by ICSR bits 5 and 4 occurs at
the POE2 pin
446
• Bit 13—POE1 Flag (POE1F): This flag indicates that a high impedance request has been input
to the POE1 pin.
Bit 13: POE1F
Description
0
Clear condition: By writing 0 to POE1F after reading a POE1F = 1
(initial value)
1
Set condition: When the input set by ICSR bits 3 and 2 occurs at
the POE1 pin
• Bit 12—POE0 Flag (POE0F): This flag indicates that a high impedance request has been input
to the POE0 pin.
Bit 12: POE0F
Description
0
Clear condition: By writing 0 to POE0F after reading a POE0F = 1
(initial value)
1
Set condition: When the input set by ICSR bits 1 and 0 occurs at
the POE0 pin
• Bits 11–9—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 8—Port Interrupt Enable (PIE): Enables or disables interrupt requests when any of the
POE0F–POE3F bits of the ICSR are set to 1.
Bit 8: PIE
Description
0
Interrupt requests disabled (initial value)
1
Interrupt requests enabled
• Bits 7 and 6—POE3 Mode 1, 0 (POE3M1 and POE3M0): These bits select the input mode of
the POE3 pin.
Bit 7:
POE3M1
Bit 6:
POE3M0
Description
0
0
Accept request on falling edge of POE3 input. (initial value)
1
Accept request when POE3 input has been sampled for 16
φ/8 clock pulses, and all are low level.
0
Accept request when POE3 input has been sampled for 16
φ/16 clock pulses, and all are low level.
1
Accept request when POE3 input has been sampled for 16
φ/128 clock pulses, and all are low level.
1
447
• Bits 5 and 4—POE2 Mode 1, 0 (POE2M1 and POE2M0): These bits select the input mode of
the POE2 pin.
Bit 5:
POE2M1
Bit 4:
POE2M0
Description
0
0
Accept request on falling edge of POE2 input. (initial value)
1
Accept request when POE2 input has been sampled for 16
φ/8 clock pulses, and all are low level.
0
Accept request when POE2 input has been sampled for 16
φ/16 clock pulses, and all are low level.
1
Accept request when POE2 input has been sampled for 16
φ/128 clock pulses, and all are low level.
1
• Bits 3 and 2—POE1 Mode 1, 0 (POE1M1 and POE1M0): These bits select the input mode of
the POE1 pin.
Bit 3:
POE1M1
Bit 2:
POE1M0
Description
0
0
Accept request on falling edge of POE1 input. (initial value)
1
Accept request when POE1 input has been sampled for 16
φ/8 clock pulses, and all are low level.
0
Accept request when POE1 input has been sampled for 16
φ/16 clock pulses, and all are low level.
1
Accept request when POE1 input has been sampled for 16
φ/128 clock pulses, and all are low level.
1
• Bits 1 and 0—POE0 Mode 1, 0 (POE0M1 and POE0M0): These bits select the input mode of
the POE0 pin.
Bit 1:
POE0M1
Bit 0:
POE0M0
Description
0
0
Accept request on falling edge of POE0 input. (initial value)
1
Accept request when POE0 input has been sampled for 16
φ/8 clock pulses, and all are low level.
0
Accept request when POE0 input has been sampled for 16
φ/16 clock pulses, and all are low level.
1
Accept request when POE0 input has been sampled for 16
φ/128 clock pulses, and all are low level.
1
448
12.10.2 Output Level Control/Status Register (OCSR)
The output level control/status register (OCSR) is a 16-bit read/write register that controls the
enable/disable of both output level comparison and interrupts, and indicates status. If the OSF bit
is set to 1, the high current pins become high impedance.
OCSR is initialized to H'0000 by an external power-on reset; however, it is not initialized for
manual resets, reset by WDT standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
OSF
—
—
—
—
—
OCE
OIE
0
R/(W)*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Note: * Only 0 writes are possible to clear the flag.
• Bit 15—Output Short Flag (OSF): This flag indicates that among the three pairs of 2 phase
outputs compared, the outputs of at least one pair have simultaneously become Low level
output.
Bit 15: OSF
Description
0
Clear condition: By writing 0 to OSF after reading an OSF = 1 (initial value)
1
Set condition: When any one pair of the 2-phase outputs simultaneously
become Low level
• Bits 14–10—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
449
• Bit 9—Output Level Compare Enable (OCE): This bit enables the start of output level
comparisons. When setting this bit, pay special attention to the output pin combinations shown
in table 12.19. When 0 is output, the OSF bit is set to 1 at the same time this bit is set, and
output goes to high impedance. Accordingly, bits 15–11 and bit 9 of the port E data register
(PEDR) are set to 1. For the MTU output comparison, set the bit to 1 after setting the MTU’s
output pins with the PFC. Set this bit only when using pins as outputs.
When the OCE bit is set to 1, if OIE = 0 a high-impedance request will not be issued even if
OSF is set to 1. Therefore, in order to have a high-impedance request issued according to the
result of the output comparison, the OIE bit must be set to 1. When OCE = 1 and OIE = 1, an
interrupt request will be generated at the same time as the high-impedance request; however,
this interrupt can be masked by means of an interrupt controller (INTC) setting.
Bit 9: OCE
Description
0
Output level compare disabled (initial value)
1
Output level compare enabled; makes an output high impedance request
when OSF = 1.
• Bit 8—Output Short Interrupt Enable (OIE): Makes interrupt requests when the OSF bit of the
OCSR is set.
Bit 8: OIE
Description
0
Interrupt requests disabled (initial value)
1
Interrupt requests enabled
• Bits 7–0—Reserved: Always read as 0, and cannot be modified.
450
12.11
Operation
12.11.1 Input Level Detection Operation
If the input conditions set by the ICSR occur on any of the POE pins, all high-current pins become
high-impedance state.
Falling Edge Detection: When a change from high to low level is input to the POE pins.
Low-Level Detection: Figure 12.126 shows the low-level detection operation. Sixteen continuous
low levels are sampled with the sampling clock established by the ICSR. If even one high level is
detected during this interval, the low level is not accepted.
8/16/128 clock
cycles
CK
Sampling
clock
POE input
PE9/TIOC3B
High-impedance
state*
When low level is sampled
at all points
1
2
When high level is sampled
at least once
1
2
3
16
Flag set
(POE received)
13
Flag not set
Note: * Other large-current pins (PE11/TIOC3D, PE12/TIOC4A, PE13/TIOC4B/MRES, PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH,
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IROOUT) also go to the high-impedance state at the same time.
Figure 12.126 Low-Level Detection Operation
451
12.11.2 Output-Level Compare Operation
Figure 12.127 shows an example of the output-level compare operation for the combination of
PE09/TIOC3B and PE11/TIOC3D. The operation is the same for the other pin combinations.
CK
0 level overlapping detected
PE09/
TIOC3B
PE11/
TIOC3D
High impedance state
Figure 12.127 Output-Level Detection Operation
12.11.3 Release from High-Impedance State
High-current pins that have entered high-impedance state due to input-level detection can be
released either by returning them to their initial state with a power-on reset, or by clearing all of
the bit 12–15 (POE0F–POE3F) flags of the ICSR. High-current pins that have become highimpedance due to output-level detection can be released either by returning them to their initial
state with a power-on reset, or by first clearing bit 9 (OCE) of the OCSR to disable output-level
compares, then clearing the bit 15 (OSF) flag. However, when returning from high-impedance
state by clearing the OSF flag, always do so only after outputting a high level from the highcurrent pins (TIOC3B, TIOC3D, TIOC4A, TIOC4B, TIOC4C, and TIOC4D). High-level outputs
can be achieved by setting the MTU internal registers. See section 12.2, MTU Register
Descriptions, for details.
452
12.11.4 POE timing
Figure 12.128 shows an example of timing from POE input to high impedance of pin.
CK
CK last transition
POE input
Last transition edge detected
PE9/TIOC3B
High impedance state*
Note: * Other high current pins (PE11/TICO3D, PE12/TIOC4A, PE13/TIOC4B/MRES,
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH, PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT) will enter the high
impedance state with the same timing.
Figure 12.128 Last Transition Edge Detection Operation
12.11.5 Usage Notes
To perform POE level detection, first set POE input to high level.
453
454
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
13.1
Overview
The watchdog timer (WDT) is a 1-channel timer for monitoring system operations. If a system
encounters a problem (crashes, for example) and the timer counter overflows without being
rewritten correctly by the CPU, an overflow signal (WDTOVF) is output externally. The WDT
can simultaneously generate an internal reset signal for the entire chip.
When the watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In the
interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated at each counter overflow. The
WDT is also used in recovering from the standby mode.
13.1.1
Features
• Works in watchdog timer mode or interval timer mode.
• Outputs WDTOVF in the watchdog timer mode. When the counter overflows in the watchdog
timer mode, overflow signal WDTOVF is output externally. You can select whether to reset
the chip internally when this happens. Either the power-on reset or manual reset signal can be
selected as the internal reset signal.
• Generates interrupts in the interval timer mode. When the counter overflows, it generates an
interval timer interrupt.
• Clears standby mode.
• Works with eight counter input clocks.
455
13.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 13.1 is the block diagram of the WDT.
Overflow
Interrupt
control
Clock
WDTOVF
Clock
select
Reset
control
Internal
reset signal*
RSTCSR
TCNT
TCSR
Bus
interface
Module bus
TCSR:
TCNT:
RSTCSR:
Note:
φ/2
φ/64
φ/128
φ/256
φ/512
φ/1024
φ/4096
φ/8192
Internal
clock sources
Internal data bus
ITI
(interrupt
signal)
WDT
Timer control/status register
Timer counter
Reset control/status register
* The internal reset signal can be generated by setting the register.
The type of reset can be selected (power-on or manual).
Figure 13.1 WDT Block Diagram
13.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 13.1 shows the pin configuration.
Table 13.1 Pin Configuration
Pin
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Watchdog timer overflow
WDTOVF
O
Outputs the counter overflow signal in the
watchdog timer mode
456
13.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 13.2 summarizes the three WDT registers. They are used to select the clock, switch the
WDT mode, and control the reset signal.
Table 13.2 WDT Registers
Address
Write*
R/(W)*3
H'18
H'FFFF8610
TCNT
R/W
H'00
RSTCSR
R/(W)*3
H'1F
Abbreviation R/W
Timer control/status
register
TCSR
Timer counter
Reset control/status
register
Read* 2
Initial Value
Name
1
H'FFFF8610
H'FFFF8611
H'FFFF8612
H'FFFF8613
Notes: *1 Write by word transfer. It cannot be written in byte or longword.
*2 Read by byte transfer. It cannot be read in word or longword.
*3 Only 0 can be written in bit 7 to clear the flag.
13.2
Register Descriptions
13.2.1
Timer Counter (TCNT)
The TCNT is an 8-bit read/write upcounter. (The TCNT differs from other registers in that it is
more difficult to write to. See section 13.2.4, Register Access, for details.) When the timer enable
bit (TME) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1, the watchdog timer counter starts
counting pulses of an internal clock selected by clock select bits 2–0 (CKS2–CKS0) in the TCSR.
When the value of the TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), a watchdog timer overflow
signal (WDTOVF) or interval timer interrupt (ITI) is generated, depending on the mode selected
in the WT/IT bit of the TCSR.
The TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and when the TME bit is cleared to 0. It is not
initialized in the standby mode. The TCNT is not initialized by a manual reset from an external
source (MRES), but is initialized by a manual reset from the WDT.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W:
457
13.2.2
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
The timer control/status register (TCSR) is an 8-bit read/write register. (The TCSR differs from
other registers in that it is more difficult to write to. See section 13.2.4, Register Access, for
details.) Its functions include selecting the timer mode and clock source.
Bits 7–5 are initialized to 000 by a power-on reset or in standby mode. Bits 2–0 are initialized to
000 by a power-on reset, but retain their values in the standby mode. These bits are not initialized
by a manual reset from an external source (MRES), but are initialized by a manual reset from the
WDT.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
R/(W)
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bit 7—Overflow Flag (OVF): Indicates that the TCNT has overflowed from H'FF to H'00 in
the interval timer mode. It is not set in the watchdog timer mode.
Bit 7: OVF
Description
0
No overflow of TCNT in interval timer mode (initial value)
Cleared by reading OVF, then writing 0 in OVF
1
TCNT overflow in the interval timer mode
• Bit 6—Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): Selects whether to use the WDT as a watchdog timer or
interval timer. When the TCNT overflows, the WDT either generates an interval timer
interrupt (ITI) or generates a WDTOVF signal, depending on the mode selected.
Bit 6: WT/IT
Description
0
Interval timer mode: interval timer interrupt request to the CPU when
TCNT overflows (initial value)
1
Watchdog timer mode: WDTOVF signal output externally when TCNT
overflows. (Section 13.2.3, Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR),
describes in detail what happens when TCNT overflows in the watchdog
timer mode.)
458
• Bit 5—Timer Enable (TME): Enables or disables the timer.
Bit 5: TME
Description
0
Timer disabled: TCNT is initialized to H'00 and count-up stops (initial
value)
1
Timer enabled: TCNT starts counting. A WDTOVF signal or interrupt is
generated when TCNT overflows.
• Bits 4 and 3—Reserved: These bits always read as 1. The write value should always be 1.
• Bits 2–0: Clock Select 2–0 (CKS2–CKS0): These bits select one of eight internal clock sources
for input to the TCNT. The clock signals are obtained by dividing the frequency of the system
clock (φ).
Description
Bit 2: CKS2 Bit 1: CKS1
Bit 0: CKS0
Clock Source
Overflow Interval*
(φ = 28.7 MHz)
0
0
0
φ/2 (initial value)
17.9 µs
0
0
1
φ/64
573.4 µs
0
1
0
φ/128
1.1 ms
0
1
1
φ/256
2.3 ms
1
0
0
φ/512
4.6 ms
1
0
1
φ/1024
9.2 ms
1
1
0
φ/4096
36.7 ms
1
1
1
φ/8192
73.4 ms
Note: * The overflow interval listed is the time from when the TCNT begins counting at H'00 until
an overflow occurs.
459
13.2.3
Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)
The RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable and writable register. (The RSTCSR differs from other registers
in that it is more difficult to write. See section 13.2.4, Register Access, for details.) It controls
output of the internal reset signal generated by timer counter (TCNT) overflow and selects the
internal reset signal type. RSTCR is initialized to H'1F by input of a reset signal from the RES pin,
but is not initialized by the internal reset signal generated by the overflow of the WDT. It is
initialized to H'1F in standby mode.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WOVF
RSTE
RSTS
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Only 0 can be written in bit 7 to clear the flag.
• Bit 7—Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF): Indicates that the TCNT has overflowed
(H'FF–H'00) in the watchdog timer mode. It is not set in the interval timer mode.
Bit 7: WOVF
Description
0
No TCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode (initial value)
Cleared when software reads WOVF, then writes 0 in WOVF
1
Set by TCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode
• Bit 6—Reset Enable (RSTE): Selects whether to reset the chip internally if the TCNT
overflows in the watchdog timer mode.
Bit 6: RSTE
Description
0
Not reset when TCNT overflows (initial value). LSI not reset internally,
but TCNT and TCSR reset within WDT.
1
Reset when TCNT overflows
• Bit 5—Reset Select (RSTS): Selects the type of internal reset generated if the TCNT overflows
in the watchdog timer mode.
Bit 5: RSTS
Description
0
Power-on reset (initial value)
1
Manual reset
• Bits 4–0—Reserved: These bits always read as 1. The write value should always be 1.
460
13.2.4
Register Access
The watchdog timer’s TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in that they
are more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing and reading these registers are given
below.
Writing to the TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written by a word transfer instruction.
They cannot be written by byte transfer instructions.
The TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. The write data must be contained in the
lower byte of the written word. The upper byte must be H'5A (for the TCNT) or H'A5 (for the
TCSR) (figure 13.2). This transfers the write data from the lower byte to the TCNT or TCSR.
Writing to the TCNT
15
Address: H'FFFF8610
8
7
H'5A
0
Write data
Writing to the TCSR
15
Address: H'FFFF8610
8
H'A5
7
0
Write data
Figure 13.2 Writing to the TCNT and TCSR
Writing to the RSTCSR: The RSTCSR must be written by a word access to address
H'FFFF8612. It cannot be written by byte transfer instructions.
Procedures for writing 0 in WOVF (bit 7) and for writing to RSTE (bit 6) and RSTS (bit 5) are
different, as shown in figure 13.3.
To write 0 in the WOVF bit, the write data must be H'A5 in the upper byte and H'00 in the lower
byte. This clears the WOVF bit to 0. The RSTE and RSTS bits are not affected. To write to the
RSTE and RSTS bits, the upper byte must be H'5A and the lower byte must be the write data. The
values of bits 6 and 5 of the lower byte are transferred to the RSTE and RSTS bits, respectively.
The WOVF bit is not affected.
461
Writing 0 to the WOVF bit
15
Address: H'FFFF8612
8
7
H'A5
0
H'00
Writing to the RSTE and RSTS bits
15
Address: H'FFFF8612
8
H'5A
7
0
Write data
Figure 13.3 Writing to the RSTCSR
Reading from the TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR: TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR are read like
other registers. Use byte transfer instructions. The read addresses are H'FFFF8610 for the TCSR,
H'FFFF8611 for the TCNT, and H'FFFF8613 for the RSTCSR.
13.3
Operation
13.3.1
Watchdog Timer Mode
To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT and TME bits of the TCSR to 1. Software
must prevent TCNT overflow by rewriting the TCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before
overflow occurs. No TCNT overflows will occur while the system is operating normally, but if the
TCNT fails to be rewritten and overflows occur due to a system crash or the like, a WDTOVF
signal is output externally (figure 13.4). The WDTOVF signal can be used to reset the system. The
WDTOVF signal is output for 128 φ clock cycles.
If the RSTE bit in the RSTCSR is set to 1, a signal to reset the chip will be generated internally
simultaneous to the WDTOVF signal when TCNT overflows. Either a power-on reset or a manual
reset can be selected by the RSTS bit. The internal reset signal is output for 512 φ clock cycles.
When a watchdog overflow reset is generated simultaneously with a reset input at the RES pin, the
RES reset takes priority, and the WOVF bit is cleared to 0.
The following are not initialized a WDT reset signal:
• The MTU’s POE (Port Output Enable) function register
• PFC (Pin Function Controller) function register
• I/O port register
Initializing is only possible by external power-on reset.
462
TCNT
value
Overflow
H'FF
H'00
Time
WT/IT = 1
TME = 1
H'00 written
in TCNT
WOVF = 1
WT/IT = 1 H'00 written
TME = 1
in TCNT
WDTOVF and
internal reset generated
WDTOVF
signal
128 φ clocks
Internal
reset signal*
WT/IT: Timer mode select bit
TME: Timer enable bit
512 φ clocks
Note: * Internal reset signal occurs only when the RSTE bit is set to 1.
Figure 13.4 Operation in the Watchdog Timer Mode
463
13.3.2
Interval Timer Mode
To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear WT/IT to 0 and set TME to 1. An interval timer
interrupt (ITI) is generated each time the timer counter overflows. This function can be used to
generate interval timer interrupts at regular intervals (figure 13.5).
TCNT value
Overflow
H'FF
Overflow
Overflow
Overflow
H'00
Time
WT/IT = 0
TME = 1
ITI
ITI
ITI
ITI
ITI: Interval timer interrupt request generation
Figure 13.5 Operation in the Interval Timer Mode
13.3.3
Clearing the Standby Mode
The watchdog timer has a special function to clear the standby mode with an NMI interrupt. When
using the standby mode, set the WDT as described below.
Before Transition to the Standby Mode: The TME bit in the TCSR must be cleared to 0 to stop
the watchdog timer counter before it enters the standby mode. The chip cannot enter the standby
mode while the TME bit is set to 1. Set bits CKS2–CKS0 so that the counter overflow interval is
equal to or longer than the oscillation settling time. See sections 25.3, and 26.3, AC
Characteristics, for the oscillation settling time.
Recovery from the Standby Mode: When an NMI request signal is received in standby mode,
the clock oscillator starts running and the watchdog timer starts incrementing at the rate selected
by bits CKS2–CKS0 before the standby mode was entered. When the TCNT overflows (changes
from H'FF to H'00), the clock is presumed to be stable and usable; clock signals are supplied to the
entire chip and the standby mode ends.
For details on the standby mode, see section 24, Power-Down State.
464
13.3.4
Timing of Setting the Overflow Flag (OVF)
In the interval timer mode, when the TCNT overflows, the OVF flag of the TCSR is set to 1 and
an interval timer interrupt is simultaneously requested (figure 13.6).
CK
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
(internal signal)
OVF
Figure 13.6 Timing of Setting the OVF
13.3.5
Timing of Setting the Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF)
When the TCNT overflows in the watchdog timer mode, the WOVF bit of the RSTCSR is set to 1
and a WDTOVF signal is output. When the RSTE bit is set to 1, TCNT overflow enables an
internal reset signal to be generated for the entire chip (figure 13.7).
CK
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
(internal signal)
WOVF
Figure 13.7 Timing of Setting the WOVF Bit
465
13.4
Notes on Use
13.4.1
TCNT Write and Increment Contention
If a timer counter (TCNT) increment clock pulse is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle
to the TCNT, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented (figure 13.8).
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
T3
CK
Address
TCNT address
Internal
write signal
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 13.8 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment
13.4.2
Changing CKS2–CKS0 Bit Values
If the values of bits CKS2–CKS0 are altered while the WDT is running, the count may increment
incorrectly. Always stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the
values of bits CKS2–CKS0.
13.4.3
Changing between Watchdog Timer/Interval Timer Modes
To prevent incorrect operation, always stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0)
before switching between interval timer mode and watchdog timer mode.
466
13.4.4
System Reset With WDTOVF
If a WDTOVF signal is input to the RES pin, the LSI cannot initialize correctly.
Avoid logical input of the WDTOVF output signal to the RES input pin. To reset the entire system
with the WDTOVF signal, use the circuit shown in figure 13.9.
SH7040 Series
Reset input
Reset signal to
entire system
RES
WDTOVF
Figure 13.9 Example of a System Reset Circuit with a WDTOVF Signal
13.4.5
Internal Reset with the Watchdog Timer
If the RSTE bit is cleared to 0 in the watchdog timer mode, the LSI will not reset internally when a
TCNT overflow occurs, but the TCNT and TCSR in the WDT will reset.
467
468
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)
14.1
Overview
The SH7040 Series has a serial communication interface (SCI) with two independent channels,
both of which possess the same functions.
The SCI supports both asynchronous and clock synchronous serial communication. It also has a
multiprocessor communication function for serial communication among two or more processors.
14.1.1
Features
• Select asynchronous or clock synchronous as the serial communications mode.
 Asynchronous mode: Serial data communications are synched by start-stop in character
units. The SCI can communicate with a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
(UART), an asynchronous communication interface adapter (ACIA), or any other chip that
employs a standard asynchronous serial communication. It can also communicate with two
or more other processors using the multiprocessor communication function. There are
twelve selectable serial data communication formats.
Data length: seven or eight bits
Stop bit length: one or two bits
Parity: even, odd, or none
Multiprocessor bit: one or none
Receive error detection: parity, overrun, and framing errors
Break detection: by reading the RxD level directly when a framing error occurs
 Clocked synchronous mode: Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock
signal. The SCI can communicate with other chips having a clock synchronous
communication function. There is one serial data communication format.
•
•
•
•
Data length: eight bits
Receive error detection: overrun errors
Full duplex communication: The transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so the
SCI can transmit and receive simultaneously. Both sections use double buffering, so
continuous data transfer is possible in both the transmit and receive directions.
On-chip baud rate generator with selectable bit rates.
Internal or external transmit/receive clock source: baud rate generator (internal) or SCK pin
(external).
Four types of interrupts: Transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receiveerror interrupts are requested independently. The transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full
interrupts can start the direct memory access controller (DMAC)/data transfer controller (DTC)
to transfer data.
469
14.1.2
Block Diagram
Bus interface
Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI.
Module data bus
RDR
TDR
BRR
SSR
SCR
RxD
RSR
TSR
SMR
Transmit/
receive control
TxD
Parity
generation
Internal
data bus
Baud rate
generator
φ
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
Clock
Parity check
External clock
SCK
TEI
TxI
RxI
ERI
SCI
RSR :
RDR:
TSR :
TDR :
Receive shift register
Receive data register
Transmit shift register
Transmit data register
SMR :
SCR :
SSR :
BRR :
Serial mode register
Serial control register
Serial status register
Bit rate register
Figure 14.1 SCI Block Diagram
470
14.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 14.1 summarizes the SCI pins by channel.
Table 14.1 SCI Pins
Channel
Pin Name
Abbreviation Input/Output
Function
0
Serial clock pin
SCK0
Input/output
SCI0 clock input/output
Receive data pin
RxD0
Input
SCI0 receive data input
Transmit data pin
TxD0
Output
SCI0 transmit data output
Serial clock pin
SCK1
Input/output
SCI1 clock input/output
Receive data pin
RxD1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
Transmit data pin
TxD1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
1
14.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 14.2 summarizes the SCI internal registers. These registers select the communication mode
(asynchronous or clock synchronous), specify the data format and bit rate, and control the
transmitter and receiver sections.
Table 14.2 Registers
Access
Size
Channel
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial
Value
Address* 2
0
Serial mode register
SMR0
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF81A0 8, 16
Bit rate register
BRR0
R/W
H'FF
H'FFFF81A1 8, 16
Serial control register
SCR0
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF81A2 8, 16
Transmit data register
TDR0
R/W
H'FF
H'FFFF81A3 8, 16
Serial status register
SSR0
R/(W)* H'84
H'FFFF81A4 8, 16
Receive data register
RDR0
R
H'00
H'FFFF81A5 8, 16
Serial mode register
SMR1
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF81B0 8, 16
Bit rate register
BRR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FFFF81B1 8, 16
Serial control register
SCR1
R/W
H'00
H'FFFF81B2 8, 16
Transmit data register
TDR1
R/W
H'FF
H'FFFF81B3 8, 16
Serial status register
SSR1
R/(W)* H'84
H'FFFF81B4 8, 16
Receive data register
RDR1
R
H'FFFF81B5 8, 16
1
1
1
H'00
Notes: *1 The only value that can be written is a 0 to clear the flags.
*2 Do not access empty addresses.
471
14.2
Register Descriptions
14.2.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
The receive shift register (RSR) receives serial data. Data input at the RxD pin is loaded into the
RSR in the order received, LSB (bit 0) first, converting the data to parallel form. When one byte
has been received, it is automatically transferred to the RDR.
The CPU cannot read or write the RSR directly.
14.2.2
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Receive Data Register (RDR)
The receive data register (RDR) stores serial receive data. The SCI completes the reception of one
byte of serial data by moving the received data from the receive shift register (RSR) into the RDR
for storage. The RSR is then ready to receive the next data. This double buffering allows the SCI
to receive data continuously.
The CPU can read but not write the RDR. The RDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset or in
standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize RDR.
14.2.3
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
The transmit shift register (TSR) transmits serial data. The SCI loads transmit data from the
transmit data register (TDR) into the TSR, then transmits the data serially from the TxD pin, LSB
(bit 0) first. After transmitting one data byte, the SCI automatically loads the next transmit data
from the TDR into the TSR and starts transmitting again. If the TDRE bit of the SSR is 1,
however, the SCI does not load the TDR contents into the TSR.
472
The CPU cannot read or write the TSR directly.
14.2.4
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R/W:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
The transmit data register (TDR) is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. When
the SCI detects that the transmit shift register (TSR) is empty, it moves transmit data written in the
TDR into the TSR and starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission is possible by
writing the next transmit data in the TDR during serial transmission from the TSR.
The CPU can always read and write the TDR. The TDR is initialized to H'FF by a power-on reset
or in standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize TDR.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
14.2.5
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
The serial mode register (SMR) is an 8-bit register that specifies the SCI serial communication
format and selects the clock source for the baud rate generator.
The CPU can always read and write the SMR. The SMR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset
or in standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize SMR.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
473
• Bit 7—Communication Mode (C/A): Selects whether the SCI operates in the asynchronous or
clock synchronous mode.
Bit 7: C/A
Description
0
Asynchronous mode (initial value)
1
Clocked synchronous mode
• Bit 6—Character Length (CHR): Selects 7-bit or 8-bit data in the asynchronous mode. In the
clock synchronous mode, the data length is always eight bits, regardless of the CHR setting.
Bit 6: CHR
Description
0
Eight-bit data (initial value)
1
Seven-bit data. (When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of the
transmit data register is not transmitted.)
• Bit 5—Parity Enable (PE): Selects whether to add a parity bit to transmit data and to check the
parity of receive data, in the asynchronous mode. In the clock synchronous mode, a parity bit is
neither added nor checked, regardless of the PE setting.
Bit 5: PE
Description
0
Parity bit not added or checked (initial value)
1
Parity bit added and checked. When PE is set to 1, an even or odd
parity bit is added to transmit data, depending on the parity mode (O/E)
setting. Receive data parity is checked according to the even/odd (O/E)
mode setting.
• Bit 4—Parity Mode (O/E): Selects even or odd parity when parity bits are added and checked.
The O/E setting is used only in asynchronous mode and only when the parity enable bit (PE) is
set to 1 to enable parity addition and check. The O/E setting is ignored in the clock
synchronous mode, or in the asynchronous mode when parity addition and check is disabled.
Bit 4: O/E
Description
0
Even parity (initial value). If even parity is selected, the parity bit is
added to transmit data to make an even number of 1s in the transmitted
character and parity bit combined. Receive data is checked to see if it
has an even number of 1s in the received character and parity bit
combined.
1
Odd parity. If odd parity is selected, the parity bit is added to transmit
data to make an odd number of 1s in the transmitted character and
parity bit combined. Receive data is checked to see if it has an odd
number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined.
474
• Bit 3—Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects one or two bits as the stop bit length in the
asynchronous mode. This setting is used only in the asynchronous mode. It is ignored in the
clock synchronous mode because no stop bits are added.
In receiving, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second
stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit, but if the second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit
of the next incoming character.
Bit 3: STOP
Description
0
One stop bit (initial value). In transmitting, a single bit of 1 is added at
the end of each transmitted character.
1
Two stop bits. In transmitting, two bits of 1 are added at the end of each
transmitted character.
• Bit 2—Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects multiprocessor format. When multiprocessor
format is selected, settings of the parity enable (PE) and parity mode (O/E) bits are ignored.
The MP bit setting is used only in the asynchronous mode; it is ignored in the clock
synchronous mode. For the multiprocessor communication function, see section 14.3.3,
Multiprocessor Communication.
Bit 2: MP
Description
0
Multiprocessor function disabled (initial value)
1
Multiprocessor format selected
• Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1 and CKS0): These bits select the internal clock
source of the on-chip baud rate generator. Four clock sources are available; φ, φ/4, φ/16, or
φ/64. For further information on the clock source, bit rate register settings, and baud rate, see
section 14.2.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR).
Bit 1: CKS1
Bit 0: CKS0
Description
0
0
φ (initial value)
1
φ/4
0
φ/16
1
φ/64
1
475
14.2.6
Serial Control Register (SCR)
The serial control register (SCR) operates the SCI transmitter/receiver, selects the serial clock
output in the asynchronous mode, enables/disables interrupt requests, and selects the
transmit/receive clock source. The CPU can always read and write the SCR. The SCR is initialized
to H'00 by a power-on reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize SCR.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bit 7—Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables the transmit-data-empty interrupt
(TxI) requested when the transmit data register empty bit (TDRE) in the serial status register
(SSR) is set to 1 by transfer of serial transmit data from the TDR to the TSR.
Bit 7: TIE
Description
0
Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TxI) is disabled (initial value).
The TxI interrupt request can be cleared by reading TDRE after it has
been set to 1, then clearing TDRE to 0, or by clearing TIE to 0.
1
Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TxI) is enabled
• Bit 6—Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables the receive-data-full interrupt (RxI)
requested when the receive data register full bit (RDRF) in the serial status register (SSR) is set
to 1 by transfer of serial receive data from the RSR to the RDR. It also enables or disables
receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests.
Bit 6: RIE
Description
0
Receive-data-full interrupt (RxI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI)
requests are disabled (initial value). RxI and ERI interrupt requests can
be cleared by reading the RDRF flag or error flag (FER, PER, or ORER)
after it has been set to 1, then clearing the flag to 0, or by clearing RIE
to 0.
1
Receive-data-full interrupt (RxI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI)
requests are enabled.
476
• Bit 5—Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the SCI serial transmitter.
Bit 5: TE
Description
0
Transmitter disabled (initial value). The transmit data register empty bit
(TDRE) in the serial status register (SSR) is locked at 1.
1
Transmitter enabled. Serial transmission starts when the transmit data
register empty (TDRE) bit in the serial status register (SSR) is cleared to
0 after writing of transmit data into the TDR. Select the transmit format
in the SMR before setting TE to 1.
• Bit 4—Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the SCI serial receiver.
Bit 4: RE
Description
0
Receiver disabled (initial value). Clearing RE to 0 does not affect the
receive flags (RDRF, FER, PER, ORER). These flags retain their
previous values.
1
Receiver enabled. Serial reception starts when a start bit is detected in
the asynchronous mode, or synchronous clock input is detected in the
clock synchronous mode. Select the receive format in the SMR before
setting RE to 1.
• Bit 3—Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts.
The MPIE setting is used only in the asynchronous mode, and only if the multiprocessor mode
bit (MP) in the serial mode register (SMR) is set to 1 during reception. The MPIE setting is
ignored in the clock synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3: MPIE
Description
0
Multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) (initial
value). MPIE is cleared when the MPIE bit is cleared to 0, or the
multiprocessor bit (MPB) is set to 1 in receive data.
1
Multiprocessor interrupts are enabled. Receive-data-full interrupt
requests (RxI), receive-error interrupt requests (ERI), and setting of the
RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in the serial status register (SSR)
are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received.
The SCI does not transfer receive data from the RSR to the RDR, does
not detect receive errors, and does not set the RDRF, FER, and ORER
flags in the serial status register (SSR). When it receives data that
includes MPB = 1, MPB is set to 1, and the SCI automatically clears
MPIE to 0, generates RxI and ERI interrupts (if the TIE and RIE bits in
the SCR are set to 1), and allows the FER and ORER bits to be set.
477
• Bit 2—Transmit-End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables the transmit-end interrupt
(TEI) requested if TDR does not contain valid transmit data when the MSB is transmitted.
Bit 2: TEIE
Description
0
Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) requests are disabled.* (initial value)
1
Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) requests are enabled. *
Note: * The TEI request can be cleared by reading the TDRE bit in the serial status register (SSR)
after it has been set to 1, then clearing TDRE to 0 and clearing the transmit end (TEND)
bit to 0; or by clearing the TEIE bit to 0.
• Bits 1 and 0—Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1 and CKE0): These bits select the SCI clock source
and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. Depending on the combination of CKE1
and CKE0, the SCK pin can be used for serial clock output, or serial clock input. Select the
SCK pin function by using the pin function controller (PFC).
The CKE0 setting is valid only in the asynchronous mode, and only when the SCI is internally
clocked (CKE1 = 0). The CKE0 setting is ignored in the clock synchronous mode, or when an
external clock source is selected (CKE1 = 1). Select the SCI operating mode in the serial mode
register (SMR) before setting CKE1 and CKE0. For further details on selection of the SCI
clock source, see table 14.9 in section 14.3, Operation.
Bit 1: Bit 0:
CKE1 CKE0 Description*1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Asynchronous mode
Internal clock, SCK pin used for input pin (input signal
is ignored) or output pin (output level is undefined)* 2
Clock synchronous mode
Internal clock, SCK pin used for synchronous clock
output* 2
Asynchronous mode
Internal clock, SCK pin used for clock output * 3
Clock synchronous mode
Internal clock, SCK pin used for synchronous clock
output
Asynchronous mode
External clock, SCK pin used for clock input* 4
Clock synchronous mode
External clock, SCK pin used for synchronous clock
input
Asynchronous mode
External clock, SCK pin used for clock input* 4
Clock synchronous mode
External clock, SCK pin used for synchronous clock
input
Notes: *1 The SCK pin is multiplexed with other functions. Use the pin function controller (PFC) to
select the SCK function for this pin, as well as the I/O direction.
*2 Initial value.
*3 The output clock frequency is the same as the bit rate.
*4 The input clock frequency is 16 times the bit rate.
478
14.2.7
Serial Status Register (SSR)
The serial status register (SSR) is an 8-bit register containing multiprocessor bit values, and status
flags that indicate SCI operating status.
The CPU can always read and write the SSR, but cannot write 1 in the status flags (TDRE, RDRF,
ORER, PER, and FER). These flags can be cleared to 0 only if they have first been read (after
being set to 1). Bits 2 (TEND) and 1 (MPB) are read-only bits that cannot be written. The SSR is
initialized to H'84 by a power-on reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize SSR.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Note: * The only value that can be written is a 0 to clear the flag.
• Bit 7—Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that the SCI has loaded transmit data
from the TDR into the TSR and new serial transmit data can be written in the TDR.
Bit 7: TDRE
Description
0
TDR contains valid transmit data
TDRE is cleared to 0 when software reads TDRE after it has been set to 1, then
writes 0 in TDRE or the DMAC or DTC writes data in TDR
1
TDR does not contain valid transmit data (initial value)
TDRE is set to 1 when the chip is power-on reset or enters standby mode, the TE
bit in the serial control register (SCR) is cleared to 0, or TDR contents are loaded
into TSR, so new data can be written in TDR
479
• Bit 6—Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that RDR contains received data.
Bit 6: RDRF
Description
0
RDR does not contain valid received data (initial value)
RDRF is cleared to 0 when the chip is power-on reset or enters standby mode,
software reads RDRF after it has been set to 1, then writes 0 in RDRF, or the
DMAC or DTC reads data from RDR
1
RDR contains valid received data
RDRF is set to 1 when serial data is received normally and transferred from RSR
to RDR
Note: The RDR and RDRF are not affected by detection of receive errors or by clearing of the RE
bit to 0 in the serial control register. They retain their previous contents. If RDRF is still set
to 1 when reception of the next data ends, an overrun error (ORER) occurs and the
received data is lost.
• Bit 5—Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to an
overrun error.
Bit 5: ORER
Description
0
Receiving is in progress or has ended normally (initial value). Clearing the RE bit
to 0 in the serial control register does not affect the ORER bit, which retains its
previous value.
ORER is cleared to 0 when the chip is power-on reset or enters standby mode or
software reads ORER after it has been set to 1, then writes 0 in ORER
1
A receive overrun error occurred. RDR continues to hold the data received
before the overrun error, so subsequent receive data is lost. Serial receiving
cannot continue while ORER is set to 1. In the clock synchronous mode, serial
transmitting is disabled.
ORER is set to 1 if reception of the next serial data ends when RDRF is set to 1
480
• Bit 4—Framing Error (FER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a framing
error in the asynchronous mode.
Bit 4: FER
Description
0
Receiving is in progress or has ended normally (initial value). Clearing the RE bit
to 0 in the serial control register does not affect the FER bit, which retains its
previous value.
FER is cleared to 0 when the chip is power-on reset or enters standby mode or
software reads FER after it has been set to 1, then writes 0 in FER
1
A receive framing error occurred. When the stop bit length is two bits, only the
first bit is checked to see if it is a 1. The second stop bit is not checked. When a
framing error occurs, the SCI transfers the receive data into the RDR but does
not set RDRF. Serial receiving cannot continue while FER is set to 1. In the clock
synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled.
FER is set to 1 if the stop bit at the end of receive data is checked and found to
be 0
• Bit 3—Parity Error (PER): Indicates that data reception (with parity) ended abnormally due to
a parity error in the asynchronous mode.
Bit 3: PER
Description
0
Receiving is in progress or has ended normally (initial value). Clearing the RE bit
to 0 in the serial control register does not affect the PER bit, which retains its
previous value.
PER is cleared to 0 when the chip is power-on reset or enters standby mode or
software reads PER after it has been set to 1, then writes 0 in PER
1
A receive parity error occurred. When a parity error occurs, the SCI transfers the
receive data into the RDR but does not set RDRF. Serial receiving cannot
continue while PER is set to 1. In the clock synchronous mode, serial transmitting
is also disabled.
PER is set to 1 if the number of 1s in receive data, including the parity bit, does
not match the even or odd parity setting of the parity mode bit (O/E) in the serial
mode register (SMR)
481
• Bit 2—Transmit End (TEND): Indicates that when the last bit of a serial character was
transmitted, the TDR did not contain valid data, so transmission has ended. TEND is a readonly bit and cannot be written.
Bit 2: TEND
Description
0
Transmission is in progress
TEND is cleared to 0 when software reads TDRE after it has been set to 1, then
writes 0 in TDRE, or the DMAC or DTC writes data in TDR
1
End of transmission (initial value)
TEND is set to 1 when the chip is power-on reset or enters standby mode, TE is
cleared to 0 in the serial control register (SCR), or TDRE is 1 when the last bit of
a one-byte serial character is transmitted.
• Bit 1—Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit in receive data
when a multiprocessor format is selected for receiving in the asynchronous mode. The MPB is
a read-only bit and cannot be written.
Bit 1: MPB
Description
0
Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0 (initial value). If RE is cleared to 0
when a multiprocessor format is selected, the MPB retains its previous value.
1
Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1
• Bit 0—Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit added
to transmit data when a multiprocessor format is selected for transmitting in the asynchronous
mode. The MPBT setting is ignored in the clock synchronous mode, when a multiprocessor
format is not selected, or when the SCI is not transmitting.
Bit 0: MPBT
Description
0
Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 (initial value)
1
Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1
482
14.2.8
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
The bit rate register (BRR) is an 8-bit register that, together with the baud rate generator clock
source selected by the CKS1 and CKS0 bits in the serial mode register (SMR), determines the
serial transmit/receive bit rate.
The CPU can always read and write the BRR. The BRR is initialized to H'FF by a power-on reset
or in standby mode. Each channel has independent baud rate generator control, so different values
can be set in the two channels. Manual reset does not initialize BRR.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W:
Table 14.3 lists examples of BRR settings in the asynchronous mode; table 14.4 lists examples of
BBR settings in the clock synchronous mode.
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode
φ (MHz)
4
4.9152
6
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
2
70
0.03
2
86
0.31
2
106
–0.44
150
1
207
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
77
0.16
300
1
103
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
155
0.16
600
0
207
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
77
0.16
1200
0
103
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
155
0.16
2400
0
51
0.16
0
63
0.00
0
77
0.16
4800
0
25
0.16
0
31
0.00
0
38
0.16
9600
0
12
0.16
0
15
0.00
0
19
–2.34
14400
0
8
–3.55
0
10
–3.03
0
12
0.16
19200
0
6
–6.99
0
7
0.00
0
9
–2.34
28800
0
3
8.51
0
4
6.67
0
6
–6.99
31250
0
3
0.00
0
4
–1.70
0
5
0.00
38400
0
2
8.51
0
3
0.00
0
4
–2.34
483
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
7.3728
8
9.8304
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
2
130
–0.07
2
141
0.03
2
174
–0.26
150
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
2
127
0.00
300
1
191
0.00
1
207
0.16
1
255
0.00
600
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.16
1
127
0.00
1200
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
0
255
0.00
2400
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
0
127
0.00
4800
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
0
63
0.00
9600
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
0
31
0.00
14400
0
15
0.00
0
16
2.12
0
20
1.59
19200
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
0
15
0.00
28800
0
7
0.00
0
8
–3.55
0
10
–3.03
31250
0
6
5.33
0
7
0.00
0
9
–1.70
38400
0
5
0.00
0
6
–6.99
0
7
0.00
484
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
10
11.0592
12
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
2
177
–0.25
2
195
0.19
2
212
0.03
150
2
129
0.16
2
143
0.00
2
155
0.16
300
2
64
0.16
2
71
0.00
2
77
0.16
600
1
129
0.16
1
143
0.00
1
155
0.16
1200
1
64
0.16
1
71
0.00
1
77
0.16
2400
0
129
0.16
0
143
0.00
0
155
0.16
4800
0
64
0.16
0
71
0.00
0
77
0.16
9600
0
32
–1.36
0
35
0.00
0
38
0.16
14400
0
21
–1.36
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
19200
0
15
1.73
0
17
0.00
0
19
–2.34
28800
0
10
–1.36
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
31250
0
9
0.00
0
10
0.54
0
11
0.00
38400
0
7
1.73
0
8
0.00
0
9
–2.34
485
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
12.288
14
14.7456
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
2
217
0.08
2
248
–0.17
3
64
0.70
150
2
159
0.00
2
181
0.16
2
191
0.00
300
2
79
0.00
2
90
0.16
2
95
0.00
600
1
159
0.00
1
181
0.16
1
191
0.00
1200
1
79
0.00
1
90
0.16
1
95
0.00
2400
0
159
0.00
0
181
0.16
0
191
0.00
4800
0
79
0.00
0
90
0.16
0
95
0.00
9600
0
39
0.00
0
45
–0.93
0
47
0.00
14400
0
26
–1.23
0
29
1.27
0
31
0.00
19200
0
19
0.00
0
22
–0.93
0
23
0.00
28800
0
12
2.56
0
14
1.27
0
15
0.00
31250
0
11
2.40
0
13
0.00
0
14
–1.70
38400
0
9
0.00
0
10
3.57
0
11
0.00
486
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
16
17.2032
18
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
3
70
0.03
3
75
0.48
3
79
–0.12
150
2
207
0.16
2
223
0.00
2
233
0.16
300
2
103
0.16
2
111
0.00
2
116
0.16
600
1
207
0.16
1
223
0.00
1
233
0.16
1200
1
103
0.16
1
111
0.00
1
116
0.16
2400
0
207
0.16
0
223
0.00
0
233
0.16
4800
0
103
0.16
0
111
0.00
0
116
0.16
9600
0
51
0.16
0
55
0.00
0
58
–0.69
14400
0
34
–0.79
0
36
0.90
0
38
0.16
19200
0
25
0.16
0
27
0.00
0
28
1.02
28800
0
16
2.12
0
18
–1.75
0
19
–2.34
31250
0
15
0.00
0
16
1.20
0
17
0.00
38400
0
12
0.16
0
13
0.00
0
14
–2.34
487
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
18.432
19.6608
20
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
3
81
–0.22
3
86
0.31
3
88
–0.25
150
2
239
0.00
2
255
0.00
3
64
0.16
300
2
119
0.00
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
600
1
239
0.00
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
1200
1
119
0.00
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
2400
0
239
0.00
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
4800
0
119
0.00
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
9600
0
59
0.00
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
14400
0
39
0.00
0
42
–0.78
0
42
0.94
19200
0
29
0.00
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
28800
0
19
0.00
0
20
1.59
0
21
–1.36
31250
0
17
2.40
0
19
–1.70
0
19
0.00
38400
0
14
0.00
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
488
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
22
22.1184
24
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
3
97
–0.35
3
97
0.19
3
106
–0.44
150
3
71
–0.54
3
71
0.00
3
77
0.16
300
2
142
0.16
2
143
0.00
2
155
0.16
600
2
71
–0.54
2
71
0.00
2
77
0.16
1200
1
142
0.16
1
143
0.00
1
155
0.16
2400
1
71
–0.54
1
71
0.00
1
77
0.16
4800
0
142
0.16
0
143
0.00
0
155
0.16
9600
0
71
–0.54
0
71
0.00
0
77
0.16
14400
0
47
–0.54
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
19200
0
35
–0.54
0
35
0.00
0
38
0.16
28800
0
23
–0.54
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
31250
0
21
0.00
0
21
0.54
0
23
0.00
38400
0
17
–0.54
0
17
0.00
0
19
–2.34
489
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
24.576
25.8048
26
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
3
108
0.08
3
114
–0.40
3
114
0.36
150
3
79
0.00
3
83
0.00
3
84
–0.43
300
2
159
0.00
2
167
0.00
2
168
0.16
600
2
79
0.00
2
83
0.00
2
84
–0.43
1200
1
159
0.00
1
167
0.00
1
168
0.16
2400
1
79
0.00
1
83
0.00
1
84
–0.43
4800
0
159
0.00
0
167
0.00
0
168
0.16
9600
0
79
0.00
0
83
0.00
0
84
–0.43
14400
0
52
0.63
0
55
0.00
0
55
0.76
19200
0
39
0.00
0
41
0.00
0
41
0.76
28800
0
26
–1.23
0
27
0.00
0
27
0.76
31250
0
24
–1.70
0
25
–0.75
0
25
0.00
38400
0
19
0.00
0
20
0.00
0
20
0.76
490
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
27.0336
28
29.4912
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
3
119
0.00
3
123
0.23
3
130
-0.07
150
3
87
0.00
3
90
0.16
3
95
0.00
300
2
175
0.00
2
181
0.16
2
191
0.00
600
1
87
0.00
2
90
0.16
2
95
0.00
1200
1
175
0.00
1
181
0.16
1
191
0.00
2400
1
87
0.00
1
90
0.16
1
95
0.00
4800
0
175
0.00
0
181
0.16
0
191
0.00
9600
0
87
0.00
0
90
0.16
0
95
0.00
14400
0
58
–0.56
0
60
–0.39
0
63
0.00
19200
0
43
0.00
0
45
0.93
0
47
0.00
28800
0
28
1.15
0
29
1.27
0
31
0.00
31250
0
26
0.12
0
27
0.00
0
28
1.69
38400
0
21
0.00
0
22
–0.93
0
23
0.00
491
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
30
31.9488
32
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
3
132
0.13
3
141
-0.13
3
141
0.03
150
3
97
-0.35
3
103
0.00
3
103
0.16
300
2
194
0.16
2
207
0.00
2
207
0.16
600
2
97
-0.35
2
103
0.00
2
103
0.16
1200
1
194
0.16
1
207
0.00
1
207
0.16
2400
1
97
-0.35
1
103
0.00
1
103
0.16
4800
0
194
0.16
0
207
0.00
0
207
0.16
9600
0
97
-0.35
0
103
0.00
0
103
0.16
14400
0
64
0.16
0
68
0.48
0
68
0.64
19200
0
48
-0.35
0
51
0.00
0
51
0.16
28800
0
32
-1.36
0
34
-0.95
0
34
-0.79
31250
0
29
0.00
0
31
-0.16
0
31
0.00
38400
0
23
1.73
0
25
0.00
0
25
0.16
492
Table 14.3 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
33
33.1776
33.3333
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
110
3
145
0.33
3
146
0.19
3
147
-0.02
150
3
106
0.39
3
107
0.00
3
108
-0.45
300
2
214
-0.07
2
215
0.00
2
216
0.01
600
2
106
0.39
2
107
0.00
2
108
-0.45
1200
1
214
-0.07
1
215
0.00
1
216
0.01
2400
1
106
0.39
1
107
0.00
1
108
-0.45
4800
0
214
-0.07
0
215
0.00
0
216
0.01
9600
0
106
0.39
0
107
0.00
0
108
-0.45
14400
0
71
–0.54
0
91
0.00
0
91
0.47
19200
0
53
–0.54
0
53
0.00
0
53
0.47
28800
0
35
–0.54
0
35
0.00
0
35
0.47
31250
0
32
0.00
0
32
0.54
0
32
1.01
38400
0
26
–0.54
0
26
0.00
0
26
0.47
493
Table 14.4 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Clocked Synchronous Mode
φ (MHz)
4
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
n
N
110
3
141
250
2
500
8
10
12
n
N
n
N
n
N
249
3
124
3
155
3
187
2
124
2
249
3
77
3
93
1k
1
249
2
124
2
155
2
187
2.5k
1
99
1
199
1
249
2
74
5k
0
199
1
99
1
124
1
149
10k
0
99
0
199
0
249
1
74
25k
0
39
0
79
0
99
0
119
50k
0
19
0
39
0
49
0
59
100k
0
9
0
19
0
24
0
29
250k
0
3
0
7
0
9
0
11
500k
0
1
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
0*
0
1
—
—
0
2
0
0*
0
0*
1M
2.5M
5M
494
Table 14.4 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Clocked Synchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
16
n
N
250
3
249
500
3
1k
20
24
28
n
N
n
N
n
N
124
3
155
3
187
3
218
2
249
3
77
3
93
3
108
2.5k
2
99
2
124
2
149
2
174
5k
1
199
1
249
2
74
2
87
10k
1
99
1
124
1
149
1
174
25k
0
159
0
199
0
239
1
69
50k
0
79
0
99
0
119
0
139
100k
0
39
0
49
0
59
0
69
250k
0
15
0
19
0
23
0
27
500k
0
7
0
9
0
11
0
13
1M
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
2.5M
—
—
0
1
—
—
0
2
—
—
—
—
0
1
0
0*
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0*
110
3.5M
5M
7M
495
Table 14.4 Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Clocked Synchronous Mode (cont)
φ (MHz)
30
Bit Rate
(Bits/s)
32
n
N
n
N
500
3
233
3
249
1k
3
116
3
2.5k
2
187
5k
2
10k
33
33.3333
n
N
n
N
124
3
128
3
129
2
199
2
205
2
207
93
2
99
2
102
2
103
1
187
1
199
1
205
1
207
25k
1
74
1
79
1
82
1
82
50k
0
149
0
159
0
164
0
166
100k
0
74
0
79
0
82
0
82
250k
0
29
0
31
0
32
0
32
500k
0
14
0
15
0
16
0
16
1M
0
7
0
7
0
7
0
7
2.5M
0
2
0
2
0
2
—
—
5M
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7M
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
110
250
Note: Settings with an error of 1% or less are recommended.
Legend
Blank: No setting available
—: Setting possible, but error occurs
*: Continuous transmission/reception is not possible.
The BRR setting is calculated as follows:
Asynchronous mode:
N=
φ
64 × 2
2n–1
6
×B
× 10 –1
Synchronous mode:
N=
496
φ
64 × 2
2n–1
6
×B
× 10 –1
B: Bit rate (bit/s)
N: Baud rate generator BRR setting (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
φ: Operating frequency (MHz)
n: Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0 to 3)
(See the following table for the clock sources and value of n.)
SMR Settings
n
Clock Source
CKS1
CKS2
0
φ
0
0
1
φ/4
0
1
2
φ/16
1
0
3
φ/64
1
1
The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is calculated as follows:
Error (%) =
φ × 106
(N+1) × B × 64 × 2
2n–1
–1
× 100
Table 14.5 indicates the maximum bit rates in the asynchronous mode when the baud rate
generator is being used for various frequencies. Tables 14.6 and 14.7 show the maximum rates for
external clock input.
497
Table 14.5 Maximum Bit Rates for Various Frequencies with Baud Rate Generator
(Asynchronous Mode)
Settings
φ (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (Bits/s)
n
N
4
125000
0
0
4.9152
153600
0
0
6
187500
0
0
7.3728
230400
0
0
8
250000
0
0
9.8304
307200
0
0
10
312500
0
0
11.0592
345600
0
0
12
375000
0
0
12.288
384000
0
0
14
437500
0
0
14.7456
460800
0
0
16
500000
0
0
17.2032
537600
0
0
18
562500
0
0
18.432
576000
0
0
19.6608
614400
0
0
20
625000
0
0
22
687500
0
0
22.1184
691200
0
0
24
750000
0
0
24.576
768000
0
0
25.8048
806400
0
0
26
812500
0
0
27.0336
844800
0
0
28
875000
0
0
29.4912
921600
0
0
30
937500
0
0
31.9488
998400
0
0
32
1000000
0
0
33
1031250
0
0
33.1776
1036800
0
0
33.3333
1041666
0
0
498
Table 14.6 Maximum Bit Rates during External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
External Input Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (Bits/s)
4
1.0000
62500
4.9152
1.2288
76800
6
1.5000
93750
7.3728
1.8432
115200
8
2.0000
125000
9.8304
2.4576
153600
10
2.5000
156250
11.0592
2.7648
172800
12
3.0000
187500
12.288
3.0720
192000
14
3.5000
218750
14.7456
3.6864
230400
16
4.0000
250000
17.2032
4.3008
268800
18
4.5000
281250
18.432
4.6080
288000
19.6608
4.9152
307200
20
5.0000
312500
22
5.5000
343750
22.1184
5.5296
345600
24
6.0000
375000
24.576
6.1440
384000
25.8048
6.4512
403200
26
6.5000
406250
27.0336
6.7584
422400
28
7.0000
437500
29.4912
7.3728
460800
30
7.5000
468750
31.9488
7.9872
499200
32
8.0000
500000
33
8.2500
515625
33.1776
8.2944
518400
33.3333
8.3333
520832.8125
499
Table 14.7 Maximum Bit Rates during External Clock Input (Clock Synchronous Mode)
φ (MHz)
External Input Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (Bits/s)
4
0.6667
666666.7
6
1.0000
1000000.0
8
1.3333
1333333.3
10
1.6667
1666666.7
12
2.0000
2000000.0
14
2.3333
2333333.3
16
2.6667
2666666.7
18
3.0000
3000000.0
20
3.3333
3333333.3
22
3.6667
3666666.7
24
4.0000
4000000.0
26
4.3333
4333333.3
28
4.6667
4666666.7
30
5.0000
5000000.0
32
5.3333
5333333.3
33.3333
5.5556
5555550.0
500
14.3
Operation
14.3.1
Overview
For serial communication, the SCI has an asynchronous mode in which characters are
synchronized individually, and a clock synchronous mode in which communication is
synchronized with clock pulses. Asynchronous/clock synchronous mode and the transmission
format are selected in the serial mode register (SMR), as shown in table 14.8. The SCI clock
source is selected by the C/A bit in the serial mode register (SMR) and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits
in the serial control register (SCR), as shown in table 14.9.
Asynchronous Mode:
• Data length is selectable: seven or eight bits.
• Parity and multiprocessor bits are selectable, as well as the stop bit length (one or two bits).
These selections determine the transmit/receive format and character length.
• In receiving, it is possible to detect framing errors (FER), parity errors (PER), overrun errors
(ORER), and the break state.
• An internal or external clock can be selected as the SCI clock source.
 When an internal clock is selected, the SCI operates using the on-chip baud rate generator
clock, and can output a clock with a frequency matching the bit rate.
 When an external clock is selected, the external clock input must have a frequency 16 times
the bit rate. (The on-chip baud rate generator is not used.)
Clock Synchronous Mode:
• The communication format has a fixed 8-bit data length.
• In receiving, it is possible to detect overrun errors (ORER).
• An internal or external clock can be selected as the SCI clock source.
 When an internal clock is selected, the SCI operates using the on-chip baud rate generator
clock, and outputs a synchronous clock signal to external devices.
 When an external clock is selected, the SCI operates on the input synchronous clock. The
on-chip baud rate generator is not used.
501
Table 14.8 Serial Mode Register Settings and SCI Communication Formats
SMR Settings
SCI Communication Format
Mode
Bit 7 Bit 6
C/A CHR
Bit 5
PE
Bit 2
MP
Bit 3
STOP
Data
Length
Parity
Bit
Multipro- Stop Bit
cessor Bit Length
Asynchronous
0
0
0
0
8-bit
Not set
Not set
0
1
1
2 bits
0
Set
1 bit
1
1
0
0
2 bits
7-bit
Not set
1 bit
1
1
2 bits
0
Set
1 bit
1
Asynchronous
(multiprocessor
format)
0
*
1
Clock
synchronous
1
*
1
0
*
1
*
0
*
1
*
*
*
1 bit
2 bits
8-bit
Not set
Set
1 bit
2 bits
7-bit
1 bit
2 bits
8-bit
Not set
None
Note: Asterisks (*) in the table indicate don’t-care bits.
Table 14.9 SMR and SCR Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection
SMR
Mode
Bit 7
C/A
Asynchronous 0
SCR Settings
SCI Transmit/Receive Clock
Bit 1
CKE1
Bit 0
CKE0
Clock Source SCK Pin Function*
0
0
Internal
1
1
0
SCI does not use the SCK pin
Outputs a clock with frequency
matching the bit rate
External
Inputs a clock with frequency 16 times
the bit rate
Internal
Outputs the synchronous clock
External
Inputs the synchronous clock
1
Clock synchronous
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Note: * Select the function in combination with the pin function controller (PFC).
502
14.3.2
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
In the asynchronous mode, each transmitted or received character begins with a start bit and ends
with a stop bit. Serial communication is synchronized one character at a time.
The transmitting and receiving sections of the SCI are independent, so full duplex communication
is possible. The transmitter and receiver are both double buffered, so data can be written and read
while transmitting and receiving are in progress, enabling continuous transmitting and receiving.
Figure 14.2 shows the general format of asynchronous serial communication. In asynchronous
serial communication, the communication line is normally held in the marking (high) state. The
SCI monitors the line and starts serial communication when the line goes to the space (low) state,
indicating a start bit. One serial character consists of a start bit (low), data (LSB first), parity bit
(high or low), and stop bit (high), in that order.
When receiving in the asynchronous mode, the SCI synchronizes on the falling edge of the start
bit. The SCI samples each data bit on the eighth pulse of a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit
rate. Receive data is latched at the center of each bit.
Serial
data
Idling (marking state)
1
(MSB)
(LSB)
1
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Start
bit
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
Parity
bit
Stop
bit
1 or
no bit
1 or
2 bits
Transmit/receive data
1 bit
7 or 8 bits
One unit of communication data (characters or frames)
Figure 14.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example: 8-bit Data with
Parity and Two Stop Bits)
503
Transmit/Receive Formats: Table 14.10 shows the 11 communication formats that can be
selected in the asynchronous mode. The format is selected by settings in the serial mode register
(SMR).
Table 14.10 Serial Communication Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
SMR Bits
Serial Transmit/Receive Format and Frame Length
CHR PE
MP
STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0
0
0
0
START
8-Bit data
STOP
0
0
0
1
START
8-Bit data
STOP STOP
0
1
0
0
START
8-Bit data
P
STOP
0
1
0
1
START
8-Bit data
P
STOP STOP
1
0
0
0
START
7-Bit data
STOP
1
0
0
1
START
7-Bit data
STOP STOP
1
1
0
0
START
7-Bit data
P
STOP
1
1
0
1
START
7-Bit data
P
STOP STOP
0
—
1
0
START
8-Bit data
MPB
STOP
0
—
1
1
START
8-Bit data
MPB
STOP STOP
1
—
1
0
START
7-Bit data
MPB
STOP
1
—
1
1
START
7-Bit data
MPB
STOP STOP
—: Don’t care bits.
Note: START: Start bit
STOP: Stop bit
P: Parity bit
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input
from the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI transmit/receive clock. The clock source is selected
by the C/A bit in the serial mode register (SMR) and bits CKE1 and CKE0 in the serial control
register (SCR) (table 14.9).
504
When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, it must have a frequency equal to 16 times the
desired bit rate.
When the SCI operates on an internal clock, it can output a clock signal at the SCK pin. The
frequency of this output clock is equal to the bit rate. The phase is aligned as in figure 14.3 so that
the rising edge of the clock occurs at the center of each transmit data bit.
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
1 frame
Figure 14.3 Output Clock and Communication Data Phase Relationship (Asynchronous
Mode)
SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode): Before transmitting or receiving, clear the TE and RE
bits to 0 in the serial control register (SCR), then initialize the SCI as follows.
When changing the operation mode or communication format, always clear the TE and RE bits to
0 before following the procedure given below. Clearing TE to 0 sets TDRE to 1 and initializes the
transmit shift register (TSR). Clearing RE to 0, however, does not initialize the RDRF, PER, FER,
and ORER flags and receive data register (RDR), which retain their previous contents.
When an external clock is used, the clock should not be stopped during initialization or subsequent
operation. SCI operation becomes unreliable if the clock is stopped.
Figure 14.4 is a sample flowchart for initializing the SCI. The procedure is as follows (the steps
correspond to the numbers in the flowchart):
1. Select the clock source in the serial control register (SCR). Leave RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, TE,
and RE cleared to 0. If clock output is selected in asynchronous mode, clock output starts
immediately after the setting is made to SCR.
2. Select the communication format in the serial mode register (SMR).
3. Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in the bit rate register (BRR) unless an external
clock is used.
4. Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive one bit, then set TE or RE in the
serial control register (SCR) to 1. Also set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE as necessary. Setting TE
or RE enables the SCI to use the TxD or RxD pin. The initial states are the marking transmit
state, and the idle receive state (waiting for a start bit).
505
Initialize
Clear TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE and RE bits are 0)
1
Select transmit/receive format in SMR
2
Set value to BRR
3
Wait
1-bit interval elapsed?
No
Yes
Set TE or RE to 1 in SCR; Set RIE,
TIE, TEIE, and MPIE as necessary
4
End
Figure 14.4 Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization
Transmitting Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 14.5 shows a sample flowchart for
transmitting serial data. The procedure is as follows (the steps correspond to the numbers in the
flowchart):
1. SCI initialization: Set the TxD pin using the PFC.
2. SCI status check and transmit data write: Read the serial status register (SSR), check that the
TDRE bit is 1, then write transmit data in the transmit data register (TDR) and clear TDRE
to 0.
3. Continue transmitting serial data: Read the TDRE bit to check whether it is safe to write (if it
reads 1); if so, write data in TDR, then clear TDRE to 0. When the DMAC or the DTC is
started by a transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TxI) in order to write data in TDR, the
TDRE bit is checked and cleared automatically.
4. To output a break at the end of serial transmission, first clear the port data register (DR) to 0,
then clear the TE to 0 in SCR and use the PFC to establish the TxD pin as an output port.
506
Initialize
1
Start transmitting
Read TDRE bit in SSR
2
No
TDRE = 1?
Yes
Write transmission data to TDR
and clear TDRE bit in SSR to 0
3
All data transmitted?
No
Yes
Read TEND bit in SSR
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
No
Output break signal?
4
Yes
Set DR = 0
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0;
select theTxD pin as an
output port with the PFC
End transmission
Figure 14.5 Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Serial Data
507
In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows:
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE bit in the SSR. When TDRE is cleared to 0, the SCI recognizes
that the transmit data register (TDR) contains new data, and loads this data from the TDR into
the transmit shift register (TSR).
2. After loading the data from the TDR into the TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE bit to 1 and starts
transmitting. If the transmit-data-empty interrupt enable bit (TIE) is set to 1 in the SCR, the
SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TxI) at this time.
Serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin:
a. Start bit: one 0 bit is output.
b. Transmit data: seven or eight bits of data are output, LSB first.
c. Parity bit or multiprocessor bit: one parity bit (even or odd parity) or one multiprocessor bit
is output. Formats in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also
be selected.
d. Stop bit: one or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output.
e. Marking: output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data.
3. The SCI checks the TDRE bit when it outputs the stop bit. If TDRE is 0, the SCI loads new
data from the TDR into the TSR, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the
next frame. If TDRE is 1, the SCI sets the TEND bit to 1 in the SSR, outputs the stop bit, then
continues output of 1 bits (marking). If the transmit-end interrupt enable bit (TEIE) in the SCR
is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) is requested.
Figure 14.6 shows an example of SCI transmit operation in the asynchronous mode.
508
1
Serial
data
Start
bit
0
Parity Stop Start
bit bit
bit
Data
D0 D1
D7
0/1
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7 0/1
1
1
Idle
(marking
state)
TDRE
TEND
TxI
TxI interrupt
interrupt handler writes
request data in TDR
and clears
TDRE to 0
TxI
request
TEI interrupt request
1 frame
Example: 8-bit data with parity and one stop bit
Figure 14.6 SCI Transmit Operation in Asynchronous Mode
Receiving Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode): Figures 14.7 and 14.8 show a sample flowchart
for receiving serial data. The procedure is as follows (the steps correspond to the numbers in the
flowchart).
1. SCI initialization: Set the RxD pin using the PFC.
2. Receive error handling and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER, PER,
and FER bits of the SSR to identify the error. After executing the necessary error handling,
clear ORER, PER, and FER all to 0. Receiving cannot resume if ORER, PER, or FER remain
set to 1. When a framing error occurs, the RxD pin can be read to detect the break state.
3. SCI status check and receive-data read: Read the serial status register (SSR), check that RDRF
is set to 1, then read receive data from the receive data register (RDR) and clear RDRF to 0.
The RxI interrupt can also be used to determine if the RDRF bit has changed from 0 to 1.
4. Continue receiving serial data: Read the RDR and RDRF bit and clear RDRF to 0 before the
stop bit of the current frame is received. If the DMAC or the DTC is started by a receive-datafull interrupt (RxI) to read RDR, the RDRF bit is cleared automatically so this step is
unnecessary.
509
Initialization
1
Start reception
Read ORER, PER, and
FER bits in SSR
PER, FER,
ORER = 1?
Yes
2
Error handling
No
Read the RDRF bit in SSR
No
3
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read reception data of RDR and
clear RDRF bit in SSR to 0
No
4
All data received?
Yes
Clear the RE bit of SCR to 0
End reception
Figure 14.7 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data (1)
510
Start of error handling
No
ORER = 1?
Yes
Overrun error handling
No
FER = 1?
Yes
Break?
Yes
No
Framing error handling
No
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
PER = 1?
Yes
Parity error handling
Clear ORER, PER, and FER
to 0 in SSR
End
Figure 14.8 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data (2)
511
In receiving, the SCI operates as follows:
1. The SCI monitors the communication line. When it detects a start bit (0), the SCI synchronizes
internally and starts receiving.
2. Receive data is shifted into the RSR in order from the LSB to the MSB.
3. The parity bit and stop bit are received. After receiving these bits, the SCI makes the following
checks:
a. Parity check. The number of 1s in the receive data must match the even or odd parity
setting of the O/E bit in the SMR.
b. Stop bit check. The stop bit value must be 1. If there are two stop bits, only the first stop bit
is checked.
c. Status check. RDRF must be 0 so that receive data can be loaded from the RSR into the
RDR.
If the data passes these checks, the SCI sets RDRF to 1 and stores the received data in the
RDR. If one of the checks fails (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated in table 14.11.
Note: When a receive error occurs, further receiving is disabled. While receiving, the RDRF
bit is not set to 1, so be sure to clear the error flags.
4. After setting RDRF to 1, if the receive-data-full interrupt enable bit (RIE) is set to 1 in the
SCR, the SCI requests a receive-data-full interrupt (RxI). If one of the error flags (ORER,
PER, or FER) is set to 1 and the receive-data-full interrupt enable bit (RIE) in the SCR is also
set to 1, the SCI requests a receive-error interrupt (ERI).
Figure 14.9 shows an example of SCI receive operation in the asynchronous mode.
Table 14.11 Receive Error Conditions and SCI Operation
Receive Error
Abbreviation
Condition
Data Transfer
Overrun error
ORER
Receiving of next data ends while
RDRF is still set to 1 in SSR
Receive data not loaded
from RSR into RDR
Framing error
FER
Stop bit is 0
Receive data loaded from
RSR into RDR
Parity error
PER
Parity of receive data differs from
even/odd parity setting in SMR
Receive data loaded from
RSR into RDR
512
1
Serial
data
Start
bit
0
Parity Stop Start
bit bit
bit
Data
D0 D1
D7
0/1
1
0
Parity Stop
bit
bit
Data
D0
D1
D7 0/1
1
1
Idle
(marking
state)
TDRF
RxI interrupt request
FER
1 frame
RxI interrupt
handler reads
data in RDR and
clears RDRF to 0.
Framing error
generates
ERI interrupt
request.
Example: 8-bit data with parity and one stop bit.
Figure 14.9 SCI Receive Operation
14.3.3
Multiprocessor Communication
The multiprocessor communication function enables several processors to share a single serial
communication line for sending and receiving data. The processors communicate in the
asynchronous mode using a format with an additional multiprocessor bit (multiprocessor format).
In multiprocessor communication, each receiving processor is addressed by a unique ID. A serial
communication cycle consists of an ID-sending cycle that identifies the receiving processor, and a
data-sending cycle. The multiprocessor bit distinguishes ID-sending cycles from data-sending
cycles. The transmitting processor starts by sending the ID of the receiving processor with which it
wants to communicate as data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Next the transmitting processor
sends transmit data with the multiprocessor bit cleared to 0.
Receiving processors skip incoming data until they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to
1. When they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1, receiving processors compare the
data with their IDs. The receiving processor with a matching ID continues to receive further
incoming data. Processors with IDs not matching the received data skip further incoming data
until they again receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Multiple processors can send and
receive data in this way.
Figure 14.10 shows the example of communication among processors using the multiprocessor
format.
513
Communication Formats: Four formats are available. Parity-bit settings are ignored when the
multiprocessor format is selected. For details see table 14.8.
Clock: See the description in the asynchronous mode section.
Transmitting
processor
Serial communication line
Serial
data
Receiving
processor A
Receiving
processor B
Receiving
processor C
Receiving
processor D
(ID = 01)
(ID = 02)
(ID = 03)
(ID = 04)
H'01
H'AA
(MPB = 1)
ID-transmit cycle:
receiving processor address
(MPB = 0)
Data-transmit cycle:
data sent to receiving
processor specified by ID
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Example: Sending data H'AA to receiving processor A
Figure 14.10 Communication among Processors Using Multiprocessor Format
Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data: Figure 14.11 shows a sample flowchart for
transmitting multiprocessor serial data. The procedure is as follows (the steps correspond to the
numbers in the flowchart):
1. SCI initialization: Set the TxD pin using the PFC.
2. SCI status check and transmit data write: Read the serial status register (SSR), check that the
TDRE bit is 1, then write transmit data in the transmit data register (TDR). Also set MPBT
(multiprocessor bit transfer) to 0 or 1 in SSR. Finally, clear TDRE to 0.
3. Continue transmitting serial data: Read the TDRE bit to check whether it is safe to write (if it
reads 1); if so, write data in TDR, then clear TDRE to 0. When the DMAC or the DTC is
started by a transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TxI) to write data in TDR, the TDRE bit is
checked and cleared automatically.
4. Output a break at the end of serial transmission: Set the data register (DR) of the port to 0, then
clear TE to 0 in SCR and set the TxD pin function as output port with the PFC.
514
Initialization
1
Start transmission
Read TDRE bit in SSR
TDRE = 1?
2
No
Yes
Write transmit data in TDR
and set MPBT in SSR
Clear TDRE bit to 0
All data transmitted?
No
3
Yes
Read TEND bit in SSR
TEND = 1?
No
Yes
Output break signal?
No
Yes
Set DR = 0
4
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0;
select theTxD pin function as
an output port with the PFC
End transmission
Figure 14.11 Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data
515
In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows:
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE bit in the SSR. When TDRE is cleared to 0 the SCI recognizes
that the transmit data register (TDR) contains new data, and loads this data from the TDR into
the transmit shift register (TSR).
2. After loading the data from the TDR into the TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE bit to 1 and starts
transmitting. If the transmit-data-empty interrupt enable bit (TIE) in the SCR is set to 1, the
SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TxI) at this time.
Serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin:
a. Start bit: one 0 bit is output.
b. Transmit data: seven or eight bits are output, LSB first.
c. Multiprocessor bit: one multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output.
d. Stop bit: one or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output.
e. Marking: output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data.
3. The SCI checks the TDRE bit when it outputs the stop bit. If TDRE is 0, the SCI loads data
from the TDR into the TSR, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next
frame. If TDRE is 1, the SCI sets the TEND bit in the SSR to 1, outputs the stop bit, then
continues output of 1 bits in the marking state. If the transmit-end interrupt enable bit (TEIE)
in the SCR is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time.
Figure 14.12 shows an example of SCI receive operation in the multiprocessor format.
516
1
Multiprocessor
bit
Stop Start
Data
bit bit
Start
bit
Serial
data
0
D0 D1
D7
0/1
1
0
Multiprocessor
bit
Stop
Data
bit
D0
D1
D7 0/1
1
1
Idle
(marking
state)
TDRE
TEND
TxI
interrupt
request
TxI interrupt
handler writes
data in TDR and
clears TDRE to 0
TxI
interrupt
request
TEI
interrupt
request
1 frame
Example: 8-bit data with multiprocessor bit and one stop bit
Figure 14.12 SCI Multiprocessor Transmit Operation
Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data: Figure 14.13 shows a sample flowchart for receiving
multiprocessor serial data. The procedure for receiving multiprocessor serial data is listed below.
1. SCI initialization: Set the RxD pin using the PFC.
2. ID receive cycle: Set the MPIE bit in the serial control register (SCR) to 1.
3. SCI status check and compare to ID reception: Read the serial status register (SSR), check that
RDRF is set to 1, then read data from the receive data register (RDR) and compare with the
processor’s own ID. If the ID does not match the receive data, set MPIE to 1 again and clear
RDRF to 0. If the ID matches the receive data, clear RDRF to 0.
4. Receive error handling and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER
bits in SSR to identify the error. After executing the necessary error processing, clear both
ORER and FER to 0. Receiving cannot resume if ORER or FER remain set to 1. When a
framing error occurs, the RxD pin can be read to detect the break state.
5. SCI status check and data receiving: Read SSR, check that RDRF is set to 1, then read data
from the receive data register (RDR).
517
Initialization
1
Start reception
Set MPIE bit in SCR to 1
2
Read ORER and FER bits of SSR
FER = 1?
or ORER =1?
Yes
No
Read RDRF bit in SSR
No
3
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read receive data from RDR
No
Is ID the station’s ID
Yes
Read ORER and FER bits in SSR
FER = 1?
or ORER =1?
Yes
No
Read RDRF bit of SSR
RDRF = 1?
5
No
Yes
Read receive data from RDR
4
No
All data received?
Error processing
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
End reception
Figure 14.13 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data
518
Start error handling
No
ORER = 1?
Yes
Overrun error handling
No
FER = 1?
Yes
Break?
Yes
No
Framing error handling
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
Clear ORER and FER
bits in SSR to 0
End
Figure 14.13 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data (cont)
519
Figures 14.14 and 14.15 show examples of SCI receive operation using a multiprocessor format.
1
Serial
data
Start
bit
Data
(ID1)
0
D0 D1
Stop Start Data
MPB bit bit (data 1)
D7
1
1
0
D0
D1
Stop
MPB bit
D7
0
1
1
Idling
(marking)
MPB
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
RxI interrupt request
(multiprocessor
interrupt), MPIE = 0
RxI interrupt handler
reads data in RDR
and clears RDRF to 0
Not station’s
ID, so MPIE is
set to 1 again
No RxI interrupt,
RDR maintains
state
Figure 14.14 SCI Receive Operation (ID Does Not Match)
520
1
Serial
data
Start
bit
0
Data
(ID2)
D0
D1
Stop Start Data
MPB bit bit (data 2)
D7
1
1
0
D0
D1
Stop
MPB bit
D7
0
1
1
Idling
(marking)
MPB
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
RxI interrupt request
(multiprocessor
interrupt), MPIE = 0
ID2
RxI interrupt handler
reads data in RDR
and clears RDRF to 0
Data2
Station’s ID, so receiving
MPIE
continues, with data
bit is again
received by the RxI
set to 1
interrupt processing routine
Example: Own ID matches data, 8-bit data with multiprocessor bit and one stop bit
Figure 14.15 Example of SCI Receive Operation (ID Matches)
14.3.4
Clock Synchronous Operation
In the clock synchronous mode, the SCI transmits and receives data in synchronization with clock
pulses. This mode is suitable for high-speed serial communication.
The SCI transmitter and receiver are independent, so full duplex communication is possible while
sharing the same clock. The transmitter and receiver are also double buffered, so continuous
transmitting or receiving is possible by reading or writing data while transmitting or receiving is in
progress.
Figure 14.16 shows the general format in clock synchronous serial communication.
521
Transfer direction
One unit (character or frame) of communication data
Synchronization clock
*
*
LSB
Serial data
Bit 0
MSB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Note: * High except in continuous transmitting or receiving.
Figure 14.16 Data Format in Clock Synchronous Communication
In clock synchronous serial communication, each data bit is output on the communication line
from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data are guaranteed valid at the rising edge of
the serial clock. In each character, the serial data bits are transmitted in order from the LSB (first)
to the MSB (last). After output of the MSB, the communication line remains in the state of the
MSB. In the clock synchronous mode, the SCI transmits or receives data by synchronizing with
the falling edge of the synchronization clock.
Communication Format: The data length is fixed at eight bits. No parity bit or multiprocessor bit
can be added.
Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input
from the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI transmit/receive clock. The clock source is selected
by the C/A bit in the serial mode register (SMR) and bits CKE1 and CKE0 in the serial control
register (SCR). See table 14.9.
When the SCI operates on an internal clock, it outputs the clock signal at the SCK pin. Eight clock
pulses are output per transmitted or received character. When the SCI is not transmitting or
receiving, the clock signal remains in the high state.
Note: An overrun error occurs only during the receive operation, and the sync clock is output
until the RE bit is cleared to 0. When you want to perform a receive operation in onecharacter units, select external clock for the clock source.
SCI Initialization (Clock Synchronous Mode): Before transmitting or receiving, software must
clear the TE and RE bits to 0 in the serial control register (SCR), then initialize the SCI as follows.
When changing the mode or communication format, always clear the TE and RE bits to 0 before
following the procedure given below. Clearing TE to 0 sets TDRE to 1 and initializes the transmit
shift register (TSR). Clearing RE to 0, however, does not initialize the RDRF, PER, FER, and
ORER flags and receive data register (RDR), which retain their previous contents.
522
Figure 14.17 is a sample flowchart for initializing the SCI.
1. Select the clock source in the serial control register (SCR). Leave RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, TE,
and RE cleared to 0.
2. Select the communication format in the serial mode register (SMR).
3. Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in the bit rate register (BRR) unless an external
clock is used.
4. Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive one bit, then set TE or RE in the
serial control register (SCR) to 1. Also set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE. The TxD, RxD pins
becomes usable in response to the PFC corresponding bits and the TE, RE bit settings.
Start of initialization
Clear TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR
Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, CKE1,
and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE and RE are 0)
1
Select transmit/receive
format in SMR
2
Set value in BRR
3
Wait
1-bit interval elapsed?
No
Yes
Set TE and RE to 1 in SCR;
Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits
4
End
Figure 14.17 Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization
523
Transmitting Serial Data (Synchronous Mode): Figure 14.18 shows a sample flowchart for
transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow.
1. SCI initialization: Set the TxD pin function with the PFC.
2. SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR, check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write
transmit data in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
3. To continue transmitting serial data: After checking that the TDRE flag is 1, indicating that
data can be written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag to 0. When the DMAC or
DTC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TxI) to write data in TDR, the
TDRE flag is checked and cleared automatically.
524
Initialize
1
Start transmitting
2
Read TDRE flag in SSR
No
TDRE = 1?
Yes
Write transmit data in TDR and
clear TDRE flag to 0 in SSR
No
All data transmitted?
3
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
TEND = 1?
No
Yes
Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR
End
Figure 14.18 Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting
525
Figure 14.19 shows an example of SCI transmit operation.
Transmit direction
Synchronization clock
LSB
Serial data
Bit 0
MSB
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
TDRE
TEND
TxI
request
TxI interrupt
handler writes
data in TDR and
clears TDRE to 0
TxI
request
TEI
request
1 frame
Figure 14.19 Example of SCI Transmit Operation
SCI serial transmission operates as follows.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE bit in the SSR. When TDRE is cleared to 0 the SCI recognizes
that the transmit data register (TDR) contains new data and loads this data from the TDR into
the transmit shift register (TSR).
2. After loading the data from the TDR into the TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE bit to 1 and starts
transmitting. If the transmit-data-empty interrupt enable bit (TIE) in the SCR is set to 1, the
SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TxI) at this time.
If clock output mode is selected, the SCI outputs eight synchronous clock pulses. If an external
clock source is selected, the SCI outputs data in synchronization with the input clock. Data are
output from the TxD pin in order from the LSB (bit 0) to the MSB (bit 7).
3. The SCI checks the TDRE bit when it outputs the MSB (bit 7). If TDRE is 0, the SCI loads
data from the TDR into the TSR, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. If TDRE is
1, the SCI sets the TEND bit in the SSR to 1, transmits the MSB, then holds the transmit data
pin (TxD) in the MSB state. If the transmit-end interrupt enable bit (TEIE) in the SCR is set to
1, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time.
4. After the end of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held in the high state.
526
Receiving Serial Data (Clock Synchronous Mode): Figures 14.20 and 14.21 shows a sample
flowchart for receiving serial data. When switching from the asynchronous mode to the clock
synchronous mode, make sure that ORER, PER, and FER are cleared to 0. If PER or FER is set to
1, the RDRF bit will not be set and both transmitting and receiving will be disabled.
The procedure for receiving serial data is listed below:
1. SCI initialization: Set the RxD pin using the PFC.
2. Receive error handling: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER bit in SSR to identify the
error. After executing the necessary error handling, clear ORER to 0. Transmitting/receiving
cannot resume if ORER remains set to 1.
3. SCI status check and receive data read: Read the serial status register (SSR), check that RDRF
is set to 1, then read receive data from the receive data register (RDR) and clear RDRF to 0.
The RxI interrupt can also be used to determine if the RDRF bit has changed from 0 to 1.
4. Continue receiving serial data: Read RDR, and clear RDRF to 0 before the frame MSB (bit 7)
of the current frame is received. If the DMAC or the DTC is started by a receive-data-full
interrupt (RxI) to read RDR, the RDRF bit is cleared automatically so this step is unnecessary.
527
Initialization
1
Start reception
Read the ORER bit of SSR
Yes
ORER = 1?
2
No
Read RDRF bit of SSR
No
Error processing
3
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read receive data from RDR
and clear RDRF bit of SSR to 0
4
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit of SCR to 0
End reception
Figure 14.20 Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving (1)
528
Error handling
Overrun error processing
Clear ORER bit of SSR to 0
End
Figure 14.21 Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving (2)
Figure 14.22 shows an example of the SCI receive operation.
Transfer direction
Synchronization clock
Serial
data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
RDRF
ORER
RxI request Read data with RxI
interrupt processing
routine and clear
RDRF bit to 0
RxI request
ERI interrupt
request generated
by overrun error
1 frame
Figure 14.22 Example of SCI Receive Operation
In receiving, the SCI operates as follows:
1. The SCI synchronizes with serial clock input or output and initializes internally.
2. Receive data is shifted into the RSR in order from the LSB to the MSB. After receiving the
data, the SCI checks that RDRF is 0 so that receive data can be loaded from the RSR into the
RDR. If this check passes, the SCI sets RDRF to 1 and stores the received data in the RDR. If
the check does not pass (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated in table 14.11 and no
further transmission or reception is possible. If the error flag is set to 1, the RDRF bit is not set
529
to 1 during reception, even if the RDRF bit is 0 cleared. When restarting reception, be sure to
clear the error flag.
3. After setting RDRF to 1, if the receive-data-full interrupt enable bit (RIE) is set to 1 in the
SCR, the SCI requests a receive-data-full interrupt (RxI). If the ORER bit is set to 1 and the
receive-data-full interrupt enable bit (RIE) in the SCR is also set to 1, the SCI requests a
receive-error interrupt (ERI).
Transmitting and Receiving Serial Data Simultaneously (Clock Synchronous Mode): Figure
14.23 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting and receiving serial data simultaneously. The
procedure is as follows (the steps correspond to the numbers in the flowchart):
1. SCI initialization: Set the TxD and RxD pins using the PFC.
2. SCI status check and transmit data write: Read the serial status register (SSR), check that the
TDRE bit is 1, then write transmit data in the transmit data register (TDR) and clear TDRE to
0. The TxI interrupt can also be used to determine if the TDRE bit has changed from 0 to 1.
3. Receive error handling: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER bit in SSR to identify the
error. After executing the necessary error processing, clear ORER to 0. Transmitting/receiving
cannot resume if ORER remains set to 1.
4. SCI status check and receive data read: Read the serial status register (SSR), check that RDRF
is set to 1, then read receive data from the receive data register (RDR) and clear RDRF to 0.
The RxI interrupt can also be used to determine if the RDRF bit has changed from 0 to 1.
5. Continue transmitting and receiving serial data: Read the RDRF bit and RDR, and clear RDRF
to 0 before the frame MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received. Also read the TDRE bit to
check whether it is safe to write (if it reads 1); if so, write data in TDR, then clear TDRE to 0
before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted. When the DMAC or the DTC is
started by a transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TxI) to write data in TDR, the TDRE bit is
checked and cleared automatically. When the DMAC or the DTC is started by a receive-datafull interrupt (RxI) to read RDR, the RDRF bit is cleared automatically.
Note: In switching from transmitting or receiving to simultaneous transmitting and receiving,
simultaneously clear both TE and RE to 0, then simultaneously set both TE and RE to 1.
530
Initialization
1
Start transmitting/receive
Read TDRE bit in SSR
No
2
TDRE = 1?
Yes
Write transmission data in TDR
and clear TDRE bit of SSR to 0
Read ORER bit of SSR
ORER = 1?
Yes
3
Error handling
No
Read RDRF bit of SSR
No
4
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read receive data of RDR,
and clear RDRF bit of SSR to 0
No
5
All
data transmitted/and
received
Yes
Clear TE and RE bits of SCR to 0
End transmission/reception
Figure 14.23 Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmission
531
14.4
SCI Interrupt Sources and the DMAC/DTC
The SCI has four interrupt sources: transmit-end (TEI), receive-error (ERI), receive-data-full
(RxI), and transmit-data-empty (TxI). Table 14.12 lists the interrupt sources and indicates their
priority. These interrupts can be enabled and disabled by the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in the serial
control register (SCR). Each interrupt request is sent separately to the interrupt controller.
TxI is requested when the TDRE bit in the SSR is set to 1. TxI can start the direct memory access
controller (DMAC) or the data transfer controller (DTC) to transfer data. TDRE is automatically
cleared to 0 when the DMAC or the DTC writes data in the transmit data register (TDR).
RxI is requested when the RDRF bit in the SSR is set to 1. RxI can start the DMAC or the DTC to
transfer data. RDRF is automatically cleared to 0 when the DMAC or the DTC reads the receive
data register (RDR).
ERI is requested when the ORER, PER, or FER bit in the SSR is set to 1. ERI cannot start the
DMAC or the DTC.
TEI is requested when the TEND bit in the SSR is set to 1. TEI cannot start the DMAC or the
DTC. Where the TxI interrupt indicates that transmit data writing is enabled, the TEI interrupt
indicates that the transmit operation is complete.
Table 14.12 SCI Interrupt Sources
Interrupt Source
Description
DMAC/DTC Activation
Priority
ERI
Receive error (ORER, PER, or FER)
No
High
RxI
Receive data full (RDRF)
Yes
TxI
Transmit data empty (TDRE)
Yes
TEI
Transmit end (TEND)
No
532
Low
14.5
Notes on Use
Sections 14.5.1 through 14.5.9 provide information for using the SCI.
14.5.1
TDR Write and TDRE Flags
The TDRE bit in the serial status register (SSR) is a status flag indicating loading of transmit data
from TDR into TSR. The SCI sets TDRE to 1 when it transfers data from TDR to TSR. Data can
be written to TDR regardless of the TDRE bit status. If new data is written in TDR when TDRE is
0, however, the old data stored in TDR will be lost because the data has not yet been transferred to
the TSR. Before writing transmit data to the TDR, be sure to check that TDRE is set to 1.
14.5.2
Simultaneous Multiple Receive Errors
Table 14.13 indicates the state of the SSR status flags when multiple receive errors occur
simultaneously. When an overrun error occurs, the RSR contents cannot be transferred to the
RDR, so receive data is lost.
Table 14.13 SSR Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data
Receive Data
Transfer
SSR Status Flags
Receive Error Status
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
RSR → RDR
Overrun error
1
1
0
0
X
Framing error
0
0
1
0
O
Parity error
0
0
0
1
O
Overrun error + framing error
1
1
1
0
X
Overrun error + parity error
1
1
0
1
X
Framing error + parity error
0
0
1
1
O
Overrun error + framing error + parity
error
1
1
1
1
X
Notes: O = Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR.
X = Receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR.
533
14.5.3
Break Detection and Processing
Break signals can be detected by reading the RxD pin directly when a framing error (FER) is
detected. In the break state, the input from the RxD pin consists of all 0s, so FER is set and the
parity error flag (PER) may also be set. In the break state, the SCI receiver continues to operate, so
if the FER bit is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
14.5.4
Sending a Break Signal
The TxD pin becomes a general I/O pin with the I/O direction and level determined by the I/O port
data register (DR) and pin function controller (PFC) control register (CR). These conditions allow
break signals to be sent. The DR value is substituted for the marking status until the PFC is set.
Consequently, the output port is set to initially output a 1. To send a break in serial transmission,
first clear the DR to 0, then establish the TxD pin as an output port using the PFC. When TE is
cleared to 0, the transmission section is initialized regardless of the present transmission status.
14.5.5
Receive Error Flags and Transmitter Operation (Clock Synchronous Mode Only)
When a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, the SCI will not start transmitting
even if TDRE is set to 1. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting to transmit.
Note that clearing RE to 0 does not clear the receive error flags.
14.5.6
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Receive Margin in the Asynchronous Mode
In the asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a base clock of 16 times the bit rate frequency. In
receiving, the SCI synchronizes internally with the falling edge of the start bit, which it samples on
the base clock. Receive data is latched on the rising edge of the eighth base clock pulse (figure
14.24).
534
16 clocks
8 clocks
Internal 0
base clock
78
15 0
–7.5 clocks
Receive
data (RxD)
78
15 0
5
+7.5 clocks
D0
Start bit
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data
sampling timing
Figure 14.24 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
The receive margin in the asynchronous mode can therefore be expressed as:


M =  0.5 –
1
 – (L – 0.5)F –
2N 
D – 0.5
N
(1
+ F) × 100%
M : Receive margin (%)
N : Ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (N = 16)
D : Clock duty cycle (D = 0–1.0)
L : Frame length (L = 9–12)
F : Absolute deviation of clock frequency
From the equation above, if F = 0 and D = 0.5 the receive margin is 46.875%:
D = 0.5, F = 0
M = (0.5 – 1/(2 × 16)) × 100%
= 46.875%
This is a theoretical value. A reasonable margin to allow in system designs is 20–30%.
535
14.5.7
Constraints on DMAC/DTC Use
• When using an external clock source for the synchronization clock, update the TDR with the
DMAC or the DTC, and then after five system clocks or more elapse, input a transmit clock. If
a transmit clock is input in the first four system clocks after the TDR is written, an error may
occur (figure 14.25).
• Before reading the receive data register (RDR) with the DMAC/DTC, select the receive-datafull interrupt of the SCI as a start-up source.
SCK
t
TDRE
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Note: During external clock operation, an error may occur if t is 4φ or less.
Figure 14.25 Example of Clock Synchronous Transmission with DMAC
14.5.8
Cautions for Clock Synchronous External Clock Mode
• Set TE = RE = 1 only when the external clock SCK is 1.
• Do not set TE = RE = 1 until at least four clocks after the external clock SCK has changed
from 0 to 1.
• When receiving, RDRF is 1 when RE is set to zero 2.5–3.5 clocks after the rising edge of the
RxD D7 bit SCK input, but it cannot be copied to RDR.
14.5.9
Caution for Clock Synchronous Internal Clock Mode
When receiving, RDRF is 1 when RE is set to zero 1.5 clocks after the rising edge of the RxD D7
bit SCK output, but it cannot be copied to RDR.
536
Section 15 High Speed A/D Converter (Excluding A Mask)
15.1
Overview
The high speed A/D converter has 10-bit resolution, and can select from a maximum of eight
channels of analog inputs.
15.1.1
Features
The high speed A/D converter has the following features:
• 10-bit resolution
• Eight input channels
• Analog conversion voltage range setting is selectable
 Using the reference voltage pin (AVref) as an analog standard voltage (Vref), conversion of
analog input from 0 to Vref (only with SH7043).
• High-speed conversion
 Minimum conversion time: 2.9 µs per channel (for 28-MHz operation)
 1.4 µs per channel during continuous conversion
• Multiple conversion modes
 Select mode/group mode
 Single mode/scan mode
 Buffered operation possible
 2 channel simultaneous sampling possible
• Three types of conversion start
 Software, timer conversion start trigger (MTU), or ADTRG pin can be selected.
• Eight data registers
 Conversion results stored in 16-bit data registers corresponding to each channel.
• Sample and hold function
• A/D conversion end interrupt generation
 An A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request can be generated on completion of A/D
conversions
537
15.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 15.1 is the block diagram of the high speed A/D converter.
D/A
conversion
circuit
AVcc
AVref*
ADDRA
S&H A
AN1
ADDRB
AN5
S&H B
+
−
CMP
ADDRC
Control logic
AN4
Multiplexer
AN2
AN3
Bus I/F
ADDRD
ADDRE
ADDRF
AN6
ADDRG
AN7
AVss
ADDRH
ADCR ADCSR
ADTRG
ADCR:
ADSCR:
ADDRA:
ADDRB:
ADDRC:
ADDRD:
Module internal data bus
AN0
Internal
data bus
8-bit timer or
MTU conversion
start trigger
A/D control register
A/D control status register
A/D data register A
A/D data register B
A/D data register C
A/D data register D
CMP:
S&H:
ADDRE:
ADDRF:
ADDRG:
ADDRH:
Interrupt signal
ADI
Comparator array
Sample and hold circuit
A/D data register E
A/D data register F
A/D data register G
A/D data register H
Note: * SH7043 only
Figure 15.1 High Speed A/D Converter Block Diagram
15.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 15.1 shows the input pins used by the high speed A/D converter.
The AVcc and AVss pins are for the A/D converter internal analog section power supply. The
AVref pin is for the A/D conversion standard voltage.
538
Table 15.1 Pin Configuration
Pin
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Analog supply
AVCC
I
Analog section power supply
Analog ground
AVSS
I
Analog section ground and A/D conversion
reference voltage
Reference voltage
AVref
I
A/D conversion standard voltage
(SH7043 only)
Analog input 0
AN0
I
Analog input channel 0
Analog input 1
AN1
I
Analog input channel 1
Analog input 2
AN2
I
Analog input channel 2
Analog input 3
AN3
I
Analog input channel 3
Analog input 4
AN4
I
Analog input channel 4
Analog input 5
AN5
I
Analog input channel 5
Analog input 6
AN6
I
Analog input channel 6
Analog input 7
AN7
I
Analog input channel 7
A/D external trigger input
ADTRG
I
External trigger for A/D conversion start
15.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 15.2 shows the configuration of the high speed A/D converter registers.
Table 15.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
A/D data register A
ADDRA
R
H'0000
H'FFFF83F0
8,16
A/D data register B
ADDRB
R
H'0000
H'FFFF83F2
A/D data register C
ADDRC
R
H'0000
H'FFFF83F4
A/D data register D
ADDRD
R
H'0000
H'FFFF83F6
A/D data register E
ADDRE
R
H'0000
H'FFFF83F8
A/D data register F
ADDRF
R
H'0000
H'FFFF83FA
A/D data register G
ADDRG
R
H'0000
H'FFFF83FC
A/D data register H
ADDRH
R
H'0000
H'FFFF83FE
A/D control/status register ADCSR
R/(W)* H'00
H'FFFF83E0
A/D control register
R/W
H'FFFF83E1
ADCR
H'00
Note: * Only 0 can be written to bit 7 to clear the flag.
539
15.2
Register Descriptions
15.2.1
A/D Data Registers A–H (ADDRA–ADDRH)
The ADDR are 16-bit read only registers for storing A/D conversion results. There are eight of
these registers, ADDRA through ADDRH.
The A/D converted data is 10-bit data which is sent to the ADDR for the corresponding converted
channel for storage. The lower 8 bits of the A/D converted data are transferred to and stored in the
lower byte (bits 7–0) of the ADDR, and the upper 2 bits are stored into the upper byte (bits 9, 8).
Bits 15–10 always read as 0. Data reads can be either byte or word. The upper 8 bits of the
converted data are transferred upon byte data reads. Additionally, buffered operation is possible by
combining ADDRA–ADDRD.
Table 15.3 shows the correspondence between the analog input channels and the ADDR.
The ADDR are initialized to H'0000 by power-on reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does not
initialize ADDR.
Bit:
540
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
AD9
AD8
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Table 15.3 Analog Input Channel and ADDR Correspondence
Analog Input Channel
A/D Data Register
AN0
ADDRA*
AN1
ADDRB*
AN2
ADDRC*
AN3
ADDRD*
AN4
ADDRE
AN5
ADDRF
AN6
ADDRG
AN7
ADDRH
Note: * Except during buffer operation
15.2.2
A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
The ADCSR is an 8-bit read/write register used for A/D conversion operation control and to
indicate status.
The ADCSR is initialized to H'00 by power-on reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does not
initialize ADCSR.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADF
ADIE
ADST
CKS
GRP
CH2
CH1
CH0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * The only value that can be written is a 0 to clear the flag.
541
• Bit 7—A/D End Flag (ADF): This status flag indicates that A/D conversion has ended.
Bit 7: ADF
Description
0
Clear conditions (initial value)
1
•
With ADF = 1, by reading the ADF flag then writing 0 in ADF
•
When the DTC or DMAC are activated by an ADI interrupt
Set conditions
•
Single mode: When A/D conversion ends after conversion for all
designated channels (during buffer operation, this is not set until
operation of the specified buffer has ended)
•
Scan mode: After one round of A/D conversion for all specified
channels
• Bit 6—A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Enables or disables interrupt requests (ADI) after A/D
conversion ends. Set the ADIE bit while conversion is suspended.
Bit 6: ADIE
Description
0
Disables interrupt requests (ADI) after A/D conversion ends (initial
value)
1
Enables interrupt requests (ADI) after A/D conversion ends
• Bit 5—A/D Start (ADST): Selects start or stop for A/D conversion. A 1 is maintained during
A/D conversions.
The ADST bit can be set to 1 by software, timer conversion start triggers, or an A/D external
trigger input pin (ADTRG).
Bit 5: ADST
Description
0
A/D conversion halted (initial value)
1
Single mode: Start A/D conversion. Automatically cleared to 0 after
conversion for the designated channel ends.
Scan mode: Start A/D conversion. Continuous conversion until 0
cleared by software.
542
• Bit 4—Clock Select (CKS): Sets the A/D conversion time. Set, according to the operating
frequency, to give a conversion time of at least 2 µs (5 V version) or 4 µs (3.3 V version).
Make conversion time changes only while conversion is halted.
Bit 4: CKS
Description
0
Conversion time = 40 states (A/D converter standard clock = φ/2) (initial
value)
1
Conversion time = 80 states (when φ/4 is selected)
• Bit 3—Group Mode (GRP): Designates either select mode or group mode for the A/D
conversion channel selection.
Set the GRP bit only while conversion is halted.
Bit 3: GRP
Description
0
Select mode (initial value)
1
Group mode
• Bits 2–0—Channel Select 2–0 (CH2–CH0): These bits, along with the GRP bit, select the
analog input channel.
Set the input channel only while conversion is halted.
Description
Bit 2: CH2
Bit 1: CH1
Bit 0: CH0
Select Mode (GRP = 0)
Group Mode (GRP = 1)
0
0
0
AN0 (initial value)
AN0
0
0
1
AN1
AN0–AN1
0
1
0
AN2
AN0–AN2
0
1
1
AN3
AN0–AN3
1
0
0
AN4
AN0–AN4
1
0
1
AN5
AN0–AN5
1
1
0
AN6
AN0–AN6
1
1
1
AN7
AN0–AN7
543
15.2.3
A/D Control Register (ADCR)
The ADCR is an 8-bit read/write register used for A/D conversion operation control. The ADCR is
initialized to H'00 by power-on reset or in standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
PWR
TRGS1
TRGS0
SCAN
DSMP
BUFE1
BUFE0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bit 7—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 6—Power (PWR): Designates the conversion start mode for the high speed A/D converter.
Setting the PWR bit to 1 sets high speed start mode, and a 0 sets to low power conversion
mode. See section 15.4.7, Conversion Start Modes, for details on the conversion start
operation.
Set the PWR bit only while conversion is halted.
Bit 6: PWR
Description
0
Low power conversion mode (initial value)
1
High speed start mode
• Bits 5 and 4—Timer Trigger Select 1, 0 (TRGS1, TRGS0): These bits enable or prohibit A/D
conversion starts by trigger signals.
Set the TRGS1, TRGS0 bits only while conversion is halted.
Bit 5: TRGS1
Bit 4: TRGS0
Description
0
0
Enable A/D conversion start by software (initial value)
0
1
Enables A/D conversion start by MTU conversion start trigger
1
0
Reserved
1
1
Enables A/D conversion start by external trigger pin (ADTRG)
• Bit 3—Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects either single mode or scan mode for the A/D conversion
operation mode. See section 15.4, Operation, for details on single mode and scan mode
operation.
Set the SCAN bit only while conversion is halted.
Bit 3: SCAN
Description
0
Single mode (initial value)
1
Scan mode
544
• Bit 2—Simultaneous Sampling (DSMP): Enables or disables the simultaneous sampling of two
channels. See section 15.4.6, Simultaneous Sampling Operation, for details on simultaneous
sampling.
Set the DSMP bit only while conversion is halted.
Bit 2: DSMP
Description
0
Normal sampling operation (initial value)
1
Simultaneous sampling operation
• Bits 1–0—Buffer Enable 1, 0 (BUFE1, BUFE0): These bits select whether to use the
ADDRB–ADDRD as buffer registers.
Set the BUFE1 and BUFE0 bits only while conversion is halted.
Bit 1: BUFE1
Bit 0: BUFE0
Description
0
0
Normal operation (initial value)
0
1
ADDRA and ADDRB buffer operation: conversion result →
ADDRA → ADDRB (ADDRB is the buffer register)
1
0
ADDRA and ADDRC, also ADDRB and ADDRD buffer
operation: conversion result 1 → ADDRA → ADDRC,
conversion result 2 → ADDRB → ADDRD (ADDRC and
ADDRD are buffer registers)
1
1
ADDRA–ADDRD buffer operation: conversion result →
ADDRA → ADDRB → ADDRC → ADDRD (ADDRB–ADDRD
are buffer registers)
15.3
Bus Master Interface
The ADDRA–ADDRH are 16-bit registers with a 16-bit width data bus to the bus master. The bus
master can read from ADDRA–ADDRH in either word or byte units.
When an ADDR is read in word units, the ADDR contents are transferred to the bus master 16 bits
at a time. In byte unit reads, the contents of the most significant eight bits (AD9–AD2) of the
converted data (AD9–AD0) are transferred to the bus master.
Figures 15.2 and 15.3 shows an example of the ADDR read operation.
545
Word data read
Data
register
Bus I/F
0
0
0
0
Internal data bus
Upper 8 bits
0
0
AD 9
AD 8
AD 7
AD 6
AD 5
AD 4
Lower 8 bits
AD 3
AD 2
AD 1
AD 0
Figure 15.2 ADDR Read Operation (1)
546
Byte data read
Data register
Bus I/F
0
0
0
Internal data bus
0
Upper 8 bits
0
0
AD 9
AD 8
AD 7
AD 6
AD 5
AD 4
AD 3
AD 2
AD 1
AD 0
Figure 15.3 ADDR Read Operation (2)
547
15.4
Operation
• The high speed A/D converter has 10-bit resolution.
• In addition to the four operating modes of select or group, and single or scan can be set in
combination with buffer operation and simultaneous sampling operation.
• Select mode uses one channel and group mode selects multiple channels.
• One start in the single mode performs conversions on all selected channels, and one start in the
scan mode performs repeated conversions until stopped by software.
• In buffer operation, the previous conversion result is saved in a buffer register at the end of a
conversion for the relevant channel.
• In simultaneous sampling operation, the analog input voltages of two channels are sampled
simultaneously then converted in order.
• Software, a timer conversion start trigger (MTU), or an ADTRG input can be selected as the
conversion start condition.
• High speed start mode or low power conversion mode can be selected for A/D conversion
using the PWR bit setting.
• When changing the operation mode or input channel, rewrite the ADCSR, ADCR while the
ADST bit is cleared to 0. After rewriting the ADCSR, ADCR, A/D conversion will be restarted
when the ADST bit is set to 1. Operation mode or input channel changes can be made
simultaneously with ADST bit setting. When stopping an A/D conversion before completion, 0
clear the ADST bit.
15.4.1
Select-Single Mode
Choose select-single mode when doing A/D conversions for one channel only.
When the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion is started according to the designated conversion
start conditions. The ADST bit is held to 1 during the A/D conversion and is automatically cleared
to 0 upon completion.
The ADF flag is also set to 1 at the end of conversion. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an
ADI interrupt request is generated. The ADF flag is cleared by reading the ADCSR, then writing a
0.
Figure 15.4 shows an example of operation in the select-single mode when AN1 is selected.
548
ADF
Set to 1 by software
ADST
Channel 0
Channel 1
Automatic clear
Conversion standby
Conversion
A/D
Conversion
Sampling 1
standby
conversion 1 standby
Channel 2
Conversion standby
Channel 3
Conversion standby
ADDRA
ADDRB
Conversion result 1
ADDRC
ADDRD
Figure 15.4 A/D Converter Operation Example (Select-Single Mode)
15.4.2
Select-Scan Mode
Choose select-scan mode when doing repeated A/D conversions for one channel. This is useful
when doing continuous monitoring of the analog input of one channel.
When the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion is started according to the designated conversion
start conditions. The ADST bit is held to 1 until 0 cleared by software. A/D conversion for the
selected input channel is repeated during that interval.
The ADF flag is set to 1 at the end of the first conversion. At this point, if the ADIE bit is set, an
ADI interrupt request is issued, and the A/D converter is halted. With the A/D converter in stop
mode due to an ADI interrupt request, conversion is restarted when the ADF flag is cleared to 0.
The ADF flag is cleared by reading the ADCSR then writing a 0.
Figure 15.5 shows an example of operation in the select-scan mode when AN1 is selected.
549
ADF
ADST
Channel 0
Set to 1 by software
Cleared to 0 by software
Conversion standby
A/D conversion 5
Channel 1
ConverSampling
sion
1
standby
A/D
conversion 1
Sampling
3
A/D
conversion 3
Sampling
5
Conversion
standby
Sampling
2
A/D
conversion 2
Sampling
4
A/D
conversion 4
Conversion
stopped
Sampling 6
Channel 2
Conversion standby
Channel 3
Conversion standby
ADDRA
ADDRB
Conversion
result 1
Conversion
result 2
Conversion
result 3
Conversion
result 4
ADDRC
ADDRD
Figure 15.5 A/D Converter Operation Example (Select-Scan Mode)
15.4.3
Group-Single Mode
Choose group-single mode when doing A/D conversions for multiple channels.
When the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion is started according to the designated conversion
start conditions. The ADST bit is held to 1 during A/D conversion and is automatically cleared to
0 when all conversions for the designated input channels are completed.
The ADF flag is set to 1 when all conversions for the designated input channels are completed. If
the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated. The ADF flag is cleared
by reading the ADCSR then writing a 0.
Figure 15.6 shows an example of operation in the group-single mode when AN0–AN2 are
selected.
550
ADF
ADST
Channel 0
Channel 1
A/D
Conversion Sampling conversion Conversion
standby
standby
1
1
Conversion standby
Channel 2 Conversion standby
Channel 3
Automatic clear
Set to 1 by software
A/D
Sampling conversion
2
2
Sampling
3
Conversion standby
A/D
Conversion
conversion
standby
3
Conversion standby
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
Conversion result 1
Conversion result 2
Conversion result 3
ADDRD
Figure 15.6 A/D Converter Operation Example (Group-Single Mode)
15.4.4
Group-Scan Mode
Choose group-scan mode when doing repeated A/D conversions for multiple channels. This is
useful when doing continuous monitoring of the analog inputs of multiple channels.
When the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion is started according to the designated conversion
start conditions. The ADST bit is held to 1 until 0 cleared by software. A/D conversion for the
selected input channels is repeated during that interval.
The ADF flag is set to 1 at the completion of the first conversions of all the designated input
channels. At this point, if the ADIE bit is set to 1, an ADI interrupt request is issued, and the A/D
converter is temporarily halted. With the A/D converter in stop mode due to an ADI interrupt
request, conversion is restarted when the ADF flag is cleared to 0. The ADF flag is cleared by
reading the ADCSR, then writing a 0.
551
Figure 15.7 shows an example of operation in the group-scan mode when AN0–AN2 are selected.
Conversion standby
ADF
Cleared to 0 by software
Set to 1 by software
ADST
Conversion
stopped
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Conversion
standby
Sampling
1
Conversion
standby
A/D
conversion 1
Sampling
2
Conversion standby
Channel 3
ADDRA
ADDRB
Sampling
4
A/D
conversion 4
A/D
conversion 2
Conversion
standby
Sampling
5
A/D
conversion 5
Sampling
3
A/D
conversion 3
Conversion
standby
Sampling
6
Conversion standby
Conversion result 1
Conversion result 4
Conversion result 2
Conversion result 5
ADDRC
Conversion result 3
ADDRD
Figure 15.7 A/D Converter Operation Example (Group-Scan Mode)
15.4.5
Buffer Operation
When conversion ends on the relevant channel, the conversion result is stored in the ADDR, and
simultaneously, the previously stored result is transferred to another ADDR. Buffer operation can
be selected from the following:
• AN0 → ADDRA → ADDRB (Two-stage, one-group operation)
• AN0 → ADDRA → ADDRC, AN1 → ADDRB → ADDRD (Two-stage, two-group
operation)
• AN0 → ADDRA → ADDRB → ADDRC → ADDRD (Four-stage, one-group operation)
552
To use in combination with simultaneous sampling, set GRP = 1, BUFE1, BUFE0 = B'10, and
CH2 = 0. Buffer operation timing is shown in figure 15.8.
ADF
Set to 1
by software
ADST
Channel 0
Conversion
standby
Sampling
1
Conversion
standby
Cleared to 0
by software
A/D
conversion 1
Sampling
3
A/D
conversion 3
Sampling
5
Sampling
2
A/D
conversion 2
Sampling
4
A/D
conversion 4
Conversion
result 1
Conversion
result 2
Conversion
result 3
Conversion
result 4
Conversion
result 1
Conversion
result 2
Conversion
result 3
Channel 1 Conversion standby
Channel 2 Conversion standby
Channel 3 Conversion standby
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
Figure 15.8 Buffer Operation Example (Select Scan Mode: Two-Stage One-Group
Operation, When CH2–CH0 = B'001)
Buffer-Only Operation: When performing conversion only on the analog input channels
specified by the BUFE1 and BUFE0 bits, select group mode, and you can select the ADF flag
setting conditions with the CH2–CH0 bits.
Table 15.4 shows conversion during buffer operation and ADF flag setting conditions. The ADF
flag is set at the point in the table when the final conversion has ended. In single mode, conversion
is halted after the ADF flag is set to 1. In scan mode, conversion continues, and the converted data
is stored in sequence in the buffer registers specified by the BUFE1 and BUFE0 bits.
553
When the ADF flag is set to 1, if the ADIE bit is also set to 1, an ADI interrupt is issued. After the
ADCSR is read, the ADF flag is cleared by a 0 write.
With select single mode, the A/D converter goes into standby mode at the end of every conversion
cycle. The A/D converter is restarted by software, a timer trigger, or external trigger. When the
number of conversion cycles shown in table 15.4 have ended, the ADF flag is set to 1.
Table 15.4 Conversion Channel and ADF Flag Setting/Clearing Conditions during Buffer
Operation 1
Channel Setting
Sampling Channel
CH2 CH1 CH0
BUFE1, BUFE0 = B'01
BUFE1, BUFE0 = B'10
BUFE1, BUFE0 = B'11
0
0
AN0 1 time (ADDRA)
AN0, AN1 1 time
(ADDRB)
AN0 1 time (ADDRA)
1
AN0 2 times (ADDRB)
0
*
1
*
—
*
0
1
1
—
AN0 2 times (ADDRB)
AN0, AN1 2 times
(ADDRD)
AN0 3 times (ADDRC)
AN0 4 times (ADDRD)
*
*
Note: * See table 15.5.
Combined Group Mode and Buffer Operation: Continuous conversion is possible on analog
input channels (AN0 and AN1) specified by bits BUFE1 and BUFE0 as well as AN4–AN7 due to
setting of bits CH2–CH0.
Table 15.5 shows conversion during buffer operation and ADF flag setting conditions. The ADF
flag is set at the point in the table when the final conversion has ended. In this case, conversion is
performed on the analog input corresponding with the ADDR specified in the buffer register. For
example, when BUFE1 and BUFE0 = B'11 and CH2–CH0 = B'110, conversion results are stored
in ADDRA and ADDRE–ADDRG. Also, contents of ADDRA–ADDRC before the start of
conversion are transferred to ADDRB–ADDRD.
In single mode, conversion is halted after the ADF flag has been set to 1. Conversion continues in
scan mode.
554
Table 15.5 Conversion Channel and ADF Flag Setting/Clearing Conditions During Buffer
Operation 2
Channel Setting
Sampling Channel
CH2 CH1 CH0
BUFE1, BUFE0 = B'01 BUFE1, BUFE0 = B'10 BUFE1, BUFE0 = B'11
0
1
0
—
*
1
0
AN0, AN2 (ADDRC)
1
AN0, AN2, AN3
(ADDRD)
0
0
1
*
*
AN0, AN2–AN4
(ADDRE)
AN0, AN1, AN4
(ADDRE)
AN0, AN4 (ADDRE)
1
AN0, AN2–AN5
(ADDRF)
AN0, AN1, AN4, AN5
(ADDRF)
AN0, AN4, AN5
(ADDRF)
0
AN0, AN2–AN6
(ADDRG)
AN0, AN1, AN4–AN6
(ADDRG)
AN0, AN4–AN6
(ADDRG)
1
AN0, AN2–AN7
(ADDRH)
AN0, AN1, AN4–AN7
(ADDRH)
AN0, AN4–AN7
(ADDRH)
Note: * See table 15.4.
ADF Flag Clearing: When the DTC and DMAC are started up due to an A/D conversion end
interrupt, the ADF flag is cleared when the ADDR specified in table 15.4 or 15.5 has been read.
Resetting the Number of Buffer Operations: Clear the BUFE1 and BUFE0 bits to B'00 in
conversion standby mode or when the converter has been halted. The number of buffer operations
is cleared to 0.
Updating Buffer Operations: Clear the BUFE1 and BUFE0 bits to B'00 in conversion standby
mode or when the converter has been halted. Thereafter, set BUFE1 and BUFE0, and the buffer
operations shown in tables 15.4 and 15.5 are performed when conversion is resumed.
15.4.6
Simultaneous Sampling Operation
With simultaneous sampling, continuous conversion is conducted with sampling of the input
voltages on two channels at the same time. Simultaneous sampling is valid in group mode.
Channels for sampling are determined by the CH2 and CH1 bits of the RDSCR. The combinations
are shown in table 15.6. For example, if GRP = 1 when CH2 and CH1 = B'11, sampling occurs in
order in the following pairs: AN0, AN1→AN2, AN3→AN4, AN5→AN6, AN7. Sampling timing
is shown in figure 15.9.
555
Table 15.6 Simultaneous Sampling Channels
Channel Setting
CH2
CH1
Sampling Channels, GRP 1
0
0
AN0, AN1
1
AN0, AN1→AN2, AN3
0
AN0, AN1→AN2, AN3→AN4, AN5
1
AN0, AN1→AN2, AN3→AN4, AN5→AN6, AN7
1
ADF
Set to 1 by software
ADST
Channel 0
Conversion
standby
Sampling
1
Channel 1
Conversion
standby
ConverSampling
sion
2
standby
Channel 2
Conversion standby
Channel 3
Conversion standby
ADDRA
ADDRB
A/D
conversion 1
Automatically cleared
Conversion
standby
conversion
standby
A/D
conversion 2
Conversion result 1
Conversion result 2
ADDRC
ADDRD
Figure 15.9 Simultaneous Sampling Operation (Group Single Mode)
556
15.4.7
Conversion Start Modes
The conversion start mode of the high speed A/D converter is set by the PWR bit of the ADCSR.
When the PWR bit is cleared to 0, low-power conversion mode is set and the internal analog
circuit becomes inactive. High-speed start mode is set by setting the PWR bit to 1, and the analog
circuit becomes active.
In the low-power conversion mode, power is applied to the analog circuitry simultaneous to the
conversion start (ADST set). When 200 cycles of the reference clock have elapsed, conversion
becomes possible for the analog circuit and the first A/D conversion begins. When performing
consecutive conversions, the second and later conversions are executed in 10 cycles. Select the
basic clock with the CKS bit of the ADCSR. When the A/D conversion ends, ADST is cleared to
0 and the analog circuit power supply is automatically cut off. Because the analog circuit is only
active during the A/D conversion operation period in this mode, current consumption can be
reduced.
In high-speed start mode, ADST is cleared to 0 when A/D conversion ends. Power continues to be
supplied to the analog circuitry, and conversion-ready status is maintained. Conversion is restarted
immediately by resetting ADST to 1. However, the first conversion after power-on begins 200
cycles after setting ADST. Clear the PWR bit to 0 to switch off the analog power supply. When
performing consecutive conversions, the second and later conversions are executed in 20 cycles.
Because the analog circuit is always active in this mode, A/D conversion can be executed at high
speed.
557
Figures 15.10 and 15.11 show examples of conversion start operation timing.
ADF
Analog circuit
power supply
Set
ADST
Clear
Set to 1 by software
Channel 0
Conversion
standby
Channel 1
Conversion
standby
Channel 2
Conversion
standby
Channel 3
Conversion
standby
Sampling
1
Cleared to 0 by software
A/D
conversion 1
Sampling
3
Sampling
2
A/D
conversion 2
A/D
conversion 3
200 cycles
ADDRA
ADDRB
Conversion
result 1
Conversion
result 3
Conversion
result 2
ADDRC
ADDRD
Figure 15.10 Conversion Start Operation (Low-Power Conversion Mode)
558
ADF
Analog
circuit
power
supply
(PWR cleared to 0)
Switched on by software (PWR set to 1)
ADST
Switched off
by software
Set to 1 by software
Set to 1 by software
Channel 0
Conversion
standby
Channel 1
Conversion
standby
Channel 2
Conversion
standby
Channel 3
Conversion
standby
Sampling
1
A/D
conversion 1
Sampling
2
A/D
conversion 2
200 cycles
Conversion result 2
ADDRA
Conversion result 1
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
Figure 15.11 Conversion Start Operation (High-Speed Start Mode)
559
15.4.8
Conversion Start by External Input
A/D conversions can be started by trigger signals generated by timer conversion start triggers or
ADTRG inputs. When a trigger signal designated by the TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits of the ADCR
occurs, the ADST bit of the ADCSR is set to 1 and A/D conversion is started.
The other operations are the same as when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software. Figure 15.12
shows an example of the timing when the ADST bit is set by an external input.
ADTRG
(external
trigger)
Set
ADF
ADST
Channel 0
Channel 1
Conversion standby
ConverSamsion
pling 1
standby
A/D
Conversion
converstandby
sion 1
Channel 2
Conversion standby
Channel 3
Conversion standby
ADDRA
ADDRB
Conversion result 1
ADDRC
ADDRD
Figure 15.12 Conversion Start by ADTRG Conversion Start Trigger
560
15.4.9
A/D Conversion Time
The high speed A/D converter has an on-chip sample and hold circuit. The high speed A/D
converter samples the input at time t D after the ADST bit is set to 1, and then starts the conversion.
The A/D conversion time tCONV is the sum of the conversion start delay time tD, the input sampling
time tSPL, and the operating time tCP. This conversion time is not a set value, but is decided by the
tD ADCSR write timing, or the timer conversion start trigger generation timing.
Figure 15.13 shows an example of A/D conversion timing. Table 15.7 lists A/D conversion times.
φ
Address
Write signal
ADST
Sampling
timing
ADF
tD
tSPL
tCP
tCONV
t D:
t SPL:
t CONV:
t CP:
A/D conversion start delay time
Input sampling time
A/D conversion time
Operation time
Figure 15.13 A/D Conversion Timing
561
Table 15.7 A/D Conversion Times
CKS = 0
CKS = 1
Time
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
A/D conversion start
delay time
tD
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Input sampling time
t SPL
20
20
20
40
40
40
A/D conversion time
t CONV
42.5
42.5
42.5
82.5
82.5
82.5
Notes: 1. Unit: states
2. Table entries are for when ADST = 1. If 200 states have not elapsed since the PWR bit
has been set, no conversions are done until after those 200 states have occurred.
When PWR = 0, add 200 states to the first A/D conversion start delay time. When
continuously executing conversion, tcp for the second time and following is 20 cycle
when CKS=0 and 40 cycle when CKS=1.
The CKS bit of the ADCSR is the operation time tCONV, but set so that this is 2 µs or greater. Table
15.8 shows the operating frequency and CKS bit settings.
Table 15.8 Operating Frequency and CKS Bit Settings
Minimum Conversion Time (µs)
CKS
Conversion Time
(States)
28 MHz
20 MHz
16 MHz
10 MHz
8 MHz
0
42.5
—
2.1
2.6
4.3
5.3
1
82.5
2.9
4.2
5.0
8.3
10.3
Note: The indication “—” means the setting is not available.
15.5
Interrupts
The high speed A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) upon completion
of A/D conversions. The ADI interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit of the
ADCSR.
The DTC or DMAC can be activated by ADI interrupts. When converted data is read by the DTC
or DMAC upon an ADI interrupt, consecutive conversions can be done without software
responsibility.
Table 15.9 lists the high speed A/D converter interrupt sources.
During scan mode, if the ADIE bit is set to 1, A/D conversion is temporarily suspended
immediately when the ADF flag is set to 1. A/D conversion is restarted when the ADF flag is
cleared to 0.
562
When the DTC or DMAC are activated by an ADI interrupt, the ADF flag is cleared to 0 when the
final specified data register is read.
Table 15.9 High Speed A/D Converter Interrupt Sources
Interrupt Source
Description
DTC, DMAC Activation
ADI
Interrupt caused by conversion end
Possible
15.6
Notes on Use
Take note of the following for the A/D converter.
1. Analog input voltage range
During A/D conversions, see that the voltage applied to the analog input pins AN0–AN7 is
within the range Avss ≤ AN0–AN7 ≤ AVcc.
2. AVcc and AVss input voltages
The AVcc and AVss input voltage must be AVcc = Vcc ± 10%, AVss = Vss. When not using
the A/D converter, use AVcc = Vcc, AVss = Vss. During the standby mode, use VRAM ≤ Avcc
≤ 5.5V, AVss = Vss. VRAM is the RAM standby voltage.
3. AVref input voltage
The analog standard voltage AVref (AVref) must be Avref ≤ AVcc. When not using the A/D
converter, use AVref = Vcc. During the standby mode, use VRAM ≤ AVref ≤ AVcc. VRAM is the
RAM standby voltage.
4. Input ports
The time constant for the circuit connecting to the input port must be shorter than the sampling
time of the A/D converter. Input voltage may not be sampled sufficiently when the time
constant of the circuit is long.
5. Conversion start modes
Depending on the PWR bit setting, the demand for A/D conversion will differ for the highspeed start mode and low-demand conversion mode.
6. Analog input pins handling
Connect a protection circuit as shown in figure 15.14 to prevent analog input pins (AN0–AN7)
from being destroyed due to abnormal voltage from surge, etc. This circuit is also equipped
with a CR filter to control errors due to noise. The circuit shown in the diagram is only an
example and the number of circuits is to be determined by considering the actual condition of
use.
Figure 15.15 shows an equivalent circuit of analog input pins and table 15.10 shows the
specification of the analog input pins.
563
AVcc
AVref
This LSI
100Ω
Rin*2
AN0 to AN7
*1
0.1µF
*1
AVss
Notes:
Numbers are only to be noted as reference value
*1
10µF
0.01µF
*2 Rin: Input impedance
Figure 15.14 Example of a Protection Circuit for the Analog Input Pins
1.0kΩ
AN0 to AN7
20pF
Analog multiplexer
1MΩ
High-speed A/D converter
Note: Numbers are only to be noted as reference value
Figure 15.15 Equivalent Circuit of Analog Input Pins
564
Table 15.10 Analog Input Pin Specification
Item
Min
Max
Unit
Analog input capacity
—
20
pF
Permitted source impedance
—
1
kΩ
565
566
Section 16 Mid-Speed A/D Converter (A Mask)
16.1
Overview
The mid-speed A/D converter has 10 bit resolution, and can select from a maximum of eight
channels of analog input.
The mid-speed A/D converter is structured by two independent modules (A/D0 and A/D1)
16.1.1
Features
The mid-speed A/D converter has the following features:
• 10-bit resolution
• Eight input channels (four channels times two)
• Analog conversion voltage range setting is selectable
 Using the standard voltage pin (AVref) as an analog standard voltage (Vref), conversion of
analog input from 0V to Vref (only with SH7041A, SH7043A, and SH7045).
(Connected to AVCC internally in the SH7040A, SH7042A, and SH7044.)
• High speed conversion
 Minimum conversion time: per channel
 Operation frequency: f≤20MHz, CKS=0, 1
6.7µs (20MHz, CKS=1)
 Operation frequency: f>20MHz, CKS=0
9.3µs (28.7MHz, CKS=0)
• Multiple conversion modes
 Single mode/scan mode
 2 channel simultaneous conversion
• Three types of conversion start
 Software, timer conversion start trigger (MTU), or ADTRG pin can be selected.
• Eight data registers
 Conversion results stored in 16-bit data registers corresponding to each channel.
• Sample and hold function
• A/D conversion end interrupt generation
 An A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) can be generated on completion of A/D
conversion.
• Furthermore, ADI0 (A/D0 interrupt request) can activate DTC and ADI1 (A/D1 interrupt
request) can activate DMAC.
567
16.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 16.1 is the block diagram of the mid-speed A/D converter.
AVCC, AVref and AVSS pins of both A/D are common in LSI.
A/D0
Bus interface
ADCR0
ADCSR0
ADDRD0
ADDRC0
10-bit D/A
ADDRB0
AVref
(Only with 144 pin)
AVss
ADDRA0
AVcc
Continuous
comparison
register
Module data bus
Port
trigger
MTU
trigger
Logical
sum
Analog multiplexer
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
+
−
Comparator
Control circuit
Sample & hold circuit
Interrupt
signal ADI0
(DTC)
A/D1
AN5
AN6
AN7
Analog multiplexer
AN4
Bus interface
ADCR1
ADCSR1
ADDRD1
ADDRC1
ADDRB1
ADDRA1
10-bit D/A
AVss
Continuous
comparison
register
AVcc
(Only with 144 pin)
AVref
Module data bus
+
−
Comparator
Control circuit
Sample & hold circuit
Figure 16.1 Mid-Speed A/D Converter Block Diagram
568
Interrupt
signal ADI1
(DMAC)
16.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 16.1 shows the input pins used with the mid-speed A/D converter.
The AVCC and AVSS pins are for the mid-speed A/D converter internal analog section power
supply. AVref pin is the A/D conversion standard voltage.
Table 16.1 Pin Configuration
Pin
Abbreviation I/O
Analog supply
Av CC
I
Analog section power supply
Analog ground
AVSS
I
Analog section ground and A/D conversion
standard voltage
Standard voltage
AVref *
I
A/D conversion standard voltage
(SH7041A, SH7043A, and SH7045 only)
A/D0
Analog input 0
AND
I
Analog input channel 0
Analog input 1
AN1
I
Analog input channel 1
Analog input 2
AN2
I
Analog input channel 2
Analog input 3
AN3
I
Analog input channel 3
Analog input 4
AN4
I
Analog input channel 4
Analog input 5
AN5
I
Analog input channel 5
Analog input 6
AN6
I
Analog input channel 6
Analog input 7
AN7
I
Analog input channel 7
ADTRG
I
External trigger for A/D conversion start
A/D1
A/D external trigger input
Function
Note: * In the SH7040A, SH7042A, and SH7044, AVref is connected to AV CC internally.
569
16.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 16.2 shows the register configuration of the mid-speed A/D converter.
Table 16.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial Value Address
Access Size
A/D0 data register AH
ADDRA0H
R
H'00
H'FFFF8400
8, 16
A/D0 data register AL
ADDRA0L
R
H'00
H'FFFF8401
8
A/D0 data register BH
ADDRB0H
R
H'00
H'FFFF8402
8, 16
A/D0 data register BL
ADDRB0L
R
H'00
H'FFFF8403
8
A/D0 data register CH
ADDRC0H
R
H'00
H'FFFF8404
8, 16
A/D0 data register CL
ADDRC0L
R
H'00
H'FFFF8405
8
A/D0 data register DH
ADDRD0H
R
H'00
H'FFFF8406
8, 16
A/D0 data register DL
ADDRD0L
R
H'00
H'FFFF8407
8
A/D0 control/status register ADCSR0
R/(W)* H'00
H'FFFF8410
8, 16
A/D0 control register
ADCR0
R/W
H'7F
H'FFFF8412
8, 16
A/D1 data register AH
ADDRA1H
R
H'00
H'FFFF8408
8, 16
A/D1 data register AL
ADDRA1L
R
H'00
H'FFFF8409
8
A/D1 data register BH
ADDRB1H
R
H'00
H'FFFF840A
8, 16
A/D1 data register BL
ADDRB1L
R
H'00
H'FFFF840B
8
A/D1 data register CH
ADDRC1H
R
H'00
H'FFFF840C
8, 16
A/D1 data register CL
ADDRC1L
R
H'00
H'FFFF840D
8
A/D1 data register DH
ADDRD1H
R
H'00
H'FFFF840E
8, 16
A/D1 data register DL
ADDRD1L
R
H'00
H'FFFF840F
8
A/D1 control/status register ADCSR1
R/(W)* H'00
H'FFFF8411
8
A/D1 control register
R/W
H'FFFF8413
8
ADCR1
H'7F
Note: * Only 0 can be written to bit 7 to clear the flag.
570
16.2
Register Descriptions
16.2.1
A/D Data Register A–D (ADDRA0–ADDRD0, ADDRA1–ADDRD1)
A/D registers are special registers that read stored results of A/D conversion in 16 bits. There are
eight registers: ADDRA0–ADDRD0 (A/D0) and ADDRA1–ADDRD1 (A/D1).
The A/D converted data is 10 bit data which is to the ADDR of the corresponding converted
channel for storage. The upper 8 bits of the A/D converted data correspond to the upper byte of the
ADDR and the lower 2 bits correspond to the lower byte. Bits 5–0 of the lower byte of ADDR are
reserved and always read 0. Analog input channels and correspondence to ADDR are shown in
table 16.3.
ADDR can always be read from the CPU. The upper byte may be read directly. The lower byte is
transferred through the temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 16.3, Interface with
CPU.
ADDR is initialized to H'0000 during power-on reset or standby mode. ADDR will not be
initialized by manual reset.
Bit :
15
ADDRn : AD9
Initial value :
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W :
R
(n=A to D)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Table 16.3 Analog Input Channel and ADDRA–ADDRD Correspondence
Analog Input Channel
A/D Data Register
Module
AN0
ADDRA0
A/D0
AN1
ADDRB0
AN2
ADDRC0
AN3
ADDRD0
AN4
ADDRA1
AN5
ADDRB1
AN6
ADDRC1
AN7
ADDRD1
A/D1
571
16.2.2
A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR0, ADCSR1)
The A/D control/status registers (ADCSR0, 1) are registers that can read/write in 8 bits and control
A/D converter operations such as mode selection. There are the ADCSR0 (A/D0) and ADCSR1
(A/D1).
The ADCSR is initialized to H'00 during power-on reset or standby mode. Manual reset does not
initialize ADCSR.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CKS
—
CH1
CH0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
• Bit 7—A/D End Flag (ADF): Status flag that indicates end of A/D conversion.
Bit 7:
ADF
Description
0
[Clear conditions]
(Initial value)
1. Writing 0 to ADF after reading ADF with ADF=1
2. When registers of the mid-speed converter are accessed after the DMAC and DTC
are activated by ADI interrupt.
1
[Set conditions]
1. Single mode: When A/D conversion is complete
2. Scan mode: When A/D conversion of all designated channels are complete
• Bit 6—A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Enables or disables interrupt request (ADI) due to
completion of A/D conversion.
Bit 6:
ADIE
Description
0
Disables interrupt request (ADI) due to completion of A/D conversion
1
Enables interrupt request (ADI) due to completion of A/D conversion
572
(Initial value)
• Bit 5—A/D Start (ADST): Selects start/end of A/D conversion. A1 is maintained during A/D
conversion start. It is also possible to set a 1 by the A/D conversion trigger input pin
(ADTRG).
Bit 5:
ADST
Description
0
A/D conversion halted
1
1. Single mode: Starts A/D conversion. Automatically clears to 0 when conversion of
the designated channel is complete
(Initial value)
2. Scan mode: Starts A/D conversion. Continuous conversion until cleared to 0 by the
software
• Bit 4—Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects the A/D conversion mode from single mode and scan
mode. For operations during single/scan mode, see section 16.4, Operation. When switching
modes, proceed while ADST=0.
Bit 4:
SCAN
Description
0
Single mode
1
Scan mode
(Initial value)
• Bit 3—Clock Select (CKS): Sets the A/D conversion time. Proceed conversion time switch
while adst=0. Always set CKS=0 when operating frequency exceeds 20MHz.
Bit 3:
CKS
Description
0
Conversion time = 266 states (max)
1
Conversion time = 134 states (max)
(Initial value)
• Bit 2—Reserved bit: Bit 2 always reads 0. Furthermore, always write 0.
• Bits 1, 0—Channel select 1, 0 (CH1, CH0): Selects the analog input channel along with the
SCAN bit. Switch channels while ADST=0.
573
Channel
Selection
Description
Single mode
Scan mode
CH1
CH0
A/D0
A/D1
A/D0
A/D1
0
0
AN0
(Initial value)
AN4
(Initial value)
AN0
AN4
1
AN1
AN5
AN0, AN1
AN4, AN5
0
AN2
AN6
AN0, AN1
AN4–AN6
1
AN3
AN7
AN0–AN3
AN4–AN7
1
16.2.3
A/D Control Register (ADCR0, ADCR1)
A/D control registers (ADCR0, 1) are registers that can read/write in 8 bits and enables or disables
A/D conversion start of the external trigger input. There are the ADCR0 (A/D0) and ADCR1
(A/D1).
ADCR is initialized to H'7F during power-on reset and standby mode. Manual reset does not
initialize ADCR.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TRGE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
• Bit 7—Trigger Enable (TRGE): Enables or disables A/D conversion start of input from
external or MTU trigger.
Bit 7:
TRGE
Description
0
Disables A/D conversion start of external or MTU trigger
1
Starts A/D conversion on last transition edge of A/D conversion trigger input pin
(ADTRG) or MTU trigger.
(Initial value)
A/D0 and A/D1 are common for external trigger pin and MTU trigger.
A/D0 and A/D1 settings are of logical sum.
• Bits 6–0—Reserved bits: These bits always read as 1. The write value should always be 1.
574
16.3
Interface with CPU
Although A/D data register ADDR (ADDRA0–ADDRD0, ADDRA1–ADDRD1) are 16-bit
registers, the bus width within the chip that integrates with the CPU is 8-bits. So, upper and lower
data of the ADDR must be read separately.
To avoid change in data while reading the upper/lower 2 bytes of ADDR, the lower byte data is
read through the temporary register (TEMP). The upper byte data can be read directly.
The procedure for reading data from ADDR is as follows: First, read the upper byte data from
ADDR. At this time, the upper byte data is read directly into the CPU and the lower byte data is
transferred to TEMP of the mid-speed A/D converter. Next, read the lower byte to read the TEMP
contents into the CPU.
When reading the ADDR in byte size, read the upper byte before the lower byte. Furthermore, it is
possible to read only the upper byte, however, please note that contents are not guaranteed when
reading only the lower byte. In addition, when reading ADDR in word size, upper byte is
automatically read before the lower byte.
Figure 16.2 shows the data flow when reading from ADDR.
<Reading the upper byte>
CPU
(H'AA)
Module data bus
Bus interface
TEMP
(H'40)
ADDRnH
(H'AA)
ADDRnL
(H'40)
<Reading of the lower byte>
Module data bus
CPU
(H'40)
Bus interface
TEMP
(H'40)
ADDRnH
(H'AA)
ADDRnL
(H'40)
Figure 16.2 ADDR Access Operation (During Reading of (H'AA40))
575
16.4
Operation
The mid-speed converter operates using the continuous comparison method and is equipped with
10-bit resolution. Operations for the single and scan modes are explained below.
16.4.1
Single Mode (SCAN=0)
The single mode is selected when executing A/D conversion for one channel only. A/D conversion
is initiated when the ADST bit of the A/D control/status register is set to 1 by the software or
external trigger input. The ADST bit is held to 1 during the A/D conversion and is automatically
cleared to 0 upon completion.
When conversion is complete, the ADF bit of ADCSR is set to 1. At this time, if the ADIE bit of
ADCSR is 1, ADI interrupt request occurs.
The ADF bit can be cleared by writing 0 after reading ADF=1.
To switch modes or analog input channels during A/D conversion, clear the ADST bit to 0 and
stop A/D conversion to avoid malfunction. After switching (mode/channel change and ADST bit
setting can be made at the same time), set the ADST bit to 1 to restart A/D conversion.
An example of operation when channel 1 (AN1) is selected in the single mode is shown in figure
16.3 (the bit specification in the example is the ADCSR0 register).
1. Set operation mode to single mode (SCAN=0), input channel to AN1 (CH1=0, CH0=1) and
A/D interrupt request to enable (ADIE) then start A/D conversion (ADST=1).
2. When A/D conversion is complete, A/D conversion result is transferred to ADDRB0. At the
same time, ADF=1 will become ADF=0 and the mid-speed converter will standby for
conversion.
3. Since ADF=1 and ADIE=1, ADI interrupt request will occur.
4. The A/D interrupt process routine will start.
5. After reading ADF=1, write 0 to ADF.
6. Read the A/D conversion result (ADDRB0) and process.
7. End A/D interrupt process routine execution. When ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion
starts, following steps (2) to (7) above.
576
Figure 16.3 Operation Example of Mid-speed A/D Converter (Single Mode, Channel 1
Selected)
577
Note: *
ADDRD
ADDRC
ADDRB
ADDRA
Channel 3 (AN3)
Operation state
A/D conversion (1)
Set*
indicates command execution by the software
Conversion standby
Conversion standby
Conversion standby
Channel 1 (AN1)
Operation state
Channel 2 (AN2)
Operation state
Conversion standby
A/D conversion start
Channel 0 (AN0)
Operation state
ADF
ADST
ADIE
Set*
A/D conversion (2)
A/D conversion result (1)
Reading conversion result
Conversion standby
Clear*
Set*
A/D conversion result (2)
Reading conversion result
Conversion standby
Clear*
16.4.2
Scan Mode (SCAN=1)
The scan mode is optimal for monitoring analog input of multiple channels (including channel 1).
A/D conversion is started from channel 1 (AN0 for A/D0 and AN4 for A/D1) of the group when
the ADST bit of the A/D control/status register (ADCSR) is set to 1 by the software or external
trigger input.
When multiple channels are selected, A/D conversion of channel 2 (AN1 or AN5) is initiated
immediately after completion of the channel 1 conversion.
To switch modes or analog input channels during A/D conversion, clear the ADST bit to 0 and
stop A/D conversion to avoid malfunction. After switching (mode/channel change and ADST bit
setting can be made at the same time), set ADST bit to 1 to restart A/D conversion from channel 1.
An example of operation when three channels of A/D0 (AN0–2) are selected for A/D conversion
is shown in figure 16.4 (the bit specification in the example is the ADCSR0 register).
1. Set operation mode to scan mode (SCAN=1), set analog channels to AN0–2 (CH1=1, CH0=0)
then start A/D conversion (ADST=1).
2. When A/D conversion for channel 1 is complete, A/D conversion result is transferred to
ADDRA0.
Next, channel 2 (AN1) will automatically be selected and conversion will begin.
3. In the same manner, channel 3 will be converted (AN2).
4. When conversion of all of the selected channels (AN0–AN2) are complete, ADF will become
1 and channel 1 (AN0) will again be selected and conversion will begin.
At this time, if the ADIE bit is set to 1, ADI interrupt request will occur after completing A/D
conversion.
5. Steps (2) to (4) will be repeated while ADST bit is set to 1.
A/D conversion will stop when setting the ADST bit to 0. When setting the ADST bit to 1,
A/D conversion will start again from channel 1 (AN0).
578
Figure 16.4 Operation Example of Mid-speed A/D Converter (Scan Mode, Three Channels
Selected) (AN0–AN2)
579
Transfer
Conversion standby
A/D conversion(3)
Conversion standby
A/D conversion result(1)
A/D conversion(2)
A/D conversion(4)
Clear*1
A/D conversion result(3)
A/D conversion result(2)
A/D conversion result(4)
Conversion standby
Conversion standby
Clear*1
A/D conversion(5) *2
A/D conversion time
A/D continuous conversion
Conversion standby
indicates command execution by the software
Conversion standby
Conversion standby
Conversion standby A/D conversion(1)
*2 Data is ignored during conversion
Notes: *1
ADDRD
ADDRC
ADDRB
ADDRA
Channel 3 (AN3)
Operation condition
Channel 2 (AN2)
Operation condition
Channel 1 (AN1)
Operation condition
Channel 0 (AN0)
Operation condition
ADF
ADST
Set
*1
16.4.3
Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time
The mid-speed A/D converter is equipped with a sample and hold circuit. The mid-speed A/D
converter samples input after t D hours has elapsed since setting the ADST bit of the A/D
control/status register (ADCSR) to 1, then begins conversion. The A/D conversion timing is
shown in table 16.4.
The A/D conversion time, as shown in figure 16.5, includes both tD and input sampling time. Here,
tD is determined by the write timing to ADCSR and is not constant. Thus the conversion time
changes in the range shown in table 16.4.
The conversion time shown in table 16.4 is the time for the first conversion. For the second
conversion and after, the time will be 256 state (fixed) for CKS=0 and 128 state (fixed) for
CKS=1.
(1)
CK
Address
(2)
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
t
D
t
SPL
t
< Key>
(1): Write cycle of ADCSR
(2): Address of ADCSR
CONV
tD: A/D conversion start delay time
tSPL: Input sampling time
tCONV: A/D conversion time
Figure 16.5 A/D Conversion Timing
580
Table 16.4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS=0
Notation Min
CKS=1
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
A/D conversion start delay time t D
10
—
17
6
—
9
Input sampling time
t SPL
—
64
—
—
32
—
A/D conversion time
t CCNV
259
—
266
131
—
134
Note: Numbers in the table are in states (t cyc ).
16.4.4
External Trigger Input Timing
It is possible to start A/D conversion from an external trigger input. External trigger input is input
from the ADTRG pin or MTU when the TRGE bit of the A/D control register (ADCR) is set to 1.
A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit of the A/D control/status register (ADCSR) is set to
1 by the ADTRG input pin last transition edge or MTU trigger. Other operations, regardless of
whether in the single or scan mode, are the same as when setting the ADST bit to 1 with the
software.
Figure 16.6 shows an example of external trigger input timing.
CK
ADTRG
External trigger
signal
ADST
A/D conversion
Figure 16.6 External Trigger Input Timing
581
16.5
Interrupt and DMA, DTC Transfer Requests
The mid-speed A/D converter generates A/D conversion complete interrupt when completing A/D
conversion.
The ADI interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit of ADCSR. It is also
possible to activate DMA or DTC transfer by the ADI interrupt request. It is possible to activate
DTC with ADI0 interrupt of A/D0 and activate DMAC with ADI1 interrupt of A/D1. Table 16.5
shows the interrupt factors of the mid-speed A/D converter.
Table 16.5 Mid-speed A/D Converter Interrupt Factors
Mid-speed
A/D converter Interrupt Factor Content
DTC
DMAC
A/D0
ADI0
Interrupt by conversion complete O
×
A/D1
ADI1
×
O
O: activation enabled
×: activation disabled
When accessing the A/D0 register with DTC activated by ADI0 interrupt, the ADF bit of the A/D0
control/status register (ADCSR0) will automatically be cleared to 0. Furthermore, it is possible to
automatically clear the ADF bit of ADCSR1 by register access of A/D1 with activated DMAC of
ADI1 interrupt. For details on the automatic clearing operation of this interrupt factor, see section
8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
582
16.6
A/D Conversion Precision Definitions
The medium-speed A/D converter converts analog values input from analog input channels to 10bit digital values by comparing them with an analog reference voltage. In this operation, the
absolute precision of the A/D conversion (i.e. the deviation between the input analog value and the
output digital value) includes the following kinds of error.
(1) Offset error
(2) Full-scale error
(3) Quantization error
(4) Nonlinearity error
The above four kinds of error are described below with reference to figure 16.7. For the sake of
clarity, this figure shows 3-bit medium-speed A/D conversion rather than 10-bit medium-speed
A/D conversion. Offset error (see figure 16.7 (1)) is the deviation between the actual A/D
conversion characteristic and the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output value
changes from the minimum value (zero voltage) of 0000000000 (000 in the figure) to 0000000001
(001 in the figure ). Full-scale error (see figure 16.7 (2)) is the deviation between the actual A/D
conversion characteristic and the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output value
changes from 1111111110 (110 in the figure) to the maximum value (full-scale voltage) of
111111111 (111 in the figure). Quantization error is the deviation inherent in the medium-speed
A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 16.7 (3)). Nonlinearity error is the deviation between
the actual A/D conversion characteristic and the ideal A/D conversion characteristic from zero
voltage to full-scale voltage (see figure 16.7 (4)). This does not include offset error, full-scale
error, and quantization error.
(2) Full-scale error
Digital output
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
Characteristic
111
Ideal A/D conversion
Characteristic
110
101
100
(4) Nonlinearity error
011
(3) Quantization error
010
Actual A/D conversion
characteristic
001
000
0
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8 FS
Analog input
voltage
(1) Offset error
FS
Analog input
voltage
FS : Full-scale voltage
Figure 16.7 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions
583
16.7
Usage Notes
The following points should be noted when using the mid-speed A/D converter.
16.7.1
Analog Voltage Settings
(1) Analog input voltage range
The voltage applied to analog input pins during A/D conversion should be in the range AVSS
≤ ANn ≤ AVref (n = 0 to 7).
(2) AVCC and AVSS input voltages
For the AV CC and AVSS input voltages, set AVCC = VCC ±10% and AVSS = VSS . When the
medium-speed A/D converter is not used, set AVCC = VCC and AVSS = VSS .
(3) AVref input voltage
For the AV ref pin input voltage analog reference, set AVref ≤ AVCC. When the medium-speed
A/D converter is not used, set AVref = AVCC.
(4) AVCC and AVref must be connected to the power supply (V CC) even if the medium-speed A/D
converter is not used or is in standby mode.
16.7.2
Handling of Analog Input Pins
To prevent damage from surges and other abnormal voltages at the analog input pins (AN0-AN7),
connect a protection circuit such as that shown in figure 16.8. This circuit also includes a CR filter
function that suppresses error due to noise. The circuit shown here is only a design example;
circuit constants must be decided on the basis of the actual operating conditions.
Figure 16.9 shows an equivalent circuit for the analog input pins, and table 16.6 summarizes the
analog input pin specifications.
584
AVCC
AVref
Rin*2
*1
This LSI
100 Ω
AN0–AN15
*1
0.1 µF
AVSS
Notes: Numbers are only to be noted as reference value
*1
10 µF
0.01 µF
*2 Rin: Input impedance
Figure 16.8 Example of Analog Input Pin Protection Circuit
585
1.0kΩ
AN0 to AN7
20pFΩ
Analog multiplexer
1MΩ
Mid-speed A/D converter
Note : Numbers are only to be noted as reference value
Figure 16.9 Equivalent Circuit for the Analog Input Pins
Table 16.6 Analog Pin Specifications
Item
Min
Max
Unit
Analog input capacitance
—
20
pF
Permissible signal source impedance
—
1
kΩ
586
Section 17 Compare Match Timer (CMT)
17.1
Overview
The SH7040 series has an on-chip compare match timer (CMT) configured of 16-bit timers for
two channels. The CMT has 16-bit counters and can generate interrupts at set intervals.
17.1.1
Features
The CMT has the following features:
• Four types of counter input clock can be selected
 One of four internal clocks (φ/8, φ/32, φ/128, φ/512) can be selected independently for each
channel.
• Interrupt sources
 A compare match interrupt can be requested independently for each channel.
17.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 17.1 shows a block diagram of the CMT.
587
Control circuit
Clock selection
CMCNT0
Module bus
CMCNT1
Clock selection
Comparator
Control circuit
CMCOR1
φ/8 φ/32 φ/128 φ/512
CMCSR1
CMI1
Comparator
φ/8 φ/32 φ/128 φ/512
CMCOR0
CMCSR0
CMSTR
CM10
Bus
interface
CMT
Internal bus
CMSTR:
CMCSR:
CMCOR:
CMCNT:
CMI:
Compare match timer start register
Compare match timer control/status register
Compare match timer constant register
Compare match timer counter
Compare match interrupt
Figure 17.1 CMT Block Diagram
588
17.1.3
Register Configuration
Table 17.1 summarizes the CMT register configuration.
Table 17.1 Register Configuration
Channel Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Address
Access Size
(Bits)
Shared
Compare match timer CMSTR
start register
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83D0 8, 16, 32
0
Compare match timer CMCSR0
control/status register 0
R/(W)*
H'0000
H'FFFF83D2 8, 16, 32
Compare match timer CMCNT0
counter 0
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83D4 8, 16, 32
Compare match timer CMCOR0
constant register 0
R/W
H'FFFF H'FFFF83D6 8, 16, 32
Compare match timer CMCSR1
control/status register 1
R/(W)*
H'0000
H'FFFF83D8 8, 16, 32
Compare match timer CMCNT1
counter 1
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83DA 8, 16, 32
Compare match timer CMCOR1
constant register 1
R/W
H'FFFF H'FFFF83DC 8, 16, 32
1
Note: * The only value that can be written to the CMCSR0 and CMCSR1 CMF bits is a 0 to clear
the flags.
589
17.2
Register Descriptions
17.2.1
Compare Match Timer Start Register (CMSTR)
The compare match timer start register (CMSTR) is a 16-bit register that selects whether to
operate or halt the channel 0 and channel 1 counters (CMCNT). It is initialized to H'0000 by
power-on resets and by standby mode. Manual reset does not initialize CMSTR.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
STR1
STR0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
• Bits 15–2—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 1—Count Start 1 (STR1): Selects whether to operate or halt compare match timer counter
1.
Bit 1: STR1
Description
0
CMCNT1 count operation halted (initial value)
1
CMCNT1 count operation
• Bit 0—Count Start 0 (STR0): Selects whether to operate or halt compare match timer counter
0.
Bit 0: STR0
Description
0
CMCNT0 count operation halted (initial value)
1
CMCNT0 count operation
590
17.2.2
Compare Match Timer Control/Status Register (CMCSR)
The compare match timer control/status register (CMCSR) is a 16-bit register that indicates the
occurrence of compare matches, sets the enable/disable of interrupts, and establishes the clock
used for incrementation. It is initialized to H'0000 by power-on resets and by standby mode.
Manual reset does not initialize CMCSR.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMF
CMIE
—
—
—
—
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
Note: * The only value that can be written is a 0 to clear the flag.
• Bits 15–8 and 5–2—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be
0.
• Bit 7—Compare Match Flag (CMF): This flag indicates whether or not the CMCNT and
CMCOR values have matched.
Bit 7: CMF
Description
0
CMCNT and CMCOR values have not matched (initial status)
Clear condition: Write a 0 to CMF after reading a 1 from it
1
CMCNT and CMCOR values have matched
• Bit 6—Compare Match Interrupt Enable (CMIE): Selects whether to enable or disable a
compare match interrupt (CMI) when the CMCNT and CMCOR values have matched (CMF =
1).
Bit 6: CMIE
Description
0
Compare match interrupts (CMI) disabled (initial status)
1
Compare match interrupts (CMI) enabled
591
• Bits 1, 0—Clock Select 1, 0 (CKS1, CKS0): These bits select the clock input to the CMCNT
from among the four internal clocks obtained by dividing the system clock (φ). When the STR
bit of the CMSTR is set to 1, the CMCNT begins incrementing with the clock selected by
CKS1 and CKS0.
Bit 1: CKS1
Bit 0: CKS0
Description
0
0
φ/8 (initial status)
1
φ/32
0
φ/128
1
φ/512
1
17.2.3
Compare Match Timer Counter (CMCNT)
The compare match timer counter (CMCNT) is a 16-bit register used as an upcounter for
generating interrupt requests.
When an internal clock is selected with the CKS1, CKS0 bits of the CMCSR register and the STR
bit of the CMSTR is set to 1, the CMCNT begins incrementing with that clock. When the CMCNT
value matches that of the compare match timer constant register (CMCOR), the CMCNT is
cleared to H'0000 and the CMF flag of the CMCSR is set to 1. If the CMIE bit of the CMCSR is
set to 1 at this time, a compare match interrupt (CMI) is requested.
The CMCNT is initialized to H'0000 by power-on resets and by standby mode. Manual reset does
not initialize CMCNT.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
R/W:
592
17.2.4
Compare Match Timer Constant Register (CMCOR)
The compare match timer constant register (CMCOR) is a 16-bit register that sets the compare
match period with the CMCNT.
The CMCOR is initialized to H'FFFF by power-on resets and by standby mode. There is no
initializing with manual reset.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
17.3
Operation
17.3.1
Period Count Operation
When an internal clock is selected with the CKS1, CKS0 bits of the CMCSR register and the STR
bit of the CMSTR is set to 1, the CMCNT begins incrementing with the selected clock. When the
CMCNT counter value matches that of the compare match constant register (CMCOR), the
CMCNT counter is cleared to H'0000 and the CMF flag of the CMCSR register is set to 1. If the
CMIE bit of the CMCSR register is set to 1 at this time, a compare match interrupt (CMI) is
requested. The CMCNT counter begins counting up again from H'0000.
Figure 17.2 shows the compare match counter operation.
CMCNT value
Counter cleared by
CMCOR compare match
CMCOR
H'0000
Time
Figure 17.2 Counter Operation
593
17.3.2
CMCNT Count Timing
One of four clocks (φ/8, φ/32, φ/128, φ/512) obtained by dividing the system clock (CK) can be
selected by the CKS1, CKS0 bits of the CMCSR. Figure 17.3 shows the timing.
CK
Internal clock
CMCNT input
clock
CMCNT
N–1
N
N+1
Figure 17.3 Count Timing
17.4
Interrupts
17.4.1
Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation
The CMT has a compare match interrupt for each channel, with independent vector addresses
allocated to each of them. The corresponding interrupt request is output when the interrupt request
flag CMF is set to 1 and the interrupt enable bit CMIE has also been set to 1.
When activating CPU interrupts by interrupt request, the priority between the channels can be
changed by using the interrupt controller settings. See section 6, Interrupt Controller (INTC), for
details.
Interrupt requests can also be used as data transfer controller (DTC) activating sources. In this
case, channel priorities are fixed. See section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC), for details.
17.4.2
Compare Match Flag Set Timing
The CMF bit of the CMCSR register is set to 1 by the compare match signal generated when the
CMCOR register and the CMCNT counter match. The compare match signal is generated upon
the final state of the match (timing at which the CMCNT counter matching count value is
updated). Consequently, after the CMCOR register and the CMCNT counter match, a compare
match signal will not be generated until a CMCNT counter input clock occurs. Figure 17.4 shows
the CMF bit set timing.
594
CK
CMCNT
input clock
CMCNT
N
CMCOR
N
0
Compare
match signal
CMF
CMI
Figure 17.4 CMF Set Timing
17.4.3
Compare Match Flag Clear Timing
The CMF bit of the CMCSR register is cleared either by writing a 0 to it after reading a 1, or by a
clear signal after a DTC transfer. Figure 17.5 shows the timing when the CMF bit is cleared by the
CPU.
CMCSR write cycle
T1
T2
CK
CMF
Figure 17.5 Timing of CMF Clear by the CPU
595
17.5
Notes on Use
Take care that the contentions described in sections 17.5.1–17.5.3 do not arise during CMT
operation.
17.5.1
Contention between CMCNT Write and Compare Match
If a compare match signal is generated during the T2 state of the CMCNT counter write cycle, the
CMCNT counter clear has priority, so the write to the CMCNT counter is not performed. Figure
17.6 shows the timing.
CMCNT write cycle
T1
T2
CK
Address
CMCNT
Internal
write signal
Compare
match signal
CMCNT
N
H'0000
Figure 17.6 CMCNT Write and Compare Match Contention
596
17.5.2
Contention between CMCNT Word Write and Incrementation
If an increment occurs during the T 2 state of the CMCNT counter word write cycle, the counter
write has priority, so no increment occurs. Figure 17.7 shows the timing.
CMCNT write cycle
T1
T2
CK
Address
CMCNT
Internal
write signal
Compare
match signal
CMCNT
N
M
CMCNT write data
Figure 17.7 CMCNT Word Write and Increment Contention
597
17.5.3
Contention between CMCNT Byte Write and Incrementation
If an increment occurs during the T 2 state of the CMCNT byte write cycle, the counter write has
priority, so no increment of the write data results on the writing side. The byte data on the side not
performing the writing is also not incremented, so the contents are those before the write.
Figure 17.8 shows the timing when an increment occurs during the T2 state of the CMCNTH write
cycle.
CMCNT write cycle
T1
T2
CK
Address
CMCNTH
Internal
write signal
CMCNT
input clock
CMCNTH
N
M
CMCNTH write data
CMCNTL
X
X
Figure 17.8 CMCNT Byte Write and Increment Contention
598
Section 18 Pin Function Controller
18.1
Overview
The pin function controller (PFC) is composed of registers for selecting the function of
multiplexed pins and the direction of input/output. Table 18.1 lists the SH7040 Series’s
multiplexed pins. The multiplex pin functions have restrictions dependent on the operating mode.
Table 18.2 lists the pin functions and initial values for each operating mode.
Table 18.1 Multiplexed Pins
Function 1
Function 2
Port (Related Module) (Related Module)
A
Function 3
Function 4
FP- FP- TFP(Related Module) (Related Module) 112 144 120
PA23 I/O (port)
WRHH output (BSC) —
—
—
1
—
PA22 I/O (port)
WRHL output (BSC) —
—
—
3
—
PA21 I/O (port)
CASHH output (BSC) —
—
—
4
—
PA20 I/O (port)
CASHL output (BSC) —
—
—
29 —
PA19 I/O (port)
BACK output (BSC) DRAK1 output
(DMAC)
—
—
30 —
PA18 I/O (port)
BREQ input (BSC)
DRAK0 output
(DMAC)
—
—
33 —
PA17 /O (port)
WAIT input (BSC)
—
—
—
101 —
PA16 I/O (port)
AH output (BSC)
—
—
—
100 —
PA15 I/O (port)
CK output (CPG)
—
—
83
107 88
PA14 I/O (port)
RD output (BSC)
—
—
34
43 37
PA13 I/O (port)
WRH output (BSC)
—
—
36
47 39
PA12 I/O (port)
WRL output (BSC)
—
—
38
48 41
PA11 I/O (port)
CS1 output (BSC)
—
—
40
49 43
PA10 I/O (port)
CS0 output (BSC)
—
—
41
50 44
PA9 I/O (port)
TCLKD input (MTU) IRQ3 (INTC)
—
42
51 45
PA8 I/O (port)
TCLKC input (MTU) IRQ2 (INTC)
—
43
52 46
PA7 I/O (port)
TCLKB input (MTU) CS3 output (BSC) —
44
53 47
PA6 I/O (port)
TCLKA input (MTU) CS2 output (BSC) —
45
54 48
PA5 I/O (port)
SCK1 I/O (SCI)
IRQ1 input (INTC) 46
136 49
DREQ1 input
(DMAC)
599
Table 18.1 Multiplexed Pins (cont)
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Function 4
Port (Re-lated Module) (Related Module) (Related Module) (Related Module)
FP- FP- TFP112 144 120
A
B
C
600
PA4 I/O (port)
TxD1 output (SCI) —
—
47
134 50
PA3 I/O (port)
RxD1 input (SCI)
—
—
48
133 51
PA2 I/O (port)
SCK0 I/O (SCI)
DREQ0 input
(DMAC)
IRQ0 input
(INTC)
49
132 52
PA1 I/O (port)
TxD0 output (SCI) —
—
50
131 53
PA0 I/O (port)
RxD0 input (SCI)
—
51
130 54
PB9 I/O (port)
IRQ7 input (INTC) A21 output (BSC) ADTRG input (A/D) 32
41 35
PB8 I/O (port)
IRQ6 input (INTC) A20 output (BSC) WAIT input (BSC)
31
39 34
PB7 I/O (port)
IRQ5 input (INTC) A19 output (BSC) BREQ input (BSC) 30
38 33
PB6 I/O (port)
IRQ4 input (INTC) A18 output (BSC) BACK output (BSC) 29
37 32
PB5 I/O (port)
IRQ3 input (INTC) POE3 input (port) RDWR output (BSC)28
36 29
PB4 I/O (port)
IRQ2 input (INTC) POE2 input (port) CASH output (BSC) 26
34 27
PB3 I/O (port)
IRQ1 input (INTC) POE1 input (port) CASL output (BSC) 25
32 26
PB2 I/O (port)
IRQ0 input (INTC) POE0 input (port) RAS output (BSC)
24
31 25
PB1 I/O (port)
A17 input (BSC)
—
—
22
27 23
PB0 I/O (port)
A16 output (BSC) —
—
20
25 21
PC15 I/O (port)
A15 output (BSC) —
—
19
24 20
PC14 I/O (port)
A14 output (BSC) —
—
18
23 19
PC13 I/O (port)
A13 output (BSC) —
—
17
22 18
PC12 I/O (port)
A12 output (BSC) —
—
16
21 17
PC11 I/O (port)
A11 output (BSC) —
—
15
20 16
PC10 I/O (port)
A10 output (BSC) —
—
14
19 15
PC9 I/O (port)
A9 output (BSC)
—
—
13
18 14
PC8 I/O (port)
A8 output (BSC)
—
—
12
17 13
PC7 I/O (port)
A7 output (BSC)
—
—
11
16 12
—
Table 18.1 Multiplexed Pins (cont)
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Port (Related Module) (Related Module) (Related Module)
Function 4
FP- FP- TFP(Related Module) 112 144 120
C
D
PC6 I/O (port)
A6 output (BSC)
—
—
10
15 11
PC5 I/O (port)
A5 output (BSC)
—
—
9
13 10
PC4 I/O (port)
A4 output (BSC)
—
—
8
11 9
PC3 I/O (port)
A3 output (BSC)
—
—
7
10 8
PC2 I/O (port)
A2 output (BSC)
—
—
6
9
7
PC1 I/O (port)
A1 output (BSC)
—
—
5
8
6
PC0 I/O (port)
A0 output (BSC)
—
—
4
7
5
PD31 I/O (port)
D31 I/O (BSC)
ADTRG input (A/D) —
—
45 —
PD30 I/O (port)
D30 I/O (BSC)
IRQOUT output
(INTC)
—
—
46 —
PD29 I/O (port)
D29 I/O (BSC)
CS3 output (BSC)
—
—
56 —
PD28 I/O (port)
D28 I/O (BSC)
CS2 output (BSC)
—
—
57 —
PD27 I/O (port)
D27 I/O (BSC)
DACK1 output
(DMAC)
—
—
58 —
PD26 I/O (port)
D26 I/O (BSC)
DACK0 output
(DMAC)
—
—
59 —
PD25 I/O (port)
D25 I/O (BSC)
DREQ1 input
(DMAC)
—
—
60 —
PD24 I/O (port)
D24 I/O (BSC)
DREQ0 input
(DMAC)
—
—
62 —
PD23 I/O (port)
D23 I/O (BSC)
IRQ7 input (INTC)
—
—
64 —
PD22 I/O (port)
D22 I/O (BSC)
IRQ6 input (INTC)
—
—
65 —
PD21 I/O (port)
D21 I/O (BSC)
IRQ5 input (INTC)
—
—
66 —
PD20 I/O (port)
D20 I/O (BSC)
IRQ4 input (INTC)
—
—
67 —
PD19 I/O (port)
D19 I/O (BSC)
IRQ3 input (INTC)
—
—
68 —
PD18 I/O (port)
D18 I/O (BSC)
IRQ2 input (INTC)
—
—
69 —
PD17 I/O (port)
D17 I/O (BSC)
IRQ1 input (INTC)
—
—
70 —
PD16 I/O (port)
D16 I/O (BSC)
IRQ0 input (INTC)
—
—
72 —
PD15 I/O (port)
D15 I/O (BSC)
—
—
52
73 55
PD14 I/O (port)
D14 I/O (BSC)
—
—
53
74 56
601
Table 18.1 Multiplexed Pins (cont)
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Function 4
FP- FP- TFPPort (Related Module) (Related Module) (Related Module) (Related Module) 112 144 120
D
E
602
PD13 I/O (port)
D13 I/O (BSC)
—
—
54
75 57
PD12 I/O (port)
D12 I/O (BSC)
—
—
56
76 59
PD11 I/O (port)
D11 I/O (BSC)
—
—
57
78 62
PD10 I/O (port)
D10 I/O (BSC)
—
—
58
80 63
PD9 I/O (port)
D9 I/O (BSC)
—
—
59
81 64
PD8 I/O (port)
D8 I/O (BSC)
—
—
60
82 65
PD7 I/O (port)
D7 I/O (BSC)
—
—
62
83 67
PD6 I/O (port)
D6 I/O (BSC)
—
—
63
84 68
PD5 I/O (port)
D5 I/O (BSC)
—
—
64
86 69
PD4 I/O (port)
D4 I/O (BSC)
—
—
66
88 71
PD3 I/O (port)
D3 I/O (BSC)
—
—
67
89 72
PD2 I/O (port)
D2 I/O (BSC)
—
—
68
90 73
PD1 I/O (port)
D1 I/O (BSC)
—
—
69
91 74
PD0 I/O (port)
D0 I/O (BSC)
—
—
70
92 75
PE15 I/O (port)
TIOC4D I/O (MTU) DACK1 output
(DMAC)
IRQOUT output
(INTC)
2
5
3
PE14 I/O (port)
TIOC4C I/O (MTU) DACK0 output
(DMAC)
AH output (BSC)
1
2
2
PE13 I/O (port)
TIOC4B I/O (MTU) MRES input (INTC) —
112 144 120
PE12 I/O (port)
TIOC4A I/O (MTU) —
—
111 143 119
PE11 I/O (port)
TIOC3D I/O (MTU) —
—
110 142 118
PE10 I/O (port)
TIOC3C I/O (MTU) —
—
108 140 116
PE9 I/O (port)
TIOC3B I/O (MTU) —
—
107 139 115
PE8 I/O (port)
TIOC3A I/O (MTU) —
—
106 138 114
PE7 I/O (port)
TIOC2B I/O (MTU) —
—
105 137 113
PE6 I/O (port)
TIOC2A I/O (MTU) —
—
104 116 112
PE5 I/O (port)
TIOC1B I/O (MTU) —
—
102 115 109
PE4 I/O (port)
TIOC1A I/O (MTU) —
—
89
114 96
Table 18.1 Multiplexed Pins (cont)
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Function 4
FP- FP- TFPPort (Related Module) (Related Module) (Related Module) (Related Module) 112 144 120
E
F
PE3 I/O (port)
TIOC0D I/O (MTU) DRAK1 output
(DMAC)
—
88
113 95
PE2 I/O (port)
TIOC0C I/O (MTU) DREQ1 input
(DMAC)
—
87
111 94
PE1 I/O (port)
TIOC0B I/O (MTU) DRAK0 output
(DMAC)
—
86
110 93
PE0 I/O (port)
TIOC0A I/O (MTU) DREQ0 input
(DMAC)
—
85
109 92
PF7 input (port)
AN7 input (A/D)
—
—
99
126 106
PF6 input (port)
AN6 input (A/D)
—
—
98
125 105
PF5 input (port)
AN5 input (A/D)
—
—
96
123 103
PF4 input (port)
AN4 input (A/D)
—
—
95
122 102
PF3 input (port)
AN3 input (A/D)
—
—
94
121 101
PF2 input (port)
AN2 input (A/D)
—
—
93
120 100
PF1 input (port)
AN1 input (A/D)
—
—
92
119 99
PF0 input (port)
AN0 input (A/D)
—
—
91
118 98
603
604
Single Chip Mode
—
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
70
69
68
67
66
64
63
62
60
59
58
57
56
54
53
52
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
PD16/D16/IRQ0
PD17/D17/IRQ1
PD18/D18/IRQ2
PD19/D19/IRQ3
PD20/D20/IRQ4
PD21/D21/IRQ5
PD22/D22/IRQ6
PD23/D23/IRQ7
PD24/D24/DREQ0
PD25/D25/DREQ1
PD26/D26/DACK0
PD27/D27/DACK1
PD28/D28/CS2
PD29/D29/CS3
PD30/D30/IRQOUT
PD31/D31/ADTRG
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
VSS
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
PD16
PD17
PD18
PD19
PD20
PD21
PD22
PD23
PD24
PD25
PD26
PD27
PD28
PD29
PD30
PD31
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
VCC
VCC
21,37,65
103
3,23,27,33
39,55,61,71 VSS
90,101,109
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
VSS
VCC
VSS
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
PD8
PD9
PD10
PD11
PD12
PD13
PD14
PD15
PD16
PD17
PD18
PD19
PD20
PD21
PD22
PD23
PD24
PD25
PD26
PD27
PD28
PD29
PD30
PD31
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
PC8
PC9
PC10
PC11
PC12
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
VCC
VSS
VCC
PD0/D0
PD1/D1
PD2/D2
PD3/D3
PD4/D4
PD5/D5
PD6/D6
PD7/D7
PD8/D8
PD9/D9
PD10/D10
PD11/D11
PD12/D12
PD13/D13
PD14/D14
PD15/D15
PD16/D16/IRQ0
PD17/D17/IRQ1
PD18/D18/IRQ2
PD19/D19/IRQ3
PD20/D20/IRQ4
PD21/D21/IRQ5
PD22/D22/IRQ6
PD23/D23/IRQ7
PD24/D24/DREQ0
PD25/D25/DREQ1
PD26/D26/DACK0
PD27/D27/DACK1
PD28/D28/CS2
PD29/D29/CS3
PD30/D30/IRQOUT
PD31/D31/ADTRG
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PC8/A8
PC9/A9
PC10/A10
PC11/A11
PC12/A12
VSS
VCC
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
PD8
PD9
PD10
PD11
PD12
PD13
PD14
PD15
PD16
PD17
PD18
PD19
PD20
PD21
PD22
PD23
PD24
PD25
PD26
PD27
PD28
PD29
PD30
PD31
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
PC8
PC9
PC10
PC11
PC12
VSS
VCC
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
PD8
PD9
PD10
PD11
PD12
PD13
PD14
PD15
PD16/IRQ0
PD17/IRQ1
PD18/IRQ2
PD19/IRQ3
PD20/IRQ4
PD21/IRQ5
PD22/IRQ6
PD23/IRQ7
PD24
PD25
PD26
PD27
PD28
PD29
PD30
PD31/ADTRG
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
PC8
PC9
PC10
PC11
PC12
VSS
VCC
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
NC
A10
A11
A12
VSS
VCC
Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities PROM Mode
FP112
On-Chip ROM Enabled
MPU Mode2
FP144
12,26,40,63
77,85,112
135
4, 24, 28, 36, 6,14,28,35
42, 58, 66, 76, 42,55,61,71
79,87,93
97, 108, 117
117,129,141
92
75
91
74
90
73
89
72
88
71
86
69
84
68
83
67
82
65
81
64
80
63
78
62
76
59
75
57
74
56
73
55
72
—
70
—
69
—
68
—
67
—
66
—
65
—
64
—
62
—
60
—
59
—
58
—
57
—
56
—
46
—
45
—
7
5
8
6
9
7
10
8
11
9
13
10
15
11
16
12
17
13
18
14
19
15
20
16
21
17
TFP120
22, 40, 70,
82, 111
MPU Mode 1
Pin Name
On-Chip ROM Disabled
MPU Mode0
Pin NO.
Table 18.2 Pin Arrangement by Mode
605
TFP120
18
19
20
21
23
25
26
27
29
32
33
34
35
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
41
39
37
88
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
85
87
79
77
86
81
89
88
84
83
80
78
82
107
104
Pin NO.
FP144
22
23
24
25
27
31
32
34
36
37
38
39
41
130
131
132
133
134
136
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
43
107
100
101
33
30
29
4
3
1
104
106
96
94
105
98
108
44
103
102
97
95
99
128
124
80
82
74
72
81
76
84
35
79
78
75
73
77
100
97
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
17
18
19
20
22
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
38
36
34
83
FP112
MPU Mode 1
On-Chip ROM Enabled
MPU Mode2
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
PB8
PB9
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
PA8
PA9
CS0
CS1
WRL
WRH
RD
CK
PA16
PA17
PA18
PA19
PA20
PA21
WRHL
WRHH
PLLVCC
PLLVSS
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
VCC
AVCC
AVSS
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
PA0/RXD0
PA1/TXD0
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
PA3/RXD1
PA4/TXD1
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
CS0
CS1
WRL
WRH
RD
PA15/CK
PA16/AH
PA17/WAIT
PA18/BREQ/DRAK0
PA19/BACK/DRAK1
PA20/CASHL
PA21/CASHH
WRHL
WRHH
PLLVCC
PLLVSS
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
VCC
AVCC
AVSS
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
PB8
PB9
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
PA8
PA9
CS0
CS1
WRL
WRH
RD
CK
PA16
PA17
PA18
PA19
PA20
PA21
WRHL
WRHH
PLLVCC
PLLVSS
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
VCC
AVCC
AVSS
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
PA0/RXD0
PA1/TXD0
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
PA3/RXD1
PA4/TXD1
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
CS0
CS1
WRL
WRH
RD
PA15/CK
PA16/AH
PA17/WAIT
PA18/BREQ/DRAK0
PA19/BACK/DRAK1
PA20/CASHL
PA21/CASHH
WRHL
WRHH
PLLVCC
PLLVSS
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
VCC
AVCC
AVSS
PC13
PC14
PC15
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
PB8
PB9
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
PA8
PA9
PA10
PA11
PA12
PA13
PA14
CK
PA16
PA17
PA18
PA19
PA20
PA21
PA22
PA23
PLLVCC
PLLVSS
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
VCC
AVCC
AVSS
PC13/A13
PC14/A14
PC15/A15
PB0/A16
PB1/A17
PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK
PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ
PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT
PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG
PA0/RXD0
PA1/TXD0
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0
PA3/RXD1
PA4/TXD1
PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1
PA6/TCLKA/CS2
PA7/TCLKB/CS3
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
PA10/CS0
PA11/CS1
PA12/WRL
PA13/WRH
PA14/RD
PA15/CK
PA16/AH
PA17/WAIT
PA18/BREQ/DRAK0
PA19/BACK/DRAK1
PA20/CASHL
PA21/CASHH
PA22/WRHL
PA23/WRHH
PLLVCC
PLLVSS
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
VCC
AVCC
AVSS
Single Chip Mode
PC13
PC14
PC15
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
PB8
PB9
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
PA8
PA9
PA10
PA11
PA12
PA13
PA14
PA15
PA16
PA17
PA18
PA19
PA20
PA21
PA22
PA23
PLLVCC
PLLVSS
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
VCC
AVCC
AVSS
PC13
PC14
PC15
PB0
PB1
PB2/IRQ0/POE0
PB3/IRQ1/POE1
PB4/IRQ2/POE2
PB5/IRQ3/POE3
PB6/IRQ4
PB7/IRQ5
PB8/IRQ6
PB9/IRQ7/ADTRG
PA0/RXD0
PA1/TXD0
PA2/SCK0/IRQ0
PA3/RXD1
PA4/TXD1
PA5/SCK1/IRQ1
PA6/TCLKA
PA7/TCLKB
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3
PA10
PA11
PA12
PA13
PA14
PA15/CK
PA16
PA17
PA18
PA19
PA20
PA21
PA22
PA23
PLLVCC
PLLVSS
EXTAL
XTAL
PLLCAP
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
VCC
AVCC
AVSS
A13
A14
A15
A16
NC
NC
OE
PGM
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
VCC
VSS
NC
NC
NC
A9
VPP
NC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VSS
Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities PROM Mode
Pin Name
On-Chip ROM Disabled
MPU Mode0
Table 18.2 Pin Arrangement by Mode (cont)
606
TFP120
—
98
99
100
101
102
103
105
106
92
93
94
95
96
109
112
113
114
115
116
118
119
120
2
3
Pin NO.
FP144
127
118
119
120
121
122
123
125
126
109
110
111
113
114
115
116
137
138
139
140
142
143
144
2
5
—
91
92
93
94
95
96
98
99
85
86
87
88
89
102
104
105
106
107
108
110
111
112
1
2
FP112
MPU Mode 1
On-Chip ROM Enabled
MPU Mode2
Single Chip Mode
AVREF
PF0/AN0
PF1/AN1
PF2/AN2
PF3/AN3
PF4/AN4
PF5/AN5
PF6/AN6
PF7/AN7
PE0
PE1
PE2
PE3
PE4
PE5
PE6
PE7
PE8
PE9
PE10
PE11
PE12
PE13
PE14
PE15
AVREF
AVREF
PF0/AN0
PF0/AN0
PF1/AN1
PF1/AN1
PF2/AN2
PF2/AN2
PF3/AN3
PF3/AN3
PF4/AN4
PF4/AN4
PF5/AN5
PF5/AN5
PF6/AN6
PF6/AN6
PF7/AN7
PF7/AN7
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
PE0
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
PE1
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
PE2
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
PE3
PE4/TIOC1A
PE4
PE5/TIOC1B
PE5
PE6/TIOC2A
PE6
PE7/TIOC2B
PE7
PE8/TIOC3A
PE8
PE9/TIOC3B
PE9
PE10/TIOC3C
PE10
PE11/TIOC3D
PE11
PE12/TIOC4A
PE12
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
PE13
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
PE14
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUTPE15
AVREF
AVREF
PF0/AN0
PF0/AN0
PF1/AN1
PF1/AN1
PF2/AN2
PF2/AN2
PF3/AN3
PF3/AN3
PF4/AN4
PF4/AN4
PF5/AN5
PF5/AN5
PF6/AN6
PF6/AN6
PF7/AN7
PF7/AN7
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
PE0
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
PE1
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
PE2
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
PE3
PE4/TIOC1A
PE4
PE5/TIOC1B
PE5
PE6/TIOC2A
PE6
PE7/TIOC2B
PE7
PE8/TIOC3A
PE8
PE9/TIOC3B
PE9
PE10/TIOC3C
PE10
PE11/TIOC3D
PE11
PE12/TIOC4A
PE12
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
PE13
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
PE14
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUTPE15
AVREF
AVREF
PF0/AN0
PF0/AN0
PF1/AN1
PF1/AN1
PF2/AN2
PF2/AN2
PF3/AN3
PF3/AN3
PF4/AN4
PF4/AN4
PF5/AN5
PF5/AN5
PF6/AN6
PF6/AN6
PF7/AN7
PF7/AN7
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0
PE0
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0
PE1
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1
PE2
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1
PE3
PE4/TIOC1A
PE4
PE5/TIOC1B
PE5
PE6/TIOC2A
PE6
PE7/TIOC2B
PE7
PE8/TIOC3A
PE8
PE9/TIOC3B
PE9
PE10/TIOC3C
PE10
PE11/TIOC3D
PE11
PE12/TIOC4A
PE12
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
PE13
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
PE14
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUTPE15
AVREF
PF0/AN0
PF1/AN1
PF2/AN2
PF3/AN3
PF4/AN4
PF5/AN5
PF6/AN6
PF7/AN7
PE0/TIOC0A
PE1/TIOC0B
PE2/TIOC0C
PE3/TIOC0D
PE4/TIOC1A
PE5/TIOC1B
PE6/TIOC2A
PE7/TIOC2B
PE8/TIOC3A
PE9/TIOC3B
PE10/TIOC3C
PE11/TIOC3D
PE12/TIOC4A
PE13/TIOC4B/MRES
PE14/TIOC4C
PE15/TIOC4D
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
CE
Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities Initial Function PFC Selected Function Possiblilities PROM Mode
Pin Name
On-Chip ROM Disabled
MPU Mode0
Table 18.2 Pin Arrangement by Mode (cont)
18.2
Register Configuration
Table 18.3 summarizes the registers of the pin function controller.
Table 18.3 Pin Function Controller Registers
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
Port A I/O register H
PAIORH
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8384
H'FFFF8385
8, 16, 32
Port A I/O register L
PAIORL
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8386
H'FFFF8387
8, 16, 32
Port A control register H PACRH
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8388
H'FFFF8389
8, 16, 32
Port A control register L1 PACRL1
R/W
H'0000*
H'4000
H'FFFF838C
H'FFFF838D
8, 16, 32
Port A control register L2 PACRL2
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF838E
H'FFFF838F
8, 16, 32
Port B I/O register
PBIOR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8394
H'FFFF8395
8, 16, 32
Port B control register 1 PBCR1
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8398
H'FFFF8399
8, 16, 32
Port B control register 2 PBCR2
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF839A
H'FFFF839B
8, 16, 32
Port C I/O register
PCIOR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8396
H'FFFF8397
8, 16, 32
Port C control register
PCCR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF839C
H'FFFF839D
8, 16, 32
Port D I/O register H
PDIORH
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83A4
H'FFFF83A5
8, 16, 32
Port D I/O register L
PDIORL
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83A6
H'FFFF83A7
8, 16, 32
Port D control register H1 PDCRH1
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83A8
H'FFFF83A9
8, 16, 32
Port D control register H2 PDCRH2
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83AA
H'FFFF83AB
8, 16, 32
Port D control register L PDCRL
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83AC
H'FFFF83AD
8, 16, 32
Port E I/O register
PEIOR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83B4
H'FFFF83B5
8, 16, 32
Port E control register 1 PECR1
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83B8
H'FFFF83B9
8, 16, 32
Port E control register 2 PECR2
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83BA
H'FFFF83BB
8, 16, 32
IRQOUT function control IFCR
register
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83C8
H'FFFF83C9
8, 16, 32
Note: * The port A control register L1 initial value varies depending on the operating mode.
607
18.3
Register Descriptions
18.3.1
Port A I/O Register H (PAIORH)
The port A I/O register H (PAIORH) is a 16-bit read/write register that selects input or output for
the most significant 8 pins of port A. Bits PA23IOR–PA16IOR correspond to pins PA23/WRHH–
PA16/AH. PAIORH is enabled when the port A pins function as general input/outputs (PA23–
PA16). For other functions, it is disabled.
For port A pin functions PA23–PA16, a given pin in port A is an output pin if its corresponding
PAIORH bit is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
PAIORH is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset; however, it is not initialized for
manual resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
The settings for this register are effective only for the 144-pin version. There are no corresponding
pins for this register in the 112-pin and 120-pin versions. However, read/writes are possible.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA23
IOR
PA22
IOR
PA21
IOR
PA20
IOR
PA19
IOR
PA18
IOR
PA17
IOR
PA16
IOR
Initial value:
R/W:
608
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
18.3.2
Port A I/O Register L (PAIORL)
The port A I/O register L (PAIORL) is a 16-bit read/write register that selects input or output for
the least significant 16 pins of port A. Bits PA15IOR–PA0IOR correspond to pins PA15/CK–
PA0/RXD0. PAIORL is enabled when the port A pins function as general input/outputs (PA15–
PA0), or with the serial clock (SCK1, SCK0). For other functions, it is disabled.
When the port A pin functions PA15–PA0 are SCK1, SCK0, a given pin in port A is an output pin
if its corresponding PAIORL bit is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
PAIORL is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset; however, it is not initialized for
manual resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
18.3.3
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PA15
IOR
PA14
IOR
PA13
IOR
PA12
IOR
PA11
IOR
PA10
IOR
PA9
IOR
PA8
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA7
IOR
PA6
IOR
PA5
IOR
PA4
IOR
PA3
IOR
PA2
IOR
PA1
IOR
PA0
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Port A Control Register H (PACRH)
PACRH is a 16-bit read/write register that selects the multiplex pin function for the eight most
significant pins of port A. PACRH selects the PA23/WRHH–PA16/AH pin functions.
The eight most significant pins of port A have bus control signals (WRHH, WRHL, CASHH,
CASHL, BACK, BREQ, WAIT, AH) and DMAC control signals (DRAK1, DRAK0), but there
are instances when the register settings that select these pin functions will be ignored. Refer to
table 18.2, Pin Arrangement by Mode.
PACRH is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset but is not initialized for manual resets,
reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
609
The settings for this register are effective only for the 144-pin version. There are no corresponding
pins for this register in the 112-pin and 120-pin versions. However, read/writes are possible.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
PA23
MD
—
PA22
MD
—
PA21
MD
—
PA20
MD
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA19
MD1
PA19
MD0
PA18
MD1
PA18
MD0
—
PA17
MD
—
PA16
MD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
• Bit 15—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 14—PA23 Mode (PA23MD): Selects the function of the PA23/WRHH pin.
Bit 14: PA23MD Description
0
General input/output (PA23) (initial value) (WRHH in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Most significant byte write output (WRHH) (PA23 in single chip mode)
• Bit 13—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 12—PA22 Mode (PA22MD): Selects the function of the PA22/WRHL pin.
Bit 12: PA22MD Description
0
General input/output (PA22) (initial value) (WRHL in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Write output (WRHL) (PA22 in single chip mode)
• Bit 11—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 10—PA21 Mode (PA21MD): Selects the function of the PA21/CASHH pin.
Bit 10: PA21MD Description
0
General input/output (PA21) (initial value)
1
Column address output (CASHH) (PA21 in single chip mode)
• Bit 9—Reserved: Always reads as 0. The write values should always be 0.
610
• Bit 8—PA20 Mode (PA20MD): Selects the function of the PA20/CASHL pin.
Bit 8: PA20MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA20) (initial value)
1
Column address output (CASHL) (PA20 in single chip mode)
• Bits 7 and 6—PA19 Mode 1, 0 (PA19MD1 and PA19MD0): These bits select the function of
the PA19/BACK/DRAK1 pin.
Bit 7:
PA19MD1
Bit 6:
PA19MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PA19) (initial value)
1
Bus right request acknowledge (BACK) (PA19 in single chip
mode)
0
DREQ1 request received output (DRAK1) (PA19 in single
chip mode)
1
Reserved
1
• Bits 5 and 4—PA18 Mode 1, 0 (PA18MD1 and PA18MD0): These bits select the function of
the PA18/BREQ/DRAK0 pin.
Bit 5:
PA18MD1
Bit 4:
PA18MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PA18) (initial value)
1
Bus right request input (BREQ) (PA18 in single chip mode)
0
DREQ0 request received output (DRAK0) (PA18 in single
chip mode)
1
Reserved
1
• Bit 3—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 2—PA17 Mode (PA17MD): Selects the function of the PA17/WAIT pin.
Bit 2: PA17MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA17) (initial value)
1
Wait state request input (WAIT) (PA17 in single chip mode)
• Bit 1—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
611
• Bit 0—PA16 Mode (PA16MD): Selects the function of the PA16/AH pin.
Bit 0: PA16MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA16) (initial value)
1
Address hold output (AH) (PA16 in single chip mode)
18.3.4
Port A Control Registers L1, L2 (PACRL1 and PACRL2)
PACRL1 and PACRL2 are 16-bit read/write registers that select the functions of the least
significant sixteen multiplexed pins of port A. PACRL1 selects the function of the PA15/CK–
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 pins of port A; PACRL2 selects the function of the PA7/TCLKB/CS3–
PA0/RXD0 pins of port A.
Port A has bus control signals (RD, WRH, WRL, CS0–CS3, AH) and DMAC control signals
(DREQ0–DREQ1), but there are instances when the register settings that select these pin functions
will be ignored, depending on the operation mode. Refer to table 18.2, Pin Arrangement by Mode,
for details.
PACRL1 is initialized by external power-on reset to H'4000 in extended mode, and to H'0000 in
single chip mode. PACRL2 is initialized by external power-on reset to H'0000. Neither register is
initialized by manual resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is
maintained.
Port A Control Register L1 (PACRL1):
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
PA15MD
—
PA14MD
—
PA13MD
—
PA12MD
Initial value:
0
0(1)*
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
PA11MD
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PA10MD PA9MD1 PA9MD0 PA8MD1 PA8MD0
Note: * Bit 14 is initialized to 1 in extended mode.
• Bit 15—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
612
• Bit 14—PA15 Mode (PA15MD): Selects the function of the PA15/CK pin.
Bit 14: PA15MD Description
0
General input/output (PA15) (single chip mode initial value)
1
Clock output (CK) (extended mode initial value)
• Bit 13—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 12—PA14 Mode (PA14MD): Selects the function of the PA14/RD pin.
Bit 12: PA14MD Description
0
General input/output (PA14) (initial value) (RD in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Read output (RD) (PA14 in single chip mode)
• Bit 11—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 10—PA13 Mode (PA13MD): Selects the function of the PA13/WRH pin.
Bit 10: PA13MD Description
0
General input/output (PA13) (initial value) (WRH in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Most significant side write output (WRH) (PA13 in single chip mode)
• Bit 9—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 8—PA12 Mode (PA12MD): Selects the function of the PA12/WRL pin.
Bit 8: PA12MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA12) (initial value) (WRL in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Least significant side write output (WRL) (PA12 in single chip mode)
• Bit 7—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 6—PA11 Mode (PA11MD): Selects the function of the PA11/CS1 pin.
Bit 6: PA11MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA11) (initial value) (CS1 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Chip select output (CS1) (PA11 in single chip mode)
• Bit 5—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
613
• Bit 4—PA10 Mode (PA10MD): Selects the function of the PA10/CS0 pin.
Bit 4: PA10MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA10) (initial value) (CS0 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Chip select output (CS0) (PA10 in single chip mode)
• Bits 3 and 2—PA9 Mode 1, 0 (PA9MD1 and PA9MD0): These bits select the function of the
PA9/TCLKD/IRQ3 pin.
Bit 3:
PA9MD1
Bit 2:
PA9MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PA9) (initial value)
1
MTU timer clock input (TCLKD)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ3)
1
Reserved
1
• Bits 1 and 0—PA8 Mode 1, 0 (PA8MD1 and PA8MD0): These bits select the function of the
PA8/TCLKC/IRQ2 pin.
Bit 1:
PA8MD1
Bit 0:
PA8MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PA8) (initial value)
1
MTU timer clock input (TCLKC)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ2)
1
Reserved
1
614
Port A Control Register L2 (PACRL2):
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PA7
MD1
PA7
MD0
PA6
MD1
PA6
MD0
PA5
MD1
PA5
MD0
—
PA4MD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
PA3MD
PA2
MD1
PA2
MD0
—
PA1MD
—
PA0MD
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
• Bits 15 and 14—PA7 Mode 1, 0 (PA7MD1 and PA7MD0): These bits select the function of
the PA7/TCLKB/CS3 pin.
Bit 15:
PA7MD1
Bit 14:
PA7MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PA7) (initial value)
1
MTU timer clock input (TCLKB)
0
Chip select output (CS3) (PA7 in single chip mode)
1
Reserved
1
• Bits 13 and 12—PA6 Mode 1, 0 (PA6MD1 and PA6MD0): These bits select the function of
the PA6/TCLKA/CS2 pin.
Bit 13:
PA6MD1
Bit 12:
PA6MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PA6) (initial value)
1
MTU timer clock input (TCLKA)
0
Chip select output (CS2) (PA6 in single chip mode)
1
Reserved
1
615
• Bits 11 and 10—PA5 Mode 1, 0 (PA5MD1 and PA5MD0): These bits select the function of
the PA5/SCK1/DREQ1/IRQ1 pin.
Bit 11:
PA5MD1
Bit 10:
PA5MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PA5) (initial value)
1
Serial clock input/output (SCK1)
0
DMA transfer request received input (DREQ1) (PA5 in single
chip mode)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ1)
1
• Bit 9—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 8—PA4 Mode (PA4MD): Selects the function of the PA4/TxD1 pin.
Bit 8: PA4MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA4) (initial value)
1
Transmit data output (TxD1)
• Bit 7—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 6—PA3 Mode (PA3MD): Selects the function of the PA3/RxD1 pin.
Bit 6: PA3MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA3) (initial value)
1
Receive data input (RxD1)
• Bits 5 and 4—PA2 Mode 1, 0 (PA2MD1 and PA2MD0): These bits select the function of the
PA2/SCK0/DREQ0/IRQ0 pin.
Bit 5:
PA2MD1
Bit 4:
PA2MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PA2) (initial value)
1
Serial clock input/output (SCK0)
0
DMA transfer request received input (DREQ0) (PA2 in single
chip mode)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ0)
1
• Bit 3—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
616
• Bit 2—PA1 Mode (PA1MD): Selects the function of the PA1/TxD0 pin.
Bit 2: PA1MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA1) (initial value)
1
Transmit data output (TxD0)
• Bit 1—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 0—PA0 Mode (PA0MD): Selects the function of the PA0/RxD0 pin.
Bit 0: PA0MD
Description
0
General input/output (PA0) (initial value)
1
Receive data input (RxD0)
18.3.5
Port B I/O Register (PBIOR)
The port B I/O register (PBIOR) is a 16-bit read/write register that selects input or output for the
ten port B pins. Bits PB9IOR–PB0IOR correspond to the PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG pin to PB0/A16
pin. PBIOR is enabled when the port B pins function as input/outputs (PB9–PB0). For other
functions, it is disabled.
For port B pin functions PB9–PB0, a given pin in port B is an output pin if its corresponding
PBIOR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
PBIOR is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset; however, it is not initialized for manual
resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
PB9
IOR
PB8
IOR
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7
IOR
PB6
IOR
PB5
IOR
PB4
IOR
PB3
IOR
PB2
IOR
PB1
IOR
PB0
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
617
18.3.6
Port B Control Registers (PBCR1 and PBCR2)
PBCR1 and PBCR2 are 16-bit read/write registers that select the functions of the ten multiplexed
pins of port B. PBCR1 selects the functions of the top two bits of port B; PBCR2 selects the
functions of the bottom eight bits of port B.
Port B has bus control signals (RDWR, RAS, CASH, CASL, WAIT, BREQ, BACK) and address
outputs (A21, A20, A19, A18, A17, A16), but there are instances when the register settings that
select these pin functions will be ignored, depending on the operation mode. Refer to table 18.2,
Pin Arrangement by Mode, for details.
PBCR1 and PBCR2 are both initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset but are not
initialized for manual resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is
maintained.
Port B Control Register 1 (PBCR1):
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
PB9
MD1
PB9
MD0
PB8
MD1
PB8
MD0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 15-4—Reserved: These bits always read as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bits 3 and 2—PB9 Mode (PB9MD1 and PB9MD0): PB9MD1 and PB9MD0 select the
function of the PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG pin.
Bit 3: PB9MD1
Bit 2: PB9MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PB9) (initial value)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ7)
0
Address output (A21) (PB9 in single chip mode)
1
A/D conversion trigger input (ADTRG)
1
618
• Bits 1 and 0—PB8 Mode (PB8MD1 and PB8MD0): PB8MD1 and PB8MD0 select the
function of the PB8/IRQ6/A20/WAIT pin.
Bit 1: PB8MD1
Bit 0: PB8MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PB8) (initial value)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ6)
0
Address output (A20) (PB8 in single chip mode)
1
Wait state request input (WAIT) (PB8 in single chip
mode)
1
Port B Control Register 2 (PBCR2):
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PB7MD1 PB7MD0 PB6MD1 PB6MD0 PB5MD1 PB5MD0 PB4MD1 PB4MD0
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
PB1MD
—
PB0MD
PB3MD1 PB3MD0 PB2MD1 PB2MD0
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
• Bits 15 and 14—PB7 Mode (PB7MD1 and PB7MD0): PB7MD1 and PB7MD0 select the
function of the PB7/IRQ5/A19/BREQ pin.
Bit 15:
PB7MD1
Bit 14:
PB7MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PB7) (initial value)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ5)
0
Address output (A19) (PB7 in single chip mode)
1
Bus right request input (BREQ) (PB7 in single chip mode)
1
619
• Bits 13 and 12—PB6 Mode (PB6MD1 and PB6MD0): PB6MD1 and PB6MD0 select the
function of the PB6/IRQ4/A18/BACK pin.
Bit 13:
PB6MD1
Bit 12:
PB6MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PB6) (initial value)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ4)
0
Address output (A18) (PB6 in single chip mode)
1
Bus right request output (BACK) (PB6 in single chip mode)
1
• Bits 11 and 10—PB5 Mode (PB5MD1 and PB5MD0): PB5MD1 and PB5MD0 select the
function of the PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR pin.
Bit 11:
PB5MD1
Bit 10:
PB5MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PB5) (initial value)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ3)
0
Port output enable (POE3)
1
Read/write output (RDWR)
1
• Bits 9 and 8—PB4 Mode (PB4MD1 and PB4MD0): PB4MD1 and PB4MD0 select the
function of the PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH pin.
Bit 9: PB4MD1
Bit 8: PB4MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PB4) (initial value)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ2)
0
Port output enable (POE2)
1
Column address strobe (CASH) (PB4 in single chip mode)
1
• Bits 7 and 6—PB3 Mode (PB3MD1 and PB3MD0): PB3MD1 and PB3MD0 select the
function of the PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL pin.
Bit 7: PB3MD1
Bit 6: PB3MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PB3) (initial value)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ1)
0
Port output enable (POE1)
1
Column address strobe (CASL) (PB3 in single chip mode)
1
620
• Bits 5 and 4—PB2 Mode (PB2MD1 and PB2MD0): PB2MD1 and PB2MD0 select the
function of the PB2/IRQ0/POE0/RAS pin.
Bit 5: PB2MD1
Bit 4: PB2MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PB2) (initial value)
1
Interrupt request input (IRQ0)
0
Port output enable (POE0)
1
Row address strobe (RAS) (PB2 in single chip mode)
1
• Bit 3—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 2—PB1 Mode (PB1MD): Selects the function of the PB1/A17 pin.
Bit 2: PB1MD
Description
0
General input/output (PB1) (initial value) (A17 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A17) (PB1 in single chip mode)
• Bit 1—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 0—PB0 Mode (PB0MD): Selects the function of the PB0/A16 pin.
Bit 0: PA0MD
Description
0
General input/output (PB0) (initial value) (A16 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A16) (PB0 in single chip mode)
621
18.3.7
Port C I/O Register (PCIOR)
The port C I/O register (PCIOR) is a 16-bit read/write register that selects input or output for the
16 port C pins. Bits PC15IOR–PC0IOR correspond to pins PC15/A15 to PC0/A0. PCIOR is
enabled when the port C pins function as general input/outputs (PC15–PC0). For other functions,
it is disabled.
When the port C pin functions are as PC15–PC0, a given pin in port C is an output pin if its
corresponding PCIOR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
PCIOR is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset; however, it is not initialized for manual
resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous values are maintained.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
622
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PC15
IOR
PC14
IOR
PC13
IOR
PC12
IOR
PC11
IOR
PC10
IOR
PC9
IOR
PC8
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7
IOR
PC6
IOR
PC5
IOR
PC4
IOR
PC3
IOR
PC2
IOR
PC1
IOR
PC0
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
18.3.8
Port C Control Register (PCCR)
PCCR is a 16-bit read/write register that selects the functions for the sixteen port C multiplexed
pins. There are instances when these register settings will be ignored, depending on the operation
mode. Refer to table 18.2, Pin Arrangement by Mode, for details.
PCCR is initialized to H'0000 by power-on resets but is not initialized for manual resets, reset by
WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PC15
MD
PC14
MD
PC13
MD
PC12
MD
PC11
MD
PC10
MD
PC9
MD
PC8
MD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC7
MD
PC6
MD
PC5
MD
PC4
MD
PC3
MD
PC2
MD
PC1
MD
PC0
MD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bit 15—PC15 Mode (PC15MD): Selects the function of the PC15/A15 pin.
Bit 15: PC15MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC15) (initial value) (A15 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A15) (PC15 in single chip mode)
• Bit 14—PC14 Mode (PC14MD): Selects the function of the PC14/A14 pin.
Bit 14: PC14MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC14) (initial value) (A14 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A14) (PC14 in single chip mode)
• Bit 13—PC13 Mode (PC13MD): Selects the function of the PC13/A13 pin.
Bit 13: PC13MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC13) (initial value) (A13 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A13) (PC13 in single chip mode)
623
• Bit 12—PC12 Mode (PC12MD): Selects the function of the PC12/A12 pin.
Bit 12: PC12MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC12) (initial value) (A12 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A12) (PC12 in single chip mode)
• Bit 11—PC11 Mode (PC11MD): Selects the function of the PC11/A11 pin.
Bit 11: PC11MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC11) (initial value) (A11 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A11) (PC11 in single chip mode)
• Bit 10—PC10 Mode (PC10MD): Selects the function of the PC10/A10 pin.
Bit 10: PC10MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC10) (initial value) (A10 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A10) (PC10 in single chip mode)
• Bit 9—PC9 Mode (PC9MD): Selects the function of the PC9/A9 pin.
Bit 9: PC9MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC9) (initial value) (A9 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A9) (PC9 in single chip mode)
• Bit 8—PC8 Mode (PC8MD): Selects the function of the PC8/A8 pin.
Bit 8: PC8MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC8) (initial value) (A8 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A8) (PC8 in single chip mode)
• Bit 7—PC7 Mode (PC7MD): Selects the function of the PC7/A7 pin.
Bit 7: PC7MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC7) (initial value) (A7 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A7) (PC7 in single chip mode)
624
• Bit 6—PC6 Mode (PC6MD): Selects the function of the PC6/A6 pin.
Bit 6: PC6MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC6) (initial value) (A6 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A6) (PC6 in single chip mode)
• Bit 5—PC5 Mode (PC5MD): Selects the function of the PC5/A5 pin.
Bit 5: PC5MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC5) (initial value) (A5 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A5) (PC5 in single chip mode)
• Bit 4—PC4 Mode (PC4MD): Selects the function of the PC4/A4 pin.
Bit 4: PC4MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC4) (initial value) (A4 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A4) (PC4 in single chip mode)
• Bit 3—PC3 Mode (PC3MD): Selects the function of the PC3/A3 pin.
Bit 3: PC3MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC3) (initial value) (A3 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A3) (PC3 in single chip mode)
• Bit 2—PC2 Mode (PC2MD): Selects the function of the PC2/A2 pin.
Bit 2: PC2MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC2) (initial value) (A2 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A2) (PC2 in single chip mode)
• Bit 1—PC1 Mode (PC1MD): Selects the function of the PC1/A1 pin.
Bit 1: PC1MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC1) (initial value) (A1 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A1) (PC1 in single chip mode)
625
• Bit 0—PC0 Mode (PC0MD): Selects the function of the PC0/A0 pin.
Bit 0: PC0MD
Description
0
General input/output (PC0) (initial value) (A0 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Address output (A0) (PC0 in single chip mode)
18.3.9
Port D I/O Register H (PDIORH)
The port D I/O register H (PDIORH) is a 16-bit read/write register that selects input or output for
the most significant sixteen port D pins. Bits PD31IOR–PD16IOR correspond to the
PD31/D31/ADTRG pin to PD16/D16/IRQ0 pin. PDIORH is enabled when the port D pins
function as general input/outputs (PD31–PD16). For other functions, it is disabled.
For port D pin functions PD31–PD16, a given pin in port D is an output pin if its corresponding
PDIORH bit is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
PDIORH is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset; however, it is not initialized for
manual resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
The settings for this register are effective only for the 144-pin version. There are no corresponding
pins for this register in the 112-pin and 120-pin versions. However, read/writes are possible.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
626
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PD31
IOR
PD30
IOR
PD29
IOR
PD28
IOR
PD27
IOR
PD26
IOR
PD25
IOR
PD24
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD23
IOR
PD22
IOR
PD21
IOR
PD20
IOR
PD19
IOR
PD18
IOR
PD17
IOR
PD16
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
18.3.10 Port D I/O Register L (PDIORL)
The port D I/O register L (PDIORL) is a 16-bit read/write register that selects input or output for
the least significant sixteen port D pins. Bits PD15IOR–PD0IOR correspond to the PD15/D15 pin
to PD0/D0 pin. PDIORL is enabled when the port D pins function as general input/outputs
(PD15–PD0). For other functions, it is disabled.
For port D pin functions PD15–PD0, a given pin in port D is an output pin if its corresponding
PDIORL bit is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
PDIORL is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset; however, it is not initialized for
manual resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PD15
IOR
PD14
IOR
PD13
IOR
PD12
IOR
PD11
IOR
PD10
IOR
PD9
IOR
PD8
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7
IOR
PD6
IOR
PD5
IOR
PD4
IOR
PD3
IOR
PD2
IOR
PD1
IOR
PD0
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
18.3.11 Port D Control Registers H1, H2 (PDCRH1 and PDCRH2)
PDCRH1 and PDCRH2 are 16-bit read/write registers that select the functions of the most
significant sixteen multiplexed pins of port D. PDCRH1 selects the functions of the
PD31/D31/ADTRG–PD24/D24/DREQ0 pins of port D; PDCRH2 selects the functions of the
PD23/D23/IRQ7–PD16/D16/IRQ0 pins of port D. There are instances when these register settings
will be ignored, depending on the operation mode. Refer to table 18.2, Pin Arrangement by Mode,
for details.
The settings for this register are effective only for the 144-pin version. There are no corresponding
pins for this register in the 112-pin and 120-pin versions. However, read/writes are possible.
PDCRH1 and PDCRH2 are both initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset but are not
initialized for manual resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is
maintained.
627
Port D Control Register H1 (PDCRH1):
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PD31
MD1
PD31
MD0
PD30
MD1
PD30
MD0
PD29
MD1
PD29
MD0
PD28
MD1
PD28
MD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD27
MD1
PD27
MD0
PD26
MD1
PD26
MD0
PD25
MD1
PD25
MD0
PD24
MD1
PD24
MD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 15 and 14—PD31 Mode 1, 0 (PD31MD1 and PD31MD0): These bits select the function
of the PD31/D31/ADTRG pin.
Bit 15:
PD31MD1
Bit 14:
PD31MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD31) (initial value) (No ROM, D31 with
CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D31) (PD31 in single chip mode)
0
A/D conversion trigger input (ADTRG) (No ROM, D31 with
CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 13 and 12—PD30 Mode 1, 0 (PD30MD1 and PD30MD0): These bits select the function
of the PD30/D30/IRQOUT pin.
Bit 13:
PD30MD1
Bit 12:
PD30MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD30) (initial value) (No ROM, D30 with
CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D30) (PD30 in single chip mode)
0
Interrupt request received output (IRQOUT) (No ROM, D30
with CS0 = 32 bit width. Reserved in single chip mode)
1
Reserved
1
628
Description
• Bits 11 and 10—PD29 Mode 1, 0 (PD29MD1 and PD29MD0): These bits select the function
of the PD29/D29/CS3 pin.
Bit 11:
PD29MD1
Bit 10:
PD29MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD29) (initial value) (D29 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D29) (PD29 in single chip mode)
0
Chip select output (CS3) (PD29 in single chip mode, D29 with
no ROM and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 9 and 8—PD28 Mode 1, 0 (PD28MD1 and PD28MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD28/D28/CS2 pin.
Bit 9:
PD28MD1
Bit 8:
PD28MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD28) (initial value) (D28 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D28) (PD28 in single chip mode)
0
Chip select output (CS2) (PD28 in single chip mode, and D28
with no ROM and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 7 and 6—PD27 Mode 1, 0 (PD27MD1 and PD27MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD27/D27/DACK1 pin.
Bit 7:
PD27MD1
Bit 6:
PD27MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD27) (initial value) (D27 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D27) (PD27 in single chip mode)
0
DMA transfer request received output (DACK1) (PD27 in single
chip mode, and D27 with no ROM and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Reserved
1
Description
629
• Bits 5 and 4—PD26 Mode 1, 0 (PD26MD1 and PD26MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD26/D26/DACK0 pin.
Bit 5:
PD26MD1
Bit 4:
PD26MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD26) (initial value) (D26 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D26) (PD26 in single chip mode)
0
DMA transfer request received output (DACK0) (PD26 in single
chip mode, and D26 with no ROM and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 3 and 2—PD25 Mode 1, 0 (PD25MD1 and PD25MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD25/D25/DREQ1 pin.
Bit 3:
PD25MD1
Bit 2:
PD25MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD25) (initial value) (D25 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D25) (PD25 in single chip mode)
0
DMA transfer request input (DREQ1) (PD25 in single chip
mode, and D25 with no ROM and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 1 and 0—PD24 Mode 1, 0 (PD24MD1 and PD24MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD24/D24/DREQ0 pin.
Bit 1:
PD24MD1
Bit 0:
PD24MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD24) (initial value) (D24 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D24) (PD24 in single chip mode)
0
DMA transfer request input (DREQ0) (PD24 in single chip
mode, and D24 with no ROM and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Reserved
1
630
Description
Port D Control Register H2 (PDCRH2):
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PD23
MD1
PD23
MD0
PD22
MD1
PD22
MD0
PD21
MD1
PD21
MD0
PD20
MD1
PD20
MD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD19
MD1
PD19
MD0
PD18
MD1
PD18
MD0
PD17
MD1
PD17
MD0
PD16
MD1
PD16
MD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 15 and 14—PD23 Mode 1, 0 (PD23MD1 and PD23MD0): These bits select the function
of the PD23/D23/IRQ7 pin.
Bit 15:
PD23MD1
Bit 14:
PD23MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD23) (initial value) (D23 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D23) (PD23 in single chip mode)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ7)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 13 and 12—PD22 Mode 1, 0 (PD22MD1 and PD22MD0): These bits select the function
of the PD22/D22/IRQ6 pin.
Bit 13:
PD22MD1
Bit 12:
PD22MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD22) (initial value) (D22 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D22) (PD22 in single chip mode)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ6)
1
Reserved
1
Description
631
• Bits 11 and 10—PD21 Mode 1, 0 (PD21MD1 and PD21MD0): These bits select the function
of the PD21/D21/IRQ5 pin.
Bit 11:
PD21MD1
Bit 10:
PD21MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD21) (initial value) (D21 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D21) (PD21 in single chip mode)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ5)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 9 and 8—PD20 Mode 1, 0 (PD20MD1 and PD20MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD20/D20/IRQ4 pin.
Bit 9:
PD20MD1
Bit 8:
PD20MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD20) (initial value) (D20 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D20) (PD20 in single chip mode)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ4)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 7 and 6—PD19 Mode 1, 0 (PD19MD1 and PD19MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD19/D19/IRQ3 pin.
Bit 7:
PD19MD1
Bit 6:
PD19MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD19) (initial value) (D19 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D19) (PD19 in single chip mode)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ3)
1
Reserved
1
632
Description
• Bits 5 and 4—PD18 Mode 1, 0 (PD18MD1 and PD18MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD18/D18/IRQ2 pin.
Bit 5:
PD18MD1
Bit 4:
PD18MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD18) (initial value) (D18 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width
1
Data input/output (D18) (PD18 in single chip mode)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ2)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 3 and 2—PD17 Mode 1, 0 (PD17MD1 and PD17MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD17/D17/IRQ1 pin.
Bit 3:
PD17MD1
Bit 2:
PD17MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD17) (initial value) (D17 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D17) (PD17 in single chip mode)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ1)
1
Reserved
1
Description
• Bits 1 and 0—PD16 Mode 1, 0 (PD16MD1 and PD16MD0): These bits select the function of
the PD16/D16/IRQ0 pin.
Bit 1:
PD16MD1
Bit 0:
PD16MD0
0
0
General input/output (PD16) (initial value) (D16 with no ROM
and CS0 = 32 bit width)
1
Data input/output (D16) (PD16 in single chip mode)
0
Interrupt request input (IRQ0)
1
Reserved
1
Description
633
18.3.12 Port D Control Register L (PDCRL)
PDCRL is a 16-bit read/write register that selects the multiplexed pin functions for the least
significant sixteen port D pins. There are instances when these register settings will be ignored,
depending on the operation mode.
On-Chip ROM-Disabled Extended Mode:
• 144-pin version:
 Mode 0 (16-bit bus): Port D pins are data I/O pins; PDCRL settings are disabled.
 Mode 1 (32-bit bus): Port D pins are data I/O pins; PDCRL settings are disabled.
• 112-pin and 120-pin versions:
 Mode 0 (8-bit bus): Port D pins are data I/O pins; PDCRL settings are disabled.
 Mode 1 (16-bit bus): Port D pins are data I/O pins; PDCRL settings are disabled.
On-Chip ROM-Enabled Extended Mode: The port D pins are shared as data I/O pins and
general I/O pins; PDCRL settings are enabled.
Single Chip Mode: The port D pins are general I/O pins; PDCRL settings are disabled.
PDCRL is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset but is not initialized for manual resets,
reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
Port D Control Register L (PDCRL)
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
634
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PD15
MD
PD14
MD
PD13
MD
PD12
MD
PD11
MD
PD10
MD
PD9
MD
PD8
MD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7
MD
PD6
MD
PD5
MD
PD4
MD
PD3
MD
PD2
MD
PD1
MD
PD0
MD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bit 15—PD15 Mode (PD15MD): Selects the function of the PD15/D15 pin.
Bit 15: PD15MD Description
0
General input/output (PD15) (initial value) (D15 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D15) (PD15 in single chip mode)
• Bit 14—PD14 Mode (PD14MD): Selects the function of the PD14/D14 pin.
Bit 14: PD14MD Description
0
General input/output (PD14) (initial value) (D14 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D14) (PD14 in single chip mode)
• Bit 13—PD13 Mode (PD13MD): Selects the function of the PD13/D13 pin.
Bit 13: PD13MD Description
0
General input/output (PD13) (initial value) (D13 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D13) (PD13 in single chip mode)
• Bit 12—PD12 Mode (PD12MD): Selects the function of the PD12/D12 pin.
Bit 12: PD12MD Description
0
General input/output (PD12) (initial value) (D12 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D12) (PD12 in single chip mode)
• Bit 11—PD11 Mode (PD11MD): Selects the function of the PD11/D11 pin.
Bit 11: PD11MD Description
0
General input/output (PD11) (initial value) (D11 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D11) (PD11 in single chip mode)
• Bit 10—PD10 Mode (PD10MD): Selects the function of the PD10/D10 pin.
Bit 10: PD10MD Description
0
General input/output (PD10) (initial value) (D10 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D10) (PD10 in single chip mode)
635
• Bit 9—PD9 Mode (PD9MD): Selects the function of the PD9/D9 pin.
Bit 9: PD9MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD9) (initial value) (D9 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D9) (PD9 in single chip mode)
• Bit 8—PD8 Mode (PD8MD): Selects the function of the PD8/D8 pin.
Bit 8: PD8MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD8) (initial value) (D8 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D8) (PD8 in single chip mode)
• Bit 7—PD7 Mode (PD7MD): Selects the function of the PD7/D7 pin.
Bit 7: PD7MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD7) (initial value) (D7 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D7) (PD7 in single chip mode)
• Bit 6—PD6 Mode (PD6MD): Selects the function of the PD6/D6 pin.
Bit 6: PD6MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD6) (initial value) (D6 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D6) (PD6 in single chip mode)
• Bit 5—PD5 Mode (PD5MD): Selects the function of the PD5/D5 pin.
Bit 5: PD5MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD5) (initial value) (D5 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D5) (PD5 in single chip mode)
• Bit 4—PD4 Mode (PD4MD): Selects the function of the PD4/D4 pin.
Bit 4: PD4MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD4) (initial value) (D4 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D4) (PD4 in single chip mode)
636
• Bit 3—PD3 Mode (PD3MD): Selects the function of the PD3/D3 pin.
Bit 3: PD3MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD3) (initial value) (D3 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D3) (PD3 in single chip mode)
• Bit 2—PD2 Mode (PD2MD): Selects the function of the PD2/D2 pin.
Bit 2: PD2MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD2) (initial value) (D2 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D2) (PD2 in single chip mode)
• Bit 1—PD1 Mode (PD1MD): Selects the function of the PD1/D1 pin.
Bit 1: PD1MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD1) (initial value) (D1 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D1) (PD1 in single chip mode)
• Bit 0—PD0 Mode (PD0MD): Selects the function of the PD0/D0 pin.
Bit 0: PD0MD
Description
0
General input/output (PD0) (initial value) (D0 in on-chip ROM invalid mode)
1
Data input/output (D0) (PD0 in single chip mode)
637
18.3.13 Port E I/O Register (PEIOR)
The port E I/O register (PEIOR) is a 16-bit read/write register that selects input or output for the
16 port E pins. Bits PE15IOR–PE0IOR correspond to pins PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT–
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0. PEIOR is enabled when the port E pins function as general input/outputs
(PE15–PE0) or TIOC pin of the MTU. For other functions, it is disabled.
When the port E pin functions are as PE15–PE0, or TIOC pin of the MTU, a given pin in port E is
an output pin if its corresponding PEIOR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
PEIOR is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset; however, it is not initialized for manual
resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PE15
IOR
PE14
IOR
PE13
IOR
PE12
IOR
PE11
IOR
PE10
IOR
PE9
IOR
PE8
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7
IOR
PE6
IOR
PE5
IOR
PE4
IOR
PE3
IOR
PE2
IOR
PE1
IOR
PE0
IOR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
18.3.14 Port E Control Registers 1, 2 (PECR1 and PECR2)
PECR1 and PECR2 are 16-bit read/write registers that select the functions of the sixteen
multiplexed pins of port E. PECR1 selects the functions of the upper eight bit pins of port E;
PECR2 selects the function of the lower eight bit pins of port E.
Port E has a bus control signal (AH) and DMAC control signals (DACK1, DACK0, DRAK1,
DRAK0), but there are instances when the register settings that select these pin functions will be
ignored, depending on the operation mode. Refer to table 18.2, Pin Arrangement by Mode, for
details.
PECR1 and PECR2 are both initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset but are not initialized
for manual resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
638
Port E Control Register 1 (PECR1):
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PE15
MD1
PE15
MD0
PE14
MD1
PE14
MD0
PE13
MD1
PE13
MD0
—
PE12MD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
PE11MD
—
PE10MD
—
PE9MD
—
PE8MD
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
• Bits 15 and 14—PE15 Mode 1, 0 (PE15MD1 and PE15MD0): These bits select the function of
the PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT pin.
Bit 15:
PE15MD1
Bit 14:
PE15MD0
Description
0
0
Input/output (PE15) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC4D)
0
DMAC request received output (DACK1) (PE15 in single chip
mode)
1
Interrupt request output (IRQOUT)
1
(Reserved in single chip mode)
• Bits 13 and 12—PE14 Mode 1, 0 (PE14MD1 and PE14MD0): These bits select the function of
the PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH pin.
Bit 13:
PE14MD1
Bit 12:
PE14MD0
Description
0
0
Input/output (PE14) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC4C)
0
DMAC request received output (DACK0) (PE14 in single chip
mode)
1
Address hold output (AH) (PE14 in single chip mode)
1
639
• Bits 11 and 10—PE13 Mode 1, 0 (PE13MD1 and PE13MD0): These bits select the function of
the PE13/TIOC4B/MRES pin.
Bit 11:
PE13MD1
Bit 10:
PE13MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PE13) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC4B)
0
Manual reset input (MRES)
1
Reserved
1
• Bit 9—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write values should always be 0.
• Bit 8—PE12 Mode (PE12MD): Selects the function of the PE12/TIOC4A pin.
Bit 8: PE12MD
Description
0
General input/output (PE12) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC4A)
• Bit 7—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write values should always be 0.
• Bit 6—PE11 Mode (PE11MD): Selects the function of the PE11/TIOC3D pin.
Bit 6: PE11MD
Description
0
General input/output (PE11) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC3D)
• Bit 5—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write values should always be 0.
• Bit 4—PE10 Mode (PE10MD): Selects the function of the PE10/TIOC3C pin.
Bit 4: PE10MD
Description
0
General input/output (PE10) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC3C)
• Bit 3—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write values should always be 0.
640
• Bit 2—PE9 Mode (PE9MD): Selects the function of the PE9/TIOC3B pin.
Bit 2: PE9MD
Description
0
General input/output (PE9) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC3B)
• Bit 1—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write values should always be 0.
• Bit 0—PE8 Mode (PE8MD): Selects the function of the PE8/TIOC3A pin.
Bit 0: PE8MD
Description
0
General input/output (PE8) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC3A)
Port E Control Register 2 (PECR2):
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
PE7MD
—
PE6MD
—
PE5MD
—
PE4MD
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE3
MD1
PE3
MD0
PE2
MD1
PE2
MD0
PE1
MD1
PE1
MD0
PE0
MD1
PE0
MD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value:
R/W:
• Bit 15—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 14—PE7 Mode (PE7MD): Selects the function of the PE7/TIOC2B pin.
Bit 14: PE7MD
Description
0
General input/output (PE7) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC2B)
• Bit 13 —Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
641
• Bit 12—PE6 Mode (PE6MD): Selects the function of the PE6/TIOC2A pin.
Bit 12: PE6MD
Description
0
General input/output (PE6) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC2A)
• Bit 11—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 10—PE5 Mode (PE5MD): Selects the function of the PE5/TIOC1B pin.
Bit 10: PE5MD
Description
0
General input/output (PE5) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC1B)
• Bit 9—Reserved: This bit always reads as 0. The write value should always be 0.
• Bit 8—PE4 Mode (PE4MD): Selects the function of the PE4/TIOC1A pin.
Bit 8: PE4MD
Description
0
General input/output (PE4) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC1A)
• Bits 7 and 6—PE3 Mode 1, 0 (PE3MD1 and PE3MD0): These bits select the function of the
PE3/TIOC0D/DRAK1 pin.
Bit 7:
PE3MD1
Bit 6:
PE3MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PE3) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC0D)
0
DREQ1 request received output (DRAK1) (PE3 in single chip
mode)
1
Reserved
1
642
• Bits 5 and 4—PE2 Mode 1, 0 (PE2MD1 and PE2MD0): These bits select the function of the
PE2/TIOC0C/DREQ1 pin.
Bit 5:
PE2MD1
Bit 4:
PE2MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PE2) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC0C)
0
DREQ1 request receive input (PE2 in single chip mode)
1
Reserved
1
• Bits 3 and 2—PE1 Mode 1, 0 (PE1MD1 and PE1MD0): These bits select the function of the
PE1/TIOC0B/DRAK0 pin.
Bit 3:
PE1MD1
Bit 2:
PE1MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PE1) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC0B)
0
DREQ0 request received output (DRAK0) (PE1 in single chip
mode)
1
Reserved
1
• Bits 1 and 0—PE0 Mode 1, 0 (PE0MD1 and PE0MD0): These bits select the function of the
PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0 pin.
Bit 1:
PE0MD1
Bit 0:
PE0MD0
Description
0
0
General input/output (PE0) (initial value)
1
MTU input capture input/output compare output (TIOC0A)
0
DREQ0 request receive input (PE0 in single chip mode)
1
Reserved
1
18.3.15 IRQOUT Function Control Register (IFCR)
The IFCR is a 16-bit read/write register used to control output when the multiplexed pins are
established as IRQOUT outputs by the port D control register (PDCRH1) or port E control register
(PECR1). When PDCRH1 or PECR1 are set for any other function, the settings of this register
have no effect on the pin functions.
643
The IFCR is initialized to H'0000 by external power-on reset but is not initialized for manual
resets, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is maintained.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
IRQ
MD3
IRQ
MD2
IRQ
MD1
IRQ
MD0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 3 and 2—IRQOUT Mode 3, 2 (IRQMD3 and IRQMD2): These bits select the IRQOUT
pin function when the PDCRH1 bits 13 and 12 (PD30MD1, PD30MD0) are set to (1, 0). These
bit settings are effective only for the 144 pin version. Reads and writes are also possible in the
112-pin and 120-pin versions, but they have no effect on the pin functions.
Bit 3: IRQMD3
Bit 2: IRQMD2
Description
0
0
Interrupt request received output (initial value)
1
Refresh signal output
0
Interrupt request received, or refresh signal output
(which of the two is output depends on the operation
status at the time)
1
Always high level output
1
• Bits 1 and 0—IRQOUT Mode 1, 0 (IRQMD1 and IRQMD0): These bits select the IRQOUT
pin function when the PECR1 bits 1 and 0 (PE15MD1, PE15MD0) are set to (1, 1).
Bit 1: IRQMD1
Bit 0: IRQMD0
Description
0
0
Interrupt request received output (initial value)
1
Refresh signal output
0
Interrupt request received, or refresh signal output
(which of the two is output depends on the operation
status at the time)
1
Always high level output
1
644
18.4
Cautions on Use
For the I/O ports and pins with multiplexing of DREQ or IRQ, switching from the port input Low
level condition to IRQ or DREQ edge detection will detect the concerned edge.
645
646
Section 19 I/O Ports (I/O)
19.1
Overview
There are six ports, A, B, C, D, E, and F. The pins of the ports are multiplexed for use as generalpurpose I/Os (the port F pins are general input) or for other functions. Use the pin function
controller (PFC) to select the function of multiplexed pins. The ports each have one data register
for storing pin data. The initialize function after power-on reset differs depending on the operating
mode of each pin. See table 18.2, Pin Arrangement by Mode, for details.
19.2
Port A
There are two versions of port A:
• FP-112/TFP-120
• FP-144
In the FP-112 and TFP-120 versions, port A is a 16-pin input/output port, as listed in table 19.1.
647
Table 19.1 Port A, FP-112/TFP-120 Version
ROM Disabled Extended
Mode (Modes 0, 1)
ROM Enabled Extended
Mode (Mode 2)
Single Chip Mode
PA15 (I/O)/CK (output)
PA15 (I/O)/CK (output)
PA15 (I/O)/CK (output)
RD (output)
PA14 (I/O)/RD (output)
PA14 (I/O)
WRH (output)
PA13 (I/O)/WRH (output)
PA13 (I/O)
WRL (output)
PA12 (I/O)/WRL (output)
PA12 (I/O)
CS1 (output)
PA11 (I/O)/CS1 (output)
PA11 (I/O)
CS0 (output)
PA10 (I/O)/CS0 (output)
PA10 (I/O)
PA9 (I/O)/TCLKD (input)/IRQ3
(input)
PA9 (I/O)/TCLKD (input)/IRQ3
(input)
PA9 (I/O)/TCLKD (input)/IRQ3
(input)
PA8 (I/O)/TCLKC (input)/IRQ2
(input)
PA8 (I/O)/TCLKC (input)/IRQ2
(input)
PA8 (I/O)/TCLKC (input)/IRQ2
(input)
PA7 (I/O)/TCLKB (input)/CS3
(output)
PA7 (I/O)/TCLKB (input)/CS3
(output)
PA7 (I/O)/TCLKB (input)
PA6 (I/O)/TCLKA (input)/CS2
(output)
PA6 (I/O)/TCLKA (input)/CS2
(output)
PA6 (I/O)/TCLKA (input)
PA5 (I/O)/SCK1 (I/O)/DREQ1
(input)/IRQ1 (input)
PA5 (I/O)/SCK1 (I/O)/DREQ1
(input)/IRQ1 (input)
PA5 (I/O)/SCK1 (I/O)/IRQ1
(input)
PA4 (I/O)/TXD1 (output)
PA4 (I/O)/TXD1 (output)
PA4 (I/O)/TXD1 (output)
PA3 (I/O)/RXD1 (input)
PA3 (I/O)/RXD1 (input)
PA3 (I/O)/RXD1 (input)
PA2 (I/O)/SCK0 (I/O)/DREQ0
(input)/IRQ0 (input)
PA2 (I/O)/SCK0 (I/O)/DREQ0
(input)/IRQ0 (input)
PA2 (I/O)/SCK0 (I/O)/IRQ0
(input)
PA1 (I/O)/TXD0 (output)
PA1 (I/O)/TXD0 (output)
PA1 (I/O)/TXD0 (output)
PA0 (I/O)/RXD0 (input)
PA0 (I/O)/RXD0 (input)
PA0 (I/O)/RXD0 (input)
In the FP-144 version, port A is a 24-pin input/output port, as listed in table 19.2.
648
Table 19.2 Port A, FP-144 Version
ROM Disabled Extended
Mode (Modes 0, 1)
ROM Enabled Extended
Mode (Mode 2)
Single Chip Mode
WRHH (output)
PA23 (I/O)/WRHH (output)
PA23 (I/O)
WRHL (output)
PA22 (I/O)/WRHL (output)
PA22 (I/O)
PA21 (I/O)/CASHH (output)
PA21 (I/O)/CASHH (output)
PA21 (I/O)
PA20 (I/O)/CASHL (output)
PA20 (I/O)/CASHL (output)
PA20 (I/O)
PA19 (I/O)/BACK (output)/
DRAK1 (output)
PA19 (I/O)/BACK (output)/
DRAK1 (output)
PA19 (I/O)
PA18 (I/O)/BREQ (input)/
DRAK0 (output)
PA18 (I/O)/BREQ (input)/
DRAK0 (output)
PA18 (I/O)
PA17 (I/O)/WAIT (input)
PA17 (I/O)/WAIT (input)
PA17 (I/O)
PA16 (I/O)/AH (output)
PA16 (I/O)/AH (output)
PA16 (I/O)
PA15 (I/O)/CK (output)
PA15 (I/O)/CK (output)
PA15 (I/O)/CK (output)
RD (output)
PA14 (I/O)/RD (output)
PA14 (I/O)
WRH (output)
PA13 (I/O)/WRH (output)
PA13 (I/O)
WRL (output)
PA12 (I/O)/WRL (output)
PA12 (I/O)
CS1 (output)
PA11 (I/O)/CS1 (output)
PA11 (I/O)
CS0 (output)
PA10 (I/O)/CS0 (output)
PA10 (I/O)
PA9 (I/O)/TCLKD (input)/IRQ3
(input)
PA9 (I/O)/TCLKD (input)/IRQ3
(input)
PA9 (I/O)/TCLKD (input)/IRQ3
(input)
PA8 (I/O)/TCLKC (input)/IRQ2
(input)
PA8 (I/O)/TCLKC (input)/IRQ2
(input)
PA8 (I/O)/TCLKC (input)/IRQ2
(input)
PA7 (I/O)/TCLKB (input)/CS3
(output)
PA7 (I/O)/TCLKB (input)/CS3
(output)
PA7 (I/O)/TCLKB (input)
PA6 (I/O)/TCLKA (input)/CS2
(output)
PA6 (I/O)/TCLKA (input)/CS2
(output)
PA6 (I/O)/TCLKA (input)
PA5 (I/O)/SCK1 (I/O)/DREQ1
(input)/IRQ1 (input)
PA5 (I/O)/SCK1 (I/O)/DREQ1
(input)/IRQ1 (input)
PA5 (I/O)/SCK1 (I/O)/IRQ1
(input)
PA4 (I/O)/TXD1 (output)
PA4 (I/O)/TXD1 (output)
PA4 (I/O)/TXD1 (output)
PA3 (I/O)/RXD1 (input)
PA3 (I/O)/RXD1 (input)
PA3 (I/O)/RXD1 (input)
PA2 (I/O)/SCK0 (I/O)/DREQ0
(input)/IRQ0 (input)
PA2 (I/O)/SCK0 (I/O)/DREQ0
(input)/IRQ0 (input)
PA2 (I/O)/SCK0 (I/O)/IRQ0
(input)
PA1 (I/O)/TXD0 (output)
PA1 (I/O)/TXD0 (output)
PA1 (I/O)/TXD0 (output)
PA0 (I/O)/RXD0 (input)
PA0 (I/O)/RXD0 (input)
PA0 (I/O)/RXD0 (input)
649
19.2.1
Register Configuration
Table 19.3 summarizes the port A register.
Table 19.3 Port A Register
Name
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
Port A data register H PADRH
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8380
H'FFFF8381
8, 16, 32
Port A data register L PADRL
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8382
H'FFFF8383
8, 16, 32
19.2.2
Abbreviation
Port A Data Register H (PADRH)
PADRH is a 16-bit read/write register that stores data for port A. The bits PA23DR–PA16DR
correspond to the PA23/WRHH–PA16/AH pins. When the pins are used as ordinary outputs, they
will output whatever value is written in the PADRH; when PADRH is read, the register value will
be output regardless of the pin status. When the pins are used as ordinary inputs, the pin status
rather than the register value is read directly when PADRH is read. When a value is written to
PADRH, that value can be written into PADRH, but it will not affect the pin status. Table 19.4
shows the read/write operations of the port A data register.
PADRH is initialized by an external power-on reset. However, PADRH is not initialized for
manual reset, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode.
These register settings function only for the 144-pin version. There are no pins corresponding to
this register in the 112-pin version. However, read/writes are possible.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA23DR PA22DR PA21DR PA20DR PA19DR PA18DR PA17DR PA16DR
Initial value:
R/W:
650
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
19.2.3
Port A Data Register L (PADRL)
PADRL is a 16-bit read/write register that stores data for port A. The bits PA15DR–PA0DR
correspond to the PA15/CK–PA0/RXD0 pins. When the pins are used as ordinary outputs, they
will output whatever value is written in the PADRL; when PADRL is read, the register value will
be output regardless of the pin status. When the pins are used as ordinary inputs, the pin status
rather than the register value is read directly when PADRL is read. When a value is written to
PADRL, that value can be written into PADRL, but it will not affect the pin status. Table 19.4
shows the read/write operations of the port A data register.
PADRL is initialized by an external power-on reset. However, PADRL is not initialized for
manual reset, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PA15DR PA14DR PA13DR PA12DR PA11DR PA10DR PA9DR PA8DR
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit:
PA7DR
Initial value:
R/W:
PA6DR PA5DR
PA4DR PA3DR
PA2DR
PA1DR PA0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Table 19.4 Read/Write Operation of the Port A Data Register (PADR)
PAIOR Pin Status
Read
Write
0
Ordinary input
Pin status
Can write to PADR, but it has no effect on pin status
Other function
Pin status
Can write to PADR, but it has no effect on pin status
Ordinary output
PADR value
Value written is output by pin
Other function
PADR value
Can write to PADR, but it has no effect on pin status
1
651
19.3
Port B
Port B is a 10-pin input/output port as listed in table 19.5.
Table 19.5 Port B
ROM Disabled Extended
Mode (Modes 0, 1)
ROM Enabled Extended
Mode (Mode 2)
Single Chip Mode
PB9 (I/O)/IRQ7 (input)/A21
(output)/ADTRG (input)
PB9 (I/O)/IRQ7 (input)/A21
(output)/ADTRG (input)
PB9 (I/O)/IRQ7 (input)/ADTRG
(input)
PB8 (I/O)/IRQ6 (input)/A20
(output)/WAIT (input)
PB8 (I/O)/IRQ6 (input)/A20
(output)/WAIT (input)
PB8 (I/O)/IRQ6 (input)
PB7 (I/O)/IRQ5 (input)/A19
(output)/BREQ (input)
PB7 (I/O)/IRQ5 (input)/A19
(output)/BREQ (input)
PB7 (I/O)/IRQ5 (input)
PB6 (I/O)/IRQ4 (input)/A18
(output)/BACK (output)
PB6 (I/O)/IRQ4 (input)/A18
(output)/BACK (input)
PB6 (I/O)/IRQ4 (input)
PB5 (I/O)/IRQ3 (input)/POE3
(input)/RDWR (output)
PB5 (I/O)/IRQ3 (input)/POE3
(input)/RDWR (output)
PB5 (I/O)/IRQ3 (input)/POE3
(input)
PB4 (I/O)/IRQ2 (input)/POE2
(input)/CASH (output)
PB4 (I/O)/IRQ2 (input)/POE2
(input)/CASH (output)
PB4 (I/O)/IRQ2 (input)/POE2
(input)
PB3 (I/O)/IRQ1 (input)/POE1
(input)/CASL (output)
PB3 (I/O)/IRQ1 (input)/POE1
(input)/CASL (output)
PB3 (I/O)/IRQ1 (input)/POE1
(input)
PB2 (I/O)/IRQ0 (input)/POE0
(input)/RAS (output)
PB2 (I/O)/IRQ0 (input)/POE0
(input)/RAS (output)
PB2 (I/O)/IRQ0 (input)/POE0
(input)
A17 (output)
PB1 (I/O)/A17 (output)
PB1 (I/O)
A16 (output)
PB0 (I/O)/A16 (output)
PB0 (I/O)
19.3.1
Register Configuration
Table 19.6 summarizes the port B register.
Table 19.6 Port B Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
Port B data register
PBDR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8390
H'FFFF8391
8, 16, 32
652
19.3.2
Port B Data Register (PBDR)
PBDR is a 16-bit read/write register that stores data for port B. The bits PB9DR–PB0DR
correspond to the PB9/IRQ7/A21/ADTRG–PB0/A16 pins. When the pins are used as ordinary
outputs, they will output whatever value is written in the PBDR; when PBDR is read, the register
value will be read regardless of the pin status. When the pins are used as ordinary inputs, the pin
status rather than the register value is read directly when PBDR is read. When a value is written to
PBDR, that value can be written into PBDR, but it will not affect the pin status. Table 19.7 shows
the read/write operations of the port B data register.
PBDR is initialized by an external power-on reset. However, PBDR is not initialized for a manual
reset, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7DR
Initial value:
R/W:
PB6DR PB5DR
PB4DR PB3DR
PB2DR
9
8
PB9DR PB8DR
PB1DR PB0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Table 19.7 Read/Write Operation of the Port B Data Register (PBDR)
PBIOR
Pin Status
Read
Write
0
Ordinary input
Pin status
Can write to PBDR, but it has no effect on pin status
Other function
Pin status
Can write to PBDR, but it has no effect on pin status
Ordinary output
PBDR value
Value written is output by pin
Other function
PBDR value
Can write to PBDR, but it has no effect on pin status
1
653
19.4
Port C
Port C is a 16 pin input/output port as listed in table 19.8.
Table 19.8 Port C
ROM Disabled Extended
Mode (Modes 0, 1)
ROM Enabled Extended
Mode (Mode 2)
Single Chip Mode
A15 (output)
PC15 (I/O)/A15 (output)
PC15 (I/O)
A14 (output)
PC14 (I/O)/A14 (output)
PC14 (I/O)
A13 (output)
PC13 (I/O)/A13 (output)
PC13 (I/O)
A12 (output)
PC12 (I/O)/A12 (output)
PC12 (I/O)
A11 (output)
PC11 (I/O)/A11 (output)
PC11 (I/O)
A10 (output)
PC10 (I/O)/A10 (output)
PC10 (I/O)
A9 (output)
PC9 (I/O)/A9 (output)
PC9 (I/O)
A8 (output)
PC8 (I/O)/A8 (output)
PC8 (I/O)
A7 (output)
PC7 (I/O)/A7 (output)
PC7 (I/O)
A6 (output)
PC6 (I/O)/A6 (output)
PC6 (I/O)
A5 (output)
PC5 (I/O)/A5 (output)
PC5 (I/O)
A4 (output)
PC4 (I/O)/A4 (output)
PC4 (I/O)
A3 (output)
PC3 (I/O)/A3 (output)
PC3 (I/O)
A2 (output)
PC2 (I/O)/A2 (output)
PC2 (I/O)
A1 (output)
PC1 (I/O)/A1 (output)
PC1 (I/O)
A0 (output)
PC0 (I/O)/A0 (output)
PC0 (I/O)
19.4.1
Register Configuration
Table 19.9 summarizes the port C register.
Table 19.9 Port C Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
Port C data register
PCDR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF8392
H'FFFF8393
8, 16, 32
654
19.4.2
Port C Data Register (PCDR)
PCDR is a 16-bit read/write register that stores data for port C. The bits PC15DR–PC0DR
correspond to the PC15/A15–PC0/A0 pins. When the pins are used as ordinary outputs, they will
output whatever value is written in the PCDR; when PCDR is read, the register value will be read
regardless of the pin status. When the pins are used as ordinary inputs, the pin status rather than
the register value is read directly when PCDR is read. When a value is written to PCDR, that value
can be written into PCDR, but it will not affect the pin status. Table 19.10 shows the read/write
operations of the port C data register.
PCDR is initialized by an external power-on reset. However, PCDR is not initialized for a manual
reset, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PC15DR PC14DR PC13DR PC12DR PC11DR PC10DR PC9DR PC8DR
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit:
PC7DR
Initial value:
R/W:
PC6DR PC5DR
PC4DR PC3DR
PC2DR
PC1DR PC0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Table 19.10 Read/Write Operation of the Port C Data Register (PCDR)
PCIOR
Pin Status
Read
Write
0
Ordinary input
Pin status
Can write to PCDR, but it has no effect on pin status
Other function
Pin status
Can write to PCDR, but it has no effect on pin status
Ordinary output
PCDR value
Value written is output by pin
Other function
PCDR value
Can write to PCDR, but it has no effect on pin status
1
655
19.5
Port D
There are two versions of port D:
• FP-112
• FP-144
In the FP-112 version, port D is a 16-pin input/output port, as shown in table 19.11.
Table 19.11 Port D, FP-112 Version
Extended Mode
Without ROM
(Mode 0)
Extended Mode
Without ROM
(Mode 1)
Extended Mode With
ROM (Mode 2)
Single Chip Mode
D15 (I/O)
D15 (I/O)
PD15 (I/O)/D15 (I/O)
PD15 (I/O)
D14 (I/O)
D14 (I/O)
PD14 (I/O)/D14 (I/O)
PD14 (I/O)
D13 (I/O)
D13 (I/O)
PD13 (I/O)/D13 (I/O)
PD13 (I/O)
D12 (I/O)
D12 (I/O)
PD12 (I/O)/D12 (I/O)
PD12 (I/O)
D11 (I/O)
D11 (I/O)
PD11 (I/O)/D11 (I/O)
PD11 (I/O)
D10 (I/O)
D10 (I/O)
PD10 (I/O)/D10 (I/O)
PD10 (I/O)
D9 (I/O)
D9 (I/O)
PD9 (I/O)/D9 (I/O)
PD9 (I/O)
D8 (I/O)
D8 (I/O)
PD8 (I/O)/D8 (I/O)
PD8 (I/O)
D7 (I/O)
D7 (I/O)
PD7 (I/O)/D7 (I/O)
PD7 (I/O)
D6 (I/O)
D6 (I/O)
PD6 (I/O)/D6 (I/O)
PD6 (I/O)
D5 (I/O)
D5 (I/O)
PD5 (I/O)/D5 (I/O)
PD5 (I/O)
D4 (I/O)
D4 (I/O)
PD4 (I/O)/D4 (I/O)
PD4 (I/O)
D3 (I/O)
D3 (I/O)
PD3 (I/O)/D3 (I/O)
PD3 (I/O)
D2 (I/O)
D2 (I/O)
PD2 (I/O)/D2 (I/O)
PD2 (I/O)
D1 (I/O)
D1 (I/O)
PD1 (I/O)/D1 (I/O)
PD1 (I/O)
D0 (I/O)
D0 (I/O)
PD0 (I/O)/D0 (I/O)
PD0 (I/O)
In the FP-144 version, port D is a 32-pin input/output port, as listed in table 19.12.
656
Table 19.12 Port D, FP-144 Version
Extended Mode
Without ROM
(Mode 0)
Extended Mode
Without ROM
(Mode 1)
PD31 (I/O)/D31 (I/O)/
ADTRG (input)
Extended Mode With
ROM (Mode 2)
Single Chip Mode
D31 (I/O)
PD31 (I/O)/D31 (I/O)/
ADTRG (input)
PD31 (I/O)/ADTRG
(input)
PD30 (I/O)/D30 (I/O)/
IRQOUT (output)
D30 (I/O)
PD30 (I/O)/D30 (I/O)/
IRQOUT (output)
PD30 (I/O)/IRQOUT
(output)
PD29 (I/O)/D29 (I/O)/
CS3 (output)
D29 (I/O)
PD29 (I/O)/D29 (I/O)/
CS3 (output)
PD29 (I/O)
PD28 (I/O)/D28 (I/O)/
CS2 (output)
D28 (I/O)
PD28 (I/O)/D28 (I/O)/
CS2 (output)
PD28 (I/O)
PD27 (I/O)/D27 (I/O)/
DACK1 (output)
D27 (I/O)
PD27 (I/O)/D27 (I/O)/
DACK1 (output)
PD27 (I/O)
PD26 (I/O)/D26 (I/O)/
DACK0 (output)
D26 (I/O)
PD26 (I/O)/D26 (I/O)/
DACK0 (output)
PD26 (I/O)
PD25 (I/O)/D25 (I/O)/
DREQ1 (input)
D25 (I/O)
PD25 (I/O)/D25 (I/O)/
DREQ1 (input)
PD25 (I/O)
PD24 (I/O)/D24 (I/O)/
DREQ0 (input)
D24 (I/O)
PD24 (I/O)/D24 (I/O)/
DREQ0 (input)
PD24 (I/O)
PD23 (I/O)/D23 (I/O)/
IRQ7 (input)
D23 (I/O)
PD23 (I/O)/D23 (I/O)/
IRQ7 (input)
PD23 (I/O)/IRQ7
(input)
PD22 (I/O)/D22 (I/O)/
IRQ6 (input)
D22 (I/O)
PD22 (I/O)/D22 (I/O)/
IRQ6 (input)
PD22 (I/O)/IRQ6
(input)
PD21 (I/O)/D21 (I/O)/
IRQ5 (input)
D21 (I/O)
PD21 (I/O)/D21 (I/O)/
IRQ5 (input)
PD21 (I/O)/IRQ5
(input)
PD20 (I/O)/D20 (I/O)/
IRQ4 (input)
D20 (I/O)
PD20 (I/O)/D20 (I/O)/
IRQ4 (input)
PD20 (I/O)/IRQ4
(input)
PD19 (I/O)/D19 (I/O)/
IRQ3 (input)
D19 (I/O)
PD19 (I/O)/D19 (I/O)/
IRQ3 (input)
PD19 (I/O)/IRQ3
(input)
PD18 (I/O)/D18 (I/O)/
IRQ2 (input)
D18 (I/O)
PD18 (I/O)/D18 (I/O)/
IRQ2 (input)
PD18 (I/O)/IRQ2
(input)
PD17 (I/O)/D17 (I/O)/
IRQ1 (input)
D17 (I/O)
PD17 (I/O)/D17 (I/O)/
IRQ1 (input)
PD17 (I/O)/IRQ1
(input)
PD16 (I/O)/D16 (I/O)/
IRQ0 (input)
D16 (I/O)
PD16 (I/O)/D16 (I/O)/
IRQ0 (input)
PD16 (I/O)/IRQ0
(input)
657
Table 19.12 Port D, FP-144 Version (cont)
Extended Mode
Without ROM
(Mode 0)
Extended Mode
Without ROM
(Mode 1)
Extended Mode With
ROM (Mode 2)
Single Chip Mode
D15 (I/O)
D15 (I/O)
PD15 (I/O)/D15 (I/O)
PD15 (I/O)
D14 (I/O)
D14 (I/O)
PD14 (I/O)/D14 (I/O)
PD14 (I/O)
D13 (I/O)
D13 (I/O)
PD13 (I/O)/D13 (I/O)
PD13 (I/O)
D12 (I/O)
D12 (I/O)
PD12 (I/O)/D12 (I/O)
PD12 (I/O)
D11 (I/O)
D11 (I/O)
PD11 (I/O)/D11 (I/O)
PD11 (I/O)
D10 (I/O)
D10 (I/O)
PD10 (I/O)/D10 (I/O)
PD10 (I/O)
D9 (I/O)
D9 (I/O)
PD9 (I/O)/D9 (I/O)
PD9 (I/O)
D8 (I/O)
D8 (I/O)
PD8 (I/O)/D8 (I/O)
PD8 (I/O)
D7 (I/O)
D7 (I/O)
PD7 (I/O)/D7 (I/O)
PD7 (I/O)
D6 (I/O)
D6 (I/O)
PD6 (I/O)/D6 (I/O)
PD6 (I/O)
D5 (I/O)
D5 (I/O)
PD5 (I/O)/D5 (I/O)
PD5 (I/O)
D4 (I/O)
D4 (I/O)
PD4 (I/O)/D4 (I/O)
PD4 (I/O)
D3 (I/O)
D3 (I/O)
PD3 (I/O)/D3 (I/O)
PD3 (I/O)
D2 (I/O)
D2 (I/O)
PD2 (I/O)/D2 (I/O)
PD2 (I/O)
D1 (I/O)
D1 (I/O)
PD1 (I/O)/D1 (I/O)
PD1 (I/O)
D0 (I/O)
D0 (I/O)
PD0 (I/O)/D0 (I/O)
PD0 (I/O)
19.5.1
Register Configuration
Table 19.13 summarizes the port D register.
Table 19.13 Port D Register
Name
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
Port D data register H PDDRH
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83A0
H'FFFF83A1
8, 16, 32
Port D data register L PDDRL
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83A2
H'FFFF83A3
8, 16, 32
658
Abbreviation
19.5.2
Port D Data Register H (PDDRH)
PDDRH is a 16-bit read/write register that stores data for port D. The bits PD31DR–PD16DR
correspond to the PD31/D31/ADTRG–PD16/D16/IRQ0 pins. When the pins are used as ordinary
outputs, they will output whatever value is written in the PDDRH; when PDDRH is read, the
register value will be read regardless of the pin status. When the pins are used as ordinary inputs,
the pin status rather than the register value is read directly when PDDRH is read. When a value is
written to PDDRH, that value can be written into PDDRH, but it will not affect the pin status.
Table 19.14 shows the read/write operations of the port D data register.
PDDRH is initialized by an external power-on reset. However, PDDRH is not initialized for a
manual reset, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode.
These register settings function only for the 144-pin version. There are no pins corresponding to
this register in the 112-pin version. However, read/writes are possible.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PD31DR PD30DR PD29DR PD28DR PD27DR PD26DR PD25DR PD24DR
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD23DR PD22DR PD21DR PD20DR PD19DR PD18DR PD17DR PD16DR
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
659
19.5.3
Port D Data Register L (PDDRL)
PDDRL is a 16-bit read/write register that stores data for port D. The bits PD15DR–PD0DR
correspond to the PD15/D15–PD0/D0 pins. When the pins are used as ordinary outputs, they will
output whatever value is written in the PDDRL; when PDDRL is read, the register value will be
read regardless of the pin status. When the pins are used as ordinary inputs, the pin status rather
than the register value is read directly when PDDRL is read. When a value is written to PDDRL,
that value can be written into PDDRL, but it will not affect the pin status. Table 19.14 shows the
read/write operations of the port D data register.
PDDRL is initialized by an external power-on reset. However, PDDRL is not initialized for a
manual reset, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PD15DR PD14DR PD13DR PD12DR PD11DR PD10DR PD9DR PD8DR
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PD7DR
Initial value:
R/W:
PD6DR PD5DR
PD4DR PD3DR
PD2DR
PD1DR PD0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Table 19.14 Read/Write Operation of the Port D Data Register (PDDR)
PDIOR
Pin Status
Read
Write
0
Ordinary input
Pin status
Can write to PDDR, but it has no effect on pin status
Other function
Pin status
Can write to PDDR, but it has no effect on pin status
Ordinary output
PDDR value
Value written is output by pin
Other function
PDDR value
Can write to PDDR, but it has no effect on pin status
1
660
19.6
Port E
Port E is a 16-pin input/output port, as listed in table 19.15.
Table 19.15 Port E
Extended Modes (Modes 0, 1, 2)
Single Chip Mode
PE15 (I/O)/TIOC4D (I/O)/DACK1
(output)/IRQOUT (output)
PE15 (I/O)/TIOC4D (I/O)/IRQOUT (output)
PE14 (I/O)/TIOC4C (I/O)/DACK0 (output)/AH
(output)
PE14 (I/O)/TIOC4C (I/O)
PE13 (I/O)/TIOC4B (I/O)/MRES (input)
PE13 (I/O)/TIOC4B (I/O)/MRES (input)
PE12 (I/O)/TIOC4A (I/O)
PE12 (I/O)/TIOC4A (I/O)
PE11 (I/O)/TIOC3D (I/O)
PE11 (I/O)/TIOC3D (I/O)
PE10 (I/O)/TIOC3C (I/O)
PE10 (I/O)/TIOC3C (I/O)
PE9 (I/O)/TIOC3B (I/O)
PE9 (I/O)/TIOC3B (I/O)
PE8 (I/O)/TIOC3A (I/O)
PE8 (I/O)/TIOC3A (I/O)
PE7 (I/O)/TIOC2B (I/O)
PE7 (I/O)/TIOC2B (I/O)
PE6 (I/O)/TIOC2A (I/O)
PE6 (I/O)/TIOC2A (I/O)
PE5 (I/O)/TIOC1B (I/O)
PE5 (I/O)/TIOC1B (I/O)
PE4 (I/O)/TIOC1A (I/O)
PE4 (I/O)/TIOC1A (I/O)
PE3 (I/O)/TIOC0D (I/O)/DRAK1 (output)
PE3 (I/O)/TIOC0D (I/O)
PE2 (I/O)/TIOC0C (I/O)/DREQ1 (input)
PE2 (I/O)/TIOC0C (I/O)
PE1 (I/O)/TIOC0B (I/O)/DRAK0 (output)
PE1 (I/O)/TIOC0B (I/O)
PE0 (I/O)/TIOC0A (I/O)/DREQ0 (input)
PE0 (I/O)/TIOC0A (I/O)
19.6.1
Register Configuration
Table 19.16 summarizes the port E register.
Table 19.16 Port E Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
Port E data register
PEDR
R/W
H'0000
H'FFFF83B0
H'FFFF83B1
8, 16, 32
661
19.6.2
Port E Data Register (PEDR)
PEDR is a 16-bit read/write register that stores data for port E. The bits PE15DR–PE0DR
correspond to the PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT–PE0/TIOC0A/DREQ0 pins. When the pins
are used as ordinary outputs, they will output whatever value is written in the PEDR; when PEDR
is read, the register value will be read regardless of the pin status. When the pins are used as
ordinary inputs, the pin status rather than the register value is read directly when PEDR is read.
When a value is written to PEDR, that value can be written into PEDR, but it will not affect the
pin status. Table 19.17 shows the read/write operations of the port E data register.
PEDR is initialized by a external power-on reset. However, PEDR is not initialized for a manual
reset, reset by WDT, standby mode, or sleep mode, so the previous data is retained.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PE15DR PE14DR PE13DR PE12DR PE11DR PE10DR PE9DR PE8DR
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE7DR
Initial value:
R/W:
PE6DR PE5DR
PE4DR PE3DR
PE2DR
PE1DR PE0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Table 19.17 Read/Write Operation of the Port E Data Register (PEDR)
PEIOR
Pin Status
Read
Write
0
Ordinary input
Pin status
Can write to PEDR, but it has no effect on pin status
Other function
Pin status
Can write to PEDR, but it has no effect on pin status
Ordinary output
PEDR value
Value written is output by pin
Other function
PEDR value
Can write to PEDR, but it has no effect on pin status
1
662
19.7
Port F
Port F is an 8-pin input port. All modes are configured in the following way:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PF7 (input)/AN7 (input)
PF6 (input)/AN6 (input)
PF5 (input)/AN5 (input)
PF4 (input)/AN4 (input)
PF3 (input)/AN3 (input)
PF2 (input)/AN2 (input)
PF1 (input)/AN1 (input)
PF0 (input)/AN0 (input)
19.7.1
Register Configuration
Table 19.18 summarizes the port F register.
Table 19.18 Port F Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
Port F data register
PFDR
R
External pin
dependent
H'FFFF83B3
8
19.7.2
Port F Data Register (PFDR)
PFDR is an 8-bit read-only register that stores data for port F. The bits PF7DR–PF0DR
correspond to the PF7/AN7–PF0/AN0 pins. There are no bits 15–8, so always access as eight bits.
Any value written into these bits is ignored, and there is no effect on the status of the pins. When
any of the bits are read, the pin status rather than the bit value is read directly. However, when an
A/D converter analog input is being sampled, values of 1 are read out. Table 19.19 shows the
read/write operations of the port F data register.
PFDR is not initialized by power-on resets, manual resets, standby mode, or sleep mode (the bits
always reflect the pin status).
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PF7DR
PF6DR
PF5DR
PF4DR
PF3DR
PF2DR
PF1DR
PF0DR
Initial value:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Initial values are dependent on the status of the pins at the time of the reads.
663
Table 19.19 Read/Write Operation of the Port F Data Register (PFDR)
Pin I/O
Pin Function
Read
Write
Input
Ordinary
Pin status is read
Ignored (no effect on pin status)
ANn: analog input
1 is read
Ignored (no effect on pin status)
n=7-0
664
Section 20 64/128/256kB Mask ROM
20.1
Overview
This LSI is available with 64 kbytes, 128 kbytes, or 256 kbytes of on-chip ROM. The on-chip
ROM is connected to the CPU, direct memory access controller (DMAC) and data transfer
controller (DTC) through a 32-bit data bus (figures 20.1, 20.2, and 20.3). The CPU, DMAC, and
DTC can access the on-chip ROM in 8, 16, and 32-bit widths. Data in the on-chip ROM can
always be accessed in one cycle.
Internal data bus (32 bits)
H'00000000
H'00000001
H'00000002
H'00000003
H'00000004
H'00000005
H'00000006
H'00000007
On-chip ROM
H'0000FFFC
H'0000FFFD
H'0000FFFE
H'0000FFFF
Figure 20.1 Mask ROM Block Diagram (64-kbyte Version)
665
Internal data bus (32 bits)
H'00000000
H'00000001
H'00000002
H'00000003
H'00000004
H'00000005
H'00000006
H'00000007
On-chip ROM
H'0001FFFC
H'0001FFFD
H'0001FFFE
H'0001FFFF
Figure 20.2 Mask ROM Block Diagram (128-kbyte Version)
Internal data bus (32 bits)
H'00000000
H'00000001
H'00000002
H'00000003
H'00000004
H'00000005
H'00000006
H'00000007
On-chip ROM
H'0003FFFC
H'0003FFFD
H'0003FFFE
H'0003FFFF
Figure 20.3 Mask ROM Block Diagram (256-kbyte Version)
666
The operating mode determines whether the on-chip ROM is valid or not. The operating mode is
selected using mode-setting pins MD3–MD0 as shown in table 20.1. If you are using the on-chip
ROM, select mode 2 or mode 3; if you are not, select mode 0 or 1. The on-chip ROM is allocated
to addresses H'00000000–H'0000FFFF of memory area 0 for the 64-kbyte version, H'00000000–
H'0001FFFF of memory area 0 for the 128-kbyte version and H'00000000–H'0003FFFF of
memory area 0 for the 256-kbyte version.
Table 20.1 Operation Modes and ROM
Mode Setting Pin
Operation Mode
MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 Area 0
Mode 0 (MCU mode 0)
*
*
0
0
On-chip ROM invalid, external 8-bit space (112
pin and 120 pin), external 16-bit space (144 pin)
Mode 1 (MCU mode 1)
*
*
0
1
On-chip ROM invalid, external 16-bit space (112
pin and 120 pin), external 32-bit space (144 pin)
Mode 2 (MCU mode 2)
*
*
1
0
On-chip ROM valid, external space (bus width set
with bus state controller)
Mode 3 (MCU mode 3)
*
*
1
1
On-chip ROM valid, single-chip mode
0: Low
1: High
*: Refer to section 3, Operating Modes.
667
668
Section 21 128kB PROM
21.1
Overview
This LSI has 128 kbytes of on-chip PROM.The on-chip ROM is connected to the CPU, the direct
memory access controller (DMAC) and the data transfer controller (DTC) through a 32-bit data
bus (figures 21.1). The CPU, DMAC, and DTC can access the on-chip ROM in 8, 16, and 32-bit
widths. Data in the on-chip ROM can always be accessed in one cycle.
Internal data bus (32 bits)
H'00000000
H'00000001
H'00000002
H'00000003
H'00000004
H'00000005
H'00000006
H'00000007
On-chip ROM
H'0001FFFC
H'0001FFFD
H'0001FFFE
H'0001FFFF
Figure 21.1 PROM Block Diagram
The operating mode determines whether the on-chip ROM is valid or not. The operating mode is
selected using mode-setting pins MD3–MD0 as shown in table 21.1. If you are using the on-chip
ROM, select mode 2 or mode 3; if you are not, select mode 0 or 1. The on-chip ROM is allocated
to addresses H'00000000–H'0001FFFF of memory area 0.
669
Table 21.1 Operating Modes and ROM
Mode Setting Pin
Operating Mode
MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 Area 0
Mode 0 (MCU mode 0)
*
*
0
0
On-chip ROM invalid, external 8-bit space (112 pin
and 120 pin), external 16-bit space (144 pin)
Mode 1 (MCU mode 1)
*
*
0
1
On-chip ROM invalid, external 16-bit space (112
pin and 120 pin), external 32-bit space (144 pin)
Mode 2 (MCU mode 2)
*
*
1
0
On-chip ROM valid, with an external space (bus
width setting is performed by the bus state
controller)
Mode 3 (MCU mode 3)
*
*
1
1
On-chip ROM valid, single chip mode
Mode 7 (PROM mode)
1
1
1
1
—
0: Low
1: High
*: Refer to section 3, Operating Modes.
With the PROM version, programs can be written in the same manner as with an ordinary
EPROM by setting the LSI to PROM mode and using a standard EPROM writer.
21.2
PROM Mode
21.2.1
PROM Mode Settings
When programming the on-chip PROM, set the pins as shown in figure 21.2, 21.3, or 21.4, and
perform the programming in PROM mode.
21.2.2
Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence and Memory Map
Connect the socket adapter to the SH7040 series chip as shown in figure 21.2 or 21.3. This will
allow the on-chip PROM to be programmed in the same manner as an ordinary 32-pin EPROM
(HN27C101). Figures 21.2, 21.3, and 21.4 show the correspondence between the SH7040 Series
pins and HN27C101 pins. Figure 21.5 is a memory map of the on-chip ROM.
670
EPROM socket
HN27C101
SH7042 (112-pin version)
adapter
Pin number
Pin name
Pin name Pin number
0.1 µF
84
VPP
1
RES/VPP
76
NMI
A9
26
70
PD0/D0
I/O0
13
69
PD1/D1
I/O1
14
68
PD2/D2
I/O2
15
67
PD3/D3
I/O3
17
66
PD4/D4
I/O4
18
64
PD5/D5
I/O5
19
63
PD6/D6
I/O6
20
62
PD7/D7
I/O7
21
4
PC0/A0
A0
12
5
PC1/A1
A1
11
6
PC2/A2
A2
10
7
PC3/A3
A3
9
8
PC4/A4
A4
8
9
PC5/A5
A5
7
10
PC6/A6
A6
6
11
PC7/A7
A7
5
12
PC8/A8
A8
27
25
PB3/RD1/POE1/CASL
OE
24
14
PC10/A10
A10
23
15
PC11/A11
A11
25
16
PC12/A12
A12
4
17
PC13/A13
A13
28
18
PC14/A14
A14
29
19
PC15/A15
A15
3
20
PB0/A16
A16
2
31
26
PGM
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
2 nF
22
2
CE
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
VCC
32
1
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
16
VSS
28
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
VCC
21, 37,65,77,103
VPP: PROM program
79
MD0
power supply
78
MD1
(12.5 V)
75
MD2
A16–A0: Address input
PLLVCC/AVCC
80, 100
I/O7–I/O0: Data input/
81, 82, 74
PLLCAP, PLLVSS, EXTAL
output
3, 23, 27, 33, 39, 55,
OE: Output enable
VSS
61, 71, 90, 101, 109
PGM: Program enable
100 Ω
91–96,
CE: Chip enable
PF0/AN0–PF7/AN7
98, 99
97
AVSS
73
MD3
0.1 µF
Figure 21.2 SH7042 Pin and HN27C101 Pin Correspondence (112-Pin Version)
671
SH7042 (120-pin version)
Pin number
EPROM socket
adapter
Pin name
0.1 µF
HN27C101
Pin name
Pin number
Vpp
1
NMI
A9
26
75
PD0/D0
I/O0
13
74
PD1/D1
I/O1
14
73
PD2/D2
I/O2
15
72
PD3/D3
I/O3
17
71
PD4/D4
I/O4
18
69
PD5/D5
I/O5
19
68
PD6/D6
I/O6
20
67
PD7/D7
I/O7
21
5
PC0/A0
A0
12
6
PC1/A1
A1
11
7
PC2/A2
A2
10
8
PC3/A3
A3
9
9
PC4/A4
A4
8
10
PC5/A5
A5
7
11
PC6/A6
A6
6
12
PC7/A7
A7
5
13
PC8/A8
A8
27
26
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
OE
24
15
PC10/A10
A10
23
16
PC11/A11
A11
25
17
PC12/A12
A12
4
18
PC13/A13
A13
28
19
PC14/A14
A14
29
20
PC15/A15
A15
3
21
PB0/A16
A16
2
27
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
PGM
31
3
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
CE
22
2
PE14/TIOC4C/DACK0/AH
Vcc
32
29
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
Vss
16
89
RES/Vpp
81
2 nF
22, 40, 70, 82, 111
VCC
84
MD0
83
MD1
80
MD2
85, 107
PLLVCC, AVCC
86, 87, 79
Vpp: PROM program
power supply
(12.5 V)
A16 to A0: Address input
I/O7 to I/O0: Data input/
output
OE: Output enable
PGM: Program enable
CE: Chip enable
PLLCAP, PLLVSS, EXTAL
4, 24, 28, 36, 42
VSS
58, 66, 76, 97, 108, 117
98 to 103
PF0/AN0 to PF5/AN5
105 to 106
PF6/AN6 to PF7/AN7
104
AVSS
78
MD3
100 Ω
0.1 µF
Figure 21.3 SH7042 Pin and HN27C101 Pin Correspondence (120-Pin Version)
672
SH7043 (144-pin version)
Pin number
108
98
92
91
90
89
88
86
84
83
7
8
9
10
11
13
15
16
17
32
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
34
5
2
36
12, 26, 40, 63, 77,
85, 99, 112, 135
103
102
97
104, 128, 127
105, 106, 96
6, 14, 28, 35, 42, 55, 61,
71, 79, 87, 93, 117, 129,
141
118–123, 125, 126
124
95
EPROM socket
HN27C101
adapter
Pin name
Pin name Pin number
0.1 µF
VPP
1
RES/VPP
A9
26
NMI
I/O0
13
PD0/D0
I/O1
14
PD1/D1
I/O2
15
PD2/D2
I/O3
17
PD3/D3
I/O4
18
PD4/D4
I/O5
19
PD5/D5
I/O6
20
PD6/D6
I/O7
21
PD7/D7
A0
12
PC0/A0
A1
11
PC1/A1
A2
10
PC2/A2
A3
9
PC3/A3
A4
8
PC4/A4
A5
7
PC5/A5
A6
6
PC6/A6
A7
5
PC7/A7
A8
PC8/A8
27
PB3/IRQ1/POE1/CASL
OE
24
PC10/A10
A10
23
PC11/A11
A11
25
PC12/A12
A12
4
PC13/A13
A13
28
PC14/A14
A14
29
PC15/A15
A15
3
PB0/A16
A16
2
31
PGM
PB4/IRQ2/POE2/CASH
2 nF
22
CE
PE15/TIOC4D/DACK1/IRQOUT
VCC
32
PE14/TIOC4D/DACK0/AH
VSS
16
PB5/IRQ3/POE3/RDWR
VCC
MD0
MD1
MD2
PLLVCC, AVCC, AVref
PLLCAP, PLLVSS, EXTAL
VSS
PF0/AN0–PF7/AN7
AVSS
MD3
VPP: PROM program
power supply
(12.5 V)
A16–A0: Address input
I/O7–I/O0: Data input/
output
OE: Output enable
PGM: Program enable
100 Ω
CE: Chip enable
0.1 µF
Figure 21.4 SH7043 Pin and HN27C101 Pin Correspondence (144-Pin Version)
673
Address for MCU
modes 0, 1, 2, 3
Address for
PROM mode
H'00000000
H'0000
On-chip
ROM space
(area 0)
H'0001FFFF (128-kbyte version)
H'1FFFF (128-kbyte version)
Figure 21.5 On-Chip ROM Memory Map
21.3
PROM Programming
The PROM mode write/verify specifications are the same as those of the standard EPROM
HN27C101. However, because the page program format is not supported, do not set the PROM
writer to the page programming mode. PROM writers that only support page programming mode
cannot be used. When selecting a PROM writer, confirm that it supports the byte-by-byte highspeed, high-reliability programming format.
21.3.1
Programming Mode Selection
There are two on-chip PROM programming modes: write and verify (reads and confirms written
data). The mode is selected by using the pins (table 21.2).
Table 21.2 PROM Programming Mode Selection
Pin
Mode
Write
CE
OE
PGM
VPP
VCC
I/O7–I/O0
A16–A0
0
1
0
VPP
VCC
Data input
Verify
0
0
1
Data output
Address
input
Programming
Prohibited
0
0
0
0
1
1
High
impedance
1
0
0
1
1
1
Note: 0: low level, 1: high level, V PP : VPP level, VCC: VCC level.
674
21.3.2
Write/Verify and Electrical Characteristics
Write/Verify: Writing and verification can be done using an efficient high speed, high reliability
programming format. This format allows data writing that is both fast and reliable without
applying voltage stress to the device. Figure 21.6 shows the basic flow of the high speed, high
reliability programming format.
675
< Preliminary >
Start
Set EPROM writer to
write/verify mode
(VCC = 6.0 V ± 0.25 V,
VPP = 12.5 V ± 0.3 V)
Address = 0
n=0
n+1→n
No
Yes
Data write
(tPW = 0.2 ms ± 5%)
n = 25?
No
Address + 1 →
address
Is verify
result OK?
Yes
Data write
(tOPW = 0.2n ms)
Final
address?
No
Yes
Set EPROM
writer to read mode
(VCC = 5.0 V ± 0.25 V,
VPP = VCC)
No good
VCC:
VPP:
tPW:
tOPW:
Power supply
PROM program power supply
Initial programming pulse width
Over-programming pulse width
No
All address
read results
OK?
Yes
End
Figure 21.6 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming Basic Flow
676
Electrical Characteristics: Tables 21.3 and 21.4 show the electrical characteristics for
programming. Figure 21.7 shows the timing.
Table 21.3 DC Characteristics (VCC = 6.0 V ± 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ± 0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta =
25°C ± 5°C)
Item
Pin
Symbol Min Typ Max
Input high-level
voltage
I/O7–I/O0, A16–A0,
OE, CE, PGM
VIH
2.4
Input low-level
voltage
I/O7–I/O0, A16–A0,
OE, CE, PGM
VIL
Output high-level
voltage
I/O7–I/O0
Output low-level
voltage
Input leak current
Measurement
Unit Conditions
VCC + 0.3
V
–0.3 —
0.8
V
VOH
2.4
—
—
V
I OH = –200 µA
I/O7–I/O0
VOL
—
—
0.45
V
I OL = 1.6 mA
I/O7–I/O0, A16–A0,
OE, CE, PGM
| ILI |
—
—
2
µA
VIN = 5.25 V/0.5 V
VCC current
I CC
—
—
80
mA
VPP current
I PP
—
—
80
mA
—
677
Table 21.4 AC Characteristics (VCC = 6.0 V ± 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ± 0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta =
25°C ± 5°C)
Typ
Max Unit
Measurement
Conditions
2
—
—
µs
Figure 21.6 * 1
t OES
2
—
—
µs
Data setup time
t DS
2
—
—
µs
Address hold time
t AH
0
—
—
µs
Data hold time
t DH
2
—
—
µs
Data output disable time
t DF*2
—
—
130
ns
Vpp setup time
t VPS
2
—
—
µs
Item
Symbol Min
Address setup time
t AS
OE setup time
PGM pulse width during initial programming t PW
0.19 0.20
0.21 ms
PGM pulse width during over-programming t OPW * 3
0.19 —
5.25 ms
Vcc setup time
t VCS
2
—
—
µs
CE setup time
t CES
2
—
—
µs
Data output delay time
t OE
0
—
150
ns
Notes: *1 Input pulse level: 0.45 V to 2.4 V; input rise, fall times ≤ 20 ns; input timing reference
levels: 0.8 V, 2.0 V; output timing reference levels: 0.8 V, 2.0 V.
*2 t DF is defined as when the output becomes open state and referencing the output level is
no longer possible.
*3 t OPW is defined by the values noted in the flowchart (figure 21.6).
678
Write
Verify
Address
tAS
tAH
Write data
Data
VCC
tDF
tDH
tDS
VPP
Read data
VPP
VCC
tVPS
VCC + 1
VCC
tVCS
CE
tCES
PGM
tPW
tOES
tOE
(tOPW)*
OE
Note: * tOPW is defined by the values noted in the flowchart (figure 19.6).
Figure 21.7 Write/Verify Timing
21.3.3
Cautions on Writing
1. Writes must always be done with the established voltage and timing. The write voltage
(programming voltage) VPP is 12.5 V (when the EPROM writer is set for the HN27C101
Hitachi specifications, VPP becomes 12.5 V). Devices will sometimes be destroyed if a voltage
higher than the rated one is applied. Pay particular attention to such phenomena as EPROM
writer overshoot.
2. Always confirm that the indices of the EPROM writer socket, socket adapter, and device are in
agreement before programming. Devices will sometimes be destroyed due to excessive current
flow if these are not connected in the proper locations.
3. Do not touch the socket adapter or device during writing. Contact faults can sometimes cause
devices to be improperly written.
4. Page programming mode writes are not possible. Always set to byte programming mode.
679
5. Terminate the writing if a write malfunction occurs in consecutive addresses. In such cases,
check for problems in the EPROM writer and/or socket adapter. There are some cases where
write/verify will not be possible if using an EPROM writer with a high impedance power
supply system.
6. Use a EPROM writer that conforms to the socket adapter supported by this LSI.
21.3.4
Post-Write Reliability
High temperature biasing (or burn-in) of devices is recommended after writing in order to improve
the data retention characteristics. High temperature biasing is a method of screening that
eliminates parts with faulty initial data retention by on-chip PROM memory cells within a short
period of time. Figure 21.8 shows the flow from the on-chip PROM programming including
screening to the installation of the device on a board.
Program write/verify
Figure 21.5 (flowchart)
Unpowered hightemperature bias
(125–150°C, 24–48 hours)
Data read out and verify
(VCC = 5.0 V)
Installation on board
Figure 21.8 Screening Flow
If there are any abnormalities in program write/verify or program read-out verification after high
temperature biasing, please contact a Renesas Technology technical representative.
680
Section 22 256kB Flash Memory (F-ZTAT)
22.1
Features
This LSI has 256 kbytes of on-chip flash memory. The features of the flash memory are
summarized below.
• Four flash memory operating modes
 Program mode
 Erase mode
 Program-verify mode
 Erase-verify mode
• Programming/erase methods
The flash memory is programmed 32 bytes at a time. Block erase (in single-block units) can be
performed. Block erasing can be performed as required on 1 kbyte, 28 kbyte, and 32 kbyte
blocks.
• Programming/erase times
The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 32-byte programming,
equivalent to 300 µs (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block.
• Reprogramming capability
The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times.
• On-board programming modes
There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board:
•
•
•
•
 Boot mode
 User program mode
Automatic bit rate adjustment
With data transfer in boot mode, this LSI’s bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match the
transfer bit rate of the host.
Flash memory emulation in RAM
Flash memory programming can be emulated in real time by overlapping a part of RAM onto
flash memory.
Protect modes
There are two protect modes, hardware and software, which allow protected status to be
designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations
Programmer mode
Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer,
as well as in on-board programming mode.
681
22.2
Overview
22.2.1
Block Diagram
Internal address bus
Module bus
Internal data bus (32-bit)
FLMCR1
FLMCR2
EBR1
Bus interface/controller
Operation
mode
EBR2
RAMER
Flash memory
(256kB)
Legend
FLMCR1: Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR2: Flash memory control register 2
EBR1 : Block specification register 1
EBR2 : Block specification register 2
RAMER : RAM emulation register
Figure 22.1 Flash Memory Block Diagram
682
FWP pin
Mode pins
22.2.2
Mode Transition Diagram
When the mode pins and the FWP pin are set in the reset state and a reset start is executed, the
microcomputer enters one of the operating modes shown in figure 22.2. In user mode, flash
memory can be read but not programmed or erased.
Flash memory can be programmed and erased in boot mode, user program mode, and programmer
mode.
Reset state
=0
0
RES
*2
RES=0
0
S=
*1
RES=0
MD1=0, FWP=0
User
program mode
RE
FWP=1
M
FWP=0
D1
=1
,F
User mode
=1
WP
1, F
1=
MD
W
P=
*1
Boot mode
On-board programming mode
Programmer
mode
Notes: Execute transition between the user mode
and user program mode while the CPU is
not programming or erasing the flash memory.
*1 RAM emulation permitted
*2 MD0=1, MD1=0, MD2=1, MD3=1
Figure 22.2 Flash Memory Mode Transitions
683
22.2.3
Onboard Program Mode
Boot mode
1. Initial state
The old program version or data remains written
in the flash memory. The user should prepare the
programming control program and new
application program beforehand in the host.
2. Programming control program transfer
When boot mode is entered, the boot program in
the LSI (originally incorporated in the chip) is
started and the programming control program in
the host is transferred to RAM via SCI
communication. The boot program required for
flash memory erasing is automatically transferred
to the RAM boot program area.
;;
;;
;; ;;
HOST
HOST
Program
New application
program
New application
program
LSI
LSI
SCI1
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
Flash memory
Application
version
(old version)
Application
version
(old version)
3. Initializing the flash memory
To initialize (to H'FF) the flash memory, execute
the erase program located in the boot program
area (within RAM). During the boot mode, the
entire flash memory is erased, regardless of blocks.
SCI1
Boot program
RAM
Program
Boot program area
4. Writing the new application program
Execute the program transferred to RAM from the
host and write the new application program located
at the transfer destination to the flash memory.
;;
;; ;;
;
HOST
HOST
New application
program
LSI
LSI
Boot program
Flash memory
SCI1
RAM
Flash memory
Program
Erasing the
flash memory
SCI1
Boot program
RAM
Program
Boot program area
New application
program
Boot program area
Program execution state
Figure 22.3 Boot Mode
684
User program mode
1. Initial state
The FWP assessment program that confirms that
user program mode has been entered, and the
program that will transfer the programming/erase
control program from flash memory to on-chip
RAM should be written into the flash memory by
the user beforehand. The programming/erase
control program should be prepared in the host
or in the flash memory.
2. Programming/erase control program transfer
When user program mode is entered, user
software confirms this fact, executes transfer
program in the flash memory, and transfers the
programming/erase control program to RAM.
HOST
HOST
Programming/erase
control program
New application
program
New application
program
LSI
;;
LSI
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
Flash memory
FWP verify program
Transfer program
RAM
Programming
control program
FWP verify program
Transfer program
Application program
(old version)
SCI
Boot program
Application program
(old version)
3. Initializing the flash memory
Execute the Programming/erase program in RAM to
initialize (to H'FF) the flash memory. Erase is executed
in block units, but cannot be executed in byte units.
4. Writing new application program
Next, the new application program in the host is
written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do
not write to unerased blocks.
HOST
HOST
New application
program
LSI
;;; ;;;
;
LSI
SCI
Boot program
SCI
Boot program
Flash memory
RAM
<Flash memory>
RAM
FWP verify program
Transfer program
Programming
control program
FWP verify program
Transfer program
Programming
control program
Flash memory
erase
New application
program
Program execution state
Figure 22.4 User Program Mode
685
22.2.4
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
Emulation should be performed in user mode or user program mode. When the emulation block
set in RAMER is accessed while the emulation function is being executed, data written in the
overlap RAM is read.
• User Mode
• User Program Mode
SCI
Flash memory
RAM
Application program
Overlap RAM (Emulation is executed
using data written to RAM)
Emulation block
Figure 22.5 Emulation
When overlap RAM data is confirmed, the RAMS bit is cleared, RAM overlap is released, and
writes should actually be performed to the flash memory.
When the programming control program is transferred to RAM, ensure that the transfer
destination and the overlap RAM do not overlap, as this will cause data in the overlap RAM to
be rewritten.
686
• User Program Mode
SCI
Flash memory
RAM
Programming control
program execution state
Application program
Overlap RAM
(Programming data)
Programming data
Figure 22.6 Programming to the Flash Memory
22.2.5
Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Table 22.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Boot Mode
User Program Mode
Total erase
Yes
Yes
Block erase
No
Yes
Programming control program*
(2)
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Erase/erase-verify
(2) Program/program-verify
(3) Emulation
Note: * To be prepared by the user according to the recommended algorithm.
687
22.2.6
Block Configuration
The flash memory is divided into seven 32 kbyte blocks, one 28 kbyte blocks, and four 1 kbyte
blocks.
Address H'00000
32kbyte
32kbyte
32kbyte
256kbyte
32kbyte
32kbyte
32kbyte
32kbyte
28kbyte
Address H'3FFFF
1kbyte
1kbyte
1kbyte
1kbyte
Figure 22.7 Block Configuration
688
22.3
Pin Configuration
The flash memory is controlled by the pins shown in table 22.2.
Table 22.2 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation I/O
Function
Power-on reset
RES
Input
Power-on reset
Flash write protect
FWP
Input
Flash program/erase protection by hardware
Mode 3
MD3
Input
Set operation mode of LSI
Mode 2
MD2
Input
Set operation mode of LSI
Mode 1
MD1
Input
Set operation mode of LSI
Mode 0
MD0
Input
Set operation mode of LSI
Transmit data
TxD1
Output
Serial send data output
Receive data
RxD1
Input
Serial receive data input
22.4
Register Configuration
Registers that control the flash memory when the on-chip flash memory is valid are shown in table
22.3.
Table 22.3 Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1 R/W*1
Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2 R/W*1
Erase block register 1
EBR1
R/W*1
Erase block register 2
EBR2
R/W*1
RAM emulation register
RAMER
R/W
Initial Value
H'00* 2
Address
Access Size
H'FFFF8580 8
H'00* 3
H'00* 3
H'FFFF8581 8
H'00* 3
H'FFFF8583 8
H'0000
H'FFFF8628 8, 16, 32
H'FFFF8582 8
Notes: 1. FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are 8-bit registers, and RAMER is a 16-bit
register.
2. Only byte accesses are valid for FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2, the access
requiring 3 cycles. Three cycles are required for a byte or word access to RAMER, and
6 cycles for a longword access.
3. When a longword write is performed on RAMER, 0 must always be written to the lower
word (address H'FFFF8630). Operation is not guaranteed if any other value is written.
*1 In modes in which the on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and
writes are invalid. Writes are also disabled when the FWE bit is set to 1 in FLMCR1.
*2 When a low level is input to the FWP pin, the initial value is H'80.
*3 When a high level is input to the FWP pin, or if a low level is input and the SWE bit in
FLMCR1 is not set, these registers are initialized to H'00.
689
22.5
Description of Registers
22.5.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify mode
or erase-verify mode for addresses H'00000–H'1FFFF is entered by setting SWE to 1 when FWE
= 1, then setting the EV1 or PV1 bit. Program mode for addresses H'00000–H'1FFFF is entered by
setting SWE to 1 when FWE = 1, then setting the PSU1 bit, and finally setting the P1 bit. Erase
mode for addresses H'00000–H'1FFFF is entered by setting SWE to 1 when FWE = 1, then setting
the ESU1 bit, and finally setting the E1 bit. FLMCR1 is initialized in the standby mode or with
power-on reset. Its initial value is H'80 when a low level is input to the FWP pin, and H'00 when a
high level is input. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'80, and writes are
invalid.
Writes to bits SWE, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, and PV1 are enabled only when FWE = 1 and SWE = 1;
writes to the E1 bit only when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU1 = 1; and writes to the P1 bit only
when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and PSU1 = 1.
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FWE
SWE
ESU1
PSU1
EV1
PV1
E1
P1
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bit 7—Flash Write Enable Bit (FWE): Displays the state of the FWP pin which sets hardware
protection against flash memory programming/erasing.
Bit 7: FWE
Description
0
When high level is input to the FWP pin (hardware-protect state)
1
When low level is input to the FWP pin
• Bit 6—Software Write Enable Bit (SWE): Enables or disables the flash memory. This bit
should be set when setting bits 5–0, FLMCR2 bits 5–0, EBR1 bits 3–0, and EBR2 bits 7–0.
Bit 6: SWE
Description
0
Writes disabled
1
Writes enabled
(Initial value)
[Setting condition] When FWE=1
• Bit 5—Erase Setup Bit 1 (ESU1): Prepares for a transition to erase mode (applicable
addresses: H'00000–H'1FFFF). Do not set the SWE, PSU1, EV1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the
same time.
690
Bit 5: ESU1
Description
0
Erase setup release (Initial value)
1
Erase setup
[Setting condition] When FWE=1 and SWE=1
• Bit 4—Program Setup Bit 1 (PSU1): Prepares for a transition to program mode (applicable
addresses: H'00000–H'1FFFFF). Do not set the SWE, ESU1, EV1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the
same time.
Bit 4: PSU1
Description
0
Program setup release (Initial value)
1
Program setup
[Setting condition] When FWE=1 and SWE=1
• Bit 3—Erase-Verify 1 (EV1): Selects erase-verify mode transition or release (applicable
addresses: H'00000–H'1FFFF). Do not set the SWE, ESU1, PSU1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the
same time.
Bit 3: EV1
Description
0
Erase verify mode release (Initial value)
1
Transition to erase verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE=1 and SWE=1
• Bit 2—Program-Verify 1 (PV1): Selects program-verify mode transition or release (applicable
addresses: H'00000–H'1FFFF). Do not set the SWE, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, E1, or P1 bit at the
same time.
Bit 2: PV1
Description
0
Program verify mode release (Initial value)
1
Transition to program verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE=1 and SWE=1
691
• Bit 1—Erase 1 (E1): Selects erase mode transition or release (applicable addresses: H'00000–
H'1FFFF). Do not set the SWE, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 1: E1
Description
0
Erase mode release (Initial value)
1
Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition] When FWE=1, SWE=1, and ESU1=1
• Bit 0—Program 1 (P1): Selects program mode transition or release (applicable addresses:
H'00000–H'1FFFF). Do not set the SWE, PSU1, ESU1, EV1, PV1, or E1 bit at the same time.
Bit 0: P1
Description
0
Program setup mode release (Initial value)
1
Program setup
[Setting condition] When FWE=1, SWE=1, and PSU1=1
22.5.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify mode
or erase-verify mode for addresses H'20000–H'3FFFF is entered by setting SWE (FLMCR1) to 1
when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, then setting the EV2 or PV2 bit. Program mode for addresses
H'20000–H'3FFFF is entered by setting SWE (FLMCR1) to 1 when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, then
setting the PSU2 bit, and finally setting the P2 bit. Erase mode for addresses H'20000–H'3FFFF is
entered by setting SWE (FLMCR1) to 1 when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, then setting the ESU2 bit,
and finally setting the E2 bit. FLMCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, in standby
mode, when a high level is input to the FWP pin, and when a low level is input to the FWP pin
and the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set (the exception is the FLER bit, which is initialized only by
a power-on reset). When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are
invalid.
Writes to bits ESU2, PSU2, EV2, and PV2 in FLMCR2 are enabled only when FWE (FLMCR1) =
1 and SWE (FLMCR1) = 1; writes to the E2 bit only when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, SWE
(FLMCR1) = 1, and ESU2 = 1; and writes to the P2 bit only when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, SWE
(FLMCR1) = 1, and PSU2 = 1.
692
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FLER
—
ESU2
PSU2
EV2
PV2
E2
P2
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bit 7—Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation
on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the
error-protection state.
Bit 7: FLER
Description
0
Flash memory is operating normally. (Initial value)
Flash memory program/erase protect (error protect) disabled
1
Indicates error during flash memory program/erase.
Flash memory program/erase protect (error protect) enabled
[Setting condition] See section 22.8.3, Error protection
• Bit 6—Reserved bit: This bit is always read as 0.
• Bit 5—Erase Setup Bit 2 (ESU2): Prepares for a transition to erase mode (applicable
addresses: H'20000–H'3FFFF). Do not set the PSU2, EV2, PV2, E2, or P2 bit at the same time.
Bit 5: ESU2
Description
0
Erase setup release (Initial value)
1
Erase setup
[Setting condition] When FWE=1 and SWE=1
• Bit 4—Program Setup Bit 2 (PSU2): Prepares for a transition to program mode (applicable
addresses: H'20000–H'3FFFF). Do not set the ESU2, EV2, PV2, E2, or P2 bit at the same time.
Bit 4: PSU2
Description
0
Program setup release (Initial value)
1
Program setup
[Setting condition] When FWE=1 and SWE=1
693
• Bit 3—Erase-Verify 2 (EV2): Selects erase-verify mode transition or release (applicable
addresses: H'20000–H'3FFFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, PV2, E2, or P2 bit at the same
time.
Bit 3: EV2
Description
0
Erase verify mode release (Initial value)
1
Transition to the erase verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE=1 and SWE=1
• Bit 2—Program-Verify 2 (PV2): Selects program-verify mode transition or release (applicable
addresses: H'20000–H'3FFFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, E2, or P2 bit at the same
time.
Bit 2: PV2
Description
0
Program verify mode release (Initial value)
1
Transition to the program verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE=1, and SWE=1
• Bit 1—Erase 2 (E2): Selects erase mode transition or release (applicable addresses: H'20000–
H'3FFFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, or P2 bit at the same time.
Bit 1: E2
Description
0
Erase mode release (Initial value)
1
Transition to the erase mode
[Setting condition] When FWE=1, SWE=1, and ESU2=1
• Bit 0—Program 2 (P2): Selects program mode transition or release (applicable addresses:
H'20000–H'3FFFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, or E2 bit at the same time.
Bit 0: P2
Description
0
Program mode release(Initial value)
1
Transition to the program mode
[Setting condition] When FWE=1, SWE=1, and PSU2=1
694
22.5.3
Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
EBR1 is an 8-bit register that specifies the flash memory erase area block by block. EBR1 is
initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and standby mode, when a high level is input to the FWP
pin, and when a low level is input to the FWP pin and the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When a
bit in EBR1 is set to 1, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected.
Only one of the bits of EBR1 and EBR2 combined can be set. Do not set more than one bit. If
more than one bit is set, writes to bits ESU1, ESU2, E1, and E2 will be invalid. When on-chip
flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid.
The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 22.4.
Bit:
22.5.4
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)
EBR2 is an 8-bit register that specifies the flash memory erase area block by block. EBR2 is
initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and standby mode, when a high level is input to the FWP
pin, and when a low level is input to the FWP pin and the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When a
bit in EBR2 is set to 1, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected.
When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid.
The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 22.4.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EB11
EB10
EB9
EB8
EB7
EB6
EB5
EB4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
695
Table 22.4 Flash Memory Erase Blocks
Block (size)
Addresses
EB0 (32kB)
H'000000–H'007FFF
EB1 (32kB)
H'008000–H'00FFFF
EB2 (32kB)
H'010000–H'017FFF
EB3 (32kB)
H'018000–H'01FFFF
EB4 (32kB)
H'020000–H'027FFF
EB5 (32kB)
H'028000–H'02FFFF
EB6 (32kB)
H'030000–H'037FFF
EB7 (28kB)
H'038000–H'03EFFF
EB8 (1kB)
H'03F000–H'03F3FF
EB9 (1kB)
H'03F400–H'03F7FF
EB10 (1kB)
H'03F800–H'03FBFF
EB11 (1kB)
H'03FC00–H'03FFFF
22.5.5
RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)
RAMER specifies the area of flash memory to be overlapped with part of RAM when emulating
real-time flash memory programming. RAMER is initialized to H'0000 by a power-on reset. It is
not initialized in software standby mode. RAMER settings should be made in user mode or user
program mode. (For details, see the description of the BSC.)
Flash memory area divisions are shown in table 22.5. To ensure correct operation of the emulation
function, the ROM for which RAM emulation is performed should not be accessed immediately
after this register has been modified. Normal execution of an access immediately after register
modification is not guaranteed.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
—
—
—
RAMS
RAM1
RAM0
Initial value:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W:
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
• Bits 15–3—Reserved bits: These bits are always read as 0.
696
• Bit 2—RAM Select (RAMS): Specifies selection or non-selection of flash memory emulation
in RAM. When RAMS = 1, all flash memory block are program/erase-protected. This bit is
ignored when the on-chip ROM is disabled.
Bit 2: RAMS
Description
0
Emulation not selected
Program/erase protect of all flash memory blocks is disabled (Initial value)
1
Emulation selected
Program/erase protect of all flash memory blocks is enabled
• Bits 1 and 0—Flash Memory Area Selection (RAM1, RAM0): These bits are used together
with bit 2 to select the flash memory area to be overlapped with RAM. (See table 22.5.)
Table 22.5 Separation of the Flash Memory Area
Addresses
Block Name
RAMS
RAM1
RAM0
H'FFF800–H'FFFBFF
RAM area 1kB
0
*
*
H'03F000–H'03F3FF
EB8 (1kB)
1
0
0
H'03F400–H'03F7FF
EB9 (1kB)
1
0
1
H'03F800–H'03FBFF
EB10(1kB)
1
1
0
H'03FC00–H'03FFFF
EB11(1kB)
1
1
1
697
22.6
On-Board Programming Mode
When pins are set to on-board programming mode and a power-on reset is executed, a transition is
made to the on-board programming state in which program/erase/verify operations can be
performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode
and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table
22.6. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 22.2.
Table 22.6 Setting On-Board Programming Modes
Mode
Boot mode
Expanded Mode
PLL Multiple FWP
MD3
MD2
MD1 MD0
×1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
Single-chip Mode
Expanded Mode
×2
Single-chip Mode
Expanded Mode
×4
Single-chip Mode
User program mode
Expanded Mode
×1
Single-chip Mode
Expanded Mode
×2
Single-chip Mode
Expanded Mode
Single-chip Mode
698
×4
0
22.6.1
Boot Mode
When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the
host beforehand. The SCI to be used is set to channel asynchronous mode.
When a reset start is executed after the LSI pins have been set to boot mode in the power-on reset
state, the boot program built into the LSI is started and the programming control program prepared
in the host is serially transmitted to the LSI via SCI channel 1. In the LSI, the programming
control program received via SCI channel 1 is written into the programming control program area
in on-chip RAM. After the transfer is completed, control branches to the start address of the
programming control program area and the programming control program execution state is
entered (flash memory programming is performed).
The transferred programming control program must therefore include coding that follows the
programming algorithm given later.
The system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 22.8, and the boot mode execution
procedure in figure 22.9.
LSI
Flash memory
Host
Write data reception
Verify data transmission
RXD1
SCI1
TXD1
On-chip RAM
Figure 22.8 System Configuration in Boot Mode
699
Start
Set pin to the boot program mode
then reset start
The host continuously sends data
(H'00) using a fixed bit rate
This LSI measures the low period
of data H'00 sent by the host
This LSI calculates the bit rate and
sets value to the bit rate register
After adjustment of the bit rate, this
LSI sends 1 byte of data H'00 to the
host as a sign of completion of adjustment
The host checks whether the sign
(H'00) indicating completion of bit
rate adjustment is received, then
transmits 1 byte of data H'55
After receiving H'55, this LSI sends
1 byte of H'AA
The host sends the byte number
(N) of the user program in sequence
of upper byte then lower byte
This LSI sends the received byte
number to the host as verify data
(echo back)
n=1
The host transmits the user program
in sequence using byte units
This LSI sends the received
program to the host as verify data
(echo back)
n+1→n
The received user program is
transferred to the on-chip RAM
n=N?
No
Yes
Transmission complete
Data of the flash memory is
checked. All data are erased if
data already exists
After confirming that all data of the
flash memory have been erased,
this LSI sends 1 byte of H'AA to the host
The write control program transferred
to the on-chip RAM is executed
Note: If a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one H'FF byte is
transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and subsequent operations
are halted.
Figure 22.9 Boot Mode Execution Procedure
700
Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment
Start
Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data)
Stop
Bit
High period of
more than 1 bit
Figure 22.10 Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment
When boot mode is initiated, the LSI measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI
communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The SCI transmit/receive
format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. The LSI calculates the bit rate of
the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to the
host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end
indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the LSI. If reception
cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations.
Depending on the host’s transmission bit rate and the LSI’s system clock frequency, there will be
a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the LSI. To ensure correct SCI operation, the
host's transfer bit rate should be set to 9,600 or 4,800 bps.
Table 22.7 shows host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic
adjustment of the LSI bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this system
clock range.
Table 22.7 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is
Possible
Host Bit Rate
System Clock Frequency for which Automatic Adjustment
of LSI Bit Rate is Possible
9,600 bps
8 to 28.7 MHz
4,800 bps
4 to 20 MHz
701
On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the RAM area is divided into an
area used by the boot program and an area to which the programming control program is
transferred via the SCI, as shown in figure 22.11. The boot program area cannot be used until the
execution state in boot mode switches to the programming control program transferred from the
host.
H'FFFFF000
Programming control
program area (2k bytes)
H'FFFFF800
Boot program area
(2k bytes)
H'FFFFFFFF
Figure 22.11 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
Note: The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for
the programming control program transferred to RAM. Note also that the boot program
remains in this area of the on-chip RAM even after control branches to the programming
control program.
702
22.6.2
User Program Mode
After setting FWP, the user should branch to, and execute, the previously prepared
programming/erase control program.
As the flash memory itself cannot be read while flash memory programming/erasing is being
executed, the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip
RAM or external memory.
Use the following procedure (figure 22.12) to execute the programming control program that
writes to flash memory (when transferred to RAM).
1
Write FWP assessment program
and transfer program
2
FWP = 1
(user program mode)
3
Transfer programming/erase
control program to RAM
4
Execute programming/
erase control program in RAM
(flash memory rewriting)
5
Execute user application
program
Figure 22.12 User Program Mode Execution Procedure
Notes: 1. When programming and erasing, start the watchdog timer so that measures can be
taken to prevent program runaway, etc. Memory cells may not operate normally if
overprogrammed or overerased due to program runaway.
2. If an address at which a flash memory register resides is read in the mask ROM or
ZTAT version, the value will be undefined. When a flash memory version program is
used in the mask ROM or ZTAT version, the state of the FWP pin cannot be
determined. A modification must therefore be made to prevent operation of the flash
memory rewrite program.
703
22.7
Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
A software method, using the CPU, is employed to program and erase flash memory in the onboard programming modes. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase
mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. Transitions to these modes are made by
setting the PSU1, ESU1, P1, E1, PV1, and EV1 bits in FLMCR1 for addresses H'00000–H'1FFFF,
or the PSU2, ESU2, P2, E2, PV2, and EV2 bits in FLMCR2 for addresses H'20000–H'3FFFF.
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program
(programming control program) that controls flash memory programming/erasing should be
located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory.
Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1,
E1, and P1 bits in FLMCR1, or the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, E2, and P2 bits in
FLMCR2, is executed by a program in flash memory.
2. When programming or erasing, set FWP to low level (programming/erasing will not be
executed if FWP is set to high level).
3. Programming should be performed in the erased state. Do not perform additional
programming on previously programmed addresses.
4. Do not program addresses H'00000–H'1FFFF and H'20000–H'3FFFF simultaneously.
Operation is not guaranteed if this is done.
22.7.1
Program Mode (n = 1 for Addresses H'0000–H'1FFFF, n = 2 for Addresses
H'20000–H'3FFFF)
When writing data or programs to flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown in
figure 22.13 should be followed. Performing program operations according to this flowchart will
enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage
stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 32 bytes at a
time.
Following the elapse of 10 µs or more after the SWE bit is set to 1 in flash memory control
register 1 (FLMCR1), 32-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data
area, and the 32-byte data in the program data area in RAM is written consecutively to the
program address (the lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60,
H'80, H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0). Thirty-two consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The
program address and program data are latched in the flash memory. A 32-byte data transfer must
be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the
extra addresses.
Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway, etc.
Set a minimum value of 300 µs or more as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for
program mode (program setup) is carried out by setting the PSUn bit in FLMCRn, and after the
elapse of 50 µs or more, the operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the Pn bit in
704
FLMCRn. The time during which the Pn bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Set
200 µs as the time for one programming operation.
22.7.2
Program-Verify Mode (n = 1 for Addresses H'0000–H'1FFFF, n = 2 for Addresses
H'20000–H'3FFFF)
In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been
correctly written in the flash memory.
After the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the Pn bit in
FLMCRn is released, then the PSUn bit is released at least 10 µs later). The watchdog timer is
released after the elapse of 10 µs or more, and the operating mode is switched to program-verify
mode by setting the PVn bit in FLMCRn. Before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy write
of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed
after the elapse of 4 µs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in
32-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least 2 µs after the dummy write
before performing this read operation. Next, the written data is compared with the verify data, and
reprogram data is computed (see figure 22.13) and transferred to the reprogram data area. After 32
bytes of data have been verified, exit program-verify mode, wait for at least 4 µs, then release the
SWE bit in FLMCR1. If reprogramming is necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the
program/program-verify sequence as before. However, ensure that the program/program-verify
sequence is not repeated more than 1,000 times on the same bits.
705
Start
Perform programming in the erased state.
Do not perform additional programming
on previously programmed addresses.
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 10 µs
*5
Store 32-byte program data in
reprogram data area
*4
n=1
m=0
Write 32-byte data in reprogram data area
in RAM to flash memory consecutively
*1
Enable WDT
Set PSU1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 50 µs
*5
Set P1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 200 µs
Start of programming
*5
Clear P1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 10 µs
End of programming
*5
Clear PSU1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 10 µs
*5
Disable WDT
Set PV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 4 µs
*5
n←n+1
Dummy write of H'FF to verify address
Wait 2 µs
RAM
*5
Read verify data
Program data storage
area (32 bytes)
Verify
Increment address
*2
*3
Program data = verify data?
NG
m=1
OK
Reprogram data storage
area (32 bytes)
NG
Reprogram data computation
*3
Transfer reprogram data to reprogram
data area
*4
End of 32-byte
data verification?
OK
Clear PV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 4 µs
Notes: *1 Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower
8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40,
H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0. A 32-byte data transfer
must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes;
in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
*2 Verify data is read in 32-bit (longword) units.
*3 Even bits for which programming has been completed in a
32-byte programming loop will be subjected to additional
programming if they fail the subsequent verify operation.
*4 A 32-byte area for storing program data and a 32-byte area for
storing reprogram data are required in RAM. The contents of
the latter are rewritten according to the progress of the
programming operation.
*5 Make sure to set the wait times and repetitions as specified.
Programming may not complete correctly if values other than
the specified ones are used.
flag = 0?
*5
NG
OK
NG
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
End of programming
Programming failure
Note: The memory erased state is 1. Programming is performed on 0 data.
Write data (D) Verify data (V) Rewrite data (X)
Comment
Programming completed
0
0
1
Programming incomplete; reprogram
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
Still in erased state; no action
Figure 22.13 Program/Program Verify Flow
706
*5
n ≥ 1000 *5
• Sample 32-byte programming program
The wait time set values (number of loops) are for the case where f = 28.7 MHz. For other
frequencies, the set value is given by the following expression:
Wait time (µs) × f (MHz) ÷ 4
Registers Used
R4 (input):
R5 (input):
R7 (output):
R0-3, 8-13:
Program data storage address
Programming destination address
OK (normal) or NG (error)
Work registers
FLMCR1
.EQU
H’80
FLMCR2
.EQU
H’81
OK
.EQU
H’0
NG
.EQU
H’1
Wait10u
.EQU
72
Wait50u
.EQU
359
Wait4u
.EQU
29
Wait2u
.EQU
14
Wait200u
.EQU
1435
WDT_TCSR
.EQU
H’FFFF8610
WDT_573u
.EQU
H’A579
SWESET
.EQU
B’01000000
PSU1SET
.EQU
B’00010000
P1SET
.EQU
B’00000001
P1CLEAR
.EQU
B’11111110
PSU1CLEAR
.EQU
B’11101111
PVSET
.EQU
B’00000100
PVCLEAR
.EQU
B’11111011
SWECLEAR
.EQU
B’10111111
MAXVerify
.EQU
1000
.EQU
$
;
FlashProgram
MOV
#H’01,R2
; R2 work register (1)
MOV.L
#PdataBuff,R0
; Save program data to work area
MOV
R4,R12
MOV
#8,R13
COPY_LOOP
.EQU
$
707
MOV.L
@R12+,R1
MOV.L
R1,@R0
ADD.L
#4,R0
ADD.L
#-1,R13
CMP/PL
R13
BT
COPY_LOOP
MOV.L
#H’FFFF8500,R0
LDC
R0,GBR
MOV.L
#Wait10u,R3
MOV.L
#FLMCR1,R0
; Initialize R0 to FLCMR1 address
OR.B
#SWESET,@(R0,GBR)
; Set SWE
SUBC
R2,R3
; Wait 10 µs
BF
Wait_1
MOV.L
#H’20000,R9
CMP/GT
R5,R9
; Initialize GBR
;
Wait_1
;
BT
Program_Start
MOV.L
#FLMCR2,R0
Program_Start
MOV.L
.EQU
$
; Initialize n (R9) to 0
#0,R9
;
Program_loop
.EQU
$
MOV.L
#0,R10
; Initialize m (R10) to 0
MOV.L
#32,R3
; Write 32-byte data consecutively
MOV.L
#PdataBuff,R12
MOV.L
R5,R13
Write_Loop
.EQU
$
MOV.B
@R12+,R1
MOV.B
R1,@R13
ADD.L
#1,R13
ADD.L
#-1,R3
CMP/PL
R3
BT
Write_Loop
MOV.L
#WDT_TCSR,R1
; Enable WDT
MOV.W
#WDT_573u,R3
; 573.4 µs cycle
;
708
MOV.W
R3,@R1
MOV.L
#Wait50u,R3
OR.B
#PSU1SET,@(R0,GBR)
; Set PSU
SUBC
R2,R3
; Wait 50 µs
;
Wait_2
BF
;
Wait_3
MOV.L
#Wait200u,R3
OR.B
#P1SET,@(R0,GBR)
; Set P
SUBC
R2,R3
; Wait 200 µs
BF
Wait_3
MOV.L
#Wait10u,R3
;
Wait_4
AND.B
#P1CLEAR,@(R0,GBR)
; Clear P
SUBC
R2,R3
; Wait 10 µs
BF
Wait_4
MOV.L
#Wait10u,R3
AND.B
#PSU1CLEAR,@(R0,GBR)
; Clear PSU
SUBC
R2,R3
; Wait 10 µs
BF
Wait_5
MOV.L
#WDT_TCSR,R1
MOV.W
#H’A55F,R3
MOV.W
R3,@R1
MOV.L
#Wait4u,R3
OR.B
#PVSET,@(R0,GBR)
; Set PV
SUBC
R2,R3
; Wait 4 µs
BF
Wait_6
MOV.L
PdataBuff,R3
MOV.L
R4,R1
MOV.L
R5,R12
MOV.L
#8,R13
MOV.L
#H’FFFFFFFF,R11
;
Wait_5
;
; Disable WDT
;
Wait_6
;
;
709
VerifyLoop
Wait_7
.EQU
$
MOV.L
R11,@R12
; Write H'FF to verify address
MOV.L
R11,@R3
; Reprogram data RAM (PdataBuff) initialization
MOV.L
#Wait2u,R7
SUBC
R2,R7
BF
Wait_7
MOV.L
@R12+,R7
MOV.L
@R1+,R8
CMP/EQ
R7,R8
BT
Verify_OK
MOV.L
#1,R10
; Verify NG, m <- 1
XOR
R8,R7
; Program data computation
NOT
R7,R7
OR
R7,R8
MOV.L
R8,@R3
; Wait 2 µs
;
Verify_OK
.EQU
; Verify
; Store in reprogram data RAM (PdataBuff)
$
ADD.L
#4,R3
ADD.L
#-1,R13
CMP/PL
R13
BT
VerifyLoop
MOV.L
#Wait4u,R7
AND.B
#PVCLEAR,@(R0,GBR)
; Clear PV
SUBC
R2,R7
; Wait 4 µs
BF
Wait_8
CMP/PL
R10 ; if m=0 then GOTO Program_OK
BF
Program_OK
ADD
#1,R9
MOV.L
#NG,R7
; R7 <- NG (return value)
MOV.L
#MAXVerify,R12
; if n>=MAXVerify then Program NG
CMP/EQ
R9,R12
BT
Program_end
BRA
Program_loop
;
Wait_8
;
NOP
Program_OK
710
.EQU
$
MOV.L
Program_end
; R7 <- OK (return value)
#OK,R7
.EQU
$
MOV.B
#H’00,R0
MOV.B
R0,@(FLMCR1,GBR)
; Clear SWE
;
RTS
NOP
;
.ALIGN
PdataBuff
22.7.3
4
.RES.B
32
Erase Mode (n = 1 for Addresses H'0000–H'1FFFF, n = 2 for Addresses H'20000–
H'3FFFF)
When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 22.14 should be
followed.
To perform data or program erasure, set the flash memory area to be erased in erase block register
n (EBRn) at least 10 µs after setting the SWE bit to 1 in flash memory control register 1
(FLMCR1). Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overerasing in the event of program
runaway, etc. Set 5.3 µs as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for erase mode (erase
setup) is carried out by setting the ESUn bit in FLMCRn, and after the elapse of 200 µs or more,
the operating mode is switched to erase mode by setting the En bit in FLMCRn. The time during
which the En bit is set is the flash memory erase time. Set an erase time of 5 ms.
Note: With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all memory data in the memory to
be erased to all “0”) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure.
711
22.7.4
Erase-Verify Mode (n = 1 for Addresses H'00000–H'1FFFF, n = 2 for Addresses
H'20000–H'3FFFF)
In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been
correctly erased.
After the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the En bit in FLMCRn is released, then
the ESUn bit is released at least 10 µs later), the watchdog timer is released after the elapse of 10
µs or more, and the operating mode is switched to erase-verify mode by setting the EVn bit in
FLMCRn. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to
the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of 20 µs or more.
When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 32-bit units), the data at the
latched address is read. Wait at least 2 µs after the dummy write before performing this read
operation. If the read data has been erased (all “1”), a dummy write is performed to the next
address, and erase-verify is performed. If the read data is unerased, set erase mode again and
repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. However, ensure that the erase/eraseverify sequence is not repeated more than 60 times. When verification is completed, exit eraseverify mode, and wait for at least 5 µs. If erasure has been completed on all the erase blocks after
completing erase-verify operations on all these blocks, release the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If there
are any unerased blocks, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence as
before. However, ensure that the erase/erase-verify sequence is not repeated more than 60 times.
712
Start
*1
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 10 µs
*5
n=1
*3
Set EBR1(2)
Enable WDT
Set ESU1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 200 µs
*5
Start erase
Set E1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 5 ms
*5
Clear E1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Halt erase
Wait 10 µs
*5
Clear ESU1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 10 µs
*5
Disable WDT
n←n+1
Set EV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 20 µs
*5
Set block start address to verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Increment
address
Wait 2 µs
*5
Read verify data
*2
Verify data = all "1"?
NG
OK
NG
Last address of block?
OK
Clear EV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Wait 5 µs
NG
Notes: *1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*4
End of
erasing of all erase
blocks?
OK
Clear EV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
*5
Wait 5 µs
*5
*5
n ≥ 60?
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
OK
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
End of erasing
Erase failure
NG
Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all “0”) is not necessary.
Verify data is read in 32-bit (longword) units.
Set only one bit in EBR1(2). More than one bit cannot be set.
Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, each block must be erased in turn.
Make sure to set the wait times and repetitions as specified. Erasing may not complete correctly if values other
than the specified ones are used.
Figure 22.14 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single Block Erase)
713
• Sample one-block erase program
The wait time set values (number of loops) are for the case where f = 28.7 MHz. For other
frequencies, the set value is given by the following expression:
Wait time (µS) × f (MHz) ÷ 4
The WDT overflow cycle set value is for the case where f = 28.7 MHz. For other frequencies,
ensure that the overflow cycle is a minimum of 5.3 ms.
Registers Used
R5 (input):
R7 (output):
R0-3, 6, 8-9:
Memory block table pointer
OK (normal) or NG (error)
Work registers
FLMCR1
.EQU
H’80
FLMCR2
.EQU
H’81
EBR1
.EQU
H’82
EBR2
.EQU
H’83
Wait10u
.EQU
72
Wait2u
.EQU
14
Wait200u
.EQU
1435
Wait5m
.EQU
35875
Wait20u
.EQU
144
Wait5u
.EQU
36
WDT_TCSR
.EQU
H’FFFF8610
WDT_9m
.EQU
H’A57D
SWESET
.EQU
B’01000000
ESUSET
.EQU
B’00100000
ESET
.EQU
B’00000010
ECLEAR
.EQU
B’11111101
ESUCLEAR
.EQU
B’11011111
EVSET
.EQU
B’00001000
EVCLEAR
.EQU
B’11110111
SWECLEAR
.EQU
B’10111111
MAXErase
.EQU
60
.EQU
$
;
FlashErase
MOV.L
714
#H’FFFF8500,R0
LDC
R0,GBR
MOV.L
#1,R2
; Initialize GBR
;
MOV.L
#Wait10u,R3
MOV.L
#FLMCR1,R0
OR.B
#SWESET,@(R0,GBR)
; Set SWE
R2,R3
; Wait 10 µs
EWait_1 SUBC
BF
EWait_1
MOV.L
#0,R9
MOV.B
@(6,R5),R0
MOV.B
R0,@(EBR1,GBR)
MOV.B
@(7,R5),R0
MOV.B
R0,@(EBR2,GBR)
MOV.L
#FLMCR1,R0
MOV.L
@R5,R6
MOV.L
#H’020000,R7
CMP/GT
R6,R7
BT
EraseLoop
MOV.L
#FLMCR2,R0
;
; Initialize n (R9) to 0
;
; Erase memory block (EBR1) setting
; Erase memory block (EBR2) setting
;
; Erase memory block start address -> R6
;
EraseLoop
.EQU
$
MOV.L
#WDT_TCSR,R1
; Enable WDT
MOV.W
#WDT_9m,R3
; 9.2 ms cycle
MOV.W
R3,@R1
MOV.L
#Wait200u,R3
OR.B
#ESUSET,@(R0,GBR)
; Set ESU
R2,R3
; Wait 200 µs
;
EWait_2 SUBC
BF
EWait_2
MOV.L
#Wait5m,R3
OR.B
#ESET,@(R0,GBR)
; Set E
R2,R3
; Wait 5 ms
;
EWait_3 SUBC
BF
EWait_3
MOV.L
#Wait10u,R3
;
715
AND.B
EWait_4 SUBC
#ECLEAR,@(R0,GBR)
; Clear E
R2,R3
; Wait 10 µs
BF
EWait_4
MOV.L
#Wait10u,R3
;
AND.B
EWait_5 SUBC
BF
#ESUCLEAR,@(R0,GBR)
; Clear ESU
R2,R3
; Wait 10 µs
EWait_5
;
; Disable WDT
MOV.L
#WDT_TCSR,R1
MOV.W
#H’A55F,R3
MOV.W
R3,@R1
MOV.L
#Wait20u,R3
OR.B
#EVSET,@(R0,GBR)
; Set EV
R2,R3
; Wait 20 µs
;
EWait_6 SUBC
BF
EWait_6
MOV.L
@R5,R6
;
BlockVerify_1
.EQU
; Erase memory block start address -> R6
$
MOV.L
#H’FFFFFFFF,R8
MOV.L
R8,@R6
MOV.L
#Wait2u,R3
EWait_7 SUBC
; Erase-verify
; H'FF dummy write
R2,R3
BF
EWait_7
MOV.L
@R6+,R1
CMP/EQ
R8,R1
BF
BlockVerify_NG
;
MOV.L
@(8,R5),R7
CMP/EQ
R6,R7
BF
BlockVerify_1
MOV.L
#Wait5u,R3
AND.B
EWait_8 SUBC
BF
;
716
; Read verify data
; Check for last address of memory block
#EVCLEAR,@(R0,GBR)
; Clear EV
R2,R3
; Wait 5 µs
EWait_8
MOV.L
#OK,R7
; R7 <- OK (return value)
BRA
FlashErase_end
; Verify OK
NOP
;
BlockVerify_NG
.EQU
$
; Verify NG, n <- n + 1
ADD.L
#1,R9
MOV.L
#Wait5u,R3
AND.B
#EVCLEAR,@(R0,GBR)
; Clear EV
R2,R3
; Wait 5 µs
EWait_9 SUBC
BF
EWait_9
MOV.L
#MAXErase,R7
CMP/EQ
R7,R9
BF
EraseLoop
MOV.L
#NG,R7
FlashErase_end
.EQU
; If n > MAXErase then erase NG
; R7 <- NG (return value)
$
MOV.L
#FLMCR1,R0
AND.B
#SWECLEAR,@(R0,GBR)
; Clear SWE
;
RTS
NOP
;
; Memory block table
.ALIGN
Flash_BlockData
Memory block start address: EBR value
4
.EQU
$
EB0
.DATA.L H’00000000,H’00000100
EB1
.DATA.L H’00008000,H’00000200
EB2
.DATA.L H’00010000,H’00000400
EB3
.DATA.L H’00018000,H’00000800
EB4
.DATA.L H’00020000,H’00000001
EB5
.DATA.L H’00028000,H’00000002
EB6
.DATA.L H’00030000,H’00000004
EB7
.DATA.L H’00038000,H’00000008
EB8
.DATA.L H’0003F000,H’00000010
EB9
.DATA.L H’0003F400,H’00000020
EB10
.DATA.L H’0003F800,H’00000040
EB11
.DATA.L H’0003FC00,H’00000080
Dummy
.DATA.L H’00040000
717
22.8
Protection
There are two kinds of flash memory program/erase protection, hardware protection and software
protection.
22.8.1
Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly
disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control register 1
(FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), erase block register 1 (EBR1), and erase
block register 2 (EBR2). The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained in the
error-protected state. (See table 22.8.)
Table 22.8 Hardware Protection
Function
Item
Description
Program Erase
FWP pin
protection
•
Yes
Yes
In a reset (including a WDT overflow reset) and in
Yes
standby mode, FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are
initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is
entered.
In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered
unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes
after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation,
hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in
the AC Characteristics section.
Yes
Reset/standby •
protection
•
718
When a high level is input to the FWP pin, FLMCR1,
FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the
program/erase-protected state is entered.
22.8.2
Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE bit in FLMCR1, erase block register
1 (EBR1), erase block register 2 (EBR2), and the RAMS bit in the RAM emulation register
(RAMER). When software protection is in effect, setting the P1 or E1 bit in flash memory control
register 1 (FLMCR1), or the P2 or E2 bit in flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), does not
cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (See table 22.9.)
Software protect can be enabled by setting the SWE bit of FLMCR1, block specification register 1
(EBR1), block specification register 2 (EBR2) and the RAMS bit of the RAM emulation register.
During software protect, transition cannot be made to the program mode or the erase mode even
when setting P1 or E1 bits of the flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), or P2 or E2 bits of
flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2). (See table 22.9.)
Table 22.9 Software Protection
Function
Item
Description
SWE bit protection •
Clearing the SWE bit to 0 in FLMCR1 sets the
program/erase-protected state for all blocks.
Program Erase
Yes
Yes
Erase protection can be set for individual blocks by
settings in erase block register 1 (EBR1) and erase
block register 2 (EBR2).
Setting EBR1 and EBR2 to H'00 places all blocks in
the erase-protected state.
—
Yes
Setting the RAMS bit to 1 in the RAM emulation
register (RAMER) places all blocks in the
program/erase-protected state.
Yes
Yes
(Execute in on-chip RAM or external memory.)
Block specification •
protection
•
Emulation
protection
•
719
22.8.3
Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when microcomputer runaway occurs during flash memory
programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase
algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation
prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.
If the SH7051 malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit is set to 1 in
FLMCR2 and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2
settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error
occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P1, P2, E1, or E2
bit. However, PV1, PV2, EV1, and EV2 bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to
verify mode.
FLER bit setting conditions are as follows:
1. When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or instruction
fetch)
2. Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing
3. When a SLEEP instruction (including software standby) is executed during
programming/erasing
4. When the bus is released during programming/erasing
Error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Figure 22.15 shows the flash memory state transition diagram.
720
Program mode
Erase mode
Reset or standby
(hardware protection)
RES = 0
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Er
ro
r(
sta
nd
by
)
RE
S
=0
Error
RES = 0
Error protection mode
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Standby mode
Software standby
mode release
Legend
RD: Memory read possible
VF: Verify-read possible
PR: Programming possible
ER: Erase enable
RD:
VF:
PR:
ER:
FLMCR1, FLMCR2,
EBR1, EBR2
initialization state
Error protection mode
(software standby)
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1,
EBR2 initialization state
Memory read not possible
Verify-read not possible
Programming not possible
Erasing not possible
Figure 22.15 Flash Memory State Transitions
721
22.9
Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
Making a setting in the RAM emulation register (RAMER) enables part of RAM to be overlapped
onto the flash memory area so that data to be written to flash memory can be emulated in RAM in
real time. After the RAMER setting has been made, accesses can be made from the flash memory
area or the RAM area overlapping flash memory. Emulation can be performed in user mode and
user program mode. Figure 22.16 shows an example of emulation of real-time flash memory
programming.
Start emulation program
Set RAMER
Write tuning data to overlap
RAM
Execute application program
No
Tuning OK?
Yes
Release RAMER
Write to flash memory emulation
block
End of emulation program
Figure 22.16 Flowchart for Flash Memory Emulation in RAM
722
H'000000
Flash memory
EB0 to 7
This area can be accessed
from both RAM and flash memory
H'03F000
EB8
H'03F400
EB9
H'03F800
EB10
H'03FC00
H'03FFFF
EB11
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFF800
H'FFFFFBFF
Figure 22.17 Example of RAM Overlap Operation
Example in which Flash Memory Block Area (EB8) is Overlapped
1. Set bits RAMS, RAM1, and RAM0 in RAMER to 1, 0, 1, to overlap part of RAM onto the
area (EB8) for which real-time programming is required.
2. Real-time programming is performed using the overlapping RAM.
3. After the program data has been confirmed, the RAMS bit is cleared, releasing RAM overlap.
4. The data written in the overlapping RAM is written into the flash memory space (EB8).
Notes: 1. When the RAMS bit is set to 1, program/erase protection is enabled for all blocks
regardless of the value of RAM1 and RAM0 (emulation protection). In this state,
setting the P1 or E1 bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), or the P2 or E2
bit in flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), will not cause a transition to
program mode or erase mode. When actually programming or erasing a flash memory
area, the RAMS bit should be cleared to 0.
2. A RAM area cannot be erased by execution of software in accordance with the erase
algorithm while flash memory emulation in RAM is being used.
723
22.10
Note on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing
In the on-board programming modes (user mode and user program mode), NMI input should be
disabled to give top priority to the program/erase operations (including RAM emulation).
22.11
Flash Memory Programmer Mode
Programs and data can be written and erased in programmer mode as well as in the on-board
programming modes. In programmer mode, flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, autoerase mode, and status read mode are supported. In auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and
status read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal
signals are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation.
In programmer mode, set the mode pins to PLL x2 mode (see table 22.10) and use a 6 MHz input
clock. The LSI will then operate at 12 MHz.
Table 22.10 shows the pin settings for programmer mode. For the pin names in programmer mode,
see section 1.3.2, Pin Arrangement by Mode).
Table 22.10 Programming Mode Pin Settings
Pin Names
Settings
Mode pin: MD3, MD2, MD1, MD0
1101 (PLL × 2)
FWE pin
High level input (in auto-program and autoerase modes)
RES pin
Power-on reset circuit
XTAL, EXTAL, PLLVcc, PLLCAP, and PLLVss pins Oscillator circuit
Note: During the programming mode, polarity of the FWP pin is inverted and becomes the FWE
(flash write enable) pin.
724
22.11.1 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagrams
Connect the socket adapter to the chip as shown in figures 22.19 and 22.20. This will enable
conversion to a 32-pin arrangement. The on-chip ROM memory map is shown in figure 22.18,
and socket adapter pin correspondence diagrams in figures 22.19 and 22.20.
Addresses in
MCU mode
Addresses in
writer mode
H'00000000
H'00000
On-chip ROM space
256 kB
H'0003FFFF
H'3FFFF
Figure 22.18 On-Chip ROM Memory Map
725
HD64F7044 (112-Pin)
Pin Name
Pin No.
FWE
77
A9
13
A16
20
A15
19
WE
44
D0
70
D1
69
D2
68
D3
67
D4
66
D5
64
D6
63
D7
62
A0
4
A1
5
A2
6
A3
7
A4
8
A5
9
A6
10
A7
11
A8
12
OE
43
A10
14
A11
15
A12
16
A13
17
A14
18
CE
42
21, 37, 46, 49, 50, 65, 73,
75, 76, 79, 100, 103
3, 23, 27, 33, 39, 55, 61, 71
78, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96,
97, 98, 99, 101, 109
26
84
72
74
80
81
82
Other than the above
Socket Adapter
(Conversion to 32-Pin
Arrangement)
VCC
VSS
A17
RES
XTAL
EXTAL
PLLVCC
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
NC(OPEN)
Power-on reset circuit
Oscillator circuit
HN28F101P (32 Pins)
Pin No.
1
26
2
3
31
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
24
23
25
4
28
29
22
32
16
30
Legend
FWE:
I/O7–I/O0:
A17–A0:
OE:
CE:
WE:
Pin Name
FWE
A9
A16
A15
WE
I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
CE
VCC
VSS
A17
Flash write enable
Data input/output
Address input
Output enable
Chip enable
Write enable
PLL circuit
Figure 22.19 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram (SH7044)
726
HD64F7045 (144-Pin)
Pin Name
Pin No.
FWE
99
A9
18
A16
25
A15
24
WE
53
D0
92
D1
91
D2
90
D3
89
D4
88
D5
86
D6
84
D7
83
A0
7
A1
8
A2
9
A3
10
A4
11
A5
13
A6
15
A7
16
A8
17
OE
52
A10
19
A11
20
A12
21
A13
22
A14
23
CE
51
12, 26, 40, 63, 77, 85, 95,
97, 98, 103, 112, 127, 128,
131, 132, 135, 136
6, 14, 28, 35, 42, 55, 61,
71, 79, 87, 93, 102,
117 to 126, 129, 141
34
108
94
96
104
105
106
Other than the above
Socket Adapter
(Conversion to 32-Pin
Arrangement)
VCC
VSS
A17
RES
XTAL
EXTAL
PLLVCC
PLLCAP
PLLVSS
NC(OPEN)
Power-on reset circuit
Oscillator circuit
HN28F101P (32 Pins)
Pin No.
1
26
2
3
31
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
24
23
25
4
28
29
22
32
16
30
Legend
FWE:
I/O7–I/O0:
A17–A0:
OE:
CE:
WE:
Pin Name
FWE
A9
A16
A15
WE
I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
CE
VCC
VSS
A17
Flash write enable
Data input/output
Address input
Output enable
Chip enable
Write enable
PLL circuit
Figure 22.20 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram (SH7045)
727
22.11.2 Programmer Mode Operation
Table 22.11 shows how the different operating modes are set when using programmer mode, and
table 22.12 lists the commands used in programmer mode. Details of each mode are given below.
• Memory Read Mode
Memory read mode supports byte reads.
• Auto-Program Mode
Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to
confirm the end of auto-programming.
• Auto-Erase Mode
Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is used
to confirm the end of auto-programming.
• Status Read Mode
Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be
confirmed by reading the I/O6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an
error occurs.
Table 22.11 Settings for Various Operating Modes In Programmer Mode
Pin names
Mode
FWE
CE
OE
WE
I/O7–0
Read
H or L
L
L
H
Data output Ain
Output disable
H or L
L
H
H
Hi-z
Ain
Command write
H or L
L
H
L
Data input
*Ain
Chip disable
H or L
H
X
X
Hi-z
Ain
A17–0
Notes: *Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode.
1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state.
2. For command writes in auto-program and auto-erase modes, input a high level to the
FWE pin.
728
Table 22.12 Commands of the Programmer Mode
First Cycle
Command Name
Number
of Cycles Mode
Second Cycle
Address Data
Mode
Address Data
Memory read mode
1+n
write
X
H'00
read
RA
Dout
Auto-program mode
129
write
X
H'40
write
WA
Din
Auto-erase mode
2
write
X
H'20
write
X
H'20
Status read mode
2
write
X
H'71
write
X
H'71
Notes: 1. In auto-program mode, 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous
128-byte write.
2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write
cycles (n).
22.11.3 Memory Read Mode
Table 22.13 AC Characteristics in Transition to Memory Read Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t nxtc
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t wep
70
ns
WE rise time
tr
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
30
ns
Notes
729
Command write
Memory read mode
Address stable
A16-0
tces
tceh
tnxtc
CE
OE
twep
tf
tr
WE
tds
tdh
I/O7-0
Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of WE.
Figure 22.21 Timing Waveforms for Memory Read after Memory Write
Table 22.14 AC Characteristics in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Command write cycle
t nxtc
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t wep
70
ns
WE rise time
tr
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
30
ns
730
Max
Unit
Notes
Memory read mode
A16-0
Other mode command write
Address stable
tnxtc
tces
tceh
CE
OE
twep
tf
tr
WE
tds
tdh
I/O7-0
Note: Do not enable WE and OE at the same time.
Figure 22.22 Timing Waveforms in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode
Table 22.15 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%,
VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Access time
Min
Max
Unit
t acc
20
µs
CE output delay time
t ce
150
ns
OE output delay time
t oe
150
ns
Output disable delay time
t df
100
ns
Data output hold time
t oh
5
Notes
ns
731
Address stable
A16-0
CE
VIL
OE
VIL
WE
VIH
Address stable
tacc
tacc
toh
toh
I/O7-0
Figure 22.23 CE and OE Enable State Read Timing Waveforms
Address stable
A16-0
Address stable
tce
tce
CE
toe
toe
OE
WE
VIH
tacc
tacc
toh
tdf
toh
I/O7-0
Figure 22.24 CE and OE Clock System Read Timing Waveforms
732
tdf
22.11.4 Auto-Program Mode
1. In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried out
by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers.
2. A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this
case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
3. The lower 8 bits of the transfer address must be H'00 or H'80. If a value other than an effective
address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be
flagged.
4. Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 22.24). Do not perform
transfer after the second cycle.
5. Do not perform a command write during a programming operation.
6. Perform one auto-program operation for a 128-byte block for each address. Characteristics are
not guaranteed for two or more additional programming operations.
7. Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking I/O6. Alternatively, status read mode
can also be used for this purpose (I/O7 status output uses the auto-program operation end
identification pin).
8. Status polling I/O6 and I/O7 pin information is retained until the next command write. As long
as the next command write has not been performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and
OE.
733
Table 22.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%,
VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t nxtc
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t wep
70
ns
Status polling start time
t wsts
1
ms
Status polling access time
t spa
Address setup time
t as
0
ns
Address hold time
t ah
60
ns
Memory write time
t write
1
Write setup time
t pns
100
ns
Write end setup time
t pnh
100
ns
WE rise time
tr
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
30
ns
150
Notes
ns
3000
ms
FWE
tpnh
A16-0
tpns
tces
tceh
tnxtc
Address
stable
tnxtc
CE
OE
tf
twep
tr
tas
tah
twsts
tspa
WE
tds
tdh
Data transfer
1 to 128byte
twrite
I/O7
Write operation complete verify signal
I/O6
Write normal complete verify signal
I/O5-0
H'40
H'00
Figure 22.25 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms
734
22.11.5 Auto-Erase Mode
1. Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing.
2. Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing..
3. Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking I/O6. Alternatively, status read mode can also
be used for this purpose (I/O7 status output uses the auto-erase operation end identification
pin).
4. Status polling I/O6 and I/O7 pin information is retained until the next command write. As long
as the next command write has not been performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and
OE.
Table 22.17 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode (Conditions: V CC = 5.0 V ±10%,
VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t nxtc
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t wep
70
ns
Status polling start time
t ests
1
ms
Status polling access time
t spa
Memory erase time
t erase
100
Erase setup time
t ens
100
ns
Erase end setup time
t enh
100
ns
WE rise time
tr
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
30
ns
150
ns
40000
ms
Notes
735
;;;;
FWE
tenh
A16-0
tens
tces
tceh
tnxtc
tnxtc
CE
OE
tf
twep
tr
tests
tspa
WE
tds
terase
tdh
I/O7
Erase complete
verify signal
I/O6
I/O5-0
Erase normal
complete
verify signal
H'20
H'20
H'00
Figure 22.26 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms
22.11.6 Status Read Mode
Table 22.18 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%,
VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Read time after command write
t std
20
µs
CE hold time
t ceh
0
ns
CE setup time
t ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t wep
70
ns
OE output delay time
t oe
150
ns
Disable delay time
t df
100
ns
CE output delay time
t ce
150
ns
WE rise time
tr
30
ns
WE fall time
tf
30
ns
736
Max
Unit
Notes
;;;;
A16-0
tces
tceh
tnxtc tces
tceh
tnxtc
tnxtc
CE
tce
OE
twep
tf
tr
twep
tf
tr
toe
WE
tds
tdh
I/O7-0
tds
H'71
tdf
tdh
H'71
Note : I/O2 and I/O3 are undefined.
Figure 22.27 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms
Table 22.19 Return Commands for the Status Read Mode
Pin Name I/O7
Attribute
I/O6
Normal
Command
end
error
identification
I/O5
I/O4
I/O3
I/O2
I/O1
I/O0
Programming error
Erase
error
—
—
ProgramEffective
ming or
address error
erase count
exceeded
Initial value 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Indications Normal
end: 0
Command
Programming
Erasing
—
—
Count
Effective
exceeded: 1 address
Abnormal
end: 1
Error: 1
Error: 1
Otherwise: 0 Error: 1
Otherwise: 0
Otherwise: 0
0
Otherwise: 0 Error: 1
Otherwise: 0
Note: D2 and D3 are undefined at present.
22.11.7 Status Polling
1. I/O7 status polling is a flag that indicates the operating status in auto-program/auto-erase
mode.
2. I/O6 status polling is a flag that indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program/auto-erase
mode.
737
Table 22.20 Status Polling Output Truth Table
Pin Name
During Internal
Operation
Abnormal End
I/O7
0
1
0
1
I/O6
0
0
1
1
I/O5–0
0
0
0
0
Normal End
22.11.8 Programmer Mode Transition Time
Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the programmer mode
setup period. After the programmer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode.
Table 22.21 Stipulated Transition Times to Command Wait State
Item
Symbol
Min
Standby release
(oscillation stabilization time)
t OSC1
10
ms
Programmer mode setup time
t bmv
10
ms
VCC hold time
t dwn
0
ms
tOSC1
tbmv
Max
Unit
Notes
Memory read
mode
Command wait state
Command
Automatic write mode Normal/abnormal
wait state
Automatic erase mode complete verify
tdwn
VCC
RES
FWE
Note : For the level of FWE input pin, set VIL when using other than the automatic write mode
and automatic erase mode.
Figure 22.28 Oscillation Stabilization Time and Boot Program Transfer Time
738
22.11.9 Cautions Concerning Memory Programming
1. When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out autoerasing before auto-programming.
2. When performing programming using PROM mode on a chip that has been
programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before
carrying out auto-programming.
Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by Renesas
Technology. For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is
recommended that auto-erasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization
(erase) level.
2. Auto-programming should be performed once only on the same address block.
Additional programming cannot be performed on previously programmed address
blocks.
739
740
Section 23 RAM
23.1
Overview
The SH7040 series has 4 kbytes of on-chip RAM. The on-chip RAM is linked to the CPU and
direct memory access controller (DMAC)/data transfer controller (DTC) with a 32-bit data bus
(figure 23.1). The CPU can access data in the on-chip RAM in 8, 16, or 32 bit widths. The DMAC
can access 8 or 16 bit widths. On-chip RAM data can always be accessed in one state, making the
RAM ideal for use as a program area, stack area, or data area, which require high-speed access.
The contents of the on-chip RAM are held in both the sleep and standby modes. Memory area 0
addresses H'FFFFF000–H'FFFFFFFF are allocated to the on-chip RAM.
Internal data bus (32 bits)
H'FFFFF000
H'FFFFF001
H'FFFFF002
H'FFFFF003
H'FFFFF004
H'FFFFF005
H'FFFFF006
H'FFFFF007
On-chip RAM
H'FFFFFFFC
H'FFFFFFFD
H'FFFFFFFE
H'FFFFFFFF
Figure 23.1 Block Diagram of RAM
23.2
Operation
The on-chip RAM is accessed by accessing addresses H'FFFFF000–H'FFFFFFFF. On-chip RAM
is also used as cache memory. There are 2 kbytes of on-chip RAM space during cache use. See
section 9, Cache Memory (CAC), for details.
741
742
Section 24 Power-Down State
24.1
Overview
In the power-down state, the CPU functions are halted. This enables a great reduction in power
consumption.
24.1.1
Power-Down States
The power-down state is effected by the following two modes:
• Sleep mode
• Standby mode
Table 24.1 describes the transition conditions for entering the modes from the program execution
state as well as the CPU and peripheral function status in each mode and the procedures for
canceling each mode.
Table 24.1 Power-Down State Conditions
State
Entering
Mode Procedure
Clock CPU
Sleep Execute SLEEP Run
instruction with
SBY bit set to 0
in SBYCR
Stand- Execute SLEEP Halt
by
instruction with
SBY bit set to 1
in SBYCR
Halt
On-Chip
Peripheral CPU
Modules Registers RAM
I/O
Ports
Canceling
Procedure
Run
Held
•
•
Held
Held
•
Interrupt
DMAC/DTC
address error
Power-on
reset
Manual reset
Held or •
high
•
impedance * 2 •
NMI interrupt
Power-on
reset
Manual reset
•
Halt
Halt* 1
Held
Held
Notes: SBYCR: standby control register. SBY: standby bit
*1 Some bits within on-chip peripheral module registers are initialized by the standby
mode; some are not. Refer to table 24.3, Register States in the Standby Mode, in
section 24.4.1, Transition to Standby Mode. Also refer to the register descriptions for
each peripheral module.
*2 The status of the I/O port in standby mode is set by the port high impedance bit (HIZ) of
the SBYCR. Refer to section 24.2, Standby Control Register (SBYCR). For pin status
other than for the I/O port, refer to Appendix C, Pin Status.
743
24.1.2
Related Register
Table 24.2 shows the register used for power-down state control.
Table 24.2 Related Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
Access Size
Standby control register
SBYCR
R/W
H'1F
H'FFFF8614
8, 16, 32
24.2
Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
The standby control register (SBYCR) is a read/write 8-bit register that sets the transition to
standby mode, and the port status in standby mode. The SBYCR is initialized to H'1F when reset.
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SBY
HIZ
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
• Bit 7—Standby (SBY): Specifies transition to the standby mode. The SBY bit cannot be set to
1 while the watchdog timer is running (when the timer enable bit (TME) of the WDT timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1). To enter the standby mode, always halt the WDT by
0 clearing the TME bit, then set the SBY bit.
Bit 7: SBY
Description
0
Executing SLEEP instruction puts the LSI into sleep mode (initial value)
1
Executing SLEEP instruction puts the LSI into standby mode
• Bit 6—Port High Impedance (HIZ): In the standby mode, this bit selects whether to set the I/O
port pin to high impedance or hold the pin status. The HIZ bit cannot be set to 1 when the TME
bit of the WDT timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1. When making the I/O port pin
status high impedance, always clear the TME bit to 0 before setting the HIZ bit.
Bit 6: HIZ
Description
0
Holds pin status while in standby mode (initial value)
1
Keeps pin at high impedance while in standby mode
• Bits 5–0—Reserved: Bit 5 always reads as 0. Always write 0 to bit 5. Bits 4–0 always read as
1. Always write 1 to these bits.
744
24.3
Sleep Mode
24.3.1
Transition to Sleep Mode
Executing the SLEEP instruction when the SBY bit of SBYCR is 0 causes a transition from the
program execution state to the sleep mode. Although the CPU halts immediately after executing
the SLEEP instruction, the contents of its internal registers remain unchanged. The on-chip
peripheral modules continue to run during the sleep mode.
24.3.2
Canceling Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is canceled by an interrupt, DMAC/DTC address error, power-on reset, or manual
reset.
Cancellation by an Interrupt: When an interrupt occurs, the sleep mode is canceled and interrupt
exception processing is executed. The sleep mode is not canceled if the interrupt cannot be
accepted because its priority level is equal to or less than the mask level set in the CPU’s status
register (SR) or if an interrupt by an on-chip peripheral module is disabled at the peripheral
module.
Cancellation by a DMAC/DTC Address Error: If a DMAC/DTC address error occurs, the sleep
mode is canceled and DMAC/DTC address error exception processing is executed.
Cancellation by a Power-On Reset: A power-on reset resulting from setting the RES pin to low
level cancels the sleep mode.
Cancellation by a Manual Reset: When the MRES pin is set to low level while the RES pin is at
high level, a manual reset occurs and the sleep mode is canceled.
24.4
Standby Mode
24.4.1
Transition to Standby Mode
To enter the standby mode, set the SBY bit to 1 in SBYCR, then execute the SLEEP instruction.
The LSI moves from the program execution state to the standby mode. In the standby mode,
power consumption is greatly reduced by halting not only the CPU, but the clock and on-chip
peripheral modules as well. CPU register contents and on-chip RAM data are held as long as the
prescribed voltages are applied. The register contents of some on-chip peripheral modules are
initialized, but some are not (table 24.3). The I/O port status can be selected as held or high
impedance by the port high impedance bit (HIZ) of the SBYCR. For pin status other than for the
I/O port, refer to Appendix C, Pin States.
745
Table 24.3 Register States in the Standby Mode
Module
Registers Initialized
Registers that
Retain Data
Registers with
Undefined Contents
Interrupt controller
(INTC)
—
All registers
—
User break controller
(UBC)
—
All registers
—
Data transfer controller All registers (excluding transfer
(DTC)
data in memory and DTDR)
—
—
Cache memory (CAC)
—
All registers
—
Bus state controller
(BSC)
—
All registers
—
—
•
Direct memory access •
controller (DMAC)
•
DMA channel control
registers 0–3 (CHCR0–
CHCR3)
DMA operation register
(DMAOR)
•
•
Multifunction timer
pulse unit (MTU)
MTU associated registers
Watchdog timer
(WDT)
•
•
POE associated
registers
Bits 7–5 (OVF, WT/IT, TME) •
of the timer control status
register (TCSR)
Reset control/status register •
(RSTCSR)
—
Bits 2–0
—
(CKS2–CKS0)
of the TCSR
Timer counter
(TCNT)
Serial communication
interface (SCI)
•
•
•
•
•
•
A/D converter (A/D)
All registers
—
—
Compare match timer
(CMT)
All registers
—
—
746
Receive data register (RDR) —
Transmit data register (TDR)
Serial mode register (SMR)
Serial control register (SCR)
Serial status register (SSR)
Bit rate register (BBR)
—
DMA source
address registers
0–3 (SAR0–
SAR3)
DMA destination
address registers
0–3 (DAR0–
DAR3)
DMA transfer
count registers
0–3 (DMATCR0–
DMATCR3)
Table 24.3 Register States in the Standby Mode (cont)
Module
Registers Initialized
Registers that
Retain Data
Registers with
Undefined Contents
Pin function controller
(PFC)
—
All registers
—
I/O port (I/O)
—
All registers
—
Power-down state
related
—
Standby control
—
register (SBYCR)
24.4.2
Canceling the Standby Mode
The standby mode is canceled by an NMI interrupt, a power-on reset, or a manual reset.
Cancellation by an NMI: Clock oscillation starts when a rising edge or falling edge (selected by
the NMI edge select bit (NMIE) of the interrupt control register (ICR) of the INTC) is detected in
the NMI signal. This clock is supplied only to the watchdog timer (WDT). A WDT overflow
occurs if the time established by the clock select bits (CKS2–CKS0) in the TCSR of the WDT
elapses before transition to the standby mode. The occurrence of this overflow is used to indicate
that the clock has stabilized, so the clock is supplied to the entire chip, the standby mode is
canceled, and NMI exception processing begins.
When canceling standby mode with NMI interrupts, set the CKS2–CKS0 bits so that the WDT
overflow period is longer than the oscillation stabilization time.
When canceling standby mode with an NMI pin set for falling edge, be sure that the NMI pin level
upon entering standby (when the clock is halted) is high level, and that the NMI pin level upon
returning from standby (when the clock starts after oscillation stabilization) is low level. When
canceling standby mode with an NMI pin set for rising edge, be sure that the NMI pin level upon
entering standby (when the clock is halted) is low level, and that the NMI pin level upon returning
from standby (when the clock starts after oscillation stabilization) is high level.
Cancellation by a Power-On Reset: A power-on reset caused by setting the RES pin to low level
cancels the standby mode.
747
24.4.3
Standby Mode Application Example
This example describes a transition to standby mode on the falling edge of an NMI signal, and a
cancellation on the rising edge of the NMI signal. The timing is shown in figure 24.1.
When the NMI pin is changed from high to low level while the NMI edge select bit (NMIE) of the
ICR is set to 0 (falling edge detection), the NMI interrupt is accepted. When the NMIE bit is set to
1 (rising edge detection) by an NMI exception service routine, the standby bit (SBY) of the
SBYCR is set to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed, standby mode is entered. Thereafter,
standby mode is canceled when the NMI pin is changed from low to high level.
Oscillator
CK
NMI
NMIE
SBY
Oscillation
settling time
NMI
Exception
exception
service
processing
routine
SBY = 1
SLEEP
instruction
Standby Oscillation
mode
start
time
WDT
time
set
NMI
exception
processing
Figure 24.1 Standby Mode NMI Timing (Application Example)
748
Section 25 Electrical Characteristics
(5V, 28.7 MHz Version)
25.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 25.1 shows the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 25.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
Rating
Unit
Power supply voltage
VCC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Programmable voltage (ZTAT version only)
VPP
–0.3 to +13.5
V
Input voltage (other than A/D ports)
Vin
–0.3 to VCC + 0.3
V
Input voltage (A/D ports)
Vin
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
V
Analog supply voltage
AVCC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Analog reference voltage (QFP-144 only)
AVref
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
V
Analog input voltage
VAN
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
V
Topr
–20 to +75*
1
°C
Programming temperature (ZTAT version only)
Twe
–20 to +75*
2
°C
Storage temperature
Tstg
–55 to +125
Operating temperature
°C
Notes: Operating the LSI in excess of the absolute maximum ratings may result in permanent
damage.
*1 Normal Products : TOPR = –40 to + 85°C for wide-temperature range products.
*2 Normal Products: Twe = –20 to +85°C for wide-temperature range products.
749
25.2
DC Characteristics
Table 25.2 DC Characteristics (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%,
AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75° C)
Item
Max
Measurement
Unit Conditions
VCC – 0.7 —
VCC + 0.3
V
—
EXTAL
VCC × 0.7 —
VCC + 0.3
V
—
A/D port
2.2
—
AVCC + 0.3 V
—
Other input pins
2.2
—
VCC + 0.3
V
—
RES, NMI, MD3– VIL
MD0, PA2, PA5,
PA6–PA9, PE0–
PE15, FWP
–0.3
—
0.5
V
—
–0.3
—
0.8
V
—
—
—
V
VT + ≥ VCC – 0.7 V (min)
Pin
Symbol Min
Input high- RES, NMI, MD3– VIH
level
MD0, PA2, PA5,
voltage
PA6–PA9, PE0–
PE15, FWP
Input lowlevel
voltage
Other input pins
+
–
Schmitt
PA2, PA5, PA6– VT – VT 0.4
trigger input PA9, PE0–PE15
voltage
Input leak
current
VT – ≤ 0.5 V (max)
RES, NMI, MD3– | Iin |
MD0, PA2, PA5,
PA6–PA9, PE0–
PE15,FWP
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 to VCC – 0.5 V
A/D port
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 to AVCC – 0.5 V
Other input pins
(except EXTAL
pin)
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 to VCC – 0.5 V
—
—
1.0
µA
Vin = 0.5 to VCC – 0.5 V
Three-state A21–A0, D31– | ITSI |
leak current D0, CS3–CS0,
(while off) RDWR, RAS,
CASxx, WRxx,
RD, ports A, B, C,
D, E
750
Typ
Table 25.2 DC Characteristics (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%,
AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C)
(cont)
Item
Pin
Symbol Min
Output
high-level
voltage
All output pins
VOH
Typ Max
Measurement
Unit Conditions
VCC – 0.5 —
—
V
I OH = –200 µA
3.5
—
—
V
I OH = –1 mA
—
—
0.4
V
I OL = 1.6 mA
—
—
1.5
V
I OL = 15 mA
—
—
80* 1
pF
NMI
—
—
50
pF
Vin = 0 V, f = 1 MHz,
Ta = 25°C
All other input
pins
—
—
20
pF
—
160 230
mA f = 28 MHz
Sleep
—
140 200
mA f = 28 MHz
Standby
—
0.01 5
µA
Ta ≤ 50°C
—
—
20
µA
Ta > 50°C
—
5
10
mA
mA QFP144 version only
Output low- All output pins
VOL
level
PE9, PE11–PE15
voltage
Input
capacitance
RES
Current
consumption
Ordinary
operation
Cin
I CC
Analog
supply
current
AI CC
AI ref
—
0.5
1*
RAM
standby
voltage
VRAM
2.0
—
—
2
V
Notes: 1. When the A/D converter is not used (including during standby), do not release the AVCC,
AVSS , and AV ref (SH7041,SH7043,SH7045 only) pins. Connect the AVCC and AVref
(SH7041,SH7043,SH7045 only) pins to VCC and the AVSS pin to VSS .
2. The current consumption is measured when V IHmin = VCC – 0.5 V, VIL max = 0.5 V, with
all output pins unloaded.
3. The ZTAT and mask versions as well as F-ZTAT and mask versions have the same
functions, and the electrical characteristics of both are within specification, but
characteristic-related performance values, operating margins, noise margins, noise
emission, etc., are different. Caution is therefore required in carrying out system design,
when switching between ZTAT and mask versions, and when switching between FZTAT and mask versions.
4. When the SH7040 chip is used for high-speed operation, the package surface
temperature rises. Appropriate measures (such as heat dissipation) to ensure overall
system reliability and safety should therefore be investigated.
*1 110pF for A mask
*2 5 mA in the A mask version, except for F-ZTAT products.
751
Table 25.3 Permitted Output Current Values (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC =
5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75° C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Output low-level permissible current (per pin)
I OL
—
—
2.0 *
mA
Output low-level permissible current (total)
∑ IOL
—
—
80
mA
Output high-level permissible current (per pin)
–I OH
—
—
2.0
mA
Output high-level permissible current (total)
∑ (–IOH)
—
—
25
mA
Notes: To assure LSI reliability, do not exceed the output values listed in this table.
* PE9, PE11–PE15 are I OL = 15 mA (max). Make sure that no more than three of these
pins exceed an I OL of 2.0 mA simultaneously.
25.3
AC Characteristics
25.3.1
Clock Timing
Table 25.4 Clock Timing (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC =
VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75° C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Figures
Operating frequency
f OP
4
28.7
MHz
25.1
Clock cycle time
t cyc
34.8
250
ns
Clock low-level pulse width
t CL
10
—
ns
Clock high-level pulse width
t CH
10
—
ns
Clock rise time
t CR
—
5
ns
Clock fall time
t CF
—
5
ns
EXTAL clock input frequency
f EX
4
10
MHz
EXTAL clock input cycle time
t EXcyc
100
250
ns
EXTAL clock low-level input pulse width
t EXL
40
—
ns
EXTAL clock high-level input pulse width t EXH
40
—
ns
EXTAL clock input rise time
t EXR
—
5
ns
EXTAL clock input fall time
t EXF
—
5
ns
Reset oscillation settling time
t OSC1
10
—
ms
Standby return clock settling time
t OSC2
10
—
ms
752
25.2
25.3
tcyc
tCL
tCH
CK
1/2VCC
1/2VCC
tCF
tCR
Figure 25.1 System Clock Timing
tEXcyc
tEXH
EXTAL
1/2VCC
VIH
tEXL
VIH
VIL
VIL
tEXF
VIH
1/2VCC
tEXR
Figure 25.2 EXTAL Clock Input Timing
CK
VCC
VCC min
tOSC2
tOSC1
RES
Figure 25.3 Oscillation Settling Time
753
25.3.2
Control Signal Timing
Table 25.5 Control Signal Timing (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%,
AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75° C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Figure
RES rise/fall
t RESr, t RESf
—
200
ns
25.4
RES pulse width
t RESW
20
—
t cyc
MRES pulse width
t MRESW
20
—
t cyc
NMI rise/fall
t NMIr, t NMIf
—
200
ns
25.5
RES setup time*
t RESS
35
—
ns
MRES setup time*
t MRESS
35
—
ns
25.4,
25.5
NMI setup time*
t NMIS
35
—
ns
IRQ7–IRQ0 setup time (edge detection)
t IRQES
35
—
ns
IRQ7–IRQ0 setup time (level detection)
t IRQLS
35
—
ns
NMI hold time
t NMIH
35
—
ns
IRQ7–IRQ0 hold time
t IRQEH
35
—
ns
IRQOUT output delay time
t IRQOD
—
35
ns
25.6
Bus request setup time
t BRQS
35
—
ns
25.7
Bus acknowledge delay time 1
t BACKD1
—
35
ns
Bus acknowledge delay time 2
t BACKD2
—
35
ns
Bus three-state delay time
t BZD
—
35
ns
25.5
Note: * The RES, MRES, NMI, BREQ, and IRQ7–IRQ0 signals are asynchronous inputs, but
when thesetup times shown here are provided, the signals are considered to have
produced changes at clock rise (for RES, MRES, BREQ) or clock fall (for NMI and IRQ7–
IRQ0). If the setup times are not provided, recognition is delayed until the next clock rise
or fall.
754
CK
tRESf
tRESr
tRESS
tRESS
VIH
RES
VIH
VIL
VIL
tRESW
tMRESS
tMRESS
VIH
MRES
VIL
VIL
tMRESW
Figure 25.4 Reset Input Timing
CK
tNMIH
tNMIr,tNMIf
tNMIS
VIH
NMI
VIL
tIRQEH
IRQ edge
tIRQES
VIH
VIL
tIRQLS
IRQ level
Figure 25.5 Interrupt Signal Input Timing
755
CK
tIRQOD
tIRQOD
IRQOUT
Figure 25.6 Interrupt Signal Output Timing
CK
tBRQS
tBRQS
BREQ
(Input)
tBACKD1
BACK
(Output)
RD, RDWR,
RAS, CASxx,
CSn, WRxx
tBZD
tBZD
A21–A0,
D31–D0
Note:
During the bus-release period of a self-refresh, RAS, CASx, and RDWR are output.
Figure 25.7 Bus Right Release Timing
756
tBACKD2
25.3.3
Bus Timing
Table 25.6 Bus Timing (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = VCC ±
10%, AVref = 4.5 V – AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = – 20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
Max Unit Figure
Address delay time
t AD
2*
CS delay time 1
t CSD1
2* 3
21
ns
t CSD2
2* 3
21
ns
t RSD1
2* 3
18
ns
Read strobe delay time 2
t RSD2
2* 3
18
ns
Read data setup time
t RDS * 4
15
—
ns
Read data hold time
t RDH
0
—
ns
t WSD1
2* 3
18
ns
Write strobe delay time 2
t WSD2
2* 3
18
ns
Write data delay time
t WDD
—
35
ns
CS delay time 2
Read strobe delay time 1
Write strobe delay time 1
3
18
ns
25.8, 25.9,
25.11–25.16,
25.19
25.8, 25.9, 25.19
25.8, 25.9,
25.11–25.16,
25.19
Write data hold time
t WDH
0
10* 2 ns
WAIT setup time
t WTS
15
—
ns
WAIT hold time
t WTH
0
—
ns
25.10, 25.15,
25.19
t RASD1
2* 3
18
ns
25.11–25.18
t RASD2
2* 3
18
ns
t CASD1
2* 3
18
ns
CAS delay time 2
t CASD2
2* 3
18
ns
Read data access time
t ACC * 1
t cyc × (n + 2) – 40
—
ns
Access time from read strobe
t OE* 1
t cyc × (n + 1.5) – 40
—
ns
Access time from column
address
t AA * 1
t cyc × (n + 2) – 40
—
ns
Access time from RAS
t RAC * 1
t cyc × (n + RCD + 2.5) – 40 —
ns
Access time from CAS
t CAC * 1
t cyc × (n + 1) – 40
—
ns
Row address hold time
t RAH
t cyc × (RCD + 0.5) – 15
—
ns
Row address setup time
t ASR*5
t cyc × 0.5–17.5
—
ns
Data input setup time
t DS
t cyc × (m + 0.5) – 25
—
ns
Data input hold time
t DH
20
—
ns
RAS delay time 1
RAS delay time 2
CAS delay time 1
25.8, 25.9
25.11–25.16
757
Table 25.7 Bus Timing (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = VCC ±
10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = – 20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
Max
Unit Figure
Write address setup time
t AS
0
—
ns
25.8–25.9
Write address hold time
t WR
5
—
ns
25.8, 25.9, 25.19
Write data hold time
t WRH
0
—
ns
18
ns
18
ns
Read/write strobe delay time 1 t RWD1
2*
3
Read/write strobe delay time 2 t RWD2
2*
3
High-speed page mode CAS
precharge time
t CP
t cyc – 25
—
ns
25.16
RAS precharge time
t RP
t cyc × (TPC + 1.5) – 15 —
ns
25.11–25.16
CAS setup time
t CSR
10
—
ns
25.17, 25.18
t AHD1
2* 3
18
ns
25.19
t AHD2
2* 3
18
ns
Multiplex address delay time
t MAD
2* 3
18
ns
Multiplex address hold time
t MAH
0
—
ns
t DACKD1
2* 3
21
ns
AH delay time 1
AH delay time 2
DACK delay time
25.11–25.16
25.8, 25.9, 25.11–
25.16, 25.19
Notes: n is the number of waits. m is 0 when the number of DRAM write cycle waits is 0, and 1
otherwise. RCD is the set value of the RCD bit in DCR. TPC is the set value of the TPC bit
in DCR.
*1 If the access time is satisfied, tRDS need not be satisfied.
*2 t WDH (max) is a reference value.
*3 The delay time Min values are reference values (typ).
*4 t RDS is a reference value.
*5 When 28.7MHz, tASR=0ns (min)
758
T1
T2
CK
tAD
A21–A0
tCSD1
tCSD2
CSn
tRSD1
tOE
tRSD2
RD
(During read)
tRDS
tACC
tRDH
D31–D0
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
tWR
WRxx
(During write)
tWRH
tAS
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
Note:
tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, CSn, and RD.
Figure 25.8 Basic Cycle (No Waits)
759
T1
Tw
T2
CK
tAD
A21–A0
tCSD1
tCSD2
CSn
tRSD1
tRSD2
tOE
RD
(During read)
tACC
tRDH
tRDS
D31–D0
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
tWR
WRxx
(During write)
tAS
tWRH
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, CSn, and RD.
Figure 25.9 Basic Cycle (Software Waits)
760
T1
Tw
Tw
Two
T2
CK
A21–A0
CSn
RD
(During read)
D31–D0
(During read)
WRxx
(During write)
D31–D0
(During write)
tWTS
tWTH
tWTS
tWTH
WAIT
DACKn
Figure 25.10 Basic Cycle (2 Software Waits + Wait due to WAIT Signal)
761
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tc2
CK
tAD
tAD
Column address
Row address
A21–A0
tRASD1
tASR
tRAH
tRASD2
RAS
tRP
tCASD1
tCASD2
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
tCAC
(During read)
tRDS
tAA
tRDH
tRAC
D31– D0
(During read)
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tCASD2
tRWD1
tRWD2
RDWR
(During write)
tDS
tDH
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD1
tRSD2
RD
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 25.11 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, No Waits, TPC = 0, RCD = 0)
762
Tp
Tr
CK
Tc1
Column address
Row address
tRASD1
tASR
Tc2
tAD
tAD
A21–A0
RAS
Tcw1
tRAH
tRASD2
tRP
tCASD1
tCASD2
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tRDS
tAA
tRDH
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tRWD1
RDWR
(During write)
tRWD2
tDS
tDH
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD1
tRSD2
RD
(During read)
WRxx
(During write)
tWSD1
tWSD2
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 25.12 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, 1 Wait, TPC = 0, RCD = 0)
763
Tp
Tpw
Tr
CK
Trw
Tc1
tAD
Tcw1
Tc2
tAD
Row address
A21–A0
tRASD1
Column address
tRASD2
tRAH
tASR
RAS
Tcw2
tRP
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tRDS
tAA
tRDH
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tCASD2
tRWD1
tRWD2
RDWR
(During write)
tDS
tWDD
D31–D0
(During write)
tDH
tWDH
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tRSD2
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 25.13 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, 2 Waits, TPC = 1, RCD = 1)
Tp
Tpw
CK
Tr
tAD
Tc1
Tcw1
tASR
Tcw3
Tc2
tAD
tRASD1
Column address
tRASD2
tRAH
tRP
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tRDS
tAA
tRDH
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tCASD2
tRWD1
RDWR
(During write)
tWDD
D31–D0
(During write)
Tcw2
Row address
A21–A0
RAS
Trw
tRWD2
tDS
tDH
tWDH
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD2
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 25.14 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, 3 Waits, TPC = 1, RCD = 1)
764
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tcw1
Tcw2
Tcwo
Tc2
CK
tAD
A21–A0
tASR
RAS
tAD
Row address
tRASD1
Column address
tRAH
tRASD2
tRP
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tAA
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tRDS
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tRWD1
RDWR
(During write)
tRDH
tRWD2
tDS
tDH
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tWTS
tWTH
tWTS
tWTH
WAIT
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tWSD1
tRSD2
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 25.15 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, 2 Waits + Wait due to WAIT Signal)
765
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tc2
Tc1
Tc2
CK
tAD
tAD
Column address
Row address
A21–A0
tRASD1
tASR
RAS
Column address
tRAH
tRASD2
tRP
tCASD1
tCASD2
CASxx
(During read)
tCASD1
tCASD2
tCP
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tAA
tRDS
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tRDH
tRDH
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tCAC
tAA
tRDS
tCASD2
tCASD1
tCASD2
tCP
tRWD1
tRWD2
tRWD1
tRWD2
RDWR
(During write)
tDS
tDH
tDS
tWDD
D31–D0
(During write)
tWDH
tDACKD1
tDH
tWDD
tWDH
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD2
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
tRSD1
tRSD2
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 25.16 DRAM Cycle (High-Speed Page Mode)
TRp
TRr1
TRr2
TRc
TRc
CK
tRASD1
RAS
tCASD1
CASxx
RDWR
Figure 25.17 CAS Before RAS Refresh (TRAS1 = 0, TRAS0 = 0)
766
tRASD2
tCSR
tCASD2
TRp
TRr1
TRr2
TRc
TRcc
CK
tRASD1
tRASD2
RAS
tCSR
tCASD1
tCASD2
CASxx
RDWR
Figure 25.18 Self Refresh
Ta1
CK
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
T1
TW
TWo
T2
tAD
A21–A0
tCSD1
tCSD2
CS3
tAHD1
tAHD2
AH
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tMAD
D15–D0
(During read)
tRSD2
tMAH
tRDS
tRDH
Address
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
tWR
tMAD
D15–D0
(During write)
tMAH
tWDD
tWDH
Address
tWTS
tWTH tWTS
tWTH
tWRH
WAIT
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, CS3, and RD.
Figure 25.19 Address Data Multiplex I/O Space Cycle (1 Software Wait + External Wait)
767
25.3.4
Direct Memory Access Controller Timing
Table 25.8 Direct Memory Access Controller Timing (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%,
AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0
V, Ta = – 20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Figure
DREQ0 and DREQ1 setup time
t DRQS
18
—
ns
25.20
DREQ0 and DREQ1 hold time
t DRQH
18
—
ns
DREQ0 and DREQ1 pulse width t DRQW
1.5
—
t cyc
25.21
DRAK output delay time
—
18
ns
25.22
t DRAKD
CK
tDRQS
DREQ0
DREQ1
Level
tDRQS
tDRQH
DREQ0
DREQ1
Edge
tDRQS
DREQ0
DREQ1
Level clear
Figure 25.20 DREQ0 and DREQ1 Input Timing (1)
768
CK
DREQ0
DREQ1
Edge
tDRQW
Figure 25.21 DREQ0 and DREQ1 Input Timing (2)
CK
tDRAKD
tDRAKD
DRAKn
Figure 25.22 DRAK Output Delay Time
769
25.3.5
Multifunction Timer Pulse Unit Timing
Table 25.9 Multifunction Timer Pulse Unit Timing (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC
= 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta
= – 20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Figure
Output compare output delay time t TOCD
—
100
ns
25.23
Input capture input setup time
t TICS
30
—
ns
Timer input setup time
t TCKS
35
—
ns
Timer clock pulse width (single
edge specification)
t TCKWH/L
1.5
—
t cyc
Timer clock pulse width (both
edges specified)
t TCKWH/L
2.5
—
t cyc
Timer clock pulse width (phase
measurement mode)
t TCKWH/L
2.5
—
t cyc
25.24
CK
tTOCD
Output
compare output
tTICS
Input
capture input
Figure 25.23 MTU I/O Timing
CK
tTCKS
tTCKS
TCLKA
to TCLKD
tTCKWL
tTCKWH
Figure 25.24 MTU Clock Input Timing
770
25.3.6
I/O Port Timing
Table 25.10 I/O Port Timing (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC =
VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = – 20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Figure
Port output data delay time
t PWD
—
100
ns
25.25
Port input hold time
t PRH
35
—
ns
Port input setup time
t PRS
35
—
ns
T1
T2
CK
tPRS
tPRH
Port (Read)
tPWD
Port (Write)
Figure 25.25 I/O Port I/O Timing
771
25.3.7
Watchdog Timer Timing
Table 25.11 Watchdog Timer Timing (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%,
AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = – 20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Figure
WDTOVF delay time
t WOVD
—
100
ns
25.26
CK
tWOVD
tWOVD
WDTOVF
Figure 25.26 Watchdog Timer Timing
772
25.3.8
Serial Communication Interface Timing
Table 25.12 Serial Communication Interface Timing (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC
= 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta
= – 20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Figure
Input clock cycle
t scyc
4
—
t cyc
25.27
Input clock cycle (clock sync)
t scyc
6
—
t cyc
Input clock pulse width
t sckw
0.4
0.6
t scyc
Input clock rise time
t sckr
—
1.5
t cyc
Input clock fall time
t sckf
—
1.5
t cyc
Transmit data delay time (clock sync) t TXD
—
100
ns
Receive data setup time (clock sync)
t RXS
100
—
ns
Receive data hold time (clock sync)
t RXH
100
—
ns
tsckr
tsckw
25.28
tsckf
SCK0, SCK1
tscyc
Figure 25.27 Input Clock Timing
tscyc
SCK0, SCK1
tTXD
TXD0, TXD1
(Transmit data)
tRXS
tRXH
RXD0, RXD1
(Receive data)
Figure 25.28 SCI I/O Timing (Clock Sync Mode)
773
25.3.9
High-speed A/D Converter Timing (excluding A mask)
Table 25.13 High-speed A/D Converter Timing (Conditions: V CC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0
V ± 10%, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = – 20
to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
External trigger input pulse width
t TRGW
2
—
—
t cyc
25.29
External trigger input start delay time
t TRGS
50
—
—
ns
A/D conversion start delay time CKS = 0
tD
1.5
1.5
1.5
t cyc
1.5
1.5
1.5
20
20
20
40
40
40
42.5
42.5
42.5
82.5
82.5
82.5
CKS = 1
Input sampling time
CKS = 0
t SPL
CKS = 1
A/D conversion time
CKS = 0
t CONV
CKS = 1
1 state
CK
tTRGW
tTRGW
ADTRG input
tTRGS
ADCR
Figure 25.29 External Trigger Input Timing
774
25.30
φ
Address
Write signal
ADST
Sampling timing
ADF
tD
tSPL
tCP
tCONV
tD
: A/D conversion start delay time
tSPL : Input sampling time
tCONV : A/D conversion time
tCP : Operation time
Figure 25.30 Analog Conversion Timing
775
25.3.10 Mid-speed Converter Timing (A mask)
Table 25.14 shows Mid-speed converter timing
Table 25.14 Mid-speed Converter Timing (Conditions:Vcc=5.0V ± 10%, AVcc=5.0V ± 10%,
AVcc=Vcc ± 10%, AVref=4.5V to Avcc, Vss=AVss=0V, Ta=-20 to ± 75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
External trigger input pulse width
t TRGW
2
—
—
t cyc
25.31
External trigger input start delay time
t TRGS
50
—
—
ns
A/D conversion start delay time CKS = 0
tD
10
—
17
t cyc
6
—
9
—
64
—
—
32
—
259
—
266
131
—
134
CKS = 1
Input sampling time
CKS = 0
t SPL
CKS = 1
A/D conversion time
CKS = 0
t CONV
CKS = 1
1 state
CK
tTRGW
tTRGW
ADTRG input
tTRGS
ADCR
Figure 25.31 External Trigger Input Timing
776
25.32
(1)
CK
(2)
Address
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
tD
t SPL
t CONV
Legend:
(1)
(2)
tD
t SPL
t CONV
: ADCSR write cycle
: ADCSR address
: A/D conversion start delay time
: Input sampling time
: A/D conversion time
Figure 25.32 Analog Conversion Timing
777
25.3.11 Measuring Conditions for AC Characteristics
• Input reference levels:
 High level: 2.2 V
 Low level: 0.8 V
• Output reference levels:
 High level: 2.0 V
 Low level: 0.8 V
IOL
LSI
output pin
DUT output
CL
V Vref
IOH
Note: CL is set with the following pins, including the total capacitance of the
measurement equipment etc:
30 pF: CK, RAS, CASxx, RDWR, CS0–CS3, AH, BREQ, BACK, DACK0,
DACK1, and IRQOUT
50 pF: A21–A0, D31–D0, RD, WRxx
70 pF: Port output and peripheral module output pins other than the above.
IOL, IOH: See table 25.3, Permitted Output Current Values.
Figure 25.33 Output Load Circuit
778
25.4
A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 25.15 A/D Converter Timing (excluding A mask) (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%,
AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 4.5 V to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0
V, Ta = – 20 to +75°C)
28.7 MHz
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Resolution
10
10
10
Bits
Conversion time (when CKS = 1) —
—
2.9
µs
Analog input capacitance
—
—
20
pF
Permitted signal source
impedance
—
—
1
kΩ
Non-linear error*
—
—
±8
LSB
Offset error*
—
—
±8
LSB
Full-scale error*
—
—
±8
LSB
Quantization error*
—
—
±0.5
LSB
Absolute error (when CKS = 1)
—
—
±15
LSB
Note: * Reference values
Table 25.16 A/D Converter Timing (A mask) (Condition: Vcc=5.0 ± 10%, AVcc=5.0 ± 10%,
AVcc=Vcc ± 10%, AVref=4.5V to AVcc, Vss=AVss=0V, Ta=-20 to +75°C)
28.7 MHz
20 MHz
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Resolution
10
10
10
10
10
10
Bits
Conversion time (when CKS=0)
—
—
9.3
—
—
13.4
µs
Analog input capacity
—
—
20
—
—
20
pF
Permission signal source
impedance
—
—
1
—
—
1
kΩ
Non-linearity error*
—
—
±3
—
—
±3
LSB
Offset error*
—
—
±3
—
—
±3
LSB
Full scale error*
—
—
±3
—
—
±3
LSB
Quantize error *
—
—
±0.5
—
—
±0.5
LSB
Absolute error
—
—
±4
—
—
±4
LSB
Note: * Reference value
779
780
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
(3.3V, 16.7 MHz Version)
26.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
Rating
Unit
Power supply voltage
VCC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Programmable voltage (ZTAT version only)
VPP
–0.3 to +13.5
V
Input voltage (other than A/D ports)
Vin
–0.3 to VCC + 0.3
V
Input voltage (A/D ports)
Vin
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
V
Analog supply voltage
AVCC
–0.3 to +7.0
V
Analog reference voltage (QFP-144 only)
AVref
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
V
Analog input voltage
VAN
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
V
Operating temperature
Topr
–20 to +75
°C
Programming temperature (ZTAT version only)
Twe
–20 to +75
°C
Storage temperature
Tstg
–55 to +125
°C
Note:
Operating the LSI in excess of the absolute maximum ratings may result in permanent
damage.
781
26.2
DC Characteristics
Table 26.2 DC Characteristics (Conditions: VCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V,
AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0*1 to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Max
Measurement
Unit Conditions
VCC × 0.9 —
VCC+ 0.3
V
EXTAL
VCC× 0.9 —
VCC+ 0.3
V
A/D port
VCC× 0.7 —
AVCC+ 0.3 V
Other input pins
VCC× 0.7 —
VCC+ 0.3
V
RES, NMI,
VIL
MD3–0, PA2,
PA5, PA6–PA9,
PA0–PE15, FWP
–0.3
—
VCC× 0.1
V
–0.3
VCC×
0.07
—
VCC× 0.2
V
—
—
V
—
—
A/D port
—
—
1.0
µA Vin= 0.5 to AVCC– 0.5V
Other input pins
(except EXTAL
pin)
—
—
1.0
µA Vin= 0.5 to VCC– 0.5V
—
—
1.0
µA Vin= 0.5 to VCC– 0.5V
Pin
Symbol
VIH
Input high- RES, NMI,
MD3–0, PA2,
level
PA5, PA6–PA9,
voltage
PA0–PE15, FWP
Input lowlevel
voltage
Other input pins
–
Schmitt
PA2, PA5, PA6– V – VT
trigger input PA9,
voltage
PE0–PE15
+
T
Input leak
current
RES, NMI, MD3–
0, PA2, PA5,
| lin |
PA6–PA9, PE0–
PE15,FWP
Three–state A21–A0, D31–
leak current D0, CS3–CS0,
(while off) RDWR, RAS,
CASxx, WRxx,
RD, Ports A, B,
C, D, E
782
| lTSl |
Min
Typ
VT + ≥ VCC× 0.9V (min)
VT – ≤ VCC× 0.2V (max)
1.0
µA Vin= 0.5 to VCC– 0.5V
Table 26.2 DC Characteristics (Conditions: VCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC
= VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0*1 to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to +75°C) (cont)
Item
Pin
Symbol Min
Output
high-level
voltage
All output pins
VOH
Typ Max
Measurement
Unit Conditions
VCC– 0.5 —
—
V
I OH = –200 µA
VCC– 1.0 —
—
V
I OH = –1mA
VOL
—
—
0.4
V
I OL = 1.6mA
Cin
—
—
80* 2
pF
Vin= 0V
NMI
—
—
50
pF
f = 1 MHz
All other input
pins
—
—
20
pF
Ta = 25°C
—
80
130
mA f = 16.7MHz
During sleep
mode
—
70
110
mA f = 16.7MHz
During standby
mode
—
0.01 5
µA
Ta ≤ 50°C
—
—
20
µA
50°C < Ta
mA f = 16.7MHz
Output low- All output pins
level
voltage
Input
capacitance
RES
Current
consumption
During normal
operations
I CC
Analog
supply
current
AI CC
—
4
8
AI ref
—
0.5
1*
RAM
standby
voltage
VRAM
2.0
—
—
3
mA QFP144 version only
V
Notes: 1. Do not release AVCC, AVSS and AVref (SH7041, SH7043 and SH7045 only) pins when not
using the A/D converter (including standby).
Connect AVCC (SH7041,SH7043,SH7045 only) and AVref (SH7041, SH7043 and
SH7045 only) pins to VCC and AVSS pin to VSS .
2. The value for consumed current is with conditions of VIHmin = VCC – 0.5V and VILmax =
0.5V, with no burden on any of the output pins.
3. The ZTAT and mask versions have the same functions, and the electrical
characteristics of both are within specification, but characteristic-related performance
values, operating margins, noise margins, noise emission, etc., are different. Caution is
therefore required in carrying out system design, and when switching between ZTAT
and mask versions.
*1 SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2 V.
*2 110pF for A mask
*3 2 mA in the A mask version of MASK products.
783
Table 26.3 Permitted Output Current Values (Conditions: VCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0*
to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0* to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to
+75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Output low-level permissible current (per pin)
I OL
—
—
2.0
mA
Output low-level permissible current (total)
∑ IOL
—
—
80
mA
Output high-level permissible current (per pin)
–I OH
—
—
2.0
mA
Output high-level permissible current (total)
∑ (–IOH)
—
—
25
mA
Notes: To assure LSI reliability, do not exceed the output values listed in this table.
* SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
26.3
AC Characteristics
26.3.1
Clock Timing
Table 26.4 Clock Timing (Conditions: VCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC ±
10%, AVref = 3.0* to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
Max
Unit
Figures
Operating frequency
f OP
4
16.7
MHz
26.1
Clock cycle time
t cyc
60
250
ns
Clock low-level pulse width
t CL
10
—
ns
Clock high-level pulse width
t CH
10
—
ns
Clock rise time
t CR
—
5
ns
Clock fall time
t CF
—
5
ns
EXTAL clock input frequency
f EX
4
10
MHz
EXTAL clock input cycle time
t EXcyc
100
250
ns
EXTAL clock low-level input pulse width
t EXL
40
—
ns
EXTAL clock high-level input pulse width
t EXH
40
—
ns
EXTAL clock input rise time
t EXR
—
5
ns
EXTAL clock input fall time
t EXF
—
5
ns
Reset oscillation settling time
t OSC1
10
—
ms
Standby return clock settling time
t OSC2
10
—
ms
Note: * SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
784
26.2
26.3
tcyc
tCL
tCH
CK
1/2VCC
1/2VCC
tCF
tCR
Figure 26.1 System Clock Timing
tEXcyc
tEXH
EXTAL
1/2VCC
VIH
tEXL
VIH
VIL
VIL
tEXF
VIH
1/2VCC
tEXR
Figure 26.2 EXTAL Clock Input Timing
CK
VCC
VCC min
tOSC2
tOSC1
RES
Figure 26.3 Oscillation Settling Time
785
26.3.2
Control Signal Timing
Table 26.5 Control Signal Timing (Conditions: VCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V,
AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0*1 to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
Max
Unit
Figure
RES rise/fall
t RESr, t RESf —
200
ns
26.4
RES pulse width
t RESW
20
—
t cyc
MRES pulse width
t MRESW
20
—
t cyc
NMI rise/fall
t NMIr, t NMIf —
200
ns
26.5
t RESS
100
—
ns
26.4
t MRESS
100
—
ns
26.5
t NMIS
100
—
ns
t IRQES
100
—
ns
t IRQLS
100
—
ns
NMI hold time
t NMIH
50
—
ns
IRQ7–IRQ0 hold time
t IRQEH
50
—
ns
IRQOUT output delay time
t IRQOD
—
50
ns
26.6
Bus request setup time
t BRQS
35
—
ns
26.7
Bus acknowledge delay time 1
t BACKD1
—
35
ns
Bus acknowledge delay time 2
t BACKD2
—
35
ns
Bus three state delay time
t BZD
—
35
ns
RES setup time*
1
MRES setup time*
1
NMI setup time (during edge detection)
IRQ7–IRQ0 setup time (edge detection) *
IRQ7–IRQ0 setup time (level detection)*
2
2
26.5
Notes: *1 SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
*2 The RES, MRES, NMI, BREQ, and IRQ7–IRQ0 signals are asynchronous inputs, but
when the setup times shown here are provided, the signals are considered to have
produced changes at clock rise (for RES, MRES, BREQ) or clock fall (for NMI and
IRQ7–IRQ0). If the setup times are not provided, recognition is delayed until the next
clock rise or fall.
786
CK
tRESf
tRESr
tRESS
tRESS
VIH
RES
VIH
VIL
VIL
tRESW
tMRESS
tMRESS
VIH
MRES
VIL
VIL
tMRESW
Figure 26.4 Reset Input Timing
CK
tNMIH
tNMIr,tNMIf
tNMIS
VIH
NMI
VIL
tIRQEH
IRQ edge
tIRQES
VIH
VIL
tIRQLS
IRQ level
Figure 26.5 Interrupt Signal Input Timing
787
CK
tIRQOD
tIRQOD
IRQOUT
Figure 26.6 Interrupt Signal Output Timing
CK
tBRQS
tBRQS
BREQ
(Input)
tBACKD1
BACK
(Output)
RD, RDWR,
RAS, CASxx,
CSn, WRxx
tBZD
tBZD
A21–A0,
D31–D0
Note:
During the bus-release period of a self-refresh, RAS, CASx, and RDWR are output.
Figure 26.7 Bus Right Release Timing
788
tBACKD2
26.3.3
Bus Timing
Table 26.6 Bus Timing (Conditions: VCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC
± 10%, AVref = 3.0*1 to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
Max Unit Figure
Address delay time
tAD
3*4
35
ns
26.8, 9, 11–16, 19
CS delay time 1
tCSD1
3*4
3*4
35
ns
26.8, 9, 19
35
ns
3*4
3*4
35
ns
35
ns
25
—
ns
CS delay time 2
tCSD2
Read strobe delay time 1
tRSD1
Read strobe delay time 2
Read data setup time
tRSD2
tRDS*5
Read data hold time
tRDH
0
—
ns
Write strobe delay time 1
tWSD1
35
ns
Write strobe delay time 2
tWSD2
3*4
3*5
35
ns
Write data delay time
tWDD
—
45
ns
Write data hold time
tWDH
0
25*3
ns
WAIT setup time
tWTS
15
—
ns
WAIT hold time
tWTH
0
—
ns
RAS delay time 1
tRASD1
35
ns
RAS delay time 2
tRASD2
3*4
3*4
35
ns
CAS delay time 1
tCASD1
3*4
3*4
35
ns
CAS delay time 2
tCASD2
35
ns
Read data access time
tACC*2
tOE*2
tcyc × (n+2) – 45
—
ns
tcyc × (n+1.5) – 40
—
ns
Access time from column
address
tAA*2
tcyc × (n+2) – 45
—
ns
Access time from RAS
tcyc × (n+RCD+2.5) – 40 —
ns
Access time from CAS
tRAC*2
tCAC*2
tcyc × (n+1) – 40
—
ns
Row address hold time
tRAH
tcyc × (RCD+0.5) – 15
—
ns
Row address setup time
tASR
0
—
ns
Data input setup time
tDS
tcyc × (m+0.5) – 27
—
ns
Data input hold time
tDH
20
—
ns
Access time from read strobe
26.8, 9, 11–16, 19
26.10,15, 19
26.11–18
26.8, 9
26.11–16
Notes: n is the wait number. m is 1 unless the DRAM write cycle wait number is 0, then m is 0.
RCD is the set value of the RCD bit of DCR.
*1 SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
*2 If the access time is satisfied, then the tRDS need not be satisfied.
*3 t WDH (max) is a reference value.
*4 The delay time min values are reference values (typ).
*5 t RDS is a reference value.
789
Table 26.7 Bus Timing (Conditions: VCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC
± 10%, AVref = 3.0*1 to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Figure
Write address setup time
t AS
0
—
ns
26.8, 9
Write address hold time
t WR
5
—
ns
26.8, 9, 19
Write data hold time
t WRH
0
—
ns
27
ns
27
ns
Read/write strobe delay time 1 t RWD1
3*
2
Read/write strobe delay time 2 t RWD2
3*
2
High-speed page mode CAS
t CP
t cyc –35
—
ns
26.16
RAS precharge time
t RP
t cyc × (TPC+1.5) –20 —
ns
26.11–16
CAS setup time
t CSR
10
—
ns
26.17, 18
t AHD1
3*
2
40
ns
26.19
t AHD2
3*
2
40
ns
Multiplex address delay time
t MAD
3*
2
35
ns
Multiplex address hold time
t MAH
0
—
ns
t DACKD1
3*
45
ns
AH delay time 1
AH delay time 2
DACK delay time 1
2
Notes: TPC is the set value of the TPC bit in DCR.
*1 SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V
*2 Min values for delay time are reference values (typ)
790
26.11–16
26.8, 9, 11–16,19
T1
T2
CK
tAD
A21–A0
tCSD1
tCSD2
CSn
tRSD1
tOE
tRSD2
RD
(During read)
tRDS
tACC
tRDH
D31–D0
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
tWR
WRxx
(During write)
tWRH
tAS
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, CSn, and RD.
Figure 26.8 Basic Cycle (No Waits)
791
T1
Tw
T2
CK
tAD
A21–A0
tCSD1
tCSD2
CSn
tRSD1
tRSD2
tOE
RD
(During read)
tACC
tRDH
tRDS
D31–D0
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
tWR
WRxx
(During write)
tAS
tWRH
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, CSn, and RD.
Figure 26.9 Basic Cycle (Software Waits)
792
T1
Tw
Tw
Two
T2
CK
A21–A0
CSn
RD
(During read)
D31–D0
(During read)
WRxx
(During write)
D31–D0
(During write)
tWTS
tWTH
tWTS
tWTH
WAIT
DACKn
Figure 26.10 Basic Cycle (2 Software Waits + Wait due to WAIT Signal)
793
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tc2
CK
tAD
tAD
Column address
Row address
A21–A0
tRASD1
tASR
tRAH
tRASD2
RAS
tRP
tCASD1
tCASD2
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
tCAC
(During read)
tRDS
tAA
tRDH
tRAC
D31– D0
(During read)
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tCASD2
tRWD1
tRWD2
RDWR
(During write)
tDS
tDH
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD1
tRSD2
RD
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 26.11 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, No Wait, TPC = 0, RCD = 0)
794
Tp
Tr
CK
Tc1
Column address
Row address
tRASD1
tASR
Tc2
tAD
tAD
A21–A0
RAS
Tcw1
tRAH
tRASD2
tRP
tCASD1
tCASD2
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tRDS
tAA
tRDH
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tRWD1
RDWR
(During write)
tRWD2
tDS
tDH
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD1
tRSD2
RD
(During read)
WRxx
(During write)
tWSD1
tWSD2
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 26.12 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, 1 Wait, TPC = 0, RCD = 0)
795
Tp
Tpw
Tr
CK
Trw
Tc1
tAD
Tcw1
Tc2
tAD
Row address
A21–A0
tRASD1
Column address
tRASD2
tRAH
tASR
RAS
Tcw2
tRP
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tRDS
tAA
tRDH
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tCASD2
tRWD1
tRWD2
RDWR
(During write)
tDS
tWDD
D31–D0
(During write)
tDH
tWDH
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tRSD2
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 26.13 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, 2 Waits, TPC = 1, RCD = 1)
Tp
Tpw
CK
Tr
Tc1
Tcw1
tASR
Tcw3
Tc2
tAD
tRASD1
Column address
tRASD2
tRAH
tRP
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tRDS
tAA
tRDH
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tCASD2
tRWD1
RDWR
(During write)
tWDD
D31–D0
(During write)
Tcw2
Row address
A21–A0
RAS
Trw
tAD
tRWD2
tDS
tDH
tWDH
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD2
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 26.14 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, 3 Waits, TPC = 1, RCD = 1)
796
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tcw1
Tcw2
Tcwo
Tc2
CK
tAD
Row address
A21–A0
tASR
RAS
tAD
tRASD1
Column address
tRAH
tRASD2
tRP
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During read)
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tAA
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tRDS
tCASD2
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tRWD1
RDWR
(During write)
tRDH
tRWD2
tDS
tDH
tWDD
tWDH
D31–D0
(During write)
tWTS
tWTH
tWTS
tWTH
WAIT
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tWSD1
WRxx
(During write)
tRSD2
tWSD2
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 26.15 DRAM Cycle (Normal Mode, 2 Waits + Wait due to WAIT Signal)
797
Tp
Tr
Tc1
Tc2
Tc1
Tc2
CK
tAD
tAD
Column address
Row address
A21–A0
tRASD1
tASR
RAS
Column address
tRAH
tRASD2
tRP
tCASD1
tCASD2
CASxx
(During read)
tCASD1
tCASD2
tCP
RDWR
(During read)
tCAC
tAA
tRDS
tCASD1
CASxx
(During write)
tRDH
tRDH
tRAC
D31–D0
(During read)
tCAC
tAA
tRDS
tCASD2
tCASD1
tCASD2
tCP
tRWD1
tRWD2
tRWD1
tRWD2
RDWR
(During write)
tDS
tDH
tDS
tWDD
D31–D0
(During write)
tWDH
tDACKD1
tDH
tWDD
tWDH
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
tRSD2
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tWSD1
tWSD2
tRSD1
tRSD2
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, RAS, and CAS.
Figure 26.16 DRAM Cycle (High-Speed Page Mode)
TRp
TRr1
TRr2
TRc
TRc
CK
tRASD1
RAS
tCASD1
CASxx
RDWR
Figure 26.17 CAS Before RAS Refresh (TRAS1 = 0, TRAS0 = 0)
798
tRASD2
tCSR
tCASD2
TRp
TRr1
TRr2
TRc
TRcc
CK
tRASD1
tRASD2
RAS
tCSR
tCASD1
tCASD2
CASxx
RDWR
Figure 26.18 Self Refresh
Ta1
CK
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
T1
TW
TWo
T2
tAD
A21–A0
tCSD1
tCSD2
CS3
tAHD1
tAHD2
AH
tRSD1
RD
(During read)
tMAD
D15–D0
(During read)
tRSD2
tMAH
tRDS
tRDH
Address
tWSD1
tWSD2
WRxx
(During write)
tWR
tMAD
D15–D0
(During write)
tMAH
tWDD
tWDH
Address
tWTS
tWTH tWTS
tWTH
tWRH
WAIT
tDACKD1
tDACKD1
DACKn
Note: tRDH is specified from fastest negate timing of A21–A0, CS3, and RD.
Figure 26.19 Address Data Multiplex I/O Space Cycle (1 Software Wait + External Wait)
799
26.3.4
Direct Memory Access Controller Timing
Table 26.8 Direct Memory Access Controller Timing (Conditions: VCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC
= 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0* to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a =
–20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
Max
Unit
Figure
DREQ0, DREQ1 setup time
t DRQS
35
—
ns
26.20
DREQ0, DREQ1 hold time
t DRQH
35
—
ns
DREQ0, DREQ1 pulse width
t DRQW
1.5
—
t cyc
26.21
DRAK output delay time
t DRAKD
—
35
ns
26.22
Note: * SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
CK
tDRQS
DREQ0
DREQ1
Level
tDRQS
tDRQH
DREQ0
DREQ1
Edge
tDRQS
DREQ0
DREQ1
Level clear
Figure 26.20 DREQ0 and DREQ1 Input Timing (1)
800
CK
DREQ0
DREQ1
Edge
tDRQW
Figure 26.21 DREQ0 and DREQ1 Input Timing (2)
CK
tDRAKD
tDRAKD
DRAKn
Figure 26.22 DRAK Output Delay Time
801
26.3.5
Multifunction Timer Pulse Unit Timing
Table 26.9 Multifunction Timer Pulse Unit Timing (Conditions:VCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC =
3.0 * to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0* to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a =
–20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
Max
Unit
Figure
Output compare output delay time
t TOCD
—
100
ns
26.23
Input capture input setup time
t TICS
100
—
ns
Timer input setup time
t TCKS
100
—
ns
Timer clock pulse width (single edge
specification)
t TCKWH/L
1.5
—
t cyc
Timer clock pulse width (both edges
specified)
t TCKWH/L
2.5
—
t cyc
Timer clock pulse width (phase
measurement mode)
t TCKWH/L
2.5
—
t cyc
26.24
Note: * SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
CK
tTOCD
Output
compare output
tTICS
Input
capture input
Figure 26.23 MTU I/O Timing
CK
tTCKS
tTCKS
TCLKA
to TCLKD
tTCKWL
tTCKWH
Figure 26.24 MTU Clock Input Timing
802
26.3.6
I/O Port Timing
Table 26.10 I/O Port Timing (Conditions:VCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC =
VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0* to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
Max
Unit
Figure
Port output data delay time
t PWD
—
100
ns
26.25
Port input hold time
t PRH
100
—
ns
Port input setup time
t PRS
100
—
ns
Note: * SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
T1
T2
CK
tPRS
tPRH
Port (Read)
tPWD
Port (Write)
Figure 26.25 I/O Port I/O Timing
803
26.3.7
Watchdog Timer Timing
Table 26.11 Watchdog Timer Timing (Conditions:VCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0* to 3.6V,
AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0* to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
WDTOVF delay time
t WOVD
—
Max
Unit
Figure
100
ns
26.26
Note: * SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
CK
tWOVD
tWOVD
WDTOVF
Figure 26.26 Watchdog Timer Timing
804
26.3.8
Serial Communication Interface Timing
Table 26.12 Serial Communication Interface Timing (Conditions:VCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC =
3.0 * to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0* to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20
to +75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
Max
Unit
Figure
Input clock cycle
t scyc
4
—
t cyc
26.27
Input clock cycle (clock sync)
t scyc
6
—
t cyc
Input clock pulse width
t sckw
0.5
0.6
t scyc
Input clock rise time
t sckr
—
1.5
t cyc
Input clock fall time
t sckf
—
1.5
t cyc
Transmit data delay time (clock sync)
t TXD
—
100
ns
Receive data setup time (clock sync)
t RXS
100
—
ns
Receive data hold time (clock sync)
t RXH
100
—
ns
26.28
Note: * SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
tsckr
tsckw
tsckf
SCK0, SCK1
tscyc
Figure 26.27 Input Clock Timing
tscyc
SCK0, SCK1
tTXD
TXD0, TXD1
(Transmit data)
tRXS
tRXH
RXD0, RXD1
(Receive data)
Figure 26.28 SCI I/O Timing (Clock Sync Mode)
805
26.3.9
High-speed A/D Converter Timing (excluding A mask)
Table 26.13 High-speed A/D Converter Timing (Conditions:VCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0*
to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0* to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to
+75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
External trigger input pulse width
t TRGW
External trigger input start delay time
A/D conversion start delay time
CKS = 0
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
2
—
—
t cyc
26.29
t TRGS
50
—
—
ns
tD
1.5
1.5
1.5
t cyc
1.5
1.5
1.5
20
20
20
40
40
40
42.5
42.5
42.5
82.5
82.5
82.5
CKS = 1
Input sampling time
CKS = 0
t SPL
CKS = 1
A/D conversion time
CKS = 0
t CONV
CKS = 1
Note: * SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
1 state
CK
tTRGW
tTRGW
ADTRG input
tTRGS
ADST
Figure 26.29 External Trigger Input Timing
806
26.30
φ
Address
Write signal
ADST
Sampling timing
ADF
tD
tSPL
tCP
tCONV
tD
: A/D conversion start delay time
tSPL : Input sampling time
tCONV : A/D conversion time
tCP : Operation time
Figure 26.30 Analog Conversion Timing
807
26.3.10 Mid-speed Converter Timing (A mask)
Table 26.14 Mid-speed A/D Converter Timing (Conditions:VCC = 3.0* to 3.6V, AVCC = 3.0*
to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0* to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to
+75°C)
Item
Symbol Min
External trigger input pulse width
t TRGW
External trigger input start delay time
A/D conversion start delay time
CKS = 0
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
2
—
—
t cyc
26.31
t TRGS
50
—
—
ns
tD
10
—
17
t cyc
6
—
9
—
64
—
—
32
—
259
—
266
131
—
134
CKS = 1
Input sampling time
CKS = 0
t SPL
CKS = 1
A/D conversion time
CKS = 0
t CONV
CKS = 1
Note: * SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
1 state
CK
tTRGW
tTRGW
ADTRG input
tTRGS
ADST
Figure 26.31 External Trigger Input Timing
808
26.32
(1)
CK
(2)
Address
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
tD
t SPL
t CONV
Legend:
(1)
(2)
tD
t SPL
t CONV
: ADCSR write cycle
: ADCSR address
: A/D conversion start delay time
: Input sampling time
: A/D conversion time
Figure 26.32 Analog Conversion Timing
809
26.3.11 Measurement Conditions for AC Characteristic
• Input reference levels:
 High level: 2.2 V
 Low level: 0.8 V
• Output reference levels:
 High level: 2.0 V
 Low level: 0.8 V
IOL
LSI
output pin
DUT output
CL
V Vref
IOH
Note: CL is set with the following pins, including the total capacitance of the
measurement equipment etc:
30 pF: CK, RAS, CASxx, RDWR, CS0–CS3, AH, BREQ, BACK, DACK0,
DACK1, and IRQOUT
50 pF: A21–A0, D31–D0, RD, WRxx
70 pF: Port output and peripheral module output pins other than the above.
IOL, IOH: See table 26.3, Permitted Output Current Values.
Figure 26.33 Output Load Circuit
810
26.4
A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 26.15 A/D Converter Characteristics (excluding A mask) (Conditions:VCC = 3.0*1 to
3.6V, AVCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0*1 to AVCC , VSS =
AVSS = 0V, T a = –20 to +75°C)
16.7MHz
Item
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Resolution
10
10
10
bit
Conversion time (when CKS = 1)
—
—
5
µs
Analog input capacity
—
—
20
pF
Permission signal source impedance
Non-linearity error* 2
—
—
1
kΩ
—
—
± 15
LSB
Offset error*2
—
—
± 15
LSB
Full scale error*
Quantize error * 2
—
—
± 15
LSB
—
—
± 0.5
LSB
Absolute error
—
—
± 31
LSB
2
Notes: *1 SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
*2 Reference values
Table 26.16 A/D Converter Characteristics (A mask) (Conditions:VCC = 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC
= 3.0*1 to 3.6V, AVCC = VCC ± 10%, AVref = 3.0*1 to AVCC , VSS = AVSS = 0V, T a =
–20 to +75°C)
16.7MHz
Item
min
typ
max
Unit
Resolution
10
10
10
bit
Conversion time (when CKS = 0)
—
—
16.0
µs
Analog input capacity
—
—
20
pF
Permission signal source impedance
—
—
1
kΩ
Non-linearity error* 2
—
—
±4
LSB
Offset error*2
—
—
±4
LSB
Full scale error*2
—
—
±4
LSB
Quantize error * 2
—
—
±0.5
LSB
Absolute error
—
—
±6
LSB
Notes: *1 SH7042/43 ZTAT (excluding A mask) are 3.2V.
*2 Reference values
811
812
Appendix A On-Chip Supporting Module Registers
A.1
Addresses
Table A.1
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses
Bit Names
Address
Register
Abbr.
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
—
DTMR
SM1
SM0
DM1
DM0
MD1
MD0
SZ1
SZ0
DTC
DTS
CHNE
DISEL
NMIM
—
—
—
—
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DTSAR
—
DTDAR
—
DTIAR
—
DTCRA
—
DTCRB
H'FFFF81A0 SMR0
SCI
H'FFFF81A1 BRR0
H'FFFF81A2 SCR0
H'FFFF81A3 TDR0
H'FFFF81A4 SSR0
H'FFFF81A5 RDR0
H'FFFF81A6 —
to
H'FFFF81AF
813
Table A.1
Address
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Register
Abbr.
Bit Names
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
SCI
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
H'FFFF81B6 —
to
H'FFFF81FF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8200 TCR3
CCLR2
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
H'FFFF8201 TCR4
CCLR2
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
H'FFFF8202 TMDR3
—
—
BFB
BFA
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
H'FFFF8203 TMDR4
—
—
BFB
BFA
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
H'FFFF8204 TIOR3H
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
H'FFFF8205 TIOR3L
IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
H'FFFF8206 TIOR4H
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
H'FFFF8207 TIOR4L
IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
H'FFFF8208 TIER3
TTGE
—
—
TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
H'FFFF8209 TIER4
TTGE
—
—
TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
H'FFFF81B0 SMR1
H'FFFF81B1 BRR1
H'FFFF81B2 SCR1
H'FFFF81B3 TDR1
H'FFFF81B4 SSR1
H'FFFF81B5 RDR1
H'FFFF820A TOER
—
—
OE4D
OE4C
OE3D
OE4B
OE4A
OE3B
H'FFFF820B TOCR
—
PSYE
—
—
—
—
OLSN
OLSP
H'FFFF820C —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF820D TGCR
—
BDC
N
P
FB
WF
VF
UF
H'FFFF820E —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF820F —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8210 TCNT3
H'FFFF8211
H'FFFF8212 TCNT4
H'FFFF8213
H'FFFF8214 TCDR
H'FFFF8215
H'FFFF8216 TDDR
H'FFFF8217
H'FFFF8218 TGR3A
H'FFFF8219
814
MTU
Table A.1
Address
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Register
Abbr.
Bit Names
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
H'FFFF821A TGR3B
Module
MTU
H'FFFF821B
H'FFFF821C TGR4A
H'FFFF821D
H'FFFF821E TGR4B
H'FFFF821F
H'FFFF8220 TCNTS
H'FFFF8221
H'FFFF8222 TCBR
H'FFFF8223
H'FFFF8224 TGR3C
H'FFFF8225
H'FFFF8226 TGR3D
H'FFFF8227
H'FFFF8228 TGR4C
H'FFFF8229
H'FFFF822A TGR4D
H'FFFF822B
H'FFFF822C TSR3
TCFD
—
—
TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
H'FFFF822D TSR4
TCFD
—
—
TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
TGFA
TGFA
H'FFFF822E —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF822F —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8230 —
to
H'FFFF823F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8240 TSTR
CST4
CST3
—
—
—
CST2
CST1
CST0
H'FFFF8241 TSYR
SYNC4
SYNC3
—
—
—
SYNC2
SYNC1
SYNC0
H'FFFF8242 —
to
H'FFFF825F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8260 TCR0
CCLR2
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
H'FFFF8261 TMDR0
—
—
BFB
BFA
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
H'FFFF8262 TIOR0H
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
H'FFFF8263 TIOR0L
IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
H'FFFF8264 TIER0
TTGE
—
—
TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
H'FFFF8265 TSR0
—
—
—
TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
TGFA
H'FFFF8266 TCNT0
H'FFFF8267
815
Table A.1
Address
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Register
Abbr.
Bit Names
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
H'FFFF8268 TGR0A
H'FFFF8269
H'FFFF826A TGR0B
H'FFFF826B
H'FFFF826C TGR0C
H'FFFF826D
H'FFFF826E TGR0D
H'FFFF826F
H'FFFF8270 —
to
H'FFFF827F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8280 TCR1
—
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
H'FFFF8281 TMDR1
—
—
—
—
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
H'FFFF8282 TIOR1
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
H'FFFF8283 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8284 TIER1
TTGE
—
TCIEU
TCIEV
—
—
TGIEB
TGIEA
H'FFFF8285 TSR1
TCFD
—
TCFU
TCFV
—
—
TGFB
TGFA
H'FFFF828C —
to
H'FFFF829F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF82A0 TCR2
—
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
H'FFFF82A1 TMDR2
—
—
—
—
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
H'FFFF82A2 TIOR2
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
H'FFFF82A3 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8286 TCNT1
H'FFFF8287
H'FFFF8288 TGR1A
H'FFFF8289
H'FFFF828A TGR1B
H'FFFF828B
H'FFFF82A4 TIER2
TTGE
—
TCIEU
TCIEV
—
—
TGIEB
TGIEA
H'FFFF82A5 TSR2
TCFD
—
TCFU
TCFV
—
—
TGFB
TGFA
H'FFFF82A6 TCNT2
H'FFFF82A7
H'FFFF82A8 TGR2A
H'FFFF82A9
H'FFFF82AA TGR2B
H'FFFF82AB
816
Module
MTU
Table A.1
Address
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Register
Abbr.
H'FFFF82AC —
to
H'FFFF8347
Bit Names
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MTU
H'FFFF8348 IPRA
INTC
H'FFFF8349
H'FFFF834A IPRB
H'FFFF834B
H'FFFF834C IPRC
H'FFFF834D
H'FFFF834E IPRD
H'FFFF834F
H'FFFF8350 IPRE
H'FFFF8351
H'FFFF8352 IPRF
H'FFFF8353
H'FFFF8354 IPRG
H'FFFF8355
H'FFFF8356 IPRH
H'FFFF8357
H'FFFF8358 ICR
NMIL
—
—
—
—
—
—
NMIE
H'FFFF8359
IRQ0S
IRQ1S
IRQ2S
IRQ3S
IRQ4S
IRQ5S
IRQ6S
IRQ7S
H'FFFF835A ISR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF835B
IRQ0F
IRQ1F
IRQ2F
IRQ3F
IRQ4F
IRQ5F
IRQ6F
IRQ7F
H'FFFF835C —
to
H'FFFF837F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8380 PADRH
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8381
PA23DR
PA22DR
PA21DR
PA20DR
PA19DR
PA18DR
PA17DR
PA16DR
H'FFFF8382 PADRL
PA15DR
PA14DR
PA13DR
PA12DR
PA11DR
PA10DR
PA9DR
PA8DR
H'FFFF8383
PA7DR
PA6DR
PA5DR
PA4DR
PA3DR
PA2DR
PA1DR
PA0DR
H'FFFF8384 PAIORH
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8385
PA23IOR PA22IOR PA21IOR PA20IOR PA19IOR PA18IOR PA17IOR PA16IOR
H'FFFF8386 PAIORL
PA15IOR PA14IOR PA13IOR PA12IOR PA11IOR PA10IOR PA9IOR
PA8IOR
H'FFFF8387
PA7IOR
PA6IOR
PA5IOR
PA4IOR
PA3IOR
PA0IOR
H'FFFF8388 PACRH
—
PA23MD
—
PA22MD
—
PA21MD
—
PA20MD
H'FFFF8389
PA19MD1 PA19MD0 PA18MD1 PA18MD0 —
PA17MD
—
PA16MD
PA2IOR
PA1IOR
I/O
PFC
817
Table A.1
Address
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Register
Abbr.
Bit Names
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
H'FFFF838A —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PFC
H'FFFF838B —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF838C PACRL1
—
PA15MD
—
PA14MD
—
PA13MD
—
PA12MD
H'FFFF838D
—
PA11MD
—
PA10MD
PA9MD1
PA9MD0
PA8MD1
PA8MD0
H'FFFF838E PACRL2
PA7MD1
PA7MD0
PA6MD1
PA6MD0
PA5MD1
PA5MD0
—
PA4MD
H'FFFF838F
—
PA3MD
PA2MD1
PA2MD0
—
PA1MD
—
PA0MD
H'FFFF8390 PBDR
—
—
—
—
—
—
PB9DR
PB8DR
H'FFFF8391
PB7DR
PB6DR
PB5DR
PB4DR
PB3DR
PB2DR
PB1DR
PB0DR
H'FFFF8392 PCDR
PC15DR
PC14DR
PC13DR
PC12DR
PC11DR
PC10DR
PC9DR
PC8DR
H'FFFF8393
PC7DR
PC6DR
PC5DR
PC4DR
PC3DR
PC2DR
PC1DR
PC0DR
I/O
H'FFFF8394 PBIOR
—
—
—
—
—
—
PB9IOR
PB8IOR
H'FFFF8395
PB7IOR
PB6IOR
PB5IOR
PB4IOR
PB3IOR
PB2IOR
PB1IOR
PB0IOR
H'FFFF8396 PCIOR
PC15IOR PC14IOR PC13IOR PC12IOR PC11IOR PC10IOR PC9IOR
PC8IOR
H'FFFF8397
PC7IOR
PC6IOR
PC5IOR
PC4IOR
PC0IOR
H'FFFF8398 PBCR1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8399
—
—
—
—
PB9MD1
PB9MD0
PB8MD1
PB8MD0
H'FFFF839A PBCR2
PB7MD1
PB7MD0
PB6MD1
PB6MD0
PB5MD1
PB5MD0
PB4MD1
PB4MD0
H'FFFF839B
PB3MD1
PB3MD0
PB2MD1
PB2MD0
—
PB1MD
—
PB0MD
H'FFFF839C PCCR
PC15MD
PC14MD
PC13MD
PC12MD
PC11MD
PC10MD
PC9MD
PC8MD
H'FFFF839D
PC7MD
PC6MD
PC5MD
PC4MD
PC3MD
PC2MD
PC1MD
PC0MD
H'FFFF839E —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF839F —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83A0 PDDRH
PD31DR
PD30DR
PD29DR
PD28DR
PD27DR
PD26DR
PD25DR
PD24DR
H'FFFF83A1
PD23DR
PD22DR
PD21DR
PD20DR
PD19DR
PD18DR
PD17DR
PD16DR
H'FFFF83A2 PDDRL
PD15DR
PD14DR
PD13DR
PD12DR
PD11DR
PD10DR
PD9DR
PD8DR
H'FFFF83A3
PD7DR
PD6DR
PD5DR
PD4DR
PD3DR
PD2DR
PD1DR
PD0DR
H'FFFF83A4 PDIORH
PD31IOR PD30IOR PD29IOR PD28IOR PD27IOR PD26IOR PD25IOR PD24IOR PFC
H'FFFF83A5
PD23IOR PD22IOR PD21IOR PD20IOR PD19IOR PD18IOR PD17IOR PD16IOR
H'FFFF83A6 PDIORL
PD15IOR PD14IOR PD13IOR PD12IOR PD11IOR PD10IOR PD9IOR
PD8IOR
H'FFFF83A7
PD7IOR
PD0IOR
H'FFFF83A8 PDCRH1
PD31MD1 PD31MD0 PD30MD1 PD30MD0 PD29MD1 PD29MD0 PD28MD1 PD28MD0
H'FFFF83A9
PD27MD1 PD27MD0 PD26MD1 PD26MD0 PD25MD1 PD25MD0 PD24MD1 PD24MD0
H'FFFF83AA PDCRH2
PD23MD1 PD23MD0 PD22MD1 PD22MD0 PD21MD1 PD21MD0 PD20MD1 PD20MD0
H'FFFF83AB
PD19MD1 PD19MD0 PD18MD1 PD18MD0 PD17MD1 PD17MD0 PD16MD1 PD16MD0
818
PD6IOR
PD5IOR
PD4IOR
PC3IOR
PD3IOR
PC2IOR
PD2IOR
PC1IOR
PD1IOR
PFC
I/O
Table A.1
Address
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Register
Abbr.
Bit Names
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
H'FFFF83AC PDCRL
PD15MD
PD14MD
PD13MD
PD12MD
PD11MD
PD10MD
PD9MD
PD8MD
PFC
H'FFFF83AD
PD7MD
PD6MD
PD5MD
PD4MD
PD3MD
PD2MD
PD1MD
PD0MD
H'FFFF83AE —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83AF —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83B0 PEDR
PE15DR
PE14DR
PE13DR
PE12DR
PE11DR
PE10DR
PE9DR
PE8DR
H'FFFF83B1
PE7DR
PE6DR
PE5DR
PE4DR
PE3DR
PE2DR
PE1DR
PE0DR
H'FFFF83B2 PFDR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83B3
PF7DR
PF6DR
PF5DR
PF4DR
PF3DR
PF2DR
PF1DR
PF0DR
I/O
H'FFFF83B4 PEIOR
PE15IOR PE14IOR PE13IOR PE12IOR PE11IOR PE10IOR PE9IOR
PE8IOR
H'FFFF83B5
PE7IOR
PE6IOR
PE5IOR
PE4IOR
PE3IOR
PE2IOR
PE1IOR
PE0IOR
H'FFFF83B6 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83B7 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83B8 PECR1
PE15MD1 PE15MD0 PE14MD1 PE14MD0 PE13MD1 PE13MD0 —
PE12MD
H'FFFF83B9
—
PE11MD
PE8MD
H'FFFF83BA PECR2
—
PE7MD
—
PE6MD
—
PE5MD
—
PE4MD
H'FFFF83BB
PE3MD1
PE3MD0
PE2MD1
PE2MD0
PE1MD1
PE1MD0
PE0MD1
PE0MD0
H'FFFF83BC —
to
H'FFFF83BF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83C0 ICSR
POE3F
POE2F
POE1F
POE0F
—
—
—
PIE
MTU
H'FFFF83C1
POE3M1
POE3M0
POE2M1
POE2M0
POE1M1
POE1M0
POE0M1
POE0M0
H'FFFF83C2 OCSR
OSF
—
—
—
—
—
OCE
OIE
H'FFFF83C3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83C4 —
to
H'FFFF83C7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83C8 IFCR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PFC
H'FFFF83C9
—
—
—
—
IRQMD3
IRQMD2
IRQMD1
IRQMD0
H'FFFF83CA —
to
H'FFFF83CF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83D0 CMSTR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
CMT
H'FFFF83D1
—
—
—
—
—
—
STR1
STR0
—
PE10MD
—
PE9MD
—
H'FFFF83D2 CMCSR0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83D3
CMF
CMIE
—
—
—
—
CKS1
CKS0
PFC
H'FFFF83D4 CMCNT0
H'FFFF83D5
819
Table A.1
Address
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Register
Abbr.
Bit Names
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
H'FFFF83D6 CMCOR0
Module
CMT
H'FFFF83D7
H'FFFF83D8 CMCSR1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83D9
CMF
CMIE
—
—
—
—
CKS1
CKS0
H'FFFF83DE —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83DF —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83E0 ADCSR
ADF
ADIE
ADST
CKS
GRP
CH2
CH1
CH0
A/D
H'FFFF83E1 ADCR
—
PWR
TRGS1
TRGS0
SCAN
DSMP
BUFE1
BUFE0
H'FFFF83E2 —
to
H'FFFF83EF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(High
speed)
(Excl. A
mask)
H'FFFF83F0 ADDRA
—
—
—
—
—
—
AD9
AD8
H'FFFF83F1
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
H'FFFF83F2 ADDRB
—
—
—
—
—
—
AD9
AD8
H'FFFF83F3
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
H'FFFF83F4 ADDRC
—
—
—
—
—
—
AD9
AD8
H'FFFF83F5
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
H'FFFF83F6 ADDRD
—
—
—
—
—
—
AD9
AD8
H'FFFF83F7
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
H'FFFF83F8 ADDRE
—
—
—
—
—
—
AD9
AD8
H'FFFF83F9
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
H'FFFF83FA ADDRF
—
—
—
—
—
—
AD9
AD8
H'FFFF83FB
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
H'FFFF83FC ADDRG
—
—
—
—
—
—
AD9
AD8
H'FFFF83FD
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
H'FFFF83FE ADDRH
—
—
—
—
—
—
AD9
AD8
H'FFFF83FF
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
H'FFFF8400 ADDRA0
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
A/D(Mid-
H'FFFF8401
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
speed)
H'FFFF8402 ADDRB0
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
(A mask
H'FFFF8403
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
only)
H'FFFF8404 ADDRC0
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
H'FFFF8405
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF83DA CMCNT1
H'FFFF83DB
H'FFFF83DC CMCOR1
H'FFFF83DD
820
Table A.1
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Bit Names
Register
Abbr.
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
H'FFFF8406 ADDRD0
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
A/D(Mid-
H'FFFF8407
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
speed)
H'FFFF8408 ADDRA1
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
(A mask
H'FFFF8409
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
only)
H'FFFF840A ADDRB1
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
H'FFFF840B
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF840C ADDRC1
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
H'FFFF840D
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF840E ADDRD1
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
H'FFFF840F
AD1
AD0
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8410 ADCSR0
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CKS
CH2
CH1
CH0
H'FFFF8411 ADCSR1
ADF
ADIE
ADST
SCAN
CKS
CH2
CH1
CH0
H'FFFF8412 AADCR0
TRGE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8413 AADCR1
TRGE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8414 —
to
H'FFFF857F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8580 FLMCR1
FWE
SWE
ESU1
PSU1
EV1
PV1
E1
P1
FLASH
H'FFFF8581 FLMCR2
FLER
—
ESU2
PSU2
EV2
PV2
E2
P2
(F-ZTAT
Address
H'FFFF8582 EBR1
—
—
—
—
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
version-
H'FFFF8583 EBR2
EB11
EB10
EB9
EB8
EB7
EB6
EB5
EB4
only)
H'FFFF8584 —
to
H'FFFF859F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8600 UBARH
UBA31
UBA30
UBA29
UBA28
UBA27
UBA26
UBA25
UBA24
H'FFFF8601
UBA23
UBA22
UBA21
UBA20
UBA19
UBA18
UBA17
UBA16
H'FFFF8602 UBARL
UBA15
UBA14
UBA13
UBA12
UBA11
UBA10
UBA9
UBA8
H'FFFF8603
UBA7
UBA6
UBA5
UBA4
UBA3
UBA2
UBA1
UBA0
H'FFFF8604 UBAMRH UBM31
UBM30
UBM29
UBM28
UBM27
UBM26
UBM25
UBM24
H'FFFF8605
UBM23
UBM22
UBM21
UBM20
UBM19
UBM18
UBM17
UBM16
H'FFFF8606 UBAMRL
UBM15
UBM14
UBM13
UBM12
UBM11
UBM10
UBM9
UBM8
H'FFFF8607
UBM7
UBM6
UBM5
UBM4
UBM3
UBM2
UBM1
UBM0
H'FFFF8608 UBBR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8609
CP1
CP0
ID1
ID0
RW1
RW0
SZ1
SZ0
H'FFFF860A —
to
H'FFFF860F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8610 TCSR
OVF
WT/IT
TME
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
UBC
WDT
821
Table A.1
Address
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Register
Abbr.
Bit Names
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
H'FFFF8610 TCNT * 1
Module
WDT
H'FFFF8611 TCNT * 2
H'FFFF8612 RSTCSR * 1 WOVF
RSTE
RSTS
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8613 RSTCSR * 2 WOVF
RSTE
RSTS
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8614 SBYCR
SBY
HIZ
—
—
—
—
—
—
Powerdown
state
H'FFFF8615 —
to
H'FFFF861F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BSC
H'FFFF8620 BCR1
—
—
MTURWE —
—
—
—
IOE
H'FFFF8621
A3LG
A2LG
A1LG
A3SZ
A2SZ
A1SZ
A0SZ
H'FFFF8622 BCR2
IW31
IW30
IW21
IW20
IW11
IW10
IW01
IW00
H'FFFF8623
CW3
CW2
CW1
CW0
SW3
SW2
SW1
SW0
H'FFFF8624 WCR1
W33
W32
W31
W30
W23
W22
W21
W20
H'FFFF8625
W13
W12
W11
W10
W03
W02
W01
W00
A0LG
H'FFFF8626 WCR2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF8627
—
—
DDW1
DDW0
DSW3
DSW2
DSW1
DSW0
H'FFFF8628 RAMER
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FLASH
(F-ZTAT
H'FFFF8629
—
—
—
—
—
RAMS
RAM1
RAM0
version
H'FFFF862A DCR
TPC
RCD
TRAS1
TRAS0
DWW1
DWW0
DWR1
DWR0
BSC
only)
H'FFFF862B
DIW
—
BE
RASD
SZ1
SZ0
AMX1
AMX0
H'FFFF862C RTCSR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF862D
—
CMF
CMIE
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
RFSH
RMD
H'FFFF862E RTCNT
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF862F
H'FFFF8630 RTCOR
H'FFFF8631
Notes: *1 Write address.
*2 Read address. For details, see section 13.2.4, Register Access, in section 13,
Watchdog Timer (WDT).
822
Table A.1
Address
On-Chip I/O Register Addresses (cont)
Register
Abbr.
Bit Names
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
H'FFFF8632 —
to
H'FFFF86AF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BSC
H'FFFF86B0 DMAOR
—
—
—
—
—
—
PR1
PR0
DMAC
H'FFFF86B1
—
—
—
—
—
AE
NMIF
DME
H'FFFF86B2 —
to
H'FFFF86BF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF86C8 DMATCR0 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF86C0 SAR0
H'FFFF86C1
H'FFFF86C2
H'FFFF86C3
H'FFFF86C4 DAR0
H'FFFF86C5
H'FFFF86C6
H'FFFF86C7
H'FFFF86C9
H'FFFF86CA
H'FFFF86CB
H'FFFF86CC CHCR0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF86CD
—
—
—
DI
RO
RL
AM
AL
H'FFFF86CE
DM1
DM0
SM1
SM0
RS3
RS2
RS1
RS0
H'FFFF86CF
—
DS
TM
TS1
TS0
IE
TE
DE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FFFF86D0 SAR1
H'FFFF86D1
H'FFFF86D2
H'FFFF86D3
H'FFFF86D4 DAR1
H'FFFF86D5
H'FFFF8